JP6664849B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that displays a plurality of symbols on a display capable of displaying an image when a start winning prize is generated, and provides a predetermined game value when the stop result of the symbol becomes a predetermined mode. Have been. In such a gaming machine, various effect displays are performed in relation to the variable display of symbols (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-202538

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a possibility that the gaming interest may be reduced due to the continuous play of monotonous games.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1, a lottery is performed based on establishment of a starting condition, and when the result of the lottery is a win, the player is more advantageous than the normal game state. A gaming machine controllable to a specific gaming state,
Effect display means capable of displaying effect information,
Display control means for performing a variable effect by controlling the display of the effect display means,
Light emission control means for controlling the light emission means in relation to the fluctuation effect,
Brightness adjusting means capable of adjusting the brightness of the light emitting means based on the operation of the operating means,
When the operating means is operated during the fluctuation effect, the light whose emission is controlled by the brightness adjusted by the brightness adjusting means according to the operation is made visible at the operation timing of the operating means. ,
When the operating means is operated during the fluctuation effect, the light whose emission is controlled by the brightness adjusted by the brightness adjusting means according to the operation is not made visible at the operation timing of the operating means. A timing during the fluctuation effect in which the operation of the operation means is performed, and a case in which the visual recognition can be performed at a timing later than the operation timing.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main frame was opened to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine, and the door frame was opened to the main frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main-body frame. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11. It is a block diagram showing the outline of peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and sound control unit. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 16 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 15. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 18 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 17. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting mouth winning. It is a figure showing an example of a control data table at the time of a starting opening winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the area which stores the random number for special symbols. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to notice permission judgment data, (A) is an example of notice permission judgment data address table, (B) is an example of notice permission judgment data. It is a figure which shows the table relevant to the special symbol reservation ball number command, (A) is an example of a special symbol reservation ball number command address table, (B) is an example of a special symbol reservation ball number designation command creation table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern selection judging processing. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of a variation pattern selection determination process in FIG. 29. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation type determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design change waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the special symbol change waiting process of FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol / flag setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design change pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a gate passage. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol prefetching process. It is a figure showing an example of a general-purpose pre-reading judgment prohibition period. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol hit determination process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a module configuration of a main control program. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control section power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reception command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration design change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of decoration design change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a story reach setting process. It is a figure showing an example of an effect selection pattern in story reach. It is a figure which shows the change of the random number extraction range in time series order. It is a flow chart which shows an example of story reach notice setting processing. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the notice determination table of story reach, (B) It is a figure which shows an example of the notice determination table of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo continuous fluctuation control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern table for selecting the scenario in the case of a pseudo continuous change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pseudo consecutive notice setting process. It is a figure explaining an example of a production of a pseudo continuous change. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of pseudo continuous change. It is a figure explaining the modification of the timing of control of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prohibition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special figure pre-reading effect control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of a normal prefetch effect. It is a figure showing an example of a continuous look-ahead production lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous pre-reading effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect form selection table for selecting the form (specific effect) of a continuous look-ahead effect. It is a figure showing an example of a screen transition of a continuous look-ahead effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a general-purpose look-ahead production process. It is a figure showing an example of a general-purpose look-ahead production. 16 is an example of a table for explaining details of a command related to special figure pre-reading among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and is a command modification of “8-10. Other” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of a table showing an example. 16 is an example of a table for explaining details of a command related to special figure pre-reading among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and is a command modification of “8-10. Other” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of a table showing an example. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process according to a modification. (A) is an example of a simplified flowchart in which the variation pattern selection determination processing (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the variation distribution table described above, and (B) is a reach according to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. It is an example of an execution possibility table. (A) is an example of a table showing conditions under which the main control board 4100 of the modified example prohibits prefetching, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting prefetching at the time of state transition. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to a first modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a prefetch inhibition count process in a received command analysis process according to a first modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to a second modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an input unknown flag setting process in a received command analysis process according to a second modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an unknown count process in a received command analysis process according to a second modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special figure prefetch execution determination process in a received command analysis process according to a second modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening display process. It is a figure showing an example of a production transition in a probable change time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect mode shift process performed by the peripheral control MPU 450a. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure pre-reading effect control processing including the switching control of the special figure pre-reading effect. It is a table for selecting a scenario of a special figure look-ahead effect (reserved look-ahead effect). It is a table for selecting a scenario of a special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure look-ahead effect control process which includes the switching control of the special figure look-ahead effect, and can execute the reserved look-ahead effect and the background look-ahead effect in parallel. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect). It is a figure which shows the example of an effect which switches the special figure pre-reading effect (background pre-reading effect) currently being performed to the special figure pre-reading effect based on the newly generated start memory. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in which the held prefetching effect and the background prefetching effect are executed in parallel, and the running background prefetching effect is switched to the background prefetching effect based on the newly generated start memory. It is a figure showing an example of the kind of variation pattern of modification 3 of this embodiment. (A) It is a figure for explaining the relation between the fluctuation pattern of the modification 3 of this embodiment, and a level, and (B) is for explaining the relation between the fluctuation pattern of the modification 3 of this embodiment, and a game state. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a table which sets up the propriety of execution of a notice effect for every level of the modification 3 of this embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect setting process of Modification 3. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal notice setting process according to a third modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for selecting the content of the notice effect of the modification 3 of this embodiment, (A) is at the time of the first half fluctuation | variation, (B) is after a reach or at the time of a pseudo continuous occurrence, (C) is The first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-sequence, (D) shows the set value of the production flag indicating the lottery probability of the announcement effect in the latter half of the development after the reach or the latter half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-sequence. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a story reach announcement setting process according to a third modification. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the notice determination table of the story reach of the modification 3, and (B) is a figure which shows an example of the notice determination table of the pseudo continuous change of the modification 3. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pseudo consecutive announcement setting process according to a third modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a special figure prefetching effect control process according to a third modification. It is a figure showing an example of the look-ahead effect lottery table of the modification 3. It is an example of the kind (pseudo-run type) of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation in the fourth modification of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the number of pseudo-runs is zero. It is an example of the type (pseudo-run type) of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation in Modification Example 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where the number of pseudo-runs is four. It is a figure explaining an example of the kind of design group in modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the definition of the symbol group in the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure in the modification 4 of this embodiment which shows an example of the reliability level of the look-ahead notice effect. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of a prize in Modification Example 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the symbol group 1 has a pseudo repeated number of times of zero. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of a prize in the modification 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the symbol group 1 has four pseudo consecutive times. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of a prize in Modification 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where symbol group 2 has a pseudo-repetition count of zero. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of a prize in Modification 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the symbol group 2 has a pseudo consecutive number of times of four. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of a prize in Modification Example 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the symbol group 3 has a pseudo repeated number of times of zero. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of a prize in Modification 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the symbol group 3 has a pseudo consecutive number of times of four. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of Modification Example 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where there is no pseudo-run and the number of fluctuable look-aheads is zero. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the fourth modification of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where there are no pseudo-runs and the number of possible prefetching changes is four. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the pseudo-run type is a Story pseudo-run and the number of prefetchable variations is zero. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the fourth modification of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the pseudo-run type is a Story pseudo-run and the number of possible pre-read variations is four. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the pseudo run type is a deadly move pseudo run and the number of prefetchable variations is 0. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the pseudo run type is a deadly technique pseudo run and the number of prefetchable variations is four. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of Modification Example 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the pseudo run type is a hyper pseudo run and the number of prefetchable variations is zero. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of modification 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the pseudo run type is a hyper pseudo run and the number of prefetchable variations is four. It is an example of the lottery at the time of the pre-reading prize of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is a diagram showing a table for performing a lottery at the start of the prize at the start of the change at the time of the start prize. It is an example of the lottery at the time of pre-reading prize of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is a figure showing the case where the number of reservations at the time of starting prize is one. It is an example of the lottery at the time of a prefetch prize at the time of a prefetch prize of modification 4 of this embodiment, and is a figure showing the case where the number of reservations at the time of a start prize is two. It is an example of the lottery at the time of the prefetching prize of the modification 4 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the number of reservations at the time of the start prize is four. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation pattern classification in the case of reliability level 0 of modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation pattern classification in case of reliability level 7 of modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice level table of the notice effect in the said variation of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice level table of the notice effect at the time of tempai of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice level table of the notice effect in the first half of SP reach of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice level table of the notice effect in the latter half of SP reach of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is an example of the notice level combination scenario of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is a figure showing the case where the number of pseudo runs is 0 (no pseudo run) and the normal fluctuation or normal reach. It is an example of the notice level combination scenario of the fourth modification of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing a case where the number of pseudo runs is 0 and the system reaches SP reach. It is an example of the notice level combination scenario of the fourth modification of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where the number of pseudo runs is four and the normal fluctuation or the normal reach is performed. It is an example of the notice level combination scenario of the fourth modification of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where the number of pseudo runs is four and the system reaches SP reach. It is the figure which extracted one example of the several notice lottery table of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is a figure which shows the lottery table of "window notice at the time of a change start." It is the figure which extracted one example of the several notice lottery table of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is a figure which shows the lottery table of "SP latter half cut-in notice". It is a front view of the game machine provided with the sword production operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the effect pattern in the effect mode which can perform a sword-drawing effect, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transfer effect according to the type of a fluctuation pattern, (B) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword-drawing operation | movement of the sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sword part (sword body part) itself, (A) sword-drawing state, (B) 1st sword-drawing state, (C) 2nd. Indicates the sword-drawing state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword-drawing operation | movement of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) sword-drawing state, (B) 1st sword-drawing state, and (C) 2nd sword-drawing state. It is a longitudinal section explaining operation of an aura member. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is an effect transition diagram of a sword effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between the state change timing of the sword decoration and the operation validity period concerning the operation means. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword-drawing effect of the first modification. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword-drawing effect of the first modification. It is an example of an effect transition diagram of a sword-drawing effect of the first modification. 9 is a timing chart illustrating a relationship between a state change timing of a sword decoration body and an operation timing of an operation unit according to a first modification. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect of modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect of modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect of modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect of modification 2. It is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword effect of modification 2. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the transition of the screen of the effect display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the princess reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many aspects. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device in the reach effect, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration used for pseudo consecutive production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition example of the pseudo continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is provided while the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is provided while the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether the operation opportunity of a sword decoration is provided while the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the after-operation effect (falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin)) of the sword decoration during the pseudo continuous change (re-change) common to all effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition which becomes the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition which becomes the characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect transition which becomes the characteristic of a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of effect patterns which can be selected based on a fluctuation pattern. It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (robin) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (robin) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (robin) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decorative member SDY (robin) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation | movement execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (border role) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern. Based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. Based on the fluctuation effect (reach effect) of the fluctuation pattern drawn by the main control board, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is enabled during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is effective during the reach effect as in the case of the first suggestion pattern described above, the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure showing an example of transition. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button is enabled once and the sword decoration is not enabled, and then the sword decoration is enabled. It is a figure showing about a suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about a specific operation related production. It is a figure showing another example of the specific operation related production. It is a figure explaining an example about the effect when the "specific operation related effect" is set as the effect object of the timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the production contents for each type about the production when a plurality of types (progress productions A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as precursor productions. It is a figure which shows the effect content when the precursor effect which is not a specific operation related effect is performed, and the effect content when the precursor effect is performed as a specific operation related effect. It is a figure showing another example of the production contents when a specific operation related production is performed as a precursor production. It is a figure showing an example of a production in which button image BTG is displayed in a mode (specific production mode) to which a princess character is added. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case where the operation error between a 1st operation mode and a 2nd operation mode occurs on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case where the operation error between a 1st operation mode and a 2nd operation mode occurs on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure showing the example of an effect at the time of the 1st indication effect being performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect at the time of the 1st indication effect being performed. It is a time chart which shows the processing content at the time of operating a movable decorative object when a specific condition is satisfied. 213 is a time chart showing a modification example of the example shown in FIG. 219. It is a time chart which shows the contents of processing when timing tm1 when a new design change starts in the situation where a specific movable decorative object is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special effect pattern is started arrives in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the process until a sword decoration body 5001 returns to an original position. 9 is a time chart showing an operation state of an operation button during a series of operation check periods. (A) is a time chart showing an abnormality determination timing of an operation button during a period other than an arbitrary operation check period, and (B) is a time chart showing an abnormality determination timing of an operation button during an arbitrary operation check period. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the sword decoration during the operation reception period, and (B) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the sword decoration and the abnormality detection during periods other than the operation reception period. (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the sword decoration and the abnormality detection during the operation reception period. (A) is a time chart showing an abnormality determination timing of an operation button, and (B) is a time chart showing an abnormality determination timing of a movable decorative body provided on a game board. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the effect when the button is protruding in a normal state, and (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the effect when the button is protruded when an abnormality occurs. . (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal button effect at the time of normal operation, and (B) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button in the normal button effect at the time of abnormality occurrence. . (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs during the operation acceptance period, and (B) is a time chart showing the operation button when an abnormality occurs during the automatic operation confirmation period. 6 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between an operation state and a notification mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the effect at the time of abnormal occurrence of a movable decorative body. (A) is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button in the operation reception period, and (B) shows an operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the operation reception period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the non-time saving state, and (B) is a time chart of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the time reduction state. 6 is a time chart illustrating an operation state. It is a specific production example of a mission production. It is an example of a specific production of a roulette production. It is an example of a specific production of a roulette production. It is a specific production example when the operation button is long-pressed during the roulette production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting mode interruption process. It is a figure showing an example of volume control during a fluctuation display. It is a figure showing an example of volume control during a demonstration. It is a flow chart which shows an example of sound data creation processing. It is a figure explaining an example of a production of a volume control suitable realization production. It is a figure explaining an example of a production of a volume control suitable realization production. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of (A) volume control suitable realization effect, and the control timing of (B) brightness adjustment suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of a brightness adjustment suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of a brightness adjustment suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of control in the modification of the volume control suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of control in sound volume and brightness adjustment at the time of information of high importance, such as high expectation production. It is a figure explaining the timing of control in a pseudo consecutive discrimination production. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect in a modification of a pseudo consecutive discrimination effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of control in the modification of a pseudo consecutive discrimination production. It is a figure explaining the timing of the control in a big hit expectation judgment effect.

[1. Overall Configuration of Pachinko Machines]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an entire pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment, and a door frame is opened with respect to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a box that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and that is open on the front side. A game board 4 having a frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven; And a door frame 5 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be able to open and close so as to be closed. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a gaming window 101 formed so that the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a gaming ball arranged below the gaming window 101 for storing gaming balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. , Is provided.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape extending in the up-down direction in a front view, and the widths in the left-right direction are substantially the same. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. At a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, a decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged such that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position in front of the left end of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the right end of the door frame 5 are moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 to be in an open state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 when viewed from the front, and projects forward below the game window 101. As shown, two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. A handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 while game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the player rotates the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting ball strength corresponding to the rotation angle, so that the player can play a game.

  The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590 so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various prize holes, and other useful objects in the area 1100.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facilities of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (up and down) direction, and respective frame plates. And four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of 10, 11, 12, 13 to each other. The connecting members 14 connect the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 to each other to form a vertically long rectangular shape ( (Square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). Note that an upper support metal fitting 20, which will be described later, is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. A plurality of grooves extending in the up-down direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility in a game hall, the work is performed. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by the user's finger, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

  The outer frame 2 includes an upper support member 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and a lower portion fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower side of the left side frame plate 12 and arranged to face the upper support member 20. A supporting member 21; a reinforcing member 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower supporting member 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13; and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing member 22. 23. The upper support 20 and the lower support 21 support the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable. A support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper support 630 of the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support 20. A main frame support formed on a main frame support 644 of the main frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21 so that the support protrusion 21d of the lower support 21 is inserted. After the main frame 3 is inserted into the support hole of the main frame support 644 of the main frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support 630 of the main frame 3 is easily engaged with the support hook hole 20c, so that the main frame 3 can be easily mounted. It can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) arranged and fixed at a predetermined distance in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are used by the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main frame 3 when closing the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 (FIG. 1). The key portion is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and is turned to one side, whereby the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are connected. The closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released by disengagement.

[3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding opening 601 for holding the game board 4. An upper bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view and supported by the outer frame 2 and supporting the door frame 5, A ball launching device 650 attached to the lower front surface of the main frame base 600 for driving game balls into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for dispensing a ball, and a prize ball unit 700 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and moving from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened relative to the main body frame 3. It includes a ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to shut off the flow of skill sphere, the.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to a lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes a door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and various control boards for controlling electric components provided on the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. , A back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding opening 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view. And a locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front to open and close the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and open and close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, has a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 when viewed from the front, and has a predetermined depth in the front-rear direction. Have been. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding opening 601 through which a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction and can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4, and a main body frame. A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the base 600 when viewed from the front, and is recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to move rearward from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. The protruding door frame protrusion 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent protruding piece 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. An engagement groove 603 into which an open-side outer bent protruding piece 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  Also, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame part 602, and spreads in a horizontal direction in a plate-like lower rear wall part. 604; The free end portions (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605, so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding opening 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall section 604 and has a game board placement section 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and a game board placement section 606. A positioning projection 607 that projects upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board stop for the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 when viewed from the front. A game board engaging portion to which the tool 1120 is fixed, and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 which are formed in a plate-like shape and are disposed in the left and right direction in a plate-like shape which is suspended downward from an upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4. And The positioning protrusions 607 of the main frame base 600 are fitted to the out ball discharge grooves of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the rearward direction. I have. In addition, the game board locking portion can regulate that the right side in the front view of the game board 4 moves in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. . Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in front view will be described later, the movement of the side security plate 950 in the front-rear direction is regulated by the positioning member 956.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a lower rear wall portion 604 formed at a position one step lower than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and a ball launching device is provided on the right front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. The hit ball firing device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. In a state in which the hit ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 extending leftward and downward is formed on the left side in front view of the upper end of the firing rail 660 of the hitting launch device 650. It has become. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626. The game balls descending from the foul space 626 are received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540, and are discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has an opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left side from the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, And a through-hole 615 penetrating through the hole. The opening of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main door relay terminal plate 880 of 800 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

  The main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It has become. The body frame base 600 is provided with a body frame opening switch 619 for detecting opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on a rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 will be described. The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are respectively attached to metal attachment portions on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 in the front view by using predetermined screws, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the main body frame 3. The main frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  The upper bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion of the body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like front extension extending forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. 7, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view (FIG. 7). The vertical extension of the door frame support hole 634 through which the door frame 5 is inserted, and the downward extension from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front, restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper. In the upper shaft bracket 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 is used to support the door frame 5, and a door frame support 642 is provided below the door frame support 642 to support the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main frame support 644. The door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640 is attached to a lower bracket mount of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mount. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted vertically through a portion near the front end of the front extension portion 642b, And a stopper 642d that stands upward from the left end of the extension 642b when viewed from the front and regulates the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In the door frame shaft bracket 642, the mounting portion, the front extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support 644 of the lower support 640 is attached to a metal mounting portion on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. It has a front extension 644b that protrudes, and a body frame shaft support hole that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension 644b. In the main frame supporting member 644, the attachment portion and the front extension portion 644b are also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower bracket 640 has a mounting portion of the door frame bracket 642 and a mounting portion of the main frame shaft bracket 644 overlapping (contacting) in the front-rear direction. The front extending portion 642b and the front extending portion 644b of the main frame support 644 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and are attached to the lower metal mounting portion of the main frame base 600.

  When the upper bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft bracket 640 are coaxial. , And the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted to the support protrusion 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 4). The front extension 644b of the body frame shaft support 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support 21 (see FIG. 4) so as to be inserted, and then the shaft of the upper shaft support 630 is inserted. By inserting the support pins 633 into the support hook holes 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. It has become.

  The upper bracket 630 and the lower bracket 640 are attached to the body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft holes 634 of the upper shaft bracket 630 and the door frame shaft holes of the lower shaft bracket 640 are attached. 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support 642 of the lower shaft support 640. 5 is placed on the front extension 642 b of the door frame shaft support 642, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is connected to the door frame of the upper shaft support 630. By inserting the door frame 5 into the shaft support hole 634, the door frame 5 can be supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the up and down direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is used. Is temporarily slid downward so that the upper shaft support 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension 632 of the upper shaft support 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball firing device 650 will be described. The hitting ball firing device 650 is mounted on a main frame base 600 at a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604. The firing base 652 is formed of a metal plate. A launching solenoid 654, a hitting hammer 656 fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654 a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and a predetermined position on the movement locus of the hammering tip 658. A hammer tip 658 at the tip of a hitting hammer 656 passes between the firing rail 660 extending obliquely to the upper left from the position as the base end and attached to the front of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 above the base end of the firing rail 660. A ball stopper that forms a gap at the same time that a game ball cannot pass and that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 662 and a stopper that regulates rotation of the hitting hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) toward the firing rail 660 from a hitting position at which the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the ball stopper 662 can be hit. 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the rotation drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. . In addition, the ball hammer 656 of the ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a gently extending arc extending from the fixed portion 656a to the tip of the rotation drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b to which a hammer tip 658 is fixed at the tip in the normal direction, a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and capable of contacting the stopper 664; It has. When the stopper 656c of the hitting hammer 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip 658 of the tip of the hitting ball 656 is rotated toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position (rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is being regulated.

  When the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is located substantially at the center in the left-right direction, that is, the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. 606 (lower side of the game board holding port 601), and a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. Thus, a foul space 626 extending downward is formed. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view of the launch rail 660, so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is located below the foul space 626, and A game ball that has not been driven into the area 1100 and has become a foul ball falls through the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko machine at the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the game balls supplied from the pachinko machine to the pachinko machine 1 are stored, and then the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. To be paid out. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank mounted on an upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the pachinko island equipment side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a game ball arranged by the tank rail unit 730 to a predetermined position. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Also, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 becomes lower toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. One end of the ball leveling member 727 is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein, and the other end thereof hangs down by its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730 described below, and can level and align game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 that is disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter-like shape having a predetermined depth with an open upper portion, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so that is lower.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 includes an aligning gear 732 rotatably supported above the outlet of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper part of the aligning gear 732, and a tank that is continuous with the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball holding plate 734 for closing the upper part of the rail 731, a ball stopper 735 which can be advanced and retracted into the tank rail 731 and which can stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port side; , Is provided. The two aligning gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls divided in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a supply passage opening at the upper end and extending to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and a predetermined width in communication with the lower end of the supply passage. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage which communicates with a lower end of the distribution space on the left side (open side) in a rear view, bends in a substantially rectangular shape and opens on the left side in the rear view, and a right side of the distribution space in a rear view. (A shaft support side), and a ball passage that extends downward and opens at the lower end in communication with the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball passage are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 so as to be integrally rotatable and disposed on a rear side of the motor support plate, a second gear meshing with the first gear, and meshing with the second gear. A third gear, a dispensing rotator that rotates integrally with the third gear and is disposed in the distribution space, and a dispensing rotator is fixed to the opposite side of the third gear so as to be integrally rotatable in the circumferential direction and the like. A rotation detection panel having a plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection slits formed at intervals, a ball out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage It holds a counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752. Rotation angle switch board 53, a payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotator includes three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one game sphere at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and rotating the payout rotator allows one game ball supplied from the supply passage to rotate. The balls are accommodated in the recesses one by one and can be paid out to the side of the prize ball passage or the ball extraction passage. In addition, three detection slits formed in the rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board, and correspond to the gaps between the recesses of the payout rotating body. The rotational position of the payout rotator can be detected by detecting the detection slit with the rotation angle switch 752. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the respective detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (the payout rotating body) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 18 steps.

  The prize ball device 740 is configured such that when the payout rotating body is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in rear view by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the prize ball passage. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation member is operated by a hall clerk or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the ball removing passage. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the rear outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end, and the prize of the prize ball device 740 is provided. A prize ball receiving port for receiving game balls flowing down the ball passage, a branch space arranged below the prize ball receiving port and extending in the left-right direction, and a game from immediately below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space to the front side. A normal path for guiding the ball, a normal ball exit 774 that releases the game ball flowing through the normal path to the front and opens at the right end of the front end in front view, and is separated to the right in rear view from immediately below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space. And a full tank exit 776 that guides game balls from the position toward the front toward the front and discharges game balls flowing through the full tank passage to the front and opens the left side of the normal ball exit 774 in front view. ing.

  The full tank branching unit 770 has a ball receiving opening for receiving a game ball flowing upward through the ball discharging passage of the prize ball device 740 and opening upward at the left end of the upper rear end when viewed from the front. A ball passage that guides the game ball received by the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has flowed through the ball passage is released forward and at the left end in front view at a position behind the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776. And an open ball outlet.

  When the full tank branch unit 770 has the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first ball inlet 542 a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 is opposed to and communicates with the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1), and the game ball is discharged through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. Further, the ball outlet is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball extraction passage in rear view of the main frame base 600, and the game balls released from the ball outlet are connected to the main frame of the main frame base 600. It is handed over to the base ball passage.

  When the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls, the ball is raised from the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls that cannot be brought out to the plate 301 side stay in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage upstream of the full ball branch unit 770 becomes full through the normal ball outlet 774. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball receiving port cannot enter the normal passage, starts to move laterally in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved laterally becomes full. So as to be supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 from the full ball outlet through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet. Has become.

[3-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the board unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the board unit 800 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 when viewed from the front, A power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 810; and a power supply board box attached to the rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end formed to be substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820. 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view. And the board unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharge ball receiving portion 841 that is open upward and receives a downwardly discharged game ball discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 on the left front surface than the left and right center in front view; A discharge passage 842 that guides the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and discharges the discharged ball, and is opened forward and upward at the front (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharged ball receiving portion 841. And a box housing part formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is depressed forward, and capable of housing the front end of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and that the opening of the substrate unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. It flows through the body frame base ball passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall of the body frame base 600 and flows down to the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening of the board unit base 810. The game balls and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 can be discharged to the rear lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. Has become.

  The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape open at the front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and transfers heat from the electronic components and the like to the outside through a plurality of slits 850 a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to Note that a power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The dispensing control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has a rear opening, a thin box cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side, and has a front opening, and a box base 861. And a payout control board 4110 that is attached to the rear surface and covered by the cover 862. The dispensing control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation and cutting portions 863 protruding outward from the left end in rear view and formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated without cutting the separation cutting section 863. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace is left. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, the operation switch 860a (error clearing unit) attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. In the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is notified, an operation is performed to cancel the error. The function of clearing the RAM at the time of power-on and the function of clearing the RAM at power-on (the time period during which the function as the RAM clear has passed have passed. And a function for canceling the error in (2). A detailed description on this point will be described later.

  The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the back face of the board base 871, and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872 fixed to the rear, and a board base. A game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 to which the CR unit relay terminal 873 is fixed rearwardly attached to the rear surface of the base unit 871, and a board such that the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. A substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying an operation state and the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko gaming machine facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided on the peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the door frame 5. It is for relaying connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to a substrate mounting portion formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to face the front from the front surface of the main body frame base 600. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are configured such that the front sides thereof are covered by a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance.

  In addition, the main door relay terminal plate 880 is provided with a ball lending button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Note that the ball lending button 361, return button 362, lending remaining display section 363, potentiometer 512, touch switch 516, firing stop switch 518 of the ball lending unit 360, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 are provided. The description will be given later.

  In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided on each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decorative boards provided on the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and on the operation unit 400. For relaying a connection between a dial drive motor 414, various switches for respectively detecting operations of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and a peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. It is. The decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided on the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 and the dial operation provided on the operation unit 400 A description of various switches for detecting operations of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape); A right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. A decorative unit 240, an upper decorative unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame base unit disposed below the lower ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface of the speaker 100. A plurality of LEDs (LED boards) are arranged on the back of the upper decoration unit 280, the right side decoration unit 200, and the left side decoration unit 240, and are related to effects performed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 described later. Then, the light emission is controlled in a predetermined light emission mode, so that the upper decoration unit 280, the right side decoration unit 200, and the left side decoration unit 240 are lighted and decorated.

  In addition, the door frame 5 is mounted on the front of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, the operation unit 400 mounted on the upper center of the plate unit 300, and mounted on the right side of the plate unit 300. The upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470 penetrates the plate unit 300 and is attached to the lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 to handle a game ball driving operation. A foul cover unit 540 arranged on the rear side of the plate unit 300 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100; a ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540; Attached to the back of the base unit 100 to close the gaming window 101 The glass unit 590 is provided with a.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base main body 110 having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and whose inner periphery is formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape. An upper bracket 120 attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 at the front of the base body 110 to fix the upper decorative unit, and a pair of sides attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 at the front of the door frame base body 110 The speaker 130 includes a speaker 130 and a handle bracket attached to a lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in front view for supporting the handle device 500.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and a game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower portion, and a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1), and a firing cover 191 (see FIG. 1) which is disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101. A main control board attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191 and attached to a potentiometer 512 of a handle device 500 described later and a game board 4 described later. 100, a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and a center in the left-right direction. A frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 that is disposed on the opposite side (right side (axial support side) than the center in the left-right direction in rear view) from the firing cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body. (See FIG. 1), and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to a peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. And an amplification circuit for amplifying the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputting the amplified signal to each speaker 130. Although not specifically shown, in the present embodiment, each of the decorative units 200, 240, and 280, each of the decorative substrates provided in the plate unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. And switches, handle relay terminal plate 192, wiring for electrically connecting ball unit 360 of dish unit 300 and the like, payout control board 4110 and peripheral control board 4140, etc., when viewed from the back of frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. After being collected and bundled at a position on the right side (supporting side), it extends rearward and is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base main body 110 is formed in a vertically long frame shape by a synthetic resin, and is formed in such a manner that the game window 101 having a vertically long inner shape and a substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is generally upwardly offset. Have been. In the gaming window 101, the left and right inner edges are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. In addition, a square notch is formed at the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110 on the pivot side (left side in front view) so that the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted. A speaker mounting portion disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, a right (open side) end of a front surface which is disposed at a lower right corner in front view and bulges forward. A handle mounting portion for mounting a handle bracket that is inclined obliquely so as to retreat, a wire passage opening through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion, and above the handle mounting portion A lock hole 116 is formed in the shape of a cylinder that extends short forward, and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. In the door frame base main body 110, the upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and the width of the left and right sides are the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivot side supporting sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. , And the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a pivot attached along the back surface of the pivot side of the door frame base body 110. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the open side back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the gaming window 101 of the door frame base body 110 And a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the lower surface of the lower side, and these are formed in a square shape by being mutually fastened with screws or rivets.

  An upper support 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and a lower support 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof. It is provided integrally. Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are supported by the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 formed on the upper and lower support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the main body frame 3. It can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, a hook cover 165 is provided at the rear lower portion of the open-side reinforcing metal plate 153 in contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion is formed. The engagement between the hook 104 and the hook cover 165 is released, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 will be described. The plate unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls dispensed from the prize ball device 740, and fires the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 via a ball sending unit. It can be supplied to the device 650.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to protrude forward from the left to the center in a front view, and linearly forward from the center to the right. It is formed to protrude. An operation unit mounting portion to which the operation unit 400 is mounted is formed in the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a liquid crystal mounting portion 314d for mounting the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit mounting portion. . The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 in which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and this portion bends downward when the player presses it downward with a hand, for example. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses his hand on the screen of the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. By bending the upper plate upper panel 314, the upper liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is broken. When the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 is replaced. In this case, the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device 470 is removed from the broken upper-panel upper panel 314 and attached to the upper-panel upper panel 314 of the tray unit 300 to be replaced and reused.

  In addition, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 in response to operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341, and a lower plate ball removing button 354. The lower bowl extracting mechanism 350 for pulling down the game balls stored in the lower bowl 302 through the lower bowl removing hole 324b in response to the operation of the lower bowl 302 and a pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown) And a ball rental unit 360 for operating the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and includes a dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 405 (pressable by the player). Operation unit), and can accept the operation of the player according to the game state, can move the dial operation unit 401, not only the operation of hitting the game ball to the player, , So that the user can also participate in the effects during the game. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the press operation unit 405 is detected by a press detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

  The operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial driving motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a step-by-step manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist rotation, prevent rotation, or add a click feeling to rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments forward and the rotation for reverse rotation.

[4-2-2. Ball rental unit]
The ball lending unit 360 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display section 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining number display 365c can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363. Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is arranged adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c, so that the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display unit 363. The ball rental switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining power indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display board 365, and the frequency display board 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. . The ball lending unit 360, when cash or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in a plate unit. 300 can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the remaining cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the remainder of the borrowed amount are returned. ing. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball sending unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 to the hit ball launching device 650 one by one, and also converts the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the upper plate balls. The lower plate 302 can be pulled out by operating the upper plate pulling button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

  The ball feeding unit 580 is an entrance where game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. , And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball outlet opening below the entry port and is open at the rear, and a box shape that closes the rear end of the front cover and is open at the front, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A rear cover having a hit ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball which has entered from the entrance of the front cover to the hit ball launching device 650, and a rotation about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover and the front cover. A ball-pulling member that is pivotally supported and has a partitioning part that separates between the entrance and the ball outlet at the rear side of the front cover, and a game ball on the partitioning part of the ball-pulling member that is hit by the rear cover one ball at a time. Feeding to supply port 582a, between upper and lower covers before and after cover And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member receives one ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member receives the game ball. The game balls are sent (supplied) to the hitting ball firing device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 includes a handle base fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 and having a cylindrical front end bulging round in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base rotatable relative to the handle base. The front of the rotary handle main body 506 fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle main body and fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle main body and rotatable integrally with the rear of the rotary handle main body, and the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is disposed. And a front end cover 508 fixed to the handle base and cooperating with the handle base to rotatably support the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body.

  Further, the handle device 500 is attached to and fixed to the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and has a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end, and is fitted with the bearing portion of the shaft member. A potentiometer 512 having a detection shaft portion that is rotatable and fitted to the front surface of the handle base in a non-rotatable manner; A switch support member having a through hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member. , A single-shot button rotatably supported on the switch support member to operate the firing stop switch 518 And a handle disposed so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member, and for urging the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body to return to the original rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). A return spring. In addition, the potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506. Further, the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body are rotated from the original rotation position to a limit rotation position which is a maximum rotation position in a clockwise direction in a front view (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). I do.

  In the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. . Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hit ball firing device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, and A game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity corresponding to (a commensurate with) the rotation angle before the main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, that is, the rotation position after the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body. I have.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 below the gaming window 101, and the game ball is paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the game is fired by the hit ball firing device 650. The game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base having a front side opened and a flow path for a plurality of game balls therein, and a front cover for closing a front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 is arranged at the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Inside the cover base communicating with the one ball passage, the second ball passage 542c disposed outside (the right side in rear view) of the first ball inlet 542a and larger than the first ball inlet 542a, and the second ball passage. And a second ball inlet 542c extending downward and inclined so as to become lower toward the lower right corner in front view. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are connected to the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. In the cover base, the height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of the cover base is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space capable of accommodating is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is disposed at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and is provided with a foul ball inlet 542e that opens upward, and a foul that can communicate with the foul ball inlet 542e and guide the game ball to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage. A ball passage. In addition, the cover base includes an opening / closing operation piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece contacts the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank and opening the opening / closing shutter 792. It can be opened.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. An outlet and a second ball outlet disposed at the lower right corner in front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. The first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through the notch of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter in the dish unit 300 through the ball passage opening of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 transfers the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage to the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet. Can be supplied to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 transfers the game ball supplied to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. The plate unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via a lower plate ball supply gutter and a lower plate ball supply port.

  When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul cover unit 540 is configured such that the foul ball entrance 542 e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and When the game ball fired by 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game ball received at foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to lower plate 302 of plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. I can do it.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space in the second ball passage, and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be capable of swinging by game balls stored in the accommodation space. It includes a member, a full tank switch 550 for detecting the swing of the swing member, and a spring for urging the swing member in a direction in which the swing member 550 is in a non-detection state. The swinging member has a lower end pivotally supported with respect to the cover base, and an upper end that rotates leftward when viewed from the front. The left side wall of the housing space is held substantially vertically. Is formed. The swing member is urged by a spring to a position where the swing member is substantially vertical. Further, the swinging member has a detection piece projecting outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full tank switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. The game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112 as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9. The player operates the handle device 500 so that a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is driven is formed. A frame-shaped front component 1110 that defines the outer periphery, and a position at which the front component 1110 can be viewed from the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner in a front view. And a plurality of openings 1158 which are attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrate in a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the front-rear direction. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1150, a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the gaming panel 1150 from the front side, and a gaming panel A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface 150, and a.

  Further, the game board 4 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500, a liquid crystal display device detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image visually recognizable by a player according to a game state, and a lower portion of the back unit 3000 And a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 so as to cover the game panel 1150 from the rear side.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 will be described. The front component member 1110 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the area 1100 is partitioned. An outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower left edge to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal; An inner rail 1112 that is disposed substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along a counterclockwise circumferential direction in a front view, the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. And an inner rail 1112 and an inner peripheral rail 1113 that are capable of contacting a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111 by connecting the end (upper end) of the inner rail to the inner rail 1112. At the lower end of the game area 1100 at the lower end of the game area 1100, and is lowered rearward, and is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 to close between the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position opened clockwise in the front view to open the outer rail 1111. A backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 1). ) Is located on the extension line. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball hit along the firing rail 660 of the hit ball firing device 650 is formed. , And jumps into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow preventing member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is moved. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the gaming area 1100.

  Also, when a game ball is strongly hit with the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 is brought into contact with the stop 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the contact of the game ball with the stop portion 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Even if a game ball that has entered (has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return to a position between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  Also, when the game balls hit into the game area 1100 are not accepted by the starting ports 2101 and 2102 of the front unit 2000, the winning ports 2103, 2104 and 2201, etc., they flow down to the lower end of the game area 1100, An out-port guiding surface 1115 at a boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the player to the out-port 1151 of the game panel 1150, and is discharged from the out-port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball fired from the hitting ball firing device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolls downward in the opposite direction, and a foul space 626 (formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. 1), and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626. It is configured to be discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball is enhanced and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin disposed on a surface thereof, so that even if a game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. And the game ball can be repelled inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 is arranged at the left end in front view in the vertical direction and is depressed from the front to the rear, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened to the left end, and separated vertically in the right end in front view. A pair of gaming board stoppers 1120 disposed, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side in front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and is opened downward and has an arcuate upper side and is recessed from the front side, and a lower end in front view And a ball passage notch 1122 which is elongated in the left-right direction upward from the lower end near the left end of the ball passage. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the game board holding opening 601 (see FIG. 5). ) Can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction of the left end of the game board 4 inserted in the front view. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By locking to the stop, the right end in the front view of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction.

  The fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 is provided with a game board fixture 690 (see FIG. Is rotated clockwise in front view, the fixing piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixing tool 690 is inserted, and the game board 4 is fixed by the game board fixing tool 690. The movement of the lower end of the front is restricted. The ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 has a similar ball passage notch 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150. In this state, the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  In addition, a function display unit 1180 described later is arranged at the lower right of the front component 1110 in a front view.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 2000 includes an attacker unit 2100 disposed above the out port 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and an outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the left of the attacker unit 2100. Winning side member 2200 which is arranged along the front of the game panel 1150 and is supported at the center of the game area 1100 and is supported by the game panel 1150. I have.

  The front unit 2000 is inserted from the front into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1150. A portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is located in the game area 1100. Accordingly, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nails implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, the front unit 2000 can prevent the movement of the game ball. That is, it is possible to make a change. Further, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) through which game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged substantially at the center in the left-right direction. A starting port 2101, a lower starting port 2102 disposed below the upper starting port 2101, and a rectangle disposed below the lower starting port 2102 and extending in the left-right direction more than the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. A large winning opening 2103 having a shape, and a general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left and right sides and slightly above the large winning opening 2103 are provided. The game balls received in the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2102, the special winning port 2103, and the general winning port 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open at the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by a starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 11) is disposed between the lower starting port 2102 disposed below the upper starting port 2101 and the upper starting port 2101. When the pair of movable pieces 2106 stand substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive a game ball into the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, a game ball can be received in the lower starting port 2102. That is, the lower starting port 2102 is a variable winning opening (variable winning device) by the pair of movable pieces 2106. Note that the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2105 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate unit 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

  The big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2107 is rotatably supported on the lower side. When the opening / closing member 2107 is substantially vertical, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it difficult to receive a game ball, and the upper side moves forward. , The large winning opening 2103 is opened so that game balls can be easily received. The opening / closing member 2107 has a special winning opening 2103 closed in a normal game state, and is specially selected when a game ball is received (starts winning) by the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102. In response to the lottery result (when the result of the special lottery is “big hit” or “small hit”), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 11), and a variable winning opening (variable winning device) Is composed.

  Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward, so that game balls can be always received (winning).

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 includes a lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received by the lower starting port 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received by the special winning port 2103. 2110, and the game balls detected by the lower starting port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 are discharged onto the bottom wall of the substrate holder 1160. The back unit 3000 includes an upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received by the upper starting port 2101 and a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball received by the general winning port 2104. .

[5-2-2. Side winning opening member]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at a lower left portion from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 1150. Above, two fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150, and are arranged to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side in the front view of the attacker unit 2100. A general winning port 2201 is provided. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can be always received (winning), and the game balls received by the general winning opening 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  The side winning opening member 2200 has a left end located at an upper left end thereof at a position substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and lower side of the two general winning openings 2201, and at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 and the big winning opening). (2103 side), the second shelf portion 2203 that becomes lower toward the center of the game area 1100. I can do it.

  Note that the two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game ball is brought to the center of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility that a prize will be made to the general prize port 2201. In addition, a third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center of the game area 1100 is provided above the two general winning openings 2201.

  The side winning opening member 2200 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and although not shown in detail, a side winning opening decorative board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration board 3014 of the back unit 3000 described later is arranged behind the side winning opening member 2200, and the side winning opening member 2200 is formed by the side winning opening decorative board and the side lamp decoration board 3014. Are light emitting decorations.

[5-2-3. Center role]
Next, the center role 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The center role 2300 is inserted from the front into an opening 1158 which is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size occupying most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view is formed in an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the game area 1100 and the outer peripheral surface. In addition, the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so that a region of a predetermined width is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the left side and the outer periphery of the game region 1100.

  The center role 2300 is an upper shelf 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left side from the slightly rightward center position in the left and right direction on the upper outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150 so as to become lower leftward. When the game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center role 2300, and at the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (invaded) flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at a stretch through the right side of the center item 2300. That is, when the game balls are driven so that the game balls enter the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center role 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game balls is reduced. The length of the game can be adjusted as appropriate, and a sense of tension can be maintained to prevent the game from becoming a loose game.

  Also, the center role item 2300 has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150. A warp exit (not shown) for discharging game balls into the frame, and a center ball for discharging the game balls discharged from the warp outlet into the game area 1100 on the upper side of the attacker unit 2100 after rolling in the left-right direction. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side of the frame in the frame 2300.

  Although a detailed illustration is omitted, the stage 2310 in the center role item 2300 is provided with a first stage to which the game balls released from the warp exit are supplied, and a game ball to be disposed in front of the first stage and from the first stage. A second stage that is supplied and capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the approximate center in the left-right direction becomes lower. Further, a chance entrance 2313 through which a game ball can enter is formed at a rear side of a substantially center in the left-right direction of the first stage. It is configured to be discharged from the exit 2314 into the game area 1100. The chance exit 2314 is disposed immediately above the upper starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is received (wins) in the upper starting port 2101 with a high probability. ing.

  Note that the stage 2310 in the center role item 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, a decorative body disposed below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side. Has become.

  In addition, the center accessory 2300 has a transparent outer side extending from the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150 above the warp entrance 2302 so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112 in the left direction. An arch 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from substantially the front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which game balls can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. Thus, the game ball driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center role 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows down through the rear side of the arch portion 2315 to the downstream side. .

  Further, the center role item 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting the passage of a game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance which is disposed on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion above the arch portion 2315 and through which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter, and a game ball which has entered the gate entrance. A gate switch 2352 that performs the game and a gate exit that discharges the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. In the present embodiment, although not shown in detail, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is connected to the arch. The part 2315 is made to look as if diving.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 has a plurality of light-emitting portions formed in a circular or X shape at a position outside the opening 1158 into which the center role object 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The decorative holes are used for light-emitting decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light-emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of rear panel lenses 2510 disposed on the rear side. An upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center role 2300, and a rear panel lens 2520 disposed behind the lower panel lens 2520. A lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 protrude forward from the plate-shaped lens base, and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides having substantially the same shape as the light-emitting decoration hole to be inserted. It has a part. When the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game flowing down the front surface of the game panel 1150 is formed. It does not affect the sphere as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can light and decorate the area where the game ball flows down by using the opaque game panel 1150 such as veneer plywood by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate. In addition, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the gaming panel 1150, which has not been seen before, and to distinguish the pachinko gaming machine 1 from other pachinko gaming machines by making the pachinko gaming machine 1 stand out.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back box 3001 supporting the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 by a predetermined distance, and inside the back box 3001. , An upper unit 3100 disposed above the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, a character unit 3400 disposed on the right side of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and a game board side disposed in the back box 3001. And a gear decoration unit 3500 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A game ball attached to the side lamp decoration board 3014 and the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and a game received in the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A left guiding member 3016 for guiding the ball downward, and a right for guiding the game ball downward, which is arranged on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and is received by the upper starting port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 on the attacker unit 2100. And a guiding member 3018.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 is disposed in the lower rear part of the back box 3001 and has a horizontally long rectangular lamp driving board box 3423 that accommodates the lamp driving board 4170, and a lower part of the lamp driving board box 3423. And a motor drive board box 3430 having a horizontally-long rectangular shape that accommodates the motor drive board 4180 and a lamp drive board box 3423 fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and disposed on the left side when viewed from the rear of the motor drive board box 3430. Panel relay terminal plate 4161, an upper rectangular resistance board disposed on the rear upper portion of the back box 3001, and a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 attached to the back side of the back box 3001 so as to be detachable. And a lock member.

  In this embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 formed into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be characterized. In addition, the back unit 3000 is configured such that the units 3100, 3400, and 3500 move independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state, and the movement changes the game state for the player. And the arrival of a chance can be suggested, and the player can be entertained.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape whose front side is open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end. It is fixed. The back box 3001 has a rectangular opening substantially at the center of the rear wall, and through this opening, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be visually recognized from the player side. I have. Further, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, and 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  Although not shown, the back box 3001 has one (right side in rear view) fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 on the right side of the opening in rear view. A lock member is attached to the left side of the opening when viewed from the rear, and a fixing piece 1902 on the other side (left side in rear view) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided by the lock member. By supporting, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Guide member]
Next, the left guiding member 3016 and the right guiding member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths, respectively. A general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received in the upper starting port 2101 and the right general winning port 2104 on the right side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths to near the lower end. The flow path corresponding to the upper starting port 2101 is provided with an upper starting port switch 3022, and the flow path corresponding to the right general winning port 2104 is provided with a general winning port switch 3020. The right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall of the substrate holder 1160, and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 to below the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed to be horizontally long as a whole, and is attached and fixed inside the back box 3001 above the opening facing the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The upper unit 3100 is arranged at the front in the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is a rotary decorative body unit 3200 having a circular shape when viewed from the front. 3250, a swing decorative body unit 3300 disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction behind the elevating mechanism 3250, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  The rotary decorative body unit 3200 is vertically moved by an elevating mechanism 3250 between a raised position located above the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and a lowered position located substantially at the center of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. You can move. In this rotating decorative body unit 3200, a rotating decorative body formed in a shuriken shape arranged on the front surface rotates, and the rotating radius of the rotating decorative body increases due to the centrifugal force of the rotation. It has become.

  In addition, since the rotary decorative body unit 3200 not only rotates the rotary decorative body at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation radius of the entire rotary decorative body increases, and the appearance changes greatly. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest in the game, and to strongly attract the interest of the player The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko gaming machine.

  The swing decorative body unit 3300 includes swing decorative bodies disposed on the left and right sides thereof on the rear side so as to be adjacent to the rotary decorative body unit 3200 located at the ascending position, and the swing decorative body on the left and right according to the game state. You can swing your body all the way to the left and right.

  The movable ceiling unit 3350 is provided with a plate-shaped ceiling decoration body extending horizontally at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. The ceiling decorative body is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as a center, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decorative body rotates in a downward direction according to a game state. Has become.

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 has a three-dimensionally shaped character body that schematically represents a ninja, and moves in the left-right direction from the rightmost position to a position closer to the center side according to a game state. Is available. Also, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, it rotates by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

  In addition, the character body of the character unit 3400 is configured so that the head can reciprocate around an axis extending in the left-right direction and the right arm reciprocates around an axis extending in the vertical direction. Can be done. Thus, by reciprocating the head, it is possible to perform a motion as if the character is nodding. In addition, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, it is possible to perform an operation as if the character is throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear decoration unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration unit 3500 is provided with a plurality of gear-shaped gear decorations rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction and arranged in a plurality of vertical directions. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. . The game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 projecting outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing piece 1902.

  Although not shown in detail, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral board box 1905 that houses a peripheral control board 4140 on the rear side.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1180 is attached to a predetermined position of the front component 1110 and arranged. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to a pachinko game machine.

  As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 has a game state display including one LED for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at a left end portion in a front view. Device 1183, upper special symbol storage display 1184 comprising two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status display 1183, and displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls to the upper starting port 2101; An upper special symbol consisting of one 7-segment LED arranged on the right side of the special symbol memory display 1184 and displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101 as a first special symbol. A display 1185 and a second lottery that is arranged diagonally above and to the right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and that has been drawn by receiving game balls into the lower starting port 2102. A lower special symbol display 1186 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying another lottery result as a second special symbol, and a lower starting port composed of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186. And a lower special symbol storage and display device 1187 for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball to 2102.

  The display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passage of the game balls through the gate portion 2350 which are arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186. And a normal symbol storage display 1188 composed of the four LEDs described above, and a normal lottery result which is arranged below the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing the game ball through the gate unit 2350 as a normal symbol. Opening and closing of the special winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is arranged alongside the diagonal upper right of the ordinary symbol display 1189 composed of one LED and the diagonal upper right of the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. A round indicator 1190 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions of the pattern (the number of rounds).

  The game state display 1183 is a full-color LED whose color can be changed between red, green, and orange, and various game states (in accordance with a combination of a light-emitting color and lighting / flashing). For example, a probability variation state, a time reduction state, a probable variation reduction time state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

  The upper special symbol storage display 1184 holds the start of the variable display when the game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101 when the first special symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner on the upper special symbol display 1185 ( The stored number of the stored first special symbols (the number of stored) is displayed. The upper special symbol memory display 1184 has an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and an upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b. The upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on / off by a lighting / flashing pattern. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, both the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. When the number of reservations is three, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned on. When the number of reservations is four, both the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b blink. I have. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  When the lower special symbol display 1187 cannot display the second special symbol in the lower special symbol display 1186 in a variable manner, the start of the variable display is suspended when a game ball is received in the lower starting port 2102 ( The stored number of the second special symbols (stored) is displayed. The lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b. The lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are illuminated and blinked. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off. When the number of reservations is two, both the lower special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. When the number of reservations is three, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned on. When the number of reservations is four, both the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b blink. I have. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving game balls into the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played according to the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. Can be recognized by the player (variable display game).

  The normal symbol display 1189 is a full-color LED capable of changing its emission color in red, green, and orange colors. A normal lottery result drawn by passing a ball can be displayed. The display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 1189 is, similarly to the special symbol, changed and displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  The normal symbol storage display 1188 is a normal symbol in which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 1189. Is displayed as the number of reservations (the number of storages). The ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, the number of reserved ordinary symbols can be displayed. In this embodiment, up to four variable displays of the ordinary symbols are held (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 includes a two-round indicator lamp 1190a composed of a predetermined LED and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b, and when each lamp is turned on, the number of rounds in the “big hit” game can be displayed. It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be visually recognized from the player side through the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the gaming board 4 is attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. I have. Gaming state display 1183, upper special symbol storage display 1184, upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, lower special symbol memory display 1187, ordinary symbol memory display 1188, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, and The round display 1190 is attached to the front of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the function display unit 1180 at the rear end thereof.

  In the present embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front component 1110 of the game board 4, compared with the case where the function display unit 1180 is provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the gaming board 4, and the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost. Even if the detailed structure of the game board 4 embodied by the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko game machine 1) is different, the position of the function display unit 1180 does not change. It is possible for a hall clerk or the like to recognize the position of the function display unit 1180 without being confused. So that the can.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a block diagram schematically showing a peripheral control MPU. Reference numeral 14 is a block diagram around the VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time elapses from the power-on and performs the game operation. A main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. A main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or momentary interruption of a predetermined voltage. And a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e that monitors for signs of a power failure.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”), a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile storage unit. A unique ID code (a code having only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means. . Since the once assigned ID code is stored in the non-volatile storage means, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the non-volatile storage means and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal at its various input terminals for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit 4100b outputs various signals based on the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches, which are input to the various input terminals, by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit 4100ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function having no reset terminal and having no reset function And, it consists of. The main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca is configured such that information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset to be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on the output is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a main control system reset described later. The circuit is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on the various output terminals.

  The upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102, and a general winning port 2104 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the entered game ball and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. I have. Also, as shown in FIG. 8, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, a general winning port switch 3020 for detecting a game ball entered into the general winning opening 2201, and a ball entering the large winning opening 2103 are shown. The detection signals from the count switch 2110 for detecting game balls and the magnetic detection switch 3024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and used to detect cheating using a magnet are transmitted to a panel relay attached to the game board 4. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the terminal board 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function based on the detection signal from each of these switches, so that the main control output circuit with a reset function is provided. A control signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starting port solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, the upper special symbol display is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca via the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191. 1185, Drive signals are sent to the special symbol display 1186, upper special symbol memory display 1184, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, game status indicator 1183, and round indicator 1190. Output.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca. By outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main control output with reset function is performed. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110. For the winning opening switches 3020, 3020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate section 2350, so that the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. Detection of game balls also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. In addition, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball enters frequently, so that the detection of the game ball by the count switch 2110 frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used as the count switch 2110. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb. Various commands are transmitted to the board 4110 as serial data. Upon normal completion of receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a also receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data in the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b sends the predetermined serial input port Various commands are received at the input terminal as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function as serial data. Accordingly, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 4100cb to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a mainly includes a main control CPU core 4100aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, connects the bus 4100ah. The circuit is connected via The main serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like. When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data. In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The transmission of various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 is not limited to a method of transmitting as serial data, but may be a method of communicating as parallel data. When transmitting as parallel data, a dedicated process for transmitting as parallel data is provided as a program process, and is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at a timing when a command is stored in the ring buffer or on condition that the command is stored). Thus, each command may be transmitted at a necessary timing.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. It is provided with BC0. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even in a power-off process even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are provided when an operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a. Is output from the dispensing control board 4110 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. With this as a trigger, the main control MPU 4100a completely erases the data from the main control built-in RAM. (Cleared).

[7-2. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, and a game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 and an upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 which performs drawing control and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. And a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying hours, minutes and seconds, and a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. For adjusting the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker housed in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by rotating the knob. It comprises an adjusting volumes 4140A, a.

[7-2-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and after a lapse of a predetermined time from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls a staging operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a liquid crystal and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of a sound control unit 4160 described below. Various types of information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and light emission of various LEDs, etc., continuing over the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time the V blank signal is input) Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for managing a history of occurrence of a jackpot game state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like. ), And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c cannot hold the stored contents only for the time when the power is restored immediately after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when the power is cut off for a long time). ) Loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”). As a result, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 by providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 851, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Can no longer keep and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a runs out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When outputting a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 4 A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 is serialized for the motor drive board. The signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and the power of the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is transmitted. Motor output data for outputting a drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 And the door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 through the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits data from the LED serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided on the operation unit 400 and a detection signal from a press detection switch for detecting operation of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame. The signal is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are transmitted to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). Diagnosis of whether or not.

[7-2-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa as a center, a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviated Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I / Os. / Peripheral control WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak read and write various data via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, and various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and a peripheral control various parallel I. A dedicated controller for independently transferring data between an I / O port 4150ag and an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. To DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, a peripheral control various serial I / O port 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 4150af. In order to perform data transfer independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In addition, while reading from and writing to the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without input / output devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 4150d and peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, a peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae include a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board, a serial I / O port for a motor driving board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, a main control board serial I / O port, and a serial I / O port for obtaining operation unit information.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a predetermined period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal, a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, etc., and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output, and an upper decoration on the door frame 5 is provided. For example, a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280 is output. This LED is a high-luminance white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In this embodiment, the path between the LED and the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are electrically connected directly. As a result, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. Note that the lighting control of the LED is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 4140a, and the resistance of the volume control volume 4140a is changed by rotating the knob, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided according to the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130 provided. In this way, music and sound effects can be played from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. .

  In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a wrongdoing with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and contents relating to a game effect, etc. (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered more powerful, or the player is informed that there is a high possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player, etc.). ) Also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The volume from the mute to the maximum volume is controlled by a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 416 described later) by a program. So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the a). The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are set. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (this embodiment). In the embodiment, the notification sound set to (the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a player's misconduct due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, It is possible to increase the volume at which the sound is played, and in addition to music and sound effects, to produce a more powerful screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

[7-2-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. , Sound generation schedule data for generating sound and sound effects, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in a time-series manner. The order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is defined. Have been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission data defining the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of a built-in sound source of a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. And a track number for designating which of the plurality of tracks in the internal sound source to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when power is supplied to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copied data is read.

  The peripheral control ROM 4150b includes one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects a decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type backlight. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is obtained based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time are included. Thus, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game-board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the setting information being 75%, the correction information acquired for the 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5%. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further added by 10% which is the correction information acquired to the 75%. The backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, and the backlight is turned on.

[7-2-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 13, a peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores a backup target that exclusively stores, among various information updated by execution of various control programs, information to be backed up. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy areas 4150cd for exclusively storing copied various control programs, various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. A various control data copy area 4150ce for exclusively storing the copied data, and a backup non-management target for exclusively storing, among the various information updated by executing the various control programs, those not to be backed up. A work area 4150cf is provided.

  Note that when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including a momentary power failure or a power recovery due to a power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and is cleared to zero, Regarding the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, a power-on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 15) starts RAM clear effect. (For example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). ) Is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a V blank signal is input from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 described later). Bank0 (1fr) that exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described below occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various information. Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 4150cb to the backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. “(1fr)” indicates that, when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Therefore, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, it is appended to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The same applies to the backup information (1fr).) "(1 ms)" will be described later. As described above, every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, and thus, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively appended. (The effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4. Is set in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side. Lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 are stored in the storage area. This is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In a reception command storage area 4150cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received, and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (for an RTC 4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information obtained from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy area 4150ce are read and set. Other schedule data are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  In Bank0 (1 ms), a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like are provided. Have been. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 is stored. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. An operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150ca, which is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies is set. Includes various kinds of information (for example, the operation unit 400 receives the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc., based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, which are created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided, are set.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit regular processing described later is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, When the control unit regular processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab stores the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. −DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The door-side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. You. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf stores a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. −DAT is set, and each time the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the door data is stored in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed is set. The processing proceeds based on the processing.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmit data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It has become.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of presentation information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the effect information (1 ms) which is the content copied at high speed to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms). When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated as the effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is stored in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150 cc is managed as one page, with Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data at high speed to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms). The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc is a pair of Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr), and a pair of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms), for a total of two pairs. This area is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) as the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). The effect information (1 ms) is a backup first area 4150 cb and a backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs as effect backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-2-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da for exclusively storing backup information among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc for exclusively storing a copy of various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 15) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including a momentary power outage or a power recovery due to a power outage). The instruction to start the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, or the like) Is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management work area 4150ca, the first backup area 4150cb, and the second backup area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. When the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Is to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, .) Although the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this point, the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 4150da includes effect information (SRAM), which is various information continued over the day (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state or for managing a special effect flag). Information) is stored as a backup target exclusively for Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that indicates the size of a storage area for storing various information, and “Bank” is Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. “(SRAM)” is “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is to be backed up. , And "Bank 4" (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used in the same sense).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for exclusively storing a copy of effect information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the second backup area 4150dc, one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing this pair as one page, with the Bank1 (SRAM) and the Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and the backup second area. 4150 dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, with Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[7-2-2. LCD and sound control unit]
Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the music and sound effects from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 As shown in FIG. 12, the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 that performs sound control incorporate a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”). A VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a with a built-in sound source for performing drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are displayed. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen to be displayed; Includes the audio data transmission IC4160c to be transmitted towards the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 Al of music and sound effects and the like as audio data. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for urging the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the operation unit 400, the main body frame as viewed from the player The body frame back image data used for displaying the body frame back image in which the position of each part on the back of 3 is visible, the service mode screen image data used for displaying the service mode screen, and the break timer setting used for displaying the break timer setting screen Screen image data and screen image data during a break used for displaying a screen during a break are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various types of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data According to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, the next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to incorporate the sound source. Output to VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data every time a V blank signal is input. Then, the data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one from the top screen data.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transfers the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The extracted sound command data is set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral control ROM 4150ca. After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the RAM 4150c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data storage is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. The next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150 according to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae. Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data and the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. In each case, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one from the first sound command data.

[7-2-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is generated. A built-in VRAM is also provided (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 and outputs the image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are synchronized. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a becomes: Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data, which is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 for one screen (1). Frame data) is generated in the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and The image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 is shifted upward from the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 470. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” refers to one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The data to be generated above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 470, a V blank signal is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly varies depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Further, even in a manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may be slightly changed.

  The VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer system. This “frame buffer method” means that one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). In this system, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a stores the music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the tracks according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel numbers. The output channel is set, and the music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. Sound data and a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, and sound data and the sound volume of a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or misconduct with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is incorporated. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 4140a. Further, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special period A fixed period of time (peripheral control in this example) when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the symbol indicator (upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186) From the reception of the fluctuation pattern command by the MPU 4150a until the elapse of 0.5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern, or the reception of the special figure 1 tuning effect end command or the special figure 2 tuning effect end command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Until 0.5 seconds have passed after the final display of the decorative pattern). And to be able to adjust the sub-volume value of the effect sounds by operating the work unit 405.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized as audio data. The data is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified up to the master volume value, whereby the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 is amplified. Are set so that the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 becomes the allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among a plurality of tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are The set volume control volume 4140a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 4140a, and the combined volume of the produced sound is actually transmitted to the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3. It is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the speaker to be accommodated and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, and the notification sound is output. Indicates the sound data of the notification sound embedded in the track used and the sound of the notification sound embedded in the track used. And the maximum volume without depending on the volume control based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound. Amplify to a master volume value which becomes a volume flowing from the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and serialize the amplified notification sound to make audio data as audio data. Output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Briefly describing the control of playing a notification sound to notify a hall clerk of fraudulent acts, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track incorporating the notification sound, and the sub-volume value of the notification sound set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually compared with the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 130, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the sound does not flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, but the effect sound is generated as described above. Progressing according to schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After the elapse of the period, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed in accordance with the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute until now is equal to the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The volume value is set again (at this time, if the sub-volume value is adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted). The speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 So that the flow from 130.

  As described above, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the notification sound flows to notify the clerk of the hall, etc., of the wrongdoing to the player, the volume of the production sound is muted, and the notification sound is provided on the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3. Although the sound produced from the speaker 130 has flowed according to the sound generation schedule data, the sound produced from the speaker 130 is stored in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after a predetermined period of time. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the production sound does not start flowing again from where the notification sound started flowing. So that the start flowing again from where the notification sound is beginning to flow to proceed according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

[7-2-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is used to draw in the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and to draw in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. , And various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are stored in advance.

[7-2-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the serial data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music and sound effects matched to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of a differential system between the right and left sides of the board from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a plus signal of left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-2-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the RTC control unit 4165 that stores calendar information for specifying the year, month, and day and time information for specifying hours, minutes, and seconds is configured around an RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is employed in this embodiment) as a drive power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without supplying any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the calendar information and time information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the above-described peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information in the RTC information. The effect based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. A screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  Note that the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds not only calendar information and time information but also LED luminance setting information when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED-type backlight. I have. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted as an LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is a backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is included.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, as well as calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date, hour, minute, and second that is first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

  When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to.

  Various kinds of information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the production line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the date when the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on is inputted. It is set to the date of manufacture and the date and time of manufacture, which is hours, minutes, and seconds.

  As described above, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the luminance setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with the LED type. The information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a probability of a big hit game state occurring at a low probability or a high probability).

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the gaming panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 has an LED-type backlight, the gaming panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 The luminance decrease due to the aging of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and sets calendar information and time to specify the date. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information specifying the minute and second, and the range of the brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. Brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for performing the setting and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 which is currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, based on the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game-board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired for. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 41 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 0b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game-board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 85% further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the year, month and day and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140, and the current date and time may be specified.

[7-2-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is used to rotate the knob for controlling the volume of music or sound effect from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by turning the knob. By doing so, it can be adjusted. As described above, the volume of the volume control volume 4140a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (sound source built-in VDP 4160a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 are provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130.

  In this way, music and sound effects can be played from the speakers contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. . Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a salesclerk of a hall or the like of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1, Inform the player about the game effects (for example, an announcement that the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is more powerful or that the player is likely to shift to a game state advantageous to the player). Sound from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are made by rotating the knob. The sound flow from the mute to the maximum sound volume is controlled by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (the sound source built-in VDP4). So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the 60a).

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are set. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 is reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (this embodiment). In the embodiment, the notification sound set to (the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a player's misconduct due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, the screen developed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing By operating the operation unit 405, the mode is shifted to the setting mode, and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the period in which the customer waits and the demonstration is performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of the music or the sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume (0 (mute) to 6 (maximum)). A plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted to a desired luminance (100% to 70%). Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased, thereby producing the effect sound. The volume of the is adjusted. The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and the effect sound is updated. , But is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or the notification sound. The adjusted brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the decorative boards of the game board 4 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LEDs. Also, a screen for performing the setting mode by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the customer waiting state. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, in addition to adjusting the sub-volume value of the effect sound and the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the calendar information and the time information are reproduced. It can be set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the case where the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to keep the main frame 3 open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the hall clerk who can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, the sound volume adjusted by the hall clerk may be small for the player and difficult to hear the music and sound effects, or may be large for the player and feel loud with the music and sound effects. Therefore, after a predetermined period (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU 4150a completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) from turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the dial of the operation unit 400 is displayed according to the screen of the setting mode. By operating the operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume and the sound effect adjusted by the store clerk are small and it is difficult to hear the music and the effect sound, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume up to a desired volume. If the volume adjusted by the clerk of the hall feels loud and the music and sound effects are loud, the operation unit 400 The volume can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been playing a game for a predetermined period of time, enters a customer waiting state, and repeatedly performs a demonstration using the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, ten times). ), The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. Accordingly, if the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time feels that the adjusted volume is low and it is difficult to hear music and sound effects, this time, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A player sitting and playing a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume up to a desired volume, and previously sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game If the player who performed the game feels loudly the volume adjusted by the player and feels loud music and sound effects, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game this time uses the dial operating unit of the operation unit 400. The volume can be reduced to a desired volume by operating the 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 15 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 16 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. .

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode indicating an effect variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In addition, these various commands include an effect-related command for controlling an effect performed by the peripheral control board 4140, a notification-related command for notifying occurrence of an error, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, various commands are related to special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 tuning effect related, big hit related, power-on, ordinary figure synchronized effect related, ordinary power acting related, information display, state It is classified into indication and others.

[8-1. Special Figure 1 Synchronization Direction Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and the division includes the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. The upper special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands such as special figure 1 change pattern, special figure 1 symbol type, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and change state designation. To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG. 15).

  The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is for instructing the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 1 design type command is for specifying the outlier, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the changing state designation command is a game state (high probability state, time saving This is a command indicating a game state or the like. The change state designation command has a value corresponding to the game state and the mode value, and is transmitted at the start of the change or when the game state is switched. Other special figure 1 tuning effect-related commands include a special figure 1 change type command (status “A3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying a change type corresponding to a change pattern.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special pattern 1 fluctuation, the special figure 1 pattern type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, and the special figure 1 tuning is performed. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined). Further, the change state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 symbol type command. The special figure 1 change type command is transmitted after the special figure 1 change pattern command. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing described later.

[8-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect relation is based on the detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and as shown in FIG. The lower special symbol display 1186 is composed of a special figure 2 variation pattern, a special figure 2 symbol type, and a command named special figure 2 tuning effect end. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is specifically shown in FIG. 15).

  The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is for instructing the start of the special figure synchronizing effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 2 pattern type command is for specifying the outlier, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 tuning effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 2 tuning effect. Further, similarly to the special figure 1, a special figure 2 fluctuation type command (status “B3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying the fluctuation type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is included.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation, and the special figure 2 pattern type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, and the special figure 2 tuning effect The end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is determined). Further, as described above, similarly to the case of the special figure 1, in the case of the special figure 2, the change state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 symbol type command. The special figure 2 change type command is transmitted after the special figure 2 change pattern command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-3. Jackpot-related]
As shown in FIG. 15, the categories of jackpot-related are, as shown in FIG. , A small hit open display, a small hit count display, and a small hit ending. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The big hit opening command instructs the start of the big hit opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the opening of the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds (the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The special winning opening 2103 is instructed during the opening or opening of the N-th round of the special winning opening 2103, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is started during the closing of the special winning opening 1 between rounds (the special winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). 2103 round). The large winning opening 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11). The number of the game balls that have entered the special winning opening 2103) is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  Although only one type of status and mode is set in the big hit ending command shown in FIG. 15, a mode value may be set according to the game state after the big hit. For example, when the gaming state after the big hit is the low probability non-time saving game state, the mode value is set to “01H”, and when the gaming state after the big hit is the high probability time saving game state, the mode value is “04H”. The ending may be designated on the main control board 4100 side by setting or the like. Further, a plurality of endings may be designated even if the gaming state after the big hit is the same. For example, when the gaming state is a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the winning probability of the special lottery, so that the main control board 4100 side has a high-probability ending or a low-ending ending. May be specified. At this time, the ending may be selected on the peripheral control board 4140 side without specifying the ending with the big hit ending command.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is started during the small hit opening (while the small winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is open or small at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium and large winning opening winning effect (in the case where a game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110). The small hit ending command instructs the start of the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 opening N-th display command is issued when the big winning opening 1 of the 1st to 16th rounds is opened (the big hit of the attacker unit 2100). The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted at the time of opening the N-th round of the special winning opening 2103, and is transmitted when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the closing of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100). The mouth 1 count display command is issued when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the special winning opening 1 (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, and when the game ball entering the special winning opening 2103 is counted by the count switch). The jackpot ending command is transmitted when the jackpot ending is started. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted at the time of the small hit opening (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium-high winning opening (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 15, the section of power-on includes various commands named power-on. In this power-on command, “D * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The power-on command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, for instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on). is there).

  The transmission timing of the power-on command is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when power is restored from a power failure or momentary power failure, a main control-side power-on process described later is executed, and around step S92 in the main control-side timer interrupt process. A power-on command is transmitted in the control board command transmission process.

[8-5. Related to zuzu productions]
The general figure synchronizing effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and is divided into the normal pattern display of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the box 1189, such as start of general figure synchronizing effect, specification of general pattern effect, end of general figure synchronizing effect, and specification of state at the time of change. To these various commands, "E * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The general figure synchronizing production start command is for instructing the general figure synchronizing production start with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designating command is for specifying the disconnection, short opening, long opening. The general figure synchronizing effect end command instructs the general figure synchronizing effect end, and the fluctuation state designation command instructs the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general figure synchronizing effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 change, the general pattern designating command is transmitted immediately after the general figure synchronizing effect starts, and the general figure synchronizing effect end command is Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is determined), and the fluctuation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol omission information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-6. Ordinary electric production related)
The ordinary electric production effect-related relates to a pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by driving the starting port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. The command is composed of commands called opening per figure, open display of ordinary electric power, and ending per ordinary figure. To these various commands, “F * H” is assigned as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 15).

  The opening command per day is a command to start the opening per day, and the opening command for opening the day is started during the opening of the day. (The pair of movable pieces 2106 are expanded in the left and right directions by driving the starting port solenoid 2105.) The ending command per ordinary figure is an instruction to start the ending per ordinary figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per ordinary figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per ordinary figure, and the opening command for general electric power is transmitted at the time of opening the ordinary electric power (when the pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the driving of the starting port solenoid 2105). (When expanding in the left-right direction), and the end-of-normal-drawing command is transmitted at the start of the end-of-normal-drawing. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-7. Information display]
As shown in FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, the notification display section is composed of commands named winning award display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door open, and door close. ing. To these various commands, “6 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, shown in FIGS. 15 and 16).

  The winning prize abnormal display command indicates that a game ball enters the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the player wins the special winning opening other than during the big hit (during operation of the condition device), and the game ball is inserted. (When the count switch 2110 detects), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed. The connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electric connection in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification. The disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start switch 3022, the lower start switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. When the disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection of the unit has occurred, it indicates the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display. Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 11.

  In addition, the door opening command is used to open the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame is closed, the door frame closing command is issued, and the door frame closing command is used to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch. If it is in the state, the instruction to end the door opening notification is issued. On the other hand, based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the body frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the main frame 3 is in the opened state, the main frame opening command is issued. The main frame closing command is used to close the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch. In this state, the end of the body frame release notification is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, a winning prize display command is transmitted when a big prize hole is won other than during a big hit (during operation of the condition device). The command is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 when the command is transmitted to the controller. Are transmitted when any one of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch), The closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch), The close command is transmitted when the main body frame is closed (when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 16, the division of the status display is composed of commands called frame state 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error release navigation command (corresponding to an error release command), and frame state 2 command. I have. To these various commands, “7 * H” is assigned as a status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are each commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and a detailed description thereof will be described later. . Note that the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives “7 * H” as shown in FIG. 16 when receiving the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110. The command is set as the status, and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a adds “7 * H” as additional information to the received commands. Thus, the command is formed into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, at the time of change of the frame state, and at the time of error clearing navigation, the error clearing navigation command is transmitted at the time of error clearing navigation, and the frame state 2 command is formed at the time of power recovery , And when the frame state changes. In addition, these shaped frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

[8-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 16, the test-related section is composed of various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as the status and “** H” as the mode (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number) And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and, for example, is shown in FIG. 16).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. Inspection of various substrates such as the decorative drive amplifier substrate 194).

  The test command is transmitted at a timing other than the RAM clear and the RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control-side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing that is executed.

[8-10. Others]
The other divisions include, as shown in FIG. 16, a start opening prize, a fluctuation shortening operation end designation, a high probability end designation, a special symbol 1 memory, a special symbol 2 memory, a normal symbol memory, a special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. To these various commands, “9 * H” and “5 * H” are assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” indicates a specific number). , Which is predetermined in accordance with the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is, for example, as shown in FIG. 16).

  The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of a starting opening winning effect. When a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or the lower starting opening When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on a detection signal from the switch 2109, an instruction to win the starting port is given. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs a state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state. The high probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191 displays the variation of the special symbol). The number of balls that have not been used yet (number of reserves). The special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol display 1186 is displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191. The number of balls that have not been used yet (number of reserves). The normal symbol storage command is a normal symbol 1 reserved 0 to 4 (a game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. 8 and is still used for the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191. The number of balls that have not been held (number of reserves).

  The special symbol 1 reservation number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls increases (when the number of reservations increases when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101). The special symbol 2 reservation number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls increases (when the number of reservations increases when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102). The special symbol 1 reserved number designation command and the special symbol 2 reserved number designation command are prefetched when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are “1”, and prefetched when the upper bit of the mode value is “0”. Represents none. When the special symbol 1 hold number designation command is prefetching, before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol display on the special display 1185 on the function display board 1191, the special symbol is read ahead and the special symbol is reserved. An instruction is given to start a pre-reading effect to announce the display result of the upper special symbol display 1185 based on 1 hold. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 reservation number designation command is prefetching, the prefetching is performed before the special symbol 2 reservation is used for the special symbol change display on the special symbol display 1186 below the function display board 1191. An instruction is given to start a look-ahead effect to announce the display result of the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 reservation. The symbol type prefetch command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the variation type prefetch command are transmitted when transmitting the special symbol reservation number designation command. It should be noted that these commands may be transmitted only when the special symbol reservation number designation command is prefetched.

  The symbol type prefetch command is used to specify a miss at the time of prefetch, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The variation pattern prefetch command specifies an effect pattern (variation pattern) in a mode at the time of prefetching. The variation type prefetch command specifies the variation type in the mode at the time of prefetch.

  The ordinary symbol type pre-reading effect command is read in advance by the ordinary symbol display 1189 based on the ordinary symbol reservation before the ordinary symbol hold is used for the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191. This is for instructing the start of a pre-reading effect to announce the display result. In addition, as for the ordinary symbols, an ordinary symbol storage command, an ordinary symbol type prefetch command, and an ordinary symbol variation pattern prefetch command corresponding to prefetching may be prepared. Unless otherwise specified, the term “look-ahead” refers to the look-ahead of a special symbol.

  In addition, when performing the pre-reading determination, as described later, the same processing as at the start of the fluctuation is performed to generate a command including an effect pattern or a symbol. Since it becomes impossible for the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the command to distinguish between the start of the change and the winning of the starting opening, only the status value is changed with the same mode value.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting port winning command is a starting port winning command (when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, or a lower starting port switch). When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. 5 is mainly transmitted by voice to notify the user of the change, and the command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is performed at the end of the suspension period after the fluctuation has been determined after the reduction of the specified number of fluctuations has been completed. After). The high-probability-end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the elapse of the off-period stop period) after the change is determined after the number of high probabilities has been exhausted in the case of “high probability N times”.

  The special symbol 1 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 1 operation pending balls changes (a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the special symbol indicator 1185 on the function display board 1191 is still used to display a special symbol change display). In a state where there is no pending number, when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the pending number increases, the upper special symbol display 1185 is used to display a special symbol from the reserved number. Sent when the number of suspensions decreases). The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 2 operation reserve balls changes (a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 and the special symbol indicator 1186 on the function display board 1191 is still used to display the special symbol change). In the state where there is a number of reserves that are not held, when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves is increased, the lower special symbol display 1186 is used to display a special symbol change display. Sent when the number of suspensions decreases). The normal symbol storage command is used when the number of normal symbol 1 operation reserved balls changes (the number of reserved balls that have not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 when the game ball passes through the gate 2350). In a certain state, when the game ball further passes through the gate unit 2350 and the number of reserves increases, or when the number of reserves is reduced from the number of reserves by using the normal symbol display 1189 to display the variation of the normal symbol. ). As with the special symbol, a normal symbol reservation number designation command that changes depending on the presence or absence of pre-reading may be transmitted for the ordinary symbol. As with the special symbol, the presence or absence of prefetching is indicated by hitting the upper 4 bits of the mode value.

  The normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is transmitted when the number of normal symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (when the number of reserved balls increases after the game balls pass through the gate unit 2350). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing.

  Further, instead of the normal symbol type prefetching effect command, the normal symbol variation pattern prefetch command and the normal symbol type prefetch command, such as the normal symbol variation pattern and the standard symbol type prefetch command, may be transmitted separately. . In the present embodiment, the normal symbol type prefetch effect command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the normal symbol hold number designation command.However, it is not necessary to limit the command to the normal symbol type prefetch effect command. It may be transmitted prior to the symbol hold number designation command. The same applies to the case of transmitting a prefetch command relating to a normal symbol variation pattern (normal symbol variation pattern prefetch command) and a symbol type of a normal symbol (normal symbol type prefetch command) instead of the normal symbol type prefetch effect command.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is a starting opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109). (When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal of the above), the speaker mainly provided by the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly outputs the sound. However, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 12 uses the starting port winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to sound notification from the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also monitors for the presence or absence of fraud. It is a specification that it is also used for. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start-up winning command, and the speaker contained in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. There is also a specification that does not notify by voice from 130.

  Further, in addition to the above-mentioned command, for example, a gaming machine related information command for transmitting gaming machine related information including model information of the gaming machine may be transmitted. The gaming machine related information command is transmitted from the main board to the peripheral board as a predetermined opportunity. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the gaming machine related information command can execute effect control according to the model information included in the gaming machine related information. For example, the main control board is configured to always transmit the normal symbol type prefetch effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 when there is a model that executes the prefetch effect based on the normal symbol hold and a model that does not execute the prefetch effect. If the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the model is capable of executing the prefetching effect based on the normal symbol hold based on the gaming machine related information command, the normal symbol type prefetching effect transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 is performed. While the command is processed as a valid command to enable the general-purpose prefetching effect, if it is determined that the model does not allow the general-purpose prefetching effect, the command is discarded as an invalid command. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the processing in the main control board 4100 even when there is a model that can execute the pre-reading effect and a model that cannot.

  Note that the main control board 4100 may transmit the gaming machine related information command at a predetermined timing such as a process executed only once when the power is turned on (one before S10 to S46 in FIG. 17). Or, a plurality of times during the game (when the starting mouth winning, the start of the change, the big hit (hit if the usual figure), the game state changes, etc., when the predetermined conditions such as the change of the game state, etc., the execution of the timer interrupt processing (Periodic timing). The transmission at the time of power-on is not limited to the transmission during the power-on process, as long as the process is performed at the time of power-on. For example, when the power is turned on, a gaming machine related information command is generated and stored in the command buffer in advance, and is stored in the command buffer while the normal processing (main processing, timer interrupt processing) after the power-on processing is completed is executed. The transmission of the gaming machine related information command is also included.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, based on the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, if the effect is executable on the peripheral control board 4140, it is processed as a valid command. It is configured to discard the command as an invalid command. Therefore, even when the effect to be executed differs depending on the model of the gaming machine, the control program for the main control board 4100 can be shared, and the control program for the main control board 4100 can be developed for each model. This eliminates the need to perform the test, and shortens the development period and the test period in a testing organization.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and then, processes of an initial value update type counter, main control-side power-on processing, main control-side timer interrupt processing, and the like will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a big hit for use in determining an initial value of the big hit determination random number. A random number for determining an initial value for determination, a random number for reach determination for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a big hit game state is not generated, an upper special symbol display 1185 and a lower special symbol The random number for the variable display pattern to be used for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variable displayed on the display 1186, and derived by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the big hit game state is generated. For the big hit symbol used to determine the big hit symbol to be displayed, and for the big hit symbol used to determine the initial value of this big hit symbol random number Period value determination for the random number, and the like are available. The above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol is a random number for the small hit symbol used for determining the small hit symbol which is derived and displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when generating the small hit game state. Also used as. On the other hand, the above-described random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value is also used as a random number for determining a small hit symbol initial value for use in determining an initial value of the small hit symbol random number. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol hit determination used for determining whether or not the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed, and an initial value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit determination are used. A random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like used for determining a variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 are prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination is constituted by hardware (random number generation circuit) built in the chip, and a predetermined fixed numerical value range (from a minimum value to a maximum value by a predetermined arithmetic expression) In the present embodiment, the values are updated according to a certain rule so that all values appear within the value 0 as the minimum value and the value 32767) as the maximum value. Thereby, an unbiased random value can be extracted. The random number value is updated based on a 10 MHz internal system clock obtained by dividing a 20 MHz clock output from the crystal oscillator into two by the main control MPU 4100a. Further, when the update of the random number sequence for one cycle is completed, the random number array of the new cycle is updated so as to be different from the random number array of another cycle. As described above, since the arrangement of the random number sequence generated in each cycle is different, it is difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  The above-mentioned random numbers are so-called hardware random numbers, but may be random numbers (software random numbers) updated (generated) by software. Specifically, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 and the maximum value is 32767). Then, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by one each time a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. The counter counts up from the random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value to the maximum value, and then increases from the minimum value (value 0) to the initial value determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value. Count up. Every time the one-cycle update of the big hit determination random number is completed, the start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the big hit determination random number is determined based on the big hit determination initial value determination random number, and the determined start value The update is sequentially repeated again from. Such a method of updating the counter is referred to as an “initial value update type counter”. The random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. On the other hand, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by the same method as the above-described method of updating the big hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number is determined by the counter for updating the big hit determination random number. The start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the jackpot determination random number is determined based on the random number, and the update is sequentially repeated again from the determined start value, but the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. If the game information is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a as a numerical value in a main control-side power-on process described later, a checksum value (sum Value does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (when the power is turned off). When clearing the area, the jackpot determination random number is extracted for each main control MPU 4100a, and an ID code having a different value is set for each main control MPU 4100a, and the big hit determination random number is determined based on the extracted ID code. The random number is set as a start value of the random number, and the big hit determination random number is updated from the start value. Therefore, an initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value (ID code) is performed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the big hit determination random number is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set in the jackpot determination random number is derived using the ID code, and the ID code is mainly stored in the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. A first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even when an external device is used and an initial value deriving process is performed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, while being stored as individual information for each control MPU 4100a. Accordingly, the analysis is performed by taking two-step security measures by the second security measure that the starting value of the random number for jackpot determination always derives the same fixed value for each main control MPU 4100a based on the ID code. Is prevented. Note that instead of the ID code, the initial value of the random number for jackpot determination may be set by extracting the above-mentioned hardware random number. As a result, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, a different start value of the big hit determination random number can be set each time even for the same game board, and security can be further enhanced.

  Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a and using the extracted ID code as the initial value of the big hit determination random number will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method, disassembles the game board 4, and stores an ID code previously stored in nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if the value of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value can be grasped, the ID code is assigned a unique code to identify the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code previously stored in the nonvolatile storage means built in the main control MPU provided in another game board. That is, in the other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number matches the big hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 4. In other words, since the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is useless at all in another game board, that is, in another pachinko game machine, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the ID code is obtained. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at intervals and a game ball is thrown into the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 at predetermined intervals, a big hit gaming state cannot be generated.

[9-2. Movement of counter of initial value update type]
When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when clearing the RAM), the initial value update type counter takes out the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile storage means of the main control MPU 4100a, and based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for constantly deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number is performed, and the derived fixed value is set. In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the fixed value to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the random value for the jackpot determination is updated as a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot determination. An initial value lottery process is performed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is In the third cycle, the value is counted up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) in the low probability, and is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value is read in the high probability. 32767 is set, and is read from the probability change determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, the present embodiment exemplifies a case in which the value 10 to the value 209 is set for the low probability and the value 10 to the value 339 is set for the high probability as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). In other words, in the low probability, the number of random numbers (big random numbers for judging jackpots) is 200, and in the high probability, the number of random numbers (large random numbers for big hits) is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random numbers to be simultaneously acquired is 200 In addition, for example, the number is a prime number. That is, in the present embodiment, if the random number acquisition time is different from the jackpot determination random number, the number of the random number value that becomes the jackpot can be made not a prime number. In the present embodiment, the small hits described above are, for example, the number (50) of the big hits determined by dividing the number (200) of the big hit symbols with a low probability by 4 (50).

  Considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the big hit judgment value range (big hit judgment range) has a minimum value and a maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) of the above. In such a case, a period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the timing when the value becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and this value 10 In comparison with the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value drawing process is much lower in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) And the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is better than the latter. The probability of the lottery being performed by the initial value lottery process is extremely lower than the range. Then, for example, the timing at which the value of the counter of the initial value updating type becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is upwardly started by irradiating the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 with radio waves. If a fraudulent act is performed as if the ball has entered the mouth 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter is set to one of the values of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range). Can be said to be high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. If the value is set to a range closer to the maximum value side, the timing before the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 becomes a value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). The period between the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability and the value 31767 for high probability) is reached, and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability and value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) When compared with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value drawing process is much higher in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared with the latter range. Therefore, the probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely high. Then, the counter of the initial value update type has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (the value 32667 for the low probability and the value 31767 for the high probability) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). Of these, one of the values becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process and is set in the random number for the jackpot determination initial value determination described above. It counts up, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , From the value obtained in the lottery to the maximum value.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is between the intermediate value between the minimum value and the maximum value (value 16384) and the maximum value side in both of the low probability and the high probability. When the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes 0, the value before the first value (low hit determination range) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is set. The period up to the time when the probability becomes the value 32667 and the value with the high probability becomes the value 31767) is irregular and rich in randomness. Thus, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is raised by radiating radio waves toward the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102. Even if a fraudulent act of pretending to be in the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the counter of the initial value update type is one of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the second cycle The required time is time T0. In the third cycle from time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . In the fourth cycle from time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . As described above, in the counter of the initial value update type, the counter to be updated has a fluctuation with respect to the time when the updated value becomes the minimum value (initial value) of the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range). (By removing the) from the player.

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on processing according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the above-described main control program executes a main control-side power-on process under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as shown in FIGS. Do. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control program sets a stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates an address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address to a stack pointer, and from this initial address, loads the contents of a register, a return address, and the like on the stack. Then, the stack pointer is returned to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC. The comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs a comparison result by comparing a voltage between +24 V and a reference voltage or comparing a voltage between +12 V and a reference voltage. This comparison result indicates that the logic becomes HI when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, and is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC is started. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, with its logic being LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC, and changes the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, until the latch state is set. The state can be inverted and output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12), and determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of electric power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. This determination is made based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, as the power failure notice signal.

  In step S14, if there is no input of the power failure notice signal even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program executes the power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, and the logic thereof is set to HI. Is input to Thereby, main control MPU 4100a can set D-type flip-flop MIC to the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC outputs a power failure notice signal from its output terminal 1Q when it latches a state in which the logic is input to the preset terminal PR terminal as LOW.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game-side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs to the main control MPU 4100a an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 being operated. It depends on whether or not it is done. The main control program determines, based on the logical value of the operation signal, that it does not instruct RAM clear when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, and operates the operation switch 952. While it is determined that the operation switch 952 has not been operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM is to be cleared, and the operation switch 952 is determined to be operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 952 is operated, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clearing process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time from power-on. (Game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. The flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted, and to a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In the wait timer process 2, the system shown in FIG. 7 for performing the drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 is started (FIG. 7). Boot). In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the game information is erased, and the value 0 when the game information is not erased. When the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off process (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, a checksum value (sum value), and a value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the power-off process on the main control side has been completed normally, and is set to a value 1 if the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally completed.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as power recovery ( Step S32). This setting includes setting a value of 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, reading power recovery information from a ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and recovering the power. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, `` power recovery '' means, besides the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is turned off, the state where the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, the fact that high frequency has been irradiated, and reset, It also includes the status after returning.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S24, that is, when erasing the game information, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Or, if the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (it is the value 0) in step S30, that is, if the main control-side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control program executes the entire main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control-side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 (payout control-side power-on operation control means). More specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Also, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 indicates that the game information is to be erased, when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is cut off. When the processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in the nonvolatile storage means of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and the big hit determination random number is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set as a jackpot determination initial value determining random number used for determining the initial value of the above described jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S36, the main control program sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified as power-on shown in FIG. 15 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared and initial setting has been performed is generated. Test commands for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are generated as shown in FIG. 16 and are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a later-described main control timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control-side main processing is started, the main control program issues an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch). The execution of the game control-side RAM clear processing triggered by the receipt is regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time-sharing to convert the detection signal input in response to the operation of the operation switch 952 into the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear processing is executed upon the input (the game control side power-on operation control means), and the execution of the RAM clear processing is restricted after the predetermined time has elapsed even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is treated as a release switch for releasing an error notification associated with an error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 952 (error canceling unit), which should have been used to cancel the error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced with a game storage unit for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM serving as a payout storage unit described later) as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process, or after a predetermined time elapses, It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball payout operation.

  Next, the main control program sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). By setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in order, the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S48 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  When there is no input of the power failure notice signal in step S48, the main control program performs a non-hit random number update process (step S50). In the non-hit random number updating process, the above-described random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for initial value determination for large hit symbols, random numbers for initial value determination for small hit symbols, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated. The above-described random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit number random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S50, the process returns to step S46, where the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and determines in step S48 whether a power failure warning signal has been input. If there is no signal input, non-hit random number update processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs the interrupt disable setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same processing as the processing that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program includes a starting port solenoid 2105, attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B, an upper special symbol display 1185, a lower special symbol indicator 1186, an upper special symbol memory display 1184, and a lower special symbol memory indicator. The drive signals output to 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, and the like are stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum is calculated by assuming that the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum thereof.

  Subsequent to step S56, the main control program sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, as described above.

  Following the step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer is not set to be cleared. For this reason, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and thereafter the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control-side power-on process again. The processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control-side power-off processing".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S30, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally. Has been inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

[9-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control timer interrupt process.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a in the main control board 4100 (step S70). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control-side power-on processing (main control-side main processing).

  Subsequent to step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). Clearing this interrupt flag allows other interrupts to occur. Further, the clearing of the interrupt flag may be executed after all the processes in the timer interrupt process are completed. In this way, the management of the interrupt process is further simplified by preventing multiple interrupts due to the occurrence of another interrupt during the timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S74). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, respective detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting game balls entering the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and enters the special winning opening 2103. A detection signal from the count switch 2110 for detecting a game ball, a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, and a lower signal for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102. A detection signal from the starting port switch 2109, a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, a detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting cheating using a magnet, and a prize ball described later. From the payout control board 4110 that notifies the payout control board 4110 that the payout ball command transmitted in the control processing has been normally received. Reading 払主 ACK signal, respectively, stored in the input information storage area as the input information. Further, a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 and a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102 are read. And the other start port winning command corresponding to the command shown in FIG. 15 is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and when there is a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109, The start port winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting game balls entering the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 and a count switch 2110 for detecting gaming balls entering the special winning opening 2103 are provided. , A detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper starting port 2101, and a detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting port 2102. , And a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2350 is read first as the first time when this switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. Are read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there were no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the main control program outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting switch 3022, the lower starting switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 for the first time. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice to compare the third time and the reading twice to compare the second to the fourth time, the erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, and the like is performed. Can be avoided, so that the reliability of detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting switch 3022, the lower starting switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 is improved. be able to.

  Subsequent to step S74, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S76). In the timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 are turned on in accordance with the special symbol and the variable display pattern determined in the special electric accessory control process described later, the normal symbol and the later described The payout control board 4110 normally sends various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in addition to the time during which the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process. When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal notifying that the ACK signal has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a hit random number update process (step S78). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described large hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for initial value determination for a jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, the random number for the big hit determination, the random number for the big hit symbol, and the random number for the small hit symbol are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination). Counts up.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value update type counter, and a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value It is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 to the value every time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) to the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determining random number is updated by this hit random number update processing. The random number for determining a jackpot determination initial value can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. The above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by the hit random number updating process. The normal symbol hit determination random numbers and the like are the same as the above-described method of updating the big hit determination random numbers, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are processed by the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. The non-hit random number updating process in step S50 in the main main process) and the hit random number updating process in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt process of the main routine are updated. When the number of executions of the non-hit random number updating process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated due to unevenness in the processing time of The random number for determining the jackpot determination initial value, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are determined in step S50. Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs award ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control processing, the main control program reads input information from the above-described input information storage area and creates a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on the input information. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. The main control program transmits the created award ball command and the self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data.

  Further, in the prize ball control processing, the main control program executes a prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code. For example, the main control program is output from the count switch 2110 in response to reception of a game ball into the special winning opening 2103. When the detection information based on the detected signal is written in the corresponding definition bit areas defined one bit at a time over several minutes of the special winning opening 2103, for example, 15 balls as prize balls A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to pay out, and transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  In the present embodiment, since two special winning openings 2103 are provided as special winning openings, the main control program executes the above-described definition bit regions in a plurality of definition bit regions prepared in advance in the main control RAM. From among them, two definition bits for the special winning opening 2103 are used. Hereinafter, these are referred to as a “first bit area” and a “second bit area”, respectively. In the case of a gaming board having, for example, one large winning port, one defined bit area is used. These used definition bit areas are, for example, 1 bit and are adjacent to each other. When a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103, for example, “1” is written into the first definition bit area, for example, the fourth bit, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening that has recognized that the game ball has been accepted, for example, by writing “0” to prepare for the reception of the next game ball.

  Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit area is to be checked. For example, if the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the special winning opening 2103 is assumed to be the fourth bit, for example, the pachinko gaming machine having only one special winning opening as in the present embodiment will be described. In this case, the main control program obtains information on the fourth bit definition bit area.

  Further, the main control program executes a mask process on the detection information thus obtained in accordance with a winning ball effective range of the special winning opening 2103 described later, creates a winning ball command, and writes the command in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether output should not be performed to the payout control board 4110. If it is determined that the prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program performs, for example, a forced process as a mask process on each definition bit area in which the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is written. May be set to OFF ("0") so that the award ball command is not written in the transmission information storage area.

  In this prize ball control process, the main control program, in the first special game state, the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received in the special winning opening 2103, When written in the above-mentioned definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the transmission information storage area described above is created. Write to. At the same time, the main control program writes a prize sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits the command to the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the speaker, The sound of "Pokon" is output.

  On the other hand, in the first special game state, the main control program sends detection information based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been received to the special winning opening 2103 to the special winning opening 2103. If it is not written in the corresponding definition bit area, for example, no prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to pay out 15 balls as prize balls. In this case as well, the main control program writes a prize sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means). The payout operation of the game ball is prevented from being executed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the above defined bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103, clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110, and sets a state where the payout of the game ball is permitted. I do.

  At this time, the main control program, when paying out the game balls equal to or more than the prescribed payout number that can be paid out in response to the acceptance of the game balls into the special winning opening 2103, an excessive winning abnormal command (not shown in FIG. 16). ) Is written in the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in a command transmission process (step S92). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a causes the speaker to perform a predetermined notification.

  In this way, since illegal payout of the game balls is substantially prevented, damage to the game hall (game hall) can be minimized.

  On the other hand, if the main control program detects the acceptance of the game ball into the special winning opening 2103 instead, it immediately writes the excessive winning abnormal command in the transmission information storage area and controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a. May be notified to a speaker.

  After that, the main control program reads out the prize ball command from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  As described above, when a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103, whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning can be confirmed by hearing.

  On the other hand, if the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control program determines whether the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 have the same command. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs a frame command receiving process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the above-described frame command receiving process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, information for notifying the payout control board 4110 of the reception is output as output information in the output information storage of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error release) classified into the status display of FIG. The navigation command and the frame state 2 command) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. Here, the frame state 1 command corresponds to a first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to a first error release command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state relating to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the game is not in the jackpot game state, and the count switch 2110 detects that a game ball has entered the special winning opening 2103, the main control program is executed. Then, a prize abnormal display command which is classified into the notification display shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches a hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the big hit symbol random number value. Then, when the probability change transition condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state, and when the probability change state is not satisfied, the game state is shifted to a game state other than the probability change state (winning probability control). means). Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high-probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low-probability state). Details of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal so as to light the upper special symbol display 1185 according to the variable display pattern determined at the time of starting winning according to the type of the special symbol, or sets the lower special symbol display. The output of the lighting signal is set so as to light 1186, and the output is stored in the output information storage area as output information. For example, when the main control program shifts to the big hit game state, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1) classified into the big hit relation shown in FIG. (A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the attacker solenoid 2108A or The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108B is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the number of times (round) in which the special winning opening 2103 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, the main control program performs two rounds so as to light a two round display lamp (not shown) of the round display 1190. The output of the lighting signal to the display lamp is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the number of rounds is six, the round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the six round display lamp is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. When the number of rounds is twelve, the twelve round display lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 12-round display lamp is set so as to cause it to be stored in the output information storage area as output information, Und is stored in the output information storage area as output information to set the output of the lighting signal to the 16 rounds indicator lamp to turn on the 16 rounds indicator lamp round display 1190 (not shown) when a 16 times. In addition, the main control program sets an output of a lighting signal to the gaming state indicator 1183 so as to light in a predetermined color whether or not there is a transition to the probability variation state, and stores the output in the output information storage area as output information.

  By the way, in a general pachinko game machine, starting with a prize for starting a game ball, a special symbol is subsequently displayed and a big hit lottery is executed. When the condition is satisfied, the lighting mode of the so-called probability change lamp as the game state indicator is changed, and the state shifts to the probability change state. In the probability fluctuating state, the probability of the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and the jackpot is achieved. As described above, as the gaming machine which may shift to the probability variation state after the probability variation state ends, mainly, the probability variation state is continued until the next big hit, as if the big hit game is looped. (Hereinafter referred to as a "loop machine"), and a machine which continues the probability fluctuation state until the number of times the special symbol changes to a predetermined number after the big hit game is completed (hereinafter, "ST (special time) machine") "). As described above, in the pachinko gaming machines of the models in which the method of maintaining the probability fluctuation state is different, the control of the above-mentioned gaming state indicator is different, and in the development stage, the control of the gaming state indicator must be designed for each model one by one. It was difficult to improve development efficiency.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, the main control program determines whether or not a winning condition is satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied. In this case, while the normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, if the winning condition is satisfied and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is relatively set as compared to the normal gaming state. The state is shifted to the probability fluctuation state set higher, and the display state of the gaming state display 1183 is set to the lighting state. When the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is satisfied, the main control program changes the display state of the gaming state display 1183 in a state in which the probability fluctuation state is continued to a certain interrupt cycle. Then, the display state of the gaming state indicator 1183 is changed from the light-off state to the light-on state again within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

  More specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied after the game ball is received in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102. (Lottery means), when the winning condition is satisfied, the game is shifted from the normal game state to the big hit game state, and when the winning condition is satisfied and the probable change transfer condition is satisfied, the winning condition is satisfied. The state is shifted to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability is set relatively higher than the normal game state (game state control means). The main control program sets the display state of the game state display 1183 to the lighting state while the probability fluctuation state continues, and displays the game state display 1183 when the game state transitions to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state. Is turned off (lighting mode control means). The main control program sets the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 to the lighting state upon the transition to the probability fluctuation state described above, and thereafter, when the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, After the display state of the gaming state indicator 1183 is temporarily turned off from a lighting state in a certain interrupt cycle in a state where the probability fluctuation state is continued, a game is performed in the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the state indicator 1183 is changed from the unlit state to the lit state again (the lighting state continuation control means). Although the player wants the player to visually recognize that the probability fluctuation state continues, even if the display mode of the game state display 1183 is changed for a very short time in this manner, It is possible for the player to visually recognize that the display state of the gaming state indicator 1183 has not changed.

  In this way, it is difficult for the eyes of the player to visually recognize that the light has been turned off, and the player can visually recognize the light-on state as if the light-up state is continued. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability variation state continues continuously, the probability variation state continues until the special symbol changes to the specified number of times after the big hit game state ends. In addition, even if the so-called ST (special time) machine which shifts to the probability fluctuating state again when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified number of fluctuations, a program code for controlling the display mode of the gaming state display 1183 between different models. Can be shared. This makes it possible to improve the development efficiency of pachinko gaming machines of different models.

  Further, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal game state to the big hit game state when the winning condition is satisfied as described above. If the certainty transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the game state is also shifted to the certainty game state as an example of the specific game state (game state control means). Here, the main control program may shift to the certain-variable game state as an example of the specific game state, without substantially paying out the game balls in the big hit game state. Note that the specific game state may be a state in which a time-saving operation condition as another example of the transition condition is satisfied and the time-saving function is operating, or both of the game modes may be simultaneously performed in addition to the above-described probable change game state. It may be in a state. The main control program manages the remaining number of times of changing and displaying the special symbols during a period from a certain gaming state to another gaming state, and transmits the gaming state information representing the managed gaming state to the transmission information. In the transmission information storage area, and thereafter, in the same timer interrupt period, the command is transmitted in a command transmission process S92 described later (game state notification means).

  Specifically, if the main control program satisfies the above-described probable change transition condition, the special symbol is variably displayed until the game state transitions to a game state other than the probable change game state, for example, the normal game state. The information on the number of times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number information”) is transmitted after being included in any command transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. By writing the information in the transmission information storage area, the information is transmitted in a command transmission process S92, which will be described later, within the same timer interrupt period (remaining change count notification means). Note that the main control program may include the above-described remaining number information in other commands, or may transmit the information to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

  By the way, a subroutine that is a program module constituted by a set of program codes is generally called by a CALL instruction included in a main routine and executed after a program code group included in the program module is executed. Is configured to return to the main routine by a return instruction. In this case, since an instruction for calling back is required, it seems at first glance that it is difficult to reduce the program capacity.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the main routine includes successive subroutines, for example, instead of the main routine calling and executing the first subroutine with a CALL instruction and then successively calling the next subroutine with another CALL instruction, Alternatively, the return instruction may not be placed at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, and may be directly connected to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine. With a program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S88). Details of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate passing processing is performed based on the input information. In the processing at the time of passing through the gate, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal based on the result of the determination, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information. To memorize.

  Further, following the processing at the time of passing through the gate, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random number for a normal symbol hit determination from the read gate information, and executes the main control program. It is determined whether or not it matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in the ROM in advance (referred to as “normal lottery”). The main control program determines whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106 according to the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the main control program performs the opening / closing operation according to this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened to enter a game state in which game balls can be received in the lower starting port 2102, and the game state is advantageous to the player. Move to

  Further, the main control program determines the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the above-mentioned determination based on the value of the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern described above, and classifies the variation display pattern related to the ordinary symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. Various kinds of commands are generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and a lighting signal of the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on so as to light the ordinary symbol display 1189 in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program determines whether or not the normal symbol combination effect shown in FIG. Are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2105 is set to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106, and the output information described above is output information. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program executes the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. The normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined on the basis of the above, the various commands classified into the general figure synchronizing effect shown in FIG. 15 are created, stored as the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the determined normal is determined. The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display 1189 is set so that the ordinary symbol display 1189 is illuminated in accordance with the symbol variation display pattern, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs a port output process (step S90). In this port output processing, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and outputs various signals based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 4110 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on output information. Or a driving signal is output to the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B for opening and closing the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 when the jackpot is in the jackpot gaming state, and a starting opening solenoid for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 2106. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the 2105, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a 6-round jackpot information output signal, a 12-round jackpot information output signal, a 16-round jackpot information output signal, a probability variation information output signal, and a special symbol display Information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Output information, and outputs various information (game information) signal to the payout control board 4110 regarding the game, such as start-up hole winning information output signal.

  Subsequent to step S90, the main control program performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads out transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main circumference serial data (command Transmission means). This transmission information includes various commands, which are created in the main control timer interrupt processing of this routine and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, and various kinds of special figure 2 tuning effect related shown in FIG. Command, various commands classified into the jackpot connection (for example, a special winning opening 1 count corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the count switch 2110 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2103 is detected) Display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as a general-purpose synchronizing effect, various commands classified as a normal electric role-related effect, various types classified as a notification display shown in FIG. Commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) and various commands (frame Position 1. command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  As the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, a command that is stored in a ring buffer as a command transmission buffer and is output first is used. The main control program transmits the commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order in which the commands are stored in the command transmission buffer. For example, in the same timer interrupt process, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86) is executed, and then the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S88) is executed. Since the command is stored in the buffer for command transmission before the pre-reading command related to the general drawing, the pre-reading command related to the special figure is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in preference to the pre-reading command related to the general drawing. You.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140 (production control unit) A frame state 1 command (a second error occurrence command) is transmitted to the CPU (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program To send an error clearing navigation command (second error clearing command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error canceling navigation command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as an error canceling navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program 4140 ( The main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command transmitting means, second main body frame transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 4140 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (the main body frame command transmitting means, the second main body frame command transmitting means, and the second specific frame command transmitting means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (door frame command sending unit, second door frame command sending unit, second specific frame command sending unit). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the main control program executes the peripheral control board 4140 (production control). ) Is transmitted to the first unit (the second unit closing command) (the second unit closing command transmitting unit). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S92, the main control program sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

  Subsequent to step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96), and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the main control MPU 4100a saves the contents of the general-purpose registers on a stack by hardware. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets interruption permission after the return in step S96.

[9-5. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process according to the present embodiment. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process, the main control program updates the above-described big hit determination random number by +1 by a counter, and accepts a game ball to the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, that is, Upon the start winning (satisfaction of the start condition), the value of the above-described counter is taken out for each start storage information (start information) in which the start condition is satisfied, and is set as the random number value for the jackpot. It is determined whether or not it matches a jackpot determination value stored in advance in a built-in ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also referred to as “special lottery”. The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on a lottery result, and when the random number for the jackpot matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied). , The normal game state is shifted to the big hit game state. The big hit game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, and indicates a game state collectively referred to as these.

  The main control program, when determining the jackpot game mode, as data for defining the mode of the jackpot game set in the jackpot game mode determination process, for example, the number of rounds, opening time of the big winning opening for each round, One of the main control built-in RAMs, in which the definition data (table) indicating the closing time of the special winning opening for each round and the number of game ball winning limit counts is specified by an address offset according to the number of the special winning openings. The data is read from a definition data area (not shown) which is a storage area of the unit. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not a game ball has won a lower large winning opening (large winning opening 1) ( Step S100). When the gaming ball has won the lower winning opening (result of step S100 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command indicating that the lower winning opening has been won is set (step S102).

  Similarly, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the upper winning prize port (large prize port 2) (step S104). When the gaming ball has won the upper winning opening (the result of step S104 is "yes"), a special winning opening winning designation command indicating that the upper winning opening has been won is set (step S106). The count switch 2110 detects whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening. Further, when each of the winning designation commands is set, the detection is not limited to the detection by the count switch, and the corresponding special winning opening is opened and when each of the winning designation commands is detected by the count switch. May be set. The condition for determining that the special winning opening is in the open state may be the gaming state according to S142 to S146, or the special symbol / special electric accessory operation number may be a value corresponding to S142 to S146. It may be.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has passed the upper gate (combination operation gate) (Step S112). If the game ball has passed through the upper gate (result of step S112 is "yes"), a combination operation gate passing command indicating that the game ball has passed through the upper gate is set (step S110).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won a start winning port (an upper starting port 2101 and a lower starting port 2102). First, a starting port 1 identification value is set in a starting port identification area indicating a starting port to be determined for winning (step S112).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 (Step S114). Whether or not a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 is determined by whether or not there is a detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022. Specifically, in the switch input process of step S74 in the main-control-side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This is performed based on the input information.

  When a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 4100a executes a starting port winning process (step S116). In the opening mouth winning process, a starting mouth winning command transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting mouth is set, a random number for jackpot determination or the like is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, a special symbol, For example, a process for executing a prefetch effect is executed. The details of the start-up winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a sets the starting port 2 identification value in the starting port identification area (Step S118), and determines whether or not a game ball has won the lower starting port 2102 (Step S120). If a game ball has won the lower starting port 2102 (result of step S120 is "yes"), a starting port winning process is executed as in the case of the upper starting port 2101 (step S122). The starting port 1 discriminating value and the starting port 2 discriminating value are used as starting port prize processing so that a common starting port prize processing can be executed between the upper starting port prize and the lower starting port prize. Based on each identification value, information for identifying whether the process being executed is a winning process by the upper starting port or a lower winning port process, and is referred to in the starting-port winning process or This is a value that is set so that a data table to be set and an area for storing winning information can be identified.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a executes a corresponding process based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number, which is a game progress state variable in which the type of branch process executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process proceeds to the branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and special electric accessory control. The process ends. Note that the value of the game progress state variable and the like stored in the game progress state storage area are game information, and are backed up in the main control-side power-off process.

  In the process of step S130, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as a branch process, a special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a special symbol change process (step S132), a special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), Symbol loss stop processing (Step S136), special symbol jackpot stop processing (Step S138), interval processing before opening a special winning opening (Step S140), processing of opening a special winning opening (Step S142), processing during closing of a special winning opening (Step S144) ), A special winning opening opening interval process (step S146), a winning combination operation gate valid waiting process (step S148), or a winning combination operation gate valid process (step S150).

  In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), the special symbol change in the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. Processing for starting display is performed.

  In the special symbol changing process (step S132), a process of controlling the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is performed.

  In the special symbol big hit determination process (step S134), based on the game ball having entered the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, whether the special symbol that has started to change and fixed and stopped generates a big hit gaming state. Is determined.

  In the special symbol losing stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the process of stopping the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 and notifying the user of the fact is performed. Do.

  In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when a big hit game state is generated, a process of stopping the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 and notifying the user of the change is performed. Do.

  In the interval process before the opening of the special winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed.

  In the special winning opening opening process (step S142), a process related to a big hit operation for making it easy for game balls to enter the special winning opening 2103 by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the closed state to the open state is performed.

  In the special winning opening closing process (step S144), a process related to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103 by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the opened state to the closed state is performed.

  In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the big hit operation is ended, a process of notifying the end is performed.

  In the combination operation gate validity waiting process (step S148) or the combination operation gate validity process (step S150), the upper gate (combination operation gate) is activated, and the passage of the game ball of the upper gate is detected. .

[9-6. Start-up winning process]
Next, the starting-port winning process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a start-up winning process in the present embodiment. The start opening winning process is executed in the processing of steps S116 (upper opening 2101) and S122 (lower opening 2102) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing shown in FIG.

  In the start-port winning process, the start-port winning command shown in FIG. 16 is created when a game ball is accepted to the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102. At this time, the starting opening winning command may be set for each starting winning opening, or may be common regardless of the starting winning opening. The main control program stores the command thus created as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  First, the main control program sets, as command data, start port winning command creation data for generating a starting port winning command (step S200), and executes a command buffer setting process (step S202). As a result, the starting opening winning command is created and stored in the command buffer. The starting port winning command of the present embodiment is common regardless of the starting winning port.

  Furthermore, the main control program sets a start-up winning control data table corresponding to the winning opening based on the start-up opening 1 identification value or the starting-up opening 2 identification value selected before the start-up winning processing. (Step S204). The start opening winning control data table stores data necessary for processing executed at the time of starting winning. Hereinafter, the start-up winning control data table will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a start-up winning control data table according to the present embodiment. The start opening winning control data table defines a starting opening winning control data table 1 set when the upper starting opening 2101 wins and a starting opening winning control data table 2 set when the lower starting opening 2102 wins. . Each table defines a special symbol reserved ball count command address table, a special symbol activated reserved ball count area, a reserved history special figure identification value, and an offset value for referencing a retained information storage area, and has the same structure.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, in the process of step S204, based on the identification value set in the process of step S112 or step S118, the top of the start-up prize-winning control data table corresponding to the prize-winning start-up prize-winning opening. Set the address as the control data address. As a result, since necessary data is stored at a predetermined position from the head address of the set start-up winning control data table, data corresponding to the start-up opening is performed in common processing by the upper start-up opening and the lower starting opening. Can be obtained. Specifically, the main control program acquires the number of reserved balls stored in the area indicated by the number-of-reserved-balls address set in the starting port winning control data table set in the process of step S204 (step S206). ). The operation reserved ball number address corresponds to the operation reserved ball number address (special symbol operation reserved ball number area) in FIG. 22, and the content stored in the operation reserved ball number address is acquired as the reserved ball number.

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the acquired number of reserved balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (step S208). If the number of reserved balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is "yes"), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is "no"), the main control program adds 1 to the number of reserved balls (step S210). Further, the special symbol total operation suspension number (contents of the special symbol total operation suspension number area) which is the sum of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number is incremented by 1 (step S212).

  Further, the main control program specifies a storage location (special symbol holding storage area) of various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number extracted by the winning start. Here, the configuration of the special symbol holding storage area will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol holding storage area (source code) relating to the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. In addition, the line described as “special symbol 1” on the right side of each line in FIG. 23 is a special symbol holding storage area related to the upper starting port 2101. Is a special symbol holding storage area for the lower starting port 2102. In the case of “special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern random number storage N area”, “N” corresponds to the number of reservations. Each area stores one corresponding random value.

  More specifically, referring to FIG. 23, first, the address (B_HIT_M1) of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area is set as a reference address. Then, as an addition value, a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls (specifically, a value obtained by multiplying the number of reserved balls by the size of the storage area (_TMEM1_KO)) is multiplied by a reserved storage area index value (reserved information storage area reference offset value). ) Is added. The hold storage area index value is set to an offset value (00H) if the starting port identification area value is the starting port 1 identification value, and if the starting port 2 identification value is a special symbol 2 big hit determination random number storage area. _TMEM_ADD) is set. Finally, the calculated addition value is added to the reference address, and the storage location (transfer destination address) of the big hit determination random number can be calculated. As described above, by using the index value, an appropriate storage location can be designated by common processing even if the starting ports are different. Further, by making the index values different depending on the timing of executing the common processing, it is also possible to store data in different storage areas. For example, when a big hit determination is performed at the time of the pre-reading process and at the start of the change, information necessary for the big hit determination can be stored in different storage areas by setting different index values.

  Here, returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 21, the main control program stores the random number for big hit determination in the special symbol holding storage area (step S214). Specifically, the value stored in the big hit determination random number area (the counter value of the big hit determination random number) is stored in the special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the number of holding balls. In addition, in addition to the random number for the jackpot determination, a random number for the jackpot symbol, a random number for the reach determination, a random number for the variation pattern (random number for the variation pattern 1, a random number for the variation pattern 2, a random number for the variation type), and a random number for the special symbol. A random number for determining a hit or a variation pattern is extracted at the time of starting opening winning and is stored in a corresponding storage area. For example, if the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls is 0, the designated storage location B_HIT_M1 is used as the head address, the random number for big hit determination is B_HIT_M1, the random number for reach determination is T_RIT_M1, and the random number 1 for fluctuation pattern is The random number 2 for the variation pattern is stored in T_HP2_M1, the random number for the variation type is stored in T_HTP_M1, and the random number for the special symbol is stored in T_ZUG_M1.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a special figure identification value for selecting a fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation in the new hold memory based on the special symbol total operation suspension number in a corresponding reservation identification history area (special symbol hold identification area). Area (step S216). The special symbol hold identification area is assigned a continuous area of one byte at a time from the special symbol hold identification area 1 to the special symbol hold identification area 8. The address shifted by the subtracted value becomes an area corresponding to the new hold storage. The special identification value is included in the start winning prize control data table set in the process of step S204. The special symbol holding identification area is an area for storing the order of winning in the upper starting port (special symbol 1) or the lower starting port (special symbol 2). At the start of the change, the value of the leading area of the special symbol holding identifying area is stored. By making the determination, it is determined whether or not the change of the special symbol can be started.

  Finally, the main control program executes a memory look-ahead process for executing a special figure look-ahead effect (step S218). The special figure look-ahead effect is an effect in which the lottery result of the special lottery is implied in advance before starting the change display of the special symbol. In the memory look-ahead process, various random numbers are acquired before the variation display of the special symbol is started, and information for determining the special symbol look-ahead effect on the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value (hit information, symbol type, variation). Pattern number, etc.), and store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. At this time, the main control program may include, in the command, information relating to the special symbol stop symbol as information indicating the type of the big hit game, instead of the special lottery result itself. For example, the information of the stage before it is finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, and the latent hit group and the small hit group of the symbol type in the variation pattern may be transmitted as the prefetch command. Details of the storage prefetch process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-7. Memory prefetch processing]
Next, the details of the memory prefetching process (step S218) in the starting opening winning process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the storage prefetch process according to the present embodiment. In the memory look-ahead process, a process for executing a look-ahead to acquire a result of the special lottery in advance is performed. By transmitting a predetermined command (special symbol holding number designation command) to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the result of the special lottery acquired by the memory look-ahead processing, the result is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol is started. It is possible to execute a suggested special figure look-ahead effect.

  When the storage prefetching process is started, the main control program first saves the address of the control data (start-winning-time control data table) (step S240). Further, a hold command without pre-reading is set as the hold command (step S242).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the table for selecting the variation pattern changes at the timing of the start winning and the timing at which the variation actually starts (step S244). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different between the start winning and the start of the fluctuation, and if the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different, the prefetch is prohibited. For example, if the number of times the number of games saved in the time reduction state (number of games) or the number of times the number of games (number of games) is maintained is the upper limit of the number of holds (for example, if the special symbol is one and the upper limit of the number of holds is four, Four times, when the number of special symbols is two, and when the total value of the upper limit number of each reserved number is eight, eight times, and even when there are two special symbols, the variable display is started with priority given to one symbol. In this case, prefetching is prohibited if the number is within the upper limit of the number of reservations on the priority side. When the table for selecting the variation pattern changes (the result of step S244 is "yes"), the main control program executes the processing of step S282 and thereafter without executing the processing related to prefetching.

  On the other hand, when the table for selecting the variation pattern does not change (the result of step S244 is “no”), the main control program determines whether or not the period is a prefetch determination prohibition period (step S246).

  Here, the determination of the prefetch determination prohibition period will be described. Whether or not the period is the pre-read determination prohibition period is determined based on the notice permission determination data address table shown in FIG. Specifically, a notice permission judgment data address table corresponding to the winning opening (starting hole identification area setting value) that has been won is set, and the notice permission judgment data according to the special symbol / motor-operated accessory operation number and the flag during time reduction. To get. If the acquired notice permission determination data is “00H” (_RENZOCK_OK), prefetching is permitted, and if “01H” (_RENZOCK_NG), prefetching is prohibited. FIG. 25 shows the notice permission determination data.

  FIG. 25 is an example of a table related to the notice permission determination data. FIG. 25A shows an example of the notice permission determination data address table, and FIG. 25B shows an example of the notice permission determination data. As the notice permission determination data address table, a determination table (RNEZO_CK1_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 and a determination table (RNEZO_CK2_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2 are defined. The notice permission determination data is defined as data (RENZO_CK1_B) based on the special symbol operation number (T_JOB_NO) and data (RENZO_CK2_B, RENZO_CK3_B) based on the time reduction flag (JITAN_FG).

  As a basic structure of the notice permission determination data address table, the first byte is the number of times the table is referred to, the second byte is information as a reference source (lower address of the RAM area of the reference destination), and the third and fourth bytes are pre-read. This is a reference table address for prohibition period determination. With the data of the second to fourth bytes (3 bytes) as the basic unit, the data of the basic unit is set for the number of times of reference. In the present embodiment, data for two times is set as the number of times of reference. However, it is needless to say that the number of times of reference is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. With such a data structure, any specification can be supported by correcting only the data value without correcting the program code.

  For example, if the special symbol / electric accessory operation number is in a special symbol change (HEND), the notice permission determination data becomes “00H” (_RENZOCK_OK), and the prefetch is permitted. The special symbol / electric accessory operation number is numerical data. For example, HEND indicating that the special symbol is changing is 1 and 0 in the special symbol change waiting (IDOL). If a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 and the time saving state is set (the time saving flag (JITAN_FG) is 1), the notice permission determination data 2 (RENZO_CK2_B) is selected as a reference table for the pre-read prohibition period determination, and the time saving flag is set. Is determined. At this time, since the time-saving flag is 1, _RENZOCK_NG (“01H” = corresponding to the pre-reading determination prohibition period), which is the data of the second line of the notice permission determining data 2, is selected, and the pre-reading is performed in the determination processing in step S246. Be regulated. The advance permission determination data 3 (RENZO_CK3_B) is a reference table for the prefetching prohibition period corresponding to the special figure 2, and the data selection is the same as the advance permission determination data 2 (RENXO_CK2_B), so that detailed description is omitted. I do.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are defined in separate judgment tables. However, if the contents are the same, a common table may be used. The contents may be completely different.

  Also, regardless of the determination result by the notice permission determination data address table, if the special figure pre-reading effect is being executed, in order to prevent the pre-reading effect from being executed in duplicate, the pre-reading determination prohibition period may be determined. Good.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of the storage prefetching process of FIG. In the case of the pre-reading determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “yes”), the main control program does not perform the pre-reading determination and executes the processing from step S282.

  On the other hand, if it is not the prefetch determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “no”), the main control program stores a special symbol holding storage area (a random number for each holding number) corresponding to the winning opening and the number of holding balls. Special symbol holding storage buffer (7 bytes in this embodiment) corresponding to one special symbol holding storage area corresponding to one holding of the random number value stored in the storage area (general name of the areas to be stored). This is stored in the symbol random number buffer (step S248). Then, based on the random numbers stored in the special symbol holding storage buffer, the pre-reading determination and the determination at the start of the change are performed. That is, at the time of pre-reading, the content of the special symbol holding storage area stored in association with the number of holdings is stored in the buffer, and at the start of the change, the information of the first area of the special symbol holding storage area is stored in the buffer, It is possible to make a determination with a common reference destination at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation, and in any case, the subsequent processing (processing such as big hit determination) can be shared and used.

  The special symbol holding storage areas are: a large hit determination random number storage N area, a reach determination random number storage N area, a variation pattern random number 1 storage N area, and a variation pattern random number 2 storage N area for the special symbol 1 and the hourly symbol 2. , Random number storage N area for fluctuation type and random number storage N area for special symbol (N is 1 to 4). Further, the special symbol holding storage buffer includes a random number buffer for jackpot determination, a random number buffer for reach determination, a random number buffer for variable pattern 1, a random number buffer for variable pattern 2, a random number buffer for variable type, and a random number buffer for special symbol.

  In the process of step S248, for example, when the third hold storage of the special symbol 1 is stored in the special symbol hold storage buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 3 area is stored in the big hit determination random number buffer. The value of the special symbol 1 reach determination random number storage 3 area is a reach determination random number buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 variation pattern random number 1 storage 3 area is the variation pattern random number 1 buffer, the special symbol 1 variation pattern random number 2 storage 3 The value of the area is stored in the variable pattern random number 2 buffer, the special pattern 1 variable type random number storage 3 area value is stored in the variable type random number buffer, and the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage 3 area value is stored in the special pattern random number buffer. I do.

  Then, the main control program executes a special symbol big hit determination process for determining the result of the special lottery with reference to each random number stored in the special symbol holding storage buffer set in the process of step S248 (step S250). . Details of the special symbol big hit determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the special lottery result (big hit) (step S252). Details of the special symbol determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag buffer as a big hit flag storage area (step S254). The big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF)) is an area for storing a big hit flag and the like at the time of prefetch determination. At the start of the change, the big hit determination result is stored in the big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area).

  The buffers related to the prefetching of the special lottery include, in addition to the special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF), a big hit symbol type buffer (BRZ_TPBF), a variable pattern buffer (T_HD_PTBF), a variable type type buffer (T_HD_TPBF), and a symbol type command buffer (T_HD_TPBF). TZTP_CMBF), a special symbol identification flag buffer (T_MOV_FGBF), and a special symbol operation pending ball count buffer (T_SID_CTBF).

  In addition, also in the case of the normal lottery, similarly to the case of the special lottery, a buffer related to the prefetch of the normal lottery is provided. The buffers related to the prefetching of the ordinary lottery include a hit flag buffer (F_HIT_FGBF), an ordinary symbol type area buffer (F_FZ_TPBF), and an ordinary symbol operation reserved ball count buffer (F_SID_CTBF). By providing the buffer in this manner, the processing can be shared between the pre-reading and the start of the fluctuation, as in the case of the special lottery.

  Further, the main control program sets the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table holding information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S256). After that, a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S258). The details of the variation pattern selection determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variation pattern selection determination process is completed, the main control program sets the variation pattern value extracted in the variation pattern buffer (Step S260), and further executes the variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type classification value (Step S260). S262). The variation type type value is a parameter for specifying the variation type defined for each variation pattern. One variation pattern can define one or more variation types. The fluctuation type corresponds to, for example, the type of the pseudo continuous fluctuation when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected. When the variation type type value is selected, the main control program sets the selected variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S264).

  Thereafter, the main control program clears the values from the big hit determination random number buffer to the special symbol random number buffer (step S266). This is to prevent a malfunction due to a remaining value when making a big hit determination.

  Further, the main control program sets a command indicating a prefetch result (a symbol type prefetch command, a variation pattern prefetch command, and a variation type prefetch command) in a command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). . Further, the reference value of the pending command with prefetch is set as the reference value of the pending command (step S280).

  Then, the main control program restores the address of the control data (start-winning-time control data table) saved in the process of step S240 (step S282). Finally, based on the set pending command reference value, a reserved ball number command is acquired (step S284), and the acquired reserved ball number command (special symbol reserved ball number designation command) is set in the command buffer (step S284). Step S286).

  Here, the procedure for acquiring the reserved ball count command (special symbol reserved ball count designation command) will be further described. In the address of the control data returned in the process of step S282, the address of the start-up winning control data table corresponding to the winning opening (the value of the starting-port identification area) in which the game ball has won is set. As described above, since the structure of the start-up winning control data table is common regardless of the value of the start-up identification area, the subsequent processing can be shared.

  FIGS. 26A and 26B are tables showing a table related to the special symbol holding ball count command address table. FIG. 26A is an example of the special symbol holding ball count command address table, and FIG. . As shown in FIG. 22, the starting opening winning control data table includes the address of the special symbol reserved ball count command address table (data (T1_SCT_CM_W, T2_SCT_CM_W) set at the head address of each data table). ), The special symbol reserved ball count command address table can be referred to from the address.

  The main control program is a special symbol 1 reserved ball count command address table (T1_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 corresponding to the winning opening, or a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command address table (T2_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2. , And based on the reserved command reference value set in the processing of step S242 or step S280, the address of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is specified from the special symbol reserved ball number command address table. As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data includes, for each special symbol, a reserved command generation table when prefetching is prohibited (upper row, T1_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B), and a reserved command generation when prefetching is permitted. A table and (lower row, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) are defined.

  Then, the main control program creates a special symbol reserved ball number designation command based on the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data. The data structure of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data (T1_SCT_CM1_B, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) is composed of 3 bytes of data. The first byte of data is the lower address of the storage area (RAM) that refers to the hold number, the second byte is the default value of the value set as the mode data of the command, and the third byte is the status data value of the command. Become. For example, the special symbol 1 reserved storage number (T1_SID_CT) is 3 (when the number of reservations is 3), and the special symbol reserved ball number designation command when there is pre-reading is the special symbol 1 reserved ball number designation command creation data 2 (T1_SCT_CM2_B). Created based on Specifically, the status value is “62H”, the mode value is “02H” (number of reservations 3-1) + “11H” (default value) = “13H”, and the special symbol reservation ball number designation command is “6213H”. Becomes Finally, the special symbol holding ball number designation command thus created is set in the command buffer.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the second byte of the special symbol reserved ball count specification command creation data (the default value of the mode value) is “01H” when the prefetching is prohibited, and In this case, it is "11H". Therefore, the upper bits of the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command become “0” when read-ahead is prohibited and “1” when read-ahead is permitted even after the reserved number is added. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the special symbol retaining ball number designation command can determine whether or not there is pre-reading by referring to the mode value of the special symbol retaining ball number designation command. Thereby, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the special symbol holding ball number designation command and refers to the mode value to wait until receiving the information (command) necessary to execute the special figure prefetching effect. Can be determined. That is, if the upper bit of the mode value of the special symbol retaining ball number designation command is “0”, the processing can be continued without receiving the prefetch-related command. Note that the order of the data configuration set in the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is not limited to the described order, and for example, a lower address of a storage area that refers to the reserved number is set in the second byte, and the like. What is necessary is just to set in a predetermined order. Further, the present invention is not limited to three bytes (three information), and other information such as that associated with the output of the number-of-suspended command may be set as long as the data has a predetermined data configuration.

[9-8. Special symbol big hit judgment processing]
Next, the special symbol big hit determination process (step S250) in the memory prefetch process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol big hit determination process according to the present embodiment. The special symbol big hit determination processing determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big hit based on the big hit determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning. This processing is used in common at the time of pre-reading of the special lottery and at the time of starting the change of the special symbol (when the change display is confirmed).

  The main control program first obtains a big hit determination random number from the big hit determination random number buffer (step 300). Subsequently, a special symbol big hit determination lower limit value for performing a special lottery is acquired from the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for big hit determination) based on the probability change flag (step S302). In the special symbol big hit determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for big hit determination), a special symbol big hit determination lower limit value is defined corresponding to the probability change flag. The probability change flag is information indicating whether the probability state is the normal probability (low probability) or the high probability, and is set to “00H” for a low probability and “01H” for a high probability. For the special symbol big hit determination lower limit data, a value according to the probability state is set, the lower limit data is selected based on the probability change flag, and it is possible to make the lottery probability different by changing the lower limit data Has become.

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the big hit determination random number acquired in the process of step S300 is smaller than the big hit determination lower limit acquired in the process of step S302 (step S304). If the big hit determination random number is not smaller than the big hit determination lower limit (the result of step S304 is "no"), that is, if the big hit determination random number is equal to or larger than the big hit determination lower limit, the big hit determination random number is It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step S306). In the present embodiment, the range in which the random number for jackpot determination is generated is from 0 to the upper limit, and the range of the random number determined to be jackpot is the range from the lower limit to the upper limit of jackpot determination. ing. Therefore, if the big hit determination random number is originally equal to or larger than the big hit determination lower limit value, it may be determined that the big hit is a big hit. In such a case, a big hit may be determined. In the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a malfunction, a comparison is also made with an upper limit value.

  When the big hit determination random number is not larger than the big hit determination upper limit (the result of step S306 is “no”), that is, when the big hit determination random number is equal to or less than the big hit determination upper limit, the main control program sets the big hit flag to the big hit flag. The winning is set (step S308). Specifically, the big hit is set as the flag setting value, and the flag setting value is stored in the big hit flag storage area. As described above, the big hit flag storage area is a big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) at the start of the change, and a big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) at the time of prefetch determination.

  On the other hand, the main control program determines whether the big hit determination random number is smaller than the big hit determination lower limit (the result of step S304 is “yes”), or if the big hit determination random number is larger than the big hit determination upper limit (step S304). The result of S306 is "yes", and no winning (losing) is set in the big hit flag (step S310). As a result, even when it is determined that the value is larger than the upper limit value, as in the case where the value is determined to be smaller than the lower limit value, the value at which the big hit flag is lost is set. Even if it is set, it is prevented that a big hit is erroneously determined. As described above, when the big hit flag is set, the special symbol big hit determination processing ends.

[9-9. Special symbol judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol determination process (step S252) in the storage prefetching process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol determination process according to the present embodiment. The special symbol determination process specifies a special symbol based on the random number for jackpot symbol determination extracted at the time of starting winning.

  The main control program first obtains a big hit flag from the big hit flag storage area (big hit flag area or big hit flag buffer) (step S320). Then, it is determined whether or not the content of the big hit flag is a big hit (step S322). If the content of the big hit flag is not a big hit (the result of step S322 is "no"), the special symbol number value is set to a shifted symbol command value (0) (step S330). Further, the special symbol number value is set to the mode value of the symbol type command (step S332), and the special symbol determination process ends.

  On the other hand, if the content of the big hit flag is a big hit (the result of step S322 is “yes”), the main control program reads the big hit symbol number and the big hit symbol type from the special symbol determination data address table based on the big hit symbol random number. The number is obtained (step S324). Since a plurality of jackpot symbols are defined, a jackpot symbol number is acquired from the special symbol determination data address table based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The big hit symbol type number is a number corresponding to the big hit type on a one-to-one basis. For example, there is a probable big hit with 16R pitching (01H), a non-probable big hit with 16R pitching (02H), a probable big hit without 16R pitching (no time saving: latency probable, 03H), a probable big hit without 16R pitching (with time saving: probable) , 04H) and small hits (05H). The big hit symbol number is a plurality of values provided for the symbol type number. For example, 01H to 10H for a 16R throwing probability variable hit, 11H to 26H for a 16R throwing non-probable variable hit, and 27H to 3FH for a 16R positive hit without a pitching change (no time saving: latent probability change), 16R 40H to 55H is provided for the large-variable big hit (with time saving: sudden probability) without throwing, and 56H to 5FH is provided for the small hit. As described above, a plurality of jackpot symbol numbers are provided for the same jackpot type, which is displayed on the upper special symbol indicator 1185 or the lower special symbol indicator 1186 on the function display unit 1180 based on the jackpot symbol number. This is to make it difficult for the special symbol (the present special symbol) to be visually recognized by the player. On the other hand, since there is only one type of missing symbol, a predetermined value (losing symbol command value (0)) is set to the missing symbol number instead of being selected from the table.

  Further, the main control program sets a symbol type command for notifying the peripheral control board 4140 of the big hit symbol based on the big hit symbol type number (step S326). Finally, a special symbol number value is set based on the big hit symbol number (step S328), and the special symbol determination process ends.

[9-10. Variation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) in the storage prefetching process will be described. FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process according to the present embodiment. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol. Note that this processing is executed at the start of the fluctuation as well as at the time of the pre-reading, and the same fluctuation pattern table is referred to at the time of the pre-reading and at the start of the fluctuation.

  The main control program first obtains a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (Step S340). The variation table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variation information source table from the variation information source address table. The variation information source table is a special symbol 1 and a special symbol 2 according to the game state, a hit (hit variation selection information status table), a loss (a loss variation selection information status table), a reach (a reach variation selection information status table), This is a data table storing table information for referring to a reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and a change type (change type determination data table).

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires a special symbol identification value and stores it in the variation pattern selection value variation special identification area (step S342). Further, an area corresponding to a special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) in the variation information source table is specified based on the special symbol identification value and the number of data for one block of the special symbol-specific variation allocation information source table ( Step S344). Subsequently, the hit determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (the value of the winning result stored in the special symbol winning flag buffer for pre-reading or the special symbol winning flag area for starting the change (for example, 00H) : Out, 01H: big hit, 02H: small hit (step S346).

  The main control program determines whether or not a big hit or a small hit has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the big hit value or the small hit value (step S350). When a big hit or a small hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), a big hit change selection information type table is searched from the hit change selection information state table based on the state flag (step S352). At this time, the address of the searched big hit change selection information type table is saved. The jackpot change selection information type table is a jackpot change type (a change group in a stage before the jackpot change pattern is determined. For example, a change pattern finally determined, such as SP1 system reach, SP2 system reach, etc. It is a table for selecting a group (groups are grouped). When the result of the special lottery wins the small hit and the case where the big hit is won, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value set for the big hit symbol type, and the big hit symbol type number is Since different values are set for the hit and the hit, it is possible to select a variation pattern by a common process for the big hit and the small hit.

  Next, the main control program acquires the big hit symbol type (the value stored in the big hit symbol type buffer at the time of pre-reading or the big hit symbol type area at the time of start of change) (step S354). The set big hit symbol type is used in the change information number search processing in step S358.

  Subsequently, the main control program selects a fluctuation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table according to the value of the fluctuation special figure identification area when the fluctuation pattern is selected. (Step S356). The variation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table is used to determine the type for determining the hit variation pattern selection value data table from the big hit variation selection information type table based on the value of the (hit) symbol type. It is a table.

  Next, the main control program executes a change information number search process using the big hit symbol type acquired in the process of step S354 as a comparison value, thereby obtaining a change information number (from the big hit change selection information type table to the hit change pattern selection value). A type value for determining the data table) is obtained (step S358). Further, the saved big hit change selection information type table is set as search data (step S360). Further, by the process of step S358, the variable information number that is the result of the variable information number search process is set as a selection value (step S362).

  On the other hand, when a big hit or a small hit has not been won (the result of step S350 is “no”), the main control program sets a special symbol reach probability table as search data (step S364). Then, the special symbol reach probability data corresponding to the state flag is searched from the special symbol reach probability table (step S366). The status flag is set to numerical data corresponding to the game state. In the present embodiment, 00H (low-probability non-time saving (normal game) state), 01H (high-probability time reduction state), 02H Either (low probability time reduction state) or 03H (high probability non-time reduction state) is set. This makes it possible to select the reach probability of the special symbol according to the gaming state. Further, a reach determination for determining whether or not to generate a reach based on the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the prefetch or the change corresponds to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2). A threshold is obtained (step S368). Subsequently, the main control program sets a reach variation selection information status table as search data (step S370).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the winning start (step S372). Specifically, a reach determination random number is acquired from the reach determination random number buffer, and is compared with the reach determination threshold acquired in the process of step S368. The reach is generated when the reach determination threshold value is larger than the reach determination random number.

  If no reach is generated in the fluctuation display (result of step S372 is “no”), the main control program sets an outlier fluctuation selection information state table as search data (step S374). Furthermore, a search is made from the deviation change selection information state table for a deviation change selection information reservation table corresponding to the state flag (step S376), and the retrieved deviation change selection information reservation table is set as search data (step S378). Further, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the prefetch or the change is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is set to the selected value (step 380).

  The processing from step S374 to step S380 is processing for selecting a variation pattern in the case of a normal deviation where no reach occurs. In the case of a normal deviation, it is necessary to change the fluctuation pattern according to the number of suspensions. Is selected.

  On the other hand, when a reach is generated in the variable display (result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control program sets a state flag as a selection value (step 382). When the reach is generated, the length of the fluctuation time is not determined by the number of reservations, but the fluctuation time may be changed by the number of reservations in the same manner as in the case of an unusual case. Specifically, for the same reach fluctuation, when the number of suspensions is large, a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, a high-speed fluctuation time immediately after the start of the fluctuation) may be adjusted as compared with the case where the number of suspensions is small. In this case, since the fluctuation times are different, different fluctuation pattern commands are set.

  When the processing of step S362, step S380, or step S382 is completed, the main control program selects a variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the selection value from the search data set at this time (step S384). Specifically, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit (step S362), a big hit change selection information type table is set as search data, and a change which is a search result of the change information number search process in step S358 is set as a selection value. A pattern classification value for pattern distribution is set. When the result of the special lottery is out of order and reach occurs (step S382), the reach fluctuation selection information state table is set as search data, and the state flag is set as a selection value. Further, when the result of the special lottery is out of order and no reach occurs (step S380), the out-of-office change selection information reservation table is set as search data, and the number of reserved balls is set as the selection value.

  Subsequently, the main control program acquires the random number 1 for the variation pattern (step S386), and executes a variation information number search process (step S388). The variation pattern selection data selection value is obtained from the variation pattern selection value data table by the variation information number search process. Further, the main control program acquires a fluctuation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selection data selection value from the fluctuation pattern selection data address table (step S390).

  Subsequently, the main control program obtains the fluctuation pattern random number 2 (step S392), and performs the fluctuation information number search processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern selection value data table obtained in the processing of step S390. Is executed (step S394). Thereafter, a change pattern is selected based on the result of the change information number search process (step S396), and the process ends.

  The variation pattern selection data table includes one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit and the variation pattern set value as one set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit set in the variation pattern selection data table, and the variation pattern random number 2 is set lower than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit. When it is determined that the value of the random number 2 for use is larger, the variation pattern set value corresponding to the lower limit value of the random number 2 for variation pattern is selected. If the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is smaller than the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value, the value of the variation pattern random number 2 is compared with the next set variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value. It is repeatedly executed while changing the lower limit value of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern until it is determined to be large.

  In the present embodiment, a variation pattern is selected in two stages based on two types of random numbers, a variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and a variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, a type of a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern group such as XX system reach) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Further, a variation pattern (a value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally variation-displayed is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. In addition, the method is not limited to the method of performing the lottery in two stages, and a method of performing the lottery in three or more stages may be employed, or the variation pattern may be directly selected by using one variation pattern random number. Since each current random number for a variation pattern is composed of one byte, the result determined by two random numbers is the same as the result determined by a total of two bytes of random numbers. When a variation pattern is selected with one variation pattern random number, the variation pattern random number may be composed of 2 bytes.

[9-11. Variation type judgment processing]
Next, the details of the change type determination process (step S262) in the storage prefetch process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the variation type determination process according to the present embodiment. As described above, the variation type determination process is a process for selecting a variation type defined in a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

  The main control program first searches the variation type determination data table for variation type determination data corresponding to the status flag (step S400). Subsequently, the change pattern set value is restored and set as a comparison value (step S402), and a change information number search process is executed (step S404).

  In the change type determination data table, different change type determination data is set according to the game state, and the change type determination data corresponding to the game state is selected by the process of step S400. The variation type determination data is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation pattern lower limit value and the variation type selection data selection value as one set of data. Then, by executing the variation information number search processing, the variation pattern selection value is compared with the variation pattern lower limit value set in the variation type determination data, and the variation pattern selection value is larger than the variation pattern lower limit value. Is determined, a variation type selection data selection value corresponding to the variation pattern lower limit value is selected. If the fluctuation pattern selection value is smaller than the fluctuation pattern lower limit value, it is compared with the next set fluctuation pattern lower limit value, and the fluctuation pattern lower limit value is changed until the fluctuation pattern selection value is determined to be larger It is executed repeatedly. Before executing the variation type determination process, the variation information source address table is set in advance as an input parameter, and the variation type is determined based on the variation type determination data table set in the variation information source address table. Is determined.

  Next, the main control program searches the fluctuation type selection data address table for the fluctuation type selection data corresponding to the fluctuation type selection data selection value acquired by the fluctuation information number search processing in step S404 (step S406). ).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the variation type random number as a comparison value (Step S408), and executes a variation information number search process (Step S410). At this time, the change type selection data obtained in the process of step S406 is set as search data, and the change type setting value is obtained by the change information number search process.

  The variation type selection data is composed of one or more sets of data, with the variation type random number lower limit value and the variation type set value as one set of data. By executing the fluctuation information number search process, the fluctuation type random number is compared with the fluctuation type random number lower limit set in the fluctuation type selection data, and the fluctuation type random number is smaller than the fluctuation type random number lower limit. Is determined to be large, the variation type setting value corresponding to the random number lower limit value for the variation type is selected. If the value of the random number for the variation type is smaller than the lower limit value for the random number for the variation type, it is compared with the next lower limit value for the random number for the variation type, and it is determined that the value of the random number for the variation type is larger. It is repeatedly executed while changing the random number lower limit value for the fluctuation type until the change.

[9-12. Special symbol change waiting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process in the present embodiment. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state in which the special symbol change display is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, a preparation for starting the special symbol change display is made.

  The main control program first determines whether or not the change display of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hold identification value (value of the special symbol hold identification 1 area) corresponding to the next variable display to be executed from the value stored at the top of the special symbol hold identification area is not 0. . If the loaded value is 0, that is, if the special symbol variation display is not suspended (the result of step S420 is “no”), the special symbol variation display is not started. The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol change display is suspended (the result of step S420 is “yes”), the main control program executes a process for starting the special symbol change display. Specifically, first, since the variable display when the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 (special symbol 2) is executed with priority, the special symbol 2 is set to the starting port identification value (step S422). ), The special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data (step S424). In other words, the special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set in the fluctuation setting data. Further, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is acquired from the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball count area (step S426).

  Then, the main control program determines whether or not the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (step S428). If the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is 0 (the result of step S428 is "no"), the special symbol 1 is set to the starting port identification value (step S430), and the special symbol 1 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data. It is set (step S432).

  The fluctuation setting data is configured by a RAM or a data table address referred to for executing the fluctuation start processing in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and the reference destination is different between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Can be set, and the data structure (the number of set data) is common. This makes it possible to execute a common variation start process for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  The variation setting data of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 in the present embodiment is composed of 13 bytes, and is specifically as follows. The first byte is the lower byte of the address of the pending ball count, the second and third bytes are the address of the reserved ball number designation command creation data, the fourth and fifth bytes are the transfer source address when the reserved memory area is transferred, and the sixth and seventh bytes are reserved. The transfer destination address at the time of storage area transfer, the 8th and 9th bytes are the transfer source address at the time of the 4th storage area transfer, the 10th and 11th bytes are the transfer destination address at the time of the 4th storage area transfer, and the 12th and 13th bytes are the changing setting data. Address.

  After setting the fluctuation setting data, the main control program stores the starting port identification value in the special symbol identification flag area (Step S434). Subsequently, in order to start the change of the special symbol, the number of the operation holding balls corresponding to the starting port identification value and the total number of the special symbol total operation reserved stored in the special symbol total operation pending number area are subtracted by 1 (step S436).

  Next, the main control program sets a reserved ball number designation command as command data (step S438), and sets the command in the command buffer (step S440). Thereafter, the command for specifying the number of pending balls set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interrupt process. The command creation table (FIG. 26A) for creating the reserved ball number designation command is common to the pre-reading time, and the same table is used for the pre-reading time and when the fluctuation starts, thereby saving the program capacity. I have.

  Subsequently, the main control program executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting opening. Details of the special symbol / flag setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. The details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main control program sequentially shifts the data stored in the special symbol holding storage area (FIG. 23) (step S446). In the special symbol holding storage area, holding memories (starting memories) including various random numbers such as a random number for jackpot determination extracted by a winning start are stored for the number of holdings for each winning opening. When the change of the special symbol based on the reserved memory is started, the reserved memory in which the fluctuation is started is cleared, and the remaining reserved memories are shifted. For example, when the maximum number of holdings is four, the holding storage stored in the special design holding storage 2 area is shifted to the special design holding storage 1 area, and similarly the special holding storage 3 area and the special design holding storage 4 area. The stored reserved memory is shifted to the special symbol reserved memory 2 area and the special symbol reserved memory 3 area. Then, the special symbol hold storage 4 area is cleared (step S448). The shift processing of the special symbol hold storage area stores the value set to the transfer source address at the time of transfer of the hold storage area set in the variation setting data to the transfer destination address at the time of transfer of the hold storage area, and at the time of transfer to the hold storage area. The transfer source address and the transfer destination address at the time of transfer to the reserved storage area are updated to the next address, and the data stored in each reserved storage area is sequentially shifted.

  Next, the main control program sets the data-in-fluctuation setting address set in the variable setting data as the setting data address, and outputs information necessary for executing the special symbol fluctuation processing executed in the next interrupt processing. A predetermined storage area is set (step S450).

  Further, the main control program creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set as the command value. For example, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 2, the upper byte of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern reference command is set, and if the special symbol 1 is the special symbol 1, the upper byte of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern reference command is set (steps S452 to S452). S456).

  Further, the main control program acquires the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area as lower-order command data (Step S458). Further, a variation type type value is obtained from the variation type type area (step S460), and the variation type type value is added to the command value set in the process of step S452 or S456, thereby obtaining a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation type. Is calculated (step S462). A variation pattern command is created by the processing from step S450 to step S462, and a command storage process for storing the created command data in a predetermined area is executed (step S464).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, if the special symbol identification flag is the special symbol 1, the special stop symbol 1 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set in the command buffer. If the special symbol 2 is the special symbol 2, the special stop symbol 2 designation command shown in FIG. It is set (steps S466 to S472).

  Next, the main control program sets a change state designation command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command buffer (steps S474 and S476). Since the generated commands are transmitted in the order in which they are generated (the order in which they are stored in the command buffer), when the transmission order is changed, the command generation order (the order in which the commands are stored in the command buffer) is changed. do it. For example, when it is desired to transmit the symbol type command before the fluctuation pattern command, the processing from step S466 to step S472 may be executed prior to the processing from step S458 to step S464.

  Next, the main control program clears the special symbol hold history corresponding to the hold storage on which the variable display has been executed, and shifts the special symbol hold history (step S478). In the present embodiment, areas for storing special symbol holding histories for eight pieces (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, each for four) are allocated, and a variable display corresponding to the first hold storage is started. And the special symbol holding history corresponding to the subsequent variable display is sequentially shifted. Specifically, the special symbol hold history stored in the second area (special symbol hold history identification 2 area) is moved to the top. Since each special symbol hold history identification area is assigned to a continuous area, the area in which seven special symbol hold histories are stored may be shifted. Finally, the last area of the special symbol hold history identification area (special symbol hold history identification 8 area) is cleared (step S480), and the special symbol change waiting process ends.

[9-13. Special symbol / flag setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol / flag setting process (step S442) in the special symbol change waiting process will be described. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the variation display result of the special symbol is set at the start of the variation. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a special symbol / flag setting process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control program stores a random number (special symbol big hit determination random number) for performing a special lottery big hit determination in a big hit determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area) (steps S500 to S506). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol for starting the variable display is specified, and the corresponding special symbol big hit determination random number storage 1 area (special symbol 1 big hit determination random number storage 1 area or special symbol 2) The special symbol big hit determination random number stored in the big hit determination random number storage 1 area is set. Then, the set special symbol big hit determination random number is stored (transferred) in the big hit determination random number buffer (variation random number storage area).

  That is, a special symbol holding storage area to be changed is specified, and the stored random value is stored in a corresponding area of the special symbol holding storage buffer. In addition to the special symbol big hit determination random number stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) jackpot determination random number storage 1 area, the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) reach determination random number storage 1 area To the random number buffer for reach determination, the random number value stored in the special pattern 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern random number 1 storage 1 area to the variation pattern random number 1 buffer, and the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern The random number value stored in the random number 2 storage 1 area is stored in the random number buffer for variation pattern, and the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation type random number storage 1 area is stored in the random number buffer for variation type. Symbol 1 (Special symbol 2) The random number value stored in the special symbol random number memory 1 area is stored in the special symbol random number buffer.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area as a big hit flag storage area (special symbol winning flag area) (step S508). Further, based on the big hit flag stored in the big hit flag area, a special symbol big hit determination process for determining the result of the special lottery is executed (step S510). The special symbol / flag setting process is a process executed at the start of a change, and sets an address value of a big hit flag area (special symbol winning flag area) to execute a special symbol big hit determination process. On the other hand, when the special symbol big hit determination processing is executed at the time of prefetching (when it is executed at the processing of step S250 of the memory prefetch processing), as described above, the big hit flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) is used as the big hit flag. Is set. As described above, the area of the RAM to be referred / stored before executing the special symbol big hit determination processing is set in advance at the time of pre-reading and at the time of fluctuation, so that the “special symbol big hit determination processing” is set at the time of pre-reading and at the time of fluctuation. It is possible to share in. Note that the procedure of the special symbol big hit determination process is as described with reference to FIG.

  Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result of the special lottery (big hit) (step S512). The special symbol determination process is common to the process of step S252 in the memory prefetching process, and can be shared at the time of prefetching and at the time of change as in the special symbol big hit determination process. As you did. Then, the main control program sets the special symbol number value set in the special symbol determination process as the special symbol number setting value (step S514).

  Next, the main control program searches a special symbol stop area (special symbol 1 stop area or special symbol 2 stop area) corresponding to the special symbol identification flag from the special stop symbol setting work area address table (step S516). Further, the special symbol number set value is stored in the special symbol stop area searched by the processing of step S516 (step S518).

  Then, the main control program executes a special symbol conversion process for selecting a display pattern to be displayed on the special symbol display (7-segment or the like) (step S520). If the determined symbol number is set as it is as the display data of the special symbol display, the display pattern becomes a fixed display pattern. For this reason, the display pattern is acquired so that the display pattern does not become a fixed display pattern by calculation. In addition, it is possible to select a display pattern from the symbol number in a dedicated table so that the display pattern does not become constant. The storage capacity for storing is increased. Therefore, by acquiring the display pattern by calculation, it is possible to prevent an increase in the storage capacity while preventing the player from identifying the display pattern.

  Finally, the main control program adds the symbol information value acquired by the special symbol conversion process to an area corresponding to the special symbol stop area searched in the process of step S516 (1 to the address of the searched special symbol stop area). (Step S522), and the special symbol / flag setting process ends.

[9-14. Special symbol variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special symbol change pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol change waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a special symbol variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment.

  First, the main control program stores the number of special symbol operation reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol identification flag in the special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (steps S530 to S536). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol operation reserved ball number area (special symbol 1 operation reserved ball number area or special symbol 2 activated reserved ball number area) corresponding to the special symbol for which the variable display is started is set. The value of the special symbol operation reserved ball number area (special symbol operation reserved ball number) is set as the stored value (steps S530 to S534). Then, the set storage value is stored in the special symbol operation pending ball count buffer (step S536).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a big hit flag area in the big hit flag storage area (step S538). Further, the special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table 1 is set as a special symbol fluctuation distribution information source address table holding information for selecting a fluctuation pattern (step S540). Thereafter, a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S542). The variation pattern selection determination process is common to the process of step S258 in the memory prefetch process, and can be shared between prefetching and variation as in the special symbol big hit determination process, and will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. As you did. When the variation pattern selection determination processing ends, the main control program sets the extracted variation pattern value in the variation pattern area (Step S544).

  Next, the main control program searches the special symbol variation time data for data (variation time value) corresponding to the variation pattern value (step S546). At this time, the obtained fluctuation time value becomes a reference fluctuation time value, and the reference fluctuation time value is saved.

  Further, the main control program executes a variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type type value (step S548), and sets the acquired variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S550). The variation type determination process is common to the process of step S262 in the memory prefetch process, and can be shared between prefetching and variation as in the special symbol big hit determination process, as described with reference to FIG. .

  Subsequently, the main control program searches the fluctuation time addition value data for a fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type classification value (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is an addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, an addition time corresponding to the number of pseudo runs. Then, the main control program adds the addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference change time value searched in the process of step S546 to obtain a final change time (step S554). Finally, the final variation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol variation pattern setting processing ends.

[9-15. Normal pattern and normal electric accessory control processing]
Next, the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process according to the present embodiment. The normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S88 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is started, the main control program first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate unit (normal figure gate) 2350 (step S800). When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350, the presence or absence of the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is read in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Input information is written in the area. The main control program refers to the written input information and determines the passage of the game ball.

  When the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2350 (the result of step S800 is “yes”), the main control program executes a gate passing process (step S802). In the process at the time of passing through the gate, a value of a counter for updating the random number for symbol hit determination is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The details of the gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game ball has not passed through the gate unit 2350 (the result of step S800 is "no"), or if the process at the time of passing the gate has been completed, the main control program executes the normal symbol / normal electric accessory. The process corresponding to the normal symbol / electric accessory operation number is searched from the operation call table (step S804), and the searched process is executed (step S810).

  In the process of step S810, based on the normal symbol / electric accessory operation number, a normal symbol change waiting process (step S812), a normal symbol change process (step S814), a normal symbol big hit determination process (step S816), a normal symbol loss A stop process (step S818), a stop process per normal symbol (step S820), a normal electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), or a normal power operation end interval process (step S824) are executed.

  In the normal symbol change waiting process (step S812), based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2350, a process of starting the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol change process (step S814), a process of controlling the variable display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1189 is performed.

  In the normal symbol hit determination process (step S816), a winning determination of a normal lottery or the like is performed based on a game ball passing through the gate unit 2350.

  In the normal symbol loss stop process (step S818), when the normal lottery is not won, a process of stopping the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 and notifying the user of the fact is performed.

  In the normal symbol hit stop process (step S820), when a normal lottery is won, the normal symbol display 1189 stops displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol and informs the user of the fact, or a pair of movable pieces (normal electric accessory). Processing such as setting the opening / closing mode of 2106 is performed.

  In the normal electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), the pair of movable pieces (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 are opened or closed so that the lower starting port 2102 can receive a game ball. Processing such as an operation of making the mouth 2102 unacceptable for a game ball is performed.

  In the ordinary power operation end interval process (step S824), it is determined whether or not the operation of the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 has been completed.

[9-16. Processing when passing through the gate]
Next, details of the gate passing process (step S802) in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process will be described. In the processing at the time of passing through the gate, a command transmitted when the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected, a random number for ordinary lottery is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a prefetch effect is executed. Or the like to perform the processing.

  In the processing at the time of passing through the gate, as described above, the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2350 is detected, and the value of the counter for updating the random number for symbol hit determination is extracted and the gate information of the main control built-in RAM is used as gate information. The information is stored in the information storage area.

  The gate information storage area is provided with the 0th section to the 3rd section (four sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. I do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section and the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is displayed such that the total number of stored gate information is set as a reserved ball and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal of the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Hereinafter, the procedure of the processing at the time of passing through the gate will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  When the processing at the time of passing through the gate is started, the main control program first obtains the value of the normal symbol operation reserved ball count area as the operation reserved ball count (step S830). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value of 4 (step S832). If the number of active balls is equal to or larger than the upper limit value (the result of step S832 is “yes”), the processing at the time of passing through the gate ends.

  On the other hand, when the number of operation-reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S832 is "no"), the main control program stores the number of operation-reserved balls in the normal symbol operation-reserved ball number buffer (step S834). Further, 1 is added to the content of the ordinary symbol operation reserved ball count area, and the ordinary symbol activated reserved ball count is updated (step S836).

  Next, the main control program stores the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number in a predetermined area of the ordinary symbol random number storage area corresponding to the number of reservations (step S838). More specifically, the normal symbol random number storage area is divided into a 0th to a 3rd partition in a predetermined unit, and each of the partitions is a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved normal symbols. Each time a gate passes, a random number for determining a hit of a normal symbol and a random number for determining a hit symbol of a normal symbol are stored in a normal symbol random number storage area. Since the random number for hit determination and the random number for hit symbol are each composed of 1 byte, the predetermined unit is 2. Note that the random numbers stored for normal symbols are not limited to the random numbers. For example, when a random number for reach determination for normal symbols or a random number for fluctuation pattern is provided as in a special symbol, these are gated. A configuration in which the information is stored for each pass may be adopted.

  Finally, the main control program executes a normal symbol prefetching process based on the storage of the newly stored ordinary symbols (step S840). Details of the normal symbol prefetch process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[9-17. Normal pattern prefetching process]
Next, the details of the ordinary symbol prefetching process (step S848) in the process when passing through the gate will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ordinary symbol prefetching process according to the present embodiment. In the normal symbol prefetching process, various random numbers are acquired before starting the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the newly stored ordinary symbol holding memory, and the general symbol prefetch effect is performed by the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value. Information for determination (ordinary symbol type prefetch effect command shown in FIG. 16) is generated, and processing such as transmitting a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Upon receiving the normal symbol type prefetch command, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the general symbol prefetch effect can be executed, and performs a process according to the determination result.

  When the normal symbol prefetching process is started, the main control program temporarily sets the prefetching determination value to prohibition (step S850). Further, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination prohibition period has been reached at the time of executing the process (step S852).

  Here, a period in which the prefetch determination is prohibited will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating an example of a period in which the prefetch determination is prohibited. In the present embodiment, whether or not the prefetch determination of the normal lottery is prohibited is determined based on the operation (open) state of the movable piece 2106 (ordinary electric accessory).

  As shown in FIG. 39, the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory is determined by the game state and the special look-ahead effect. Further, the gaming state includes a probability state corresponding to the winning probability of the special lottery, and a time reduction state corresponding to the variation time, the winning probability, and the operation mode of the normal electric auditorium in the normal lottery. The probability states include a low probability state (normal state) and a high probability state (probable change state) in which the special figure lottery winning probability is higher than the low probability state. The time reduction state includes a non-time reduction state and a time reduction state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-time reduction state. In the time reduction state according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter, the probability of winning the general drawing lottery is higher than in the non-time reduction state, and the operation time of the normal electric auditorium (the lower starting port 2102 It is configured so that the time during which the ball can enter the ball is longer.

  In addition, in addition to the opening mode in the time saving state, the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory of the present embodiment includes a short opening mode in which a game ball is difficult to enter the lower starting port 2102, and a game ball area sufficient for the lower starting port 2102. There are two types of operation modes of long opening that can enter the ball. Further, the opening mode of the short opening and the long opening may be different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. The short opening in the non-time saving state is an opening mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the starting port, but in the time saving state, it may be an opening mode in which the ball can easily enter the starting port in the same manner as the long opening. Further, the long opening may be a different opening mode between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, and may be an opening mode in which the rate of winning in the starting opening is further increased in the time reduction state as compared with the non-time reduction state. In the case of the short opening, it is difficult for the player to aim the game ball into the lower starting port 2102, so that the ordinary figure pre-reading effect is executed only in the case of the long opening.

  On the other hand, even in the case of the short opening, the prefetch effect may be executed. For example, by executing the same pre-reading effect in the long opening and the short opening, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the player is in the long opening or the short opening, and the sense of expectation by the pre-reading effect can be further amplified. Also, by making the look-ahead effect different or only partially different between the short open and the long open, the player can identify which open pattern is to be used, and perform a firing operation corresponding to the open pattern. Thus, interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, as for the pre-reading effect, a gaseous effect may be provided regardless of whether it is long or short. The gaseous production is a process in which the look-ahead production is performed, but the production does not succeed (fail) in the end, so that the player is notified that the ordinary electric accessory will not be opened as a result. You may. Although the gasse effect is disappointing for the player as a result, if the gaseous effect is not provided, the opening operation is always performed when the look-ahead effect is performed, so the player's The aim is to amplify expectations. In addition, a look-ahead effect as a fixed effect in which either a short release or a long release is always executed in the look-ahead effect may be provided. With regard to the fixed effect, by making the mode different from the normal look-ahead effect, it is possible to amplify the sense of expectation for the player.

  In addition, in the case of the time reduction state, since the winning probability of the general drawing lottery is high, and since the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is long, the profit of notifying the long opening is scarce for the player, so the general drawing pre-reading effect is performed. It may not be done.

  Further, when the special figure pre-reading effect is being executed, the execution of the ordinary figure pre-reading effect may be restricted. In the present embodiment, when the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the mode of the hold display is being executed, it is permitted to execute the general figure look-ahead effect in parallel. On the other hand, when the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the background display is executed, if the probability state is low probability, the execution of the general figure look-ahead effect is permitted, and if the probability state is high probability, the general figure look-ahead effect is performed. Is regulated. This is because, in the special figure look-ahead effect in the high probability state, there is a high expectation that the special lottery will be won, and the effect of the universal figure look-ahead effect may be reduced. However, by performing the general-look-ahead effect, the player can be encouraged to continue firing without stopping the launch of the game ball while the special-aware-ahead effect is being performed. It may be executed. In addition, the execution of the general-purpose look-ahead effect may be restricted according to the gaming state. For example, in the case of the big hit gaming state, the execution of the general-purpose pre-ahead effect may be restricted.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the prefetch determination prohibition period is set (the result of step S852 is “yes”), the main control program executes the processing of step S868 and thereafter. On the other hand, if the prefetch determination prohibition period has not elapsed (the result of step S852 is “no”), the content of the hit determination random number storage area to be prefetched is stored in the hit determination random number buffer in order to execute the prefetch determination. (Step S854). Specifically, first, the random number value stored in any of the ordinary symbol random number storage areas of the sections 0 to 3 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is stored in the ordinary symbol random number buffer. The ordinary symbol random number buffer is configured to correspond to the random number value stored in the ordinary symbol random number storage area when passing through the gate. In the present embodiment, a 2-byte area of a hit determination random number and a hit symbol random number is secured, and is configured by a hit determination random number buffer and a hit symbol random number buffer. Specifically, the case where the number of reserved balls is 2 will be described. The hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number stored in the section 1 of the normal symbol random number storage area are respectively stored in a hit determination random number buffer and a hit symbol random number buffer. Is stored. As described above, the random number value related to the lottery is stored in the random number buffer for hit determination, and the “normal symbol hit determination process” is performed on the random number value stored in the random number buffer for hit determination, whereby the hit at the time of pre-reading is performed. The determination and the hit determination at the start of the change can be performed by a common process.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets a hit flag buffer as a hit flag storage area (step S856). By setting the address of the hit flag buffer as the reference address of the reference / setting destination, and executing the "normal symbol hit determination process", the hit result, the hit symbol, and the number of holdings are respectively a hit flag buffer, a normal symbol type area buffer. , Usually set / referenced in the symbol operation reserve ball count buffer. Further, the main control program executes a normal symbol hit determination process for determining a normal symbol hit (step S858). Details of the normal symbol hit determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer are cleared (step S860).

  After clearing the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer, the main control program sets ordinary symbol type prefetch command creation data as command data (step S862), and refers to the contents of the ordinary symbol type prefetch command creation data. A prefetch command for the normal symbol (corresponding to the normal symbol type prefetch effect command in FIG. 16) is generated and set in the command buffer (step S864). Further, the pre-read determination value is reset to the pre-read permission (step S866).

  After the process of step S866 is completed, or in the case of the pre-reading determination prohibition period (the result of step S852 is “yes”), the main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol operation reserved ball count command creation data 1 as the command data. (Step S868). Further, it is determined whether or not the prefetch determination value is prohibition (step S870). If the prefetch determination value is not prohibition (result of step S870 is "no"), that is, if the prefetch determination value is prefetch permission. In step S872, the normal symbol operation pending ball count command creation data 2 is reset as command data. As described above, different commands are generated for the normal symbol operation pending ball number command when the prefetch is permitted and when the prefetch is prohibited, and for example, different modes are set depending on the permission or prohibition of the prefetch. Lastly, the main control program generates a normal symbol operation reserved ball count command when prefetching is permitted or when prefetching is prohibited based on the command data set in the process of step S868 or step S872 and sets the command in the command buffer (step S874). ).

[9-18. Normal symbol hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the ordinary symbol hit determination process (step S858) in the ordinary symbol prefetching process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the normal symbol hit determination process in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol hit determination process, a process of determining the result of the normal lottery is performed.

  When the normal symbol hit determination processing is started, the main control program first sets the value of the hit determination random number buffer as a comparison value (step S900). Further, a lower limit of the hit value is selected from the normal symbol hit determination lower limit data table based on whether or not the game is in the time saving game state, and the normal symbol hit determination lower limit data is set (step S902). In addition, the normal symbol has a high probability during the time reduction, and the number of hit values during the time reduction is larger than the number of hit values during the non-time reduction, so the values such as the lower limit are smaller values during the time reduction. (The total number of hit values increases). Further, the main control program tentatively sets the normal symbol winning determination value to no ordinary symbol winning as a default value (step S904).

  Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the comparison value set in the processing of Step S900 is smaller than the hit determination lower limit set in the processing of Step S902 (Step S906). If the comparison value is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “yes”), the ordinary symbol lottery has not been won, so the ordinary symbol winning determination value provisionally set in the hit flag storage area (normal (No symbol win) is stored (step S922). Further, the normal symbol winning determination value is also stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S924). In other words, at the time of a loss, a hit value “0” (no normal symbol winning) is set in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area.

  On the other hand, when the comparison value is equal to or greater than the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “no”), the main control program further determines whether the comparison value is greater than the hit determination upper limit value (step S906). S908). If the comparison value is larger than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S908 is "yes"), it is determined that the game is out of place as in the case where the ordinary figure lottery is not won, and the hit flag area and the ordinary symbol type area are displayed. Each is set to "0" which is a deviation value. In the same manner as in the case of the special figure, if the hit determination random number is equal to or greater than the hit determination lower limit value, the hit determination may be made as a hit. In order to cope with a malfunction in which an exceeded value is set, the value is compared with the upper limit.

  When the comparison value is equal to or less than the hit determination upper limit value (the result of step S908 is "no"), the main control program determines that the general symbol lottery has been won, and determines the normal symbol winning determination value as a normal symbol winning determination value (" 1 ") is set (step S910). Then, the normal symbol winning determination value (normal symbol winning) is stored in the hit flag storage area (step S912).

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the ordinary symbol determination data 1 as search data (step S914). Further, a winning symbol random number is set as a comparison value (step S916), and a fluctuation information number search process is executed (step S918). The ordinary symbol determination data 1 is searched based on the value of the winning symbol random number buffer by the variation information number search process to determine the winning symbol type, and the determined winning symbol type is stored in the ordinary symbol type storage area (step S920).

  As described above, in the normal symbol hit determination processing, the determination result is stored in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area. By setting different areas in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area in advance and at the time of change, it is possible to share the processing between the time of prefetch and the time of change. More specifically, a hit flag area is set in the hit flag storage area at the start of the change of the normal symbol, and a normal symbol type area is set in the normal symbol type storage area. On the other hand, at the time of pre-reading, a hit flag buffer is set in the hit flag storage area, and a normal symbol type area buffer is set in the normal symbol type storage area. With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, as in the case of the special lottery, the processing can be shared between the pre-reading and the start of the fluctuation also in the normal lottery.

  The main processing related to the special lottery and the normal lottery executed in the main control board 4100 has been described above. The program for executing the game control according to the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of modules. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating the module configuration of the main control program according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 41, some modules of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and a part of the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process are extracted and shown.

  In the control program of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, each function is divided into modules. General-purpose modules are commonly used in each process. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the command buffer setting process executed when a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 includes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process at the time of a start opening winning process. It is configured to be used not only in the special symbol change waiting process and the like, but also in the ordinary symbol pre-reading process of the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process. With this configuration, it is possible to use a common module, a buffer, and the like at the time of command creation, regardless of the type of command, and it is possible to effectively use the resources of the gaming machine.

  Further, a process of searching for data (variation information number) from a predetermined table (variation information number search process) can be commonly used. This is realized by standardizing the configuration of the table to be searched and specifying a search range and a search parameter. By thus configuring the modules in common, it is possible to improve program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

  The command buffer setting process and the change information number search process use a relatively small number of common modules. However, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a process such as a special symbol big hit determination is performed at the time of pre-reading ( (At the time of the start prize) and at the start of the fluctuation.

  More specifically, as described above, at the time of pre-reading (memory pre-reading processing) and at the start of fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation waiting processing), special symbol big hit determination processing (FIG. 27), special symbol determination processing (FIG. 28), The variation pattern selection determination process (FIGS. 29 and 30) and the variation type determination process (FIG. 31) are commonly used. These processes are configured to refer to a value stored at a specified address, and by specifying a reference address before execution of the process, the values stored in different areas at the time of pre-reading and at the time of start of fluctuation are designated. Processing can be executed based on the value. Further, not only the value but also the reference destination of the table may be specified. For example, if the present invention is applied to a process of referring to a different table according to a game state, a common process can be performed regardless of the game state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol hit determination process for determining the hit of the normal lottery is also shared in the process related to the normal symbol. In the normal symbol hit determination process, a hit flag indicating the result of the general symbol lottery is obtained from the hit flag storage area, and the process is performed. The address is set as an address. When the process is normally executed from the symbol change waiting process, the address of the hit flag area is set as a reference address.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to share a module having a relatively large number of processes as described above, thereby improving program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

[10. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 44 is an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set highest, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. They are set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In the initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, and is output from the main control board 4100 in, for example, a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, as shown in FIGS. In this state, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received. In the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the peripheral control MPU 4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by causing the built-in sound source VDP 4160a to write, for example, “0” to a storage area of the built-in VRAM.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. In addition to the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms). ms), and when the compared contents match each other, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which are storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. While the effect backup information (1fr) and the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) for Bank0 (1 ms), are copied back to a hot start, and compared. When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are the storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db is also compared for the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. At the same time, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), for Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used in peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 12). ) Is copied back to a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. A cold start is performed by forcibly writing 0. Subsequent to such a hot start or a cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 13) to clear it to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 12) so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. I have.

  Further, in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built in the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 when power supply is started by the power supply control unit (initial contact sensitivity adjustment unit). ). Specifically, first, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481 stores a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state. The touch panel controller 481 sets the contact determination threshold stored in the control register 481a to a predetermined initial value of the contact determination threshold (hereinafter referred to as “initial contact”) when power supply is started by the power supply control unit. The threshold is also updated.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In the current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are obtained from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in (1), the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information to the game board. A process of adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 to light it is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. The set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the use time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the luminance correction program, so that each time the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed, the luminance of the LED is corrected toward 100%. This is to prevent that.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to a V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, which is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). If the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (it is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed is set. After determining whether or not this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and peripheral control external WDT 4150e to reset peripheral control MPU 4150a. So that they do n’t

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the value 1 is first set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit regular processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process.

  Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the lamp driving board serial I / O port is started, the transmission data storage area 4150caa on the lamp driving board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A state in which the game board-side light-emitting data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided is created and set by a lamp data creation process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored in the head address of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first one byte of the game board side emission data SL-DAT is transferred to the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side light-emitting clock signal SL-CLK by 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The transmission of the data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the lamp drive board serial I / O port is generated, triggers the transmission interrupt request (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port transmission buffer register). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150caa is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing the data to the buffer register, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK. Transmission of one byte of data of the transmission shift register is started one bit at a time, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. At 4150cab, door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the state of being set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of the 4150cab is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data is transferred and written to the transmission buffer register of the I / O port. As a result, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK to transmit the data of the transmission shift register. Transmission of one byte of data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port occurs, triggers this (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O The 1-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When no bus is used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad in units of 1 byte. , And frame decoration via peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer, start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door side emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. I have.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Of the dial operation unit 401 (for example, the rotation direction (rotation direction) created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). ) The history information and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 are set. On the basis of the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The presence or absence of operation of the unit 405 is monitored, and the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is monitored. Appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the pushing operation section 405 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a by the display data creation processing described later is used by the built-in sound source VDP 4160a to display the liquid crystal display on the game board side from the channels CH1 and CH2. Output to the device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 244 is canceled. Thereby, a delay in processing time can be prevented. However, although a so-called frame drop occurs, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012, and The effect of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 by a plurality of LEDs and the sound data output processing described later, and the speakers accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. There is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the effects by music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects from the speakers provided on the door frame 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data serialized sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later, The sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound in addition to the music and sound effects are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. When serialized audio data is input from the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c sends the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data of a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data of a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, music and sound effects matched to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5, as well as notification sounds and notification sounds. It is played back in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In the scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number of screen data from the first screen data is transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

  In the scheduler update process, among the luminescence data arranged in time series that constitute the luminescence mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of luminescence data starting from the first luminescence data is changed to the luminescence of various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to use the mode.

  In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are specified. The pointer is updated to indicate the order of the sound command data from the first sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the first drive data The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The driving data of the electric driving sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in time series and constituting the electric driving source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, it is assumed that the pointer is temporarily instructed for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the update is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands received from the main control board 4100 in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command reception unit) described later (command analysis unit). ). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, the number of ordinary symbols held (0 to 4). , A symbol synchronizing effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronizing effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of starting suspensions changes, and each time a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2103. The special winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) or the frame state 1 command (second error generating command, full tank error generating command) shown in FIG. By analyzing whether or not there is (command analyzing means), it is recognized which game state is currently in play. In addition, the effect control program is configured such that after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main frame opening command, a main frame closing command, a door frame opening command or a door frame closing command. Analyzes whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. As the various commands, various commands shown in FIG. 15 are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, special figure 2 various commands related to tuning effect related, various commands classified into big hit related, and power-on classified. Commands, various commands classified for ordinary drawing synchronizing production, various commands classified for normal electric production production, various commands classified for notification display shown in FIG. 16, and the above-described door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the second error clearing command), and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error generating command). There are various commands to be classified, various commands to be related to a test, and various commands to be classified into others.

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In the warning process, if the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormal display mode for performing the notification, are transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 4150. It is extracted from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Further, in the warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is classified into various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. For example, in the case of an error clearing navigation command (second error clearing command), by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in a manner different from a normal effect form associated with the effect operation, for example, a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (producing device), upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (producing device), and lamp (producing device) to display a predetermined warning image (for example, “door opening!” Etc.) to visually externally display. A warning is issued or an external warning is given audibly using a pair of side speakers (producing device) (error notifying means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error canceling navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 even in the gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, illegal acts on the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game can be suppressed.

  Next, following the processing in step S1024, the effect control program performs RTC acquisition information updating processing (step S1025). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RTC acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1025, the effect control program performs an effect control process (step S1026). In the effect control process, the effect control program instructs execution of a process based on the progress state of the effect being executed. For example, a demo screen is displayed in a state where the variable display game is not executed, or when a command for a special figure tuning effect is received, the progress of the special figure tuning effect is controlled. In addition, a jackpot game effect or the like is executed based on the result of the variable display game. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs special figure prefetching effect control processing (step S1027). In the special figure pre-reading effect control process, the effect control program performs settings at the time of starting the execution of the special figure pre-reading effect. The details of the special figure pre-reading effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs general-purpose look-ahead effect control processing (step S1028). In the universal figure pre-reading effect control process, the effect control program performs setting and progress control at the time of starting execution of the universal figure pre-reading effect. Details of the ordinary figure pre-reading effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1027, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and sets the light emission pointed to by the pointer out of the time-series light emission data constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Based on the data, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4150. Of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. To multiple LEDs on various decorative boards provided Door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is extracted and created from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. Are set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, the pointer control is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, so that the effect control program is the data constituting the screen generation schedule data and arranged in chronological order in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy area 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and extracts the at least one extracted character data. The sprite data is created from the above, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated in a built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

  By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, in accordance with the progress of the game, by displaying an image in which a large number of material images are superimposed on a background image in each frame, an attempt is made to make the mode in which the interest of the player is not exhausted. Although it is requested that display control be performed so that a larger number of material images are included in each frame in order to display a wider variety of images, including a large number of material images in each frame is, at first glance, a display. It seems like a heavy burden on control.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying the display control of frames including a large number of material images and reducing the processing load, the effect control program executes each frame displayed based on the drawing data and each frame. While managing the correspondence information in which the correspondence with a plurality of material images that can be represented is defined in advance, when trying to display a predetermined frame of each frame, referencing the correspondence information and performing the predetermined At least one predetermined material image to be included in the frame is specified, and the rendering data is included in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a without including the predetermined material image and including other material images excluding the predetermined material image. It is generated and stored in a built-in VRAM (frame buffer), and the predetermined frame based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM is played Being displayed on the side the liquid crystal display device 1900 (display unit). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

  First, in the present embodiment, at least a part of the background image data (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific background image data”) among a large number of background image data used for displaying a large number of background images constituting each frame is: On a background image based on the specific background image data, at least one material image such as a sprite (hereinafter, also referred to as a “specific sprite”) is to be arranged (hereinafter, referred to as an “original arrangement position”). As represented by a display mode that cannot be visually recognized (hereinafter, referred to as a “confidential state”), it is managed as follows.

  First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the following correspondence association table (correspondence information management means) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Browse the table. In this correspondence linking table, each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a and at least one sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups) is displayed. Predefined correspondence information is managed together with a concealment release command (concealment release command) for releasing the visual concealment state of the at least one sprite from the correspondence. In this correspondence relation associating table, each sprite (and each background image) can be identified using a sprite number, and the coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame as a part of the correspondence information. Values are managed.

  In this correspondence relation associating table, as such correspondence information, for example, at least one material image such as a sprite that can be represented in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, The correspondence relationship with the concealment release command for releasing the visual concealment state of the at least one material image is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least one material image is referred to as “desired sprite”.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP 4160a to generate drawing data from sprite data based on scheduler data (drawing management means). When the effect control program attempts to display a predetermined frame in accordance with the result of the predetermined effect lottery executed when the start condition is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the correspondence relationship in the correspondence association table. By referring to the information, a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame and specified is specified (material image specifying unit).

  Further, the effect control program, when a desired sprite is to be represented in a predetermined frame according to the schedule data, by referring to the correspondence information of the correspondence association table, specifies the concealment release command corresponding to the desired sprite, The specified concealment release command is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (concealment release instruction means). The concealment release command includes a sprite number capable of identifying a desired sprite whose concealment state is to be released in the predetermined frame (hereinafter, referred to as a “desired sprite number”). With the output of such a concealment release command, the display state flag of the name tag information, which was off as the initial state, is updated to on. The name tag information and its display state flag are prepared for each sprite that can be represented in each frame, and are referred to when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a performs a drawing process.

  Here, when the effect control program attempts to display a predetermined frame under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (drawing control means) is operated as follows. That is, when the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source does not receive the concealment release command, the display mode in which a desired sprite that can be included in the predetermined frame is kept in the concealed state based on the correspondence information in the correspondence association table is used. Is generated in the frame buffer. Thus, the effect control program can display a frame in a mode in which the desired sprite cannot be visually recognized on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  On the other hand, when the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source receives the above-described concealment release command, the VDP 4160a receives the concealment release command and informs that the display state flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included in the command has been updated to ON. As an opportunity, a desired sprite corresponding to the concealment release command is specified with reference to the correspondence information in the correspondence association table. Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a generates drawing data for releasing the concealed state of the specified desired sprite into a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized, in the frame buffer. Thus, the effect control program can cause the gaming panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display a frame in a display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

  By doing so, the effect control program does not need to finely manage which sprite groups can be represented in each frame when displaying a frame group of a certain scene due to the existence of the correspondence association table. On the other hand, by making the peripheral control MPU 4150a output a concealment release command, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source can draw a frame representing each desired sprite by a very simple control compared to the conventional display control. A frame that does not represent a sprite can be drawn. This makes it possible to simplify the display control of a frame including many sprites and reduce the processing load.

  In addition, a configuration is employed in which the sprite group including the desired sprite is linked to the staging control program (the concealment release command group issued by the effect control program) to manage the correspondence by the correspondence association table described above. Thus, the sprite data creation work and the production control program design work can be completely separated independently of each other, and the design work related to display control can be simplified.

  By the way, as described above, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko gaming machine, sensitivity adjustment is generally performed as an initial process when power is turned on, and thereafter, there are many devices that operate with the sensitivity. Even if the adjustment of the contact sensitivity is performed in the initial processing as described above, the sensitivity may gradually become inappropriate at first glance depending on the subsequent game environment.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in the display data creation processing, the effect control program further controls the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) on the upper liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. A function of outputting the above-mentioned effect command (effect execution command) for executing a display operation in a mode of prompting contact with the operation surface, and causing the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the touch surface of the touch panel 246. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for enabling (contact sensitivity adjustment means) is output (command output means). In other words, the effect control program uses the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 to prompt the user to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 with a finger as an effect command (effect execution command) (to the operation surface of the contact input means). A command to execute the display operation of (a mode for prompting contact) is written in the transmission information storage area, and thereafter, is output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting means). Next, when the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 receives the command, the effect control program (display control program under the control of the effect) causes the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) to be touched with a finger based on the command. A screen prompting to touch is displayed on the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 244.

  Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs a touch panel process (step S1031). In the touch panel processing, the effect control program mainly detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on a contact detection signal as a detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. (Contact state detecting means). That is, the effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detecting means) for detecting a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. The effect control program acquires coordinate values of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies a position represented by the coordinate values as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), The operation information including the initial position is obtained. The effect control program may obtain not only such coordinate values but also a range of the operation surface (hereinafter, referred to as a contact range).

  In this touch panel processing, as a countermeasure to the above-mentioned concerns, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4150a separately from the above-described effect command (effect effect command), and then transmitted to the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold is written in the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (touch input control means) (sensitivity adjustment). Command means).

  Specifically, the effect control program executes a special figure 1 tuning effect end command (see FIG. 15) from the main control MPU 4100a when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) elapses as the predetermined timing. ) At the time when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the last reception of the special symbol 2 or when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed. 15), the threshold setting command described above is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the last reception of the threshold value.

  The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4150a as an example of the touch panel module 246a, and the touch panel controller 481 contacts the touch panel 246. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. In other words, when the effect control program receives the threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a, the contact determination stored in the control register 481a is performed based on the threshold setting command. The contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is adjusted by updating the use threshold. Specifically, upon receiving the threshold setting command, the touch panel controller 481 acquires a capacitance based on a detection signal output from the touch panel sensor 482, and uses the capacitance as a contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is regarded as a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  Then, thereafter, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. If it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, it is determined that the contact surface is in a non-contact state, while if it is determined that the detected capacitance is not less than the contact determination threshold, It is determined that the contact surface is in the contact state.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs the contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the contact detection information, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 481 changes the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 at a desired timing triggered by receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the determined contact determination threshold is updated, if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4150a is appropriately controlled, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing. (Calibration) For this reason, the effect control program causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold setting command without the output timing that may affect the game by the player, so that the touch panel 246 is always controlled without affecting the game. The detection of the contact state can be set to an appropriate operation mode.

  As described above, the timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is, for example, a special figure 1 tuning effect end command output when the variable display of the special symbol ends. Alternatively, a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the reception of the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, and the possibility that the player has stopped playing the game and thus has low contact with the operation surface of the touch panel 246 is low. Timing can be illustrated. That is, such adjustment of the contact sensitivity is performed as much as possible while performing the variation display of the special symbol which may execute the effect using the touch panel 246 and the variation display is finished. I have.

  In addition, as the timing at which the threshold setting command should be output, the general control synchronizing effect end command (see FIG. 15) transmitted by the effect control program from the main control MPU 4100a when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed is also provided. The timing may be a timing when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed from the reception.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is of a capacitance type, is capable of storing a large number of game balls, and is provided on the upper plate 301 where static electricity is easily generated. Since the sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing in response to the change of the surrounding environment, even if it is not caused by the operation of the player, it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed. It becomes difficult to do.

  Subsequent to step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and outputs the sound indicated by the pointer out of the sound command data arranged in chronological order constituting the sound generation schedule data. The command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to thereby control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 13 is activated every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular process is performed), and the volume adjustment volume is adjusted. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob 4140a is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, the volume is set to mute for substrate volume 0, and set to the maximum volume for substrate volume 6, and Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 are controlled so as to have the volume set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the audio data is converted into the audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output processing in step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects can be played from the speakers contained in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided on the door frame 5.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the volume from the silence to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and the sound source of the sound control unit 4160. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk of the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 may be used. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effects from the provided speakers is reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is malfunctioning or when the player is performing wrongdoing, the sound volume is large (in the present embodiment, the maximum sound volume is large). (Sound volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming unaware of the occurrence of a malfunction or the misconduct of the player due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, the screen developed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is rendered more powerful, and is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 4150db and the second backup area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup management work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit regular process is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, which are included in the target Bank0 (1fr). The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as the effect backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 ( Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to fr) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is copied by the peripheral control CPU 4150aa. A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the A controller 4150ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the contents stored at the head address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to Bank0 (1fr). The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the head address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and Bank0 (1fr). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), and the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. , And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and copies the contents to the backup second area 4150cc in Bank4 (1fr). And From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously provided in a backup second area 4150cc Bank4 (1fr). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d becomes a backup target every one frame (1 frame) in the backup management work area 4150da shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit regular process is executed. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in the existing Bank0 (SRAM), is used as effect backup information (SRAM). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to the backup second area 4150dc Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM).

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to copy the backup first area 4150db to Bank2 (SRAM), and the content stored in the head address of Bank0 (SRAM) From the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied at a time from the head address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM), and the start address of Bank 3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) continuously. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) to the Bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The backup second area 4150dc is continuously designated by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Are copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady processing starts when the effect control program first sets the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and interrupts for 1 ms in step S1010. .., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. Once set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. The value 1 is set in the later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 is input from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed as a trigger. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  If the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has the value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the flag SP-FLG during steady-state processing is equal to 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is determined that the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed by the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the peripheral control unit regular processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit power supply shown in FIG. In step S1009 of the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing), the value of the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. In addition to transmitting to the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit regular processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. The fact that this has been done is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, so that the routine processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. In other words, this is a process in a case where the peripheral control unit normal processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, and the processing is aborted.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state process. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state process that has failed as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit regular processing has failed, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is not guaranteed. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit regular processing is not performed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42 will be described. . When the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is started, in the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12, under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, as shown in FIG. Is smaller than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed at about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, and then the next peripheral control unit regular processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32 th 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  If the number of executions of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program is directly executed in this routine. To end. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit as this routine is executed is increased by one time.

  Subsequent to step S1102, the effect control program performs a motor and solenoid drive process (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. According to the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids, the effect control program controls the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid driving process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When serial transmission of serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board motors is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 12 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in chronological order. Motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting the data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Framed Set in the transmission data storage area 4150caf drive amplifier board side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the area 4150caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. To the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor driving clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. The transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port occurs, triggers it (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O The 1-byte data written to the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register and the transmission buffer register becomes empty.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When no bus is used, the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller store the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf one byte at a time. 4150ad, and via the peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port and writing the data, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. To start transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register one bit at a time in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is started, first, when configuring the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c. Based on the driving data indicated by the pointer among the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in a series, the driving to the motors and the solenoids for moving the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 is performed. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and created. Motor of control RAM 4150c Set the dynamic substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first one byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the serial I / O port for motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK to transmit the data of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started one bit at a time.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated, triggers the transmission interrupt request (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port transmission buffer register). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data is lost in the transmission buffer register, which is emptied.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board-side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred by one byte at a time via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the serial I / O port for the motor driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and outputs the game board side motor driving clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started one bit at a time, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Subsequent to step S1104, a movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, original position history information , Movable position history information, etc.), and set them in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position and movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 have been input, and the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, dial operation unit) The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set to 4150 cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110), subsequently performs a backup process (step S1112), and ends this routine. In the backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are copied and backed up to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  More specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process in the backup management work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time it is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up The effect information (1 ms) stored in the 4150cah and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai is used as effect backup information (1ms), and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 of the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). All the contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is copied by the peripheral control CPU 4150aa. A copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as a request factor of the A controller 4150ac to Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the contents stored at the head address of Bank0 (1ms) are changed to Bank0 (1ms). The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and Bank0 (1ms). ) From the contents stored at the start address to the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms), and the start address of Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). , And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and copies the data to the backup second area 4150cc in Bank4 (1ms). I From the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), backup bytes (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc are continuously provided in predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from the start address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the various processes related to the effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are performed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since the routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt will After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt is performed. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, the consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit regular processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly varies depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may be slightly changed. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 starts transmission of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, which triggers main peripheral serial data to be incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. One byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated in response to this, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes, a status is allocated as the first byte, a mode is allocated as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received.

  If the 1-byte receiving period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main serial data transmitted from main control board 4100 is within the period in which information of 1 byte (8 bits) can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is set. When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3, ie, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main serial data, and the third byte of the main serial data If the sum value is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the mode of the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data, and When the sum value, which is the byte, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by regarding the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 considers the status allocated as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 4100. Has been determined. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has been changed to a non-regular main circumference serial data due to the noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  If it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data correspond to the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 4150 cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are determined by the reception command storage area. 4150 cac is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when it reaches the end of the buffer. Remember. Note that the peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the received status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the second status of the main serial data as the second byte of the main serial data when storing it in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored value is associated with the stored mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the one-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period exceeds the period in which one-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main serial data transmitted from main control board 4100. In some cases, or when it is determined in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[10-5. Fluctuation pattern]
Next, effects in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an example of a fluctuation pattern table according to the present embodiment. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for managing a pattern (fluctuation pattern) of a special figure tuning effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the fluctuation display (fluctuation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100. The special figure synchronizing effect includes effects in which the peripheral control board 4140 causes the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to change and display a decorative pattern or to display a character corresponding to the changing display game. In addition, effects such as operating a movable role, illuminating a light-emitting body such as a lamp, and outputting a sound from a speaker may be included during the change display of the decorative symbol. The effects corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the present embodiment include story reach, pseudo continuous fluctuation (pseudo continuous), and the like. Further, a variation pattern that extends over a plurality of variation display games may be defined.

  The story reach is an effect in which the decorative effect is in the reach mode and a specific effect according to the degree of expectation (possibility of a big hit) of the running variable display game is executed one or more times. In the present embodiment, the larger the number of times the specific effect is executed, the higher the degree of expectation of the big hit is set. The specific effect may be executed before the occurrence of the reach, or may be executed only after the occurrence of the reach. In addition, the effect form of the specific effect includes, for example, effects such as screen display (cut-in) such as appearance of a character, dialogue (screen display, audio output), operation of movable character, and light emission of a lamp. . In addition, for the same type of effect, a plurality of different effect modes depending on the degree of expectation may be defined.

  The pseudo continuous fluctuation is an effect in which the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (identification symbol) is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and the fluctuation is performed again. The temporary stop and the re-fluctuation are repeated one or more times. In the present embodiment, the setting is such that the greater the number of stops, the higher the degree of expectation of the big hit. In addition, when performing pseudo continuous fluctuation, an effect such as making a character appear when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be executed, or an effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. When reach occurs in the final variation of the pseudo continuous variation, the type of reach in the final variation may be defined together.

  The variation pattern is a special figure 1 variation pattern command or a special figure 2 variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 (hereinafter, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 2 variation pattern command are combined). (Special figure variation pattern command) mode (effect pattern) and a special figure 1 symbol type command or a special figure 2 symbol type command (hereinafter, special figure 1 symbol type command and special figure 2 symbol) This is selected based on the value (the result of the variable display game) set in the mode of "special symbol type command" together with the type command). Further, one variation pattern or a plurality of variation patterns may correspond to a combination of the special figure 1 (2) variation pattern command and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command. When a plurality of fluctuation patterns correspond to each other, a random number value may be obtained and selected by lottery, or may be selected based on a predetermined condition such as a game state.

  The variation pattern table includes items such as a variation pattern name, winning information, variation time, the number of effects inserted (the number of scenarios), an effect selection pattern, and a re-lottery. “Variation pattern name” is a name for identifying a variation pattern. The "winning information" is a result of the variable display game to be executed, and corresponds to a value set in the mode of the special figure 1 symbol type command or the special figure 2 symbol type command. Note that a game state (for example, a “normal state”, a “probable change state”, or a “time reduction state”) may be used instead of the “winning information”.

  The “fluctuation time” corresponds to a fluctuation time (execution time of the fluctuation display game) in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed. Further, the variation time may be changed according to the number of stored memories. For example, when the number of startup memories is large (for example, the number of startup memories is 3 or more), the fluctuation time may be reduced. In addition, it is the same as the change time of the special symbol (identification symbol) in the upper special symbol indicator 1185 or the lower special symbol indicator 1186 of the function display unit 1180. The same applies to the case where the fluctuation time is shortened.

  The "number of effects inserted" is the number of times a specific effect is executed during the fluctuation display in the story reach, or the number of times the special symbol is temporarily stopped (regardless of whether the effect is executed during the temporary stop) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is. The “effect selection pattern” is definition information for selecting a candidate for a specific effect to be executed in the story reach, or for selecting an effect to be executed at the time of a temporary stop in pseudo continuous variation. In the present embodiment, the effect selection pattern is set such that the higher the reliability variation pattern is, the easier it is to select a specific effect with high reliability. A specific example of the “effect selection pattern” will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The “re-lottery” is information that defines whether or not to execute a process of re-lotting a stopped special symbol after the change display of the special symbol ends. In the present embodiment, the “re-lottery” is executed when the result of the variable display game is a special result (for example, a big hit).

[10-6. Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (the process of step S1022 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the reception command analysis processing according to the present embodiment.

  In the received command analysis processing, the effect control program is executed by the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) to determine whether the command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. It is determined (step S1401).

  Upon receiving a command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment generates a peripheral control section command reception interrupt process (FIG. 45). Are stored in a received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of a peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in a peripheral control board 4140. A plurality of areas are provided in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are stored in the order in which they are received.

  If a command is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a transmits the command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit reception ring. The data is read from the buffer (step S1402).

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the command read in the processing of step S1402 is a special figure changing pattern command (special figure 1 changing pattern command or special figure 2 changing pattern command, FIG. 15) (step S1403). ). If it is determined that the command is a special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is “Yes”), the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the variation is performed. The pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the read command is not a special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command is a special figure pattern type command (a special figure 1 symbol type command or a special figure type command). It is determined whether or not the symbol type command is a winning information command indicating “losing”, “specific jackpot”, and “non-specific jackpot” (FIG. 15) (step S1405). If it is determined that the command is the special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is "Yes"), the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1406), and the reception command is received. The analysis processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the read-out effect command is not a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command instructs a special figure prefetch effect (special symbol 1 hold). It is determined whether the command is a number designation command or a special symbol 2 reservation number designation command (pre-reading is present, FIG. 16) (step S1407). The special figure pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number) increases. As will be described later, when the read-out effect command is a command for instructing a special figure pre-reading effect, a special figure pre-reading effect execution flag indicating execution of the special figure pre-reading effect is set. Therefore, the determination of "Yes" in the processing of step S1407 described above is limited to the case where the read-out effect command is the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command of "pre-read". In the case of the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command of "no pre-reading", "No" is determined. As the special figure pre-reading effect command to be determined in the process of step S1407, a command instructing a special figure pre-reading effect other than the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command (symbol pattern pre-reading, fluctuation pattern pre-reading, fluctuation type pre-reading) The determination of “Yes” may be made when the command for instructing all the special figure pre-reading effects is received.

  Further, when the read-out effect command is a special figure pre-reading effect command (the result of step S1407 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a special figure pre-reading effect execution flag (step S1408), and executes the received command analysis process. To end. When the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set, in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing, whether or not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect is determined. Make the necessary settings to execute the effect. The main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect.

  On the other hand, if the read-out effect command is not the special figure look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1408 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the read command is a general figure look-ahead effect command (a normal symbol type look-ahead command, FIG. 16). ) Is determined (step S1409). The general figure pre-reading effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of ordinary design operation pending balls increases. Further, the universal figure pre-reading effect command includes information corresponding to the result of the universal figure lottery. When receiving the general figure pre-reading effect command, the general figure pre-reading effect execution flag for instructing the start of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect (normal figure pre-reading effect) is set. When the universal figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set, in the general figure pre-reading effect control process (step S1028 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing, it is determined whether or not the universal figure pre-reading effect can be executed. Make the necessary settings to execute the effect. It should be noted that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the general-purpose look-ahead effect. In the case of a model that does not execute the ordinary figure prefetch effect, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, if the effect command that has been read is not a general-purpose look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1409 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received command (step S1409). S1411), and ends the received command analysis processing.

  The command received from the main control board 4100 includes, for example, a special figure synchronizing effect ending command (special figure 1 synchronizing effect ending command or a special figure 1 synchronizing effect ending command) for stopping the fluctuation display of the special symbol, as described with reference to FIGS. Special figure 2 tuning effect end command) or a fluctuating state specifying command for specifying a game state (probable change state, time saving state, normal game state) after the end of the big hit game when the result of the fluctuation display game is a big hit included. When the special figure tuning effect end command is received, a tuning effect end flag is set. Also, according to the result of the variable display game, a jackpot opening command instructing execution of an effect at the start of a jackpot game, a jackpot ending command instructing execution of an effect at the end of the jackpot game, and the like are included.

  Furthermore, when a game ball is won in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, a starting port winning command is transmitted from the main control board 4100, and a starting port winning effect notifying that the game ball has been won in the starting port. Start of (for example, audio output) is instructed. Further, when the number of special symbol 1 operation-reserved balls changes due to the winning of a game ball into the upper starting port 2101 or the start of the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185, the special symbol 1 storage command is mainly controlled. Received from the board 4100. Similarly, when the number of special symbol 2 operation-reserved balls changes due to the winning of a game ball into the lower starting port 2102 or the start of the change display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186, the special symbol 2 storage command is mainly executed. Received from control board 4100.

  The special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol 2 storage command) includes the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls), and based on the processing of step S1107, the game board side liquid crystal display. The display corresponding to the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls (number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls) in the device 1900 is set to be updated.

  Also, when a notification command for notifying the occurrence of an error other than the production-related command is received, a flag or the like is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1407), and a response is made by a warning process or the like (step S1024 in FIG. 42). Execute the process.

  Further, in addition to the above-mentioned command, when the power supply to the main control board 4100 is cut off, a power-off command is transmitted. The main control board 4100 is supplied with power for a predetermined time from a capacitor (backup power supply) provided on the power supply board 851 even when power supply from the outside such as the pachinko island facility is stopped. The information stored in the RAM of the control board 4100 can be held and a command such as a power interruption command can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 and the like. When the power supply from the outside is restarted, a power-on command is transmitted. When receiving the power-off command or the power-on command, the peripheral control board 4140 executes a process according to the state. Details of these processes will be described later.

[10-7. Production control processing]
Subsequently, the effect control process (the process of step S1026 in FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process of the present embodiment.

  The effect control process is based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game, and is one of a decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500), a decorative symbol variation process (step S1600), and a big hit display process (step S1700). Is selectively performed.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) of the received command analysis process. Next, a process for starting a special figure synchronizing effect including a variable display of a decorative symbol is performed. For example, based on the fluctuation pattern and the hit information of the fluctuation display game, the contents of the effects (stop symbols of the decorative symbols, the type of the reach effect, the determination of whether or not the advance effect can be performed, the advance effect mode (the advance type, the advance mode), and the extended effect Is determined, and settings are made in accordance with the determined effect. In addition, when the special figure synchronizing effect is not executed, control is performed so as to execute the demonstration effect. Details of the decoration symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Also, in the decorative symbol change process (step S16000) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, the special display tuning effect (decorative display of the decorative symbol) is started, and the variable display game is executed. The special figure synchronizing effect executed in synchronism is controlled. In addition, when the special figure tuning production end command is received, a process for terminating the special figure tuning production and stopping the determination is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control from the start to the end of the special figure tuning effect is performed. The details of the decorative symbol changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, upon receiving the special figure tuning effect ending command, the effect control program terminates the decorative pattern based on the result of the variable display game in order to end the special figure tuning effect accompanied by the variable display of the decorative symbol. Finally, the effect control program sets a processing selection flag based on the result of the variable display game. Specifically, if the result of the variable display game is "big hit", the processing selection flag is set to [2], and if the result of the variable display game is "losing", the processing selection flag is set to [0]. Set.

  Until the special figure synchronizing effect ending condition is satisfied, the special figure synchronizing effect is continued. For example, the effect control program switches a scene (video) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or changes a character. Perform effects such as making them appear. In addition, an effect that does not depend on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a look-ahead effect that indicates the result of a fluctuation display game to be executed next time or later is executed.

  In the big hit display process (step S1700) executed when the process selection flag is "2", the flag corresponding to the big hit interval effect command set in the process of step S1407 (see FIG. 48), the big hit On the condition that the flag corresponding to the start command is set, a display indicating on the gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that the special winning opening 2003 is opened, a display during the big hit game state (for example, a round display, etc.) ). At the end of the process, a flag corresponding to the big hit interval effect command and a flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

[10-8. Decoration design change start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol change start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol change start process according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the decorative symbol change start process, the effect control program first determines whether or not the change pattern reception flag set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) is set (step S1404). S1501). That is, in the process of step S1501, the main control board 4100 waits until the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 49) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition (predetermined condition). . Until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set (that is, until the fluctuation display game is started), the control for the demonstration effect is executed by the processing from step S1511 to step S1513.

  More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern reception flag is not set (the result of step S1501 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether the demonstration effect is being executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It is determined whether it is not (step S1511). Then, when it is determined that the demonstration effect is not being executed (the result of step S1511 is “No”), it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous display effect such as the symbol change was finished ( Step S1512). If the predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “Yes”), a demonstration effect display flag for starting the demonstration effect on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is set (step S1513).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “No”), the effect control program temporarily ends the decorative symbol change start process, and sets the change pattern reception flag. (YES in step S1501) or a predetermined time has elapsed (result in step S1512 is "Yes").

  When it is determined that the demonstration effect is being executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (the result of step S1511 is “Yes”), the effect control program continues to execute the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern reception flag is set (result of step S1501 is “Yes”), the effect control program clears the variation pattern reception flag (step S1502). Then, based on the received special figure variation pattern command and special figure design type command, an effect setting process for setting the content of the effect to be executed is executed (step S1503). Details of the effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Finally, the production control program updates the processing selection flag to [1] (step S1504). By performing such control, the decorative symbol change start process is executed only once at the time of starting the execution of the special figure entraining effect.

[10-9. Direction setting process]
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is a process for setting the effect contents at the start of the special figure synchronized effect. Based on the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the corresponding flag is set and the parameter is set. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect setting process according to the present embodiment.

  The effect control program first specifies a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 (Step S1520). At this time, based on the current game state (for example, a stochastic fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probable change time reduction state, a normal game state, or the like, an effect mode related to only the effect mode may be used). A pattern may be selected. Specifically, an item of the game state may be provided in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 47, and a fluctuation pattern having a different effect form may be defined for each game state.

  Then, the effect control program sets an effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the specified variation pattern is a story reach (step S1521). If it is a story reach (the result of step S1521 is "Yes"), a story reach setting process for setting data necessary for executing the story reach is executed (step S1530). Details of the story reach setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1521 is “No”), the production control program determines whether the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous variation (step S1522). If it is a pseudo continuous fluctuation (the result of step S1522 is "Yes"), a pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process for setting data necessary for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1550).

  On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not a pseudo continuous variation (the result of step S1522 is “No”), the effect control program sets information necessary for executing an effect based on the variation pattern ( Step S1523).

  When the setting of the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is completed, a continuous look-ahead effect setting process for executing a continuous look-ahead effect in which the effect content can be set independently of the fluctuation pattern is executed (step S1524). In the continuous look-ahead effect setting process, when it is determined in the special figure look-ahead effect control process in step S1027 of FIG. 42 that the continuous look-ahead effect is to be executed, the progress of the continuous look-ahead effect is controlled based on the determined effect contents. I do. Details of the continuous prefetching effect setting process will be described later.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol according to the gaming state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of an image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music or voice output from a speaker, and the like are set according to the game state. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is determined and displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing of receiving the special figure tuning effect end command from the main control board 4100.

  Finally, the effect control program sets an effect pattern and a stop symbol according to the gaming state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of an image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, music or voice output from a speaker, and the like are set according to the game state. The effect pattern also includes a notice mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. For example, in order to indicate the result of the variable display, a specific character appears or the background color is set to a color different from the normal color. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is determined and displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing of receiving the special figure tuning effect end command from the main control board 4100.

  When the effect setting process ends, information necessary for executing the special figure synchronized effect is set. Then, the lamp data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), the sound data output process (step S1018), the lamp data creation process (step S1028), and the display data of the peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 42) By executing the creation process (step S1030), the sound data creation process (step S1032), and the like, a special figure synchronizing effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern is started.

[10-10. Decoration pattern change processing]
Next, the decorative symbol changing process (Step S1600) executed when the process selection flag is “1” will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the decorative symbol variation process according to the present embodiment.

  The decorative symbol change process is executed when the decorative symbol change start process is executed and the process selection flag is “1”. Then, in the decorative symbol change process, a special figure synchronized effect executed in synchronization with the variable display game is controlled on condition that a special figure synchronized effect (decorative display of the decorative symbol) has been started.

  When the decorative symbol variation process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not a condition for terminating the variable display of the decorative symbol, that is, a condition for terminating the special figure synchronized effect is satisfied (step S1601). As the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect, for example, when receiving a special figure synchronizing effect end command (symbol confirmation command) from the main control board 4100, the special figure synchronizing effect may be ended, or the special figure synchronizing effect may be terminated. The special figure tuning effect may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. In addition, both the reception of the special figure synchronizing effect end command and the elapsed time from the start of the special figure synchronizing effect may be used as the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure synchronizing effect. Even if it is not, when the special figure tuning effect end command is received, the display screen may be switched so as to forcibly end the variable display and fix and stop the decorative symbol.

  When the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect is satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”), the effect control program stops (fixes and stops) the variable display with the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol type command ( Step S1602). Then, a process selection flag is set based on the result of the variable display game (step S1602). Specifically, the process selection flag is set to "0" when the result of the variable display game is "losing", and the process selection flag is set to "2" when the result is "big hit". If there is "small hit", another process selection flag (for example, "3") is set.

  On the other hand, when the end condition of the special figure synchronizing effect is not satisfied (the result of step S1601 is “Yes”), that is, when the display of the decoration design is continued, the production control program first sets It is determined whether the type is story reach (step S1604). If the type of the variation pattern is story reach (the result of step S1604 is “Y”), a story reach control process for controlling the progress of story reach is executed (step S1610). In the present embodiment, the scenario effects executed in the story reach are all selected at the start of the variable display (story reach setting process). Is selected. Further, when the progress of the scenario effect is controlled based on the operation of the operation unit 400, the operation state of the operation unit 400 is detected in the story reach control processing, and the control according to the operation state is executed. Just fine.

  If the type of the variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1604 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the type of the variation pattern is pseudo-continuous variation (step S1605). If the type of the fluctuation pattern is the pseudo continuous fluctuation (the result of step S1604 is "Yes"), a pseudo continuous fluctuation control process for controlling the progress of the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1630). Details of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process will be described later.

  Furthermore, when the type of the variation pattern is not the pseudo-continuous variation (the result of step S1605 is “No”), the effect control program executes the control process of the special figure tuning effect corresponding to the variation pattern such as special reach ( Step S1660). For example, effects such as switching a scene (video) being displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or causing a character to appear are executed. Further, an effect that does not depend on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the fluctuation display game to be executed next time or later may be executed. When the control of the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is completed, if the effect display performed in the fluctuation display game corresponds to a prohibition condition, a prohibition process for correcting the prohibition condition is executed (step S1560), and thereafter, the present process ends. . Details of the prohibition processing will be described later.

[10-11. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing.

  When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. ) Is determined (step S1302). If the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) has not been input in this determination, this routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the flow returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If the signal is being input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  If the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure notice signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are turned off, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4 is turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. As a result, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suppressed, so that stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a time period during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. .

  Subsequent to step S1306, a command reception standby process is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the command being transmitted at least for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally connected to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Subsequent to step S1308, backup processing of the command is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13 are copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to the Bank 2 (1fr), and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

  The high-speed copying of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are designated as the request factors of the control DMA controller 4150ac to be copied to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. Then, the contents stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All of the contents up to this point are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to transfer the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. By specifying a copy, from the content stored at the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa includes, as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Is specified in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the head address of the reception command storage area included in the Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc, and the peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). Then, all of the received command storage areas included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc are copied sequentially in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure notice signal is input in this determination, a WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In the WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 12 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure notice signal is input. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely as described above, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sends the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Cannot be output, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 42 is started again.

  As described above, when the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically returning from reset.

[11. Story reach]
Next, a case where story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a special figure synchronizing effect is executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the special symbol change display (change display game) on the main control board 4100. When story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern, in the special figure synchronized production, a production (specific production) that indicates the degree of expectation of the fluctuation display game being executed at a predetermined timing is executed once or more than once (insertion). Is done.

  Further, in the effect relating to the story reach, the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, but the execution timing of the specific effect may be before or after the occurrence of the reach. In the present embodiment, a specific effect in the story reach is executed after the occurrence of the reach. Hereinafter, an effect when story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[11-1. Story reach setting process]
First, production control in story reach will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the story reach setting process according to the present embodiment. The story reach setting process is executed in the process of step S1530 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the story reach setting process shown in FIG. 53, a process related to the setting of a specific effect performed at a predetermined timing will be described. For the setting of a special figure synchronized effect such as another reach effect, another variation pattern is selected. Since the processing is performed in the same manner as described above, the description is omitted.

  When the story reach setting process is executed, the effect control program first obtains the effect insertion number and the effect selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1531). At this time, the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern may be changed according to the game state such as the probability state (probable change state, normal state) of the variable display game or the operating state of the ordinary electric auditors (time saving state). Further, the selected effect number indicating the number (counter) of the specific effects set in the present process is set to the initial value (“0”) (step S1532). Subsequently, a specific effect scenario is selected by the number of inserted effects (step S1533 to step S1539). In the present embodiment, the specific effects that are executed last are sequentially selected, and the specific effect that is executed first is finally selected.

  The effect control program determines whether or not the number of selected effects is equal to or greater than the number of effect insertions, that is, whether or not a scenario has been selected for all specific effects (step S1533). If the number of selected effects is less than the number of effect insertions (result of step S1533 is "No"), a process for selecting a scenario (step S1534 to step S1538) because a specific effect for which a scenario has not been selected remains. Execute

  The effect control program acquires a random value (effect selection information) for selecting a specific effect (step S1534). Then, a specific effect is selected from the effect selection pattern table (FIG. 54) based on the effect selection pattern acquired in the process of step S1531 and the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 (step S1535).

  Here, the procedure for selecting the specific effect will be described in more detail. In the effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment, an effect selection pattern is set corresponding to the variation pattern (FIG. 47). FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect selection pattern in the story reach of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, when the story reach is executed, a specific effect of any one of the scenarios 1 to 6 is executed, and the degree of expectation at which the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit in the order of the scenarios 1 to 6 ( Probability) is set to be high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54, it is easy to select a scenario having a high degree of expectation in the order of pattern 1 to pattern 3. Specifically, in pattern 1, scenarios 5 and 6 with relatively high expectations are set not to be selected, and in pattern 3, scenarios 1 and 2 with relatively low expectations are selected. Is set not to be.

  Further, a range of random numbers is set for each scenario, and each scenario is selected based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 in FIG. Instead of setting so that a specific scenario is not selected, all scenarios may be selectable, and the selectivity of each scenario may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random numbers.

  Further, the effect selection pattern may be held for each game state. For example, in a high-probability state where the probability that the variable display of the special symbol is won is high, a scenario having a high degree of expectation may be easily selected, and the sense of expectation of the player may be further increased. Further, a plurality of effect selection patterns (lottery tables) may be selected according to satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the above-described gaming state, the number of times of performing a fluctuation display based on a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, the number of times of executing the SP reach), or a big prize in a big hit game. It may be the number of winning game balls to the mouth, or a combination thereof.

  The random number for selecting the specific effect is extracted from a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, a range from “0” to “1000”). For this reason, when a scenario with a low degree of expectation is selected after a scenario with a high degree of expectation is selected (falling down), there is a possibility that the player cannot easily grasp the reliability of the story reach itself. For example, the case where “story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern will be described. Pattern 1 is selected as the effect selection pattern, and the number of inserted effects is three. At this time, it is assumed that the scenario corresponding to the specific effect executed first is “scenario 2”, the scenario executed next is “scenario 3”, and the scenario executed last is “scenario 1”. In this case, the specific effect performed after the second specific effect (“scenario 3”) is “scenario 1” having a relatively low degree of expectation. For this reason, the player cannot determine whether the degree of expectation of the running variable display game corresponds to “scenario 1” or “scenario 3”, and the reliability of the story reach as a specific effect is impaired. There is a risk that it will.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adjusting the extraction range of the random number value acquired in the process of step S1613, the above-described falling is prevented from occurring. FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a change in the random number extraction range in this embodiment in chronological order.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific effects are sequentially selected from the specific effect executed last. When "Story reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern (the number of inserted effects 3), first, the last (third) specific effect to be executed is selected. At this time, in the process of step S1534, a random number value is extracted in a range (specified range) from 0 to 1000 (FIG. 55 (A)). If the random number value extracted at this time is “550”, “scenario 3” is selected with reference to the effect selection pattern selection table of FIG. Then, the effect control program stores the selected scenario in a predetermined storage area (reach mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (Step S1536). Then, 1 is added to the number of selected effects (step S1537).

  Further, the effect control program determines whether or not to execute a story reach announcement effect described later as an announcement effect in synchronization with the selected specific effect, and determines the content (announcement mode, announcement type) of the story reach announcement effect to be executed. (Step S1570). The details of the story reach announcement setting process will be described later. The information such as the selected scenario and the image data and audio data of the notice is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like.

  Subsequently, the effect control program sets a range (upper limit) of random numbers extracted to select a second specific effect to be executed (step S1538). As described above, “scenario 3” is selected in the specific effect that is executed last, so if “scenario 4” is selected in the specific effect that is executed second, a fall will occur. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55B, the random number generation range is not limited to the specified range from 0 to 1000, but is selected from “scenario 1” to “scenario 3”. Is set in the range from 0 to 600. The reset upper limit value “600” is the upper limit value at which “scenario 3” is selected. By setting the upper limit value to “600”, “scenario 4” is prevented from being selected. In FIG. 55B, the range indicated by the solid line (“0” to “600”) is the range in which random numbers can be extracted, and the range indicated by the broken line (range from “600” to “1000”) indicates that random numbers cannot be extracted. It is possible range.

  Here, when “150” is extracted as a random value for selecting the second specific effect to be executed, “scenario 2” is selected as the specific effect scenario. Therefore, the production control program sets the upper limit value of the range of the extracted random value to “200” so that “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” in which no drop occurs in the specific production executed first is selected. Set. Thereafter, for example, when “85” is extracted as a random number, “scenario 1” is set (FIG. 55C).

  Then, the value of the number of selected effects is 3 in the process of step S1538, and the value of the number of selected effects and the value of the number of inserted effects match, so the result of the process of step S1533 is “Yes”, and the effect control program End the selection of the effect. Finally, the range (upper limit) of the changed random number is set to a specified value (0 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process ends.

  In the procedure of the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the range of random numbers is set at the start of the change (effect control process → decorative design change start process → effect setting process → story reach setting process), but at another timing. A range of random numbers may be set.

  For example, at the timing when the specific effect is first executed (when the execution of the specific effect is started), all the scenarios of the specific effect may be selected. In this case, in the story reach control process (step S1610) of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52), the above-described story reach setting process may be executed at the timing of executing the first specific effect.

  At this time, the selection pattern may be reset based on a start winning command, a pre-reading effect-related command, or the like transmitted from the main control board 4100 from the start of the change to the execution of the specific effect. With such a configuration, it is also possible to execute an effect indicating the degree of expectation of a variable display game to be executed later, and it is possible to diversify the effect variation. Note that, if the execution (insertion) of the specific effect is after the occurrence of the reach, the specific effect may be selected at the start of the reach effect.

  Further, at the timing of selecting a specific effect, random numbers corresponding to the number of inserted effects may be extracted and rearranged in ascending order to determine the execution order of the specific effect. For example, if random number values are extracted three times and “550”, “85”, and “150” are extracted, “85” (scenario 1), “150” (scenario 2), and “550” (scenario) The specific effects may be executed in the order of 3).

  Furthermore, a random number may be randomly selected each time a specific effect is executed. For example, the execution timing of a specific effect is defined in the schedule data, and a random value for selecting a scenario is extracted at the execution timing of the specific effect. In this case, after selecting the scenario of the specific effect, the lower limit of the random number is set. In the effect selection pattern table shown in FIG. 54, the effect is set so that the higher the random value is, the higher the expected effect is executed. And reset the lower limit. Specifically, when Scenario 2 is selected first, the lower limit is set to “100” so that no fall-off occurs when the next specific effect is selected. To be generated. By performing such control, story reach can be executed in the same manner as when a specific effect is selected at the start of a change. When the selection of the specific effect is completed, the lower limit value set in the peripheral control RAM 4150c is held and used when the next specific effect is executed. Further, the lower limit may be cleared (set to 0) at the timing when the last specific effect is selected or at the timing when the variable display game (special figure synchronized effect) ends. In addition, a more specific procedure will be described in the control in the pseudo continuous effect described later.

  Further, both the lower limit and the upper limit may be set when the specific effect is selected. By doing so, it is possible to control so that the scenarios are easily executed in a specific order. For example, after scenario 1 is selected, by setting the lower limit value to “0” and the upper limit value to “200”, only “scenario 1” or “scenario 2” can be selected. Also, by setting the lower limit to “101” and the upper limit to “200”, “Scenario 2” can always be selected. It should be noted that the same processing can be performed for a case where all the specific effects are selected at the start of the change. Further, in the effect selection pattern table, items such as setting only the upper limit value (or lower limit value) or setting the upper limit value and lower limit value may be provided, and the setting may be set for each effect selection pattern.

  If the lower limit is not “0”, a random number from “0” to “lower limit−upper limit” may be generated, and the lower limit may be added to the extracted random number. For example, when the lower limit is “101” and the upper limit is “200”, a random number from “0” to “99 (= lower limit−upper limit)” is generated, and the lower limit “101” is added. The result may be a random number extracted.

[11-2. Story reach announcement production]
Next, the story reach announcement production will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a special effect is performed in the special figure synchronized effect performed by the peripheral control substrate 4140 in synchronization with the variable display (variable display game) of the special symbol on the main control substrate 4100, The story reach announcement effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect.

  In this example, a story reach announcement effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect. However, a story reach announcement effect may be executed separately from the specific effect. Before or after either one of the left and right decorative symbols (in this example, the left symbol of the decorative symbol) or both of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right columns as the execution timing of the effect (for example, The right symbol may stop at the same symbol as the left symbol and before reach occurs, or may be after the left and right decorative symbols have stopped (for example, the right symbol of the decorative symbol has stopped at the same symbol as the left symbol) After reach occurs). Hereinafter, the story reach announcement effect will be described.

[11-3. Story reach notice setting process]
First, the production control in the story reach announcement production performed in synchronization with the story reach will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the story reach announcement setting process according to the present embodiment. The story reach announcement setting process is executed in the process of step S1570 of the story reach setting process (FIG. 53).

  When the story reach announcement setting process is executed, the effect control program first selects a story reach announcement determination table (FIG. 57 (A)) corresponding to the variation pattern type of the special symbol (step S1571). At this time, according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is the probable state or the normal state, etc.) or the operating state of the ordinary electric auditors (time saving state), etc. The notice determination table may be changed. In addition, the result of the lottery in the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57 (A)) includes “no notice”, in other words, whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect in addition to determining the notice type (notice mode). The story reach announcement determination table (FIG. 57 (A)) is configured so that a lottery may be selected. However, a separate table is provided for determining whether or not to execute the story reach announcement effect, and the table and a predetermined random number are determined. When it is determined that the story reach announcement effect is to be executed based on the notification type, the announcement type may be determined using the story reach announcement determination table (FIG. 57A).

  Next, the effect control program acquires a random number value (advance random number) for determining the presence or absence of the story reach announcement effect and the announcement type (step S1572). Then, based on the story reach announcement determination table selected in the processing of step S1571 and the random number value acquired in step S1572, the story reach announcement determination table (FIG. 57 (A)) is used to determine whether there is a story reach announcement effect. The contents of the story reach announcement effect to be executed (the announcement mode, the announcement type) are determined (step S1573).

  Here, a procedure for determining the presence or absence of the story reach announcement effect and the announcement type will be described in more detail. In the story reach announcement effect performed in the present embodiment, a story reach announcement determination table is set corresponding to the result of the hit determination and the winning type (FIG. 57). FIG. 57A is a diagram illustrating an example of a story reach announcement determination table according to the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, when the story reach announcement effect is executed, the story reach announcement effect is executed according to any of the notice types (notice modes) of the notices 1 to 5, and the order of the notice 1 to the notice 5 is changed. Is set so that the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the variable display game is a big hit is increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), it is easy to select a notice type having a high degree of expectation in the order of outliers, non-probable big hits, and probable big hits. Specifically, the setting is made such that the notice 5 with a relatively high expectation is not selected in the case of a miss, and the notice 1 and the notice 2 with a relatively low expectation are not selected in the probability change jackpot. Is set. In the case where the result of the hit determination is a big hit with no pitching, whether or not to execute the story reach announcement production by selecting the announcement decision table at the time of loss, and the content of the story reach announcement production to be executed (the advance notice) (Type, notice mode) may be determined.

  Further, a range of a random number is set for each notice type, and the notice type is selected based on the random number value obtained in the process of step S1572 in FIG. Instead of setting so that a specific notice type is not selected, all notice types may be selectable, and the selectivity of each notice type may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random number. .

  The notice determination table may be held for each game state. For example, in a high-probability state where the probability that the variable display of the special symbol is won is high, a notice type having a high degree of expectation may be easily selected, and the expectation of the player may be further increased. Further, a plurality of notice determination tables (lottery tables) may be selected according to satisfaction of a predetermined condition. The predetermined condition may be, for example, the above-mentioned gaming state, the number of times of performing a fluctuation display based on a predetermined fluctuation pattern (for example, the number of times of executing the SP reach), or a big prize in a big hit game. The number of winning game balls to the mouth may be, the jackpot type may be a 16R jackpot or a 4R jackpot, or the jackpot type may be a hit with a hit or a hit without hitting. The effect insertion number may be the number of executions of a specific effect performed during the variable display in the story reach (the total of the specific effects performed in one variable display; a change in which the specific effect is performed once) An announcement determination table that determines whether or not to perform a story reach announcement effect in accordance with a pattern, and an announcement type to be executed, and a story reach that corresponds to a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed twice. A notice determination table for determining whether or not to perform a notice effect and a notice type to be executed,..., A story reach notice corresponding to a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed n times (n = 1 to 6 in this example) (Announcement determination table that determines whether or not an effect is to be executed and the type of notice to be executed), or the number of a specific effect to be executed in story reach (the specific effect to be executed first) Whether or not to execute the story reach announcement effect in synchronization with the notice announcement table to determine the type of notice to be executed, whether to execute the story reach announcement effect in synchronization with the specific effect to be executed the second time, and An announcement determination table for determining an announcement type to be executed,..., A story reach announcement effect is executed in synchronization with a specific effect executed at the nth time (n = 1 to 6 in this example). Whether and notice determination table for determining a notice type to be executed), or a combination thereof.

  Also, in the story reach announcement production performed in synchronization with the story reach, the story reach announcement production corresponding to the less expected type of announcement is performed after the story reach announcement production corresponding to the high expected type of announcement is performed This prevents the "falling down" from occurring. Specifically, by adjusting the extraction range of the random number value acquired in step S1572 in the same manner as the process of preventing the occurrence of the fall of the story reach, the occurrence of the above-described fall is prevented.

  That is, when “Story reach 2” is selected as the variation pattern (the number of inserted effects 3), the last (third) specific effect to be executed is selected, and the story reach announcement effect is synchronized with this specific effect. When a story reach announcement setting process is performed to determine whether or not to execute, and the content (announcement type, announcement mode) of the story reach announcement effect to be executed, in the process of step S1571, the announcement of the story reach corresponding to the winning type is performed in step S1571. A decision table is selected, and in the process of step S1572, random numbers are extracted in a range from 1 to 1000. At this time, if the winning type is the non-probable variable jackpot and the extracted random number value is “800”, “notice 3” is selected by referring to the story reach notice determination table of FIG. 57A (step S1573). ). Then, the effect control program stores the selected notice type in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1574).

  Subsequently, the effect control program determines whether or not to execute the story reach announcement effect in synchronization with the second effect to be executed, and determines the content of the story reach announcement effect to be executed (advance type, notice mode). The range (upper limit) of the random numbers extracted for this purpose is set (step S1575). As described above, “notice 3” is selected in the specific effect that is executed last, and if “notice 4” or more is selected in the specific effect that is executed second, a fall occurs. I will. Therefore, the random number generation range is set to a range from 1 to 840 so that only the “announcement 1” to “advance notice 3” are selected, instead of the range from the specified 1 to 1000. The reset upper limit “840” is the upper limit at which “notice 3” is selected. By setting the upper limit to “840”, “notice 4” or more is prevented from being selected. That is, a random number that can be extracted to determine whether or not to execute the story reach announcement effect in synchronization with the second effect to be executed, and to determine the content (announcement type, announcement mode) of the story reach announcement effect to be executed. Ranges from "1" to "840", and the range of random numbers from "841" to "1000" cannot be extracted.

  Here, as a random value for determining whether or not to execute the story reach announcement effect in synchronization with the specific effect to be executed secondly, and the content of the story reach announcement effect to be executed (announcement type, announcement mode) When "600" is extracted, "notice 2" is selected as the notice type according to the story reach notice effect executed in synchronization with the specific effect. Therefore, the effect control program sets the upper limit value of the range of the extracted random value to “690” so that “notice 1” or “notice 2” in which the specific effect executed first does not fall down is selected. Set. Thereafter, for example, when “500” is extracted as a random number, “notification 1” is set. Then, the value of the number of selected effects is 3 in the process of step S1538 of the story reach setting process, and the value of the number of selected effects matches the value of the number of inserted effects. Like the random number value for selecting an effect (effect selection information), whether to execute the story reach announcement effect in synchronization with the specific effect, and the content of the story reach announcement effect to be executed (advance type, announcement mode) The range (upper limit) of the changed random number of the random number value (announcement random number) for determination is set to a specified value (1 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process ends. That is, also in the story reach announcement production, whether or not to execute the story reach announcement production is performed for all the effects inserted in the story reach, and the content of the story reach announcement production to be executed (the announcement type and the announcement mode) Is determined.

  In this way, in the story reach preview production performed in synchronization with the story reach, each of the scenarios (all scenarios executed in the story reach) for the number of production insertions performed in the story reach before the story reach starts In response to this, it is determined whether or not the story reach announcement effect is to be executed and the content of the story reach announcement effect to be executed (advance type, notice mode), and information (advance notice) relating to the notice type (advance mode) and the like according to the result of the determination. Information) is stored in a predetermined storage area (notification mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140.

  In the above-described example, for each specific effect executed in the story reach, whether or not to execute the story reach announcement effect and the content of the story reach announcement effect to be executed (advance type, notice mode) are determined. The information (notification information) relating to the notification type (notification mode) and the like according to the information is individually stored in the notification mode storage area. On the other hand, information (notification information) related to a notification type (notification mode) and the like indicating the content (notification type, notification mode) of the story reach notification effect to be performed or not and whether to execute the story reach notification effect are notified in advance. You may make it memorize | store in a mode storage area. That is, it is not limited to determining whether or not the story reach announcement effect is individually executed for each of the specific effects to be executed, and the content (the announcement type and the announcement mode) of the story reach announcement effect to be executed. According to the number of executions of the specific effects (the number of inserted effects) executed during the fluctuation display in the reach, whether or not to execute the story reach announcement effect for each of the specific effects to be executed, and the story reach announcement to be executed One of a plurality of (packaged) notice types (notification modes) indicating the contents of the effect (notification type, notice mode) is determined, and the notice type (notification mode) or the like according to the determination result is determined. Related information (notification information) may be stored in the notification mode storage area.

[11-4. Production example]
Through the above-described processing, the specific effect and the story reach announcement effect to be executed in the story reach can be selected so that the fall-down does not occur. Next, a specific example of the effect when story reach is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect performed in the story reach of the present embodiment. In the story reach of the present embodiment, a specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing after a reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol. The specific effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right, an area 1912 is formed above the start storage display unit 1911, and a line corresponding to the scenario is displayed in the area 1912.

  When the story reach announcement effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect, a display corresponding to the announcement type is performed on the background of the dialog (area 1912). The story reach announcement effect that is synchronized with the specific effect is an effect in which the form of the background of the words displayed in the area 1912 is displayed in a form different from the normal form. Specifically, the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in blue in response to the notice 1, the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in green in accordance with the notice 2, and the notice 3 is displayed. In the area 1912, the background part of the dialogue is displayed in red, the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in a leopard pattern corresponding to the notice 4, and the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is corresponding to the notice 5 Is displayed in rainbow colors. Note that the notice 5 is selected only when the jackpot (a jackpot without a throwing ball may be excluded) is determined (appearance is restricted in the event of a miss), and is a so-called premium notice whose appearance frequency is extremely low. ing. When the story reach announcement effect is not executed in synchronization with the specific effect (default), the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in white.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display game is set so that the degree of expectation (possibility) of a big hit becomes higher in the order of the notice 1 to the notice 5, and the fluctuation display is performed in the order of the scenario 1 to the scenario 6. The degree of expectation (probability) that a game result will be a big hit is set to be high, and the type of notice being executed (notice mode; any one of notice 1 to notice 5) and execution being performed From both of the scenario type (scenario 1 to scenario 6) and the scenario, it is possible to cause the player to comprehensively determine the degree of expectation (possibility) that the result of the variable display game will be a big hit.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scenario (line) of a specific effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. (A) shows scenario 1, (B) shows scenario 2, (C) shows scenario 3, (D) shows scenario 4, (E) shows scenario 5, and (F) shows scenario 6. As described above, the high degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is shown. Specifically, in Scenario 1, words indicating that the degree of expectation is low are displayed (“no good !!”), and the words are sequentially set so as to increase the sense of expectation. In Scenario 5, a line indicating a big hit ("Hit?") Is set, and in Scenario 6, a line indicating a big hit has been set ("Big hit !!"). Note that the scenario 6 may be selected only when the big hit has been determined.

  Next, the screen transition of the story reach will be described. FIG. 60 and FIG. 61 are diagrams illustrating an example of the screen transition of the story reach of the present embodiment. First, when the special figure 1 change pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. Since story reach is selected as the variation pattern, reach occurs at a predetermined timing as shown in the screen (B).

  Thereafter, when it is time to execute the first specific effect, a specific effect in which words (scenario 2) are displayed in the area 1912 is executed (screen (C)). Thereafter, when it is time to execute the second specific effect, as shown in the screen (D), a scenario 3 having a higher degree of expectation is selected, and the specific effect is executed in a corresponding effect mode.

  Here, when the generation range of the random number is not adjusted, in the specific effect executed last, as shown in the screen (E-1), a specific effect having a lower degree of expectation than the specific effect executed previously is displayed. It may be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the control is performed so as to prevent the falling, the specific effect having the same or higher expectation as the specific effect executed before is always executed (screen (E-2)). In the procedure of the present embodiment, scenarios are selected in order from the specific effect that is executed last. Therefore, when scenario 1 is selected last, scenario 1 is selected in all specific effects. In such a case, since the same specific effect is continuously executed, a plurality of scenarios corresponding to the same degree of expectation may be prepared so that the same specific effect is not executed continuously.

[12. Pseudo continuous fluctuation]
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the temporary stop and the re-variation of the decorative pattern are executed at least once in the special figure synchronizing effect, and selected at a predetermined timing by lottery. An effect based on the performed scenario is executed. In the effect based on the scenario, as in the story mode described above, an effect (specific effect) indicating the degree of expectation of the running variable display game is executed.

  The temporary stop of the decorative pattern is a state in which the change of the decorative pattern is recognized by the player as if it were stopped, but the fluctuation is actually continued. For example, when the decorative symbol stops in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the middle symbol that stops last is a state in which the middle symbol slightly moves up and down, and re-change starts from this state.

  In addition, regarding the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped. The change display of the fourth symbol may be continued, and the stopped symbol may be changed again. In this case, the result mode of the variable display may include the stop mode of the fourth symbol in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may be stopped at the same decorative symbol, and a different result mode may be obtained only by the difference of the fourth symbol. With this configuration, the winning game is executed by making a part of the big hit result mode and the small hit result mode similar to each other, so that the game state after the end of the hit game (the winning probability of the variable display game, etc.). Can be hardly recognized by the player, and the variation of the effect can be increased.

  In the story reach in the present embodiment, all the scenarios to be executed at the start of the change are determined. However, in the pseudo continuous change in the present embodiment, the scenarios are randomly selected and selected at the timing of executing the specific effect (scenario effect). . In the pseudo continuous fluctuation, when reach occurs in the last re- fluctuation, a normal reach effect (for example, SP reach) that can be executed without generating pseudo continuous fluctuation may be executed. Alternatively, a reach effect performed only in the case of pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be adopted. In the pseudo continuous fluctuation, it is not necessary to generate reach in the last fluctuation. Hereinafter, an effect when pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described.

[12-1. Pseudo continuous fluctuation setting processing]
First, the effect control in the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be described. In the pseudo continuous fluctuation, as described above, the effect content is selected by lottery immediately before the specific effect (scenario effect) is executed. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation, an initial setting necessary for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process according to the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process is executed in the process of step S1550 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the quasi-continuous fluctuation setting process shown in FIG. 62, a process relating to setting of a specific effect performed at a predetermined timing will be described. Since the processing is performed in the same manner as the case where it is selected, the description is omitted.

  When the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process is executed, the effect control program first obtains the effect insertion number (number of temporary stops) and the effect selection pattern from the change pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1551), and stores the effect control program in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Store in a predetermined area.

  Further, the effect control program sets the effect insertion number as an initial value to the remaining effect number, which is the remaining number of executions of the specific effect executed in the pseudo continuous variation (step S1552). Finally, a specified value is set to initialize a range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting a scenario of a specific effect (step S1553). In the present embodiment, at the time of executing the scenario effect, the effect contents are selected by lottery and sequentially selected from the scenario effect to be executed first. Therefore, the lower limit value is initialized as the range of the random number for the scenario selection lottery. At this time, an upper limit value may be set in order to limit the selected scenario.

  As in the case of the story mode, all scenarios may be randomly selected in the pseudo-continuous variation setting process so that all scenario effects are selected at the start of the variation. The procedure for drawing a scenario effect is the same as in the story mode.

[12-2. Pseudo continuous fluctuation control processing]
Next, a description will be given of a pseudo continuous fluctuation control process executed in the decorative symbol fluctuation process. FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process according to the present embodiment. The pseudo-continuous fluctuation control process is executed between the start and the stop of the display of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and controls the execution of a temporary stop and the execution of a scenario effect in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. The pseudo continuous variation control process is executed in the process of step S1630 of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52).

  In the pseudo-continuous fluctuation effect of the present embodiment, the operation input reception period of the pressing operation unit (production button) 405 is set according to the timing of the temporary stop, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the operation input reception period, A scenario effect is executed. In the procedure shown in FIG. 63, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, a normal effect is continued without executing the scenario effect.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the press operation unit operation acceptability flag is set (step S1631). The pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is set when the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is in a state where the operation input can be received to execute the scenario effect. That is, if the pressing operation unit 405 is operated while the pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is set, a process for executing a scenario effect is executed.

  If the pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is not set (the result of step S1631 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether or not it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. (Step S1646). If it is not the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (the result of step S1646 is “No”), the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process ends.

  If it is the timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (the result of step S1646 is “Yes”), the effect control program prompts the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 to operate. A pseudo consecutive announcement setting process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo consecutive announcement production in synchronization with the suggested production, and to determine the content (preliminary type, preliminary announcement mode) of the pseudo consecutive announcement production to be executed (step S1670). . Details of the pseudo consecutive notice setting process will be described later. Information such as image data and audio data of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like.

  When the pseudo consecutive notice setting process is executed, the effect control program sets a setting for executing an effect indicating that the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (requesting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405). Performed (step S1647). Specifically, it relates to image data, audio data, and the like necessary to execute an effect indicating that the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (requesting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405). The effect information is read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and set. The set effect information is obtained by executing a ramp data creation process (step S1030), a display data creation process (step S1030), and a sound data creation process (step S1030) in the peripheral control unit regular process. S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018) actually perform the effect. Next, the effect control program sets the press operation unit operation acceptable flag (step S1648), and ends the pseudo-continuous fluctuation control process. The timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted is set in accordance with the timing of temporarily stopping the decorative symbol. For example, it is set a predetermined time before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

  On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit operation accepting flag is set (the result of step S1631 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (step S1631). S1632). The pressing operation section operation flag is set when the pressing operation section 405 is actually operated. Specifically, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is obtained in the operation unit information obtaining process (step S1108) of the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, and the pressing operation unit operation flag is set in the process of turning on the power of the peripheral control unit (FIG. 42). ) Is set in the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014) included in the peripheral control unit steady-state process.

  If the pressing operation section operation flag is set (the result of step S1632 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random number value within the set upper limit value and lower limit value range (step S1633). Further, a scenario to be executed as a specific effect is obtained from the effect pattern table based on the obtained random number value (step S1634). The format of the effect pattern table is the same as in the case of story reach. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the range of random numbers is set so that a scenario having a low degree of expectation is easily selected.

  When a scenario is selected, the effect control program determines whether or not to execute a pseudo consecutive announcement effect, which will be described later, as a preliminary effect in synchronization with execution of an effect (specific effect) based on the selected scenario, and whether to execute the pseudo consecutive effect. The pseudo consecutive notice setting process for determining the contents of the notice effect (the notice type and the notice mode) is executed (step S1680). Details of the pseudo consecutive notice setting process will be described later. Information such as image data and audio data of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the like.

  Then, when a scenario is selected, the effect control program sets effect information related to image data and sound data necessary for executing an effect (specific effect) based on the selected scenario. Is executed (step S1635). The effect information set in the scenario execution setting process is obtained by executing the ramp data creation process (step S1028), the display data creation process (step S1030), and the sound data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit regular process. The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

  After that, the effect control program sets the lower limit value of the range of the random number value for selecting the scenario to be executed next based on the random number value obtained in the process of step S1633 so that the effect content does not fall. It is set (step S1636). Specifically, the lower limit value of the random number is set so that a scenario having a lower degree of expectation than the scenario selected in the processing of step S1634 is not selected, that is, a scenario of at least the same degree is selected. For example, a case where the effect pattern 12 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the obtained random number is “450”, scenario 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit to “301”, a scenario having an expected degree equal to or higher than the scenario 2 is always selected in the next lottery. In addition, by setting the lower limit value to “501” instead of “301”, it is possible to set the lower limit value to always be satisfied.

  On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit operation flag is not set (the result of step S1632 is “No”), the production control program determines that the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer times out. It is determined whether or not there is (step S1638). If the time has not elapsed (the result of step S1638 is “No”), the pseudo continuous effect control process ends, and the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is continuously received. On the other hand, if the time of the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer has expired (the result of step S1638 is “Yes”), the processing from step S1640 is executed.

  When the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is received during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, or when the operation time of the pressing operation unit 405 is not received during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period, the time is up. The effect control program ends the press operation unit operation suggestion effect (step S1640). Further, the press operation section operation acceptability flag is cleared (step S1641), and the remaining effect number is decremented by 1 (step S1642).

  Finally, the production control program determines whether or not the number of remaining productions has become 0 (step S1643). If the number of remaining effects is 0 (the result of step S1643 is “Yes”), the last specific effect has been executed, so the lower limit of the random number is set to a specified value (step S1645), and the pseudo continuous effect control is performed. The processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S1643 is “No”), the effect control program measures the time during which the pressing operation unit operation can be accepted in order to set the operation input timing for the next pressing operation unit. The timer is set (step S1644).

  As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated while the pressing operation unit operation receivable time measurement timer is not timed up and the pressing operation unit operation receivable flag is set, a specific effect is generated. It is controlled to be executed. Note that the effect (specific effect) based on the scenario may be executed after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. For example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the control is changed so that the scenario execution setting process is executed after the time of the pressing operation unit operation receivable time measurement timer expires, and the pressing operation is performed after the scenario execution setting process. The section operation flag may be cleared.

[12-3. Pseudo consecutive notice production]
Next, the pseudo consecutive announcement effect will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the temporary stop and the re-variation of the decorative pattern are executed at least once in the special figure synchronizing effect, and selected at a predetermined timing by lottery. When an effect (specific effect) based on the performed scenario is executed, a pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect. Hereinafter, an effect when pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described.

[12-4. Pseudo consecutive notice setting processing]
First, the effect control in the pseudo consecutive announcement effect will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pseudo consecutive notice setting process according to the present embodiment. The pseudo consecutive notice setting processing is executed in the processing of step S1670 and step S1680 of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control processing (FIG. 63).

  When the pseudo consecutive notice setting process is executed, the effect control program first selects a notice determination table (FIG. 57 (B)) of pseudo continuous fluctuation according to the fluctuation pattern type of the special symbol (step S1671). At this time, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation according to the game state such as the probability state of the fluctuation display game (whether the current game state is the probable state or the normal state, etc.) or the operating state of the ordinary electric auditors (time saving state). May be changed. In the case where the result of the hit determination is a big hit with no ball out, whether or not to perform the pseudo consecutive announcement production by selecting the preliminary announcement determination table at the time of loss and the content of the pseudo consecutive announcement production to be executed (the preliminary announcement (Type, notice mode) may be determined. In addition, the result of the lottery in the preliminary determination table (FIG. 57B) of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation includes “no notice”, in other words, not only the type of the notice is determined but also whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect is determined. Although the preliminary determination table (FIG. 57 (B)) of the pseudo continuous change is configured to perform a lottery, a table for performing a lottery as to whether or not to perform the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is provided separately, and the table and a predetermined random number are used. If it is determined that the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is to be executed, the announcement type may be determined using the preliminary determination table of pseudo continuous fluctuation (FIG. 57B).

  Next, the effect control program acquires a random number value (advance notice random number) for determining the presence or absence of the pseudo consecutive notice effect and the notice type (step S1672). Then, based on the quasi-continuous variation advance notice determination table selected in the process of step S1671 and the random number value acquired in step S1672, the quasi-continuous variation advance notice determination table (FIG. 57B) is used. The presence / absence and the contents of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect to be executed (the announcement type and the announcement mode) are determined (step S1673), and the selected storage area (the announcement mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 is selected. Information (notification information) related to the notice type or the like is stored (step S1674).

  Thereafter, the effect control program executes a randomizing process for selecting a notice type in a pseudo consecutive notice effect to be executed next based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1672 so that the effect contents do not fall. The lower limit of the numerical value range is set (step S1675). Specifically, the lower limit value of the random number is set so that the notice type having a lower degree of expectation than the notice type selected in the process of step S1673 is not selected, that is, at least the notice type of the same degree is selected. I do. For example, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (B) in which the number of effect insertions (the number of temporary stops) is three and a variation pattern that is a non-probable variable hit is selected. If the obtained random number value is “150”, notice 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit to “101”, a notice type having an expected degree equal to or higher than the notice 2 is always selected in the next lottery. In addition, by setting the lower limit value to “201” instead of “101”, it is possible to set the lower limit value to always be satisfied.

  Note that, based on the determination that the number of remaining effects has become 0 in step S1643 of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process, the range of the random number (upper limit and upper limit value) for selecting the scenario of the specific effect to be executed in the pseudo continuous fluctuation is determined. If the lower limit value of the random number is set to a specified value to initialize the lower limit value (step S1645), the random number (preliminary random number) for determining the presence / absence of a pseudo consecutive announcement effect and the announcement type is initialized. For this purpose, a process of setting the lower limit value of the random number to a specified value is also performed. This makes it possible to extract random numbers from the entire range when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation control process is next performed, and to determine any of the notice types from among the notice types.

  As described above, in the pseudo consecutive announcement effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo continuous fluctuation, whether or not to execute the pseudo consecutive announcement effect for the scenario executed each time the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is operated is determined. The contents (notification type, notice mode) of the pseudo consecutive notice effect to be executed are determined, and information (notification information) on the notice type for one scenario is assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 according to the result of the determination. In a predetermined storage area (notification mode storage area).

[12-6. Production example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Subsequently, an example of the effect of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation will be described. In the pseudo continuous variation of the present embodiment, a specific effect and a pseudo consecutive announcement effect are executed in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol before reach occurs in the variation display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started a predetermined time before the decorative symbol temporarily stops (the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 becomes ready to be accepted), and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is provided at the timing of the temporary stop. The process is terminated (operation acceptance for the pressing operation unit 405 is disabled). When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in a state where the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be received (the pressing operation unit operation receivable period), after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, until the re-change of the identification symbol is started. During the specified effect is executed. In addition, a pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed in synchronization with the pressing operation unit suggestion effect and the specific effect.

  The specific effect is similar to the story reach. When the specific effect is executed, the decorative pattern 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right, and an area 1912 is formed above the start storage display unit 1911. In a region 1912, words corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect to be executed are displayed. Also, the pseudo consecutive announcement effect executed in synchronization with the specific effect is the same as the story reach announcement effect, and when the specific effect is executed, a display corresponding to the announcement type is performed on the background of the dialogue (area 1912).

  FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation of the present embodiment. First, when a special figure 1 change pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, a special figure synchronizing effect with a change display of a decorative pattern is started, and as shown in FIG. The decorative pattern stops. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period is reached, and a pressing operation unit suggesting effect prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit (production button) 405 is started. When the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed in synchronization with the effect indicated by the pressing operation unit, a dialogue prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 ("Press the button!" In the example shown in FIG. 66). Is displayed on the background (area 1912) of the corresponding to the notice type. The pseudo consecutive announcement effect that is executed in synchronization with the press operation unit suggestion effect is the same as the story reach announcement effect. In the area 1912, the background part of the dialogue is displayed in green, the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in red corresponding to the notice 3, and the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is corresponding to the notice 4 Is displayed in a leopard pattern, and the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in rainbow color corresponding to the notice 5. When the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is not executed in synchronization with the effect suggested by the pressing operation unit (default), the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in white.

  When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the period in which the pressing operation unit operation can be received, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 66 (D), a specific effect is executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started, and similarly to FIG. 66 (B), the press operation unit suggestion effect is started (FIG. 66 (F)). At this time, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated before the time of the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer expires, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 66 (G)), the specific effect is not executed. Re-variation is started (FIG. 66 (H)). Thereafter, when the final decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 66 (I)), a reach effect is executed (FIG. 66 (J)). In the example shown in FIG. 66 (J), the executable SP reach 3 is executed even when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is not executed. However, even if the reach executed at this time is an effect specialized for the pseudo-continuous production, Good. Further, the press operation unit suggestion effect may be executed before the final temporary stop, and the reach effect may be executed after the execution of the specific effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 66, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period (until the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer expires), the specific effect is executed. Instead, the re-fluctuation is started, but the specific effect may be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Also, in this case, if it is determined that the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is to be executed, the pseudo consecutive announcement effect corresponding to the announcement type determined in synchronization with the specific effect executed after the elapse of the predetermined time is performed. Alternatively, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period (until the pressing operation unit operation receivable period measurement timer times out), the specific effect is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Even if it is decided to execute the pseudo-announcement effect, it is to be executed (for the announcement type stored in a predetermined storage area (announcement mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140) Information is deleted (discarded), or the notice type is responded to based on the information about the notice type stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area). The pseudo consecutive announcement effect is not executed (for example, by not performing processing for setting effect information relating to image data, sound data, and the like necessary for executing the pseudo consecutive announcement effect) (part h in the area 1912). May be displayed in a default white color).

[12-4. Timing chart of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
Furthermore, the execution timing of the effect in the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be described. FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 are diagrams illustrating the timing of controlling the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment.

  FIG. 67 is a timing chart corresponding to the effect example shown in FIG. FIG. 67A illustrates a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

  First, at time t10, a game ball wins in the starting openings 2101 and 2102, and a special symbol (identifying symbol) on the special symbol display 1185 or the special symbol display 1186 on the main control board 4100 is changed. (Variable display, variable display game) is started. At this time, a special figure variation pattern command, a special figure design type command, and the like are transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives the command, and selects a variation pattern for executing a pseudo continuous effect.

  When a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (start of the special figure synchronizing effect), a reception period of the operation input of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 at a timing before the temporary stop of the decoration symbol (press operation unit operation reception) (Possible period) is started, and the press operation unit suggestion effect is started (time t11). If it is determined that the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is to be executed in synchronization with the press operation unit suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive announcement effect according to the determined announcement type is executed. The press operation unit operation acceptable period continues until time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed. At this time, a scenario effect to be executed is randomly selected (step S1634 in FIG. 63).

  Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation receivable period (time t12), the lottery is performed at the timing when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol ends (timing at which the decorative symbol re-change starts, time t14). Execute the specific effect based on the scenario. If it is determined that the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is to be executed in synchronization with the specific effect, the pseudo consecutive announcement effect according to the determined announcement type is executed.

  Similarly, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and the specific effect of scenario 4 is executed at time t16. After that, when the final temporary stop ends, a reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the end of the reach effect, the variation of the decorative symbol is finished in synchronization with the end of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100, and the fixed symbol is displayed (time t18).

  Subsequently, a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period will be described. FIG. 67B shows a case where the execution of the corresponding specific effect is skipped without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the first pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), since the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated at the timing of time t12, the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect based on the scenario 1 are not executed. In the specific effect executed at the timing of the time t15, since the lower limit of the random number is not reset, all the scenarios that can be selected are selectable.

  Next, a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a timing chart of a modified example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment. FIG. 68C illustrates a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the period in which the pressing operation unit operation can be received.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68 (C), even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect are executed at the start of the re-change of the decorative symbol. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect are executed before the start of the maximum fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect at the timing operated by the player, and it is possible to execute an effect without a sense of incongruity.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 68 (D), when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific operation and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect are skipped without being executed, and the pressing operation unit is generated during a period after which the pressing operation unit operation can be received. When the user operates the button 405, the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect for a plurality of times including the skipped specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect are executed.

  Referring to FIG. 68 (D), a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation acceptable period without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the second pressing operation unit operation acceptable period is illustrated. Is shown. In this case, the specific effect and the pseudo-serial announcement effect performed at the second temporary stop are skipped, but at the third temporary stop, not only the specific effect and the pseudo-serial announcement effect performed at the third temporary stop but also The special effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect that are skipped (should have been executed at the time of the second temporary stop) are also executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect based on scenario 1 are executed at the first temporary stop, and the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect executed at the second temporary stop are skipped. . When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation receivable period, the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect including the skipped portion are selected. After the decoration symbols are temporarily stopped, the selected specific effects (scenario 3 and scenario 4) and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect are sequentially executed.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous production according to the present embodiment, the range (lower limit) of the random number for drawing the subsequent specific production is set based on the random number obtained by randomly selecting the preceding specific production, so that the execution is performed in advance. It is possible to prevent a fall in which an effect having an expected degree lower than the expected degree of the specified effect is executed. Also, in the pseudo consecutive announcement effect executed in synchronization with the pseudo consecutive production effect, the range (lower limit value) of the random number for randomly selecting the subsequent pseudo consecutive announcement effect is set based on the random number drawn for the preceding pseudo consecutive announcement effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a fall in which an effect lower than the expected degree of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect executed earlier is executed.

  Further, since the player can select whether or not to execute the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect by operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to execute the effect according to the intention of the player.

[12-5. Modified example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
[12-5-1. Modification of Scenario Selection Timing]
In the example of the pseudo continuous variation described above, the press operation unit operable period is set in accordance with the timing at which the decorative symbol temporarily stops, and a scenario for executing a specific effect at the timing when the press operation unit 405 is operated is selected. At the same time, it is determined whether or not to execute the pseudo consecutive announcement effect in synchronization with the specific effect, and to determine the content of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect to be executed (notification type, advance notice mode). On the other hand, as in the story reach described above, all of the scenarios for executing the specific effect are selected at the start of the change, and whether or not to execute the pseudo consecutive announcement effect in synchronization with the specific effect and whether to execute it A description will be given of a case where the contents (preliminary notice type, notice mode) of the pseudo consecutive notice effect are determined.

  To select all the scenarios at the start of the fluctuation and to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo consecutive announcement production in synchronization with the specific production, and to determine the contents of the pseudo consecutive announcement production to be executed (forecast type, preliminary announcement mode) In the pseudo continuous variation setting process (step S1550, FIG. 62) executed in the effect setting process (FIG. 49), the same process as steps S1533 to S1538 in the story reach setting process (FIG. 53) is executed. With this configuration, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in a state in which all the scenarios corresponding to the specific effect and the notice type of the pseudo consecutive notice effect executed in synchronization with the specific effect are set. .

  As described above, when all the scenarios at the start of the change and the notice type of the pseudo consecutive notice effect that is executed in synchronization with the specific effect are determined, the pressing operation unit 405 operates in the pressing operation unit operable period. When the operation has not been performed, the execution of the specific effect that has not been executed and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect may be restricted (skipped). In this case, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the subsequent operation period of the pressing operation unit, a re-lottery is executed to select a scenario again, and a pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect. It may be determined whether or not to perform, and the content of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect to be executed (the announcement type, the announcement mode). In addition, skipping without performing the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect regulated without executing the re-lottery, the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect that are set in advance may be executed, The specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect based on the scenario that is canceled after the restriction is canceled may be executed.

  In addition, when the last specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect are executed, even if the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect that are supposed to be executed in the middle are regulated, In order to notify the user of a high degree of expectation, a specific effect based on the scenario determined at the start of the change and a pseudo consecutive notification effect based on the notice type determined at the start of the change may be executed.

  Further, even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed.

[12-5-2. Modification of Specific Performance Execution Condition]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect is executed at the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol by operating the pressing operation unit 405. However, the specific effect may be executed based on other conditions. Good.

  The other conditions include, for example, a symbol that is fixed and stopped, and a symbol of a combination that does not appear at the time of a loss, in the case of stopping at a so-called chance, a specific effect and a pseudo consecutive announcement without operating the pressing operation unit 405. The effect may be performed (at this time, it is not necessary to request the operation of the pressing operation unit 405). Also, the specific effect and the pseudo-serial announcement effect may be executed when the decorative symbol is stopped in a combination including the pseudo-serial-only symbol that appears only when the pseudo-serial is temporarily stopped, not at the chance. In this case, the final stop symbol does not have to be the pseudo-sequence-only symbol, but any symbol in the displayed symbol row may be stopped at the pseudo-sequence-only symbol. In addition, the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect may be executed when the game is stopped at a symbol at the time of a normal loss (a so-called loss eye).

  The timing of execution of the specific effect is when a predetermined movable body (movable character) operates, a predetermined light-emitting body (lamp, LED, etc.) emits light, or a predetermined sound is output. Is also good.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a dial operation unit 401 in addition to the pressing operation unit 405. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is configured to be rotatable left and right. For example, when the dial is rotated at a predetermined timing, the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect may be executed. . Moreover, you may make it change the mode of production according to the rotation direction of a dial.

  As other operation means, for example, a lever-type operation unit such as a control stick is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301, and a specific effect and a pseudo consecutive announcement effect are performed by operating the lever at a predetermined timing. It may be.

  Furthermore, a touch panel is mounted on the surface of the upper-panel liquid crystal display device 470, and a player's operation input can be performed from the touch panel. It may be executed. Further, in the touch panel, in order to enable various inputs, not only the selection of the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect, but also the effect mode of the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect may be changed depending on the operation content.

  Not only the above-mentioned contact-type operation means but also a non-contact-type operation means such as a non-contact sensor may be used. For example, a non-contact sensor may be arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the specific effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect may be executed by the player performing an operation such as holding his hand over the game board.

[13. Prohibition processing]
Next, the prohibition processing will be described. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the special figure synchronizing effect performed by the peripheral control substrate 4140 in synchronization with the fluctuation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control substrate 4100, the above-described announcement effect (story reach announcement effect) , Simulated consecutive announcement effects), if the announcement effect according to the specific announcement type (in this example, “leopard pattern” of announcement 4) is executed two or more times, the big hit (excluding the big hit with no pitch) is always excluded. May be controlled). In addition, as described above, in the special figure synchronizing production, if a preliminary production corresponding to a special preliminary notice type (in this example, “rainbow” of preliminary notice 5) is executed even once, the control is performed such that a big hit is achieved. ing.

  In addition, in the special figure synchronizing production, when the notice 4 is executed two or more predetermined times (not limited to two times) as a particular notice type, a big hit (excluding a big hit with no pitch) is always performed. May be controlled so that when a specific notice type is executed a predetermined number of times in the same (one time) special figure synchronizing effect, the specific notice type is not executed any more. .

  Next, control of the prohibition processing will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prohibition processing according to the present embodiment. The prohibition process is executed in the process of step S1560 of the decorative symbol change process (FIG. 52).

  When the prohibition processing is executed, the effect control program first determines whether the result of the hit determination is a big hit, that is, whether the special lottery result is a loss or a small hit (step S1561). In addition, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit with no ball out, whether or not to execute the notice effect by selecting the notice determination table at the time of loss, and the content of the notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode) Is determined, it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot if the jackpot has not been thrown even if the jackpot is determined in step S1561 (YES in step S1561). The process may proceed.

  Next, the effect control program determines a notice type stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140, and responds to the stored notice type. It is determined whether or not the effect display performed in the variable display game by the execution of the notice effect is subject to the prohibition condition (step S1562).

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the special figure synchronizing effect performed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the special symbol change display (the change display game) on the main control board 4100 is based on “notice 4”. When the notice effect is executed two or more times, the control is performed such that a big hit is always made. Therefore, the notice effect is stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. When the notice type is “notification 4”, the notice effect based on this “notification 4” is executed, so that the same (one time) special figure synchronizing production is performed even if the result of the hit determination is not a big hit. If it is determined that the prohibition condition based on “Preliminary 4” is executed twice within the prohibition condition (YES in step S1562), Delete information relating to notice type or the like stored in a predetermined storage area allocated to the peripheral control RAM4150c of your board 4140 (notice mode memory area) (notice information) (discard) (step S1563).

  In step S1563, the information (advance information) related to the notice type and the like stored in the predetermined storage area (advance notice mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 is deleted (discarded), whereby the notice is given. Since the effect is not executed, it can be corrected to a state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition. Thereby, even if the result of the hit determination is not a big hit, the notice effect based on "notice 4" is executed two or more times within the same (one time) special figure synchronized effect, so that it is possible to avoid confusion for the player. .

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the story reach announcement effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect, the announcement effect according to the announcement type with high expectation is executed, and then the announcement effect according to the announcement type with low expectation. Is executed, but the information (notification information) related to the notice type and the like stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, Even the execution of a notice effect corresponding to the notice type equivalent to the notice type of the notice effect that is executed at the time of the effect insertion or scheduled to be executed at the time of the effect insertion is limited. In other words, when the information (notice information) related to the notice type and the like stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, even the execution of the notice effect to maintain the jackpot expectation degree is limited. Has become. In addition, the assignment of the determination values in the table at the time of departure from the above-mentioned story reach advance determination table and the pseudo continuous change advance determination table is set so that the jackpot expectation degree in the previously performed announcement performance is easily maintained. More specifically, the story reach may be set so that the number of judgment values assigned in the order of notice 1 to notice 4 is reduced, that is, more judgment values are assigned to the notice type having a lower jackpot expectation. A table at the time of deviation from the notice determination table and the notice determination table of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation may be configured.

  Also, as described above, in the story reach announcement production performed in synchronization with the story reach, the story reach announcement is made for each of the scenarios (specific productions) executed in the story reach in advance (before starting the story reach). The presence / absence of the effect and the contents of the story reach announcement effect to be executed (advance type, advance mode) are determined, and the determination result (information related to the advance type (advance information)) is allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. The information is stored in a predetermined storage area (notification mode storage area). The advance notice storage area stores advance notice information for a plurality of scenarios (separately for each scenario or in a form in which all scenarios are combined). In this case, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied (YES in step S1562), the effect control program not only notifies the prohibition information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area, but also displays the advance notice information not corresponding to the prohibition condition. Delete all notice information including. As a result, it is possible to prevent the story reach announcement performance from being performed in synchronization with the story reach, and it is possible to correct the state so as not to correspond to the prohibition condition. In other words, in the story reach announcement performance performed in synchronization with the story reach, not only the advance notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area, but also all the advance information including the advance notice information not corresponding to the prohibition condition are collected. To correct the situation that does not fall under the prohibition conditions.

  On the other hand, in the pseudo consecutive announcement effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo continuous fluctuation, every time the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is operated, a single scenario (specific effect) executed according to the operation is performed. It is determined whether or not to execute the pseudo consecutive announcement effect, and the content of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect to be executed (advance type, advance mode), and the determination result (information (advance information) relating to the advance type and the like) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Is stored in a predetermined storage area (a notice mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The advance notice storage area stores advance notice information for one scenario. In this case, if it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied (YES in step S1562), the effect control program deletes only the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area. Thereby, while the pseudo consecutive announcement effect based on the advance notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition is not executed, the pseudo consecutive announcement effect based on the advance notice information not applicable to the prohibition condition can be executed, and the pseudo continuous announcement effect does not correspond to the prohibition condition. The condition can be corrected. In other words, in the pseudo consecutive announcement effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo continuous fluctuation, correction is made to a state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition by deleting only the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area, and the prohibition condition is corrected. A pseudo consecutive announcement effect based on the announcement information that does not correspond to.

  In this way, when the story reach preview production performed in synchronization with the story reach falls under the prohibition condition, all the advance notice information including the advance notice information that does not fall under the prohibition condition is deleted collectively and the prohibition condition is met. If the pseudo-continuous announcement production performed in synchronization with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation falls under the prohibition condition, while the correction is made to a state where no pseudo-continuous fluctuation occurs, some By deleting only the notice information, the situation is corrected so that it does not correspond to the prohibition condition. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive announcement effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo continuous fluctuation corresponds to the prohibition condition, the notice information corresponding to the pseudo consecutive announcement effect to be executed later among the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition is deleted. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the notice information corresponding to the pseudo consecutive notice effect performed earlier may be deleted. In this case, similarly to the story reach, the presence or absence of the pseudo-serial announcement effect and the content of the pseudo-serial announcement effect to be executed for each of all the scenarios (specific effects) executed in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation before the start of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (Notification type, notice mode) is determined, and this determination result (information related to the notice type (notification information)) is stored in a predetermined storage area (notification mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. When the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area falls under the prohibition condition, the notice mode is stored in order from the notice information according to the pseudo consecutive notice effect executed first until the state does not fall under the prohibition condition. The notice information stored in the area may be deleted. In addition, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is met in the pseudo consecutive announcement effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo continuous fluctuation (YES in step S1562), one of the announcement information corresponding to the pseudo consecutive announcement effect corresponding to the prohibition condition is provided. After deleting only the notice information of the part, the notice information predetermined according to the number of effects inserted may be set instead of the deleted notice information (replaced with the notice information predetermined). .

  Further, when the advance notice information stored in the advance notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, the notice information stored in the advance notice mode storage area is deleted to correct the state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition. By doing so, it is possible to prevent execution of a notice effect (story reach notice effect, pseudo consecutive notice effect) corresponding to the prohibition condition. In the story reach advance determination table (FIG. 57 (A)) and the pseudo continuous change advance determination table (FIG. 57 (B)), the largest number of determination values are assigned to “no advance notice”. That is, when the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area is changed to the lottery result with the highest appearance frequency (selection ratio) ( (Notice information). As described above, when the advance notice information stored in the advance notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, the advance notice information stored in the advance notice mode storage area is used as the lottery result (notice information) having the highest appearance frequency. By performing the replacement, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know that the replacement has been performed, and it is possible to execute the fluctuation effect without discomfort.

  If it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied in the story reach announcement production performed in synchronization with the story reach (YES in step S1562), the prohibition condition of the advance notice information stored in the advance notice mode storage area is satisfied. After deleting all the notice information including not only the notice information to be performed but also the notice information that does not correspond to the prohibition conditions, whether or not to perform the story reach notice production for each specific production, and the contents of the story reach notice production to be performed (the preliminary notice) The type of notice, the notice mode) is determined, and the notice information packaged in correspondence with the number of effect insertions is set in the notice mode storage area (the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area is determined by a predetermined package). (For example, the notification information may be replaced with the advance notice information). More specifically, if it is determined that the number of inserted effects falls under the prohibition condition in the story reach of 3 (YES in step S1562), the first and second effects are inserted for the third time without executing the story reach announcement effect. May be replaced with packaged notice information to indicate that notice 3 is to be executed when the effect is inserted. In this case, different announcement information may be set according to the winning type. For example, if the special lottery result is unsuccessful (a large hit or a small hit without a pitching may be included), the third effect Set the notice information packaged so that notice 1 is executed at the time of insertion, and if the special lottery result is a non-probable variable jackpot (may be limited to jackpots with pitching), notice at the time of inserting the third effect 2 is set, and if the special lottery result is a probable big hit (may be limited to a big hit with a pitched ball), the notice 3 is executed when the third effect is inserted. Notice information packaged as described above may be set. Also, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied, the notice information with the lowest expected degree (possibility) of the plurality of packaged notice information (for example, the special lottery result is out of order (when the third effect is inserted) Only the notice type for executing the notice 1) may be replaced with the expectation (possibility) and the appearance frequency, and an effect with a low expectation has a high appearance frequency and an effect with a high expectation. The frequency of appearance is low. By replacing the notice information with the lowest expected degree of suggestion when it is determined that it falls under the prohibition condition, the notice type with the highest appearance frequency will be executed, It is difficult for the player to know that the action has been performed, and a new notice (replaced from the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area) when it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied. The notice type set in the report is packaged so that it does not fall under the prohibition conditions, so it is not necessary to judge whether it falls under the prohibition conditions when replacing it based on the fact that it is determined that it falls under the prohibition conditions The processing becomes simpler than in the case of determining a notice type to be replaced for each specific effect while considering whether or not a prohibition condition is satisfied, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Also, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is met in the story reach announcement performance performed in synchronization with the story reach (YES in step S1562), after deleting all the advance information stored in the advance mode storage area, You may replace it with the notice information according to the notice type with the highest frequency of appearance as the notice information set according to the effect insertion number. For example, a separate table for selecting whether to execute the story reach announcement effect is provided separately, and the story reach announcement effect is set in the story reach announcement setting process executed in step S1560 of the story reach setting process (FIG. 53). When the lottery is executed, the notice type is determined by using the notice decision table provided in plurals according to the number of the specific effect to be executed in the story reach. If it is determined (YES in step S1562), when the story reach announcement effect is executed, the appearance frequency is set to be the highest in the announcement determination table according to the number of lotteries selected (the most determination value is It may be replaced with a notice type (allocated). By this, when the type of the story reach announcement production scheduled to be executed falls under the prohibition condition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the replacement has been performed by replacing the announcement type with the highest appearance frequency, A fluctuation effect can be executed without a feeling of strangeness.

  In addition, as described above, according to the number of executions of the specific effect (the number of effect insertions) executed during the variable display in the story reach, whether or not to execute the story reach announcement effect for all the specific effects to be executed, and The above-described prohibition is imposed when a configuration is made so that any one of a plurality of (packaged) notice types (notice forms) indicating the contents (notification type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed is determined. When a condition or the like is satisfied, the lowest hit expectation degree among a plurality of notice types (notification modes) provided according to the number of executions of the specific effect (the number of effect insertions) executed during the variable display in the story reach. The notification type may be replaced.

  In addition, normally, when the above-mentioned prohibition condition is met, the predetermined notice type is replaced.However, even if the prohibition condition is met, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is determined in advance. The notice type may be replaced with a notice type different from the notice type that has been set.For example, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied in the story reach notice effect and the special lottery result is out of order, the notice mode is stored. At least a part of the advance notice information corresponding to the advance notice type corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the area is set to a predetermined notice type (the story reach announcement effect may not be executed, May be replaced with a notice type having a lower degree of expectation), or the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area may be replaced. All the advance notice information including the advance notice information corresponding to the advance notice type not to be given is referred to as the advance notice type in which the predetermined notice type is packaged (the story reach preliminary effect may not be executed, or the packaged advance notice information may be prevented). May be replaced with the notice information with the lowest expected degree of the big hit), or if the special lottery result is a big hit without a small hit or a pitch, it is stored in the notice mode storage area. At least a part of the advance notice information corresponding to the advance notice type corresponding to the prohibition condition is replaced with a notice type having a higher expectation of a big hit than a predetermined notice type, or stored in a notice mode storage area. All the notice information including the notice information corresponding to the notice type that does not correspond to the prohibition conditions described in It may be expectations as a big hit in accordance with the notice type packaged than broadcasting to or replaced with high advance notice information.

  Then, the effect control program executes a notice execution setting process of setting effect information related to image data, sound data, and the like necessary for executing the story reach notice effect (step S1574). The effect information set in the notice execution setting process is obtained by executing the ramp data creation process (step S1028), the display data creation process (step S1030), and the sound data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit regular process. The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

  As described above, in the gaming machine of this example, when the advance notice information stored in the advance notice mode storage area corresponds to a prohibition condition, all of the advance notice information is used as a story reach announcement effect executed within one special figure synchronization effect. Alternatively, a part of the notice information may be deleted, or all or a part of the notice information may be replaced with notice information corresponding to another notice type, thereby correcting the state not to correspond to the prohibition condition. In addition, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, a holding display of the starting memory is performed in the starting memory display unit 1911 separately from the special figure synchronizing effect, and the holding display is displayed in a different manner from the normal to display the special symbol. Prior to the start of the variable display, a look-ahead effect (also referred to as a suspension notice) indicating the result of the variable display is executed. However, the look-ahead effect is not subject to the above-mentioned prohibition conditions. In other words, in the special figure synchronizing effect executed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, if the prohibition condition is met, the state is corrected to a state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition. Have been excluded. Therefore, in the special figure synchronizing effect performed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect (advance effect) that corresponds to a prohibition condition when executed is a notice effect mode (advance type) and start storage. This can be performed according to the look-ahead effect performed on the display unit 1911. Thus, an effect (notification effect) that is not normally performed is executed, and the player can be expected.

[13. Special figure pre-reading production]
Next, a prefetch effect that suggests the result of the variable display before the variable display of the special symbol is started will be described. The pre-reading effect in the present embodiment, the normal pre-reading effect that is executed at the timing when the game ball wins the starting opening, and the start memory to be subjected to the pre-reading effect at a predetermined timing until the start memory is exhausted. A continuous look-ahead effect in which the degree of expectation of the variable display is suggested based on the execution.

  In the normal prefetch effect, for example, a hold display of the start memory of the prefetch target is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Further, in the continuous prefetching effect, each time the start memory that is variably displayed in advance is consumed, the form of the hold display of the start memory to be prefetched is changed. In addition, not only the mode of the hold display of the start memory may be changed, but also a specific effect in the story reach or the pseudo continuous change may be executed at a timing at which the mode of the hold display is changed.

[13-1. Special figure prefetch effect control processing]
First, the special figure pre-reading effect control processing (step S1027) of the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special figure pre-reading effect control process according to the present embodiment. In the special figure look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect and a process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect are executed. The special figure pre-reading effect control process may be executed when a pre-reading effect command is received in the received command analysis process.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis processing (step S1022 in FIG. 42) when the pre-reading effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 in FIG. 48). If the special figure prefetch effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is “No”), the special figure prefetch effect control process ends because the prefetch effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is “Yes”), the effect control program normally executes the pre-fetch effect command based on the content of the look-ahead effect command corresponding to the start memory of the object to be pre-fetched. A look-ahead effect mode is selected (step S2002). At this time, the mode of the normal prefetching effect may be changed only when the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start memory of the prefetching target.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal prefetching effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. In the normal look-ahead effect, when a game ball is awarded at the starting port, the state of the hold display is changed regardless of the progress of the change display of the special symbol currently being executed, except when the number of held start memories is 0. Change at a predetermined rate.

  When the look-ahead effect is not executed, the hold display is “white”, but when the normal look-ahead effect is executed, the display color of the hold display is changed from “white” to a big hit according to an expected degree. With the probability (FIG. 71), the color changes to “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”. Further, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the color of the suspended display is set to change with a higher probability than in the case of a loss.

  When the color of the hold display is selected, the effect control program executes a normal look-ahead effect setting process of performing setting for changing to the selected color (step S2003). In the normal pre-reading effect setting processing, the setting for changing the display color of the hold display is performed, and the setting for outputting the sound effect, turning on the lamp, and moving the accessory is performed at the timing of the change. Thereafter, the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared (step S2004). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of normal prefetch effects from being executed for one start memory.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the continuous prefetch effect is executed only when the normal prefetch effect is executed. That is, the player has a sense of expectation due to the normal look-ahead effect at the timing when the game ball wins the starting port, and has a greater sense of expectation when the mode of the hold display is further changed by the progress of the game. It should be noted that the continuous prefetching effect may be performed without executing the normal prefetching effect. You may do so. In particular, it is effective when the upper starting port and the lower starting port can always be awarded, and the starting ports can be alternately awarded, and up to eight starting memories can be held.

  The effect control program determines whether or not to execute a normal look-ahead effect (step S2005). If the normal look-ahead effect is not executed (the result of step S2005 is “No”), that is, if the color of the hold display does not change to “white”, the special figure look-ahead is executed without executing the continuous look-ahead effect. The effect control process ends.

  In the case of executing the normal look-ahead effect (the result of step S2005 is “Yes”), the effect control program uses the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table ( The corresponding information is acquired from FIG. 71) (step S2006), and it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous prefetching effect (step S2007). The various information includes, for example, a fluctuation pattern and hit information. Further, the number of starting memories (the number of special symbol operation reserved balls) is included in the special symbol storing command transmitted at the same timing as the prefetch effect command. As a result of the lottery, when the continuous look-ahead effect is not executed (the result of step S2007 is “No”), the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

  FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous prefetching effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. The continuous look-ahead effect of the present embodiment is executed when the number of start storages is three or more because the mode of the hold display changes over a plurality of fluctuations. Further, when the result of the variable display based on the start memory is a big hit (or the possibility of the big hit is high), it is set so that the continuous look-ahead effect is easily executed and the number of times of the continuous look-ahead is easily increased. .

  In addition, the lottery for determining whether to execute the continuous prefetching effect (step S2007) is performed based on the continuous prefetching effect execution probability. In addition, when no reach occurs in the start-up memory of the prefetch target, a setting is made so that the continuous prefetch effect is not executed. The unit of the continuous look-ahead effect execution probability in FIG. 72 is%.

  When the continuous look-ahead effect is executed (result of step S2007 is “Yes”), the effect control program sets the effect selection pattern acquired from the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table (step S2008). Further, the number of continuous prefetching effects is set to the number of remaining effects (the number of remaining prefetching) (step S2009).

  Further, the effect control program sets a range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting a continuous prefetch effect to a specified value (initial value) (step S2010). Finally, the continuous prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2011), and the special figure prefetching effect control process ends.

[13-2. Continuous prefetching effect setting processing]
Next, the continuous look-ahead effect setting process executed in the decorative symbol changing process will be described. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is a process of controlling a look-ahead effect for a start memory that is a target of the look-ahead effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, the hold display of the start memory of the prefetch effect is changed at the timing when the start memory in which the variable display game is executed prior to the start memory of the prefetch effect is changed. Execute the process.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the continuous prefetching effect setting process according to the present embodiment. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is executed in the process of step S1524 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51).

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2101). The continuous prefetching effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2011 of the special figure prefetching effect control process (FIG. 70) when the continuous prefetching effect is executed. If the continuous prefetching effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2101 is “No”), the continuous prefetching effect process is terminated because the continuous prefetching effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2101 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random value for selecting a look-ahead effect (specific effect) to be executed ( Step S2102). Further, based on the obtained random value, the specific effect mode is obtained from the continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table (FIG. 74) (step S2103), and the specific effect setting process is executed (step S2104). In the specific effect setting process, settings for executing a continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) are performed.

  In the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) in the present embodiment, the shape of the hold display is changed according to the degree of expectation. In addition, since the continuous look-ahead effect is executed in the state where the normal look-ahead effect is executed, the shape is controlled so that the shape changes in a state where the color of the hold display changes. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table for selecting a hold display mode in the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 74, in this embodiment, six types of specific effects are defined according to the degree of expectation, and a range of random numbers is set for each specific effect. For example, when the effect selection pattern is “pattern 2”, when the random number value is 0 to 200, the specific effect is 1, when the random value is 201 to 400, the specific effect is 2,. Is selected for the special effect 6.

  In pattern 1, specific effects 5 and 6 with high expectations are not selected. In pattern 1, all specific effects can be executed. The range of random numbers is set so that the effect is not easily selected. On the other hand, in pattern 4, specific effects 1 with a low degree of expectation are not selected, and specific effects 4 and 5 with a high degree of expectation are easily selected. As shown in FIG. 72, pattern 1 is selected with a fluctuation pattern having a low degree of expectation, while pattern 4 is selected when the result of the fluctuation display game is a big hit.

  If the same shape as the previously executed continuous pre-reading effect is selected, the game may be allowed to proceed as if the continuous pre-reading effect was not executed, or the hold display may temporarily flash. For example, the player may be notified that the continuous look-ahead effect has been executed.

  Here, the description returns to the flowchart of FIG. When the specific effect setting process is executed, the effect control program subtracts 1 from the remaining effect number (step S2105). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0, that is, whether or not all the continuous look-ahead effects (specific effects) have been executed (step S2106). If the number of remaining effects has become 0 (the result of step S2106 is “Yes”), the continuous prefetching effect execution flag is cleared because all the continuous prefetching effects have been executed (step S2107). Finally, the lower limit value of the random number is set to a specified value (for example, “0”) (step S2108), and the continuous prefetching effect setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S2106 is “No”), that is, if all the continuous look-ahead effects have not been executed, the random number value acquired in the process of step S2102 Is set on the basis of (step S2109). For example, when the random number value extracted in the effect selection pattern “pattern 3” is “350”, the specific effect 3 is selected, so that the specific effect 1 or the specific effect 2 is not selected, that is, Is set, the lower limit of the random number is set to the lower limit “201” when the specific effect 3 is selected. As a result, when the next continuous look-ahead effect is executed, the random number value in the range of “201” to “1000” is extracted in the process of step S2102, and the random number value is extracted from the effect performed earlier in the continuous look-ahead effect. It is possible to prevent an effect with a low degree of expectation from being executed.

  Note that, in the continuous pre-reading effect, the random number extraction range may be adjusted so that the suspended display changes stepwise. For example, when the effect selection pattern is “pattern 3” and the number of consecutive prefetch executions is “3”, the lower limit value is set to “0” and the upper limit value is set to “1” so that the specific effect executed first is 1 to 4. 600 ". At this time, if the specific effect executed first is 2, the lower limit value of the random number value for selecting the specific effect executed second time is set to “201” and the upper limit value is set to “800”. That is, the specific effect is set so that any one of 3 to 5 is selected. By doing so, the specific effect is always executed so that the degree of expectation is high (to be established), and even if the specific effect 5 is selected, the specific effect 6 is performed in the next (last) specific effect. Is selected, the fall is prevented, and the specific effect can be executed such that the degree of expectation is surely increased. In addition, if it is set so as to be surely established, it is possible to greatly increase the sense of expectation of the player. Therefore, the control may be performed such that it is surely established only in the case of a big hit.

[13-3. Production example]
Through the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect so that a fall-off does not occur in the continuous look-ahead effect. Next, a specific example of the continuous prefetching effect will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen transition of the continuous prefetching effect according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 75 (A) shows a state in which the decorative display is displayed in a state where the prefetch effect is not executed. FIG. 75 (B) shows a state in which a normal prefetch effect has been executed as a result of a game ball winning in the upper starting port 2101 in the state of FIG. 75 (A). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the held start-up memory is exhausted, and the next fluctuation display is started. At this time, the first continuous look-ahead effect is executed, and the specific effect 3 is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 75 (D) to 75 (G), each time the held start memory is exhausted and the variable display is started, the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 are executed, and the shape of the hold display is changed. Change.

  Then, when the starting memory to be subjected to the pre-reading effect is exhausted, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (FIG. 75 (H)), the reach occurs (FIG. 75 (I)). In the example shown in FIG. 75 (J), SP reach 3 is executed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a look-ahead effect can be executed based on the progress of a game (the effect mode is changed), thereby further increasing the player's expectation in the process of continuing the game. Becomes possible. In particular, for a variable display game that is executed after the prefetching effect (normal prefetching effect) is executed at the timing when the game ball wins in the starting port and the starting memory targeted for the prefetching effect is consumed. Although the entertainment interest may be reduced, the state of the hold display changes each time the variable display game is executed, so that the expectation of the player can be continuously increased, and the entertainment interest is reduced. Can be prevented.

[13-4. Modified example of special figure look-ahead production]
[13-4-1. Modified example of special figure pre-reading effect control]
Note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the normal prefetching effect and the continuous prefetching effect. In the embodiment described above, in the first look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect), the mode (color) of the hold display changes at the timing when the game ball wins the starting port, and in the second and subsequent look-ahead effects (the continuous look-ahead effect), At the time of digestion, the mode (shape) of the hold display changes. In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect only at the timing when the game ball wins the starting opening, and the content of the specific effect (change of the hold display) is randomly selected at the time of holding the game.

  On the other hand, the contents (scenarios) of all the special effects may be randomly selected at the time of the start winning, as in story reach. For example, in the special figure pre-reading effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42, FIG. 70), all the specific effects are selected by lot. In the process (step S1408) of setting the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag of the received command analysis process (FIG. 48), the contents of all the specific effects may be randomly selected.

  In addition, when the number of retained memories is 2 or less at the time of the start winning, and the variable display is being executed, the number of executions of the continuous prefetching effect is set to 1, and when the number of retained memories is 3 or more, the continuous prefetching effect lottery table ( What is necessary is just to select the mode of the continuous prefetching effect based on FIG. 72) (all the patterns may be covered by the continuous prefetching effect lottery table). In this case, the color of the hold display may be changed in the first look-ahead effect (usually the same as the look-ahead effect), the shape may be changed from the beginning, or both the color and the shape may be changed. .

  In addition, when the number of prefetching effects is one, that is, when the mode of the hold display changes at the time of the start winning and thereafter, the mode of the hold display does not change, a gaseous effect with extremely low expectation may be performed. That is, the larger the number of changes in the hold mode, the higher the expectation of the big hit, but if only one, the expectation may be low.

[13-4-2. Special map 2 priority digest]
In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the upper starting port 2101, a first special figure variable display game in which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the upper special symbol display 1185, and a gaming ball wins in the lower starting port 2102. In this case, the second special figure variation display game in which the special symbol is variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display is started in a case where a game ball has won the lower starting port 2102, in preference to a case where a game ball has won the upper starting port 2101. Therefore, when a prefetching effect is executed based on the starting memory in which the game ball has won the upper starting port 2101 and the game ball has won in the lower starting port 2102, the digestion of the starting memory of the prefetching effect target is delayed. Become.

  In this way, when the variable display of the prefetch target is interrupted, the specific effect executed immediately before may be continuously executed. In addition, a specific effect based on the selected scenario may be executed, and the specific effect executed last may be continuously executed by the interrupted amount.

  Alternatively, the scenario may be reselected for the interrupted amount. At this time, a random number range may be set in accordance with the scenario corresponding to the specific effect that has been executed, and a new scenario may be selected, or the executed scenario may be ignored, so that the content of the effect does not fall. Alternatively, a new scenario may be selected by initializing the range of random numbers.

  Further, when a game ball wins in the lower starting port 2102, the specific effect may not be executed, and only the variable display corresponding to the starting memory in which the upper starting port 2101 has been won may be executed.

  When the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game are configured to be simultaneously executable, for example, a specific effect is performed in accordance with the execution of the first special figure change display game. Just execute it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is won, the starting ball solenoid 2105 is driven to open and close the movable piece 2106, so that a game ball can be won in the lower starting hole 2102. However, when the game ball wins alternately in the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 and the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game are executed alternately, an interrupt is issued. Does not occur. In this case, the control may be performed in the same manner as when only the first special figure variable display game is executed. However, since the variable display for up to eight times can be suspended, these variable display games are not distinguished from each other. It is possible to execute a series of specific effects over a period, and it is possible to execute effects that are rich in variations.

[13-4-3. Modified example of special figure look-ahead production mode]
In the embodiment described above, the mode of the hold display is changed, but the background of the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 may be changed. More specifically, the background color may be simply changed, or a special structure or natural object may be arranged behind a decorative pattern or a character. For example, a cloud may be displayed, the color of the cloud may be changed according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, or lightning may be generated from the cloud.

[14. Modification of random number lottery]
In the production example described above, the range in which random numbers are generated (upper limit value, lower limit value) is changed to prevent falling, but other methods may be used to prevent falling. Good. The case where pattern 1 of the effect selection pattern shown in FIG. 54 is selected will be described.

  For example, without changing the random number generation range (that is, while keeping the range of “0” to “1000”), a specific effect is selected by converting the extracted random number value by a process such as an operation. You may. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described.

  In the present invention, when “scenario 3” is selected as the specific effect, the specific effect executed immediately before is any one of “scenario 1” to “scenario 3”. To explain such an example, in order to prevent falling, it is set so that a random number is generated in a range from “0” to “600”. Here, a random number is generated in a range from “0” to “1000”, and multiplied by “600/1000” (rounded down after the decimal point) to generate a random number in a range from “0” to “600”. be able to.

  Further, when generating a random number in the range from “0” to “600”, the remainder obtained by dividing the random number generated in the range from “0” to “1000” by “600” may be used as a random number value. Good. In this case, since the values from “0” to “400” overlap, the variation of the random numbers is biased. For example, if the division result is 1 or more, the difference between the random number generation range and the overlapping range (Here, 600−400 = 200) is added to the random number value (that is, the overlapping range is changed from “200” to “600”), so that a scenario with a high degree of expectation is likely to be executed. Then, the player's expectation may be increased.

  As yet another example, when generating a random number in a range from “0” to “1000”, a random number generated in a range from “0” to “100” is generated ten times, and each generated random number is generated. May be added to generate a random number in a range from “0” to “1000”. With this configuration, it is possible to set various random number ranges while keeping the range of actually generated random numbers constant by setting and adding the number of random number generations according to the range of random numbers to be generated. it can. Further, instead of generating the random number a predetermined number of times, the random number may be multiplied by a predetermined number. For example, a random number in a range from “0” to “1000” may be generated by multiplying a random number generated in a range from “0” to “100” by ten. Although fine distribution cannot be performed, similar results can be obtained if the random numbers are uniform random numbers. The method of extracting random numbers may be changed according to the effect selection pattern, and the accuracy of the extracted random numbers may be adjusted as needed.

  Further, after extracting a random number for selecting a specific effect to be executed first, a random number for selecting a subsequent specific effect may be added to a random number for selecting a preceding specific effect. . At this time, the generation range of the random numbers may be adjusted so that the random number value after the addition does not exceed the upper limit value, or the excess of the upper limit value may be truncated.

[15. Allowance for falling (rule break)
[15-1. Production example]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effects that are continuously executed are configured so that the degree of expectation of the effect contents can be prevented from falling. However, even if the fall-off does not occur, the result of the variable display does not always become a big hit. In addition, when a specific effect with a high degree of expectation is first executed, the flow of the subsequent effects is predicted by the player, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game cannot be enhanced.

  Therefore, a modification will be described in which a fall is allowed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a change is made to a normally executed effect pattern. The condition for allowing the falling may be determined, for example, depending on the game state such as the probability state of the winning probability of the variable display or the operating state (time saving state) of the ordinary electric auditors. Specifically, if the probability of the result of the fluctuation display being a big hit is high (high probability state, probable change state), or if the state is advantageous to the player such as a time saving state, the generation range of the random number is not adjusted. May be allowed to fall. Conversely, in a state other than the probability change state or the time saving state that is not advantageous to the player, a fall may occur without adjusting the random number generation range.

  Further, only when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the fall may be allowed. That is, the player can recognize that the big hit is decided when the effect with the low degree of expectation is executed and the player is disappointed. In this way, when an effect that is not executed in the normal flow is executed, the degree of expectation is increased. Conversely, the effect variation can be increased and the interest of the game can be increased. The fall may be allowed (with a low probability) during normal operation while controlling the fall to be less likely to occur, and the probability of the fall occurring when the result of the variable display game is a big hit may be increased.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not the fall is permitted according to the variation pattern instead of the result of the variation display game. For example, when a reach with a high degree of reliability (for example, story reach, SP reach 3 after the pseudo continuous production) is generated, a fall may occur more easily than a reach with a low degree of reliability. On the other hand, when a reach with low reliability occurs, a fall may occur more easily than a reach with high reliability. As described above, instead of the result of the variable display game, whether or not the fall is allowed may be made to correspond to the effect content.

  In addition, a fall of the reliability of the variation pattern when the result of the variation display game is a big hit may be allowed. For example, the setting is made such that the variation pattern (reach) with high reliability has a higher possibility of falling down than the case where the variation pattern (reach) with low reliability is selected. Conversely, the variation pattern (reach) with low reliability may have a higher possibility of falling down than when the variation pattern (reach) with high reliability is selected.

  In addition, when the obfuscation mode in which the probability state of the variable display game is not informed clearly of whether the probability state is the normal state or the probable change state after the jackpot game is executed is executed, a random number is used only when the actual probability state is the normal state. May be adjusted. In this case, if the probability state is the probable state, even if a fall occurs, the probability of winning the variable display game is high, so that the player is less likely to be discouraged as a result. Because of this, the discouragement of the player due to the production of the story reach is reduced. Conversely, only in the case of the probable change state, the generation range of the random number may be adjusted to prevent falling. With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the current probability state is the normal state (low probability) due to the fall.

  Furthermore, in the ambiguity mode, the probability state may be explicitly reported when the falling-down occurs without adjusting the random number generation range. Further, two types of modes, that is, a mode in which the generation range of the random number is adjusted to the unclear mode and a mode in which the generation range of the random number is not adjusted may be settable. Further, these modes may be selectable by a player. With such a configuration, the player can select whether the probability state can be recognized early or an effect with less disappointment can be executed.

[15-2. Control example]
Next, control for allowing falling will be described. In the present embodiment, the generation range of random numbers is adjusted in order to prevent falling, but a specific procedure will be described.

  For example, when falling is allowed, the upper limit or lower limit of the random number is reset to a specified value (initial value). In this case, there is a possibility that the fall does not occur. However, when the fall is generated as the jackpot notification effect, the range of the random number may be set so as to always generate the fall. Further, the upper limit or the lower limit of the random number may be set so as to be returned to a predetermined step, not to the prescribed value (initial value). With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the falling probability and the stage.

  As described above, random numbers having a biased distribution may be generated by generating random numbers in a predetermined range in an overlapping manner. In this case, the falling probability (rising) may be adjusted by setting the overlapping range to a range in which falling occurs, or conversely, a range in which rising occurs. Furthermore, the range of the random number generated by setting the initial value, the minimum value, and the maximum value of the random number counter may be adjusted.

  Further, as described above, the counter for updating the random number is incremented by one at a predetermined timing (timer interrupt processing), but the value to be added may be changed according to the game state. For example, 1 is added in the normal gaming state, and another random number is extracted and added in the high probability state (probable change state). By changing the method of updating the random number counter in this manner, it is possible to change the frequency of occurrence of falling down according to the game state.

[16. Processing when power is turned off]
Here, in the reception command analysis processing, processing when a power interruption command or a power on command is received will be described.

  As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted when power supply from the outside to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Before the power interruption command is transmitted, as described above, a power failure notice signal is output from the main control board 4100, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is executed to execute processing such as command backup. Is executed.

  The peripheral control board 4140 executes a process according to the mode in which the power is turned off. Specifically, when power supply from the outside is stopped and power supply to the entire gaming machine (main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140) is cut off, power supply to only the main control board 4100 is cut off. In this case, supply of power to only the peripheral control board 4140 may be interrupted. Hereinafter, each case will be described.

[16-1. When only the peripheral control board is turned off]
When the supply of power to only the peripheral control board 4140 is interrupted due to a wiring contact failure or the like, the game control in the main control board 4100 is continued. At this time, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c has not been lost, that is, if the storage content of the peripheral control RAM 4150c matches the storage content of the backup management target work area 4150ca, as described above, the hot start is performed. The effect control is resumed (continued).

  Even when the production control is restarted by a hot start, the peripheral control board 4140 may be notified that the power supply has been temporarily cut off. For example, the power supply cutoff may be displayed by displaying an initial screen when the power is turned on, or by displaying a screen notifying that the power has been cut off.

  In addition, there is a possibility that a difference between the time measurement (timer) on the main control board 4100 and the time measurement on the peripheral control board 4140 may occur due to the interruption of the power supply. For example, the elapsed time from the start of the change of the display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 and the change of the display of the decorative symbol on the peripheral control board 4140 may be shifted. In this case, since the variation display of the decorative symbol ends later, the special figure tuning effect may be ended when the special figure tuning effect end command is received. If it is necessary to display an initial symbol at the start of the change, a default lost symbol or a predetermined symbol is displayed. The predetermined symbol may be any symbol other than the big hit, and may be a symbol dedicated to the occurrence of a power failure.

  Further, if the power is cut off during the execution of the big hit game, the time measurement deviation may be corrected at the timing when the big winning opening closing display command, the ending command, and the like indicating the shift to the next round are received.

  When the storage contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c have been lost, the value 0 is written to the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the production control is restarted as a cold start.

  If an effect (fluctuation pattern) accompanied by a specific effect is being executed at the timing when the effect control is restarted as a cold start, the execution of a series of specific effects is interrupted. On the other hand, in the case of the hot start, if the progress information of the specific effect is held, the effect may be continued as it is, or the result of the lottery of the scenario may be discarded, and the scenario may be re-selected. When drawing a scenario at the time of execution of each specific production, draw a scenario for executing the subsequent specific production until the timing when all final specific productions are completed so that the contents of each specific production do not conflict. Alternatively, the specific effect may not be executed. Note that the execution of the specific effect may be stopped when the power supply of the peripheral control board is shut off regardless of the cold start or the hot start.

[16-2. When only the main control board is powered off]
When only the power of the main control board 4100 is cut off and the power of the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied, the power cutoff command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 switches the effect display being executed to the screen display at the time of power interruption (the abnormality notification screen). Thereafter, when the supply of power to the main control board 4100 is restarted, a command for notifying the gaming state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 together with the power-on command. Note that the command for notifying the gaming state may be integrated with the power-on command.

  When the gaming state notified together with the power-on command matches the content of the currently executed effect, the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the effect screen and continues the effect as it is. At this time, if it is not possible to return to the effect screen only by the information notified together with the power-on command, the effect is executed so that the player does not mistakenly recognize the effect. For example, the case where the effect cannot be returned to the effect being executed is, for example, a state in which the stop result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, a round effect during a big hit game, and the like. The effect that the player does not misunderstand is, for example, when the decorative symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, all the decorative symbols are fluctuated and displayed at a high speed, or a specially designed decorative symbol is displayed. If a big hit game is being played, only the fact that a big hit game is being played is displayed without displaying the number of rounds.

  In addition, if the game state is different from the display state of the current production, an abnormality notification screen is displayed. Then, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, an effect corresponding to the received command is performed to return to a normal state. It should be noted that the abnormality notification screen may be any display as long as the player can recognize that an abnormality has occurred. At this time, if the fluctuation display is executed in a pseudo continuous fluctuation or story reach fluctuation pattern, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and even if the continuous look-ahead effect is ongoing, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (lottery of the scenario) ) Is aborted.

[16-3. When the power to the main control board and peripheral control board is cut off]
When the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, power is supplied to the main control board 4100 from a backup power supply, and the contents stored in the RAM are retained for a predetermined period. As described above, the power interruption command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Thereafter, when power is supplied to the gaming machine again, the main control board 4100 transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 4140. At this time, a game state is notified from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, and if the game is not in a game stop state such as a customer waiting state, the peripheral control board 4140 provides an effect of notifying that a power cutoff has occurred. Is performed, the production is switched to an effect that does not give a false recognition to the player waiting for the customer. Thereafter, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, an effect corresponding to the received command is performed to return to a normal state. In this case, if the fluctuation display is being executed in a pseudo continuous fluctuation or story reach fluctuation pattern, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and even if the continuous look-ahead effect is continuing, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (scenario lottery) ) Is aborted.

[16-4. Summary at power off]
With the above configuration, even when the power supply to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is cut off, whether the execution of the variation display with the pseudo continuous variation or the story reach variation pattern is continued. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not.

[17. Directed look-ahead direction]
Next, the normal symbol type prefetching effect (general symbol prefetching effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, when a normal symbol type prefetch effect command is received from the main control board 4100, a general symbol prefetch effect is executed. FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the universal figure prefetching effect control process according to the present embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an example of a general-purpose look-ahead effect of the present embodiment.

  When the general-drawing pre-reading effect control process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the general-purpose pre-reading effect execution flag is set (step S2201). As described above, the general figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (FIG. 48) when the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command is received. If the ordinary figure prefetch effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2201 is “No”), the effect control program does not execute the ordinary figure prefetch effect, and thus ends the present process.

  On the other hand, when the general figure prefetch effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2201 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether the general figure prefetch effect is currently being executed (step S2201). S2202). If the general-purpose look-ahead effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “Yes”), the process from step S2207 is executed in order to continue the general-purpose look-ahead effect being executed.

  When the general-drawing pre-reading effect is not being executed (the result of step S2202 is “No”), the effect control program determines whether the execution condition of the general-purpose pre-reading effect is satisfied (step S2203). As for the execution condition of the general-purpose look-ahead effect, for example, it is determined whether or not the condition can be established according to a game state, an execution state of another effect, and the like. When the execution condition of the general-drawing prefetching effect is not satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “No”), the effect control program clears the general-purpose prefetching effect execution flag (step S2209) and ends the process.

  In the present embodiment, the timing for executing the general-purpose look-ahead effect is not particularly limited. For example, you may make it perform independently of the execution state of the fluctuation | variation display (special figure synchronous production) of the decoration symbol corresponding to the fluctuation | variation display of a special symbol. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), even while the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is being variably displayed, a general-look-ahead effect is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (B). The execution timing of the ordinary figure pre-reading effect may be the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 77, even while the special figure prefetching effect is being executed, the general figure prefetching effect may be executed in parallel.

  On the other hand, even when a command (ordinary symbol type pre-reading effect command) instructing execution of the pre-reading effect is received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed. Is possible. For example, when an effect that the player pays attention to (for example, a reach effect) is executed, or when a special effect is executed during the execution of the general look-ahead effect, the execution condition of the general-purpose look-ahead effect is set. As unsuccessful, the execution of the prefetching effect may be restricted. Also, in order to prevent a plurality of types of announcement effects from being executed at the same time, when the prefetch announcement effect of the special lottery is being executed, the execution of the prefetch announcement effect of the ordinary lottery is controlled by the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Is also good.

  In the pre-reading effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), a star-shaped pre-reading effect area having a star shape is displayed in the upper right portion of the screen, and the symbols are variably displayed in the area ( FIG. 77 (C)). Then, as a result of the fluctuation display, the symbol corresponding to the hit (“this”, FIG. 77 (D)) and the symbol corresponding to the loss (“−”, FIG. 77 (E)) are stopped and displayed, and the result of the general drawing lottery is displayed. Will be notified. The player may fire the game ball aiming at the lower starting port 2102 provided with the movable piece 2106 when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped in the ordinary figure pre-reading effect area. Further, when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped, the player may be notified to shoot the game ball aiming at the lower starting port 2102. At this time, in order to secure time for the player to aim and fire at the lower starting port 2102, the effect control program determines whether or not the result of the general drawing prefetching effect is given a predetermined time before the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction. Control to be displayed.

  Further, when a plurality of movable modes of the movable piece 2106 are set according to the type of the ordinary lottery, the player may set the movable piece 2106 in accordance with the degree of advantage (easiness of winning the game ball to the lower starting port 2102) for the player. You may determine whether the execution conditions of the figure look-ahead effect were satisfied. For example, as the movable mode of the movable piece 2106, the time during which the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction is set to be long (long open), or the number of times the movable piece 2106 is moved is set to be large. At this time, only in the case of a movable mode that is advantageous to the player such as long release, a general-purpose look-ahead notice effect may be executed.

  In addition, a plurality of types of symbols other than a hit and a loss may be defined, and a stop symbol may be set according to the degree of expectation that a normal lottery will be a big hit. Further, the stop symbol may correspond to the movable mode of the movable piece 2106. When the movable piece 2106 moves in the long opening mode as a result of the regular drawing lottery winning, a stop symbol that informs the player as a hit is set. May be a stop symbol.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is short, it is not necessary to execute the normal symbol type prefetching effect. This is because the winning probability is high, and even if the result of the ordinary lottery is announced, the profit for the player is small, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is short. That is, it may be determined whether or not the general-purpose look-ahead effect can be executed according to the game state.

  When the execution condition of the general-purpose prefetching effect is satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “Yes”), the effect control program displays the general-purpose prefetching effect region (step S2204). Then, in order to set the time for variably displaying the symbols in the universal figure prefetching effect, the general figure prefetching effect timer is set (step S2205), and the universal figure prefetching effect is started (step S2206). It should be noted that the time until the ordinary figure pre-reading effect timer times out may be fixed, may be in accordance with the game state, may be in accordance with the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, or may be a combination thereof.

  Furthermore, when the general-drawing prefetching effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “yes”), the rendering control program determines whether the general-drawing prefetching effect timer has expired (step S2207). If the general-purpose prefetching effect timer has not expired (the result of step S2207 is “no”), the process ends to continue the general-purpose prefetching effect.

  On the other hand, when the general-drawing pre-reading effect timer has timed out (the result of step S2207 is “Yes”), the rendering control program stops and displays the changing symbol in order to display the pre-reading result of the general-drawing lottery ( Step S2208). Finally, the ordinary figure pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared (step S2209), and the process ends.

  In addition, the general figure pre-reading effect described above is executed on the screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, but may be executed on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. In addition, the general-purpose look-ahead effect is not only displayed on the display device, but also executed by a plurality of effect devices, such as operating a movable character, illuminating a light emitter such as a lamp, and outputting sound from a speaker. It may be possible, or a combination of a plurality of these effect devices may be used. When performing a pre-reading effect in combination with a plurality of effect devices, besides executing the pre-reading effect simultaneously with a plurality of effect devices, the pre-reading effect should be executed on one of the effect devices. You may. For example, when performing a general-purpose pre-reading effect by screen display and voice output, a state where the general-purpose pre-reading effect cannot be performed by the screen display (for example, when an error is being notified, another (pre-reading) effect is being performed, etc.) In the case of ()), the execution of the effect by the display device is restricted, and only the general-purpose look-ahead effect by voice output is executed. Also, instead of restricting the execution of the general-purpose prefetching effect, the general-purpose prefetching effect may be performed so as to overlap with another effect. In this case, the effect of the general-purpose look-ahead effect is changed. For example, the screen display may be made translucent to perform a pre-reading effect for ordinary drawings, or the volume may be reduced and audio output may be performed.

[18. Effects]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the range of the random number value dynamically according to the game state and the like, a continuous production without contradiction such as preventing a fall without complicating the control is executed. can do.

  In addition, when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect including the specific effect, the flag and the random number initial value for executing the specific effect are cleared. The predetermined initialization condition is, for example, a case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the effect, and the effect cannot be continued.

  In addition, when there is a starting prize that generates a big hit or a small hit during the performance of the effect, or when there is a starting prize that generates a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a rare fluctuation pattern with high expectation), Even when the state (game mode) transition condition is satisfied, the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped, and the flag and the random number initial value are cleared.

  For example, in the specification in which the variable display based on the game ball winning in the lower starting port 2102 described above is executed with higher priority than in the case of winning in the upper starting port 2101, the result of the variable display executed preferentially is When the above initialization condition such as a big hit is satisfied, the flag and the random number initial value are cleared, and the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a specific effect from being interrupted by an event such as occurrence of a big hit or a change in a game state, and from being restarted halfway.

  In addition, the present invention may be applied not only to prevent falling, but also to perform effects that are executed continuously and have order.

  For example, the present invention may be applied to a case where an effect for each round is selected in a big hit game. In this case, the effect of each round may be selected at the start of the big hit game, or the effect content may be selected every predetermined number of rounds (for example, every three rounds in a 15 round big hit game). In addition, a common effect may be executed up to an intermediate round (for example, seven out of fifteen rounds), and the effect content may be selected for a subsequent round (for example, eight or more rounds). At this time, for example, when the start memory of the variable display game executed after the end of the big hit game includes a start memory that becomes a big hit, an effect pattern in which a special effect is easily executed is selected, and a continuous big hit is selected. A certain fact may be suggested (notified) to the player.

  As described above, the feature of the present invention is that by dynamically changing the range of the random number value according to the game state and the like, it is possible to execute a variety of effects without complicating the control. Become.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to hold a preview lottery table that covers all selection patterns of a specific effect in the story reach, the pseudo continuous variation, and the continuous prefetching effect, so that the storage capacity increases with the diversification of the effect. Can be suppressed.

[19. Prohibition of special map look-ahead (judgment / production)]
Here, the control in which the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 prohibits the special figure prefetch determination and the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure prefetch effect will be described.

[19-1. Control on main control board side (prohibition of special figure read-ahead determination)
[19-1-1. command]
First, FIGS. 78 and 79 show an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of a command related to special figure pre-reading among commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 78 is an example of a table showing a modification of the command “8-10. Others” described above with reference to FIG. 16. FIG. 79 shows the special figure 1 symbol type command of “8-1. Special figure 1 tuning effect related” and the special figure 2 symbol type command of “8-2. Special figure 2 tuning effect related” described above with reference to FIG. It is an example of a table showing details. The description of the same configuration as described above is omitted.

  The starting opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect. Here, if a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, the mode value is set to “01H”, and the lower starting port is set based on the detection signal from the lower starting port switch 2109. When a game ball enters the mouth 2102, the mode value is set to “02H”.

  Next, in the above-mentioned (FIG. 16), the timing at which the number of special symbols 1 held changes (the timing of increasing the number of held symbols (starting memory number) due to the game ball winning to the upper starting port 2101) or the timing at which the upper special symbol display 1185 The special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a at the timing of decreasing the number of holdings by the fluctuation display, and when the number of special symbol 1 holdings increases (when the game ball is awarded to the upper starting port 2101), the special symbol is used. The command for specifying 1 hold number has been sent. Therefore, the special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 pieces of hold number information, and the mode values “00H” to “04H” are set accordingly. Also, as described above, the special symbol 1 hold number designation command notifies the presence / absence of a prefetch effect as well as the hold number at the time of increase. The special symbol 1 reserved number designation command indicates “pre-reading” information when the upper 4 bits of the mode value is “1”, and “non-pre-reading” information when the upper bits of the mode value is “0”. Represents. When the special symbol 1 hold number designation command is “pre-reading”, it also plays the role of instructing the start of the pre-reading effect. The special symbol 2 storage command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  On the other hand, in the modified example (FIG. 78), the command transmitted differs when the number of special symbol 1 reservations decreases (at the start of fluctuation) and increases (at the time of starting opening winning). The special symbol 1 storage command at the start of the change indicating the number of reserved balls at the timing when the number of special symbols 1 reserved decreases (the timing of the decrease in the number of reserves by the variable display on the upper special symbol display 1185), that is, at the start timing of the variable display. Is sent. Therefore, the special symbol 1 storage command at the start of fluctuation transmitted when the number of holds is reduced has 0 to 3 pieces of hold number information, and the mode values “01H” to “04H” are set accordingly. On the other hand, at the timing when the number of special symbols 1 is increased (timing for increasing the number of retained symbols due to the winning of the game ball to the upper starting port 2101), the prefetched special symbol 1 storage prefetch command indicating the number of reserved balls and the presence / absence of prefetching is transmitted. You. Therefore, the pre-reading special symbol 1 storage prefetch command transmitted when the number of reservations is increased has 1 to 4 pieces of reservation number information, and the mode values “* 2H” to “* 5H” are set accordingly. The upper four bits “*” of the mode value are set to “0” when “prefetching is not performed” and “1” when “prefetching is performed”. The setting of the presence / absence information of the prefetching is performed in the process of step S242 (“no prefetching”) and the process of step S280 (“prefetching exists”) in the storage prefetching process (FIG. 80) described later. The pre-reading special symbol 1 storage pre-reading command and the above-mentioned special symbol 1 hold number designation command (FIG. 16) have the same information transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, but the status value and mode value constituting the command are not set. different. Note that the special symbol 2 storage command at the start of fluctuation and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command at the time of prefetch have the same configuration as the special symbol 1 except that the status value is different.

  Also, only when there is prefetching (that is, when the head address of the mode value of the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetching command at prefetching is “1”), the symbol type prefetching command, the variation pattern prefetching command, and the variation type A prefetch command is sent. Note that, in the modified example, a fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command is also transmitted. Therefore, in the modified example, a process of setting the transmission of the variable distribution table information prefetch command when the prefetch determination is performed is added to the above-described storage prefetch process (FIG. 24).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 80, a storage prefetch process according to a modification will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a storage prefetch process according to a modification. Note that processes common to the above-described storage prefetching process (FIG. 24) are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  In the modified example, as described above, when the pre-reading determination is made, the variable distribution table information pre-read command is transmitted. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a sets the command indicating the prefetch result (the symbol type prefetch command, the variation pattern prefetch command, and the variation type prefetch command) in the command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). At this time, the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command is also set in the command buffer (steps S279a and S279b). The fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command will be described later with reference to FIG. The command acquired in the process of step S284 is a special symbol storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching the corresponding special figure (FIG. 78). As described above, the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching has the same information as the special symbol 1 (2) reserved number designation command (FIG. 16).

  Referring back to FIG. The symbol type prefetch command is determined based on the results of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S252, FIG. 28) of the memory prefetch process (FIG. 80). This command specifies a specific jackpot. Similarly, according to the result of the special symbol big hit determination process (step S510, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S512, FIG. 28) of the special symbol / flag setting process (FIG. 34) executed at the start of the change. There are special figure 1 (2) symbol type commands as commands for specifying outliers, specific jackpots, and non-specific jackpots. The detailed configuration of these commands will be described.

  Loss or big hit symbol types 0 to 48 are associated with the mode values of the symbol type prefetch command (FIG. 78) and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command (FIG. 79). For the symbol type pre-read command, the mode value “01H” is set for the loss, and the mode values “02H” to “46H” are set for the symbol types 0 to 44 indicating the special jackpot, and the non-specific The same mode value “50H” is set for the big hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating the big hit (small hit). On the other hand, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, mode values “47H” to “50H” are set for each of the large hit symbol types 45 to 48 indicating a non-specific big hit (small hit). .

  The variation pattern prefetch command is a command for specifying an effect pattern (variation pattern) as described above. The variation pattern value (variation pattern number) indicating the variation pattern is obtained by changing the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number 2 in the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258, FIGS. 29 and 30) of the storage prefetching process (FIG. 80). It is set using. The variation pattern random number 1 is used to set an effect mode from a plurality, and the variation pattern random number 2 is used to set detailed effect content (effect pattern) according to the set effect mode.

  The fluctuation type prefetch command is a command for designating information (added value of time) as to whether or not to perform pseudo continuous fluctuation with respect to the set fluctuation pattern. The added value of the time is set using the random number for the variation type in the variation type determination process (step S262, FIG. 31) of the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 80). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not performed by the fluctuation type random number, the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern is maintained. If it is determined that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation is to be performed based on the random number for the fluctuation type, the pseudo-continuous operation according to the fluctuation type (one of types A to C) corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern is performed using the random number for the fluctuation type. The number of executions of the change (1 to 3 times) is determined. At this time, since the added value of time is associated with the number of executions of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the added value of time is set by determining the number of executions for each type. Therefore, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern is extended.

  The fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command is a command for specifying a fluctuation distribution table used when a fluctuation pattern is determined in the fluctuation pattern selection determination processing (FIG. 29) at the start of fluctuation. As described above, in the fluctuation distribution table, the jackpot fluctuation selection information type table (big hit distribution table) used in the case of a big hit ("yes" in step S350) is out of reach but a reach effect is performed (step S350). The reach fluctuation selection information state table (reach distribution table) used for “yes” in S372) and the deviation fluctuation selection information table (“no” in step S372) used when no reach effect is made (step S372). Non-reach distribution table). The fluctuation distribution table at the start of the fluctuation set in the fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command includes a reach or non-reach distribution table in addition to the three distribution tables described above. The reach or non-reach distribution table has a hold (startup memory) having a reach determination random number that may change the reach determination result as to whether or not to perform a reach effect when the number of retained balls changes between the time of pre-reading and the start of fluctuation. ) Is a table set for ()).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81, a description will be given of a merit of transmitting the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command as one of the prefetch commands. FIG. 81 is an example of a simplified flowchart in which (A) the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the above-described variation distribution table, and (B) is based on the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. It is an example of the reach execution availability table.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (A), in the variation pattern selection determination process, a jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination random number, and if a jackpot occurs, a jackpot distribution table is set. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot determination is out of order, the reach determination is performed using the reach determination random number. In the reach determination, the reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach determination random number is smaller than the comparison value (reach threshold), and the non-reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach determination random number is larger than the comparison value. Is set. Thereafter, the effect mode is determined from the variation pattern random number 1 using the set table, and the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern random number 2 in the effect mode.

  In the reach determination, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the comparison value (reach threshold) fluctuates according to the number of reserved balls at the time of the determination. Here, it is assumed that the comparison value when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is four is 10, and the comparative value is added by 10 each time the number of reserved balls decreases by one. In this case, if the reach determination random number is 0 to 9, the reach distribution table is set regardless of whether the number of reserved balls is 0 to 4. However, when the reach determination random number is 10 to 49, the result of the reach determination differs depending on the number of retained balls, so that either the reach distribution table or the non-reach distribution table is set. When the reach determination random number is 50 or more, the non-reach distribution table is always set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Therefore, the mode value of the fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command is “01H” when the jackpot determination result is a big hit, “02H” when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9 in the case of a big hit, and the reach determination random number. Is set to "03H" when the number is 10 to 49, and "04H" is set when the reach determination random number is 50 or more.

  As described above, by transmitting the fluctuation distribution table information pre-read command from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the time of pre-reading, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform the pre-reading and the start of the fluctuation with respect to the hold of the mode value “03H”. It is possible to execute the look-ahead effect control in consideration that the result of the reach determination may be different when the number of reserved balls fluctuates. If the mode value of the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command is “03H” in the storage prefetch process (FIG. 80), the process of setting the hold command reference value when there is prefetch in step S280 is not performed. The state in which the pending command reference value when there is no pre-reading in S242 may be maintained. That is, the main control MPU 4100a performs pre-read determination but does not transmit the pre-read determination result information to the peripheral control board 4140. In this case, a special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command of "no prefetch" is transmitted to the peripheral control board. As a result, the look-ahead effect control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be simplified, and the control load can be reduced.

  As described above, the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead command (special symbol 2 memory look-ahead command) transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board when a game ball is won to the upper starting port 2101 (lower starting port 2102) is held. Information on whether or not to perform a prefetch effect (“prefetch” or “no prefetch”) is included together with the ball count information. Then, only in the case of "pre-reading", the symbol type pre-reading command, the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command, the fluctuation type pre-reading command and the fluctuation distribution table information pre-reading command are transmitted, and in the case of "no pre-reading", these pre-reading commands are not transmitted. . The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 receives the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead command (special symbol 2 memory look-ahead command) transmitted at the time of the start-up winning, and does not wait for the reception of another look-ahead command. It can be determined whether or not it is an execution target. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command of "prefetch available" (special symbol 2 memory look-ahead command) (when the specific game information is received), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives another special look-ahead command or a special figure. After performing a process (first pre-processing) of setting a prefetching effect execution flag (step S1408 of the received command analysis process, FIG. 48) to satisfy the execution condition of the prefetching effect, a special figure prefetching effect control process (FIG. 42, a second pre-processing) to execute a prefetch effect. Further, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the special symbol 1 storage prefetch command of “no prefetching” (special symbol 2 storage prefetch command), the peripheral control MPU 4150a can recognize that the prefetch command is not transmitted later. Can be immediately determined without waiting for the reception of the pre-reading command (not to set the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag). That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure pre-reading effect control processing (FIG. 70), which is the second pre-processing, without executing the first pre-processing. Since it has not been performed ("No" in step S2001), the special figure prefetching effect control process ends without executing the prefetching effect.

  If the main control board 4100 does not perform the pre-reading determination (if a “no pre-reading” command is received), the peripheral control board 4140 needs commands (symbol type pre-reading command, fluctuation Since the pattern prefetch command, the fluctuation type prefetch command and the fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command) are not transmitted, the command transmitted at the time of starting opening winning (prefetch) is simplified, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the prefetch effect. Such erroneous control can be prevented from occurring. In addition, as described later, the main control board 4100 having a backup function can transmit pre-reading presence / absence information to the peripheral control board 4140 with respect to a failure of a pre-reading effect that can occur in the progress of a game, so that an appropriate pre-reading effect can be obtained. Implementation can be facilitated. Note that the condition for setting “no prefetching” in the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetching command (that is, the condition that the main control board 4100 prohibits prefetching) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The symbol type look-ahead command transmitted at the time of starting opening prize (at the time of pre-reading) sets a different mode value for each specific big hit type for a specific big hit (first specific result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. A non-specific big hit (second specific result), which is a so-called small hit without operation of the device, is set to a common mode value regardless of the type of the non-specific big hit. That is, when the pre-read determination result is the specific jackpot (first specific result), the main control board 4100 transmits a command (first specific information) whose mode value is set so as to specify the type of the specific jackpot. However, if the prefetch determination result is a non-specified jackpot (second specified result), a command (second specified information) whose mode value is unified so that the non-specified jackpot type cannot be specified is transmitted. Then, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command transmitted at the start of the change, a different mode value is set for each of the non-specific jackpot types. As a result, the type of the small hit, which is a so-called non-special big hit, cannot be grasped even by the peripheral control board 4140 until the start of the change. There is no risk of being read. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect that appropriately increases the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  For example, a large winning opening is opened upon a small hit, and a V-zone winning structure of two kinds of feathers in which a big hit occurs by a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V zone) in the big winning opening is provided. In pachinko gaming machines, the ease of winning a game ball in a specific area varies depending on the type of small hit. That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit can be derived according to the type of the small hit. Further, since the type of the big hit that is derived according to the type of the small hit is different, the privilege (the number of times of shortening of time, etc.) that the player can acquire is different. Therefore, the small hit type information becomes more important for the player. When performing a look-ahead effect that allows the type of small hit to be grasped in such a pachinko gaming machine, the player performs a distinction according to the type of small hit, and can easily aim for a big hit or a specific privilege. . Therefore, by preventing the prefetching effect according to the small hit type from being executed, no predictable element (information) is given to the player until the fluctuation starts. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[19-1-2. Prohibition conditions for prefetch judgment]
FIG. 82 is an example of a table showing conditions for prohibiting read-ahead by the main control board 4100 of the modified example (A), and (B) is a diagram illustrating the effect of prohibiting pre-read at the time of state transition.

  In the above-described memory prefetching process (FIG. 80), when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different between the timing of the start winning of the game ball and the timing when the variation is actually started (“yes” in step S244), or If the table does not change and the prefetch determination prohibition period is set (“yes” in step S246), the prefetch determination is prohibited. When the prefetch determination is prohibited, "no prefetch" is set in the special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), when the table for selecting the variation pattern is different (“yes” in step S244), specifically, the probability state at the time of the start winning is the probability at the start of the variation. The state may be different from the state, or the time-saving state at the time of the start winning may become a non-time-saving state at the start of the change, and the like. This indicates that (number of games) falls within four times. In this case, the prefetch determination is prohibited regardless of the type of the special symbol.

  When the pre-reading determination prohibition period is present (“yes” in step S246), the game state when the game ball is awarded to the upper starting port (special figure 1 starting port) 2101 is the time reduction state or the operation of the condition device. This shows a case where the game state is a big hitting game state, or a case where the game state when a game ball is awarded to the lower starting port (starting port for special figure 2) 2102 is a non-time saving state or a big hitting game state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game ball prize (occurrence of the special symbol 2 holding) to the lower starting port (special figure 2 starting port) 2102 is limited to the time saving state, the lower starting port (special figure 2). When the game state when the game ball is awarded to the (starting port) 2102 is a non-time saving state (a state not a time saving state), the prefetch determination is prohibited. In addition, even if the pre-reading determination is made for the special symbol hold generated during the big hit game, the special (low) probability state and the non-saving time state are set during the big hit game irrespective of the previous game state. There is a high possibility that the game state is different from the game state when the hold is exhausted (the game state after the big hit game), and there is a concern that the accuracy of the pre-read determination may be reduced. For this reason, even when the gaming state to the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 when a game ball is won (when a special symbol is held) is a big hit game, the prefetch determination is prohibited.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (B), when the state A shifts to the state B triggered by the 100 times of the fluctuation digestion, the number of times the state A is maintained (the number of remaining fluctuations) becomes four (97 in the state A). At the time of the start of the second change), the prefetch determination is prohibited. Then, the period from the transition from the state A to the state B is defined as a prefetch determination inhibition period.

  Winning 1 that occurred immediately before the start of the 97th change in the state A is consumed as the 97th change if there is no hold in all of the hold memories 1 to 4, but the hold is stored in the hold memories 1 to 3. If there is, it is stored as the second to fourth hold in the hold storage 2 to 4 areas, respectively. And it is digested as the 98th to 100th variation. If a hold is stored in all of the hold storage areas 1 to 4, an overflow prize is won and not stored.

  Thus, the winning 1 is changed in the state A even when the change is slowly completed. If there is no state transition between the time of winning and the start of change, the pre-read information (big hit determination result, change pattern, etc.) determined at the time of winning is not different from the change information determined at the start of change. However, the prize 2 that occurs after the prize 1, that is, after the start of the 97th change in the state A, may be changed in state between the time of the prize and the start of the change depending on the number of reserved balls at the time of the prize occurrence. . If the number of reserved balls at the time of winning 2 is three and winning 2 is stored as the fourth hold in the hold storage 4 area, the state A at the time of winning, but the state B at the start of fluctuation. Becomes In this case, since the pre-read information determined at the time of winning and the variation information determined at the start of the variation have different states premised on various determinations, they may not be the same. In particular, when the state A is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the state B, in spite of the fact that a high expectation effect has been performed in the prefetching effect based on the prefetch information, the fluctuation actually has a low expectation value, An event may occur that greatly discourages the player.

  Therefore, a period during which a state transition can occur between the time of winning and the start of change depending on the number of balls reserved at the time of winning, that is, from the start of the 97th change to the 100th change in the state A, and from the state A to the state The pre-reading is prohibited during the period before shifting to B. In this way, the prefetch effect is not performed when the period until the table for selecting the variation pattern is changed becomes a predetermined period (here, the remaining number of maintenance times of the state is 4 variations). Thereby, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the execution of the prefetching effect that is excessive (deviation) compared to the actual fluctuation, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the prefetching effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  The state transition includes transition from a high-probability state to a normal probability state by digestion of ST times, transition from a time-saving state to a non-time-saving state by digestion of time-saving times, state transition by an effect mode transition according to the number of times of change, and the like. Can be If it is possible that the table for selecting the variation pattern changes between the winning (the pre-reading) and the start of the variation due to these state transitions, the main control MPU 4100a wins the peripheral control MPU 4150a without performing the pre-reading determination. Only the number of reserved balls of the special symbol corresponding to the starting opening and the information without pre-reading are transmitted.

  The main control MPU 4100a performs such read-ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition. For example, when a power failure occurs during a time-saving state and power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a conventionally determines the number of remaining time-saving times. Since it is not possible, after the power is restored, it becomes possible to execute the forbidden look-ahead effect. Specifically, as described above, the table for selecting the variation pattern differs between the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state. The number of times of change (number of times of saving) in the time saving state is counted by the main control MPU 4100a, but the information of the number of times of saving is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 side. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the information of the time saving state, but cannot grasp the progress of the time saving state (remaining number of time savings). For this reason, when the number of remaining time savings before the state transition from the time saving state to the non-time saving state becomes four or less, even if an attempt is made to prohibit the pre-reading effect, the determination cannot be made, and the time saving state ends after power is restored. Until then, I had to prohibit the look-ahead production. On the other hand, in the present invention, the main control MPU 4100a performs read-ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition. The main control MPU 4100a does not perform the pre-reading determination when the number of remaining time savings before the state transition from the time saving state to the non-time saving state becomes four or less (a predetermined number of times). It is not transmitted to the control board 4140. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not perform a prefetch effect. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute the look-ahead effect during the time-saving state according to the command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a, even if the power is restored during the time-saving state and the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the period in which the pre-reading effect is not performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In the description of the fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command (FIGS. 78 and 81), when the mode value is “03H”, the result of the reach determination is that if the number of reserved balls fluctuates between the time of the pre-read and the start of the fluctuation. It has been mentioned above that the table may be different, that is, the table for selecting the variation pattern may be changed. Whether or not there is a possibility that the table for selecting the variation pattern may change according to the result of the reach determination can be determined by the reach determination random number and the upper and lower limit values of the comparison value used for the reach determination. The comparison value is set from the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls. If the special symbol reach probability is determined in advance, these values can be obtained without setting the fluctuation distribution table information look-ahead command by the look-ahead determination. In such a case, before executing the prefetching determination (steps S248 to S280) in the storage prefetching process (FIG. 80), it may be determined whether or not to perform the prefetching. When there is a possibility that either the reach or the non-reach distribution table is selected, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the tables for selecting the variation patterns are different (“yes” in step 244).

  Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention has a configuration in which the special symbol 2 hold is preferentially digested over the special symbol 1 hold, and each of the pachinko game machines 1 can hold and hold up to four upper limit pieces. Is prohibited four times or less, the prefetching is prohibited, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of times of the determination threshold value (here, four times) may be changed according to the specification applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The above-described control that does not execute the special figure prefetch determination performed on the main control board side may be control that does not perform the special figure prefetch effect on the peripheral control board side described later.

[19-2. Peripheral control board side control (prohibition of special figure prefetching effect)]
Next, a control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure prefetching effect will be described.

  In the above description, the special figure read-ahead prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has been described. However, the pre-read prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a alone is not sufficient to prevent the occurrence of a problem related to the pre-reading effect. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers power from a power failure, the main control MPU 4100a can recognize the power recovery time information (game backup information), but the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot. When the suspension is present at the time of the power interruption, the main control MPU 4100a transmits information on the number of reserved balls to the peripheral control board 4140. Command contents). Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot execute the look-ahead effect with respect to the suspension at the time of power failure that was in the suspension state at the time of power failure. Further, the pre-read information on the suspension generated after the power recovery is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a. However, there is concern about the execution of the pre-reading effect of the suspension generated after the power recovery until all the power-off reservations are exhausted.

  For example, when the probability state after power restoration is the high probability state and the suspension at the time of power interruption includes a suspension to become a low probability state, the main control MPU 4100a performs a prefetch determination of the suspension occurring after the power restoration. It is executed in the high-probability state, but the probability state changes from the high-probability state to the low-probability state due to the execution of the fluctuation of the corresponding suspension. That is, when the hold that has occurred after the restoration of the power is restored, the state is a low probability state. Therefore, even if the pre-reading effect of the hold that occurred after the restoration of the power supply is a high expectation effect, the variable effect of the hold may be an unusual effect, which significantly disappoints the player's expectation, and There is a possibility that the interest may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the first modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the pre-reading effect even after receiving the special figure pre-read command until the predetermined number of times (eight times) of the change is started after the power-on including the power recovery. The predetermined number is the upper limit of the number of special symbols 1 and the number of special symbols 2 held. Further, as described above, the prefetch effect is also prohibited when the mode value of the received prefetch variation distribution table information command is “03H”. In the following, with reference to FIG. 83 and FIG. 84, the prefetch effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the first modification will be described.

  Further, as a second modified example, if there is an unknown hold at power-on (hold at power interruption), the peripheral control MPU 4150a prohibits the prefetch effect even if it receives the special figure prefetch command until the unknown hold is exhausted. I do. Further, in the second modification, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives not only the gaming state but also the special pattern 1 (2) storage prefetch command at the time of prefetching of "no prefetching", the suspension of the command is treated as unknown suspension, and similarly, In this case, the look-ahead effect is prohibited until the unknown reservation is exhausted. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 85 to FIG. 88, the prefetch effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the second modification will be described.

[19-2-1. Modification Example 1 (Read-Ahead of Predetermined Number of Variations at Power-on)
First, a first modification will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a received command analysis process according to the first modification. Note that the same processes as those of the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 48) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch inhibition count process in the received command analysis process according to the first modification.

  As described above, in the received command analysis processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores various commands from the main control board 4100 in the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit receiving ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. Remember. Then, the command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (step S1402), and processing according to the read command is executed.

  In the first modification, when the read command is the power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a post-input eight-variation prefetch prohibition flag and a flag corresponding to other commands ( Step S1422), and terminates the received command analysis processing. After the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, first, when the power of the main control board 4100 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a transmits to the peripheral control board 4140 various commands according to the game backup information (start of production and instructions of the game state). . Therefore, after the power is turned on, the first command received by the peripheral control board 4140 is the power-on state command.

  Then, when the read command is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a prefetch inhibition count process (step S1430). After that, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

  Here, the prefetch inhibition count processing will be described with reference to FIG. The look-ahead prohibition count process is a process for setting whether or not the special symbol variation display game has been started to be executed eight times after the power is turned on, even when a special figure look-ahead command is received.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the post-input 8 fluctuation prefetch prohibition flag is set (step S1431). If the flag is set (Yes in step S1431), “8” is set to the subtraction type prefetch inhibition count provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S1432). Thereafter, the post-insertion 8 variable prefetch prohibition flag is released (step S1433). As a result, the setting of the prefetch inhibition count is completed at the start of the first special symbol variation display game after the power is turned on.

  If the post-input 8 fluctuation prefetch prohibition flag has not been set (No in step S1431), the peripheral control MPU 4150a proceeds to the process of step S1434 described later.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the prefetch inhibition count is “0” (Step S1434). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1434), the prefetch prohibition count is updated by subtracting 1 (step S1435), and the prefetch prohibition count process ends. On the other hand, if the prefetch inhibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1434), the prefetch inhibition count processing ends.

The description will be given along the passage of time. After the power is turned on, at the start of the first change, the processing of Yes → Step S1432 → Step S1433 is executed in step S1431, and a prefetch inhibition count for counting the number of changes after the power is turned on is set. Thereafter, in step S1434, No → the processing of step S1435 is executed, and the prefetch inhibition count becomes “7”. Thereafter, at the start of the second variation, the processing of No in step S1431 → No in step S1434 → the processing of step S1435 is executed, and the prefetch inhibition count becomes “6”. The same processing is repeated at the start of the third to eighth fluctuations, and the prefetch inhibition count becomes “0” at the start of the eighth fluctuation. Therefore, at the start of the subsequent fluctuation, the process of No in step S1431 and the process of Yes in step S1434 are repeated.

  In this way, in the prefetch inhibition count processing, by associating the value of the prefetch inhibition count with the number of fluctuations after turning on the power and linking them, it is possible to determine whether or not the state is the prefetch inhibition state from the value of the prefetch inhibition count. .

  Referring back to FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the read command is a special figure pre-reading production command (a pre-reading special pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command, a pre-reading pattern type pre-reading command, a pre-reading variable pattern pre-reading command, a pre-reading variable pattern pre-reading command). If the command is a pre-reading variation distribution table information command (Yes in step S1407), an ambiguous command (reach or non-reach distribution table) with a status value of “69H” and a mode value of “03H” is used as the special figure pre-reading effect command. Is determined (step S1441). If the ambiguous command has been received (Yes in step S1441), the pre-reading effect is not executed, and the received command analysis process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received the ambiguous command, that is, has received the pre-reading variation distribution table information command of another mode value (No in step S1441), the pre-reading prohibition count is not counted. It is determined whether it is “0” (step S1442). If the prefetch prohibition count is not “0” (No in step S1442), the fluctuation has not been started eight times after the power is turned on (prefetch prohibition state), so that the prefetch effect is not executed. Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends.

  When the prefetch inhibition count is “0” (Yes in step S1442), the peripheral control MPU 4150a instructs the execution of the prefetch effect because the start of the change eight times after the power is turned on has been completed. The figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S1408), and the received command analysis processing ends. When the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prefetching effect in the special figure prefetching effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 70) executed in the peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to perform

  As described above, in the prefetching effect prohibition control of the first modification, the prefetching effect is not performed until the predetermined number of times of change, which is the upper limit of suspension, is executed after the power is turned on. For this reason, the suspension at the time of the power failure does not affect the prefetch effect of the suspension occurring after the power restoration. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-described problem, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to provide an appropriate look-ahead effect. In addition, since the predetermined number of times is set as the total upper limit number of the special symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold, the prefetch effect can be permitted after the hold at the time of the power interruption is surely exhausted (change start).

  Note that the prefetch effect prohibition control is always performed after the power is turned on, but the above-described problem occurs when the power is turned on due to the power recovery from the power failure. It does not occur at the time of normal power-on such as executing the RAM clear on the main control board 4100. The main control board 4100 sends a command that distinguishes both, but the peripheral control board 4140 does not distinguish between the two in order to simplify the processing. However, prohibiting the pre-reading effect until the time of clearing the RAM where no problem occurs may also cause a decrease in the interest of the game. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 may determine whether or not the RAM is being cleared, and if the RAM is being cleared, a prefetch effect may be permitted. By canceling the unnecessary look-ahead effect prohibition in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to provide an appropriate look-ahead effect.

  For example, when the probability state after power restoration is the high probability state and the suspension at the time of power interruption includes a suspension to become a low probability state, the main control MPU 4100a performs a prefetch determination of the suspension occurring after the power restoration. It is executed in the high-probability state, but the probability state changes from the high-probability state to the low-probability state due to the execution of the fluctuation of the corresponding suspension. That is, when the hold that has occurred after the restoration of the power is restored, the state is a low probability state. Therefore, even if the pre-reading effect of the hold that occurred after the restoration of the power supply is a high expectation effect, the variable effect of the hold may be an unusual effect, which significantly disappoints the player's expectation, and There is a possibility that the interest may be reduced.

[19-2-2. Modification 2 (read-ahead prohibited until unknown pending digestion)]
Next, Modification 2 will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the received command analysis processing according to the second modification. Note that the same processes as those of the received command analysis process of the first modification (FIG. 83) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process according to the second modification. FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the unknown count process in the received command analysis process according to the second modification. FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special figure prefetch execution determination processing in the received command analysis processing according to the second modification.

  As described above, in the second modification, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading without pre-reading from the main control board 4100 together with the power-on hold (power-off hold) of the first modification. The hold when the command is received is treated as “unknown hold” in which the look-ahead information for executing the look-ahead effect is unknown. The prefetching effect is prohibited until the unknown reservation is exhausted.

  With reference to FIG. 85, the received command analysis processing of the second modification will be described. First, when the command read in the processing of step S1402 is a power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets a read-ahead prohibition (unknown flag) due to unknown suspension setting. The processing is executed (step S1450). Thereafter, a flag corresponding to the other command is set (step S1423), and the received command analysis processing ends.

  Here, the insertion unknown flag setting process (step S1450) will be described with reference to FIG. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a stores the special figure 1 reserved number (unknown reserved number) and the special 2 reserved number (unknown reserved number) in the subtraction method special 1 unknown count and special 2 unknown count provided for each special symbol in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Is set (step S1451). In the case of power recovery after power failure, the number of suspensions at power failure is set as power recovery time information (backup game information).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether the set special unknown count is “0” (Step S1452). If the special 1 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1452), a special 1 unknown flag indicating prohibition of special-ready prefetching effect is set (step S1453), and the process proceeds to step S1454. I do. On the other hand, if the special 1 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1452), it means that there was no special 1 unknown hold at the time of power failure, or it was not power recovery but initial startup. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1454 without setting the flag.

  Similarly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the set special 2 unknown count is “0” (Step S1454). If the special 2 unknown count is not “0” (No in step S 1454), a special 2 unknown flag indicating prohibition of the pre-reading effect of special 2 suspension is set (step S 1455), and the input unknown flag setting process is performed. To end. On the other hand, if the special 2 unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1454), it means that there is no special 2 unknown suspension at the time of power supply, or that it is an initial start, not a power recovery. Therefore, the flag is not set, and the closing unknown flag setting process ends.

  In this way, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a prefetching effect prohibition setting (unknown flag set) is performed for each special symbol based on the presence or absence of unknown suspension according to the state at the time of the power-on. Specifically, when there is a suspension at the time of a power failure, a look-ahead effect prohibition setting of a special symbol to be held at the time of a power failure is performed.

  Referring back to FIG.

  Next, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes an unknown count process (step S1460). After that, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis processing ends.

  Here, the unknown count process (step S1460) will be described with reference to FIG. The unknown count process is a process of determining whether to cancel prohibition of read-ahead (clear the unknown flag) by exhausting the unknown suspension. More specifically, the unknown count of the special symbol to be changed is subtracted, and the determination of whether or not to suspend unknown determination (release determination of prohibition effect prohibition) is performed. .

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the unknown flag of the special symbol to be changed is set (step S1461). If the unknown flag of the target special map is not set (No in step S1461), the unknown count process ends.

  On the other hand, when the unknown flag of the target special map is set (Yes in step S1461), the peripheral control MPU 4150a updates the unknown count of the target special map by one (step S1462), and updates the target special map. It is determined whether the unknown count in the figure is “0” (step S1463). If the unknown count is not “0” (No in step S1463), the unknown count process ends. On the other hand, if the unknown count is “0” (Yes in step S1463), the unknown flag of the target special figure is cleared (step S1464), and the unknown count process ends.

  As described above, in the unknown count process, the unknown count value and the number of fluctuations until the unknown hold is exhausted (the number of balls held when receiving the unknown hold information) are linked and linked, and the unknown count indicating the presence or absence of the unknown hold is linked. When the value of “.” Becomes “0”, the unknown flag is released. As a result, in the special figure prefetch execution determination processing (step S1470 in FIG. 85, FIG. 88) described later, it is possible to determine whether or not the state of the unknown flag is the prefetch prohibition state, and determine whether or not the execution of the held prefetching effect has occurred. To be able to.

  Referring back to FIG.

  By the way, in the second modification, not only the suspension at the time of power failure but also the suspension when the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command without pre-reading is received from the main control board 4100 is treated as “unknown suspension”. Therefore, the setting of the unknown flag due to the occurrence of the unknown suspension (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) is performed not only at the time of turning on the power but also at the time of pre-reading of the hold (the game ball winning in the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102) that occurs after the power is turned on. This is also performed when a command is received.

  If the command read in the process of step S1402 is a prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command indicating the number of balls to be retained at the time of the start opening winning and the presence or absence of the prefetch information of the generated suspension, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines ( In step S1469, a special figure prefetch execution determination process is executed (step S1470). In the special figure pre-reading execution determination processing, the setting of an unknown flag for each special symbol (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) according to the presence or absence of the pre-reading information of the received command, and the execution of the pre-reading effect according to the state of the pre-reading information and the unknown flag Set flags.

  Here, the details of the special figure prefetch execution determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the received prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is a command for the special symbol 1 (step S1471). If the command is a special symbol 1 command (Yes in step S1471), it is determined whether or not the command is "pre-read" (step S1472a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the head of the mode value of the received pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is “1”.

  If the received prefetch special symbol 1 storage prefetch command is not “prefetch available” (No in step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads other prefetch commands (the prefetch symbol type prefetch command, the prefetch variation pattern). Since the pre-reading command, the pre-reading fluctuation type pre-reading command, and the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command) are unknown pending that are not transmitted from the main control board 4100, the special 1 unknown flag for prohibiting the special 1 pre-reading effect is set (step S1473a). At this time, the number of reserved balls of the pre-read special symbol 1 storage pre-read command is set to the special 1 unknown count (step S1474a), and the special figure pre-read execution determination processing ends. If the special 1 unknown flag has already been set, the setting state is confirmed in the processing of step S1473a, and the processing of rewriting the value of the special 1 unknown count to a new value of the number of reserved balls in the processing of step S1474a. Do. It is updated so that the digestion of the new unknown reservation in the memory order always becomes the condition for canceling the look-ahead effect.

  On the other hand, when the received prefetch special symbol 1 storage prefetch command is “prefetch available” (Yes in step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a transmits another prefetch command from the main control board 4100. Then, it is determined whether or not “6903H” (ambiguous command) is received as the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command (step S1475a). This is the same as the process of step S1441 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 83) of the first modification. If the ambiguous command has been received, that is, if the pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command of “6903H” has been received (Yes in step S1475a), the special figure pre-reading execution determination process ends.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4150a has not received the ambiguous command, that is, has received the pre-reading variation distribution table information command of a mode value other than “03H” (No in step S1475a), It is determined whether the 1 unknown flag is set (step S1476a). If the special 1 unknown flag is set (Yes in step S1476a), the special 1 prefetch effect execution is prohibited, and the special figure prefetch execution determination processing ends.

  If the special 1 unknown flag is not set (No in step S1476a), the peripheral control MPU 4150a indicates that the execution of the special 1 prefetching effect is permitted, so that the special figure prefetching effect of instructing the execution of the special 1 prefetching effect is performed. The flag is set (step S1377a), and the special figure prefetch execution determination processing ends. When the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the special figure prefetching effect in the special figure prefetching effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 70) executed in the peripheral control unit regular process (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to perform

  In the process of step S1471, when the received prefetch special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command is not targeted for the special symbol 1, that is, the command is directed to the special symbol 2 (No in step S1471). The processing of steps S1472b to S1277b to be executed is the same as the processing of steps S1472a to S1377a for the special symbol 1 described above, except that the target is changed to the special symbol 2.

  In the special figure pre-reading execution determination process, when the pre-reading special pattern 1 (2) storage pre-reading command without pre-reading is received, the unknown flag of the target special design is set, and the target special pattern is set until the corresponding unknown pending is exhausted. Prohibit the prefetching of special symbols. Therefore, even if the pre-reading special symbol at pre-reading 1 (2) storage pre-fetch command is received, the pre-reading effect is not executed while the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set. Also, when the received prefetching fluctuation distribution table information command is an ambiguous command, the prefetching effect is not executed.

  As described above, in the prefetch effect prohibition control according to the second modification, the suspension at the time of power interruption received as the power restoration information when the power is turned on is set to “unknown suspension”, and the prefetch effect is not executed even when the power is restored. In addition, when there is an unknown hold (that is, when there is a hold in which the prefetch information (specific game information) is not transmitted and the peripheral control MPU 4150a cannot specify the prefetch determination result), the special symbol to be processed until the unknown hold is exhausted. Does not perform a look-ahead effect. If the unknown reservation is exhausted, the prefetching effect is permitted. For this reason, the suspension at the time of power interruption (unknown suspension) does not affect the pre-reading effect after the power recovery. Further, since the prohibition period of the pre-reading effect is set for each special symbol according to the number of unknown reservations, more appropriate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a pre-reading effect and a decrease in interest in the game.

  Also, when a prefetched special symbol 1 (2) storage prefetch command without prefetching is received from the main control board 4100, the corresponding hold is set to “unknown hold”, and the prefetch in the target special symbol until the unknown hold is exhausted. Since the effect is prohibited, by executing the pre-reading effect prohibition control together with the pre-reading judgment prohibiting control at the time of the state transition by the main control board 4100, a more appropriate pre-reading effect can be provided to the player. For example, when shifting from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state at the time of the above-mentioned state shift, if the number of times the time-saving state is maintained becomes four or less fluctuations, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits the prefetch determination. For this reason, the special symbol 2 suspension generated during the prefetch determination prohibition period is not prefetched, and is recognized by the peripheral control MPU 4150a as unknown suspension. Therefore, until the special symbol 2 suspension (upper limit of four) generated during the time-saving state with the remaining four fluctuations is exhausted, the pre-reading effect in the special symbol 2 is prohibited in the non-hour-saving state after the state transition. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the special symbol 2 preferential digestion, the special symbol 2 of unknown reservation is digested before the special symbol 1 after the state transition. In this way, the hold that occurred during the four changes immediately before the transition state is not set as the target of the prefetch determination on the main control board 4100 side, and the peripheral control board 4140 also receives the hold that can be prefetched until the hold is exhausted. Also, by not making the object of the pre-reading effect, it is possible to reliably prohibit the execution of the pre-reading effect during a period in which a problem easily occurs. Note that the hold that occurs in the non-time saving state after the state transition is mainly the special symbol 1 hold. At this time, the pre-reading effect prohibition control is executed for each special symbol, so that the special symbol 2 is reserved. Therefore, the execution of the prefetching effect on the special symbol 1 side in the non-time saving state is not prevented.

  Further, in the second modification, the look-ahead effect prohibition control for an unknown hold other than the hold at the time of power interruption is performed at a timing when the number of holds changes. Specifically, the pre-reading effect prohibition is started at the timing of receiving the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) stored pre-reading command (unknown command) without pre-reading, and the unknown hold corresponding to the unknown command is exhausted and the fluctuation start is started. It is released at the timing of performing. In this way, when an unknown hold occurs in the hold storage area, the look-ahead effect is prohibited, and at the same time as the last unknown hold is consumed, the look-ahead effect is permitted. Therefore, more accurate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed, and a decrease in the pre-reading effect and game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Also, as described in the first modification, the prefetch effect prohibition control at the time of turning on the power need not be performed when the RAM is cleared. In this case, a judgment process for confirming the reception of the RAM clear command is added before the process of S1451 in the above described unknown flag setting process (FIG. 86), and after the RAM clear command is received (when the RAM is cleared), The process of setting the unknown flag at the time of closing may be ended without executing the process of (1). Normally, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the RAM clear command, but does not read it from the received command storage area 4150 cac in order to share the control when the RAM is cleared and when the power is turned on. As described above, when the RAM is cleared, control is performed such that the prefetching effect is permitted, so that unnecessary prefetching effect prohibition can be eliminated, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game and providing an appropriate prefetching effect. .

  In the first and second modifications, an ambiguous command (a pre-reading fluctuation distribution table information command with a mode value of “03H” indicating a reach or non-reach distribution table) is received for the occurrence of a hold with pre-reading. If it is, it is not the target of the prefetching effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the second modification, the prefetch effect may be prohibited when a non-specific hit (small hit) occurs in the high probability state. Specifically, in the above-described special figure prefetch execution determination processing (FIG. 88), when a special pattern 1 storage prefetch command with prefetch is received (Yes in step S1472a), a small hit (mode value “50H”) is received. )), A process for determining whether or not the symbol type prefetch command (status value “66H”) has been received, and a process for determining whether or not the current probability state is the high probability state when the command has been received are added. When the command is received and the command is received and the state is in the high probability state, the processes in steps S1473a and S1474a may be performed. Here, at the stage of pre-reading, the small hit type information is not transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The small hit types include those that return the high probability state to the low probability state (normal probability state). If a prefetching effect is performed even after a small hit holding that induces a transition to such a low probability state occurs, a large hit determination occurs when the prefetching occurs in the high probability state when the prefetching effect is performed after the small hit holding. At the start of the change in the low probability state in which the suspension has been triggered by the small hit, an event of determining a deviation may occur. At this time, if a hit-determination effect is performed in the pre-reading effect, the actual fluctuation result (outlier) not only remarkably discourages the player's expectations but also may cause a distrust of the game effect. Therefore, even if the prefetch command with prefetch is received, if the symbol type prefetch command “6650H” of the small hit is received in the high probability state, at the start of the fluctuation that the result of the small hit is determined (holding digestion) Prohibition of pre-reading production until). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced and the player to be distrusted with the effect due to the execution of the excessive (wrong) prefetching effect with respect to the actual fluctuation result, and the prefetching effect. Reliability can be increased.

[19-2-3. At the start of the big hit game (pre-read information clear)]
By the way, the hold that occurs during the big hit is prohibited because the main control MPU 4100a does not perform the prefetch determination, but the prefetch effect is prohibited. However, the hold that has already occurred and stored at the start of the big hit depends on the game state at the time of occurrence. The peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform a prefetch effect by having prefetch information by the prefetch determination. However, since the game state after the jackpot that has been used up at the start of the big hit (change start) may be different from the game state at the time of the pre-reading determination (the change pattern table is different), the hold at the start of the big hit is On the other hand, there is a possibility that an appropriate look-ahead effect may not be obtained. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a holds the hold information of the prefetch command received from the main control board 4100 for the hold at the start of the big hit, and clears the prefetch effect information set based on the hold information at the start of the big hit. In this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which an appropriate prefetch effect is not performed. Hereinafter, the control processing by the peripheral control MPU 4150a will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit display process. The big hit display process is a process (step S1700) executed in the above-described effect control process (FIG. 49).

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a jackpot opening display process according to the jackpot start command (step S1710). Next, a display indicating that the big winning opening 2003 is opened is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and a big hit display process for performing a display effect (for example, a round display or the like) in a big hit game state is executed (step). S1720). After that, a big hit ending display process for performing an end effect of the big hit gaming state is executed (step S1730), and after the process selection flag is updated to “0” (step S1740), the big hit display process ends.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot opening display process. The big hit opening display process is a process (step S1710) executed in the above big hit display process (FIG. 89).

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the start flag is set (Step S1711). The start flag is a flag that is set when the jackpot opening command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received in the processing of step S1411 of the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 48). If the start flag has not been set (No in step S1711), the big hit opening display process ends.

  On the other hand, when the start flag is set (Yes in step S1711), the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the effect information corresponding to the pre-read command from the schedule data storage area 4150cae (predetermined storage area) in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (priority information). The notification mode is cleared (step S1712). The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the command received from the main control board 4100 are set. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the effect information stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Production control is performed. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the pre-reading effect information (advance notification mode) in a predetermined storage area to be identifiable (advance notification mode identifiable setting means), and sets the pre-notification mode on condition that the jackpot game is executed. It also has a function of setting to be unspecified (preliminary notification mode unspecified setting means). The effect information that is cleared here is set based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table when the prefetch command is received.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the effect information corresponding to the look-ahead command in the schedule data storage area 4150cae again based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table that are switched and set in response to the current big hit (step S1713). .

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the start flag (step S1714), executes a display setting process for setting an opening display such as a fanfare effect (step S1715), and ends the big hit opening display process. Thereafter, when the big hit symbol display command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received when the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, the next big hit display process (step S1720 in FIG. 89) is executed.

  As described above, in the big hit opening display process, the effect display indicating the start of the big hit is performed, and the prefetch effect information of the hold stored at the time of the start of the big hit changes from the game state at the time of occurrence of the hold to the big hit game state. Will be rewritten. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU 4150a deletes the prefetch effect information selected under the normal probability state at the time of occurrence of the hold, and re-reads the prefetch effect information under the high probability state that can be switched upon a big hit. Select again. The target of the effect information clearing process in step S1712 is the look-ahead effect information, and the hold information of the look-ahead command received from the main control board 4100 (the number of reserved balls, the presence / absence of the look-ahead, the symbol type, the variation pattern, the variation type) , Distribution table), it is possible to reset the effect information based on the hold information in the effect information setting process in the next step S1713. Note that the timing of resetting is not limited to the start of the big hit. For example, it may be set again before the jackpot round finalizing effect. This makes it possible to execute a prefetching effect appropriate for the situation with respect to the hold at the start of the big hit, and to suppress a decrease in the prefetching effect and the interest of the game.

  The target of the above-described effect information clearing process (step S1712) is not limited to the hold stored at the start of the big hit. Even when the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command with pre-reading is received from the main control board 4100 and other pre-reading commands are received, an abnormal change in the number of reservations When the number of pieces of hold information of the current reception is increased to four even though the number information is 0, the effect information of the hold stored at this time may be cleared. If an abnormality determination condition is provided and the hold stored when the condition is satisfied is subjected to the effect information clearing process (step S1712), it is possible to prevent in advance the failure of the look-ahead effect for the hold, and it is possible to appropriately perform the look-ahead. It leads to the provision of directing.

  Note that the above-described control that does not execute the special figure prefetch effect performed on the peripheral control board side may be control that does not perform the special figure prefetch determination on the main control board side.

[20. Transition to production mode]
By the way, in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIGS. 48, 83, and 85), when the command read in the processing of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), step S1404 is performed. The variation pattern reception flag is set in the processing of (1). Then, when the variation pattern reception flag is set, a decoration symbol variation start process (FIG. 52) for starting a special figure tuning effect including the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, based on the effect mode corresponding to the game state among the plurality, the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the hit information received from the main control board 4100 (stop design of decorative symbol, type of reach effect, The determination of whether or not to execute a notice effect, a notice effect mode, the presence or absence of an extended effect, etc.) are determined, and the effect of the effect pattern is executed as a special figure synchronized effect.

  Specifically, with reference to FIG. 91, an example of the effect transition in the probable change time saving state in which the number of time savings is given 64 times will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect transition in the probable change working hours state. When the game state enters the probable time-saving state, the special figure synchronizing production of the specific A effect mode is executed from 1 to 30 times of the time reduction, and the special figure of the specific B effect mode after 31 times of the time reduction. Synchronized production (probable change confirmation production) is executed. In the special figure synchronizing production in the specific A production mode, a continuous production is performed to determine whether or not the time-saving state is continued in fluctuations in which the number of time savings is 10, 20, or 30, and a normal production is performed in other fluctuations. Is done.

  At this time, the main control MPU 4100a manages the number of reductions in time, and sets a variation pattern (a normal production pattern, a continuous production pattern, a certain variation confirmation production pattern) according to the number of reductions in the variation pattern command. Specifically, the main control MPU 4100a first selects one table from a plurality of tables according to the number of times of saving time (number of times of executing the lottery game in the time saving state). At this time, the table to be selected differs depending on the number of times saved. Then, a variation pattern (game pattern) corresponding to the lottery game is selected from the selected table. As shown in FIG. 91, the variation patterns of 1 to 9 times, 11 to 19 times, and 21 to 29 times in the probable variation time reduction state are selected from a table in which a normal effect pattern is set, and 10 times , 20 times and 30 times are selected from the table in which the continuous effect pattern is set, and the change patterns after 31 time saving times are selected from the table in which the probable change confirmed effect pattern is set. Further, the continuous effect pattern includes a successful effect pattern in which the time reduction state continues and a failure effect pattern in which the time reduction state ends. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine and execute an effect corresponding to the number of time savings (the number of fluctuations) by following the received fluctuation pattern even if the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not manage the number of time savings (the number of fluctuations). Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute an appropriate effect at the time of power restoration even if data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as at the time of power failure. The effect mode of each effect differs depending on the effect mode set by the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In FIG. 91, the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects the effect mode in the specific A effect mode when the number of times of saving is 1 to 30, and selects the effect mode in the specific B effect mode after the number of times of saving 31.

  In the following, with reference to FIG. 92, a description will be given of the effect mode transition processing in which not only the effect determination but also the effect mode transition are executed based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect mode transition process executed by the peripheral control MPU 450a. The effect mode transition process is executed, for example, when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of the variation is received in the decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 46). The transition of the effect mode is exemplified by the transition from the specific A effect mode in FIG. 91 to the specific B effect mode.

  First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the effect mode is the specific A effect mode (step S1751). Here, the specific A effect mode is a time saving state, in which a continuous effect (success or failure) is executed at a predetermined number of times, and the continuous successful effect is executed three times. This is a production mode. If the current mode is not the specific A effect mode (No in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends the effect mode transition process.

  If the current mode is the specific A effect mode (Yes in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives a success command (variation pattern command) indicating a successful effect pattern from the continuous effect patterns from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1752). If the success command has not been received (No in step S1752), the effect mode transition processing ends.

  On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the success command (Yes in step S1752), the peripheral control MPU 4150a adds 1 to the count of the number of successes and updates (step S1753). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of successes after the update is three (step S1754). If the number of successes is not three (No in step S1754), the effect mode transition processing ends. If the number of successes is 3 (Yes in step S1754), the effect mode is shifted from the special A effect mode to the special B effect mode (step S1755). After that, the effect mode transition processing ends. Note that the count of the number of successes can be added during the special A effect mode, and is cleared when the special A effect mode ends.

  As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a switches the effect mode when receiving a predetermined number of specific variation pattern commands from the main control MPU 4100a, and switches to the specific game state (here, the time reduction state) according to the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 4100a. ), It is possible to appropriately determine the transition effects (normal effects, continuous success effects, and continuation failure effects) in a series of effect modes (specific A effect modes) without knowing the number of times of change. The peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine an appropriate effect based on a command received from the main control board 4100 where the game information is always backed up. It is possible to execute the appropriate effect at the time of electricity.

[21. Switching control of special figure prefetching effect]
In this case, if a start memory with a high expectation of a big hit is newly generated during the execution of the special figure look-ahead effect, the previously executed special figure look-ahead effect is newly added to the newly generated start memory. The control for switching (overwriting) to the special figure look-ahead effect based on is described. Note that description of contents overlapping with the above description is omitted.

[21-1. Control on main control board side (switch control of special figure prefetching effect)
As described in the memory look-ahead process (FIG. 24), in the present embodiment, a command (special symbol) required to execute the special figure look-ahead effect is not a pre-read determination prohibition period when a game ball is started and won. Command for specifying the number of hold, special figure variation pattern command, etc.). Even in the case of performing the switching control of the special figure pre-reading effect, similar to the storage pre-reading process shown in FIG. Judgment is performed, and a command necessary for execution of the special figure prefetch effect is generated and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. In this way, the main control board 4100 constitutes the first look-ahead determining means for first determining whether or not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect after the start winning.

[21-2. Control on peripheral control board side (switch control of special figure prefetching effect)]
When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the command for executing the special figure prefetch effect from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 executes the special figure prefetch effect based on the content of the command and the execution state of the special figure prefetch effect.

  Also, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in addition to a special figure look-ahead effect that suggests a highly expected start-up memory, such as a normal look-ahead effect that changes the above-mentioned hold display, the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 displays A special figure look-ahead effect such as changing the background of an existing image (background look-ahead effect) or causing a character to appear independently of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (a character look-ahead effect) can be executed. The background look-ahead effect does not have to execute the effect by explicitly indicating a specific hold display, and any of the currently held start memories (including the start memory being executed) has a high expectation of a big hit. May be indicated. In the present embodiment, a look-ahead effect that changes the hold display of the look-ahead target (normal look-ahead effect, continuous look-ahead effect, and “hold-ahead look-ahead effect” together) and a background look-ahead effect that changes the background are executed. Examples of the background prefetch effect will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequently, control by the peripheral control board 4140 for executing the special figure prefetch effect will be described. Specifically, a special figure prefetch effect setting process for setting a special figure prefetch effect is described. Other processes are the same as those described above.

[21-2-1. Special figure pre-reading effect control processing (switch control of special figure pre-reading effect)]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure prefetch effect control process including the control of the special figure prefetch effect of the present embodiment. This process is a process executed in step S1027 of the peripheral control unit regular process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 42), similarly to the special figure pre-reading effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the special figure look-ahead effect control process including the control of the special figure look-ahead effect, the process for executing the normal look-ahead effect that changes the hold display shown in FIG. 70 and the display mode of the hold display for each variable display can be changed. In addition to the process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous prefetching effect, a process for executing a background prefetching effect is included. In the process for executing the background prefetching effect, it is possible to switch (overwrite) the background prefetching effect executed in advance to the background prefetching effect based on the newly generated start memory. Hereinafter, a specific procedure will be described, but a description of a process common to the flowchart illustrated in FIG. 70 will be appropriately omitted.

  The effect control program first determines whether or not the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis processing (step S1022 in FIG. 42) when the pre-reading effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 in FIG. 48). If the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is “No”), the special figure pre-reading effect control process ends because the special figure pre-reading effect is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is “Yes”), the effect control program performs the prefetching based on the contents of the prefetching effect command corresponding to the start memory of the prefetching target. The type and mode of the effect are selected (step S2020). Specifically, one of a normal look-ahead effect in which the display mode of the hold display of the start memory is changed or a background look-ahead effect in which the background of an image displayed on the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed is selected. The effect form of the special figure look-ahead effect is determined.

  Next, the effect control program determines whether or not the normal prefetch effect is selected (step S2021). If the normal prefetch effect is selected (the result of step S2021 is “Yes”), the processing after step S2005 is executed. The processing after step S2005 is as described with reference to FIG. Note that the timing for clearing the special figure prefetching effect execution flag is different from the processing shown in FIG. 70.

  On the other hand, when the normal prefetch effect is not selected (the result of step S2021 is “No”), that is, when the background prefetch effect is selected, the effect control program determines whether to actually execute the background prefetch effect. Is determined (step S2022). Whether or not the background prefetch effect is actually executed is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the expected degree of the variation pattern corresponding to the starting memory is equal to or higher than a predetermined expected degree. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to execute the prefetching effect according to the degree of expectation, such as making it easier to execute the special figure prefetching effect when the degree of expectation is high.

  Although the special figure pre-reading effect can be basically executed in all the variation patterns, the allocation of the lottery data for determining whether or not the execution is possible is made different depending on the variation pattern. For example, in the case of normal deviation fluctuation, the winning (execution) probability of the reserved look-ahead effect is 1/100 (the deviation is 99/100), whereas in the case of normal reach, it is 25/100 (the deviation is 75/100), and the super reach is obtained. The determination is made based on a lottery table set to be 50/100 (the loss is 50/100) in the case of a loss, and 99/100 (the loss is 1/100) in the case of a super reach.

  Further, the actual presentation mode (scenario) is determined based on a table in which another scenario table is made to correspond to the number of times of the presentation. For example, when the number of productions is two, a table in which a lottery probability is set for each scenario is provided. The effect contents, the number of scenarios, and the lottery probabilities of the scenario selected according to the scenario table are different.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a scenario in which the color of the hold display changes and a variation pattern when the number of effects of the special figure prefetching effect (holding prefetching effect) is two. Each scenario is, for example, Scenario 1 (blue → blue), Scenario 2 (blue → green), Scenario 3 (blue → red), Scenario 4 (red → gold). It will be a high special map pre-reading effect. Note that the scenario 4 is set so that the lottery is performed only at the time of the big hit, and is a scenario dedicated to the big hit. Further, the number of continuous productions is not limited to two, and may be, for example, three or more, and a table showing a correspondence between a scenario and a variation pattern may be prepared according to the number of continuous productions.

  In the present embodiment, a scenario to be executed is determined based on a table in which scenario lottery probabilities are set. In addition, in addition to the variation pattern, in the case of a big hit, a table for scenario lottery may be provided according to the type of the big hit. In the case where the variation pattern and the big hit symbol are uniquely determined, only a table based on the variation pattern is required, and there is no need to provide a table determined according to the big hit type.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the hold display (hold-ahead look-ahead effect), and similarly includes a lottery table and a scenario table for a background look-ahead effect. FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the scenario and the variation pattern when the number of effects of the background prefetching effect is two. The scenarios are, for example, scenario A (light cloud → light cloud), scenario B (light cloud → rain cloud), scenario C (rain cloud → thunder cloud), and scenario D (rain cloud → clear). It will be a high special map pre-reading effect. It is to be noted that the scenario D is set so as to be drawn only at the time of the big hit, and is a scenario dedicated to the big hit. Further, the number of continuous productions is not limited to two, and may be, for example, three or more, and a table showing a correspondence between a scenario and a variation pattern may be prepared according to the number of continuous productions.

  When the background look-ahead effect is not to be executed (the result of step S2022 is “No”), the effect control program clears the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S2027), and ends the present process.

  On the other hand, when performing the background look-ahead effect (the result of step S2022 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the background look-ahead effect is currently being executed (step S2023). The determination as to whether or not the background look-ahead effect is being executed is made, for example, by setting a flag at the timing when the execution of the background look-ahead effect is started (or determined / selected), and at the timing when the background look-ahead effect ends (for example, background look-ahead effect). A flag may be provided which is cleared at the timing when the fluctuation display based on the start memory for executing the effect is started (terminated)), and may be performed based on the value set in this flag.

  As an example of the flag, a flag (prefetch expectation flag) may be prepared for each expectation of the prefetch effect (pre-reading or background prefetch). For example, when the degree of expectation to be a big hit differs according to the production mode such as high, medium, and low, a look-ahead expectation flag corresponding to each degree of expectation is prepared (for example, a high expectation look-ahead notice flag, Like a medium expectation prefetch notice flag, a low expectation prefetch notice flag). Further, instead of dividing the flag according to the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation may be divided according to information set in one flag (for example, when the value of the flag is "1", the degree of expectation is low; When it is "2", it is medium expectation, and when it is "3", it is high expectation). These examples are merely examples, and the degree of expectation need not be limited to three types, but may be three or more types, or may be only two types. In other words, any method can be used as long as it is possible to determine (determine) whether or not to execute the prefetching effect mode (background prefetching) according to the degree of expectation.

  When the look-ahead expectation flag is provided, the look-ahead expectation flag of the special figure look-ahead effect that is being executed when the special figure look-ahead effect is switched is held and compared with the flag of the newly executed special figure look-ahead effect. do it. For example, if the look-ahead expectation flag of the special figure look-ahead effect that is being executed is in the expectation degree, if the look-ahead expectation degree flag of the newly executed special figure look-ahead effect is high in the expectation degree, a new special figure look-ahead effect is created. Switch. The flag of the special figure pre-reading effect to be newly executed may be information (numerical information or the like) set for each scenario described above.

  If the background look-ahead effect is being executed (the result of step S2023 is “Yes”), the effect control program determines whether to switch the currently running background look-ahead effect to a newly executed background look-ahead effect. (Step S2024).

  In the present embodiment, the expectation degree of the newly executed background prefetching effect is compared with the expectation degree of the currently executing background prefetching effect, and when the newly executed background prefetching effect has a higher expectation degree, the background prefetching effect is executed. Switch. The “expectation” is basically the expectation at which the result of the change display of the special symbol is a big hit, but may be the expectation of the type (symbol) of the big hit or the expectation of the game state after the big hit. Furthermore, instead of the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the degree of expectation as an effect (for example, out of normal, normal reach, SP reach, etc.) may be included. For example, a variation pattern may be specified from the variation pattern prefetch command, and the determination may be made based on the variation pattern. More specifically, “expectation” may be added to the items of the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) to define in advance the degree of expectation for each variation pattern, or the reach effect to be executed (normal reach, SP reach) Etc.), the degree of expectation may be set. Since a reach effect having a high degree of expectation, such as SP reach, has a long fluctuation time, it may be determined that the expectation degree is high as the fluctuation time is long. Further, when the degree of expectation is the same, any starting memory may be given priority, and may be determined by lottery. In addition, when both of the big hits occur, the special figure prefetching effect cannot be executed during the big hit game, so that the special figure prefetching effect being executed is prioritized.

  Further, in the case where a great profit can be obtained by the player, such as a big hit, a special look-ahead effect display mode that does not appear in a single look-ahead lottery may be used. It is not necessary to limit the degree of expectation to only the big hit, and the expectation may be divided according to the type of big hit. For example, the number of rounds of a jackpot game, the probability of winning a special lottery after a jackpot, and the number of times a player can continue to play in a favorable game state (probable change state, time saving state), and the amount of profit that can be obtained at the time of a jackpot or after a jackpot. The degree of expectation may be divided according to a game state.

  Furthermore, a priority may be set for each determined scenario, and the determination may be made based on the priority set for each scenario. For example, numerical information is set for each scenario, and the higher the numerical value, the higher the degree of expectation. When the scenario information is set and stored in the RAM, since the scenario information is stored as numerical information, the value itself can indicate the degree of expectation. The numerical information corresponds to, for example, information (numerical value) for determining the presentation mode and information (numerical value) indicating the degree of expectation, and numerical information may be set based on these pieces of information. In this case, by holding the numerical information of the scenario until the special figure look-ahead effect ends, by comparing with the numerical information corresponding to the newly executed special figure look-ahead effect scenario, it is determined whether to switch the special figure look-ahead effect What is necessary is just to judge.

  The effect control program clears the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag when the ongoing background pre-ahead effect is not continued and switched to a new background-ahead effect (“No” in step S2024) (step S2027). Then, the present process ends. In this case, the special figure prefetch effect being executed is continuously executed without interruption.

  On the other hand, when switching the background prefetching effect being executed to a new background prefetching effect (the result of step S2023 is “Yes”), the effect control program changes the setting information of the background prefetching effect being executed to a new background prefetching effect. (Step S2025). Note that the setting information of the background prefetch effect is also initialized when the background prefetch effect that is being executed has been executed to the end. The timing of the initialization of the setting information is, for example, the timing at which the start memory related to the background prefetch effect being executed is exhausted.

  After initializing the setting information of the background look-ahead effect that is being executed (step S2025), or if the background look-ahead effect is not being executed (the result of step S2023 is “No”), the effect look-ahead effect. A setting process is performed (step S2026). Since a plurality of background prefetch effects cannot be executed in parallel, background prefetch effect setting information may be unconditionally initialized in the background prefetch effect setting process. Lastly, the effect control program clears the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag (step S2027), and ends this processing.

  In the process of step S2025, instead of initializing the setting information of the background prefetch effect being executed and executing a new background prefetch effect, a new background prefetch effect is executed following the background prefetch effect being executed. You may make it. At this time, the player may be able to recognize that the background prefetching effect has been continued (extended), or may not be able to recognize (it is difficult to recognize). For example, if the player cannot recognize that the background look-ahead effect has continued (extended), it is felt that the state of high expectation has continued for a long time, so that the expectation can be maintained for a long time. At this time, a state of high expectation is maintained even after the variation display of the start memory corresponding to the special figure look-ahead effect that was originally executed is lost, and further, in the variation display executed later, the expectation is higher. Since the effect based on the fluctuation pattern is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be discouraged.

  Further, when the special figure pre-reading effect is switched, an effect for notifying that the effect has been switched may be executed. For example, the player may be able to recognize by executing an effect (display, sound, light emission, driving body, etc.) that is not executed in the normal effect at the time of switching the special figure look-ahead effect. Further, an effect indicating that the switching of the special figure look-ahead effect may occur may be executed. In this case, instead of performing the effect at the start of the fluctuation after determining that the special figure look-ahead effect is to be switched, even if the change occurs, the running of the special figure look-ahead effect is continued while the special figure pre-reading effect being executed is being executed. (A screen flash, the color is different only around the display screen, the decorative pattern itself changes (color, shape), a subliminal effect, etc.), and the player can look ahead to the special figure. The effect may be any effect that can recognize that the effect switching has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, the normal look-ahead effect can be executed in parallel for a plurality of start memories, but the background look-ahead effect cannot be executed in parallel. Therefore, the process of step S2021 may determine whether or not a prefetch effect that can be executed in parallel, instead of determining whether to execute a normal prefetch effect. For example, a prefetching effect that can be executed in parallel is a first group, and a prefetching effect that cannot be executed in parallel is a second group, and the prefetching effect selected in the process of step S2020 belongs to the first group. The processing may be branched depending on whether the user belongs to a group. In addition, even if it is a prefetch effect which can be performed in parallel, the prefetch effect under execution may be switched (overwritten) to the prefetch effect based on the newly generated start memory.

  Further, the background prefetching effect and the normal prefetching effect (holding prefetching effect) may be simultaneously executed. FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a special figure prefetching effect control process capable of simultaneously executing the background prefetching effect and the normal prefetching effect (holding prefetching effect).

  When the background pre-reading effect and the hold pre-reading effect are simultaneously executed, the normal pre-reading effect, the background pre-reading effect, or both of them can be selected in the process of step S2020. This is different from the processing in step S2020 of the special figure pre-reading effect control processing shown in FIG. 93. Further, the process of step S2021 in FIG. 93 is deleted, and after the setting process of the hold look-ahead effect, the process of setting the background look-ahead effect is executed. That is, after the process in step S2011, the processes in steps S2022 to 2026 may be performed.

  Also, only in a specific state, a plurality of normal prefetch effects may be executed in parallel. For example, a plurality of normal prefetching effects may be executed in parallel only when the expectation degree of the previously executed normal prefetching effect is lower than the newly executed normal prefetching effect.

  Also, the information indicating whether or not the special figure pre-reading effect is included in the received special symbol hold command and the current game state stored on the peripheral board side (the game state here is limited to probable change and time reduction). Priority, based on the consistency of the game, such as fluctuating, reaching, jackpot (opening, ending, winning opening, etc.), waiting for customers, etc.) It may be determined whether or not to execute the special figure prefetching effect. In the case of giving priority to the special symbol hold command, regardless of the game state, priority is given to information indicating whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect can be executed, which is included in the special symbol hold command, and the game state (probability state or special figure look-ahead effect being executed) In the case where priority is given to the special figure hold command, even if the special symbol hold command includes information permitting execution of the special figure prefetch effect, the special figure prefetch effect may not be executed.

  If the special symbol hold command does not execute the special figure prefetching effect even though the information for permitting the execution of the special figure prefetching effect is included, for example, a dedicated prefetching lottery table (mismatch only table) is provided. Whether to execute the special figure pre-reading effect may be randomly selected based on the non-matching table. At this time, in the inconsistency-only table, the probability of selecting a scenario that returns to the normal mode (a state in which the special figure prefetching effect has not been executed) is set to be high, and the expectation is gradually lowered. As described above, the effect mode changes, or an effect of a mode that is not executed in the normal special figure look-ahead effect is executed. If the information indicating whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect is included in the special symbol hold command does not match the current game state stored on the peripheral board, be careful not to mislead the player. , May be forcibly returned to the normal effect mode.

  In addition, if the information indicating whether the special figure prefetching effect included in the received special symbol hold command is executable does not match the game state, there is a possibility of a malfunction in the program such as a bug in the program or static noise. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to detect the occurrence of abnormalities by executing an effect that cannot be executed normally, rather than simply controlling not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect, debugging during development, endurance test Etc. can be used for inspection of gaming machines.

  As described above, after the main control board 4100 (first look-ahead determination unit) determines whether or not the execution of the special figure pre-reading effect is performed, the peripheral control board 4140 sets the special figure based on the game state or other start-up memory. A second look-ahead determination unit capable of determining whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed and the content of the effect.

[21-3. Production example]
Subsequently, a specific example of the special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) executed by the above-described control will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) according to the present embodiment. The special figure look-ahead effect described in FIG. 97 is a background look-ahead effect in which the background changes, and the background can further change at a predetermined timing according to the degree of expectation. Hereinafter, a specific example of the background prefetch effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 (A) shows a state before the background prefetching effect is executed, and shows a point in time when the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) 1910 ends and the special symbol is determined. In the state shown in FIG. 97 (A), four start symbols of the special symbol 1 are reserved.

  After the special symbol is stopped, the reserved start memory is exhausted, and the special symbol change display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), a state in which the background prefetch effect has been started is shown. At this time, the starting memory to be subjected to the background prefetching effect is any one of the three held starting memories. The player may be able to identify the starting memory that is the target of the special figure prefetching effect at the timing when the background prefetching effect is started, or may be notified at the timing when the starting memory that is the target of the background prefetching effect is consumed. You may make it. If a variation pattern having a high degree of expectation is selected in the start-up memory targeted for the background look-ahead effect, the change is displayed in the background look-ahead effect during the change display of the decorative symbol (for example, when a reach occurs). The player can know that the game is targeted.

  In the background prefetching effect of the present embodiment, clouds appear on the background. Further, the background is changed so as to progress in a step-by-step manner by the background prefetching effect, and the appearing cloud changes in a stepwise manner. The pattern in which the background (cloud) changes may be determined according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. Specifically, the change of the decorative pattern is stopped (FIG. 97 (C)), the reserved start-up memory is exhausted, and the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (D). It changes to rain clouds as the color deepens. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), the cloud changes to a thundercloud, and further lightning occurs, resulting in a great storm. At this time, the hold display is reduced or hidden with the occurrence of the reach. Note that, in the present embodiment, the deeper the cloud color, the higher the expectation, and the highest when a thundercloud occurs, the higher the expectation. However, as a special effect (for example, a big hit decision), the cloud disappears and the sun appears. (FIG. 97 (F)).

  The timing at which the background first changes may be the timing at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102), or the timing at which the decoration symbol starts to change. In the present embodiment, the start of the change of the decorative symbol is displayed, and even if a plurality of starting openings are won in a predetermined state (for example, a normal game state), the display is made such that the winning of the plurality of starting openings can be determined. However, in a state different from the predetermined state, even if a prize is won in a plurality of starting openings, it is determined that winning in the plurality of starting ports is indistinguishable or difficult, and in a state different from the predetermined state, the decorative pattern fluctuates. During this time, a plurality of game balls start and enter, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize which start memory has a higher degree of expectation.

  In addition, when the number of suspensions is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 3 or more), there is a certain delay from the occurrence of a highly expected start-up memory to the start of fluctuation, and a plurality of execution timings of the background prefetch effect are set. If possible, the background prefetch effect may be started after a certain period of time. For example, as for the special figure pre-reading effect that occurs when the number of reservations is 3 or more, no effect is performed when the reservation 1 and the reservation 2 are consumed, and the special figure pre-reading effect may be started at the timing when the reservation 3 is completed. In this case, a scenario such as “no change → no change → prefetch A” may be set as the scenario of the special figure prefetch effect, and a lottery may be selected for each change. When the lottery is performed for each change, as described above, by preventing the falling down from occurring, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced.

  By configuring as described above, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the start memory that was the target of the special figure look-ahead effect, and all the fluctuations executed until the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern with high expectation is started. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the display, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, the timing at which the background changes stepwise may be changed every time the decoration symbol starts to change, or may be changed every predetermined time regardless of the timing at which the decoration symbol starts to change. This makes it possible to change the background in a plurality of stages even when the number of starting memories to be consumed in advance is small. In addition, when a reach occurs in the variation display of the decorative symbol, a reach effect may be executed in parallel with the background prefetch effect, or the reach effect may be executed by stopping the background prefetch effect.

  Subsequently, when a start memory with a high expectation of a jackpot is newly generated while the background prefetch effect is being executed, the previously executed background prefetch effect is based on the newly generated start memory. A description will be given of an effect example in the case of switching (overwriting) to the background prefetch effect. FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the special figure prefetching effect (background prefetching effect) being executed is switched to the special figure prefetching effect based on the newly generated start memory.

  FIG. 98 (A) shows a state before the special figure pre-reading effect (background pre-fetching effect) is executed, similarly to FIG. 97 (A), and the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) 1910 ends. , The time when the symbol is determined. Four start memories of the special symbol 1 are reserved.

  Further, FIG. 98 (B) shows a state in which the reserved starting memory is newly digested, the special symbol change display is started, and the background prefetch effect is started, as in FIG. 97 (B). . After that, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped (FIG. 98 (C)), the start-up memory which has been held is consumed, the variation of the decorative symbol is started, and the background is gradually changed (FIG. 98 (D)). The change display of the decorative pattern is stopped (FIG. 98 (E)). At this time, the background may be changed independently of the change display of the decorative symbol.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), two new game balls are awarded in the starting winning opening during the special symbol change display, and the number of reserved special symbols 1 is again four. Then, if the expectation that the newly generated start memory will be a big hit is higher than the expectation of the background look-ahead effect started in FIG. The background prefetch effect is interrupted, and the background prefetch effect based on the newly generated start memory is executed.

  For example, during the execution of the special figure prefetch effect, a lottery of the special figure prefetch effect based on the newly generated start memory may be enabled. This lottery may be always possible, or a specific condition (for example, the content of the pre-reading effect currently being rendered, the content of the change of the decorative pattern or the stop symbol, and the determination of whether or not the lottery can be performed by random number lottery) is established. May be possible. When the lottery of the special figure pre-reading effect based on the newly generated start memory is won, the display mode of the special figure pre-reading effect is determined. When the determined display mode is compared with the display mode of the special figure look-ahead effect that is being executed, the display mode of the special figure pre-fetch effect based on the newly generated start memory is a display mode with a higher expectation. At a predetermined timing (start of next fluctuation, occurrence of reach, stop of symbol, etc.), the display mode is switched to the display mode of the special figure prefetching effect to be newly executed. If the display mode of the newly executed special figure look-ahead effect is lower in expectation than the display mode of the currently running special figure pre-fetch effect, the display mode is switched to the display mode of the newly executed special figure pre-fetch effect. Alternatively, the display mode of the running special figure prefetching effect may be continued, or the running special figure prefetching effect may be stopped.

  In the background look-ahead effect of the present embodiment, the effect mode is related to “weather”, but the subsequent special figure look-ahead effect that is newly executed may not be directly related to “weather”. For example, when the special figure pre-reading effect that is being executed is related to “weather”, it may be related to a car race in which the contents of the subsequent special figure pre-fetching effect are not related at all. By executing a special-lookup look-ahead effect that is related to the current special-lookahead look-ahead effect, the player can feel as if a series of scenarios are being executed, and feel that the period of the look-ahead effect has been extended. it can.

  In addition, in the newly executed special figure look-ahead effect scenario, the scenario of the special figure look-ahead effect that is currently being executed is compared. New scenarios may be combined. For example, when the scenario of the special figure look-ahead effect that is being executed is “cloudy → rain cloud → cumulonimbus” and the scenario of the subsequent special figure look-ahead effect is “light cloudy → snow cloud → large storm” (the jackpot expectation degree is light cloudy <cloudy <rain cloud) When the display mode of the running special figure look-ahead effect is “rain cloud”, the scenario is switched to a subsequent special figure look-ahead effect scenario, and the overall flow of the look-ahead effect mode is “cloudy”. → Rain cloud → Light cloud → Thunder cloud → Great storm ”, and although the degree of expectation once decreases at the time of switching, the degree of expectation once lowered in the subsequent display mode becomes higher. In this case, by preparing a scenario that changes in the order of "cloudy weather → rain cloud → light cloudiness" as a special figure look-ahead effect of false (gase), "thunder cloud" appearing after light cloudy will cause the player to hit the big hit Expectation can be further increased.

  In addition, when executing a special figure look-ahead effect of a scenario that is not related as a scenario of a subsequent special figure look-ahead effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that a newly expected start-up memory has occurred. Even if the result of the lottery corresponding to the special figure prefetching effect in the middle is incorrect, the player's expectation can be maintained until the result of the lottery corresponding to the special figure prefetching effect based on the subsequent start memory is known.

  FIG. 98 (F) shows a state in which the background prefetch effect based on the newly generated start memory has been started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), the color of the cloud changes so as to become darker, and as shown in FIG. 98 (H), lightning emerges from the cloud which has become darker.

  In FIG. 98 (F), the color of the cloud is lighter than in FIG. 98 (E), and the progress of the background prefetch effect has returned to the previous stage. In this way, when the progress of the background look-ahead effect returns to the previous stage, the player can recognize that the start memory having a higher degree of expectation has been added, and the sense of expectation can be further increased. . In addition, in the effect of the change of the cloud, the effect form is set in advance as a scenario, and a plurality of scenarios may be combined or a scenario combined in advance may be prepared.

  On the other hand, a subsequent background prefetching effect may be started so as to continue the interrupted background prefetching effect without returning the progress of the background prefetching effect to the previous stage. By performing such control, the player can maintain a state where the expectation of the big hit is continued for a longer time.

  Reach also occurs in the fluctuation display corresponding to the interrupted background look-ahead effect, but in this case, the reach effect is executed, and the background pre-fetch effect is continuously performed even after the next fluctuation display is started. do it.

  It should be noted that the special figure look-ahead effect for changing the background (background look-ahead effect) is performed in parallel with the above-described special figure look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect) for changing the display mode of the hold display of the start memory having a high degree of expectation. It may be. In some cases, the player may recognize the starting memory corresponding to the background look-ahead effect. In this case, the expectation is higher than when the display mode of the hold display is changed, and the player's Expectation may be further increased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if a start memory with a higher expectation of a big hit occurs during the execution of the special figure look-ahead effect, the previously executed special figure look-ahead effect is executed. By switching (overwriting) to the special figure look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit, and to maximize the effect of the look-ahead effect. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

  Lastly, a description will be given of an example of an effect in the case where the suspended prefetching effect and the background prefetching effect are executed in parallel. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which a held prefetch effect and a background prefetch effect are executed in parallel, and the running background prefetch effect is switched to a background prefetch effect based on a newly generated start memory. In the effect example shown in FIG. 99, a background prefetch effect related to the reserved prefetch effect is executed.

  FIG. 99 (A) shows a state before the pre-reading effect is executed, and shows a point in time when the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is finished and the lost symbol is determined. In the state shown in FIG. 99 (A), three startup memories are held. FIG. 99 (B) shows a state in which the reserved start memory is exhausted, the reserved number is changed from 3 to 2, and the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  Thereafter, during the change of the special symbol of FIG. 99 (B), one game ball wins in the starting winning opening, and the lottery of the prefetching effect in the starting winning is won. FIG. 99 (C) shows a state in which the change of the special symbol is continued, and the prefetching effect on hold is executed. At this time, the hold display of the hold 3 changes from a normal round shape to a “cumulonimbus” shape. In the start memory in which the hold look-ahead effect is executed, the background look-ahead effect is executed in parallel with the hold look-ahead effect. In the background look-ahead effect, the background changes from “cloudy” to “rain cloud”, and finally changes to “thunder cloud (cumulonimbus)”. As described above, the hold display changes to “cumulonimbus” due to the hold look-ahead effect, and the background finally changes to “thundercloud” related to “cumulonimbus”.

  FIG. 99 (D) shows a state where the variable display of the special symbol has been completed. Next, FIG. 99 (E) shows a state in which the next hold start memory is exhausted and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, a cloud indicating “cloudy” is displayed on the background as a background prefetch effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the change display of the special symbol ends. At this time, the cloud displayed on the background may be left as it is, or may be deleted once. It is only necessary that the player can recognize that the background look-ahead effect has been executed.

  FIG. 99 (G) shows a state in which the next hold start memory is consumed and the special symbol is displayed in a variably manner. At this time, the hold display shows that the hold 1 is “cumulonimbus”, the hold 2 is “normal”, the hold 3 is “storm”, and the hold 4 is turned off. Further, the background changes from "cloud" to "rain cloud" as a background prefetch effect. Also, during the special symbol change display, two game balls win the start winning opening, and the second start memory (hold 3) wins the lottery of the look-ahead effect, and as a result, the hold display shows "storm". It changes to the shape shown. Further, a background look-ahead effect is executed based on the start memory corresponding to the hold 3. At this time, a scenario in which the background changes from “light cloudy” to “thundercloud” and finally changes to “large storm” is selected. The start memory of the "Storm" hold display has a higher expectation of a big hit than the start memory of the "cumulonimbus", so the background prefetch effect is switched (overwritten). FIG. 99 (H) shows a state where the change display of the special symbol has been completed, and rain clouds are continuously displayed on the background.

  FIG. 99 (I) shows a state in which the start memory in which the suspension display is “cumulonimbus” is exhausted, and the special symbol is variably displayed. If the background look-ahead effect is continued, a cumulonimbus (thundercloud) should be displayed. However, since the hold display is switched to the background look-ahead effect based on the starting memory of "storm", the background is "light cloudy". Is changed to At this time, the hold display indicates that the hold 1 is “normal”, the hold 2 is “storm”, the hold 3 and the hold 4 are turned off.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (J), a reach is generated based on the start memory in which the hold display is “cumulonimbus”, and a reach effect is executed. At this time, the background and the hold display remain unchanged.

  When the reach fluctuation of FIG. 99 (J) is completed, as shown in FIG. 99 (K), the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is incorrect. At this time, the background remains lightly cloudy.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (L), when the next fluctuation starts, the background changes to a thundercloud. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (M), the change of the special symbol ends. At this time, the background and the hold display are the same as the state shown in FIG. 99 (L).

  Further, when the hold display has exhausted the starting memory of "storm", the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started as shown in FIG. 99 (N). At this time, all the hold displays are turned off, and the background changes to “large storm (lightning + storm)”. Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (O), the change display of the special symbol is fixedly stopped, and a big hit occurs.

  In the present embodiment, by associating the hold look-ahead effect with the background look-ahead effect and performing it in accordance with the display at the final stage of the scenario, how the background finally changes when the hold display changes (What scenario is selected (occurs)) can be determined in advance. Further, the display mode corresponding to the hold display does not need to correspond to the final stage of the scenario, and may be the first or middle stage. If it is an intermediate stage, there is a possibility that the display mode will change to a display mode having a higher degree of expectation at the final stage, and the player's sense of expectation can be increased.

[22. Modified example of effect control by level management]
As described above, the control for preventing the falling-down at the time of executing the effect has been described. However, when the effect is executed at a predetermined timing for each variation pattern, if the effect variation is increased, the effect data becomes enormous and management becomes difficult. . In addition, the effect control such as the above-described fall prevention processing is complicated, and, for example, when a rare effect is executed, even if there is an error in the effect data, it may be difficult to find out. Furthermore, performing a test for all patterns requires a great deal of man-hours.

  Therefore, as a third modification of the present embodiment, a gaming machine that makes it possible to manage effect data easily by managing effects in a hierarchical manner is proposed. Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to reduce the amount of data required for executing the effect and prevent an error in setting the effect data.

  In the third modification of the present embodiment, the “level (level) corresponding to the content of the effect that can be executed in response to the look-ahead command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the time of the start winning or the special figure variation pattern command transmitted at the start of the variation. Direction reference information) "is defined. The production content is determined based on the level. Hereinafter, an example of selecting a notice effect (including the story reach notice effect and the pseudo consecutive notice effect described above) and an effect at the time of change based on the level will be described.

[22-1. Fluctuation pattern]
First, in order to simplify the following description, a simplified variation pattern is defined. FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating an example of the types of the variation patterns according to the third modification of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 100, the variation pattern command includes a status (STS) and a mode (MODE), and these are combined to form a variation pattern command.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern 1 is “normal out”, the fluctuation pattern 2 is “normal reach”, the fluctuation pattern 3 is “normal reach”, the fluctuation pattern 4 is “SP reach”, and the fluctuation pattern 5 is “normal reach”. SP reach ". The branch number added to each variation pattern corresponds to the number of pseudo runs. Specifically, when the branch number is 1, the number of pseudo runs is 1,..., When the branch number is 4, the number of pseudo runs is 4. In the third modification of the present embodiment, up to four pseudo continuous changes can be performed. Therefore, in the third modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the status (STS) corresponds to the number of pseudo runs, and the mode (MODE) corresponds to the fluctuation pattern.

  Regarding the reach mode, the SP reach has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach, and in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation, the expectation of the big hit increases as the number of pseudo runs increases.

[22-2. Level (staging standard information)]
Next, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the level (production reference information) will be described. In the third modification of the present embodiment, the higher the level is, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is set. Therefore, the level is set corresponding to the expectation of the fluctuation pattern. FIG. 101A is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the level in the third modification of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101A, a basic level is set for each variation pattern, a level (LV) 1 for variation pattern 1, LV2 for variation pattern 2, LV3 for variation pattern 3, and a variation pattern 4 is set to LV4, and the fluctuation pattern 5 is set to LV5.

  In the third modification of the present embodiment, the basic level is set, but the level is actually set based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of pseudo runs. For example, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), in the case of the variation pattern 3, LV3 is set as the basic level, but when the number of pseudo runs is 3, LV4 higher than the basic level is selected. Is set to The fluctuation pattern 3 is a case where a normal reach is executed and a big hit occurs, but by performing an effect that should not be executed in the normal reach, the player's sense of expectation can be increased. On the other hand, in the variation pattern 4, when the number of pseudo runs is small, LV2 lower than the basic level is set. In the variation pattern 4, SP reach is executed, but the result of the variation display is lost. Therefore, by lowering the degree of expectation of the effect, it is possible to prevent the sense of expectation from being excessively excited.

  As described above, since the level is set based on the variation pattern and the number of pseudo runs, in the third modification of the present embodiment, the level corresponds to the prefetch command or the variation pattern command. Since the fluctuation pattern indicated by the prefetch command and the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern command are the same, when the start memory is the same, the level corresponding to the prefetch command and the level corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are the same. . Note that the level may be determined when a prefetch command is received, a flag or the like corresponding to the specified level may be set, and the level may be specified from the flag or the like when a variation pattern command is received. That is, at the time of receiving the prefetch command, the level corresponding to the prefetch command is determined, and “level (production reference information)” corresponding to the contents of the effect that can be executed is defined. The effect may be selected according to the level defined when the pre-read command is received, without determining the level to perform.

  In the third modification of the present embodiment, it is possible to set the level based on the fluctuation pattern and the game state. FIG. 101 (B) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the variation pattern and the game state in Modification 3 of the present embodiment. In this modification, as described above, the probability display state of the variable display (low probability state (normal state), high probability state) and the operating state of the normal electric auditorium (time saving state) are set as the gaming state. Specifically, there are a low-probability non-reduction state, a low-probability reduction state, a high-probability non-reduction state (so-called latent probability change), and a high-probability reduction time state (so-called probability change state).

  When the level is set to a level different from the basic level according to the game state, for example, when the player does not know the game state, the game state may be suggested. Specifically, when it is not possible to grasp whether the player is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state in the high-probability non-saving time state, a level different from the basic level is set as shown in FIG. 101 (B). I do. For example, when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the high probability non-time saving state, a level (LV2) higher than the basic level (LV1) is set, and in the case of the variation pattern 4, a level lower than the basic level (LV4) is set. By setting (LV1), control is performed to execute an effect that is not normally executed, and it is suggested to the player that the player is in a high probability state.

  Although the high-probability non-saving time state (so-called latent probability change) has been described, a level different from the basic level may be set for game characteristics. For example, when the gaming state is the high probability time saving state and a normal jackpot that does not shift to the high probability state occurs in the variation pattern 5, a level lower than the basic level is set, and an effect with a low degree of expectation is executed. This can indicate that the user falls from the high probability state.

  Also, the level may be changed as the pseudo-run progresses. Thereby, even if a fluctuation pattern with a low degree of expectation is selected, if the result of the fluctuation display is a big hit, it is possible to execute a high expectation effect by increasing the level according to the progress of the effect. Therefore, the interest of the player can be gradually increased. Specifically, the level of the effect performed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped may be set to be higher in the latter half.

  Further, the selection of the level may be determined based on the big hit symbol (big hit type). For example, if it is a big hit with a large amount of prize balls after shifting to the probable change state, the level is set high, and if it is a big hit without shifting to the probable change state or a big hit without (small) prize balls, it is relatively high. Set to a lower level. Taking the game state into account, set the level low in the case of a big hit that transitions to the normal state while in the probable change state, or set a high level to shift to the probable change state or maintain the probable change state May be set.

  In the third modification of the present embodiment, whether or not an effect is performed and the type of effect to be performed differ depending on the set level. FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for setting whether or not to execute a notice effect for each level in Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 102 shows whether or not an effect (notification effect) indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit in the special symbol change display is executable.

  Explaining in detail with reference to FIG. 102, as an example of a notice effect, a movable character (character A, character B), a display screen background (background image A, background image B, background image C), The background (notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, notice 5) of the dialogue corresponding to the specific production scenario described above can be executed. Similarly, the degree of expectation is set to be higher in the order of the background image A to the background image C, and the degree of expectation is higher when the background image C is displayed than the background image A. The expectation is set to be higher in the order of the notice 1 to the notice 5, and the display of the notice 5 than the notice 1 indicates that the expectation is higher. The background image A is for displaying the background of the display screen in green corresponding to the notice 2, and the background image B is for displaying the background of the display screen in a leopard pattern corresponding to the notice 4, The image C displays the background of the display screen in rainbow color corresponding to the notice 5. The background image B is always a big hit (even if a big hit with no pitched ball is excluded) when the preview effect according to the “leopard pattern” is executed two or more times in the same variable display game as in the case of the preview 4. Good), and the background image C is controlled so as to be a big hit if the notice effect according to “rainbow color” is executed even once, as in the notice 5. .

  Also, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the big hit expectation degree is divided into a plurality of groups for each notice type of the same degree, and the higher the level, the higher the level of the big hit expectation, the more the notice effect according to the notice type that is higher. However, if the predetermined level is set based on the fluctuation pattern, a higher level than the set level, in other words, a higher jackpot expectation degree than the larger jackpot expectation degree set at the predetermined level based on the fluctuation pattern, The announcement effect according to the announcement type belonging to the set group is not executed. That is, as a group having the same degree of expectation as a big hit, a group 1 including the accessory A and the notice 1, a group 2 including the background image A and the notice 2, a group 3 including the accessory B and the notice 3, and a background image The group is divided into five groups: a group 4 including B and notice 4 and a group 5 including background image C and notice 5, and the big hit expectation increases in the order of group 1 to group 5. I have. Also, if the level is set to, for example, level 3 based on the fluctuation pattern, the notice types (gear pieces A, A group that can perform a notice effect according to the notice 1, the background image A, the notice 2, the accessory B, and the notice 3), but has a bigger jackpot expectancy than the jackpot expectation set at level 3. The announcement effect corresponding to the announcement type (background image B, announcement 4, background image C, announcement 5) belonging to the group 4 and the group 5 is not executed.

  As described above, the higher the level, the higher the expected effect of the jackpot is, the lower the level 1, the lower the level of the expected effect of the character A, the lower the expected effect. is there. On the other hand, in the case of level 5, all the announcement effects can be executed, and any of the announcement effects may be executed, or the announcement effect by the movable character and the announcement by changing the background of the display screen may be performed. Allow duplicate appearances of the announcement and the announcement production by changing the background of the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the production and the specific production (it only needs to appear multiple times in the same variable display game, and is not limited to those that appear at the same time) Each announcement effect may be executed in parallel, for example, if the operations of the movable characters do not hinder each other, the effects by the movable characters are executed in duplicate.

  In addition, the table shown in FIG. 102 may be referred to at the time of executing each advance effect, and whether or not the advance effect may be actually executed may be determined. That is, the notice effect to be executed (information on the notice type and the like stored in the notice mode storage area) is changed to the effect type that can be executed according to the level set in the variation pattern shown in FIG. If it is not included, it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied. (It is not included in the effect types that can be executed according to the level among the information on the notice type and the like stored in the notice mode storage area. Information on the notice type is deleted (discarded), and information on the notice type that is not included in the effect types that can be executed according to the level among the information on the notice type and the like stored in the notice mode storage area To perform the process of setting the production information related to image data, sound data, etc. necessary to execute the production Or the like by) may not perform the announcement attraction that benefit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution of the announcement effect that should not be executed. As in the case of the level 5, when all the operations can be performed, such determination need not be performed.

  Note that the announcement effect by the accessory and the announcement effect by the background image may indicate the result of the variation display (the variation) being executed, or may be the announcement effect (the advance announcement for the hold storage in which the variation display is not started). Pre-reading notice effect).

[22-3. Notice production lottery]
Next, a description will be given of a procedure for selecting a preview effect selected at each lottery timing. FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect setting process in the present embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal notice setting process in the present embodiment. FIG. 105 is a third modification of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for selecting the content of the announcement effect of (a), when the first half changes, (B) at the time of the reach or pseudo-sequential occurrence, (C) is the first half or pseudo after the reach. (D) shows the lottery probability of the announcement effect and the setting value of the effect flag in the latter half of the development after the reach or the latter half of the reach after the pseudo-sequence. Note that the story reach setting process (step S1530), the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process (step S1630), and the prohibition process (step S1560) execute processes similar to those described above, and thus description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the effect setting process executes substantially the same process as described above, and therefore only different processes will be described, and overlapping portions will not be described.

  Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command, the effect control program executes an effect setting process for setting the content of the effect to be executed based on the received special figure fluctuation pattern command and special figure design type command (step S1503). . When the effect setting process is started, the effect control program specifies the variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100, and then performs the above-described notice effect (movable character (character A, character B)) A normal notice setting process (step) for determining whether or not to execute the background of the display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C) and the content of the notice effect to be executed (notification type, notice mode) S1580) is executed. In addition, it is determined whether or not to execute the background (notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, notice 5) of the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the particular effect, and the content of the notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode). The processing to be performed is performed in the story reach setting processing (step S1570) of the story reach setting processing (step S1530) and the pseudo continuous notice setting processing (step S1670) of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control processing (step S1630), as in the above-described example. Is

[22-4. Normal notice setting process]
First, the normal notice setting process will be described. When the normal notice setting process is executed, the effect control program first determines the basic level set in the special pattern variation pattern, and selects a notice determination table (FIG. 105) corresponding to the basic level (step S1581). ). At this time, a notice determination table according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is the probable change state, the normal state, or the like) or the operating state of the ordinary electric auditors (time saving state). May be changed. In addition, the lottery result of the notice determination table (FIG. 105) includes "no notice", in other words, not only determines the notice type (notice form) but also determines whether or not to execute the notice effect. Although the determination table (FIG. 105) is configured, a separate table for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the notice effect is provided, and when it is determined that the notice effect is to be executed based on the table and a predetermined random number, the notice determination table is set. The notice type may be determined using (FIG. 105).

  FIG. 105 (A) shows the lottery probability of the announcement effect executed in the first half of the change of the special symbol. At the level 1, the notice effect is not executed with a probability of 50%, and the notice effect according to the accessory A is executed with a probability of 50%. When the notice effect is not executed, the flag setting value of the notice flag is set to 0. Similarly, when the notice effect according to the accessory A is executed, 1 is set, and the notice effect according to the background image A is performed. 2 is set when executed, 3 is set when a notice effect according to the accessory B is executed, and 4 is set when a notice effect is executed according to the background image B, and is set according to the background image C. 5 is set when the announcement effect is performed. The expectation of the jackpot becomes higher in the order of the character A, the background image A, the character B, the background image B, and the background image C, and when the level with the higher degree of expectation is selected, the type of the notice with the higher degree of expectation is more easily selected. It is set to be.

  FIG. 105 (B) is an announcement effect performed after reaching or at the time of occurrence of pseudo-ream, (C) is an announcement effect performed at the first half of development after reaching or at the first half of reach after occurrence of pseudo-repetition, and (D) is development after reaching. It shows the lottery probability of the announcement effect executed in the latter half or the latter half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-sequence, and the setting value of the effect flag. Generally, each announcement effect is set in the same tendency as that of the announcement effect performed in the first half of the change of the special symbol in FIG. 105 (A), and in the latter half of the development after the reach in FIG. If the expectation of the jackpot is high at the time of execution as in the announcement production executed in the latter half of the reach, the announcement production with high expectation is set to be easily executed, and the expectation of the player is I try to raise it. Note that at level 1, the announcement effect is not executed in the latter half of the development after the reach or the latter half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-ream, so that 100% is set to “none”.

  Next, the effect control program acquires a random number value (advance random number) for determining the presence / absence of the notice effect and the notice type (step S1582). Then, based on the preview determination table selected in the process of step S1581 and the random number value obtained in step S1582, the presence / absence of a preview effect and the content of the preview effect to be executed (notification mode, The type is determined (step S1583), and the notice selected as the predetermined storage area (the area corresponding to the timing of executing the notice effect of the normal notice mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 is determined. The type is stored (step S1584), and a notice flag is set according to the execution time of the notice effect, and the process ends (step S1585).

  In addition, the above-mentioned lottery is performed at each timing of the first half fluctuation, after the reach or pseudo-sequence occurrence, the first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the pseudo-sequence occurrence, and the second half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the pseudo-sequence occurrence. Do. However, there is a case where the lottery is not performed according to the contents of the special figure synchronizing effect executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. For example, since the fluctuation pattern 1 shown in FIG. 100 does not generate the reach, FIG. A process of determining whether or not to perform a notice effect at the time of the first half change and a type of notice to be performed is executed based on the change first-half notice determination table of (A), and the lottery is not performed at other timings. It should be noted that, regardless of the contents of the special figure synchronizing effect executed based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern, a process of determining whether or not to perform the advance effect at all timings and determining the type of advance effect to be executed is executed. The determination result may be discarded in accordance with the contents of the figure synchronizing effect. For example, when the fluctuation pattern 1 shown in FIG. 100 is changed in the first half based on the respective tables of FIGS. At the time of later or pseudo-sequence occurrence, the first half of development after reach or the first half of reach after pseudo-sequence occurrence, and the later stage of development after reach or the latter half of reach after pseudo-sequence occurrence, whether or not to perform a notice effect, and a notice to execute The process of determining the type is executed, and the determination result for the timing other than the first half change time is discarded without being stored in the normal notice mode storage area, or the normal notice mode storage area is discarded. It may be deleted the notice information in accordance with the notice type and execution timing or the like stored in.

  As described above, when the special figure variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, the variation pattern of the special symbol is specified from the received special figure variation pattern command, and the basic pattern set in the identified special pattern variation pattern is specified. Whether or not to perform a notice effect (movable character (character A, character B), display screen background (background image A, background image B, background image C)) using a notice determination table according to the level The content of the notice effect to be executed (the notice type, notice mode) is determined.

[22-5. Story reach notice setting process]
Next, a story reach announcement setting process of a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a story reach notice setting process according to the modification. FIG. 107A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a story reach notice determination table according to the modification. Note that the same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the above-described story reach notice setting process (FIG. 56), and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the modified example, as described above, whether or not to execute the announcement effect and the type of announcement to be executed are determined according to the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol. For this reason, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a story reach announcement determination table is provided for each basic level as shown in FIG. 107 (A). Then, the effect control program determines the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol, and selects a notice reach determination table (FIG. 107A (A)) of the story reach corresponding to the determined basic level (step 107). S1571A), based on the selected story reach announcement determination table and the random number value acquired in step S1572, the story reach announcement determination table (FIG. 107 (A)) is used to determine whether or not a story reach announcement is to be made and the story reach announcement to be executed. The contents of the effect (notification mode, notice type) are determined (step S1573).

  It should be noted that the story reach is announced according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is the probable state or the normal state, etc.) or the operating state of the ordinary electric auditors (time saving state). The decision table may be changed. In addition, the lottery result of the lottery determination table (FIG. 107 (A)) including "no notice", in other words, not only determining the type of notice (notice mode) but also determining whether or not to execute the notice effect. Although the story reach announcement determination table (FIG. 107 (A)) is configured as described above, a separate table for selecting whether or not to execute the announcement effect is provided separately, and the announcement effect is executed based on the table and a predetermined random number. If it is determined, the type of the notice may be determined using the notice determination table of the story reach (FIG. 107A).

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern of the special symbol specified from the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 is the variation pattern for executing story reach, the identified special symbol Whether or not to execute a story reach announcement effect using a story reach announcement determination table corresponding to the basic level set in the fluctuation pattern of the above, and the content of the announcement effect to be executed (announcement type, notice mode) are determined. It has become.

[22-6. Pseudo consecutive notice setting processing]
Next, a pseudo consecutive announcement setting process of a modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pseudo consecutive notice setting process of the modification, and FIG. 107B is a flowchart illustrating an example of a pseudo continuous change notice determination table of the modification. Note that the same reference numerals are given to processes common to the pseudo consecutive notice setting process (FIG. 65), and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the modified example, as described above, whether or not to execute the announcement effect and the type of announcement to be executed are determined according to the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a notice determination table of pseudo continuous fluctuation is provided for each basic level as shown in FIG. 107 (B). Then, the effect control program determines the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol, and selects a notice determination table (FIG. 107A (A)) of the pseudo continuous variation according to the determined basic level ( In step S1671A), based on the selected pseudo-continuous variation notice determination table and the random number value acquired in step S1672, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed from the pseudo-continuous variation notice determination table (FIG. 107 (B)). The contents (preliminary notice mode, notice type) of the pseudo consecutive notice effect are determined (step S1673).

  It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation of the fluctuation display game depends on the game state such as the probability state (whether the current game state is the probable state or the normal state) or the operating state of the ordinary electric auditors (time saving state). The notice determination table may be changed. In addition, the lottery result of the notice determination table (FIG. 107 (B)) includes "no notice", in other words, not only determines the notice type (notice form) but also determines whether or not to execute a notice effect. The preview determination table (FIG. 107 (B)) of the pseudo continuous fluctuation is configured as described above. However, a separate table for selecting whether or not to perform the preview effect is provided separately, and the preview effect is performed based on the table and a predetermined random number. When it is determined that the execution is to be performed, the type of the notice may be determined using the notice determination table of the pseudo continuous variation (FIG. 107B).

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol specified from the special figure fluctuation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 is the fluctuation pattern for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation, Whether or not to execute the pseudo consecutive announcement effect using the pseudo continuous fluctuation announcement determination table according to the basic level set in the symbol fluctuation pattern, and the content of the preliminary effect to be executed (advance notice type, advance notice mode) The decision is made.

[22-7. Special figure prefetch effect control processing]
Next, execution control of a prefetch notice effect in Modification 3 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure pre-reading effect control process in Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 110 is a table for selecting the contents of the pre-reading pre-notification effect of Modification 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example.

  When the special figure pre-reading effect control process is started, first, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) issues a special figure pre-reading effect command (special symbol 1 hold number designation command or special symbol) transmitted at the time of starting winning. It is determined whether or not a command for specifying the number of 2 suspensions (pre-reading, FIG. 16) has been received (step S3000). When a command instructing a special figure prefetching effect is received (result of step S3000 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a sets the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol specified based on the received fluctuation pattern prefetch command. The basic level is determined, the look-ahead effect lottery table (FIG. 110) corresponding to the determined basic level is selected (step S3001), and a random value for determining the presence / absence of the look-ahead notice effect and the notice type (the look-ahead notice random number) ) Is obtained (step S3002), and based on the selected look-ahead effect drawing lottery table and the random number value obtained in the step S3002, the presence / absence of a look-ahead notice effect and the look-ahead to be executed are obtained from the look-ahead effect effect lottery table (FIG. 107 (B)). The contents of the notice effect (notice mode, notice type) are determined (step S3003) .

  FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example of a prefetching effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. In the pre-reading notice effect, when a game ball wins in the starting opening, the state of the hold display is changed regardless of the progress of the change display of the special symbol currently being executed, except when the number of held start memories is 0. It is changed at a predetermined ratio.

  When the pre-reading notice effect is not executed, the hold display is "white", but when the pre-read notice effect is executed, the display color of the hold display is changed from "white" to a big hit according to the degree of expectation. It changes to “blue”, “green”, “leopard print”, and “rainbow” with a predetermined probability (FIG. 110). In addition, the basic levels set in the variation pattern of the special symbol specified based on the received variation pattern prefetch command are set so that the probability that the color of the hold display changes in the order of 1 to 5 is increased.

  When the color of the hold display is selected, the effect control program executes a look-ahead effect setting process of performing setting for changing to the selected color (step S3004). In the pre-reading effect setting process, the setting for changing the display color of the hold display is performed, and the setting for outputting the sound effect, turning on the lamp, and moving the accessory is performed at the timing of the change. After that, the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is cleared (step S3005). Thus, it is possible to prevent a plurality of prefetch notice effects from being executed for one start memory.

  When the display color of the hold display is changed to a color other than “white”, the presence / absence of stepwise change of the hold display, the change timing, and the like are determined by lottery, and a prefetch notice effect is executed based on the lottery result. Is also good. In addition, the pre-read notice effect may be based on the operation of the movable character, or may be lighting of a lamp or output of a sound.

  Further, when the game state at the time of receiving the command instructing the special figure pre-reading effect and the game state at the start of the variable display corresponding to the command instructing the special figure pre-reading effect are different (for example, the high probability state that continues a predetermined number of times ends). May cause inconsistency between the notice effect and the result of the fluctuation display, so setting the level to 1 prevents the discouragement of the player due to the execution of an unreasonably high expectation effect. Can be. Also, the level does not necessarily have to be 1, and for example, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the level may be set to the maximum value.

  On the other hand, when the command instructing the special figure pre-reading effect has not been received (the result of step S3000 is “No”), the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends this processing.

  If the power is cut off before the start of the change after the level of the prefetch notice effect has been set, the information on the level of the prefetch notice effect is initialized by the power interruption process, and the information of the predetermined number of changes ( Within the number of suspension upper limit minutes (maximum of eight), the level of the fluctuation may be set to the lowest level (level 1) and the preliminary lottery may be performed.

  Specifically, when the power is turned on, if the number-of-holds command is received following the power-on command, the level of the fluctuation is determined by the number of holds based on the received number-of-holds command (the total number of special figure two types). May be the lowest level. When the power-on command is not received after the power-on command, the level of the fluctuation is set to the lowest level by a predetermined number (eight for special figure two types). You may.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to manage effect data hierarchically by setting a level (effect effect information) corresponding to a variation pattern. This makes it possible to reduce errors in setting the effect data. In particular, since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an error that is difficult to find, such as a rare effect pattern, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the operation test of the gaming machine. By providing a gaming machine that operates stably, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, by drawing lots of the effect contents based on the level, the contents of the pre-reading notice effect and the normal notice effect (movable character (character A, character B)) executed in the special figure synchronous effect (the fluctuation) , The background of the display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C)), the story reach announcement effect, and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect can be prevented from being inconsistent. Thus, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the expectation that has been raised when the notice effect is generated being lowered after the start of the fluctuation.

  The special symbol variation pattern determined based on the special figure variation pattern command in the normal announcement setting process (step S1580), the story reach announcement setting process (step S1570), and the pseudo consecutive announcement setting process (step S1670) is set. It is determined whether or not the base level is inconsistent with the level set at the time of the start winning (when receiving a command instructing the special figure look-ahead effect). The determined level may be selected. Thereby, when a plurality of levels can be selected according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, it is possible to prevent inconsistency with the effect content at the time of pre-reading. If the result of the variable display is determined to be a big hit, the level may be set higher. In this case, even if the degree of expectation of the effect in the fluctuation becomes higher than the look-ahead effect, the expectation of the player is not spoiled.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of notice types (accessory A, accessory B, background image A, background image B, background image C, notice 1) are provided according to the level (production reference information) corresponding to the variation pattern. In other words, among the advance notice 2, advance notice 3, advance notice 4, advance notice 5), it can be paraphrased as switching between an executable notice type and an unexecutable notice effect. That is, when the level corresponding to the effect pattern is 1, as shown in FIG. 101, the notice effect according to the accessory A and the story reach notice effect and the pseudo consecutive notice effect according to the notice 1 are executed. On the other hand, the execution of other notice types is restricted. When the level corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is 5, the announcement effect corresponding to all the announcement types is enabled, and the execution of the announcement effect is not limited. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the execution allowable range of a plurality of types of notice types is determined according to the level (production reference information) corresponding to the change pattern, and the notice types (notice (Permissible range of execution).

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the case where one basic level is set corresponding to the variation pattern, and a plurality of levels may be set corresponding to the variation pattern. In this case, one of a plurality of levels set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is determined by lottery or the like, and the contents of the prefetching advance notice effect (for example, the notice type, etc.) are determined so as to correspond to the determined level. ) And a normal announcement effect (movable character (character A, character B)) and background of the display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C) executed in the special figure synchronous effect (the fluctuation) , The story reach announcement effect, the pseudo consecutive announcement effect, etc.) (the announcement type, etc.) can be determined and executed, and an effect display without inconsistency can be executed.

[22-8. Prohibition processing]
Next, a prohibition process according to a modified example will be described. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the special figure synchronizing effect performed by the peripheral control substrate 4140 in synchronization with the fluctuation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control substrate 4100, When a notice effect corresponding to a specific notice type (in this example, “leopard pattern”) is executed twice or more, control is performed so that a big hit (a big hit without a throwing ball may be excluded) is always performed. ing. Note that the prohibition processing is the same as the processing in FIG. 69 described above, so only different points will be described, and redundant description will not be given.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not to perform the notice effect in the normal notice setting process (step S1580) and the type of notice to be executed are determined. In the notice effect regarding the screen background (background image A, background image B, background image C) (hereinafter referred to as normal notice effect), a notice effect corresponding to a specific notice type (in this example, “leopard pattern”) is executed. (A “leopard pattern” is displayed as a background image B on the background of the display screen). In the prohibition processing of the modified example, when the result of the variable display game to be executed does not become a big hit (a big hit without a throwing ball may be excluded), a specific notice is given in the above-described story reach notice effect or pseudo consecutive notice effect. In addition to restricting the type (“leopard pattern”) from being executed more than once, when a normal announcement effect, a story reach announcement effect, and a pseudo-serial announcement effect are executed in one variable display game, a specific The notice effect ("leopard print") is restricted so as not to be executed more than once.

  In step S1562 of the prohibition processing shown in FIG. 69, the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 and the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 The notification type is determined by determining the story reach announcement effect or the pseudo continuous announcement effect announcement type stored in the assigned announcement mode storage area, and executing the announcement effect according to the stored announcement type. Even if the result of the display game does not become a big hit, it is determined whether or not a specific notice effect (“leopard pattern”) is to be executed two or more times in one variable display game.

  Specifically, whether the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is “background image B” displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen is stored in the notice mode storage area. It is determined whether the notice type of the story reach notice effect or the pseudo-serial notice effect is “notice 4” in which the background part of the dialogue is displayed as “leopard pattern” in the area 1912, and is stored in the normal notice mode storage area. The normal announcement effect based on the stored announcement type is performed, or the story reach announcement effect or the pseudo-serial announcement effect based on the announcement type stored in the announcement mode storage area is executed, and the result of the hit determination is determined. Is not a big hit, but in the same (one time) special map synchronized production, a “leopard print” preview production (normal preview production background announcement B, story reach announcement production, and pseudo-rendition) If it is determined that the prohibition 4) of the announcement effect is executed two or more times, the announcement information on the announcement type of the ordinary announcement effect stored in the ordinary announcement mode storage area and the announcement correspondence storage are stored. One or both of the notice information related to the notice type of the story reach notice effect and the pseudo consecutive notice effect stored in the area are deleted (discarded), or replaced with the notice information according to the other notice type (step S1563).

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the preliminary announcement type of the normal announcement effect and the announcement type of the story reach announcement effect and the pseudo consecutive announcement effect correspond to the prohibition condition, the information is stored in the normal announcement mode storage area. One or both of the advance notice information on the notice type of the normal notice effect and the notice information on the notice type of the story reach notice effect and the pseudo consecutive notice effect stored in the notice correspondence storage area are deleted ( Discarding) or by replacing it with another forecast type, one or both of the normal preview effect, the story reach preview effect, and the pseudo consecutive preview effect are not executed, or one or both of the preview types are `` Leopard '' The "leopard pattern" will not be displayed because it will be replaced with a notice type different from the notice type that displays the "pattern", so correct it to a state that does not correspond to prohibition conditions Door can be. By this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by performing the notice effect of displaying the “leopard pattern” twice or more in the same (one time) special figure synchronizing effect even though the result of the hit determination is not a big hit. Can be avoided.

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the basic level is set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the executable notice type is changed according to the basic level. If the level corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is 4, the result of the fluctuation display game does not become a big hit as shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. While the process for correcting the game is executed so as not to be executed twice or more, if the level corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is 5, the result of the fluctuation display game will be a big hit. Not executed. As described above, the type of the notice whose execution is restricted is changed according to the level of the fluctuation pattern.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the display color of the hold display may be changed to “leopard pattern” as a prefetch notice effect. However, even if the pre-reading notice effect of changing the display color of the hold display to the “leopard pattern” during the variable display game is executed, the above-mentioned prohibition condition does not apply. For this reason, when a look-ahead notice effect that changes the display color of the hold display to a “leopard pattern” is executed, a notice effect in which the “leopard pattern” is displayed in the normal notice effect, the story reach notice effect, and the pseudo consecutive notice effect Is not always a big hit. In other words, not only the special figure synchronizing effect performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 but also the specific notice effect (“leopard pattern” is specified for the hold display of the start memory executed by the start memory display unit 1911). It is possible to expect the execution of the number of (or more) advance notice productions to be noticed, and to expect the execution of a specific advancement production (the advance notice production of displaying the "leopard pattern" a predetermined number of times (or more)). Attention can be paid to the effects performed in a plurality of regions of the board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, in which the special figure synchronizing effect is performed and the region in which the start memory is displayed on hold. In this case, when the look-ahead notice effect is executed and the display color of two or more hold displays is changed to “leopard pattern”, the display color is changed to “leopard pattern”. The result of any of the variable display games in the starting memory to be executed may be a big hit (a big hit with no pitching may be excluded).

  In addition, a variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to `` leopard pattern '' as a pre-reading notice effect is started, and the normal notice effect, story reach notice effect, pseudo consecutive notice effect Even if the announcement effect to be displayed is scheduled to be executed, it does not correspond to the above-mentioned prohibition conditions. That is, when the variable display game based on the starting memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to "leopard pattern" as a pre-reading notice effect is started, the normal notice effect, the story reach notice effect, and the pseudo consecutive notice effect produce "leopard pattern". Is not necessarily a big hit. However, when the variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to “leopard pattern” is started as the prefetch notice effect, “leopard pattern” is already displayed as the prefetch notice effect. Therefore, if the “leopard pattern” is displayed even once in the variable display game, it is assumed that a big hit will occur, and the result of the variable display game is expected.

  Also, when it is determined to execute the notice 4 displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the pseudo consecutive notice effect described above, in step S1562 of the prohibition processing. If the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is the background image B displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen, the normal notice effect of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is displayed. One or both of the notice information indicating the notice type or the like and the notice information indicating the notice type of the pseudo consecutive notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area are deleted (discarded), or the notice information is changed to another notice type. It may be replaced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution of the “leopard print” notice effect two or more times even if the result of the variable display game does not become a big hit.

  Also, as described above, there are a plurality of timings for executing the normal announcement effect (the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol, after the reach or the pseudo-sequence, the first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the pseudo-sequence, and the development after the reach. The latter half or the latter half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-run) and the timing after execution of the pseudo-run announcement effect. Then, when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the normal notice effect is already executed at the timing of executing the pseudo consecutive notice effect, and the notice type of the executed normal notice effect is `` leopard pattern '' on the background of the display screen. In the case of the background image B to be displayed, the control is performed so that the notice 4 displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue as the pseudo consecutive notice effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a continuous announcement of a leopard print from displaying a "leopard print" and to display a "leopard print" twice or more even though the result of the variable display game does not become a big hit. The effect can be prevented from being executed. In addition, when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the normal notice effect has not yet been executed at the timing of executing the pseudo consecutive notice effect, and the notice type of the normal notice effect to be executed is displayed as “Leopard” on the background of the display screen. When the background image B displays the pattern, that is, the pseudo-announcement effect is performed prior to the normal announcement effect, and the display type of the normal announcement effect to be executed after the pseudo-announcement effect is displayed on the display screen. When the background image B displays the “leopard pattern” on the background (the background image B displays the “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen when the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is displayed. At the same time, the notice type of the pseudo-sequence notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area is notice 4 in which “leopard pattern” is displayed in the background of the dialogue, and the pseudo-sequence notice effect is performed earlier than the normal notice effect. (If executed), control may be performed so as not to execute the notice 4 displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue as the pseudo-sequence notice effect (the pseudo-sequence stored in the notice mode storage area). The notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the notice effect may be deleted (discarded) or replaced with another notice type). By this, if the preliminary announcement effect for displaying the “leopard pattern” is not yet executed when the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed, if it is determined in advance that the execution will be performed later, the execution is performed first. The notice 4 for displaying “leopard pattern” as the notice type of the pseudo consecutive notice effect is changed to another notice type (any of notices 1 to 3 that has a lower degree of expectation that the result of the variable display game will be a big hit than the notice 4). (Because the notice 5 is selected only when a big hit occurs), it is possible to create a so-called rising state in which the big hit expectation is improved in accordance with the progress of the game. Is expected, and attention is paid to the variable display game.

  In addition, among the above-mentioned plurality of timings (the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the first half of the reach after the reach or the pseudo-sequence after the reach, the first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-sequence, the second half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-sequence) Timing earlier than the pseudo consecutive announcement effect (for example, the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol) and timing later than the pseudo consecutive announcement effect (for example, at the time of the reach or the pseudo consecutive occurrence, the first half of the development after the reach, or the first half of the reach after the pseudo consecutive occurrence) , The latter half of the development after the reach, or the latter half of the reach after the pseudo-sequence), when the normal announcement production is executed at each of two or more timings. Later timing (for example, after reach or pseudo-sequence occurrence, the first half of development after reach or the first half of reach after pseudo-sequence occurrence, the second half of development after reach or pseudo-sequence occurrence) If the notice type of the normal notice effect to be executed in the latter half of the reach is determined to be the background image B that displays “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen, “leopard pattern” is displayed on the background of the dialog as a pseudo consecutive notice effect The notice type of the normal notice effect to be executed at a timing earlier than the pseudo consecutive notice effect when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit may be displayed on the background of the display screen. If the background image B displaying the “leopard pattern” is determined, control may be performed so as not to execute the advance notice 4 displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialog as a pseudo consecutive announcement effect. In addition, when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the background image B that displays the “leopard pattern” at two or more timings including the timing earlier than the pseudo consecutive announcement production and the timing after the pseudo consecutive announcement production is displayed. If the normal announcement effect to be executed is determined and the announcement 4 displaying the “leopard pattern” in the background of the dialogue as the pseudo-announcement effect is determined, the normal announcement executed at a timing earlier than the pseudo-announcement effect The effect of displaying the “leopard pattern” with the notice type of the effect and the notice type of the pseudo-sequential notice effect (the normal notice effect of the background image B displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen, The control may be performed such that the pseudo-announcement effect of the announcement 4 displaying the “leopard pattern” is not executed (in the announcement information indicating the announcement type and the like of the ordinary announcement effect stored in the ordinary announcement mode storage area). The notice information indicating the background image B to be executed at a timing earlier than the similar consecutive notice production is deleted (discarded) or replaced with another notice type (background image A) (when the background image C becomes a big hit, Of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect stored in the announcement mode storage area, and deletes (discards) the announcement information indicating the announcement type and the like, and changes the other announcement types (which are more varied than the announcement 4). The result of the display game may be replaced with any one of the notices 1 to 3 having a low degree of expectation that the result of the game is a big hit (because the notice 5 is selected only when the big hit is made). Also in this case, a so-called rising state in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is improved in accordance with the progress of the game can be made, and the player can expect a big hit and pay attention to the variable display game.

  Similar to the normal announcement effect, the lottery process (simulation consecutive announcement setting process) related to the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is performed at the start of the change (in this example, the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process (step S1550) of the effect setting process (FIG. 103)). In this case, the notice type determined in the normal notice effect setting process (step S1580) and the pseudo consecutive notice setting process (step S1550) respectively displays “leopard pattern”, in other words. The one that corresponds to the prohibition condition (in this example, the notice type of the normal notice effect is the background image B displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen, and the notice type of the pseudo consecutive notice effect is “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue. Is displayed, the notice information indicating the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area and the notice information stored in the notice form storage area. By displaying (or discarding) one of the notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the similar consecutive notice effect, or replacing one with another notice type, a “leopard pattern” is displayed in a single fluctuation display game. The effect to be performed may not be executed a plurality of times, and may be corrected to a state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition. Also, in this case, when the execution timing of the normal announcement effect is earlier than the pseudo-announcement effect, the announcement information indicating the announcement type and the like of the pseudo-annual announcement effect stored in the announcement mode storage area is deleted, It may be replaced with another notice type, whereby it is possible to prevent the notice effect for displaying the “leopard pattern” from being displayed continuously, and to prevent the change display game from being a big hit even though the result of the variable display game does not become a big hit. It is possible to prevent the execution of the announcement effect for displaying the “leopard pattern” more than once. Also, when the execution timing of the normal announcement effect is later than the pseudo consecutive announcement effect, in other words, when the pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed prior to the normal announcement effect, it is stored in the announcement mode storage area. The notice information indicating the notice type and the like of the pseudo-sequential notice production may be deleted or replaced with another notice type, whereby the “leopard pattern” is still displayed at the timing when the pseudo consecutive notice production is executed. If it is determined that the announcement will not be executed, but will be executed later, `` leopard pattern '' is displayed as the announcement type of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect that is decided to be executed at the previous timing. The notice 4 to be issued is set to another notice type (any of the notices 1 to 3 having a lower expectation that the result of the variable display game is a big hit than the notice 4 (the notice 5 is selected only when the big hit is made. Ah By replacing in order)), it is possible to create a so-called upstart state jackpot degree of expectation is improved in accordance with the progress of the game, so expect the jackpot to a player it can be made to focus on the variable display game.

  In addition, as described above, when all the scenarios for executing the specific effect of the pseudo continuous change are selected at the start of the change, whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous notice effect and the type of notice to be performed are determined, In step S1562 of the process, the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is the background image B displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen, and is stored in the notice mode storage area. When the notice type of the pseudo consecutive notice effect is the notice 4 displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue, notice information indicating the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area, One or both of the notice information indicating the notice type or the like of the pseudo consecutive notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area is deleted (discarded), or one or both notice types are changed to other notice information. It may be changed pointing to tell type. In step S1562 of the prohibition processing, the notice type of the pseudo consecutive notice effect is stored in the notice mode storage area, the notice 4 displaying “leopard pattern” is displayed in the background of the dialogue, and the notice type of the story reach notice effect is displayed. When the notice 4 displaying “leopard pattern” is stored in the background of the dialogue, the notice information indicating the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area and the notice type of the pseudo consecutive notice effect are stored. May be deleted (discarded), or one or both of the notice types may be replaced with another notice type. The pseudo consecutive announcement effect is executed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 as shown in the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process (FIG. 63), and is performed when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated. Is not executed. In other words, the normal announcement production and the story reach announcement production are performed according to the passage of time in the special map synchronization production, whereas the pseudo consecutive announcement production is performed in addition to the passage of time in the special map synchronization production and the pressing operation unit. It is executed in response to the additional condition of operation 405 being satisfied. For this reason, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, or when the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is not the background image B, or the notice of the pseudo consecutive notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area Even in the case where the type does not correspond to the prohibition condition such as the notice 4 or the like, the pseudo consecutive notice effect is not executed unless the additional condition that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated is satisfied. In other words, even if the notice type of the pseudo consecutive notice effect is stored in the notice mode storage area and the notice 4 indicating “leopard pattern” is displayed in the background of the dialogue, the notice is not always executed. However, the announcement effect of displaying the “leopard pattern” is important in that the player is notified that a big hit will be made by executing the game twice or more, and the result of the variable display game will not be a big hit. Nevertheless, if executed two or more times, it may not only confuse the player but also greatly discourage it. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, if the notice type of the pseudo consecutive notice effect is stored in the notice mode storage area as the notice 4 displaying “leopard pattern” in the background of the dialogue, the above-described prohibition condition is satisfied. For example, the pseudo consecutive announcement effect according to the “announcement 4” may not be executed, but by making corrections so that it does not fall under the prohibition conditions, it is ensured that the malfunction (the result of the variable display game does not win a big hit) Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the announcement effect of displaying the “leopard pattern” two or more times.

  Also, in the above example, when the condition is satisfied, the correction is made so that the condition is not satisfied. However, if the condition is compatible with the allowable condition, the condition is adapted to the allowable condition at a predetermined rate. You may do so. For example, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit (may be limited to a big hit with a pitched ball), a specific notice type (“leopard pattern” in this example) is displayed at a predetermined ratio by lottery or the like. The notice information stored in the normal notice mode storage area or the notice mode storage area may be replaced so that the notice effect according to the notice type) is performed a predetermined number of times (or more). As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the variable display game in expectation of the expression of the “leopard pattern”.

  Further, as described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is divided into a plurality of groups for each type of notice having the same degree of expectation of big hits, and a specific group of these plurality of groups (display of a pending display of a prefetch notice effect is displayed. As for the notice effect corresponding to the notice type whose color is a leopard pattern, the background image B of the normal notice effect, the notice 4 of the story reach notice effect, and the notice 4 of the pseudo-sequence notice effect, one special figure synchronized effect (fluctuation) In the display game), overlapping appearances (appearing a plurality of times (only two or more predetermined times) in one special figure synchronized production) are regulated. In this example, when the result of the variable display game does not become a big hit, as a specific group, the display color of the pending display of the look-ahead preview effect is a leopard pattern, the background image B of the normal preview effect, the advance notification 4 of the story reach announcement effect, and Although it was configured so as to prevent the repeated appearance (multiple appearances within one special figure synchronized production) of the preview effect according to the preview type of the preview 4 of the pseudo consecutive preview effect, the same applies to other groups. When the result of the variable display game does not become a big hit, duplicate appearance (appearance of a plurality of times in one special figure synchronized production) may be prevented, or some of other groups (for example, Regarding the display color of the pendant display of the look-ahead notice effect, i.e., the rainbow color, and the background image C of the normal notice effect, etc., overlapping appearances (appearance of multiple times within one special figure synchronized effect) are allowed. Good. In addition, even when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, if a single group is executed even once, for example, the notice 5 of the story reach announcement effect and the notice 5 of the pseudo consecutive announcement effect, the big hit is determined. With regard to the premium notice), overlapping appearance (multiple appearances within one special figure synchronized production) may be prevented. In addition, a notice effect having an apparent commonality is executed by expressing a “leopard pattern” as a group for preventing a duplicate effect of the notice effect (a plurality of occurrences in one special figure synchronized effect). Although only the thing was shown, as a notice effect having no apparent commonality by expressing a mode different from the “leopard pattern”, for example, a notice effect of the character C may be included. Is a character C that expresses not only the repeated appearance of the notice effect that expresses the “leopard pattern” (multiple occurrences in one special figure synchronized production) but also a mode different from the “leopard pattern”. Will be regulated as well. In addition, duplicate appearance is controlled by deleting any or all of the notice information stored in the normal notice mode storage area or the notice mode storage area or replacing the notice information with another notice type corresponding to another notice type. The present invention is not limited to this, and the overlapping appearance may be restricted by designating the type of the announcement effect and the announcement type to be executed in the variation pattern. For example, in the story reach, the instruction to execute the story reach announcement effect of the announcement 5 is given. By providing a fluctuation pattern and receiving a special figure fluctuation pattern command instructing execution of a special figure synchronizing effect according to the fluctuation pattern, by executing a story reach that expresses “rainbow color” only once. Duplicate appearance may be prevented. In addition, the fluctuation pattern for some groups and some types of notices (for example, a premium notice that is determined to be a big hit if executed even once, such as a notice 5 of a story reach notice production and a notice 5 of a pseudo consecutive notice production). Specify the type of notice effect to be executed and the notice type, and execute the above-described prohibition processing for other groups and other notice types. When the prohibition condition is satisfied, the normal notice mode storage area and the notice mode storage area May be deleted by deleting any or all of the advance notice information stored in the first place or by replacing it with advance notice information corresponding to another notice type.

  Further, even when the pre-reading notice effect of changing the display color of the hold display to the “leopard pattern” during the variable display game as described above, the prohibition condition does not apply. Therefore, when the look-ahead notice effect in which the display color of the hold display is changed to “leopard pattern” is performed, the group is the same as the group in which the display color of the hold display is set to “leopard pattern” as the look-ahead notice effect. Even if the background image B of the normal notice effect, the notice 4 of the story reach notice effect, and the notice 4 of the pseudo-sequence notice effect are executed, the jackpot does not always occur. In other words, while the repeated appearance of the notice effect corresponding to the notice type belonging to the specific group within one special figure synchronized production (multiple occurrences within one special figure synchronized production) is regulated, the special figure synchronized production is performed. In the hold display of the start memory executed by the start memory display unit 1911 which is displayed independently of the effect, the execution of the prefetch notice effect corresponding to the notice type belonging to the specific group is not restricted. Therefore, not only the special figure synchronizing effect performed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 but also a specific notice effect (“leopard pattern” is specified for the hold display of the start memory executed by the start memory display unit 1911). It is possible to expect the execution of a notice effect to show the number of times (or more) (notice effect), and to pay attention to it, and to expect the execution of a specific notice effect (a notice effect to show the “leopard pattern” a predetermined number of times (or more)). Attention can be paid to the effects performed in a plurality of regions of the board-side liquid crystal display device 1900, in which the special figure synchronizing effect is performed and the region in which the start memory is displayed on hold. In this case, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the display colors of two or more hold displays are simultaneously changed to “leopard pattern”, the hold color is changed to “leopard pattern”. May be a big hit (a big hit with no pitched ball may be excluded) in the start memory corresponding to the start memory. In this case, a specific memory is displayed on the start memory display unit 1911. Restricts the appearance of a plurality of pre-reading notices at the same time according to the notice type belonging to the group (if any of them has a starting memory that makes a big hit), but the notice belonging to a specific group that appeared in the special figure tuning effect The sum of the number of notice effects according to the type and the number of prefetch notice effects according to the notice type belonging to the specific group appearing in the start storage display unit 1911 is a predetermined number (2 in this example) or more. Not intended to restrict the composed, the number of occurrences of informational display in accordance with the notice type belonging to independently certain groups may be to regulate to become more than a predetermined number. For example, if the number of the notice effects according to the notice type belonging to the specific group that appeared in the special figure synchronized effect is equal to or more than a predetermined number, a big hit (may be a big hit with no pitch) may be used, If the number of look-ahead notice effects according to the notice type belonging to a specific group appearing simultaneously in the start storage display unit 1911 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, a big hit (a big hit without a throwing ball may be excluded) is obtained. In this way, the announcement effect corresponding to the notice type belonging to the specific group in the special figure synchronizing effect and the notice type belonging to the specific group in the hold display of the start memory executed by the start memory display unit 1911 are performed. At first glance, when the look-ahead notice effect appears at the same time, even if a plurality of specific notice effects appear, it does not necessarily mean that a big hit occurs.

  In addition, as described above, as a prefetch notice effect, a variable display game based on start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to `` leopard pattern '' is started, and a normal notice effect, a story reach notice effect, a pseudo consecutive notice effect is performed. Even if it is planned to execute a notice effect for displaying a “leopard pattern”, the above-mentioned prohibition condition does not apply. In other words, when the variable display game based on the starting memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to “leopard pattern” as the pre-reading notice effect is started, the display color of the hold display is set to “leopard pattern” as the pre-read notice effect. Even if the background image B of the normal notice effect, the notice 4 of the story reach notice effect, and the notice 4 of the pseudo-sequence notice effect, which are in the same level as the group, are not necessarily a big hit. However, when the variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to “leopard pattern” is started as the prefetch notice effect, “leopard pattern” is already displayed as the prefetch notice effect. Therefore, if the “leopard pattern” is displayed even once in the variable display game, it is assumed that a big hit will occur, and the result of the variable display game is expected.

  In addition, when the preliminary announcement type of the normal announcement production and the announcement type of the story reach announcement production and the pseudo consecutive announcement production correspond to the prohibition condition, it is stored according to which of the notice types corresponding to the prohibition condition. It may be made different whether to delete (discard) the existing notice information or to replace the stored notice information with notice information according to another notice type. For example, in other words, a predetermined number of times (the predetermined number of times) is set so that the group 4 consisting of the background image B and the notice 4 includes the notice type of the character C for displaying the movable body on which the leopard pattern is drawn as the normal notice effect. A group 4 controlled so as to always be a big hit (a big hit without a throwing ball may be excluded) when executed two or more times is configured to include a notice type for operating a movable body, When the special lottery result is out of order, it is set to the character C as the notice type of the normal notice effect, and the prohibition condition is satisfied based on the fact that the notice 4 is set as the story reach notice effect or the pseudo consecutive notice effect In addition, the normal notice mode is stored in the normal notice mode storage area so that the normal notice effect corresponding to the special character C is not executed without replacing the notice C which is the notice type for operating the movable body with another notice type. Control that corrects the notice information by deleting the notice information, and the notice 4 that is the notice type that causes the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display the image is replaced with another notice type, and the image according to the replaced notice type is replaced. One or both of the control that corrects by displaying the information may be executed. That is, the so-called display effect of displaying an image on the game-board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is easily replaced and controlled. Therefore, when a prohibition condition is satisfied, a different notice type is used to display another image. On the other hand, the so-called movable body effect of operating the movable body is difficult to replace and control because of the number of movable bodies installed and the time required for movement, and so the correction is performed by canceling the execution of the movable body effect itself. You may do so. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the control burden related to the game processing. When the display effect is to be replaced, all the advance notice information including the advance notice type that does not correspond to the prohibition condition is replaced with predetermined advance notice information among the advance notice information corresponding to the plurality of advance notice types (advance notice mode) packaged. Replacement may be performed, or only the notice type corresponding to the prohibition condition may be replaced with another notice type.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a lottery process for a normal announcement effect (a process of determining an announcement type and the like of a normal announcement effect) and a lottery process for a pseudo consecutive announcement effect (the announcement type of a pseudo consecutive announcement effect). And the like, and a lottery process relating to the story reach announcement production (a process of determining the type of announcement of the story reach announcement production), and the like. Although it is configured to determine whether the condition is met or not and correct it if it falls under the prohibition condition, the lottery process is executed based on the lottery result of the process executed earlier so that it does not fall under the prohibition condition You may make it. For example, in the effect setting process shown in FIG. 103, a normal notice setting process (step S1580) is executed to execute a lottery process for the normal notice effect (a process of determining a notice type or the like of the normal notice effect), and then the story reach notice When the setting process (step S1530) is executed, and the story reach announcement setting process is executed in step S1570 of the story reach announcement setting process (step S1530), based on the lottery result of the normal announcement setting process (step S1580). Specifically, the story reach announcement is made based on whether or not the announcement type of the ordinary announcement effect is determined to be the background image B displaying “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen in the ordinary announcement setting process (step S1580). You may make it determine the notice type etc. of an effect. In other words, when the special lottery result is unsuccessful (a big hit or a small hit without a pitch may be included), the background image B that displays “leopard pattern” on the background of the display screen is determined as the type of the normal preview effect. If it is, the notification type of the story reach announcement production is restricted so that it is not determined to the announcement 4 that displays “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue, and the bigger hit than the announcement 4 is the announcement type (the announcement 1 to the announcement 3), or when the special lottery result is a big hit (or may not include a big hit or a small hit without a pitch), the display type is set to "Leopard" If the background image B displaying the “pattern” is determined, the notice type of the story reach preview effect can be determined as the preview 4 displaying the “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue (the decision to the preview 4 is permitted). May be one that, may be forced into or notice also intended to determine the 4) so. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lottery process for the normal announcement effect is executed at a timing earlier than the lottery process for the pseudo consecutive announcement effect and the lottery process for the story reach announcement effect, but the normal announcement effect is as described above. The normal announcement production may be executed at a timing later than the story reach announcement production or the pseudo consecutive announcement production. In this case, if there is a possibility that the result of the lottery process regarding the normal announcement production may fall under the prohibition condition (if the special lottery result is out of place (or may include a big hit or a small hit without a pitch), the normal announcement production (The background image B that displays "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen as the notice type of the notice) is determined so that the lottery process executed at a timing later than the lottery process related to the normal notice effect does not fall under the prohibition condition. The lottery contents (such as notice types) are restricted. In other words, although the order in which the effects are performed is the earlier timing, the order in which the lottery process is executed is determined once by limiting the content of the lottery for the effect in the later timing so as not to fall under the prohibition condition. This eliminates the need for processing to change the contents. In the case where the special lottery result is unsuccessful (or may include a big hit or a small hit without a pitch), the background image B that displays "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen is determined as the type of the normal announcement effect. If it is, the notification type of the story reach announcement production is restricted so that it is not determined to the announcement 4 that displays “leopard pattern” on the background of the dialogue, and the bigger hit than the announcement 4 is the announcement type (the announcement 1 to the announcement By determining 3), it is possible to create a so-called rising state in which the big hit expectation is improved in accordance with the progress of the game, and it is possible to make the player expect a big hit and pay attention to the variable display game.

[23. Scenario production control procedure by level management]
Here, a more detailed procedure of the effect control by the level management described above will be described as a fourth modification. The reliability level is set based on information transmitted from main control board 4100. In addition, the reliability level is determined by lottery in order to execute a pre-reading advance notice effect and an advance notice effect of the change, and is set for each case. Hereinafter, an outline of a procedure for setting the reliability level will be described.

[23-1. Lottery for pre-reading notice production]
The reliability level of the look-ahead notice effect is set when the game ball wins the starting winning opening (at the time of the hold winning). When the game ball wins the start winning opening, the pre-read information is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the effect control board 4140. The effect control board 4140 randomly selects the type of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (the pseudo-serial type) and one or more types of the prefetch notice effect based on the received prefetch information. The look-ahead information includes a symbol pattern look-ahead command that indicates the type (small hit type) of the variation pattern command and the result of the variation display of the special symbol.

[23-1-1. Selection of pseudo continuous fluctuation type (pseudo continuous type)]
Here, selection of the type of pseudo continuous fluctuation (pseudo continuous type) will be described. Whether or not the pseudo-continuous fluctuation can be executed and the number of fluctuations are determined at the time of the holding winning, and are transmitted to the effect control board 4140 together with the pre-read information. Then, effect control board 4140 randomly selects the type of pseudo-continuous variation (pseudo-continuous type) according to whether or not the pseudo-continuous variation is executable and the number of times of the variation.

  FIG. 111 and FIG. 112 are diagrams illustrating an example of the type of pseudo continuous fluctuation (pseudo continuous type) in this modification. The maximum number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations in this modified example is four, and the selection probability of the pseudo-sequence type to be executed in accordance with the fluctuation pattern is defined for each number of pseudo-continuations. FIG. 111 shows the case where the number of pseudo runs is 0, and FIG. 112 shows the case where the number of pseudo runs is four. In the case where the number of pseudo runs is one to three, only the lottery probabilities are different, so that the illustration is omitted.

  There are three types of pseudo-continuous fluctuations in this modification example: a STORY (story) pseudo-ream, a deadly technique pseudo-ream, and a hyper pseudo-ream. . It is also possible to select whether or not to execute the pseudo run. Then, a lottery probability is defined according to the fluctuation pattern.

  In addition, the greater the number of pseudo runs, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, comparing FIGS. 111 and 112, a setting is made such that the probability of executing the pseudo run is higher when the number of pseudo runs is four. Have been. In addition, when the number of pseudo runs is four, a so-called draw effect is not executed except for fluctuations in which no reach occurs.

[23-1-2. Winning Confidence Level Lottery]
When the type of the pseudo-continuous variation (pseudo-continuous type) is determined, the effect control board 4140 sets the winning reliability level based on the determined type of the pseudo-continuous variation and the symbol type look-ahead command included in the look-ahead information. Lottery. In the above-described example, the reliability level is set based on the fluctuation pattern. However, in the present modification, the winning reliability level is determined based on the type of the big hit together with the fluctuation pattern information. That is, it is determined in consideration of the result of the variable display of the special symbol.

  The winning reliability level in this modified example is determined in correspondence with the symbol group corresponding to the type of special symbol (big hit symbol, symbol type prefetch command) and the variation pattern (variation pattern prefetch command). FIG. 113 is a view for explaining an example of the type of the symbol group in the present modified example. FIG. 114 is a view for explaining an example of the definition of the symbol group in the present modification.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 113, three types of symbol groups are defined. More specifically, group 1 is for a symbol that is out of shape, group 2 is for a symbol with a jackpot other than the jackpot of the maximum round, and group 3 is for a symbol with a jackpot in the case of the maximum round.

  Next, referring to FIG. 114, a symbol group corresponding to a symbol prefetch command value (symbol type prefetch command mode value) is defined. The symbol look-ahead command value corresponds to the symbol name (big hit type). In addition, the big hit without a payout corresponds to the group 1 for a missing symbol. Further, the group 3 is set to “05H”, “09H” and “0AH”, which are the maximum rounds (10R) in the special figure 1, and “0EH”, which is the maximum round (16R) in the special figure 2.

  As described above, based on the symbol look-ahead command value notified from the main control board 4100, the group is classified into groups according to the number of game balls to be paid out (game value provided to the player), and according to the classified group. To set the winning reliability level.

  In the present modified example, the winning reliability level lottery table is set according to the symbol group and the number of pseudo consecutive runs. When the symbol group and the number of pseudo consecutive runs are determined, the corresponding winning reliability level lottery table is specified. Then, the prize-winning reliability level is determined based on the specified prize-winning reliability level lottery table. The procedure for determining the winning reliability level will be described below.

  First, the winning reliability level will be specifically described. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of the winning reliability level in the present modified example. As shown in FIG. 115, winning reliability levels from level (LV) 0 to level 7 are set in ascending order of the big hit expectation (reliability).

  As the effect content according to the winning reliability level, no effect is executed in the case of level 0, and a gaseous effect is executed in the case of level 1. Then, as the level increases, the reliability increases. At the level 6, a highly reliable character (a ladybug) appears, and at the level 7, a premium effect indicating a jackpot determination is executed.

  Next, an example of the winning reliability level lottery table will be described. FIG. 116 to FIG. 121 are diagrams showing an example of the winning reliability level lottery table in the present modified example. 116 shows the case where the number of pseudo runs is 0 in the symbol group 1, FIG. 117 shows the case where the number of pseudo runs is 4 in the symbol group 1, FIG. 118 shows the case where the number of pseudo runs is 0 in the symbol group 2, and FIG. 2 shows a case where the number of pseudo runs is four, FIG. 120 shows a case where the number of pseudo runs is zero in the symbol group 3, and FIG. 121 shows a case where the number of pseudo runs is four in the symbol group 3. In the case where the number of pseudo runs is one to three, only the lottery probabilities are different, so that the illustration is omitted. In this modification, the winning reliability level lottery table is provided for each number of pseudo runs, but a winning reliability level lottery table may be provided for each type of pseudo run.

  In this modification, based on the fluctuation pattern notified from the main control board 4100, the winning reliability level is randomly selected from the winning reliability level lottery tables shown in FIGS. For example, if the symbol group 2 is selected and the number of pseudo-reams is four, and if the variation pattern is “character short reach big hit” (PTN is 21), the winning level reliability level lottery table of FIG. 119 is obtained. I do. Then, level 4 is selected with a probability of 30%, level 5 is selected with a probability of 30%, and level 6 is selected with a probability of 40%.

  In this way, by selecting the reliability level at the time of winning in consideration of the result of the variable display of the special symbol, for example, a notice mode of level 7 (a premium notice which is a special notice effect in which a big hit is determined when it appears) is maximized. It is possible to appear only when a big hit fluctuation that becomes the number of balls occurs, and for a change that generates a big hit that is relatively unfavorable to the player, such as a big hit with a small number of balls or a big hit that does not shift to the high probability state, By setting the reliability level at the time of winning to a low level, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from being excessively excited.

[23-1-3. Look-ahead production combination lottery]
When the reliability level at the time of winning is selected as described above, a prefetch effect to be executed (a prefetch notice effect) is randomly selected. In this modification, as a prefetch effect, a prefetch effect in which a specific effect such as changing the background display is executed, and a prefetch effect in which the hold display is changed can be executed. In addition, since the pre-reading effect is to be executed until the change to be the target of the pre-reading effect is started, an effect is executed according to the number of times the pre-reading effect can be executed.

  The look-ahead effect for executing a specific effect can be executed by combining a plurality of effects, and is executed by combining one or a plurality of look-ahead effects (a look-ahead announcement effect) in accordance with a winning reliability level. . In this modified example, a predetermined notice effect is executed `` story effect look-ahead notice '' `` special technique level look-ahead '' `` hyper effect look-ahead notice '' By stopping the identification symbol or performing a specific effect at the time of fluctuation stop, it suggests that the subsequent fluctuation is of high expectation. It is possible to execute a "light guide plate look-ahead" to be used and a "thunder cloud mode" to display a thunder cloud on the background.

  FIG. 122 to FIG. 129 are diagrams illustrating an example of a pre-reading effect combination lottery of the present modified example, in which a lottery table is set according to the type of the pseudo run to be executed and the number of variations in which the pre-reading effect can be executed. FIG. 122 shows the case where there is no pseudo-run and the change concerned, and FIG. 123 shows the case where there is no pseudo-run and the number of pre-readable changes is four. FIG. 124 shows the case where the pseudo series type is the STORY pseudo series and the fluctuation is concerned, and FIG. 125 shows the case where the pseudo series type is the STORY pseudo series and the number of prefetchable fluctuations is four. FIG. 126 shows a case where the pseudo-sequence type is the deadly technique pseudo-seed and the fluctuation, and FIG. 127 shows a case where the pseudo-seed type is the deathblow technique pseudo-seed and the number of prefetchable fluctuations is four. FIG. 128 shows the case where the pseudo run type is the hyper pseudo run and the fluctuation is concerned, and FIG. 129 shows the case where the pseudo run type is the hyper pseudo run and the number of prefetchable fluctuations is four. In the case where the number of prefetchable changes is one to three, only the lottery probabilities are different, so that the illustration is omitted.

  In the present modification, a look-ahead effect corresponding to the pseudo-sequence type is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 124, when the Story pseudo-sequence is executed, a story effect pre-reading notice is executed. Similarly, when the special technique pseudo run is executed, the special performance level look-ahead is executed, and when the hyper pseudo run is executed, the hyper effect prefetch notice is executed.

  In addition, the countdown look-ahead notice, the same color pattern stop look-ahead notice, the fluctuation stop-ahead notice notice, the light guide plate look-ahead, and the thundercloud mode can be executed alone or in combination with other effects. In this modified example, the prefetch notice effect can be executed in a combination of 25 patterns including the case where the prefetch effect is not executed (in the case of level 0). Furthermore, the expectation of the big hit is set to be higher in the order of the pattern (PTN) 1 to the pattern 25, and a plurality of prefetching effects are easily performed. In the pattern 25, the countdown prefetch notice and the same color design stop prefetch , The advance notice at the time of fluctuation stop is set to be executed.

  Explaining in detail with reference to the drawing, for example, if the pseudo-run type is determined to be “special-kill pseudo-run” and the winning reliability is level 2 (LV2) (FIG. 126), a probability of 30% Does not execute the prefetching effect (PTN1), and executes the "special technique level prefetching" with a probability of 3% (PTN2). Further, "countdown prefetch notice", "same color pattern stop prefetch", "float prefetch notice", "light guide plate prefetch", and "thundercloud mode" are each executed with a probability of 3% (PTN3 to PTN7). Further, together with the “special technique level prefetch”, “countdown prefetch notice”, “same color design stop prefetch”, and “float stop prefetch notice” are each executed with a probability of 10% (PTN8 to PTN10).

[23-1-4. Hold lottery at the time of prefetching prize]
Next, a look-ahead effect for changing the hold display will be described. The hold display is displayed in a predetermined shape corresponding to the number of fluctuations held on the display device when a game ball wins at the starting port. The hold display can be displayed in a different color or shape as a prefetch notice effect in addition to the normal display (normal hold). In the present modification, the normal reservation is white, and changes to white blinking, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow (rainbow) according to the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 130 to FIG. 133 are diagrams illustrating an example of a prefetch winning prize hold lottery of the present modified example. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a table for lottery selection at the start of the winning prize, in a mode in which the change can be held and displayed. In the present modification, the upper limit color of the change of the hold display, that is, the form in which the hold display can be finally changed after the start winning and before the change is started, based on the winning reliability level, Lottery is selected at the time of starting winning from the table shown in FIG. The suspension of the change is displayed in an area different from the suspension display before the start of the fluctuation (for example, an area provided adjacent to the suspension display area), and the display state in the state before the fluctuation is changed in any manner. Warmth can be recognized by the player, and furthermore, the level of expectation can be notified by changing during the fluctuation.

  FIG. 131 shows the case where the number of reserves at the time of the start winning is one, FIG. 132 shows the case where the number of reserves at the time of the start winning is two, and FIG. 133 shows the case where the number of reserves at the time of the start winning is four. 130, and a lottery is performed at the time of winning the starting opening based on the upper limit color of the change of the hold display determined by the table shown in FIG. For example, if the number of holdings at the time of the start winning is four and the upper limit color of the change of the determined holding display is blue, the mode of the holding display at the time of the starting winning is based on the table shown in FIG. The lottery is performed. Specifically, the status is normally held at a probability of 50%, blinks white at a probability of 30%, and displayed in blue at a probability of 20%. Note that, in the case of increasing the player's expectation by changing the hold display step by step as the hold with the number of holds of 3 is exhausted, the drawing probability is different only, so illustration is omitted.

  In the present modification, by changing the hold display step by step as the hold is exhausted, the player's sense of expectation can be increased. Therefore, if the number of reservations is small, the opportunity for the change of the reservation is reduced. Therefore, when the number of suspensions is 0, the suspension display is performed based on the table shown in FIG. 130, and the variable display is started without any change. On the other hand, when the number of holdings is 1, the manner of the holding display at the time of the start winning is selected based on the table shown in FIG. Change the hold display. Furthermore, when the number of holds is large (for example, in the case of four), the hold display can be changed each time the hold is exhausted. At this time, the hold display is changed so as not to exceed the upper limit of the lottery change at the time of starting winning. The hold display may be changed by lottery at every predetermined opportunity, or may be changed stepwise up to the upper limit of the change. Further, it is not necessary to change the level step by step, and the level may be changed from blue to purple, or may be changed at once from the normal suspension to the upper limit (for example, rainbow).

  Further, the gradual change of the hold display may be such that the degree of expectation does not decrease (do not decrease), or may be changed so that the degree of expectation becomes the highest from the start of the change and then finally. Good. Alternatively, a hold display change scenario in which the manner in which the hold display changes stepwise may be selected by lottery based on the final form of the hold display. Thus, it is not necessary to randomly select the display mode each time the reservation is exhausted, and the control can be simplified. In addition, by making it possible to select only the suspended display change scenario in which the falling does not occur, the control for preventing the occurrence of the falling can be eliminated.

  As described above, based on the reliability level at the time of prize winning selected after the starting prize of the game ball, the prefetching notice effect is executed, thereby defining the variation pattern, the big hit symbol, and the effect pattern for each combination thereof. Since the necessity is eliminated, management of the effect control data can be facilitated.

[23-2. Notice scenario lottery at the time of the change]
Next, the lottery procedure of the notice scenario at the time of the change will be described. First, the lottery of the notice scenario at the time of the change is performed at the start of the change. Specifically, the determination is made after receiving the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Using the determined winning reliability level, lottery of a preview scenario will be described in detail.

[23-2-1. Variation pattern classification lottery]
When receiving the special figure fluctuation pattern command, the effect control board 4140 draws a fluctuation pattern classification based on the winning reliability level set at the time of the hold winning and the received special figure fluctuation pattern command (variation pattern). The variation pattern classification is to subdivide the variation pattern, and it is possible to select a variation pattern in which the degree of production expectation is adjusted in more detail. FIG. 134 and FIG. 135 are diagrams illustrating an example of the variation pattern classification of the present modification. FIG. 134 is a lottery table when the winning reliability level is 0, and FIG. 135 is a drawing of the winning reliability level 7. Shows a lottery table in the case. As for the other reliability levels at the time of the prize, only the lottery probability or the reliability level of each effect is different, so that illustration and detailed description are omitted.

  Note that the prize-winning reliability level used for the lottery of the notice level at the time of the change uses the prize-winning reliability level determined at the time of the start prize, but the look-ahead is prohibited (Special figure 2 during non-hours reduction, Special condition 1, during a big hit, before or after the change of the game state on the main control side, for a predetermined number of fluctuations before and after the change, and for all the predetermined fluctuations at power-on, or a combination of any of the conditions) If the reliability level cannot be created at the time of the start winning, for example, the winning reliability level is created using the special figure variation pattern command in the same manner as the procedure for determining the winning level at the time of the winning. Further, the reliability level may be determined by lottery only based on the symbol type command of the special figure variation pattern command, instead of determining the reliability level at the time of the winning at the start winning. The reliability level may be individually selected (determined) between the start and the start. In this case, the winning reliability level and the reliability level at the start of fluctuation are determined (determined) with a certain relationship. The certain relevance means that a lottery (decision) is made so that the reliability level at the start of the fluctuation is equal to or higher than the reliability level at the time of the prize, or the created reliability level at the time of the prize is determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern command. Is compared with the content of the prize, and the winning reliability level determined at the time of the holding prize is corrected. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the reliability level at the time of winning from being different from the reliability level at the start of change, prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. it can.

  When the reliability level at the time of winning is 0, the degree of expectation of a big hit is low. For example, if the fluctuation pattern is “character short reach loss”, referring to FIG. Either "degree 5%" or "character short reach reliability 20%" is selected with a lottery probability of 50%, and a fluctuation pattern classification with higher reliability is not selected.

  On the other hand, when the winning reliability level is 7, the degree of expectation of a big hit is high. For example, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same “character short reach loss”, referring to FIG. "Character short reach reliability 5%" is selected with 20% probability, "Character short reach reliability 20%" is selected with 30%, and "Character short reach reliability 50%" is selected with a lottery probability of 50%. Is selected. Note that as the reliability of the variation pattern classification, a notice mode having a reliability value corresponding to the reliability value is randomly selected.

  By setting the variation pattern classification in this way, even when a command specifying the same variation pattern is received from the main control board 4100, the detailed effect contents (variation pattern classification) corresponding to the winning reliability level are obtained. ) Can be selected, and an effect more consistent with the prefetch notice effect can be executed. When the fluctuation pattern classification is not set, when an effect with high reliability is executed by lottery at the time of the pre-reading advance effect, there is a possibility that an effect with low reliability is executed by lottery in the advance effect at the time of the change. On the other hand, in the present modified example, it is possible to prevent inconsistency in the contents of the effect by determining the effect based on the reliability level at the time of the prize together with the fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player. .

  In the variation pattern classification, as shown in FIG. 100, a variation pattern without a branch number may correspond to the variation pattern itself, while a variation pattern with a branch number may correspond to the variation pattern classification. At this time, the variation pattern classification may also be determined by the main control board 4100.

[23-2-2. Lottery points and notice levels]
In this modified example, the entire variation is divided into four, lottery points are provided for each of the divided sections, and the notice level is randomly selected for each lottery point. At the time of tempai (when reach occurs), the first half of SP reach and the second half of SP reach.

  136 to 139 are diagrams showing an example of a notice level table showing a notice level at each lottery point of the present modified example. FIG. 136 is a notice level table during the change in the change, and FIG. 137 is a notice at the time of tempai. 138 shows a notice level table of a notice effect in the first half of the SP reach, and FIG. 139 shows a notice level table of a notice effect in the second half of the SP reach. The notice level and the winning reliability level have a one-to-one relationship, and the winning reliability level LV7 is defined as premium, but the preview level LV7 is similarly defined as premium. In this method, the notice level is randomly selected using the prize-winning reliability level, and the notice mode in the fluctuating notice effect is executed in a more consistent manner with the look-ahead notice effect and the hold lottery determined by the prize-winning reliability level. That's why.

  In the notice level tables shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the contents of the effect patterns are added and set as the reliability levels, and further detailed explanations are shown. In an actual program, control is performed using a pattern number (PTN). For example, the pattern 1 of the varying level has a reliability level of 1 and the fuzzy notice appears with a 5-second variation, so that it is “variable_LV1_5”.

  Further, even if the reliability level is the same, a plurality of patterns can be assigned according to the effect contents (variation patterns). For example, patterns 1 to 7 are assigned to the varying reliability level 1. Have been. Similarly, the reliability levels are 2 for patterns 8 to 12, 3 for patterns 13 to 17, 4 for patterns 18 to 22, 5 for patterns 23 to 27, and 5 for patterns 28 to 27. 136 is assigned a reliability level 6, and patterns 33 to 37 are assigned a reliability level 7. A plurality of patterns will be described using the fluctuating LV2 shown in FIG. 136. The pattern 9 is assigned to the variation in which the reach is determined, and the pattern 9 is assigned to the variation in which the reach is determined and the pseudo-run variation is performed once. The patterns 10 to 12 are similarly one-to-one with the number of the pseudo runs. ing.

  Further, since the SP reach is executed only when the reliability level is 3 or more, the case where the reliability level is 3 or more is defined in the notice level table as shown in FIGS.

[23-2-3. Notice level combination scenario lottery]
Subsequently, a notice level combination scenario is randomly selected based on the selected variation pattern classification. FIGS. 140 to 143 are diagrams illustrating an example of a notice level combination scenario. FIG. 140 shows an example of a lottery table in the case where the number of pseudo runs is 0 (no pseudo run) and the normal fluctuation or normal reach is performed. FIG. 141 shows the case where the number of pseudo runs is 0 and the system reaches SP reach. It is an example of a lottery table. FIG. 142 is an example of a lottery table in the case where the number of pseudo runs is 4 and the normal fluctuation or normal reach is performed, and FIG. 143 is an example of a lottery table in the case where the number of pseudo runs is 4 and the system reaches SP reach. is there. The illustration of the case where the number of pseudo runs is 1 to 3 is omitted.

  The variation pattern classification lottery will be specifically described. For example, when “SP development_character SP second half reliability 80%” is selected, referring to FIG. 143, PTN5 is selected with a 10% selection probability. In this case, the notice level “fluctuating LV” is “fluctuating_LV4 — 4 times pseudo-ream”, the “temporary LV” is “tempai_LV5”, and the “SP reach first half_announcement LV” is “SP reach first half LV5”. , And “SP reach second half LV5” is selected for “SP reach second half-announcement LV”.

  In this way, by having a plurality of patterns that are made into a scenario by combining a plurality of notice levels for each change pattern classification, it is possible to execute a wide variety of effects from the start to the end of the change of the special symbol, Can be effectively changed.

[23-2-4. Notice lottery by notice level]
Subsequently, the content of the announcement effect is randomly selected based on the announcement level of each selected lottery point. FIG. 144 and FIG. 145 are diagrams illustrating an example of a plurality of preview lottery tables, and FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating a lottery table of “window preview at change start”. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a lottery table of “SP latter half cut-in notice”. The “window notice at the start of change” is classified during the change of the notice point, and a lottery is performed based on the content of the “changing LV” which has already been determined. More specifically, when “fluctuating_LV7” is selected for “fluctuating LV”, referring to FIG. 144, “hot red flame” has a 30% probability and “premier flame rainbow” has 50%. Is selected with a probability of The "SP late cut-in notice" is divided into the latter half of the SP reach of the notice point, and a lottery is performed based on the content of the "changing LV" which has already been determined. Specifically, when “SP reach second half LV6” is selected as “SP reach second half notice LV”, referring to FIG. 145, “7 red stars” has a 20% probability of “red star "33 stars" is selected with an 80% probability. In addition, instead of determining the content of the notice (notification type, notice mode) based on the level of each lottery point, the lottery is performed directly based on the fluctuation pattern command, the symbol type command, the winning reliability level, and the fluctuation pattern classification. You may.

  Note that the notice level combination scenario may be directly associated with the change pattern command without selecting the change pattern classification.

[Game machines with multiple production operation units]
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 197, a description will be given of a gaming machine that can further increase the player's willingness to operate. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 4140.

  FIG. 146 is a front view of the gaming machine including the sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 147 is a right side view of the gaming machine including the sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 disposed on the door frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described, but the description of the same configuration as described above will be appropriately omitted. The operation button 410 provided on the door frame 3 corresponds to the above-described pressing operation unit 405, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 also provided on the door frame 3 correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Equivalent to. For example, at the time of presentation of an effect, the player can participate in the effect by operating the operation button 410, the effect selection left button 331, and the effect selection right button 332. When the effect is not presented, the effect selection left button 331 or By operating the effect selection right button 332 by the player, the volume output from the speaker can be adjusted.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side in front view. The sword production operation unit 5000 stores a sword section 5010 having a blade section 5011, a handle section 5012, a flange section 5013 sandwiched between the blade section 5011 and the handle section 5012, and a blade section 5011 of the sword section 5010. A sword decoration body 5001 including a sheath portion 5020 capable of forming a sword.

  The sword decoration 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath 5020 can move in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword section 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword removal direction and the sword placement direction. The sword section 5010 is usually in a sword-pulling state in which the sword body section 5011 is housed in the sheath section 5020. In the sword-drawing effect, the sword section 5011 is in a sword-drawing state in which the sword body section 5011 can be visually recognized by a player. Then, the sword unit 5010 in the sword-drawing state can function as an operating means for receiving a sword-pulling operation by the player and returning to the sword-pulling state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 148, a description will be given of an opportunity to perform a sword-drawing effect accompanied by the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001). FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example of a selection table of an effect pattern in an effect mode in which a sword-drawing effect can be executed. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of a sword-drawing effect.

  The effect patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing production is performed after the execution of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, a pattern in which the sword-drawing production effect is performed without performing the sword-drawing preparation transition effect in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition effect in advance. There is a pattern in which the sword-drawing production is not performed even though there is a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is not performed or the sword-drawing production is not performed. Further, in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing production, Two patterns of a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (A), whether to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is randomly selected according to the type of the variation pattern determined by the main control board 4100 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Here, the plurality of types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for a large hit variation at the time of a big hit, a variation pattern for a small hit variation at a small hit, and a variation pattern for a loss variation at a loss, and the variation having an advantageous result for a player. The setting is such that the probability of the execution of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect increases as the pattern increases. Specifically, the sword-preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for the big hit, executed with a probability of 30% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for the small hit, and in the case of the loss fluctuation pattern. Performed with a 20% probability. In addition, the variation pattern at the time of the outfall change may change the probability in accordance with the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is performed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), the execution of the main sword-drawing effect is randomly selected according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect. Even when the type of the variation pattern is the same, when the sword-drawing preparation effect is executed, the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed is set higher than when the sword-drawing operation is not executed. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the variation pattern has a result that is more advantageous for the player. Here, even if the variation pattern has a low degree of advantage, the execution of the sword-drawing preparation effect is set such that the probability of executing the sword-drawing effect is increased. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for the loss variation, the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher than when the sword-preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for the small hit variation. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation pattern for the big hit variation, the sword-drawing main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation shift effect.

  In addition, when the sword-drawing production is performed, a sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed in advance, and the variation pattern that is advantageous to the player has a higher probability that the sword-drawing production in the form with the aura member will be performed. Is set to Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member by the sword movement of the sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 149 to 152, the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawing effect (sword-drawing preparation transition effect and the sword-drawing effect) will be described. Also, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword unit 5010 (sword unit 5011) itself capable of accepting a sword placing operation by the player, and the sword unit 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 149, 150), and an aura member 5035 is provided on a sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword body portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is united with a member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described for the case of an integrated decorative body (FIGS. 151 and 152).

  FIG. 149 is a state transition diagram illustrating the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword section 5010 (sword body section 5011) itself. The sword-drawing state, (C) shows a second sword-drawing state. FIG. 150 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 150 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a state in which the blade 5011 is pulled out of the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (A), the sword decoration 5001 in the normal state is a sword-inserted state in which the blade 5011 is accommodated in the sheath 5020. As shown in FIG. 149 (B), the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword-drawing operation in the sword-drawing preparation transition effect has only the portion of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade portion 5011 pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 and can be visually recognized by the player. Becomes the first sword drawn state. Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword-drawing operation in the sword-drawing main production has the second blade that the blade portion 5011 is further pulled out of the sheath portion 5020 and most of which can be visually recognized by the player. State. Here, the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state can function as an operating unit capable of receiving a sword-pulling operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided on the blade part 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the blade operation of the blade part 5011. In the case where the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5030 is sheathed when the blade part 5011 changes from the sword-delivery state (FIG. 149 (A)) to the first sword-drawing state (FIG. 149 (B)). The movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum operation) from the closed state (FIG. 150 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 150 (B)) inside the section 5020, and the blade section 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 also in the process of changing the blade part 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (FIG. 149 (C)). Although described later, the aura member 5030 is provided below the saw blade 5011a of the blade part 5011 even when the aura member 5030 is moved to the maximum, so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first drawn state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade part 5011 as shown in FIG. The aura member 5030 is provided below the saw blade 5011a of the blade part 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. A pinion 5033. When the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view by a driving unit (not shown) by the driving means (not shown), the rotational force is converted into the rightward movement of the rack 5031a and the leftward movement of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade part 5011.

  An LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs on a blade shaft 5011b is included below the saw blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011. When these LEDs emit light, the blade 50011 (aura member 5030) can be illuminated.

  Here, the operation timing of the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword part 5010) changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-drawing state, and the blade part 5011 is operated by the operation of the aura member 5030. The example in which the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state after deforming is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start operation (deformation) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword removal state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state functions as the operating means (including not only the mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 is operated maximally but also the mode in which the operation is stopped halfway) ).

  FIG. 151 is a state transition diagram illustrating the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020. The second sword-drawing state is shown. FIG. 152 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 152 is a longitudinal sectional view in a state where the blade 5011 is pulled out of the sheath 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same components as those in FIGS. 150 and 151 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 151 (A) to 151 (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 for storing the sword 5010 (sword 5011) is the same as the sword 5010 (sword 5011) described above. While the aura member 5030 provided on itself is movable in the left-right direction, it is movable in the up-down direction. The aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade part 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with the aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade part 5011 (the sword state (1st sword state ⇔ 2nd sword state). This enables the sword section 5010 (sword body section 5011) to be combined with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) so as to appear as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. 152 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end thereof is below the saw blade 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in a completely housed state, and is a hollow cylindrical surrounding aura member 5036 provided to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011, and a surrounding aura member 5036. , A right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The surrounding aura member 5036 is rotated by the driving means (not shown) so that the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in front view, the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in front view, and both pinions are engaged with each other. The linear motion is converted into the upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 152 (B), stops at a position where the surrounding aura member 5036 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to form the second bladed state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be illuminated.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion is maintained while maintaining the relative positional relationship in accordance with the change in the state of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) (sword placement state ⇔ first drawn state 抜 second drawn state). Although an example of combining with 5011 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start operating (coalescing) after the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set before the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state functions as the operating means (not only the full appearance state in which the sword decoration body is fully operated but also the halfway appearance in which the operation is stopped halfway) (Including a state with an aura member in a state). In addition, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade part 5011 so that the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by a player in the first sword-drawing state from the sword-pulling state.

(Example of sword production using a sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 153 to 158, a sword effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001) will be described. In the following, there is a case where the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the drawing), and an effect pattern ((X6) and (X7) in the drawing) in which the sword-drawing effect is not executed. Regarding the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing effect is executed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 (game-board-side liquid crystal display device 1900) and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 will be described. . FIG. 153 to FIG. 157 are effect transition diagrams of the sword effect. FIG. 158 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 and the operation validity period of the operation means.

  In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, “7”), and only the central decorative symbol is variably displayed. It starts by forming a reach state (FIG. 153 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed at the upper right of the display area, and an effect image indicating execution of a sword effect (movable of the sword decoration 5001) is displayed in the center display area. Specifically, after an image (FIG. 153 (X2)) in which two samurai face each other and start iai (FIG. 153 (X2)), one samurai holds a handle and holds a sword in a sheath (FIG. 153 (X3)) is displayed. Here, an effect indicating that the sword decoration 5001 is movable is performed by an image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this time, the sword decoration body 5001 of the sword rendering operation unit 5000 maintains the sword delivery state (FIG. 149 (A)).

  Next, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed by lottery based on the type of the variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, as shown in FIGS. 154 (X4) and (X5), the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed. When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a face with closed eyes of a samurai holding a sword is displayed in the above-described image, and the eye area is enlarged and displayed with time. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-drawing state, so that a sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed. Note that, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the sword-drawing main effect is more likely to be performed thereafter than when the effect is not performed. Therefore, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect can also be said to be an expectation effect in which the expected degree of execution of the sword-drawing main effect is indicated by the movement of the sword decoration 5001. In the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, by swinging the sword decoration body 5001 in the first sword-drawing state up and down, the player can expect the sword decoration body 5001 to further change to the second sword-drawing state. Good. Note that the vertical swing of the sword decoration 5001 in the first drawn state is performed to such an extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visually recognized by the player when the aura member is provided. On the other hand, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decoration 5001 may maintain the sword-inserted state, and the image shown in FIG. 153 (X3) may be kept displayed.

  Here, when the sword decoration body 5001 in the subsequent sword-drawing production is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath 5020 at the timing of the sword-drawing preparation transition production effect (see FIG. 150 (A)). )) To the open state (FIG. 150 (B)), the movable range is operated as much as possible (maximum operation), and the blade 5011 is deformed. At this time, in the sword decoration body 5011 in the first drawn state, the portion from the hand of the blade part 5011 to the habaki 5011a can be visually recognized by the player. Since it is provided below, even if the aura member 5030 moves to the maximum, there is no possibility that the aura member 5030 is visually recognized by the player. Furthermore, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same time as the timing at which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state. Therefore, the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operating means capable of accepting a sword placing operation by the player, and at the same time, the degree of expectation depends on the form of the operating unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

  Then, after the completion of the sword-drawing preparation effect, if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed by a lottery based on the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-preparing transition effect, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes into the samurai's forehead (Fig. 154 (X6)), and the image in which the samurai abandons Iai at the timing when the fluctuating display of the central decoration pattern is stopped is displayed. And a stop mode different from the right side decorative pattern, that is, a stop mode (here, “6”) is stopped and displayed (FIG. 154 (X7)). At this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the first drawn state to the sword-pulling state at the time of FIG. 154 (X6), and the sword-pulling state is maintained. That is, the reach effect is ended without the sword decoration 5001 functioning as the operation means.

  On the other hand, when the sword-drawing main effect is performed, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect ends, an image in which Iai slashing is performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is connected to the second sword-drawing device. State. Here, in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state, the aura member 5030 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 is not visible. There is provided a form without an aura member that allows the blade portion 5011 that is not deformed to be visually recognized.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, a case will be described in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the second drawn state has no aura member. When the sword-drawing effect is started, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the eye light is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the above-mentioned enlarged image of the warrior's eyes with his eyes closed in FIG. 154 (X5) (FIG. 155 (A1)), an image of cutting the opponent's samurai by pulling out the sword that was held is displayed (FIG. 155 (A2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state at the time of FIG. 155 (A1), and the blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player.

  Next, when a predetermined period elapses after the decorative sword body 5001 is in the second sword state, the sword decorative body 5001 is inserted into the sword by the player, that is, the handle 5012 of the sword section 5010 from which the player has jumped out of the sheath 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting the operation of holding down and pushing the blade 5011 downward so as to fit in the sheath 5020, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect for prompting the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword having the same form as the second drawn sword state of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message of “put the sword!” (FIG. 155 ( A3)). In addition, the LED of the internal LED substrate 5011c of the sword decoration 5001 blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. Further, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of Iai, and the operation effect image is displayed on the front in superimposition with the immediately preceding Iaia slashing scene image (FIG. 155 (A2)). (See FIG. 161 (G2) described later).

  Then, during the operation validity period, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation of grasping the handle 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 and putting the sword body part 5011 in the sheath part 5020, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword-putting state, A post-operation effect is performed according to the expected degree of an advantageous result, and the effect is ended with a symbol type hit notification (FIG. 156). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, the cut effect image is flashy displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 156 (C1)), and the center decoration symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the image of the opponent's samurai is defeated, and the image of the conclusion of Iai is stopped at the center of the screen in the same stop mode as the left side decorative pattern and right side decorative pattern, that is, the big hit mode (here, "7") It is displayed (FIG. 156 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of order, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly in the display area of the effect display device 1600 than in the case of the big hit (FIG. 156 (D1)), and the centrally-decorated symbol that has been variably displayed is displayed. A stop mode in which the center decorative pattern is different from the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern at the center of the screen together with an image in which the opponent samurai cannot be defeated at the timing of the stop display, that is, a detached mode (here, “6”) Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 156 (D2)).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, a case will be described in which the sword decoration 5001 in the second drawn state is in the form with an aura member. When the sword-drawing effect is started, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and sharpens the light is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the enlarged image of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 154 (X5). 157 (B1)), an image of cutting the opponent's samurai by pulling out the sword held is displayed (FIG. 157 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state at the time of FIG. 157 (B1), and is deformed by the aura member 5030 (the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032). Becomes visible to the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 has already been deformed by the aura member 5030 when the state changes from the first blade state to the second blade state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, after the blade portion 5011 is in the second drawn state so that it can be visually recognized by the player, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state, and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It is sufficient that the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with the aura member in the second sword state by the time the operation validity period starts. However, since the sword decoration body 5001 is already in the second sword-drawing state in which the player can perform a sword-pulling operation, the appearance of the aura member 5030 makes it possible to reliably recognize a change in the degree of expectation. If a long time is required for the operation, there is a concern that a player may cause an erroneous operation. Therefore, when a series of movements from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state are performed as in this example, the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player, and the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state. It is preferable that the operation validity period be started immediately.

  The images in FIGS. 157 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images in FIGS. 155 (A1) and (A2) described above. It is not possible to determine whether or not. By actually looking at the sword decoration 5001, the player can grasp which of the form with the aura member and the form without the aura member. Thus, the sword decoration 5001 can be noticed before the sword decoration 5001 functions as the operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration 5001 as the operation means, and can enjoy the operation effect without any confusion. Can be. Note that the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time does not need to be the same as described above, and may be any image that resembles an image so that the player can be directed to look at the sword decoration 5001. . For example, there may be some differences in the samurai images (differences in eye colors and effect effects).

  Then, when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player becomes an effective operation validity period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form as the sword decoration 5001 with an aura member. It will be displayed (FIG. 157 (B3)). Subsequent effects are the same as in FIG. 156 described above, and a description thereof will not be repeated. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 156 (C1) and (D1) may be displayed more gorgeously than in the form without the aura member.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158, a description will be given of the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 and the operation validity period in the sword-drawing effect in which the sword-drawing preparation transition effect and the sword-drawing main effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 158, when the reach effect is started (time t0), an iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is first shifted from the sword-inserted state as a sword-drawing preparation effect. The state changes to the drawn state (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern with the form with the aura member is set, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state. It is provided so as to be invisible to a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword removal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 further changes to the second sword removal state, and if the sword decoration body 5001 changes, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 has a form with an aura member. Can not do. However, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the sword-drawing main effect is executed, and the possibility of the aura member-attached form is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation can be increased. Even if the main sword-drawing effect is not performed, a sword-movable suggestion effect (FIG. 153 (X3)) is executed on the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword-drawing transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggested effect, a state change (movable) of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-drawing state can be captured.

  Then, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect ends, the sword-drawing main effect is subsequently started, and the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (time t2). Thereafter, the operation valid period starts after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the sword decoration 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation validity period is reached, an operation promoting effect using a sword related to a series of Iaido effects is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), a post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 returns from the second drawn state to the sword-delivered state by the sword-drawing operation by the player. Then, the operation validity period set in advance ends and the reach state ends (time t4), and the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, thereby ending a series of Iaido effects ( Time t5). Note that the operation validity period may end when a player's operation is detected, as indicated by a dashed line in the figure. When no operation is detected during the operation valid period, the sword decoration 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-inserted state when the operation valid period ends.

  Here, during a predetermined period (time t3-t2) from when the sword decoration 5001 enters the second sword state to when the operation validity period starts, the player operates the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state (aura member). A period longer than the operation validity period (time t4 to t3) is secured as a mode check period in which it is possible to check whether the mode is the attached mode or the light emission mode. In other words, even if the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operable by the player is in the operation position (second sword removal state) functioning as an operation means, operation acceptance is immediately started (operation valid period is generated). Instead, the player can operate after confirming the final state of the operation unit at the operation position. This allows the player to check the final mode before operating the sword decoration 5001, to increase the expectation for the subsequent deployment (for example, to increase the expectation in the case of the configuration with the aura member), and to prepare for the mind. Because the operation validity period starts as soon as the second sword state is entered and the state of the operation means can not be confirmed, it shifts to the operation effect in a hurry, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. Can be dispelled.

  Also, the sword decoration effect of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in a series of Iaido effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a movable effect (time t0 to t3) as a movable body of the sword decoration 5001. An operation effect (time t3 to t4) as an operation means is set as an associated effect. This makes it possible for the player to impress the switching of the function of the sword decoration body 5001 with a surprisingness and a variety of effects, thereby suppressing a decrease in gaming interest caused by a uniform effect by the conventional operation means. Can be.

  In the above-described production example, the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011) itself and the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 has been described. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided on the frame 5020 and is combined with a frame-side member (aura member 5035) to form an integral decorative body.

  As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operating means capable of changing (deformation or uniting) the aspect of members (sword section 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. are doing. In addition, the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword-pulling state, first sword-pulling state, second sword-pulling state, form without an aura member and form with an aura member) is such that a game ball is sent to one starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004. It is determined based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery that is selected by acceptance (see FIG. 148). Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 can indicate the degree of expectation that the variable display has an advantageous result for the player due to the change in the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, and raises the player's interest in the operation means (sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, before the decorative sword 5001 changes to a second sword state (operation position) that can be operated by a player, the degree of expectation is indicated by changing the state of the sword decorative body 5001 from the sword-deposited state to the first sword-drawn state. are doing. In addition, the aura members 5030 and 5035 appear in the state change from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state, thereby indicating the degree of expectation. As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (the first sword-drawing state and the appearance of the aura member) in the process of changing from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state (operation position). Therefore, the player has a strong interest in the operation means until the operation means becomes operable. In addition, when the state change of the operation means and the expectation suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the operation to the operation position is performed after the expectation suggestion is performed in advance, the expectation is high. In this mode, there is a concern that the player may operate erroneously even though the operation means is not yet at an operable position at the time when the player grasps the sword decoration body 5001 of this example. Since the change of the state to the position and the suggestion of the degree of expectation proceed simultaneously, the erroneous operation as described above can be prevented.

  Note that, in the above-described first drawn blade state, only the habaki 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is drawn out of the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be made visually recognizable in a single sword state. At this time, the amount of sword removal in the first sword-drawing state is less than the maximum amount of sword removal in the second sword-drawing state (operation position). Here, when the aura member 5030 (5035) is in the second sword-drawing state, it is in a completely appearing state. Since the player can visually recognize a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the degree of expectation is high from the first sword-drawing state, the player can have a higher expectation at the time of the first sword-drawing state, You can increase your interest in subsequent changes.

  In addition, in the case where a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) can be visually recognized by the player in the first sword-drawing state, it is necessary that the aura member is included in the stage of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect (high expectation). Since the player can understand and place great expectations, the disappointment when the sword-drawing performance is not executed in the subsequent development becomes extremely large. Therefore, when the sword-drawing preparation effect is performed, the emotion of the player is greatly shaken by the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect, and an effect with a high level of entertainment for the game can be provided.

(Modification 1-Sword-drawing using the operation buttons)
Hereinafter, referring to FIG. 159 to FIG. 162, a case where a sword-drawing effect is performed in the reach effect, and the sword-drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-drawing effect is triggered by a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Will be described. FIGS. 159 to 161 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the first modification. FIG. 162 is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration 5001 according to the first modification and the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, the description similar to the above-described sword-drawing effect (FIGS. 153 to 158) will be appropriately omitted.

  Here, an effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the drawing) in which the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword-drawing main effect is not performed, and after the execution of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect Regarding the effect pattern ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4) in the drawing) in which the sword-drawing effect is performed, the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation buttons 410 The transition and the operation transition of the sword decoration 5001 will be described.

  When the reach effect is started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an iai effect is started (FIG. 159 (Y1)), and an effect indicating the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 159 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation valid period are performed, and an operation promoting effect for prompting the player to perform an operation is performed (FIG. 159 ( Y3) At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emission mode, so that the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. The light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when an operation by the player is detected.

  When the sword-drawing preparation effect and the sword-drawing effect are not performed and the result is a disconnection, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the reach effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image for notifying the loss result (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 160 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is ended. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001 and the operation buttons 410.

  Further, in the case where the main sword drawing effect is performed after the execution of the sword preparation transition effect, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-pulling state. A sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 160 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a white character of "Tenchu" is displayed on the blackout screen (FIG. 160 (F1)), and an image in which the ally warrior is about to put his hand on the sword is displayed. (FIG. 160 (F2)). Next, a sword-drawing effect in which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (a form with an aura member) is started (FIG. 160 (F3), FIG. 161 (G2), and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword state to the second sword state (form with an aura member) by the main sword drawing effect, the immediately preceding FIG. 161 (G1) is different from the Iai image of the warrior shown in FIG. 161 (G1), an image in which lightning is running is interrupted and displayed on a blackout screen as shown in FIG. ) And the degree of expectation to win (hit) Iai according to the strength of lightning.

  Subsequent effects are the same as in FIGS. 155 (A2), (A3), and 156 described above. When the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword-drawing state and a predetermined period has elapsed, the sword decoration 5001 is replaced by the player. In order to function as an operation means that can effectively receive the operation of the sword decoration 5001, an operation validity period for effectively detecting the sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 occurs. Then, the player is prompted to perform a sword-pulling operation within the operation valid period (FIG. 161 (G2)), and the symbol type (hit or miss) is notified by the sword-pulling operation by the player (FIG. 161 (G3) or ( G4)).

  Next, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 162, the operation of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts the state change of the sword decoration 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), an operation validity period of the operation button 410 occurs at an early stage, and an operation promotion effect prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates the operation button 410 during the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) (time ty), the sword decoration 5001 starts to change its state, and changes from the sword-pulling state to the first sword-pulling state. Here, in the first drawn state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade part 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (time t2), and after a predetermined time has elapsed, this time the sword decoration 5001 is operated to function as the operating means. When an effective period occurs, an operation promoting effect to encourage the player to operate the sword decoration 5001 is performed (time t3), and the player operates during the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 (time t3 to t4) ( At time tx), the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is finished (time t5). If the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the preset operation validity period of the operation button 410 (time t1 to t2), the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the final form (first time) at the end of the operation validity period. The shape and the state of the aura member may be changed at a stroke. Further, the state change timing from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state is changed according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, that is, the state changes to the first sword-drawing state and then to the second sword-drawing state after a certain period of time. It may be. If the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is not detected within the preset operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001 (time t3 to t4), the sword decoration 5001 is switched to the second operation at the end of the operation validity period. The sword is returned to the sword-drawing state.

  In the first modification, the timing of the state change of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 by the player. The start timing of the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the start timing of the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration 5001 (time tx). As described above, the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is reversed (sword removal operation and sword placement operation) depending on which of the operation means of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated, so that mutual operation is effective. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operation means is operated during the operation validity period of one operation means, it becomes invalid.

  As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decoration 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the form (final form) when the sword decoration 5001 functions as the operation means is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 by the player (for example, the sword decoration 5001 is deformed and the state is changed to change the state with the aura member). In the second sword state). Thereby, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's willingness to operate can be increased.

  In addition, based on the operation of the operation buttons 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect images (FIGS. 160 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 161) corresponding to the deformation and the state change of the sword decoration 5001. Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, the operation value of the operation buttons 410 can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modification 2-Stage Aura Sword Direction Using Operation Buttons)
In the following, referring to FIGS. 163 to 167, based on the first modification, the appearance of the aura member 5035 in the form with the aura member of the sword decoration 5001, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011. A case in which the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of times the player operates the operation button 410 will be described. 163 to 167 are examples of transition transition diagrams of the sword-drawing effect of the second modification. The description of the same effects as described above will be appropriately omitted.

  The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 levels. The aura level 0 indicates a completely accommodated state where the aura member 5035 is not visually recognized by the player (FIG. 152 (A)). The aura level 3 is a completely appearing state (see FIG. 4) in which the aura member 5035 is combined with the blade portion 5011 in the second drawn state while maintaining the relative positional relationship in the sword-inserted state, so that the player can visually recognize the figure to the maximum. 152 (B)). The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears so as to be visible to a player by one third of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 appears visibly to the player by two thirds of the full appearance state.

  In this case, there is no performance pattern ((Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the drawing) in which the sword-preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword-drawing main effect is not performed, and there is no sword-drawing preparation transition effect. Is a case where a sword-drawing main effect is performed, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the final form (a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state (aura level 3)) by one operation of the operation button 410 (in the figure) (Z1) to (Z3) → (I1) and (I2) → (G1) to (G4)), a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and the aura level of the sword decoration 5001 changes stepwise. For the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure), the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword decoration Explanation of operation transition of 5001 That.

  In the above-described modification 1, the final form (the form at the time of operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is determined by one operation of the operation button 410. A stage operation effect of changing the aura level of the sword decoration 5001 by combining the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 is performed.

  First, in the effect pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not performed or the sword-drawing main effect is not performed, that is, in the effect pattern in which the state of the sword decoration 5001 does not change even when the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3) → follow the same effect transition as in FIG. 160 (E1) (E2) (FIG. 163 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIG. 164 (H1) and (H2)).

  Also, there is no sword-drawing preparation transition effect, but the sword-drawing main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member) by operating the operation button 410 once. ), After the same effect as in FIGS. 159 (Y1) to (Y3) of the first modification (FIGS. 163 (Z1) to (Z3)), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. Then, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decoration body 5001 is united with the sword body part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the sword body part 5011 in the sword-pulling state, and appears completely when the sword decoration body 5001 enters the second sword-drawing state. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 164 (I1)). The sword decoration body 5001 according to the first modification has the aura member 5030 in the form of the aura member 5030, and the second modification has the aura member 5035 in the second modification. FIG. 160 (F1) (F2) → tracing the same effect transition as FIG. 161 (FIG. 164 (I1) (I2) → FIG. 161 (G1) to (G4)).

  Also, in the case where there is no sword-drawing preparation transition effect but the sword-drawing main effect is performed, a plurality of operations of the operation button 410 are required, and in the effect pattern in which the aura level of the sword decoration 5001 changes stepwise, 1 The same effect transition as before is followed until the operation of the first operation button 410 (FIGS. 163 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decoration body 5001 after the first operation changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. The aura member 5035 is in a completely accommodated state (aura level 0) in which the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5035. The image displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as FIG. 164 (I1) described above (FIG. 165 (J1)).

  Next, the second operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (FIG. 165 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura levels 0 to 3.

  First, when the set aura level is "0" (that is, in the case of the mode without the aura member), even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 maintains the completely accommodated state, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, the stage operation effect is finished (hereinafter, no operation request of the operation button 410 is made), and it is notified that the operation returns to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state. An image (here, white characters of “Iza” on the blackout screen) is displayed (FIG. 165 (J3)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 follows the same transition as FIG. 160 (F 2) → FIG. 161 of the above-described modification 1 in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 0 in the form without the aura member. (FIG. 165 (J4) → FIG. 161 (G1) to (G4)).

  On the other hand, when the set aura level is any of “1” to “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is changed from the completely accommodated state to the one-third appearance state. Become. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 165 (J5)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is illuminated in green to indicate aura level 1.

  Next, the third operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation promotion effect in which the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed. At this time, an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 (FIG. 166 (K1)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be green indicating the aura level 1. When the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to a preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “1”, the aura member 5035 maintains the ３ appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( Thereafter, there is no operation request for the operation button 410), and an image (in this case, “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen) notifying that the operation returns to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state. (White characters) and an image indicating aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 166 (K2)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a 1/3 appearance state, and in the effect form (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1 (FIG. 160 (F2) → FIG. 161 of the first modification). The same effect transition is followed (FIG. 166 (K3) → FIG. 161 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “2” or “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the ３ appearance state to the 出現 appearance state. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image indicating aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 166 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is illuminated and decorated with red light indicating aura level 2.

  Next, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation validity period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with the image indicating the aura level 2, and the operation target operation button 410 is displayed. An operation promoting effect of illuminating decoration is performed (FIG. 166 (K5)). At this time, the emission color of the operation button 410 may be red indicating the aura level 2. When the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to a preset aura level.

  When the aura level is “2”, the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the stage operation effect is ended in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (Hereafter, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and an image (in this case, “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen) notifying that the user is to return to the sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state. Is displayed, and an image indicating the aura level is displayed (FIG. 167 (M1)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a 2/3 appearance state, and in the effect form (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2 (FIG. 160 (F2) → FIG. 161 of the first modification). Following the same effect transition (FIG. 167 (M1) → FIG. 161 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600.

  When the aura level is “3”, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the ／ appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image indicating aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 167 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is illuminated and decorated in a rainbow color indicating the aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the stage operation effect is finished (hereinafter, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and a sword effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state is obtained. An image notifying of returning (here, white characters of “Iza” on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image indicating aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 167 (L2)). Thereafter, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is similar to the above-described modified example 1 in FIG. 160 (F2) → FIG. The effect transition is followed (FIG. 167 (L3) → FIG. 161 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image indicating aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600.

  In the above description, the degree of merging with the blade part 5011 of the aura member 5035 is changed each time the operation timing at which the aura level rises increases the range visible to the player (increases the degree of appearance). Not limited to Even if the aura level rises, the aura level determined without increasing the appearance of the aura member 5035 (specifically, when the white character “Iza” is displayed on the blackout screen) is determined. A stock type merging may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is merged with the blade portion 5011 at a stretch so as to have an appearance degree corresponding to the level. Also, the target of increasing the appearance in a stepwise manner is not limited to the aura member 5035, but may be the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011). For example, the sword section 5010 (sword body section 5011) may be changed from the first sword state to a second sword state in a stepwise manner.

  As described above, in the second modification, while the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as the operation means is in the movable state, the player is required to operate the other non-movable operation button 410. It is possible to provide a simple operation effect, and to further enhance the interest of the game than in the first modification. In addition, since a plurality of operation opportunities are given to the player to develop the effect step by step, it is possible to impress the player with a great deal of involvement in the effect and prevent the interest in the effect from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is notified so as to be recognizable even in a subsequent effect, the player can feel the lingering sound of the operation effect.

(Another production pattern 1 using the sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 170, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described. FIGS. 168 to 170 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in a princess reach effect. Here, the following points mainly differ from the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001. First, the sword decoration 5001 in a sword-inserted state functions as an operating means, and detects a sword-drawing operation by a player. Second, the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Operable up to the front center.

  When the changing symbols form the reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols changes to the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 168 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 168 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, there is provided a specific decorative member SDY (robin) that can be moved up and down. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and is partially stopped above the display area so as to be visible to the player (initial state). I have. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sword-put state.

  In the princess reach effect, after the image of the princess heading to the back of the screen is displayed (FIG. 168 (A3)), an operation effect suggestion image indicating the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 168 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is started to start the operation validity period for receiving the operation of the sword decoration 5001, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to perform the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 169 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY are moved in small increments in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. Is also good. Then, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword-drawing operation by the player refers to an operation of pulling out the sword body portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 so that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration 5001 in a sword-put state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection notification operation may be an operation in which the sword section 5010 (or the handle section 5012) moves or vibrates up and down so that the player can feel an operation different from the own sword-drawing operation via the handle section 5012 grasped by the player. I just need. The detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle 5012. For this reason, since the player can visually confirm the operation detection, it is possible to reduce unnecessary contact (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) with the sword decoration 5001 and prevent the movable body from being broken or damaged. Can be.

  Although the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear in the player's sword-drawing operation here, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword-drawing operation, depending on the degree of expectation. You may do so.

  In the case where the end pattern is performed, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is not overlaid on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and is stationary above the display area (initial state). State) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (FIG. 169 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the off mode “767” (FIG. 169 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 169 (C2) is reported, but is not limited to this, and is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the detection reporting operation ends. You may do so.

  On the other hand, in the case where the development pattern is performed, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is centered on the front surface (the lower part of the display area below the display area of the effect display device 1600). (D1) (FIG. 169 (D1)) Next, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the second sword-drawing state (FIG. 169 (D2)). In this case, a plurality of patterns of princess shadows displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided. The color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed thereafter may be made different to indicate the degree of expectation of the lottery result by the princess reach (such as the degree of expectation of hitting and the game profit when hitting).

  Then, after the sword decoration body 5001 is brought into the second sword-drawing state by the sword-drawing operation by the player, that is, when a predetermined period elapses after the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword-drawing state is set. The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center in the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 169 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the full fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is displayed. The image of the surprised princess is displayed after the screen is removed (FIG. 170 (D4)). Thereafter, the sword decoration 5001 returns to the position where the original sword-drawing operation is performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a hit, a princess with a smile is notified of the hit. An image is displayed (FIGS. 170 (E1) and (E2)), and an image notifying the loss is displayed together with the princess who is sad when it becomes a loss (FIGS. 170 (F1) and (F2)).

  Note that, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. However, the movable effect in which the sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the front surface in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction. If the player is unable to move because he / she is grabbing when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. Even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration 5001, the performance itself proceeds, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 by the player can be performed at the left-right movable stage timing (FIG. 169 (D3)) of the sword decoration 5001. If it is held at the performed position, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, the effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the movable effect of dropping of the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) progress regardless of whether the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed. The game progress does not stagnate because it is configured to play. Note that the sword decoration 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a left-right movable effect when the holding of the sword decoration 5001 by the player is released, or may be configured not to perform the movable effect. You may.

  As described above, in the princess reach effect, the specific decoration member SDY which has suggested the operation effect (operation effective) of the sword decoration body 5001 is dropped and movable by the sword operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved forward by the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (in the operation position). To the left). That is, based on the sword-drawing operation performed by the player, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position at which the sword-drawing operation was performed. Can be suppressed. In addition, since one operation means is configured to be operable in a stepwise different manner (up and down direction during operation and left and right direction after operation) by a player's operation, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. The operation value of the operation means can be increased as compared with the conventional operation means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that the left-right movable movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed for the purpose of performing an effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and an effect integrated with the specific decorative member SDY (robin). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decoration operation is performed in a state where the sword decoration 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display 1600, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed by displacing to the left (left end of the frame). In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example by the player is an operation in the vertical direction (a sword-drawing operation of pulling the sword portion 5011 upward from below), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 be operated in a direction (the left-right direction or the like as in this example) different from the operation direction (here, the up-down direction) at the time of the operation by the player.

  Further, when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be determined. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually check for a certain period of time, unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the movable performance of the sword decoration body 5001 thereafter, and preventing the movable body from being damaged due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, if the mobile production cannot be performed due to the contact with the sword decoration 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is issued to release the player's hand, and an operation is required during the operation validity period. Even after the end of the detection notifying operation, even the contact of the operating means is prohibited, so that the operating value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other effect pattern 2 using sword decoration 5001)
Subsequently, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173. FIGS. 171 to 173 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in a reach effect including an operation effect of the operation buttons 410 used in various aspects. is there. Here, a pattern ((A), (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation suggestion effect indicating an expectation at which a change during execution is a big hit as an operation effect of the operation button 410 is performed, and an operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is suggested and developed as an effect will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 171 (A)), first, the operation effective period for receiving the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is The operation is started, and an operation promoting effect of prompting the player to press the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 171 (B)). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image of an operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and an operation validity period are displayed, and operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sword-delivery state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

  First, in a pattern in which an effect indicating a degree of expectation is performed by a pressing operation of the operation button 410, an effect image is displayed in a display area of the effect display device 1600 when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected. After that (FIG. 171 (N1)), an image indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed (FIG. 172 (N2)). After that, the result of the current fluctuation display (big hit, miss) is notified (FIG. 172 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the effect indicating the degree of expectation for the fluctuation display during execution. Alternatively, a character that changes the currently held display may appear.

  In a pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 171 (M1) displays an effect image indicating that an operation effect requesting the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of an operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 (here, a message of the title “chance of sword removal” and an operation description “a sword is required”) is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member in which the blade part 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 173 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword-drawing state and the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the specific decoration member SDY (draft role) is moved in small increments in the initial state in the initial state, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for prompting the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 173 (M3)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, an effect based on the result of the current fluctuation display is performed.

  In the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, when the player's sword placing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 173 (M4)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (the role of the hand) is returned to the initial state again, the big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (the hand of the role) has been released. An image (decorative design stop mode “777”, “spectacular” message) is displayed (FIG. 173 (M5)). On the other hand, in the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is out of order, when the player places a sword, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) is only stopped at the initial state by the small movement. In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the loss (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 173 (M6)).

  As described above, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting a degree of expectation and developing an operation effect of another operation means (sword decoration body 5001) can be performed. At the time of operating, the subsequent deployment cannot be specified. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in operating the operation buttons 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in interest in playing a game, which is a concern because the effect after the operation is monotonous.

  Further, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (pressing operation and sword placing operation) are different between the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001). (The pressing operation of the operation button 410) is requested by the player. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to a monotonous operation instead of shining.

  In the present example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword putting operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 may be an effective operation. In this case, the operation means that is effective in the second operation opportunity targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410 that has a relatively lower degree of expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. It is desirable.

(Other effect pattern 3 using decorative sword 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 174 to 178, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 will be described. 174 to 178 are diagrams illustrating screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword decoration 5001 in a reach effect. Here, the pattern ((A), (B1), (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (robin) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is not moved based on the pressing operation and is displayed in the out-of-position mode, the symbol display in the out-of-position mode is changed again and the player is provided with an operation opportunity again. Patterns ((A) (B1) (B2) in the figure → (P1) to (P4) → Q when operation opportunity of sword decoration 5001 is given / R when operation opportunity of operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 174 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , A message of “moving the movable body with a single blow of the button” is displayed (FIG. 174 (B)), and then the operation valid period for receiving the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A prompting operation promotion effect is performed (FIG. 174 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sword-delivery state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one shot (one time), and may be continuous hitting (a plurality of times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is gradually moved up and down in the initial state during the operation period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation. You may do so. Further, if the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivery state to the second sword-drawing state at this time.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is movable and a large hit is made, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is completely dropped from the initial state. (See FIG. 175 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, the display area of the effect display device 1600 from which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (robin material) has been released is displayed with an image (a decorative pattern of a decorative pattern) indicating a big hit. A stop mode “777”, a message of “excellent” is displayed (FIG. 175 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) does not move, when a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is stopped and the movable of the specific decorative member SDY is stopped, and the drop is movable. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in an off-center mode (“767”) is displayed in a swinging manner at the center of the screen (FIG. 176 (P1)). The decorative pattern is developed into a pattern (FIG. 176 (P2)) that is stopped and displayed in an out-of-position mode (“767”) or a revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a resurrection start image indicating that the fluctuating display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative pattern in the out-of-position mode of FIG. (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 176 (P3)), the decorative pattern is again in the reach state, is displayed in a reduced size at the upper right of the screen, and is operated in the center of the screen by either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Is displayed (FIG. 176 (P4)). Then, as the time elapses, the displayed eyes of the samurai are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is gradually moved up and down in the initial state (FIG. 176 (P5)). As a result, the player has an increased sense of expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (draft material) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be illuminated and decorated in a fast blinking manner, or the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword-deposited state to the first sword-drawn state and moved up and down. Then, depending on the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an effective operation means, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (robin) is performed. Note that the pattern for which the operation button 410 is to be operated is set to have a lower degree of expectation than the pattern for which the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat permeates the samurai's forehead of the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 410 is decorated with light emission (FIG. 177 (R1)). Then, while the small decorative member SDY (small handpiece) continues to move in small increments and the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, the operation validity period of the operation button 410 is started, and the operation for urging the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 177 (R2)). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, the light emission decoration is not performed.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 177 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed at the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed at the lower right of the screen so as to be visible to the player. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 173 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbol at this time. Next, the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is returned from the full fall state to the initial state again, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (robin) has been released is displayed on the screen. At the center, an image (a message of the stop state of the decorative symbol “777” and “spectacular”) for notifying the big hit is displayed (FIG. 177 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in a case where the result of the variable display is incorrect, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (screws) is stopped by a small amount, and the effect of the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, a decorative pattern in a mode shifted from the center of the screen ("767") is stopped and displayed (FIG. 177 (R5)).

  In the case where the sword decoration 5001 is used as the operation means, the image (sword decoration) in which the samurai who closed the eyes of the operation validity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and sharpens the light. (Decided image) is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state with the aura member (FIG. 178 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be decorated with light emission. The player can grasp from the image of the display area that the sword decoration 5001 is effective instead of the operation button 410. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (moving hand) is moved in small increments, the predetermined period elapses in the second sword state, and when the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 178 (Q2)).

  Then, in the case where the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in the above-described FIG. 177 (R3) and (R4) is performed (FIG. 178 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, in a case where the fluctuation display result is out of order, when a player's sword placing operation is detected, the same effect transition as that in FIG. 177 (R5) is followed (FIG. 178 (Q5)).

  As described above, the degree of expectation is suggested in accordance with the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (storage material) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, so that the degree of expectation is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image. It is possible to provide a suggestion, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, even when the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is not dropped and movable based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. Is done. Since the degree of expectation can also be indicated by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest, which is a concern due to a monotonous operation effect instead of shining.

  168 to 178 described above show three examples of reach effect patterns using the sword decoration 5001, but various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be provided, and the entertainment interest can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo continuous production using a sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIG. 179 to FIG. 193, a description will be given of a pseudo continuous effect using the sword decoration body 5001 whose form changes stepwise according to the number of times of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). The pseudo continuous production is a production in which the display of the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and the display is changed again, and is performed in response to the pseudo continuous change together with the pseudo continuous change in which the temporary stop and the repeated change are repeated once or more than once. And so on. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears to be stopped, but actually fluctuates slightly and continues to fluctuate. In the present example, when a variation pattern for performing a pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 4100, a pseudo continuous production of a production pattern that can be selected by lottery of production contents by the peripheral control board 4140 will be described below. Will be described.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, the form of the sword decoration 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. As the form of the sword decoration body 5001 described above, there are provided two types, that is, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member. Are provided.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating a form of a sword decoration 5001 used for pseudo continuous production. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be capable of changing the shape of the handle 5012 in two stages, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3. And an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visually recognizable. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 similarly to the above-described aura member 5035, but operates in the left-right direction similarly to the above-described aura member 5030. FIGS. 179 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-putting state, and show step 0 to step 3 in order. The sword decoration body 5001 takes one of the stage 0 to the stage 3 depending on the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (A), the stage 0 form is a form in the normal state similar to the above-mentioned FIGS. 149 (A) and 151 (A), and is an initial state in which no operation is required for any constituent members. The form is shown. As shown in FIG. 179 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 179 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle 5012 is spread and moved so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right from the stage 1 form, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 179 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decoration part 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 to form a decoration integral with the first decoration part 5012a. The form is shown. The stage 1 to stage 3 modes here allow the shape to be changed without causing the decorative sword 5001 to be in the second sword state. Further, the sword section 5010 capable of accepting an operation by the player and the non-operating sheath section 5020 operate together to form an integrated decorative body as an operation section of the operation means, so that a more powerful operation means is provided. Can be.

(Example of pseudo continuous production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 180 to 193, an example of the effect transition for the effect pattern for performing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 188 is a view for explaining the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the fluctuation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (A), the main control board 4100 causes the sword LV1 weak change pattern, the sword LV1 strong change pattern, the sword LV2 weak change pattern, the sword LV2 strong change pattern, the sword LV3 weak change pattern, and the sword LV3 strong change pattern. When any one of the six variation patterns is selected, a pseudo continuous effect is performed. The effect patterns for performing the pseudo continuous effect include basic effect patterns (sword LV1 weak effect pattern, sword LV1 strong effect pattern, sword LV2 weak effect pattern, sword LV2 strong effect pattern, sword LV3 weak) corresponding to the six types of variation patterns, respectively. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, specific effect patterns (the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and the pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern) are provided. When the change pattern is the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern or pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is selected. When the change pattern is the sword LV2 weak change pattern (sword LV2 strong change pattern), the sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern) is selected, and the change pattern is the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern). ), Any one of the sword LV3 weak performance pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak performance pattern and the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 performance pattern (sword LV3 strong performance pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 strong performance pattern and the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 performance pattern) Selected.

  In the effect pattern, the number of continuations (1 to 3 times) of the pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the presence or absence of the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 according to the number of continuations, and the case where the operation opportunity is given The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is set (see FIG. 188 (B)). The effect pattern names “LV1” to “LV3” correspond to one to three times the number of times of continuous pseudo-variation (re-variation). "Weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop position (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin). Further, the “pseudo sword LV1” is provided with an opportunity to select the sword decoration body 5001 for the first time of the pseudo continuous change (re-variation), and the pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is continued by making a selection not to be operated by the player. Is an effect that can be acquired. Also, the “simulated resurrection sword LV1” follows the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern of the basic effect pattern for providing the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 for the first time of the pseudo continuous change (rechange). This shows that after the drop effect of the special decoration member SDY (draft) based on the first operation opportunity of the change, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed again. The details of the effect contents of each effect pattern will be described later.

  Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of continuations of the pseudo-run change (re-change) increases, that is, as the morphological change of the sword decoration 5001 progresses. The lower the falling position of the object is, the higher the expectation is. However, when the falling position of the specific decorative member SDY (half curtain) is a half-fall, the number of times of continuous pseudo fluctuation (re-change) is one. The degree of expectation is set to be the same as in the case where the drop position of the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is a full fall with a small number of effect patterns. Specifically, the simulated continuous change (re-variation) is performed once and the sword LV1 with half-fall is expected to have a weak effect pattern of 29%. The expected degree of the LV1 strong production pattern is 40%, the continuation number of the pseudo-running variation (re-variation) is two times, and the half-fall sword LV2 is the expected degree of the weak production pattern of 40%, the continuation number of the pseudo-running variation (re-variation) is 2 The expected degree of the sword LV2 strong effect pattern of the first and second drops is 50%, the continuation number of the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) is 3 times and the half-fall sword LV3 weak effect pattern is 50%, the expected level of the pseudo-run variation (re The fluctuation degree) is set to be 3 times and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern of all drops is expected to be 65%. In addition, the specific effect patterns are set so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the selected variation pattern, even for the same effect pattern, and the higher the degree of expectation, the higher the expectation degree. The degree of expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53% when the selected change pattern is the sword LV1 weak change pattern and the sword LV3 weak change pattern, respectively. Becomes The expected degree of the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is 47% and 74%, respectively, when the selected change pattern is the sword LV1 strong change pattern and the sword LV3 strong change pattern. Further, after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the degree of expectation of the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is restored is set to 100% regardless of the change pattern.

  In the following, the pseudo continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 188 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 187 and the effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. 189 to 193. FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect transition example of a pseudo continuous effect common to all effect patterns. FIG. 181 to FIG. 183 are diagrams illustrating transition examples of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given while the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. FIG. 184 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of an effect after operation of the sword decoration 5001 (dropping effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin)) during a pseudo continuous change (re-change) common to all effect patterns. is there. FIGS. 185 and 186 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect transition characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. FIG. 187 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect transition example which is a feature of the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern. 189 to 193 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (robin) in the pseudo continuous production. FIG. 189 shows the sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). 190, FIG. 190 shows a sword LV2 weak effect pattern (sword LV2 strong effect pattern), FIG. 191 shows a sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern), and FIG. , FIG. 193 shows the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern. In the following, a description will be given along an effect transition example in the case where pseudo continuous effect is executed in an effect before the reaching of the reach state after the start of the variable display.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 180 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (storage item) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and a part of the screen is visible from the player above the display area (initial state). ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in the sword-putting state of the stage 0 form (initial form).

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 180 (B) and 180 (C), the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes a start image indicating the start of the pseudo continuous effect (effect information notification “Large chance if 100 bodies can be destroyed” message, warrior Is displayed, which indicates to the player that the pseudo continuous production is to be started. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (robin) and the sword decoration 5001.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (D), the three decorative symbols that have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are again changed for the player. Notify that. Here, among the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001. By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design of the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). At this time, although there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sword role) and the sword decoration 5001, the pseudo pseudo sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation). ), A sword image indicating the form (stage 1 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in advance is displayed. As described above, the form and the effect level (the number of pseudo-running changes) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-running change (re-running) are notified at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the start of the pseudo-running change (rerunning). Can grasp the stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change) at the stage.

  Then, when the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is started, as shown in FIG. 180 (E), it is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of FIG. 180 (D) described above. The simulated continuous sword design is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration design is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 at this time is a timing at which the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decoration body 5001 from the effect display that is moved and displayed toward the sword decoration body 5001 when pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. , That is, after the start of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). The morphological change timing of the sword decoration 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo-running change (re-change). May be started at the same time.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (F), the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state while being enlarged and displayed. The sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 180 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state in which the player can perform the sword-pulling operation is enabled as an operating means. No, that is, an operation opportunity suggestion image (a warrior image with closed eyes) indicating the result of determining whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity is displayed. In the subsequent effects, a pattern in which the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is effective (an effect pattern in which “LV1” is added to the name) and a pattern in which the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 are not effective (name) are performed in accordance with an effect pattern set in advance. And an effect pattern in which “LV2” or “LV3” is appended. Hereinafter, an example of the effect transition will be described for nine effect patterns in order.

(Sword LV1 weak effect pattern / Sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
First, referring to FIG. 181 and FIG. 184, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration 5001 as an operation means in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. The effect transition example in the case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes the above-described FIG. ), An operation confirmation image (image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image (FIG. 181 (T1)). Next, an image (“Opportunity !!” message) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, indicating that an operation opportunity to request the player to perform an active operation is given (FIG. 181 (T2)). . Then, an operation validity period is generated in which the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and a sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is promoted in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image in the same second drawn state (stage 1 form) as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message “Pay your sword!”. (FIG. 181 (T3)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, an expectation notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (storage item) according to the set effect pattern.

  Here, in the case where the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. ) Is dropped from the initial state to the fully dropped state. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword-inserted state by the sword-pulling operation by the player, and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) is returned from the full fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as that in FIG. An expected degree notification image (“100 defeat!”) For notifying the expected degree of the fluctuation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous production shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half-fall state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Here, the display of the expected degree notification image allows the player to grasp the end of the pseudo consecutive fluctuation (re- fluctuation).

  Further, when the set effect pattern is a “weak” effect pattern, when a player's sword placing operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 184 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (draft) Is moved from the initial state to a half-fall state. The half-fall state refers to a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is dropped and moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the full-fall state, and overlaps the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view. . Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the second sword state to the sword-inserted state by the sword-pulling operation by the player, and is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form). After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) is returned from the half-fall state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as that in FIG. The expected degree notification image ("50 body defeat!") For notifying the expected degree of the fluctuation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous production shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration 5001. Then, similarly to the “strong” effect pattern, by displaying the expected degree notification image at this time, it is possible for the player to grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  When the sword placing operation by the player is not detected within the operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) being performed. Is displayed (see FIG. 186 (W2)). In other words, if the player does not detect a sword placing operation within the operation validity period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword delivery state when the operation validity period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  Then, when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends, as shown in FIG. 184 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with a decorative pattern in a normal mode, and the reach effect is started. You. As for the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the “weak” effect pattern and the “strong” effect pattern. As described above, by operating the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword placing operation is required, the player grasps the degree of expectation based on the falling position of the specific decoration member SDY (border role), and performs the reach effect. I can welcome you. Therefore, even if the later reach productions are the same, it is possible to have a different feeling of expectation each time, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and further suppressing a decrease in the entertainment interest for uniform productions. can do.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 188 (B) and 189, operations of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (draft) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is operated in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. It is effective as a means and gives the player an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) half-falls by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) falls completely by the operation of the player. In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 189, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). FIG. 180 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 180 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (the second sword-drawing state) (FIG. 180 (G) → FIG. 181 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 181 (T3)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from the initial state to the entire fall state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and the expectation degree information corresponding to the entire fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the expected degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 186 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Sword LV2 weak effect pattern / Sword LV2 strong effect pattern)
Next, referring to FIG. 181 and FIG. 182, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern for enabling the sword decoration 5001 as an operation means in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. A description will be given of an example of an effect transition example in the case where there is an effect. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is not given at the first operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). After tracing the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 180 (A) to 180 (G), no operation opportunity is given to the display area of effect display device 1600 from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 180 (G). Image (image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword-drawing state is returned to the sword-pulling state while maintaining the form in the stage 1 form (FIG. 181 (S1)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols, which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-sequence manner to notify the player that the decorative symbols are to be re-varied (S2). ). Here, among the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001. By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design of the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 2 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation) is displayed on the pseudo-series sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (robin) and the sword decoration 5001. In addition, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. As described above, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation) starts, the form and the effect level (the number of pseudo-run variation) of the sword decoration 5001 in the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation) are changed. Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and understand which stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change).

  Then, when the second pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) is started, the pseudo consecutive sword design displayed at the time of FIG. 181 (S2) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-change of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form in which the handle 5012 is broken left and right and the first decorative part 5012a is visible (FIG. 181 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration 5001 is actually moved from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. (FIG. 181 (S4)). Note that the form change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form and the state change timing from the katana state to the second sword removal state may be set to be the same. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001. Since the sword decoration 5001 changes at a time when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decoration 5001, It can impress powerful movements and attract the player's interest.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 2 mode) in which the player can perform the sword-pulling operation is enabled as an operation means, that is, a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (a warrior image with closed eyes) indicating the result of determining whether to give an operation opportunity to the user is displayed (FIG. 182 (V1)).

  Here, when the set effect pattern is a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given in the second pseudo continuous change (re-change). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is provided from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 182 (V1) is displayed ( FIG. 182 (V2)). Next, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image ("Opportunity !!" message) indicating that an operation opportunity to request the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 182 (V3)). . Then, an operation validity period is generated in which the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated and the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is prompted in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image in the same second drawn state (stage 2 form) as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 182 (V4)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 184 described above, an expectation degree notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) according to the set effect pattern. This allows the player to know that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed. Further, when the player does not detect the sword placing operation during the operation valid period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo-sequence fluctuation (re-fluctuation) has been completed without performing a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is displayed (FIG. 186 (W2)). In other words, if the player does not detect a sword placing operation within the operation validity period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword delivery state when the operation validity period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188 (B) and FIG. 190, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (draper) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, no operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed. In a period T2 during which the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 2 form is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (the expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 190, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). FIG. 180 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 180 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced (see FIG. 180 (G)), but the sword decoration body 5001 in the operable state (second sword-pulled state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 181 (S1)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 181 (S2)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 181 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 181 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's throbbing feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) (see FIG. 182 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)) ), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 182 (V4)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from the initial state to the entire fall state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and the expectation degree information corresponding to the entire fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the second pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, a runaway image indicating that the expected degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 186 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2.

(Sword LV3 weak performance pattern / Sword LV3 strong performance pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIGS. 182 and 183, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern for enabling the sword decoration 5001 as an operation means in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is set. A description will be given of an example of an effect transition example in the case where there is an effect. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration body is obtained at the second operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-change) shown in FIG. 182 (V1). Since the operation opportunity 5001 is not given, the effect transition shown in FIGS. 180 (A) to 180 (G) → FIG. 181 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 182 (V1) is followed. In the display area, a continuation image (an image in which the warrior's eyes are closed) indicating that no operation opportunity is given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. The decorated sword body 5001 is returned to the sword holding state while maintaining the form in the stage 2 form (FIG. 182 (V5)).

  Next, the three decorative symbols, which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-sequence manner to notify the player that the decorative symbols will be re-varied (FIG. 182 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001. By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design of the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change). Then, in the pseudo consecutive sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a sword image indicating in advance the form (stage 3 form) of the sword decoration 5001 in the third pseudo consecutive change (re-change) is displayed. Is done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decoration member SDY (robin) and the sword decoration 5001. Further, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. As described above, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the third pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) starts, the form and the effect level (the number of pseudo consecutive change) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the third pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) are changed. Since the notification is made, the player can grasp and understand which stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change).

  Then, when the third pseudo consecutive change (re-variation) is started, the pseudo consecutive sword design displayed at the time of FIG. 182 (V6) is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-change of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the decorative sword body 5001 is changed from the stage 2 form to a stage 3 form in which the second decorative section 5012b projects above the first decorative section 5012a so that both decorative sections can be visually recognized as an integrated decorative body ( FIG. 182 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration 5001 is actually moved from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. (FIG. 182 (V8)). Note that the form change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form and the state change timing from the katana state to the second sword removal state may be set to be the same. Also, the form of the sword decoration 5001 does not have to be changed each time according to the number of pseudo-run changes, and may be changed in a plurality of steps at the final stage. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration 5001. Since the sword decoration 5001 changes at a time when the player's line of sight is directed to the sword decoration 5001, It can impress powerful movements and attract the player's interest.

  After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 mode) in which the player can perform sword-pulling operation as an operating means, that is, to play a game An operation opportunity suggestion image (warrior image with closed eyes) indicating the result of determining whether or not to give an operation opportunity to the user is displayed (FIG. 183 (X1)).

  Here, when the set effect pattern is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern and a sword LV3 strong effect pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given in the third pseudo continuous change (re-change). In the display area of effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (image in which the samurai's eyes are open) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 183 (X1) is displayed ( FIG. 183 (X2)). Next, in the display area of effect display device 1600, an image ("Opportunity !!" message) indicating that an operation opportunity to request the player to perform an active operation is displayed (FIG. 183 (X3)). . Then, an operation validity period is generated in which the operation validity period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated and the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is prompted in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image in the same second drawn state (stage 3 form) as the sword decoration 5001 is displayed, and an image indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay your sword!" (FIG. 183 (X4)). Then, when a sword placing operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 184 described above, an expectation degree notification effect is produced by a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) according to the set effect pattern. This allows the player to know that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed. Further, when the player does not detect a sword placing operation during the operation validity period, regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a “strong” effect pattern or a “weak” effect pattern, effect display device 1600. A runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo-sequence fluctuation (re-fluctuation) has been completed without performing the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is displayed in the display area of (). FIG. 186 (W2)). In other words, if the player does not detect a sword placing operation within the operation validity period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial state of the sword delivery state when the operation validity period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo continuous change (re-change).

  Next, referring to FIG. 188 (B) and FIG. 191, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (draft) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 during which the first pseudo-run variation (re-variation) is performed and the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation) are different. In the period T2 in which the sword decoration 5001 is operated, no opportunity is given to operate the sword decoration 5001. In the period T3 in which the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the game is played. Gives the operator an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) falls completely by the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (the expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 191, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). FIG. 180 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 180 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced (see FIG. 180 (G)), but the sword decoration body 5001 in the operable state (second sword-pulled state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 181 (S1)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the second pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 181 (S2)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 181 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 181 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced (see FIG. 182 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-pulling state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 182 (V5)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 182 (V6)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 to the stage 3 (see FIG. 182 (V7)). After that, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 182 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (the second sword-drawing state) (see FIG. 183 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)) ), An operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 183 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the “strong” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from the initial state to the entire fall state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and the expectation degree information corresponding to the entire fall is notified. The difference is that an image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

  On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 186 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern / pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 185 and FIG. 186, the sword decoration 5001 is made effective as an operating means in the first pseudo-running variation (re-variation), but the pseudo-running variation is selected by the player not performing the operation. A description will be given of an example of an effect transition in the case where the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can obtain the continuation (level-up effect) of (re-fluctuation) is set. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, an operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given at the first operation opportunity giving timing of the pseudo continuous change (re-change). . However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform a positive operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after tracing the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 180 (A) to (G) → FIG. 181 (T1), the display area of effect display device 1600 is provided with the operation opportunity of FIG. 181 (T1). 185. An operation selection image ("Is there an opportunity !? message") indicating that this is a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 185 (Z1)). )). Then, the operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect of prompting the selection of the sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Specifically, the same sword image in the second drawn state (stage 1 form) as the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation validity period are displayed together with the message of “putting or selecting a sword”. An image is displayed (FIG. 185 (Z2)).

  Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is a variation of either the sword LV1 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern and sword LV3 strong variation pattern). The subsequent effect transition greatly differs depending on whether the effect pattern is set based on the pattern.

  In the case of a pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak change pattern (sword LV1 strong change pattern), the sword-pulling operation by the player during the operation effective period is performed. If detected, it follows the same effect transition (FIG. 184) as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern.

  On the other hand, when the player does not detect a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”), the operation selection promoting effect illustrated in FIG. 185 (Z2) described above. Is completed, the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the second sword-drawing state in the stage 1 form to the sword-pulling state in the initial form, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the present selection operation opportunity. An image indicating that it was an opportunity to operate (“Was it an opportunity?”) Is displayed (FIG. 186 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (robin). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a runaway image (“enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed without a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 186 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 186 (W3)).

  In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the sword placement operation by the player during the operation validity period is performed. When detected, in the same manner as when an operation is detected at an operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, FIG. 184 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 184 (U1) → After tracing the effect transition of (U2)), in the remaining effect period (the total period of the periods T2 and T3), a variable display using a decorative pattern in a normal mode is performed (not shown). Then, the reach state is formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode at the same timing as the predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 184 (U5)). reference).

  On the other hand, when the player does not detect a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”), the operation selection promoting effect illustrated in FIG. 185 (Z2) described above. When the operation valid period in which is performed ends, the operation pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time indicates that no operation opportunity is provided at the first operation providing timing from the above-described FIG. 185 (Z2), that is, shifts to a continuous image (FIG. 181 (S1)) indicating the continuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. Then, similarly to the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, FIG. ) → FIG. 183 (X1) to (X4) → FIG. 184 (U1) → (U2) or (U3) → (U4) → FIG. 184 (U5).

  As described above, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is significantly different in the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the variation pattern selected on the main control board 4100. When the selected variation pattern is the sword LV1 weak variation pattern (sword LV1 strong variation pattern), the player should select to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and when the selection operation opportunity is performed, the player should select the basic effect pattern. Similarly, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation and start a reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, not only will you not be able to obtain the level-up effect described below, but you will reach the reach effect without being able to grasp the expected degree that you knew if you originally operated . When the selected change pattern is the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), the player should select not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If the operation is not performed at the selection operation opportunity, it is possible to enjoy the effect due to the continuation of the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) as in the basic effect pattern. On the other hand, if the operation is performed, the effect (continuous change of the shape of the sword decoration body 5001 due to the level-up effect) due to the continuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) that can be obtained without the operation is overlooked, and the form of the sword decoration body 5001 is initialized. Will return to the form. In the operation at the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained in accordance with the variation pattern selected by the main control board 4100 which cannot be known to the player is the opposite of the operation effect, and the operation in the operation valid period in which the operation is effectively accepted is a game. It provides a novel effect that brings operation results that are disadvantageous to the user. In addition, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater effect on the subsequent effect development than the operation at the operation effect of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate, and to suppress a decrease in the game interest caused by a uniform operation effect.

  In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak change pattern (sword LV3 strong change pattern), in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). When the player operates the sword decoration 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the level of the stage 3 form is reduced from the stage 1 form at the time of the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decoration 5001, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is continuously performed twice, the level is raised to the stage 3 mode, and the operation opportunity is provided again. Conventionally, a predetermined number of operations are required in the effect pattern, but in this example, two (LV1 and L3) operation opportunities can be given in advance, but one operation is performed by the player's operation. At the opportunity, the grant ends, and a novel effect reflecting the intention of the player can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate for an operation effect that does not shine in place, and also to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In other words, even if an effect pattern in which the sword decoration 5001 can be changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set by the variation pattern selected by the main control board 4100, depending on the operation of the player, the stage form may be changed from the initial form to the stage 1 form. You will only be able to see the changes up to that point, leading to reach production. Since the player can be caused to make an operation selection without being affected by the selected variation pattern (set effect pattern), the player can be given a real feeling that his / her operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  In addition, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (robin). . If the sword decoration 5001 is not operated, the degree of expectation cannot be grasped and the operation ends, or the form is further changed (level-up), and the operation is performed at the operation opportunity given after the stage 3 is formed. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be ascertained by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin). As described above, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the selection without operation produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or a higher effect than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 188 (A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the degree of expectation of the same effect pattern may be constant regardless of the variation pattern. Note that, in order to provide an appropriate effect that matches the player's own sense of choice, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern in accordance with the variation pattern and effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Then, referring to FIG. 188 (B) and FIG. 192, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (draper) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, in the period T1 during which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is used. As an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) completely falls by the operation of the player. In addition, when the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, since the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is originally provided three times, the specific decoration is provided. After the drop effect of the member SDY, the symbol change in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

  In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (the expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns. If the variation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak variation pattern or the sword LV3 strong variation pattern, the second and third pseudo-run variations (re-variation) are continued, and the second pseudo-run variation is performed. In the period T2 in which the (re-variation) is performed, no operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated by the operating means. To give an operation opportunity to the player. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) half-falls by the operation of the player is performed. In addition, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) completely falls by the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation of the player is not detected, the drop effect (the expected degree notification effect) is not performed in any of the effect patterns.

  As shown in FIG. 192, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 180 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 180 (F)). Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword-drawing state) (FIG. 180 (G) → FIG. 181 (T1) → FIG. 185) (Refer to (Z1)), an operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (refer to FIG. 185 (Z2)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a full fall state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and corresponds to the full fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) continues (when the sword LV3 weak change pattern or the sword LV3 strong change pattern is set), the sword is set. The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 181 (S1)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-run variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 181 (S3)). After that, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 181 (S4)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced (see FIG. 182 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword-pulling state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player. Is returned to the katana state (see FIG. 182 (V5)). Then, the sword decoration body undergoes the third pseudo continuous change (re-change) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 182 (V6)).

  Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 to the stage 3 (see FIG. 182 (V7)). After that, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 182 (V8)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (the second sword-drawing state) (see FIG. 183 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)) ), An operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 183 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the “weak” effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a half-fall state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state, and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from an initial state to a full fall state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and corresponds to the full fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

  On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the third pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of period T3, a runaway image indicating that the degree of expectation is not notified is displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 186 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  In addition, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is not continued (when the sword LV1 weak change pattern or the sword LV1 strong change pattern is set), the sword is set. The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the expected degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 186 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

(Simulated resurrection sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 187, after following the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern, it appears as if it is entering the reach production as it is, and then the pseudo resurrection in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re- fluctuation) is revived An effect transition example when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. Description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be appropriately omitted.

  The pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 4140 when the main control board 4100 selects the sword LV3 weak change pattern or the sword LV3 strong change pattern.

  When the set effect pattern is the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, similarly to the above-described sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the above-described FIGS. 180 (A) to (G) → FIG. 181 (T1) to (T3) Follow the production transition. Then, when an operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, the effect is the same as that of FIG. 184 (U3), (U4), and (U5) shown in FIG. After tracing the effect transition of (UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo-run variation with the pseudo-sword design is restarted again. In the case where the operation by the player is not detected at the first operation opportunity, similarly to other effect patterns, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state to the initial form of the sword placement state at the end of the operation effective period, Instead of the above-mentioned FIG. 187 (UA1) → (UA2), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-repetitive fluctuation (re-fluctuation) ends without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft). A runaway image (“Enemy, runaway!”) Indicating that the action has been performed is displayed (see FIG. 186 (W2)).

  The resumption of the simulated continuous change (re-change) is determined by the center of the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 187 (UA3). Is temporarily not displayed in the pseudo continuous sword design in which the decorative design of the right and left decorative designs is not prepared, specifically, the pseudo continuous sword design in a mode indicating the form of the sword decoration body 5001 and the effect level (the number of pseudo continuous change). Then, the player is notified (FIG. 187 (UA4)). At this time, the sword image of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form and the effect level 3 are displayed on the pseudo continuous sword design. At this point, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001, and the initial form (sword-put state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is restored, the pseudo continuous change (re-change) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of the temporary stop display (FIG. 187 (UA4)) immediately before the start of the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form, the form and the effect level of the sword decoration 5001 in the pseudo-run variation (re-variation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-run change (re-change) and approach it.

  Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo continuous sword design displayed at the time of FIG. 187 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the sword decoration body is set so that the effect display acts on the sword decoration body 5001. The display is moved toward 5001 and the re-change of the decorative symbol is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the initial form to a stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decoration section 5012a, and the second decoration section 5012b operate so that both decoration sections can be visually recognized as an integrated decoration body. (FIG. 187 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo continuous sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is actually changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state. (FIG. 187 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once in a plurality of steps from the initial form to the third form, it is possible to impress a powerful action and attract the player's interest.

  After that, the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 mode) in which the player can perform the sword-pulling operation is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given as described in FIG. 183 (X1) to (X5). When the operation by the player is detected after the effect transition of the specific decoration member SDY (not shown) according to the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity, regardless of the type of the variation pattern, The type of drop production of the "robin" is determined. If the operation has been detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is once in a half-fall state, so that the level is raised and the above-mentioned FIG. 184 (U1) → (U2) → Expectation notification effect by full drop effect of the same specific decorative member SDY (robin) as in (U5) is performed, and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends. On the other hand, if the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation due to the half-fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) as shown in FIG. 184 (U3) → (U4) → (U5). A notification effect is performed, and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends.

  In addition, when the operation by the player is not detected in the operation opportunity of validating the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation validity period ends similarly to other effect patterns. At the same time, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the sword-putting state of the initial form, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not perform the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (border hand), but the pseudo continuous change (re-change). Is displayed (refer to FIG. 186 (W2)), and the pseudo continuous change (re-change) ends.

  As described above, in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, the same effect transition as the above-described sword LV1 weak effect pattern is traced, and when the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is restored again, the level jumps to the stage 2 form and the stage 3 form Is performed in the same way as the effect of the second level (the effect of the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation) in the basic effect pattern), so that the player is surprised and has a stronger sense of expectation than the other effect patterns. You can face. In addition, the player is not distracted even if an operation opportunity is given in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) or the subsequent drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is half-dropped. The game can be enjoyed with the expectation of the revival of the pseudo consecutive fluctuations (re- fluctuations).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188 (B) and FIG. 193, the operation execution timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (draft) when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. .

  As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern, in the period T1 in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-change) is performed, the sword decoration 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operation means, An operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, irrespective of the selected variation pattern (sword LV3 weak variation pattern or sword LV3 strong variation pattern), a drop effect (speculation of expected degree information) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Direction) is performed. In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed.

  Then, the period in which the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is completed, the display temporarily returns to the decorative display of the decorative pattern in the normal mode, and then the third pseudo continuous change (re-variation) in another effect pattern is performed. Pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed using the sword decoration 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, changing the form into the stage 3 form. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is made effective as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. At this time, in the case where a drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is performed in the period T1, a drop effect (expected degree notification) in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. Direction) is performed. In addition, in the period T1, when the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (border role) is not performed in the period T1, the specific decoration member SDY (border role) falls by a half of the operation by the player. An effect (expected degree notification effect) is performed. In addition, when there is no operation of the player, the drop effect (expected degree notification effect) is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 193, when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change). (See FIG. 180 (E)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 180 (F)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (the second sword-drawing state) (FIG. 180 (G) → FIG. 181 (T1) → (T2 )), An operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 181 (T3)).

  Then, when the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) changes from the initial state to the half-fall state (see FIG. 187 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (storage hand) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half-fall on the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 187 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, a runaway image indicating that the expected degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 186 ( W2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

  Thereafter, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative pattern in the normal mode (see FIG. 187 (UA3)), but the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-fluctuation) is restored (FIG. 187 (UA4)). )reference).

  Then, at the same time as the pseudo continuous change (re-change) is resumed, the shape of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the initial form (stage 0) to the stage 3 (see FIG. 187 (UA5)). Thereafter, the state of the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (see FIG. 187 (UA6)), and is the operation enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's thrilling feeling is enhanced and the player sufficiently recognizes the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (the second sword-drawing state) (see FIG. 183 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)) ), An operation effective period for effectively accepting the operation of the player is started (see FIG. 183 (X4)).

  When the player performs a sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, when the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is performed in the first pseudo continuous change (re-change), the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is changed from the initial state to the full drop state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 184 (U1)). Then, at the end of the simulated continuous change (re-change) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (storage role) returns to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 corresponds to the full fall. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. In addition, although not shown, when the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is not performed in the first pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is changed from the initial state. The state is changed to the half-fall state (see FIG. 184 (U3)), and an expectation notification image of the expectation corresponding to the half-fall is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)).

  On the other hand, if the player does not perform the sword-pulling operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the second sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. Change form. Then, at the end of the pseudo-running change (re-change) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, a runaway image indicating that the expected degree is not notified is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 186 (W2)). )), The player recognizes the end of the period T3.

  As described above, in the pseudo continuous production using the sword decoration 5001, in the sword LV <b> 2 production pattern and the sword LV <b> 3 production pattern in which the pseudo continuous change (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times, the pseudo continuous change times are twice and three times, respectively. In the case of less than, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state each time the pseudo-running (re-fluctuation) is performed to make the player operable, but a valid operation period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the katana state without performing (without giving an operation opportunity to the player). For this reason, the player is expected to expect whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable, so that the player is interested in the sword decoration 5001 as an operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to operate and a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the pseudo continuous change (re-variation), the sword decoration 5001 returns to the initial form when the player performs a sword placing operation on the sword decoration 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect of providing a beneficial effect for the player by the operation of the player. Let the player choose the operation carefully. Therefore, the user can be interested in the operation of the sword decoration 5001, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to operate and a decrease in the interest in playing games.

  Further, the sword decoration body 5001 can change its form stepwise until an operation opportunity is given (until an operation valid period is generated), so that the player's expectation and interest are raised stepwise, and the game is played. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. Note that, during the period from when the sword decoration 5001 is in the operation state and the second sword removal state (operation position) to when the operation valid period is generated, the player operates in the operation position at the operation position (form, light emission, movable). , Etc.) is desirably provided for a period during which sufficient confirmation can be made. Thereby, the player can confirm the operation state before operating the sword decoration 5001. Therefore, the operation validity period is generated as soon as the second sword is drawn, and the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to eliminate the concern that the entertainment interest may be reduced due to the transition to the operation effect in a hurry.

  In addition, although the step change of the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 was shown by a form, it is not limited to this. Each effect form, such as a change in the light emission form or operation form of the sword decoration 5001, may be made to be able to change stepwise in accordance with the number of times of continuous pseudo-variation (re-variation).

(Application to look-ahead production)
In the above description, the sword-drawing effect in the pseudo-reach-reach effect has been described. A case where the present invention is applied to a look-ahead effect is described below. Hereinafter, a case will be described as an example where the third hold is a prefetching effect target and a sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the prefetching effect pattern.

  When the hold to be the prefetch effect is generated as the third hold 3, the same effect as in the above-described FIGS. 180 (B) to 180 (F) is performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. Note that the sword decoration 5001 is different in that the second sword state is limited to when an operation opportunity is given (an operation valid period is generated). Then, in the next change display (that is, the change display of hold 1 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIG. 180 (G) → FIG. 181 (S1) to (S4) is performed. Further, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of the hold 2 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as the above-described FIG. 182 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIG. 183 (X1) to (X3) is performed. Is Note that, as described above, in the pre-reading effect, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state only when the operation valid period occurs. Here, the operation validity period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 to be prefetched is started, and the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. From the second sword state). Thereafter, the same effect transition as in FIG. 184 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the prefetch effect is terminated.

  The state change of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-drawing state is limited to the generation timing of the operation validity period. It may be performed at the start. The same effect as the pseudo-reach-reach effect is achieved in the pre-reading effect.

(Pre-operation suggestion effect using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 194 to 197, a pre-operation suggestion effect that is executed before the operation valid period during which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is enabled by the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (robin). . Specifically, as the suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (border role), the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is located at the initial position. There are a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position, and the sword decoration body 5001 (from the operation button 410). When the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. More specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 194 (B)) for generating the operation validity period in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is located at the initial position even during the operation validity period. Is performed, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 is enabled with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 196 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is moved to the suggestion position is performed. Indicates that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes valid with a probability of 30%. Hereinafter, a description will be given of an example of an effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect.

(First suggestion pattern)
FIGS. 194 and 195 show either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 4140 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern drawn by the main control board 4100. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of a first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 194 (A)), the operation buttons that are determined in advance by the lottery of the peripheral control board 4140 to be validated. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operation means of the 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is generated. As the specific effect contents of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) indicating that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. This is displayed (FIG. 194 (B)), and at this time, the specific decoration member SDY (main part) maintains the initial position. There is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (main curtain) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period is generated for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) which is determined in advance to be the operation valid. Let it. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is at the initial position, the operation buttons 410 are enabled at a higher rate than the sword decoration body 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation of the operation button 410 becomes valid, as shown in FIG. 194 (C), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is maintaining the initial position. Let it. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation prompting image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the operation buttons 410 are decorated with light emission so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. In addition, even when the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is valid, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 194 (D), an operation validity period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (robin) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation promoting image for prompting the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Also, at this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-pulling operation by the player is enabled.

  If the operation of the effective operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is detected in FIG. 194 (C) or (D) described above, if the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (draft material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 195 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the role) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the role) is released. An image (decorative design stop mode “777”, “excellent” message) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a loss, the specific decoration member SDY (border role) is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC3)).

(2nd suggestion pattern)
FIG. 196 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is enabled during the reach effect, similarly to the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure showing the example of transition of the reach production performed. In addition, FIG. 197 shows that, although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is enabled once without operating the sword decoration 5001 and then the sword decoration is performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern in which the body 5001 becomes effective in operation.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is one of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 that is determined in advance to be effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 4140. This is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) indicating that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern. However, in the second suggestion pattern, along with the display of the operation effect suggestion image, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. Moved little by little in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

  Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is operated at the suggestion position, the operation valid period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) which is determined in advance to be the operation valid is set. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration 5001 is set to be effective, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border role) is in the suggested position, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is valid, as shown in FIG. 196 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (robin) is operating at the suggested position. Generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is displayed in which an operation promoting image for prompting the player to perform a sword placing operation of the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword-pulling state to the second sword-pulling state (a form with an aura), and the sword-pulling operation by the player is enabled. In addition, even when the operation of the operation button 410 is valid, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 196 (AA2), an operation validity period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image for prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when an operation of the player is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is moved from the state in which the specific decorative member is operating to the suggestion position to the initial state. Further, the specific decoration member SDY (storage item) may be moved from the state of operating to the suggestion position without returning to the initial state to the entire falling state or the initial state.

  Then, when an operation to the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) effective for operation is detected in the above-described FIG. 196 (AA2) or (AA3), the operation proceeds to the above-described FIG. 194 (C) or (D). Similarly, when the result of the present fluctuation display is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (bridging material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 195 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the role) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (the role of the role) is released. An image (decorative design stop mode “777”, “excellent” message) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the current fluctuation display is a loss, the specific decoration member SDY (border role) is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 without being moved while maintaining the initial state. An image (decorative design stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promoting effect in the first suggestion pattern.

  In the second suggestion pattern, the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggestion position, and may include a plurality of operation patterns. For example, in the case where a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the ratio at which the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective is different, the interest of the player in the motion can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
In a case where the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (border actor) is operated to the suggestion position is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is operationally valid, Until the operation of the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective, in addition to the basic pattern of following the effect transition from FIG. 196 (AA1) to (AA3), the operation button 410 becomes operation effective once, and then the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective. A step-up pattern is provided to enable the operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 197 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is an operation validity period for the sword decoration 5001 that is determined in advance to be valid by lottery of the peripheral control board 4140. Is generated, that is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 196 (AA3) is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of an aura) similar to that shown in FIG. 196 (AA1) is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is moved in small steps (FIG. 197 (BB1)). ). Next, an operation validity period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (draft material) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect is displayed in which an operation prompting image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (FIG. 197 (BB2)). Here, even if a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 195 described above is not performed, and the switching indicating the switching of the operation effective operation means is performed. A suggestion image (most blackout images) is displayed (FIG. 197 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword decoration state to the second sword removal state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation unit that is enabled to operate is operated from the operation button 410 through the sword decoration body 5001. A switching notification image (a message of “chance of swords” and “a sword is required”) is displayed (FIG. 197 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is in a state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 196 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition (FIG. 195) after the operation promotion effect in the above-described second suggestion pattern.

  Note that, in the case of FIG. 197 (BB2), only the image display of the operation button 410 may be performed without making the operation button 410 effective (no operation promotion effect). It is only necessary that the sword decoration 5001 be operated after the player's interest is once directed to the operation button 410. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of the present example, before the operation valid period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is validated is generated, the specific decoration member SDY (draft material) is generated. The position of ()) can be changed, and an operation means which is made effective according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 194 (B)) in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (border actor) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 indicates that the operation is valid. In the second suggestion pattern in which the operation validity period is generated in a state where the expected degree of operation is high and the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is located at the suggestion position (sword decorative body 5001 in FIG. 196 (AA1)). Has a high degree of expectation that the operation is effective. For this reason, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (draft) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, and thus suggests before the operation. Enhance the entertainment of the production.

  In the second suggestion pattern, in the suggestion effect before operation, the specific decorative member SDY (draft hand) is gradually moved in the vertical direction. Since the operation effect (falling effect) of the specific decoration member SDY (border effect) is also used for reporting the result after the operation of the operating means (FIG. 195), a series of drop effects from the up and down small movement of the suggesting effect before operation is performed. , And a decrease in entertainment interest can be suppressed. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (ie, the role of the curtain), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is enabled by the movable body becomes effective, is not limited to this. A display may be made to indicate the degree of expectation. Further, when the operation means to be effective is determined, not only the operation button 410 is turned on or the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the second sword removal state, but also the operation means to be effective is moved by vibration or the like. Or you may.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is once enabled in the state in which the specific decorative member SDY (robin material) is located at the suggested position (or after it appears that the operation is enabled). Ii) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword decoration 5001 can be operated effectively. Thereby, the player is interested in both operation means. Further, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, there is an expectation that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that, so that there is a decrease in willingness to operate and a decrease in gaming interest. Can be suppressed.

  In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, an operation effect suggestion image before the operation validity period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is enabled is displayed. At the same timing (FIG. 194 (B)), similar to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 196 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (draft role) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view from the initial position. It is also possible to operate in a small drop state (indicating position) overlapping with the upper part, and to move up and down in small increments between the initial position and the suggesting position. After that, when the operation validity period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (robin) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the operation suggestion to the player by the first suggestion pattern is made. Even when an image is displayed, it is possible to make it seem that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, even when the pre-operation suggestion effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the operation of the sword decoration 5001 will be effective. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation validity period occurs in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (border actor) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. The entertainment of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to the present embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the effect display device 1600 displays the specific effect pattern. Perform the production. In a production period in which a specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) for establishing a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by a player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. And, it is possible to execute a specific operation effect (an effect indicating the degree of expectation related to the privilege provision) based on the establishment of the specific effect execution condition. The degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision suggested as a result of the specific operation effect may be 100% or 0%.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as operation means provided for such an effect at the time of operation (such as an effect that indicates an expectation degree related to privilege granting when operated), In addition to the operation button 410, it is possible to further include another operation means (such as a sword decoration body 5001). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating the operation button 410), There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as a sword decoration 5001) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001), even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity, only the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given occurs. It is configured so that the player can recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) related to privilege provision is higher than in the case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The expectation degree regarding the privilege provision suggested when an operation opportunity is provided to another operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001) may be 100% or 0%.

  According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001), an operation corresponding to the operation on the other operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001) is performed. It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest when the stage is in a stage where the effect has not yet been performed and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (such as an effect result suggesting that the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is high) does not appear in the operation-time effect according to the operation on another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001). Even if it is not possible to operate the operation means during the specific effect reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the entertainment interest through such operation-related effects. Become.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decorations 5001, etc.) having such a staging characteristic. In the case of giving, when giving these operation opportunities, a common operation-related effect can be executed.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to the present embodiment, at least an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect accepting period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect accepting) is enabled. ,
-After the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is activated (allowing to accept the effect) is started, the operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect is accepted). The first effect mode in which a valid period (effect accepting period) is generated, and an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (allowing to accept an effect) without starting an effect of “specific operation-related effect”. A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating a valid period (effect accepting period) are prepared, and by executing any of these effect modes, the operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect). A valid period (production accepting period) is set to be generated.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where a period occurs in which an effect on a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation units (the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, etc.) can be accepted for effect. Regardless of whether or not a period occurs in which an operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) that is different from the specific operation means can accept the effect, a common (specification) is performed prior to the generation of the period. ) Can be executed, so that it is possible to give an interest as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can receive the effect, and such an effect can be provided. By performing the operation while the game is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Note that, in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect was started, the effect corresponds to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001). An effect reception period is to be generated, and at least at the time when the effect is started, which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) has a corresponding effect reception period is generated. Should be kept confidential.

  Hereinafter, several effect modes that can be adopted when performing such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following description examples and other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means to be subjected to a common (specific) operation-related effect. The types of the operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be subjected to a common (specific) operation-related effect. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show production contents when any of the production acceptance periods occurs after the execution of the common (specific) operation-related production, and the common (specific) In the case where any of the effect reception periods occurs without performing the operation-related effect of (1), the effect content may be omitted. However, when any of the effect reception periods occurs without performing the common (specific) operation-related effect, the effect content is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 206 (E) and (G). . That is, in this case, an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the operation button 410 or an operation instruction image that prompts an operation on the sword decoration 5001 appears without performing a specific operation-related effect. Further, in each of the following effect examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed when the reach state is formed. May be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period in which the operation is performed, or may be generated during the execution of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

  Each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined with the effects of each of the different examples described below, and can also be appropriately combined with each of the effects described above. It is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined with the effects of each of the other examples described later by substituting a part thereof. When the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Then, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to effect each of the different examples described later. The same can be said for the effects of each of the other examples described later.

[First production mode]
FIG. 198 and FIG. 199 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive an effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is started after the effect is started. It is a figure which shows the effect example (1st effect mode) performed.

  FIG. 198 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 198 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 198 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display which moves in each is performed. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 is to accept the effect, and suggests that an operation on any of these operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to accept the effect. Will be able to

  FIG. 198 (c) shows both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 as the specific operation-related effects shown in FIG. 198 (b) progress. In a state where each of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) is stopped and displayed in the area, an instruction display (here, "operate") that prompts the user to operate any of these operation means, and an effect reception (A bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period) appears.

  According to such an effect mode, although the operation of at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted, the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) It is possible to make it unclear which one of the effects can be accepted. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 198 (c)) in both the situation where the effect on the operation button 410 can be accepted and the effect on the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted. There is no other than being displayed. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), the plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decorations 5001) are operated before at least one of the plurality of operation means can be accepted. 198 (b) and (c) as shown in FIGS. 198 (b) and (c) over a period until an operation on at least one of the (operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) is enabled to receive an effect. I'm trying to perform a production.

  Therefore, in each of the effect examples and other examples described below as well as the effect examples, the effect contents of the specific operation-related effect are limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 198 (b) and (c). Absent. In short, when the specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is thereafter performed (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect is performed). It is only necessary that it occurs during (middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) is left unclear as to which of the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be rendered. It is possible to indicate that the operation for one is to be able to accept the effect. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily need to be displayed simultaneously, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration are not necessarily displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting the effect, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. In the case where the reception period occurs, it is more desirable to set the time required from when a specific operation-related effect is executed (start of the effect) to when the effect reception period is generated to be the same.

  In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unknown which one of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation of any one of the operation means (“Operation "), And always operate a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means, regardless of how each of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting effects. May be displayed. In other words, the same production mode appears as the operation instruction both in the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 can be effected and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can be effected. By doing so, it becomes possible to provide an operation opportunity while keeping which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the effect is kept secret.

  Further, in the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 198 (c), it is confidential whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 can be effected or not. Even when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is set to be able to receive the effect, the operation is not allowed when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is set to be able to receive the effect (in any of the first to third situations described below). However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is in a light emitting state, and the operation of the operation button 410 is prompted. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a luminous means may be provided on the sword decoration 5001 so that the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are not illuminated. Both may emit light.

  Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect condition in which the image shown in FIG. 198 (c) appears is that only the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Whether it is in the first situation in which the effect can be accepted, or in the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword ornament 5001 Are set to be in one of the third situations in which the effect can be accepted. When a second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) of the plurality of situations occurs, the first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410). The expectation of granting a privilege is higher than when the situation occurs. Therefore, the rate of occurrence of the second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) in the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable that the ratio is set lower than the ratio of occurrence of the situation.

  Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), when any of the first situation (operation button 410) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) is present, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. Is performed (whether “FF” is progressed in the figure) or in one of the second situation (sword decoration 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When an operation is performed on the sword decoration 5001 (when “GG” is advanced in the figure), an effect is received and an operation effect corresponding to the operation is performed (FIGS. 199 (d) and 199 (f)). Is performed.

  In the operation effect, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 199 (d) and (f), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and a predetermined display effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (“Chance!”). In addition, as a predetermined display effect, for example, “chance !!” indicating that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “extreme heat !!” indicating that the degree of expectation is relatively high. By preparing a plurality of effect modes such as described above and displaying any of these effect modes in response to the reception of the effect, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant may be suggested. Similarly, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, by providing an effect that does not perform an operation of displacing to the front of the display area, and by causing any of these effect modes to appear in response to the effect reception. Alternatively, the degree of expectation for granting a benefit may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 199 (d) and (f), the effect is accepted by the operation by the player. Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute a control for bringing the operation means into an operation state (a state different from the non-operation state before the operation).

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 199 (d), although the operation is performed by the player on the operation button 410, the operation is performed according to the effect reception. The control that reciprocates the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the sword decoration is not performed between the first position and the second position can be executed. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect reception is generated as a result of an operation performed by the player on the operation button 410 and the operation-time effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even when the button 410 is not operated and the sword decoration 5001 on the higher expected side is operated, an effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect on the sword decoration 5001 may have been executed. "Can be appealed to the player.

  On the other hand, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 199 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword-drawing operation on the sword decoration 5001 and placing the sword decoration 5001 in the sword placement position according to the reception of the rendering. It is possible to execute a control for maintaining the sword at the sword position (sword-drawn state) instead of returning to the (sword-drawn state). As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword placement position (sword-pulled state) to the sword-drawing position (sword-pulled state) based on the operation by the player, and is in a state where it is maintained in such a sword-pulled state. At times, a staging effect is performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, the sword decoration body at that time is executed. By confirming the operation state of the sword decoration 5001, it is possible to make the player feel the feeling that the operation effect is being performed due to the operation of the sword decoration 5001.

  After the operation effect (FIGS. 199 (d) and (f)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 199 (e). However, during the execution period of the reach effect, there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 will be executed. Therefore, either the operation effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side is performed. Even if it is executed, the sword decoration 5001 is not operated (sword placement position (sword placement state)) when a predetermined time has elapsed (before the reach effect is started). Control to return to. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintaining the state of the sword removal) over the period of. Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated earlier than the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration) out of the plurality of operation means (the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001) 5001), in both cases where the effect can be received and when the effect cannot be received, a common (specific) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) operation is started. While an operation-related effect is being performed, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) is not enabled to receive an effect. Since the operation button 410 is set to be able to accept the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) are each produced. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this effect example (first effect mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is enabled to receive an effect, or the specific operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is effected. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 is set to be capable of accepting an effect without being enabled, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are provided when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed. In combination with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of effect reception, the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of effect reception. You can be deceived as if you weren't. In other words, in this case, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration 5001 which is the side where the production with relatively high expectation is performed when the production is received. When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it is expected to provide an interest in which operation means should be operated.

  In addition, when the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period does not occur) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the disadvantage that the effect reception period is reduced by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, if the operation means on the side that is not enabled to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, Although the effect reception required to execute the effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the operation itself is detected but the operation itself is performed based on the detection. Control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. According to such a configuration, there is a risk of losing an operation opportunity.Therefore, it is possible to urge a user to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the effect and perform the operation carefully. become able to.

  Further, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decoration member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is produced in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although the execution is performed, these operation-time effects may have different effect contents. For example, in the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) , A unique effect sound is generated, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the entertainment interest when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted.

  In addition, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other effect mode. The effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001), and the effect reception period for the generation of the another effect mode is not set. The effect acceptance period for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, it is the sword decoration 5001, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001, the operation acceptance period is set. In either case, when the first operation means is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 198 (c), an operation effect may be performed. In other words, in this case, when the common operation (specific) operation-related effects are being performed and the effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the another effect mode is set, and an operation is performed on the first operation means, When another effect mode is executed as an operation effect, when an effect reception period related to the occurrence of the another effect mode is not set while a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed (No. When the first operation means is operated during the effect acceptance period for the second operation means), another effect mode is not executed as the operation effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. At the same operation, an effect will be performed. In short, when the effect reception period related to the occurrence of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation-time effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. The setting is made for both the operation means and the first operation means. In the case where another effect mode is caused to appear as the operation effect, the second operation mode is not performed in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation effect on the second operation means side. The effect at the time of operation may be performed as the effect content different from the effect at the time of operation on the means side.

  Note that, in the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears while a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed is defined by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. The first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 is capable of accepting the effect, the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is acceptable for the effect, and the operation on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 Are set so as to correspond to any of the third situations in which the effect can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, when the effect is received, the same operation effect is made to appear, whereas in the third situation, when the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or another effect mode described above (which is different from the operation effect in the first situation and the second situation) is made to appear. However, in the above-described effect example, the third situation is not necessarily required.

  Further, the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as an operation unit to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, but the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation unit. Above, in the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), in the production situation shown in FIG. 199 (f), similarly to the production situation shown in FIG. 199 (d), no operation is performed by the player. The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed, and at this time, the operation means on the side on which the operation by the player has been performed is also operated. Whether or not it is appropriate may be designed appropriately. However, as for the control for operating the operation means on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed, the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns earlier than before returning to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable that the operation state is terminated so that the gaze of the player is returned to the game board 5 naturally.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the driving source that applies driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies driving force to the sword decoration 5001 are different driving sources. Or the same driving source.

[Second production mode]
FIG. 200 to FIG. 203 show that the specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect indicating the progress of the effect until one of the first effect result and the second effect result appears. When the first effect result appears as a result, it is suggested that an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means occurs, and when the second effect result appears as the result of the effect, the plurality of operation means appear. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect (2nd effect mode) which suggests that the effect reception period with respect to the sword decoration body 5001 will generate | occur | produce among them.

  FIG. 200 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 200 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 200B, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600. In which the lightning image IZ is acting on the images BTG and SYG. As described above, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It remains unclear which of the decorative bodies 5001 is to accept the effect, and suggests that an operation on any of these operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to accept the effect. Will be able to

  FIG. 200 (c) shows an effect display of the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 as the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. In the display area of the device 1600, an effect is performed in which the opponents are pressed against each other to push the other party out of the display area.

  That is, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode) are described as follows. Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area? ”, And when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect is accepted for the operation button 410. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect shown in FIGS. 200 (b) and (c) is determined by either “effect accepting period for operation button 410 or effect accepting period for sword decoration 5001”. , A specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods. "

  The figure on the left side of FIG. 200 (c) depicts a state in which the button image BTG is in a predominant state while remaining in the display area, and the figure on the right side shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts a situation where it is predominant to remain in the area. In a specific operation-related effect, such inferiority / dominance status changes every moment as time passes.

  FIG. 201D shows a state in which the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 200C, and the button image BTG is left in the display area. Is produced (first production result). When progressing to the effect content, an effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 does not occur, and only an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect is executed. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 201 (d)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the effect on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means can be accepted (the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs).

  At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 of the operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, the operation of the operation button 410 is urged by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 to the light emitting state.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) is not limited to the case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. The production progress (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 200 (a)) may be made. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed via a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is preferable that the degree of expectation for granting a privilege is made higher than that.

  Also, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 201 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 via the specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The ratio in which the length of the effect acceptance period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than that in the case where an effect (FIG. 201D) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without passing through is performed. Is desirably set to be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a stuttering effect described later when a specific operation-related effect has passed.

  FIG. 201 (e) shows that as a result of the operation performed on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. It depicts a state in which the production is performed during operation.

  The effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 201 (e) is the same as that of FIG. 199 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 201 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. Also, at this time, even if the operation is performed by the player on the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001 on the side on which the operation is not performed is moved to the first position and the second position in response to the effect reception. This is the same in that control for reciprocating with the position (control for operating) is executable. In addition, as a predetermined display effect, for example, “chance !!” indicating that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and “extreme heat !!” indicating that the degree of expectation is relatively high. By preparing a plurality of effect modes such as described above and displaying any of these effect modes in response to the reception of the effect, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant may be suggested. Similarly, for the operation of the specific decoration member SDY, for example, a production mode that does not perform an operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is provided, and one of those production modes is made to appear in response to the production reception. Thus, it may be possible to indicate the degree of expectation for granting a privilege. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 201 (e)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 201 (f), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. However, during the execution period of the reach effect, there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 may be executed. Therefore, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation-time effect was executed (the reach effect is started. In this case, control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to a non-operated state (sword-inserted state). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 has at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY to the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation or maintaining the state of the sword removal) over the period of. Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated earlier than the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, FIG. 202 (g) shows that the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. An effect depicting the remaining state is performed (second effect). When progressing to the effect content, an effect accepting period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only an effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity will be given soon while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect is executed. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 202 (g)). Is executed, it is possible to recognize that the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be effected (the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs). .

  At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as "draw a sword" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Thus, it is possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means is in a state where the effect can be received (during the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001). In particular, in this effect example, only the operation unit including the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be set to the light emission state) is set to the light emission state. By doing so, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is encouraged.

  The effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is not only a case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b), (c), etc.), but also without going through the specific operation-related effect. The production progress (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 200 (a)) may be made. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed via a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect. It is preferable that the degree of expectation related to the grant of the privilege is made higher than that. In addition, if the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is performed without a specific operation-related effect. The degree of expectation of granting a privilege is higher than in the case, and the degree of expectation of granting a privilege is made lower than in the case where the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 202 (h) shows that, as a result of performing an operation on the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operating means while the effect shown in FIG. This is a picture of how the production is performed during the operation.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 202 (h) is also basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. In addition, here, the production mode such as “super heat !!” indicating that the expectation is relatively high is displayed in response to the presentation reception, but it is suggested that the expectation is relatively low. Is displayed in some cases. In the same manner, for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, for example, an effect is provided in which an operation of displacing the display member to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of the effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. This may indicate the degree of expectation for granting a benefit. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 202 (h), based on the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the effect of the sword decoration 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described plurality of modes ( The change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 179 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form) is possible. The height is suggested.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 202 (i), even if the operation effect (FIG. 202 (h)) is ended and the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-drive position), The sword decoration body 5001 is not returned to the sword-pulled state, but is kept in the sword-drawn state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state, and thereafter (during the period during which the reach production is performed), the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword-delivery state. An operation opportunity to be operated is further provided, and at that time, an operation effect in accordance with the operation to the katana state is further executable.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operating means (sword decoration body 5001) in two steps, and the first-stage operation (operation to the sword-drawing state) and the second-stage operation (Operation to the katana state), the effect at the time of the operation is performed in accordance with each operation, so that not only the operation of the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) but also the first stage It is expected that the game entertainment for the operation can be suitably maintained even during the non-operation period from the time when the operation (operation to the sword-drawing state) is performed until the operation at the second stage (the operation to the sword-drawing state) is performed. Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (here, operations in directions opposite to each other). In addition, it is desirable that the operation effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation effect according to the second-stage operation have different effect contents.

  Also, in the case where the operation effect (FIG. 202 (h)) according to the first-stage operation is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the drawn state, and is not maintained in the drawn state. In such a case, it is desirable not to give the second stage operation opportunity. In the operation effect at the time of the first-stage operation, whether the sword decoration 5001 should be maintained at a position (a sword-drawing state) at which a second-stage operation opportunity (an operation opportunity from the sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state) can be given. It may be executed as an effect indicating the degree of expectation of no. In other words, when the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sword-pulling state without being maintained in the sword-pulling state, it is practically impossible to provide the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state). Obviously, The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  In addition, as a result of the operation effect (FIG. 202 (h)) according to the first-stage operation, if the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the drawn state, the predetermined time has elapsed (the reach effect). The control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword-inserted state) before the start of the operation. In this case, however, the operation state (reciprocation) of the sword decoration body 5001 is at least half the period from when the specific decoration member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-drive position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance of the sword state). Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed is such that the operation state is terminated earlier than the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the quantity (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 203 (j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 200 (c), as in the case shown in FIG. 201 (d), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area. Thus, an effect is described in which the button image BTG is left in the display area. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when a predetermined time has elapsed after the effect shown in FIG. 200 (c) has been performed, the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) or the effect shown in FIG. The effect shown in FIG. 203 or the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) appears. It should be noted that which effect content appears is determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d), the effect performed in a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)). (Here, the lightning image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning image IZ may cause some change to the button image BTG.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j), an instruction display for prompting an operation (character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is not displayed. This is different from the case of the production shown in). As a result, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area, but the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. Something is made recognizable.

  FIG. 203 (k) shows that the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. The production that is being done is performed.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), all effect elements (button images BTG) that suggest that the operation on the operation button 410 can be effected can be removed. Therefore, although there is a situation where it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k) appears. This makes it possible to give a doubt as to whether or not the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 will occur.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, in this case, the mode of the lightning image IZ is changing (appearing to disappear), and the remaining time until a clear indication of which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs is reduced. Suggests that

  FIG. 203 (i) shows that as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), the outer shape of the haze MY approaches the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). There is a production that depicts the situation.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, the appearance of the haze MY suggests that an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 may occur. Will be able to

  Also in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (i), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the mode of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) as compared with FIG. Suggests that the time remaining is even less.

  Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 203 (i) further progresses and haze MY is hidden, a sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)), the effect display device 1600 does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG. Even if it is performed (FIG. 201 (d), FIG. 203 (j)), there is a possibility that an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur, so that it is necessary to maintain the gaming interest. Will be able to

  In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the button image BTG is displayed (FIGS. 201 (d) and 203 (j)). The effect on the sword decoration 5001 is confirmed by confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning image IZ that has appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200B and 200C) is still continued. It is possible to grasp whether there is a possibility that a reception period will occur, and thereby it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest of the game.

  In this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by haze MY (FIG. 203 (k)). When the effect progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600. It can also be said that the effect suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY is not necessarily brought close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) may be performed. If such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 203 (j) and (k) are also kept secret from which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Further, after the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, in the above-described effect example (second effect mode), even in the effect condition shown in FIG. In the same manner as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 7, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed, and at this time, the operation means on the side on which the operation by the player has been performed is also operated. Whether or not it is appropriate may be designed appropriately.

  In the case where the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the driving source that applies driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies driving force to the sword decoration 5001 are different driving sources. Or the same driving source.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 204 to 207 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but show another effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. It is.

  FIG. 204 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, when the number of holdings is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 204 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), in a specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from effect display device 1600 is operated. Thus, it is suggested that any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 will be able to receive the effect soon.

  In particular, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated. By this, it is easy to make it possible for any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 to be able to accept the effect immediately after the effect display related to the operation has not been performed on the effect display device 1600 side. Make it recognizable. Note that, here, control is performed to move the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 from the initial position to the operation position. They operate at a slow speed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation means has a time left before the effect reception period occurs, or the operation means does not have the effect reception period at all until the symbol variation ends. Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001) operate respectively. Therefore, when there is still time left before the effect acceptance period occurs, or when the effect acceptance period does not occur at all until the symbol change ends, the entertainment interest for those operations will be increased. It can be maintained suitably.

  Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is not performed by the effect display device 1600 but by each operation (FIG. 204 (b)) of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 in this way. After the start, basically the same effect progress as the second effect mode is performed.

  For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 204 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 200 (b), the state in which the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated from the initial position (the position when not driven), respectively. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c), it is suggested that any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect even by such a movable effect.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c), the position of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is different from the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) after a specific operation-related effect is started. And an operation state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is provided.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed as compared with a case where an operation opportunity is immediately given without performing the operation-related effect. In the case where the operation means is employed, even if such an operation-related effect is finally finished, it is necessary to operate the operation device on the side which can receive the effect at least to the operation position. Therefore, the effect related to the operation is further delayed by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay may reduce the interest in the game.

  Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), during the period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are set to the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. At different positions (for example, an intermediate position), it is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is completed and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period has occurred is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur. It is possible to operate the operating means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a delay in operation-related effects. In addition, until the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operation state at a position different from the operation position, so that the effect reception period of the operation This makes it possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “movable operation button”. Except that it is displayed as corresponding to “410”, the effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 200 (c). However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 200 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are set to the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. Are positioned as operation states (states in which a driving force is applied) at positions different from any of the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 204 (b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in an initial position (non-drive position). On the other hand, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in an operative state at a position different from the initial position (non-drive position). In this way, by making the form of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the form of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, the matching thereof will be soon. It is possible to indicate that the intended effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) is generated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is displayed at the “operation position”. The effect content is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 201 (d), except that it is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410 at a certain time”.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d), the operation button 410 is operated in the operation position, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the initial position. (The position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 has moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effects is appropriately suppressed. Become so.

  Note that as the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e), “a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed” is first. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated to prompt an operation (character display such as “press”, effect display, or the like). (A bar indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “movement to the operation position” mode, whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode of moving to the operation position”. As described above, by displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is different from the mode of the operation buttons 410 at that time, the gap between those modes will be filled soon. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position.)

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 205 (f) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 201 (e). The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 205 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 201 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position). In addition, the sword decoration 5001 is operating at a position different from both the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 205 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 205 (g), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. This is also as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is performed by operating the sword decoration 5001. The effect is as described with reference to FIG. 202 (g), except that the instruction content regarding “squeeze” is “pressed in” and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “moved to operation position” mode. It is content.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from any of the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operation position. The sword decoration 5001 has been operated at the operation position. That is, in this case, since the sword decoration 5001 has moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) toward the operation position, the elongation of the operation-related effects is appropriately suppressed. Will be done.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h) is also “a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state of being moved to the operation position)”. After performing the display effect, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated, and an instruction display for prompting the operation (characters such as “push-in”) is performed. Display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period). According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that has appeared as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “mode moved to the operation position”, whereas the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decorative image SYG is in a mode different from the “mode that has been moved to the operation position”. As described above, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG appearing as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is different from the mode of the sword decoration 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes is reduced. It will be possible to suggest in advance that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be buried (in this case, the sword decoration 5001 moves to the operation position).

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 206 (i) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 202 (h). The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 206 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 202 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position. In this state, the sword decoration 5001 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-drive position).

  After the operation effect (FIG. 206 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 206 (j), a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d) being performed, if the effect shown in FIG. The effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 203 (j), except that it is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410 at a certain time”.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 207 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. (A position at the time of non-driving) and an operation position. Even in such an operation state, it is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and that there is still a possibility that the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur. Will be able to do it.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 207 (k) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l) starts to be performed. The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. They are operating at different positions.

  Then, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. 207 (m) is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 203 (l). The directing contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. They are operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 207 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the haze MY be closer to the sword decoration 5001 at the operation position, instead of the sword decoration 5001 at the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 207 (m) is further developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, and the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 207 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600. It can also be said that the effect suggests that an effect acceptance period for the body 5001 will occur.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY is not necessarily brought close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 207 (k) and (l) are also concealed as to which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Note that, in this effect example (third effect mode), a drive source that applies a drive force to the operation button 410 and a drive source that applies a drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. Or the same driving source.

  In each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, when a “button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410” appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect, a basic operation is performed. Is provided with an operation opportunity only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001, and when an operation for the operation button 410 is accepted, an operation effect on the button side is performed. Become. In addition, when a “sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001” appears as a performance result of a specific operation-related performance, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. An operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001 out of the body 5001, and when an operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is accepted, an operative effect on the sword role object is performed. In this regard, in the operation effect on the button side, the success-time effect (the specific decorative member SDY is operated) and the failure effect (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot determination. In the case of one of the effects, the production at the time of the operation on the sword role side, the production at the time of success (operating the specific decorative member SDY) and the production at the time of failure based on the result of the production lottery according to the jackpot determination (The specific decoration member SDY is not operated), and the effect contents are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

  It should be noted that the button-side operation effect and the katana-side operation operation effect are the same as for the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600, as well as the effect as to whether the specific decorative member SDY operates. You may make it content.

  In each of the effect examples described above with respect to a specific operation-related effect, it is assumed that an effect is given to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the result is determined. Operation opportunities are given to them. However, there is a case where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the content of an effect where an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation device regardless of the effect of any effect, such as pressing between specific operation devices. There may be.

  For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-pulling state is put into the sword-drawing state), or a mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-pulling state is put into the sword-pulling state for one operating means (Operation of (1)), an effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given may be performed, and the operation opportunity may be given to the operating means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decoration 5001 is caused to operate in a state different from both the sword-pulling state and the sword-drawing state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 be operated in the sword-pulling state or the sword-pulling state when the effect of the effect is indicated.

  In addition, when the symbol change in the hold state is exhausted, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol change, when the symbol change is in the hold state (when the symbol change is exhausted before this). An effect suggested from within the execution period of the symbol change) may be performed. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side without the operation opportunity are given. For both of them, it is possible to maintain the entertainment interest related to the operation for a longer period. In addition, as such an effect, when a symbol change in which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in a hold state (within the execution period of the symbol change that has been digested earlier than this), the specific operation-related effect is It is desirable that a plurality of operation means provided be operated respectively.

  In the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, as a specific operation-related effect, a plurality of images (button images BTG, button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images need not always be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, any one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 may be generated thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that an effect reception period will occur for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, these operations are performed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret which of the means the effect acceptance period occurs. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed during the execution of the specific operation-related effect is adopted, the button image is not displayed when the specific operation-related effect is ended. One of BTG (an image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword decoration image SYG (an image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate to which of these operation means the effect acceptance period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (the image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (the image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) thus displayed is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute the specific operation-related effect with respect to any of a plurality of operation means by executing the specific operation-related effect related to the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ or the like). It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one of two rocks, and when lightning falls on one rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and By causing the sword decoration image SYG to appear from the rock when the lightning falls on the rock on the side, it is possible to make the effect progress to the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) and FIG. 202 (g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is performed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one rock, and when lightning falls on the rock, one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Thus, the effect can be made to progress to the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) and FIG. 202 (g). In short, it is desirable that the effect be developed so that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, a specific effect is obtained when the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 is generated and when the effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated. It is more desirable to set the time required from the execution of the operation-related effect (start of the effect) to the occurrence of the effect reception period to be the same. In addition, it is desirable that after the specific operation-related effect is performed, it is preferable that the effect reception period be generated for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity.

  Also, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation-time effect) can be generated depends on which of the effect modes the effect is performed. The ratio set for the specific operation unit of the plurality of operation units may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, the user did not perform the operation based on the operation performed on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When the operation means on the side is operated (FIG. 201 (e) or the like), control is performed to return the operation means on the side on which the operation has not been performed to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time from the time of the operation. It may be. However, the operation is not taken as a reference, and depending on at which timing in the effect reception period the operation is performed, the operation means on the side on which the operation was not performed is operated until the operation is terminated. It is desirable to make the lengths of time periods different.

  In other words, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the shorter the remaining time of the effect reception period, the more the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has conflicted depending on whether or not to operate the operating means on the side not shown in the specific operation related effect. Therefore, depending on at what timing of the effect reception period the operation was performed (according to the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side on which the operation was not performed is operated and then the operation is terminated. The length of time up to ("Even if the operation means on the side indicated in the specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect was accepted and the effect at the time of operation was executed." Is made different from each other, it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest in the game.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, if none of the plurality of operating means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operating means provided for the effect at the end of the effect accepting period. May be operated.

  In addition, from the start of the specific operation-related effect to the display of the effect result (such as the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG), the side with the higher expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is displayed. May be performed to indicate the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. Although a movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, in this case, a specific movable body (here, a moving object that operates based on an effect reception within an effect reception period after a specific operation-related effect is performed) Operating the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY) can more reliably operate the specific movable body based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. Desirable for enabling.

  In addition, from the start of a specific operation-related effect to the display of an effect result (such as a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG), the image corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the effect result. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period for a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect accepting period is generated only for one of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Thereby, even though it is in the middle of a specific operation-related production, the production result is shown and a special production mode as if the production was finished can be created, and the production is performed. It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment interest during the game. In addition, when an operation on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of the operation means is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Thus, it is desirable to indicate the ratio of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with a high degree of expectation displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the specific operation means to which the operation opportunity is given during the execution of the specific operation-related effect, among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001), the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the entertainment interest when the player recognizes that it is in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  Also, when the effect accepting period is generated only for the operation button 410 of the operating means while the specific operation-related effect relating to the plurality of operating means is being performed, When an operation is performed on the operation button 410, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. When the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Regardless of which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) appears as an effect result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the reproducibility as the specific operation-related production during a period from the start of the production of the specific operation-related production to the presentation of the production result. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means with a relatively low degree of expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is given more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation unit having the higher degree of expectation among the plurality of operation units. It is desirable to increase the expectation.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effect reception periods, when an operation is performed by a player, an effect is normally generated based on the operation. However, even if such an operation is not performed, the effect reception period elapses. An automatic button effect mode in which control for starting the same effect as when the operation is performed earlier than that may be performed may be settable. According to such an automatic button effect mode, since the effect at the time of operation is generated without operating each time the effect acceptance period occurs, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed in such an automatic button effect mode, the effect accepting period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if the operation means is not operated on the corresponding side during the effect reception period, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed.

  However, even when the automatic button production mode is set, the production acceptance period is generated only for the operation buttons 410 of the operation means while the specific operation-related production is being performed. In this case, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period (the automatic button function is disabled). Thereafter, even if an effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, the corresponding operation means is operated during the effect acceptance period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is performed without doing so (making the automatic button function function). According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in the middle of performing a specific operation-related effect based on whether or not the automatic button function is functioning. Is expected to be suppressed.

  It is to be noted that the setting change regarding the ON / OFF of the automatic button effect mode can be performed not only during a period in which the symbol variation is not performed but also during a period in which the symbol variation is performed by operating the operation button 410, for example. It is desirable to make it. For example, when the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not occurred, the setting of the automatic button effect mode can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs. When the operation button 410 is operated while the operation is being performed, in addition to performing the operation effect according to the operation, the automatic button effect mode can be set to be changeable from the off state to the on state. is there. However, even when the automatic button production mode is set to the ON state, it is considered that sometimes it is possible to want to generate an operation-time production due to an operation performed by a player. During the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 when the operation button 410 is turned on, the operation for the operation button 410 as well as the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled to operate the other operation means. When the operation button 410 is operated, unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated while the automatic button effect mode is maintained in the on state may be generated. desirable.

  The operation mode may be different between when the automatic button effect mode is turned on from the off state and when it is turned off from the on state.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and other examples thereof, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or a sword decoration 5001 is imitated as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect performed. In the state where the displayed sword decoration images SYG are displayed, an operation opportunity corresponding to them is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) Period) and, when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode as long as it gives an operation opportunity (effect reception period) to the sword decoration 5001. Any display content may be adopted.

  For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 201 (d) and 205 (e), an effect image CG (first image) shown in FIG. (Display mode) is displayed, and an effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 208 (b) is displayed instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 202 (g) and 206 (h). Is also good. According to such a configuration, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect portion and the other background image (the portion displayed before the specific operation-related effect is started) are displayed. Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is displayed). 201 (d), FIG. 202 (g), FIG. 205 (e), and FIG. 206 (h) in the partial display mode (button image BTG, sword). Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display relating to the provision of the operation opportunity is performed by using substantially the entire display area (until the other effect images such as the background portion where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). Being done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  In addition, in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 208A, the first image having the shield (button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) in which the operation button 410 is incorporated in the design is held. The character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 208B, a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is held. The second character is displayed, and it is implicitly suggested which of the operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as effect images imitating the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration 5001 itself. It is desirable to display as an effect image that incorporates at least a part of the operation means such as a shape and a part of a design.

  Further, as to the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG Depending on which of the (second display mode) is displayed, it may also be performed as an effect indicating a different degree of expectation. For example, when the effect image TG (the second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation concerning the privilege grant is higher than when the effect image CG (the first display mode) appears. Also, a plurality of effect modes (such as different colors) are prepared as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. May indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, the degree of expectation is higher when the image is displayed in a specific display mode than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

  For the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as a result of the effect (preferably an effect situation with relatively high expectation), When the operation-related effect is not executed (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), it is displayed (desirably, it is desirable that the effect situation is relatively low in expectation). There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as a result of the effect, the effect is directed only to the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed). When the button image BTG is displayed, the effect reception period is performed not only for the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG but also for another operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) which does not correspond to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a different interest to the operation from the case where the button image BTG appears in the effect situation with a relatively high degree of expectation, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Another operation means may be an operation means different from the sword decoration 5001.

  Further, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, an operation on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG during the effect reception period When the effect is received, a special operation effect is performed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and It is desirable to indicate that the game is in a production situation with a higher expectation than in the production situation in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period If 410) is operated, the effect acceptance period for another operating means that is being generated at the same time is ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation of the operating means (operation button 410) is performed. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation be performed.

  On the other hand, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period is as follows. When another operation means is operated, the effect acceptance period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended, and the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed. Instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the special operation effect is not performed. Even when an operation unit different from the unit is being operated, an operation effect at the time when the operation unit (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect mode is set, the effect corresponding to the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is determined as a result of the effect. Even if the effect reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation effect as when operating the operation means is performed without operating the corresponding operation means during the effect reception period. (The automatic button function should work). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the automatic button effect mode is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is used. Even if the effect accepting period is generated for both the operation means and another operation means, even if no operation is performed, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. It is desirable that only the operation effect at the same time as the operation is performed, and that the special operation effect that appears only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated is not executed.

  However, during the effect reception period, another time before the specific timing at which the effect at the time of operation (effect at the time of operating the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG) appears by the above-described automatic button function, When the operation is performed on the operation means and the predetermined production condition is satisfied, the special operation production is performed according to the production reception, and the specific timing is reached. Also, it is desirable that the effect at the time of operation (the effect at the time of operating the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG) does not appear. In this case, the automatic button function described above does not substantially function during the effect reception period, but the automatic button effect mode is continued in the on state even after the end of the effect reception period. It is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, after the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are reversed, each effect described above (effect at operation, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not the specific operation-related effect is executed). In a case where the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a later-described precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, another effect means (for example, the operation button 410, etc.) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG is to generate an effect acceptance period. Becomes

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, as a result of an effect in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, “button image BTG (first display mode) imitating operation button 410” or In the case where any one of the “sword decoration images SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001” is displayed, and the effect is received by the operation means on the displayed side, the relative The first operation effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) which is an effect content that suggests a high degree of expectation, and an effect content that suggests a relatively low degree of expectation The second operation effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decoration member SDY does not operate) can be caused to appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively higher at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. Is performed, and the first operation-time effect that has the effect content suggesting is performed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception during the effect reception period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is generated using the button image BTG (first operation-time effect). Of the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed based on the reception of the effect on the operation button 410 when the display mode is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, the effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect performed. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is performed based on the reception of the effect, the effect image (the sword decoration) on the side with a relatively high degree of expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect performed Since there is no demerit on the effect result as compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  In the above-described timer effect (FIGS. 148 to 207), “giving operation opportunity to operation means” can be set as the effect object (one of the plurality of effect modes to be timer objects). is there. That is, in the timer effect for the effect of “giving the operation means to the operation means”, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the operation opportunity is given to the operation means soon. , So that the effect at the time of operation can be enjoyed. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operating means" prepared as a candidate for the effect target of the timer effect, when the operation of the operating means is performed, the effect results to the player advantageous in accordance with the result of the predetermined effect lottery Make sure that any of the disadvantageous production results can appear. However, when the “operation opportunity for the operation means” is given as the production target of the timer production, the ratio of the production result advantageous to the player is higher than that in the case where the production target of the timer production is not the production target. It is more desirable to be. The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect is performed with the effect of “giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001)” appears, the “operation opportunity for the operation means,” A specific operation-related effect using “giving” may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the appearance of the sword decoration image SYG, a specific operation-related effect on which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001). It is possible to improve the entertainment interest when the game is played.

  However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously progressed to one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) immediately before it. However, it is difficult to understand which of the effects should be watched, which may lead to distractions and consequently a decrease in gaming interest.

  Therefore, in the case where a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. Until the count display of the specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is not executed, and the count value It is desirable that the “specific operation-related effect” be started after the value has reached a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”).

  FIG. 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001). The following timer effects are equivalent to the above-described timer effect on the notice side, and are executed as a result of performing various processes corresponding thereto.

  FIG. 209 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 209 (b) shows an effect in which the timer effect is started (here, countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 209 (a). Indicates the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 209 (b), the “specific operation-related effect” has not been executed yet, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is for. I have.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this example of the effect, while it is unclear which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed, the count value is first set to the predetermined value ( Here, the count reaches “0”) and this is displayed. Then, after “0 (predetermined value)” is displayed as the count value in this way, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), an effect of “specific operation-related effect” is started. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is not displayed.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) A specific operation-related effect regarding which of the above is displayed is executed. That is, in this case, even though two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), the effects are sometimes time-consuming. Since overlapping in a series is avoided, it is possible to enjoy different effects.

  However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect It is not possible to recognize whether the game was performed as a game, and there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 209 (c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) and before a specific operation-related effect is started. An effect that suggests the effect type (assignment of an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) that is the effect of the timer effect is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 209 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays “sword”. Thus, it is suggested that the timer effect was directed to “giving an operation opportunity (operating opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword decoration 5001”.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword sword decoration”). Is given by the player), the "specific operation-related effect" is started to be started in the effect condition recognized by the player side, so that the entertainment interest of the game can be improved. become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when “sword” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. May be displayed continuously.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 209 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the sword decoration 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, Reciprocating motion in the up and down direction), and this also indicates that “giving an operation opportunity (operating opportunity by“ sword ”) to the sword decoration body 5001 is a target for the timer effect. I try to suggest.

  It should be noted that the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed not only when the timer effect is directed to “giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001”, but also when other effects are directed. May be performed when becomes zero. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 does not function as an effect indicating the type of effect that the timer effect is directed to, but as an effect indicating that the count display has become 0. Becomes In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the start of the effect to be directed, and the timer effect is set as the target of the effect. At the same timing as or before the start of the effect that suggests the effect type, the effect that suggests the effect type targeted by the timer effect during the execution state is also being executed. It is important to ensure that

FIG. 209 (d) shows an effect situation in which an effect of “specific operation-related effect” has been started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect indicating the effect type targeted by the timer effect for the effect is also hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 has also been completed. However, it is important for the timer effect to indicate the effect type targeted for the effect and for the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 to be performed before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect is started.

  209 (e) to (h) after the “specific operation-related effect” is started, and the effect contents are shown in FIG. 200 (c). ), FIGS. 202 (g) to (i), or FIGS. 204 (d) and FIGS. 206 (h) to (j), so that the details are omitted.

  In addition, as the timer effect performed in association with the specific operation-related effect, one of the timer effect shown in FIG. 209 and a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of the predetermined effect lottery. You may make it executable. That is, in another timer effect, the point where a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, “0”) in accordance with the timing of starting (strictly, slightly before this), and continues even after the specific operation-related effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if any of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is indicated as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege is given ( The expectation for big hits is the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer production, the specific operation-related production and the timer production will be produced at the same time, but when the production situation where the production is produced at the same time appears, the specific operation-related production Even if any of the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are shown as the rendering result, their rendering values are the same (the degree of expectation for granting (big hit) is not The same). In other words, in this case, since it is possible to substantially lose the performance of the specific operation-related production itself, even if the specific operation-related production and the timer production are performed simultaneously, any production It is possible to avoid a situation where the user does not understand whether the user should pay attention to the information and distracts his / her attention. However, in order to enhance the entertainment interest of the game, when a production pattern in which the specific operation-related production and the production of the timer are produced at the same time appears, the bonus is given more than when the production pattern shown in FIG. 209 appears. It is desirable to increase the expectation.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 209 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), first, the effect display device 1600 displays a display indicating the type of the effect target ( Although "sword sword" is performed, such a display suggesting an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as an effect target as a timer effect. However, when a specific effect is set as a timer target among a plurality of effects that can be set as a timer target, a display indicating which of the effects is a timer effect may not be displayed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, before giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, an operation opportunity is given to any of these operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect on whether or not to be given. However, prior to providing an operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the effect reception period being generated), a first precursory effect that does not appear when an operation opportunity is provided to the sword decoration 5001. Does not appear when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 (prior to the production acceptance period). An effect pattern for performing a second sign effect may be made to appear. When performing these precursor effects (the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect), the time required for the performance (the precursor effect) is set shorter than in the case where a specific operation-related performance is performed. It is desirable to reduce the expectation of granting a privilege when an effect appears, in order to enhance the entertainment interest when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Here, as the indication effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is provided, for example, the fog is generated. Display a specific image, such as expressing the state of standing in. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position where it is difficult to view the image by overlapping with the specific image (a position on the layer behind the specific image). Thereafter, the specific image is gradually changed to non-display (such as increasing the transmittance or decreasing the area in which the specific image is displayed), so that the button image BTG gradually increases. It can be executed as an effect to be exposed to the user. It should be noted that an example of a specific depiction mode relating to such an indication effect will be described later.

  Then, at this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, and the like) having different degrees of expectation regarding the privilege grant (big hit), As the precursor effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed is developed, it becomes possible to give an interest in which display mode of the button image BTG appears.

  It should be noted that a first indication effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, and that no operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration A second indication effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. It is important that the contents be executed as different effects. In addition, it is desirable that not only the content of the effect but also the time required for the effect be different.

  Such an indication effect is the above-mentioned “specific operation-related effect” in the sense that “when giving an operation opportunity to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the giving of the operation opportunity”. It can be said that this is a higher concept including. As for the precursor effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, as described below with reference to FIG. 210, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the precursor effect is performed in any of these effect modes. Depending on whether it has been performed, it is suggested to indicate how long the effect reception period that occurs in response to the precursor effect has a length, which enhances the entertainment interest when the precursor effect is performed. It is more desirable to achieve this.

  FIG. 210 is a time chart for explaining an example of the effect contents for each type of an effect when a plurality of types (an indication effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as an indication effect.

  First, in the example shown in FIG. 210A (a sign effect A), the sign effect A is started when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. The precursor effect A is executed as the above-described “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (a) (the precursor effect A), when the precursor effect A is performed, the same time length is applied even if any operation means is given an operation opportunity. The effect reception period (valid period) T1 that is held occurs.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (such as a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect A ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T1, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation effects (for example, FIG. 199 (d), (f), 201 (e), FIG. 202 (h), FIG. 205 (f), FIG. 206 (i), etc.), and a process for ending the period T1 at that time. Is being done.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (b) (the precursor effect B1), when the second predetermined time has elapsed, not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started, An indication effect B1 is to be started. The precursor effect B1 is not a “specific operation-related effect”, but one that is executed before an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (specific operation When the indication effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation device (for example, the operation button 410) is set. Is caused to occur.

  In the effect reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1 is displayed. Is done. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, a predetermined operation effect different from the above-described operation effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process for terminating the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 is, as shown in FIGS. (Effective period) This is generated as a period having a different time length (here, a shorter time length) from T1. Thereby, depending on which mode (the precursor effect A, the precursor effect B1) performs the precursor effect, it is suggested how long the effect reception period generated in response to the precursor effect is. Can be maintained, and the entertainment of the game when the indication effect is performed can be appropriately maintained.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 210C (sign effect B2), the sign effect B2 is started when a second predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. Like the sign effect B1, the sign effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related effect" but is executed prior to an operation opportunity given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). (Which is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the indication effect B2 is executed, an effect acceptance period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a different time length from the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1. An effect reception period) T3 is generated.

  Note that also in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (such as a character display such as “press”) that prompts an operation to a specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2, or a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period. Display) is displayed. Further, when an effect is received by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T3, an operation-time effect different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is performed, and a process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor effect B2 is, as shown in FIGS. (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. In other words, in this case, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect having a relatively high expectation is executed, despite the fact that the precursor effect B2 having a relatively low expectation concerning the privilege grant (big hit) is executed. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T3 having a length will occur, an effect situation as if a specific operation-related effect has been performed is created, and the precursor effect B2 is generated. It is possible to suitably maintain the entertainment interest when the game is performed. Note that in this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision be different between when the effect reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the effect reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

  The indication effects B1 and B2 are specified by causing the same effect mode to appear from the start of the effect to the timing in the middle of the effect, and causing different effect modes to appear after the timing has elapsed. The operation means may be provided with the effect of determining which of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 and the effect reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such a staging property, and the staging effects B1 and B2 may be set such that the staging is started when a different time elapses after the symbol change is started. The indication effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths from each other.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (d) (sign effect C), the sign effect C is started when a third predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol change was started. The precursor effect C is executed as the above-described “specific operation-related effect” regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When C is executed, an effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (d) (the indication effect C), when the indication effect C is performed, the same time length is applied to any of the operation means even if the operation opportunity is given. The effect reception period (valid period) T4 that has is generated.

  During the effect reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display (such as a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect C is displayed. ) Is displayed. Then, when an effect is received by an operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T4, the above-described operation effect (for example, FIG. 199 (d), (f), 201 (e), FIG. 202 (h), FIG. 205 (f), FIG. 206 (i), etc.), and a process of ending the period T4 at that time. Is being done.

  In this regard, in this effect example, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor effect C is, as shown in FIGS. (Effective period) It is generated as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than the precursor effect A, as long as the precursor effect is executed as the “specific operation-related performance” described above. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as the case of the precursor effect A is generated, the entertainment interest when the precursor effect C is performed is suitably maintained. Will be able to

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 210, the length of the effect reception period (valid period) is associated with the type of the precursor effects A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, thereby providing the effect reception period. (Effective period) was suggested. However, by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period (for example, effect reception period T2) having a predetermined length of time for each type of precursor effect to be different, the effect reception period (effective period) is set. ) May be suggested.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the state of the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 205 (e), the operation button 410 is operated at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as operating at the operation position in accordance with this. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration 5001 is operating at the operating position (sword-pulling state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as operating at the operating position (sword-pulling state). Have been.

  However, a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating as it looks. In this case, when the result of the effect is displayed even though the specific operation-related effect having a relatively high degree of expectation is being performed, the width of the effect is significantly narrowed. I am concerned.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 211 and 212, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Regarding (BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operation means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but is displayed as a state different from the specific operation means at that time.

  FIG. 211 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect contents when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect contents when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  First, FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (c) show the effect contents when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal game state, the effect in which the display of the variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in a state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the state of the effect, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), not the “specific operation-related effect”, but only the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 side. Assuming that the precursor effect has been executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001 soon. In the indication effect (the indication effect in other examples is also the same), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given soon is made, an effect image imitating the operation means. Need not necessarily be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration body 5001 soon from the time when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the effect reception period is not yet displayed. It will be.

  In the precursor effect shown in FIG. 211 (a), a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation and a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high degree of expectation Are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content regarding which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this effect situation, it is recognizable that an operation opportunity will be given to the sword decoration 5001 soon, but the sword decoration image SYGa having a low degree of expectation as the sword decoration image SYG or the sword decoration image SYGa having a low degree of expectation is obtained. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

  FIG. 211 (b) shows the rendering result in which the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left, whereby the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively high expectation rendering situation. It will be suggested that an effect acceptance period will occur. In the display shown in FIG. 211 (b), a final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (such as the sword decoration image SYGa) is displayed. .

  FIG. 211 (c) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to perform an operation (“press-in”). "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Further, when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state. The state is changed to the state. When an effect is received during the effect reception period, an effect at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the effect reception, the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a sword-inserted state. Will be maintained. Further, a process of ending the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, in the case where a precursor effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means (here, the operation target side) is operated. The effect image (in this case, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (pull-out state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, an effect image (here, a sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the operation means on the operation target side, and an operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation object side are displayed. Are stopped at predetermined positions.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 211 (d) to (g) show the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal game state, the effect in which the display of the variation of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination in a state where the number of holds is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, as shown in FIG. 211 (d), in the state of the effect, if a precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” is started, any one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is started. It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will be given soon.

  FIG. 211 (e) shows an effect situation in which a precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” has progressed and the effect result has appeared. In this state of production, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 as a production result of “specific operation-related production”. Have been. In the display shown in FIG. 211 (e), a final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYG to another effect image (such as the button image BTG) is displayed.

  FIG. 211 (f) shows an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to perform an operation (“press-in”). "And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. In addition, when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword-pulling state to the sword-drawing state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword-drawing state.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword-drawing state during the effect reception period (the sword decoration image SYG). Is stopped), while the sword decoration 5001 is configured to continuously perform upward displacement slowly over a period until the effect reception period ends, and is set in different states. I am trying to.

  During the effect reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration 5001, an effect is received when the operation target accessory 141 is operated in the sword-put state, and the effect is received. A predetermined operation effect is performed based on the reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in a sword-inserted state. Further, a process of ending the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is provided for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately transmitting the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 211 (f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is set to the stop state during the effect reception period, and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The decoration image SYG may be continuously operated, and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a stopped state.

  In this way, in the effect example shown in FIG. 211, in the effect reception period (FIG. 211 (c)) that occurs without passing through a specific operation-related effect, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed. On the other hand, in the effect reception period (FIG. 211 (f)) generated after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is set to the stop state. The other side is kept in a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the effect can be expanded in width, and the entertainment of the game can be suitably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related effect, the operation While the button 410 itself is stopped, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the description thereof is continued, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected to greatly improve the width of the effect when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  One of the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation and the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The technique may be adopted not only when a sign effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed but also when a specific operation-related effect as a sign effect is performed. That is, in this case, in a specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect on which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration 5001 appears, any When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, it is determined whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high expectation or a display mode with a relatively low expectation. Can be further provided. Regarding the technique, in addition to the effect example of FIG. 211, the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof may be appropriately adopted.

  Then, when giving such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is used as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it appears or is recognizable, and it is unknown whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has a high degree of expectation (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is displayed). (E.g., a recognizable display state) is made to appear by the production progress. Then, after this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image appearing as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is of high expectation (for example, the outline image of the effect image imitating the operation means) It is desirable that the state is released so that the color can be confirmed, etc.) in order with further effect development. Further, when the button image BTG is displayed after the progress of the effect, under a predetermined condition, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high degree of expectation (for example, if the operation means is operated). After canceling the outline state of the simulated effect image, the button image BTG is further hidden and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect. To a state where it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG has a high degree of expectation (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined to make a display state in which only the outline can be recognized). And an effect pattern for further effecting may be generated. After this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that has appeared as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, a white state of the sword decoration image SYG) , So that the color can be checked). Note that, in this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the higher expectation side (for example, red), it is more than when the display mode on the lower expectation side (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further performance progress occurs.

  FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (e) are diagrams illustrating another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 211 (d) to 211 (g) as the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 212 (a), the indication effect as “specific operation-related effect” has been started, but the indication effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. First character (effect image corresponding to operation button 410) and second character holding sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating sword decoration body 5001 (effect image corresponding to sword decoration body 5001) Is depicted, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. Like that.

  FIG. 212 (b) shows an effect state in which an effect result of a precursor effect as “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this effect situation, the first character (the effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (the sword decoration) to indicate that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 212 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 208 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed), and While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion (confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the portion that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) are the same. The effect image (the display image shown in FIG. 212 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  FIGS. 212 (c) to (e) show an example of an effect when an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. When the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 212 (c). In addition, an instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration 5001 (character display such as “push-in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed.

  Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 212 (c), when the effect reception period occurs, the sword decoration 5001 starts operating from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state. As shown in FIG. 212 (d), the sword decoration body 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state only after a relatively short time has elapsed since the start of the effect reception period. It is supposed to. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 212 (e), as long as there is no operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state at least until the end of the effect reception period, and (The operation from the sword-drawing state to the sword-putting state).

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 212 (c) to (e), a motion (movement in the rotation direction) completely different from such a motion (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration 5001. In the lowering operation), the description of the second character swinging down the sword decoration image SYG is performed, and the sword decoration image SYG continues even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the drawn state. The operation is performed. The sword decoration image SYG according to this effect example loops a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 212 (c)) to the end (FIG. 212 (e)) within the effect acceptance period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by the change, and the display change progresses by an amount corresponding to the passage of time. Also, the sword decoration 5001 is brought into the sword-drawing state during a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 212 (c)) to the end (FIG. 212 (e)). Is completed, but even if the loop processing is performed, it is maintained in the state of the sword without being affected by the loop processing. In addition, when the operation to the katana state is performed on the operation target accessory 141 during the effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, and the predetermined operation effect is performed based on the effect reception, and The loop processing is ended, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword state. Further, a process of ending the effect reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect reception period, The operation modes (operations that play a role of accurately transmitting the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position) and loop operations provided for the effects) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 ends. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues its operation without ending. Thus, when an effect reception period (FIGS. 212 (c) to (e)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is continued until after the effect reception period occurs ( The effect can be expanded, for example, it can be executed with the background being continued), and the entertainment interest of the game can be suitably maintained.

  Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 212, the effect contents (display in which characters face each other) appearing when the precursor effect (FIG. 212 (a)) as a specific operation-related effect is being performed. The effects (FIGS. 212 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the background image and the background image are executed. In particular, during the effect reception period according to this effect example, the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG different from the effect image simulating the operation means are displayed while the special background (full moon) is displayed. The image is displayed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both of the image and the image), so that it is possible to improve the production performance during the production reception period. In this sense, even in the sign effect, performing the effect using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character requires the sign effect and the effect in the effect reception period. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a directing connection between them to further improve the directing property. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for granting benefits, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

  In the case of a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect or an effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as the effects, and the effect reception is performed depending on which of the effect modes appears. A suggestion may be made as to whether or not an aspect having a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time effect when an effect is received during the period. A background image that appears when the indication effect is performed may be used to indicate the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 212, when an indication effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception is performed by changing both the effect content and the background image appearing in the indication effect. Although it was decided to execute the effect within the period, but when the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect content and the background image that appeared in the precursor effect are changed The effect when the effect reception period occurs may be performed.

  In the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 212, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started after the effect reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 starts before the effect reception period occurs. The operation of the sword decoration body 5001 started before the effect reception period occurs may be completed before the effect reception period occurs (the role of accurately transmitting the current situation may be performed). The performed operation may be completed before the effect reception period occurs), and thereafter, the stopped state may be maintained.

  In addition, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001), a display for changing a background image when an effect acceptance period occurs, and a case where the background image is changed There may be a case where the display is not performed. Then, in this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period is generated, the expectation regarding the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period is generated. Is desirable.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect reception is performed, the specific decoration member SDY (a movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation effect based on the effect reception. In this case, for example, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 199 (d), FIG. 201 (e), and FIG. 202 (h), the sword decoration 5001 (or the operation button 410) is also operated, so as to improve the performance of the operation-time production after a specific operation-related production. As described above, in order to improve the performance of the operation-related production after the specific operation-related production, the operation-related production after the specific operation-related production depends on the result of the production. In this case, an effect state appears when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (the game machine main body side) are operated, or the movable state provided on the game board 5 side. While an unsuccessful effect state in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, an operation-time effect performed without a specific operation-related effect (for example, a specific effect) Depending on the result of the effect, either the movable member provided on the game board 5 or the movable member provided on the door frame 3 side, depending on the result of the effect. Only when the success of the stage is activated, or the game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Further, in the above-described effect modes and specific operation-related effects according to other examples thereof, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The expectation of granting a privilege is higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 213 (a), the button image BTG is added in a mode (specific mode) in which a princess character is added. The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation concerning the privilege provision may be higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect. Is increased, it is possible to appropriately maintain the game entertainment when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  In addition, the manner in which the princess character is displayed (a specific effect manner) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 213 (b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation concerning the privilege provision is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) (FIG. 213 (a)) and a second effect pattern (FIG. 213 (b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed. )) May be prepared. Then, in this case, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is set to be the same between the case where the first effect pattern appears and the case where the second effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting aspect as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, and also to provide the button image BTG and the sword. It is possible to provide completely different fun, such as whether or not a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) appears, regardless of which of the decorative images SYG appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, when such a specific production mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related production, when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 213 (c), when the specific effect mode is at a stage where the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared. This may be displayed in advance from (for example, during the production of a specific operation-related production). According to such a configuration, although the specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears is being performed, the specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed). Appearing), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same degree of expectation). In other words, in this case, the effect of the specific operation-related effect itself will be lost, and thus, even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed, it may be such as "a foreboding effect by a princess character". It is possible to provide a directing effect having a completely different purpose.

  The sword decoration 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof has a sword part (the handle 5012 and the sword body 5011) of the sword decoration 5001 that can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 169, a second operation in which a sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-described production modes and other examples thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit is given an operation opportunity. The above-described specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect of (1). The sword portion (stem portion 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) are both operably supported by one main body supporting portion (not shown) provided on the door frame 3, and Even when one side of the sword part (stem part 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in a state of operation (operation), the other side has a structure capable of operation (operation). Is formed.

  However, in the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different only when any of the effect results appears. Since there is no change, there is a concern that the possibility of an operation error occurring on the player side increases. In particular, even when the operation opportunity is given to any of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, for example, the effect image imitating the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001 (and the effect image thereof) (Instruction prompting for operation) is displayed, the player may be more likely to make an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. In other words, in this case, as the remaining time of the effect reception period decreases every moment, the operation of correcting the operation error is first performed on the player side, and then the operation in the original correct mode is further performed. It is difficult to do that, and even if a specific operation-related production with relatively high expectation was performed, the production acceptance period would end before the production was accepted. However, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease.

  The sword decoration body 5001 has a mode such as “movement in the vertical direction” by the sword portion and a mode “movement in the horizontal direction” by the sheath portion. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the operation on the wrong side is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the operation on the appropriate side, and the effect acceptance period ends. It can be said that the risk of losing the operation opportunity is increased.

  Therefore, when performing the above-described specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit. As described below with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed from the original state, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation effect is performed in accordance with the effect reception.

  FIG. 214 and FIG. 215 show an example of an effect in a case where an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG.

  FIG. 214 (a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holds is 0. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 214 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect has been started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 214 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 214 (b), a first effect simulating a first operation mode in which the sword portion of the sword decoration 5001 is operated from the sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state. The image OX and the second effect image TX imitating the second operation mode of operating the sheath portion of the sword decoration 5001 to move in the lateral direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time to indicate that an operation opportunity in any one of the operation modes will soon be able to accept the effect. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword portion of the sword decoration 5001 is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed. In both of the effect images TX, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  FIG. 214 (c) shows the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and the second effect image corresponding to the second operation mode, with the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 214 (b) progressing. The effect image TX is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area. When an effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect accepting period for the first operation mode occurs, and an effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left. When the (result) appears, an effect acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

  In the specific operation-related effect according to this example of the effect, as shown in FIG. 214 (c), when the first effect image OX is left but the situation becomes dominant, the display such as "pressing in" is visible. The display such as "slide" can be visually recognized in a situation where the second effect image TX is predominant but left. The details of the operation content can be easily recognized according to the state of the effect. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that the effect may be erroneously recognized as prompting the operation at the timing when the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

  FIG. 214D shows that as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 214C, the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is displayed in the display area. Is produced (first production result). When progressing to the effect content, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, no effect at the time of a specific operation (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) occurs, and the first operation mode does not occur. An effect is received when the operation is performed, and a specific operation effect (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

  That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 214 (d), an effect accepting period relating to the effect at the time of a specific operation occurs only on the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. That is, in the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting an operation (a character display such as “push-in” or a time remaining in the effect reception period) is shown. Bar display) will be displayed. Also, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 operates from the sword-pulling state to the sword-pulling state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  FIG. 215 (e) shows that, although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, an operation (erroneous operation) according to the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode is performed. This shows the state of production when performed by a player.

  That is, in this effect example, even if the effect accepting period related to the specific operation effect occurs only on the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of the second operation mode itself is enabled. Then, when an operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player, and a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in the first operation mode is received is received. (In this case, “just as it is”).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 215 (f), the content of such specific notification is changed (here, “calm down and pushed in”) with the passage of time so that the player can regain calmness. It has become. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be informed is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify in short words, so that even if the player is in a panic state, this can be suitably performed. It is expected to be suppressed. Thereby, even if the operation according to the first operation mode is performed on the sword decoration body 5001 in the second operation mode as it is, the player is informed that the effect is properly received. You will be able to recognize.

  FIG. 215 (g) shows that an appropriate operation (first operation mode) is performed in the effect situation (effect accepting period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIGS. 215 (e) and 215 (f). As a result, a state in which an effect is accepted and the above-described operation effect is performed in accordance with the operation is depicted. However, at this time, when the player's hand is released from the sword decoration 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the state of the second operation mode to a non-operation state (normal state). ).

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains unchanged. Even if the operation is performed from the state (the state of the operation error), the effect reception is properly performed, so that a decrease in the game entertainment when the operation error occurs is suppressed.

  In the above-mentioned production example, when a player makes an erroneous operation, the user is notified that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error. It is not always necessary to perform the detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, there is a possibility that the player has panicked, so that performing notification of complicated contents may have an adverse effect. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received, the notification is not displayed by a message but an effect or a sound only. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that the operation has been performed incorrectly, but a special situation is confirmed in which the specific notification is performed based on the performed operation and the effect at the time of the operation is not performed. Thus, it can be said that it is possible to sufficiently expect to switch the operation to the operation on the appropriate side.

  On the other hand, depending on a player (especially, an elderly player), a situation may occur in which an operation is performed by mistake before a production acceptance period occurs in a specific operation-related production. For example, when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (such as laterally moving the sheath) even though an operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath) is not issued, the first operation is performed. It is also conceivable that a situation may occur in which an effect reception period for a specific operation effect occurs only on the operation unit (for example, sword part) side. In this case as well, how the player operates There is a concern that people may not be able to recognize it.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit (sword part) and the second operation unit (sheath part) is given an operation opportunity is performed, Despite the fact that there is no operation instruction (remaining time bar display) to the second operation unit side (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 214 (b) and (c)), the second operation unit It is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is accepted even when an operation is performed on. The specific notification may be “a message display indicating that the appropriate operation unit to which an operation opportunity is to be given soon while the operation state is maintained is maintained” or a message display. Instead, it may be a simple notification such as an effect or notification using only sound. In any case, despite performing the operation, by confirming a special situation such that the specific notification is performed based on the operation and the effect at the time of the operation is not performed, the operation on the appropriate side is thereafter performed. It can be said that it is possible to expect that it will be a good reason to go.

  In this case, for example, while the operation is being performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) (the state in which the sword decoration 5001 has moved to the left), the first operation unit (for example, , Even when the effect reception period for the effect at the time of a specific operation occurs only on the side of the sword part), the state in which the operation on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (sword decoration body) When the first operation unit (for example, a sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which the 5001 has been moved to the left, an effect is received and the above-described operation effect is performed according to the operation. Becomes

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception that occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the original state, the effect reception will be performed properly, so the operation error will be made before the effect reception period occurs Also, when the game occurs, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed.

  However, during a period in which a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is provided with the operation opportunity, the effect result is indicated and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of, the information will be intermingled with the content to be notified (such as instruction display) during the production reception period, and the player will be further confused. There is a concern. Therefore, the effect result suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is in the specific operation-related effect that is finally displayed, and in the period until the effect result is displayed. The above-described specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-described specific notification is not performed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and the first period and the second period are sequentially performed after the first period. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

  In the above-described effect example, when performing the specific notification, the degree of expectation regarding the privilege grant may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, in the above-described effect form and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the effect form of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to any one of the above-described plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 179). From the stage 0 mode to any one of the stage 1 to stage 3 modes). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect has been performed, the sword decoration 5001 is changed to one of the above-described modes, and an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may make it do. Alternatively, when an effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect has been performed, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed to any one of the above-described multiple modes.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (character display such as “push-in”, a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), and a sword decoration 5001 Is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration 5001 at that time (stage 0 to stage 3 shown in FIG. 179). It will be.

  However, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, if the sword decoration image 5001 is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the confirmation of the sword decoration image SYG can have any fun. And the production performance during the production reception period is poor. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure directing performance during the directing reception period.

  At this time, by making the aspect expressed in the sword decoration image SYG higher in the degree of expectation than in the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001, the rendition during the effect reception period is improved. This is desirable in order to ensure a favorable situation. For example, in the case where the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined rendering condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is not in the stage 1 form but in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form. To be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the mode of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment during the effect reception period is appropriately maintained.

  In order to obtain such an operation and effect, it is only necessary that the number of the production modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of the production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of presentation modes on the sword decoration 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of presentation modes are prepared as the sword decoration 5001, the plurality of presentation modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

  However, if the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the mode of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made different in this way, some players may have a discomfort that false display is made. There is concern that this may reduce the interest in gaming. Therefore, more preferably, the mode of the sword decoration image SYG is a special mode different from any of the modes prepared as the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the modes 0 to 3 shown in FIG. 179). Is prepared, and when a predetermined production condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, so that the sword decoration image 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed. It is desirable that the mode of the decorative image SYG be different from that of the decorative image SYG. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape is changed by further deforming and merging the sword decoration image SYG, or may be operated in a mode that does not appear in the sword decoration body 5001, or in the sword decoration body 5001. It may emit light in such a manner that it does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, a rendering effect that is difficult due to the structure of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, and therefore, it is possible to suppress a concern that a false display is made and a discomfort is caused. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be improved by providing a performance that is beyond the imagination of the player when looking at the structure of the sword decoration 5001.

  Even when the sword decoration image SYG is given a special mode as described above, the sword decoration image SYG is provided in each mode prepared as the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, shown in FIG. 179). It is desirable that the display in the stage 0 mode to the stage 3 mode can be performed. That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. It is desirable that when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the special mode, it is suggested that the degree of expectation regarding the privilege provision is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in other modes. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, regarding the method of enabling the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, another effect (for example, the effect illustrated in FIGS. 180 to 187) is performed. You may make it apply.

  For example, assuming that the production state is as shown in FIG. 183 (X1), the next production progress is to the production state shown in FIG. 216 (a) in addition to the production state shown in FIG. 183 (X2). And the production pattern which production is advanced will be prepared. Then, when the effect progresses to the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 183 (X1). A continuation image indicating that no opportunity is given (an image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword-drawing state is in the sword-pulling state while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Will be returned.

  Next, the three decorative symbols, which have been variably displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-sequence mode to notify the player that the decorative symbols are to be re-varied (FIG. 216 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative patterns, the central decorative pattern is a pseudo continuous sword pattern that is not prepared for the left and right decorative patterns, specifically, the form and effect level (number of pseudo continuous fluctuations) of the sword decorative body 5001. By displaying the pseudo continuous sword design of the mode, the player can easily recognize the re-change of the decorative design (start of the pseudo continuous change).

  However, here, as shown in FIG. 216 (c), the pseudo-sword design displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the fourth pseudo-run variation (re-variation). The sword image indicating the (special aspect) is displayed, but this special aspect can appear only in the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area. The body 5001 itself cannot be changed. The special mode according to this effect example is a mode in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 216 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area changes to a special mode, the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 3 mode. Is maintained, and the state is changed from the sword-pulled state to the second sword-drawn state.

  Then, after that, an operation expiration effect for generating an operation validity period of the sword decoration 5001 and for prompting a sword decoration operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in a special mode is displayed while the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second drawn state (stage 3 mode), An image (bar display) indicating the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay your sword!" (FIG. 216 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 216 (e), when a sword-drawing operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period, the specific decorative member SDY (draft) is dropped according to the set effect pattern. Along with the expected degree notification effect, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. This allows the player to know that the pseudo continuous change (re-change) has been completed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when a symbol change is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is changed within the symbol change. The first indication effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration 5001 can be executed. In addition, when the symbol change is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, no operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the symbol change. The second warning effect that appears when an opportunity is given is executable. In addition, when the symbol variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, a third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. An effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this regard, these predictive effects are executed as different effect contents, but as the effect contents, for example,
-Before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, the specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears,
・ After that, at a position where it is difficult to view the specific image, an effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed,
-After that, the common point is that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to the non-display area (such as increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed). You may make it make it. For example, in the first predictive effect, a display effect using a “cloud effect” (a display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means) is performed as the specific image, and in the second predictive effect, “flame effect” is specified as the specific image. Effect (a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means. In the third predictive effect, a display effect (a effect image imitating the operation means If the type of the specific image is made different, for example, by making a display effect that gradually makes it easier to visually recognize, it is possible to make those precursor effects different from each other. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first precursor effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the “flame effect” is performed, it can be recognized that the second predictive effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001, and the “water effect” is used. When the display effect is performed, it can be recognized that the third predictive effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated is performed. Will be done.

  In the case of performing the sign effect (at least one of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect) with such effect contents, the effect image imitating the operation means by the specific image is used. It is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the operation means during a period in which it is difficult to visually recognize the operation. When such a configuration is applied to one of the first precursor effect and the second precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and a low expectation effect. Since an operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage where the user is not sure of which of the display modes (for example, blue) the image is displayed, the effect during the effect reception period is given. Characteristics can be improved. Also, when such a configuration is applied to the third symptom effect (specific operation-related effect), it is convinced that an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where the user cannot have the effect, it is possible to improve the performance in the effect reception period.

  FIG. 217 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 218 is an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart shown. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 217 and FIG. 218, a description will be given of an example of an effect when the first symptom effect is performed. It is also possible to apply to an indication effect.

  FIG. 217 (a) shows that, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the production situation.

  FIG. 217 (b) illustrates an effect state in which the effect of the first precursor effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ illustrated in FIG. 217 (a).

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 217 (b), the display effect by the “cloud effect” is being performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such “cloud effect” gradually changes from the display area to non-display after the effect is started at timing t1 shown in FIG. 218 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased. Or reducing the area where the specific image is displayed).

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 218, at the timing t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” gradually changes to non-display, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is changed. When generated, a button image BTG that simulates the operation button 410 and an instruction display (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 are respectively displayed ( FIG. 217 (c)).

  In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes. When the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue), the rate at which the effect at the time of the operation is performed in a mode of higher expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 217 (c), there is a situation in which it is not certain whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. In spite of this, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, an effect is received, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect is performed. That is, in this case, also in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect at the time of operation is performed in such a manner that the effect content is switched from the precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. The effect can be advanced without being convinced which of the two display modes will be displayed.

  Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 217 (c), the user is not sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 keeps changing the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at the timing t3 at which the predetermined time has elapsed since the production situation shown in FIG. Is completely hidden (FIG. 217 (d)). In such a situation, it is possible to perform an operation on the operation button 410 while it is possible to easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed in such a manner that the effect contents are switched from the effect shown in FIG. 217 (d).

  According to such a configuration, during the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), a period from when the button image BTG is displayed to when the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t2 to t3). In the case of ()), it is possible to provide the effect of rendering the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  In order to enhance the production performance during the production acceptance period (timing t2 to t4) in the entire period, the “cloud effect” is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period between the timings t2 and t3. In this production example, a message such as "press" is displayed during a period (timing t3 to t4) during which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden. If the effect of dynamically displaying the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period during the period of the timing t3 to t4 is performed, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more appropriately enhanced. Will be able to

  Further, in the effect example illustrated in FIG. 217, the instruction display for prompting the operation on the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed simultaneously (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the effect acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the “cloud effect” is performed, the effect condition in which the button image BTG is difficult to visually recognize first appears, and after a predetermined time after the condition, the effect condition is determined to be difficult to recognize. Until the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, an instruction display prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in an effect state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG before the effect reception period occurs, the effect pattern (third precursor) in which the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation. In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interesting aspect in which the value of watching the button image BTG becomes higher as the button image BTG is in an effect state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG. It can be maintained suitably.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 217, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”. The display was made so that the visibility was maintained. Thus, it is possible to enjoy the state in which the visibility of the button image BTG changes while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be made difficult to be visually recognized until the timing t3 due to the influence of the “cloud effect”. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether to operate the operation button 410 without being convinced of the display mode while the remaining time of the effect reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide unprecedented novel performance.

  In addition, in the case of applying such a directivity to any of the first fore-aid effect, the second fore-effect effect, and the third fore-ahead effect, the effect image imitating the operation means after the start of the fore-effect effect is clear. Even if the length of time until the image is made visually recognizable (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image simulating the operation means is displayed and then becomes clear. It is desirable to set the same time (the time until the specific image is hidden) until the image is made visually recognizable. In addition, when such a rendition is applied to any of the first sign effect, the second sign effect, and the third sign effect, an effect imitating the operation means after the sign effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden), prepare a plurality of these so as to have a plurality of effects with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same for all. It is desirable to set the time.

  Further, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operating means is caused to appear in a display mode (timing t2) in which the effect image imitating the operating means is relatively hard to visually recognize due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself. It may be made to gradually change toward a display mode (timing t3) which is easily visually recognized. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operation means appears in a display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, the appearance in such a display mode is itself. May be performed as an indication effect, or in a display mode in which another display is performed as an indication effect, an effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize. Is also good.

[Movable production triggered by the establishment of another condition different from the condition of symbol game]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a), when a game ball is received in the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a determination regarding a hit is made. As a result, when a big hit is won, a big hit symbol is displayed, and then a big hit game in which a large number of game balls can be obtained is executed, and after the big hit game, the player has an advantage. It can be controlled to the appropriate gaming state (time saving state, probability change state). In addition, while such a symbol game is performed, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an effect according to the result of the hit determination (for example, in addition to an effect pattern, various announcement effects such as a timer effect, an operation effect, and a look-ahead effect). , Etc.) can be executed, thereby maintaining the game entertainment until the big hit game is performed, as described above.

  However, by merely performing an effect in accordance with the symbol game by the main control MPU 4100a, the display change on the effect display device 1600 or the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the specific There is a concern that the decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) becomes monotonous and it is difficult to maintain the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a high operation rate for a long period of time.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, even when another condition irrelevant to the determination process relating to the progress of the game and the symbol variation (a condition for starting the symbol game) corresponding thereto is established, the display content on the effect display device 1600 is not changed. A process capable of causing a change in the behavior of the movable decorative body can be executed. That is, in this case, a display change and a movable body operation appear in a mode beyond the category of the symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained at a high operation rate for a long period of time. Can be expected.

Here, when another condition irrelevant to the determination process relating to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol change (the start condition of the symbol game) is established, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. For example, the methods listed below can be envisaged as the methods for generating. In order to cause a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 or the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a technique different from any of the techniques listed below may be adopted. However, a situation in which the symbol variation is not executed temporarily (the processing flag shown in FIG. Is in a state of “0”), the above-mentioned different condition must be satisfied. Even if the different condition is satisfied in this situation, the display content on the effect display device 1600 or It must be possible to cause a change in the behavior of the movable decorative body.
-A method of periodically performing a production lottery that is not related to symbol fluctuation, and assuming that the above-mentioned "satisfies another condition" that a specific result is obtained in this production lottery-The cumulative number of times of operation for a specific operation means Is determined to be the above-mentioned “satisfaction of another condition”. The RTC (real-time clock) function or the arithmetic processing in the peripheral control MPU 4150a (or the main control MPU 4100a) measures the time (for example, when the power is turned on). The time from the start is measured), and when the measured time reaches a predetermined time, the above-mentioned “satisfaction of another condition” is used.

  Generally, in a pachinko gaming machine, when the time measured using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is determined that another condition is satisfied, and the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. Often employs a technique. However, regardless of which method is adopted, if a change occurs in the display content or the behavior of the movable body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, until the change timing arrives Because it is common to require a relatively long time (at least a few hours, for example), the display contents or the behavior of the movable decorative body may be changed despite such a long time. If an impossible situation occurs, there is a concern that the interest in gaming may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, an RTC state) in which a movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set to a symbol game start condition. It can be generated based on the establishment of another specific condition (for example, that the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time). Then, in a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, it is not located at the original position in spite of the situation that should be located at the original position), and the specific state has not occurred, the symbol change may occur. When the corresponding restoration operation timing has arrived, it is possible to start processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body, while the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, even when a predetermined restoration operation time has arrived, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is not started, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at the predetermined time within the specific state can be started. .

  That is, in this case, in the specific state that can be generated based on the establishment of the specific condition different from the symbol game start condition, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol changing side is set to the prohibited state. Since it is possible to start the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the specific state, the movable body abnormality is determined in a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution state of the symbol variation. By restoring, it is expected that the operation in a specific mode by the movable decorative body (the operation when another condition is satisfied) is more reliably executed.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 219, an example of processing content when operating the movable decorative body when such specific conditions are satisfied will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 219, for the sake of convenience of explanation, when the elapsed time from the power-on is determined to have reached the predetermined time using the RTC function, the display contents different from those before the RTC state ( A specific state), and a process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in accordance with the generation timing of the RTC state (the specific state). " As described above, the method of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 or the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the game start condition is satisfied is described above. As described above, it is also possible to appropriately adopt each technique described below when other techniques are adopted.

  Now, assuming that the state is before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the peripheral control MPU 4150a first sets the remaining time (e.g., until the RTC state occurs) until the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time. Will be updated periodically. In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 219, at timing Rt2, the elapsed time from power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate an RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) occurs. Based on this, the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed. As described above, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the satisfaction of the condition (the establishment of the second condition) irrespective of the situation of the symbol fluctuation, so that the flow of the game up to now can be improved. You will be able to have a sense of expectation as if it were changing. At this time, the display content on the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

  In order to more appropriately increase the sense of expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is caused to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), If a jackpot is won during the period from the occurrence of the period (RTC state) to the end thereof, when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state), the production progress by the production character which cannot appear (normal state) ( It is more desirable to provide a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, a condition irrelevant to the situation of the symbol variation is established even at the timing Rt1 slightly before (for example, 5 seconds before) such timing Rt2. Based on the fulfillment of the condition (the fulfillment of the first condition), a front display indicating that the RTC state will soon occur (the fulfillment of the second condition) can be executed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU 4150a according to this example, whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 is determined by periodically checking the lapse of time from the power-on, and the timing Rt1 Is determined to have arrived, a previous display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, processing (behavior of the movable decorative body) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. . Note that the “previous display” can be executed, for example, as a display such as “RTC state is coming soon” or a countdown display toward timing Rt2.

  According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated in accordance with the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, these movable body operations result in a big hit determination. It is suggested to the player in advance that the game is not based on the game (it does not have any jackpot expectation degree), so that it is possible to appropriately avoid a decrease in the game interest due to a recognition error by the player. Will be able to

  In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 219, at least in the period between timings Rt1 and Rt2, only the display (display not according to the symbol variation) which does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. The decorative pattern (effect pattern) is not displayed so that the pattern itself is not displayed. In other words, in this case, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display that does not conform to the pattern fluctuation) that does not show any degree of expectation appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Since the process for causing the game to start is started, it is expected that the player's interest in the game is prevented from deteriorating due to an erroneous recognition by the player.

  Here, the “previous display appearing at the timing Rt1” and the “movable body operation appearing at the timing Rt2” respectively correspond to “display not conforming to the pattern variation” and correspond to “the behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the pattern variation”. Is what you do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body are generated irrespective of the execution state (including the execution or non-execution) of the symbol change at those timings. However, depending on the execution state of the symbol change, a situation in which preparation for operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is not completed (the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are returned to their original positions despite the arrival of the timing Rt2). There is a concern that processing for sequentially operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may not be performed even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

  For example, when any one of several variation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, There is a case where a movable effect using the movable decorative body C is executed. However, during the execution of the movable effect, the movable body operation timing in the above-described RTC state (here, when the RTC state occurs) arrives. In some cases, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the middle of execution cannot be used as the “behavior of the movable decorative bodies that do not conform to the pattern variation”. Can be assumed.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change comes, not only the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, but also the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes Of the movable decorative body in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined that there is a movable decorative body that is not in a normal state in the movable abnormality determination (abnormality determination), predetermined movable decorative bodies are determined with respect to the movable decorative body to be determined in the form following the abnormality determination processing. By executing a restoration process for performing a restoration operation (such as an operation of moving to the original position), early restoration of the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is enabled. Therefore, the movable body operation timing in the above-described RTC state may be reached during the execution of the restoration processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.) on the movable decorative body. When there is, at least the movable decorative body in the middle of the restoration operation among the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be used as the “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern variation” described above. Can be assumed.

  The “restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation” may be, for example, a symbol variation start timing (a timing at which a command sent from the main control MPU 4100a when the symbol variation is started) or a symbol variation. It can be executed as at least one of the stop timings (the timing at which the command sent from the main control MPU 4100a is acquired when the symbol fluctuation is stopped) (the restoration process is executed based on the command acquisition). It is.

  Therefore, in the example (peripheral control MPU 4150a) shown in FIG. 219, first, at least after the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” arrives, the movable decorative body is specified by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. In the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in the mode, the movable decorative bodies (the movable decorative body A and the movable decorative body B) used in the period are used. , The movable decorative body C) is prohibited so as not to be used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol variation side, whereby the movable member operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration not according to the symbol variation). It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the behavior of the body cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol variation side.

  However, at this time, even if the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, if the movable effect is not executed in the effect pattern in some cases, there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced. In this regard, in the example (peripheral control MPU 4150a) shown in FIG. 219, at the timing Rt1, only the display (display not according to the symbol variation) showing no expectation is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600. That was mentioned above.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, when there is a symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, “what kind of expected The display which is not shown at all times (display from timing Rt1) "is not hidden at this time, but is displayed over the period up to timing Rt2a at which the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is stopped. I try to keep it.

  According to such a configuration, at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, the effect is displayed in the effect display device 1600 despite the fact that the RTC state (specific state) occurs and the symbol variation is actually performed. Only the display in which the effect pattern by the symbol is not displayed and the degree of expectation is not shown appears. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable decorative body (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the occurrence of the RTC state progresses. It is expected that it is possible to appropriately suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the fact that the movable effect according to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a.

  In the example shown in FIG. 219, when the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, the B fluctuation (loss) in the drawing) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is terminated (stopped) (when the timing Rt2a arrives). Even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the “display not showing any degree of expectation (display from timing Rt1)” which has been displayed so far is not displayed at this time. Thus, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. Then, after this, when a new symbol change (in the diagram, a C change (loss)) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the change in the symbol change is performed. The display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern or the notice effect is started as usual.

  However, even if a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed, the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” comes. At least until the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is prohibited. In this state, only the movable effect on the symbol variation side is prohibited, but since the movable body operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by disabling the movable effect on the symbol variation side is prohibited. Deterioration of interest is suppressed.

  As such prohibition processing, it is determined whether or not the situation is to be prohibited at the start of the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, C fluctuation), and when it is determined that the situation is to be prohibited, the corresponding symbol fluctuation (FIG. In the meantime, C fluctuation itself may be set as a prohibition target of a movable effect (at least a movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” arrives in the middle of the corresponding symbol change (C change in the figure), the movable decorative body is changed according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. Even if the period until the operation in the specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed "is completed, the movable effect (the period until the symbol change is completed) is completed. The execution of the movable effect using at least one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C) is not allowed.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 219, the timing of appearance of the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is set to a timing Rt2a that is later than the original timing Rt2. Is likely to decrease. However, the RTC state itself occurs at the timing Rt2, but the production bonus due to the occurrence of the RTC state (when a big hit is won between the time the RTC state occurs and the time it ends), the special production mode is controlled. ) Does not occur at the timing Rt2, and only the symbol fluctuations (C and D fluctuations in the figure) after the symbol fluctuations that are first digested after the occurrence of the RTC state are targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to cause a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) to appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

  By the way, during the time when the symbol fluctuation (in the figure, the B fluctuation (losing) in the drawing) which was in the middle of the execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is completed (stopped) (before the timing Rt2a arrives). ), "After the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (here, three movable decorative bodies A, B, A period until the end of the sequential operation by C) elapses. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which “display without any expectation (display from the timing Rt1)” is maintained. This is in the example shown in FIG. 219, and the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (around the timing Rt2) is set as a target of the RTC effect privilege. Because they do not.

  Further, in the example (peripheral control MPU 4150a) shown in FIG. 219, at least the timing Rt2 at which the “RTC state (specific state) occurs” arrives, and then the movable decorative body is specified in the specific mode by the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. In the period until the operation (in this case, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is finished ", the restoration process triggered by this even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change has arrived By prohibiting this (a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state), the movable body operation in a specific mode within the RTC state (not according to the symbol variation) is performed. The behavior of the movable decorative body) can be suppressed from becoming impossible due to the restoration process on the symbol variation side.

  According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol changing side is performed. The process of causing the symbol change to be prohibited is performed, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed. It is expected that the movable body abnormality will be restored in a predetermined procedure within the RTC state (specific state) without receiving the movement, and the operation of the movable decorative body in the above-described specific mode will be more reliably performed. .

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 219, when the game is controlled to the normal game state and the symbol is changed in accordance with the big hit determination (in the figure, the A change (losing)) is being performed. It is assumed that the timing Rt1 comes. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, a display such as “RTC state will soon appear” on the background display of the effect display device 1600 appears as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation. Then, the symbol change (in the figure, the A change (loss) in the figure) is completed between the display such as “RTC state is coming soon” and the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is displayed. Fluctuation (fluctuation B (loss)) is started. The timing Rt2 comes at a stage when the symbol change is being performed, and at the timing Rt2, the three movable shapes of the movable decorative body do not conform to the symbol change. Processing for sequentially operating the decorative bodies A, B, and C is executed. The “display not according to symbol variation” from timing Rt1 is continued over a period until a new symbol variation (variation B (loss) in the figure) is stopped.

  In addition, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 219, “after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, three movable decorative bodies A, During the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and This is prohibited so that neither the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is performed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, during the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a, even though the symbol variation (in the diagram, the B variation (losing)) is executed, the effect display on the symbol variation side ( The display is controlled as a period in which none of the display on which the degree of expectation is indicated, the movable effect on the symbol variable side (moving body operation indicating the degree of expectation), and the restoration process on the symbol variable side are not executed (No. One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 219, during the period of timings Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expected). The control is performed as a period during which neither the movable body operation whose degree is indicated) nor the restoration process on the symbol variation side is executed (second restriction).

  Note that the control at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (both of the effect display on the symbol variation side (display indicating the expected degree) and the movable effect (movable body operation indicating the expected degree) are not executed) It is executed even if the symbol change in the period is not the loss change but the one performed based on the winning of the big hit (big hit change). That is, in this case, when no expected effect is executed and the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in the middle of execution at timing Rt2a, the big hit symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, the player who expected to be in the RTC state can enjoy the surprising effect beyond the expectation. After the big hit symbol appears, the big hit game state occurs while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially performing the operation.

  Also, as described above, with respect to the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display in which the decoration pattern is not changed and only the degree of expectation is not displayed), the pattern change that was in the middle of the execution when the timing Rt2 arrived is not changed. The display is not displayed at the stop timing Rt2a, and a specific background after the occurrence of the RTC state (eg, “during the RTC state”) is displayed instead. Also, when a symbol variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started in a state where a specific background (“RTC state” or the like) is displayed, an effect display (expected degree is indicated) according to the variation pattern. Will be executed as usual. However, regarding the movable effect on the symbol variation side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the processing for sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, the timing after the timing Rt2a arrives. Is also maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, based on the result of the jackpot determination, even if an effect pattern in which a movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performed is temporarily selected, The display in the liquid crystal, the sound, the lighting of the lamp, and the like are performed as usual, but the movable decorative body is not operated.

  Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 219, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the three movable decorative bodies A and B depend on the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. , C (normal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′) until the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol change (here, the start of the symbol change). Timing, stop timing), the restoration process (the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state) triggered by the timing is prohibited. . Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, at the timing Rt2a, at the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (losing) in the figure) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (losing in the figure)). )) (Recovery operation time) has come. In these recovery operation times, even if there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state, the movable decorative body is restored. No processing is performed.

  However, during the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt5 (when the timing is abnormal, the timings Rt2 to Rt5 ′), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol variation side, first, at the timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A enters the abnormal state. It is determined whether or not it is set. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A means, for example, that the movable decorative body A at the original position is moved to a predetermined rendering position (first position), and then is at the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode of moving the movable decorative body A to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B means, for example, that the movable decorative body B at the original position is moved to a predetermined rendering position (second position), and then is at the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode of moving the movable decorative body B to the original position.

  Next, at timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. A process for operating (normal operation) is executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C means, for example, that the movable decorative body C at the original position is moved to a predetermined rendering position (third position), and then is at the predetermined rendering position. It can be realized as an operation mode of moving the movable decorative body C to the original position.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (e), when the timing Rt5 arrives after each operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, C is sequentially completed, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs. The “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the design variation” is ended, and the prohibition state for the restoration process on the design variation side is released.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state in any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation Is executable. However, while performing a series of movable body operations (here, sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs, a predetermined state is determined for the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. When the player side may feel that the restoration operation is being performed, the player may be intrigued, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three operations) when the RTC state occurs. (Sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is not performed independently as a separate operation, but is performed as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. I have. In other words, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated in a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. In addition, when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state, it is possible to preferably prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 219 (f), it is assumed that the movable decorative body B is determined to be in an abnormal state at timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A ends. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, an abnormal state including an operation of restoring (restoring) the movable decorative body B, not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation). The processing for operating (special operation) in the operation mode described above can be executed. After this, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not operated again in the normal operation mode (normal operation), and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. Similarly to the timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is completed), it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. The process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation of the movable decorative body B may be the same as the time required for the special operation of the movable decorative body B, or may not be the same.

  According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the occurrence of the RTC state (for example, during operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality has occurred. Until the timing to operate is reached, it is left unattended in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol fluctuation side. Then, when the timing at which the movable decorative body B should be operated comes, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoring operation instead of the normal operation mode. It is possible to restore the abnormally movable movable body B while appropriately maintaining the effect mode at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state such as "sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C". That is, in this case, it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as the operation at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state has been performed. , A decrease in the entertainment of the game when the game is performed is suitably avoided.

  In addition, in the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a, three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. The operation is started at an intermediate stage, and is continued until the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. Therefore, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure) and the start time (restoration operation time) of the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (loss) in the figure) arrive. Since the prohibition state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side has already been released, when there is a movable decorative body in an abnormal state at those times, the restoration processing is performed on the movable decorative body. The Rukoto.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the “special mode including the restoring operation”, the “special mode including the restoring operation” is referred to as “normal operation. As long as the movable decorative body B is restored (returned to the original position) by an operation mode different from the “mode”, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position may be used.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, at the timing Rt1, only a display (for example, "soon to be in the RTC state") showing no expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. Then, the display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display is different based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, “RTC preparation state”). May be switched to. However, even when the display content is switched at timing Rt2 to make a new display appear, during the period of timing Rt2 to Rt2a, the display content on the effect display device 1600 does not show any degree of expectation (design variation). Is important.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, a case where an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B has been described. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special mode including a restoration operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 219, the movable body operation timing for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set as the occurrence timing of the RTC state (specific state). However, the movable body operation timing may be set to a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state).

  In the example shown in FIG. 219, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 that satisfy the conditions based on the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol variation on the side of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the message “not conform to the symbol variation” is used. Display "and" the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the design fluctuation ". However, instead of this, based on a command transmitted based on a function not conforming to the symbol variation on the main control MPU 4100a side, “display not conforming to the symbol variation” or “behavior of the movable decorative body not conforming to the symbol variation” May be started.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 219, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific manner according to the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (here, 3 During the period until the movable movable bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated), so that the restoration process on the symbol variation side is not performed, and thereby the RTC state is set. The operation of the movable body in a specific mode in the (specific state) (the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) is made difficult to occur due to competition with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration processing for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration processing is set to the execution state. Among them, the RTC state (specific state) occurs, and eventually, the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, by the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the movable body operation (the behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the specific mode in the RTC state (specific state) is performed. It is feared that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 also during the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2. It is desirable to prohibit this from being performed.

  FIG. 220 is a modification example of the example shown in FIG. 219. “During the period between timings Rt1 and Rt2, at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. 218 is not executed ".

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 220, during the period (timing Rt1 to Rt2) from the arrival of timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state, the abnormality determination for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C (or , Restoration processing) itself. Accordingly, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while a display that does not conform to the symbol variation (such as “RTC state is coming soon”) is displayed, this is restored. It is left unattended in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 220, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs arrives, first, prior to executing the processing relating to the movable body operation in the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed. An abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) is performed to determine whether any of the above is in an abnormal state.

  As a result of the abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is determined that the movable body operation timing (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived and FIG. , The processing described above (processing relating to the operation of the movable body in the RTC state) is performed. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, an abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is separately performed again, indicating that there is no abnormality. When it is determined, an operation in a normal mode (see FIG. 219 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, an operation in a special mode (see FIG. 219 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is performed before the processing related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started, and the processing related to the movable body operation in the RTC state is started. After that, prior to operating the movable decorative body B, the second abnormality determination is performed.

  On the other hand, prior to executing the processing relating to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state, the abnormality determination is performed, and as a result, it is determined that any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C has an abnormality. In such a case, the restoration process is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state by delaying the arrival of the movable body operation timing in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is that "the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable decorative body in the specific mode has not yet started". By restoring the movable decorative body in the abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation in the specific mode by the movable decorative body can be executed in the “normal mode” instead of the “special mode” described above. Become so.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 220 (f), at the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, "the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet come. It is assumed that as a result of performing the abnormality determination when "is not yet started", any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is determined to be abnormal. Then, while maintaining the “state in which the movable body operation time in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the operation of the movable decorative body in the specific mode has not yet started”, the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal has been maintained. Will be executed.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 220 (e) and (f), compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal, the RTC state in the RTC state is not exceeded. The arrival of the movable body operation timing is delayed (the delay from the timing Rt2 to the timing Rt2b in the figure). Thus, after the movable decorative body determined to be abnormal is restored, the movable body operation time in the RTC state can be reached. Thereafter, when the movable body operation timing in the RTC state comes, the processing described above with reference to FIG. 219 is performed.

  In this regard, in the example illustrated in FIG. 220 (f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. are doing. That is, in this case, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate sequentially from the delayed timing Rt2b in the mode described with reference to FIG. 219 (e). Then, when the timing Rt5b arrives after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have sequentially operated in the normal state, respectively, when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the “movable decorative body that does not conform to the pattern fluctuation” is generated. Is terminated, and the prohibition state (the prohibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 220 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) at Rt2 is performed (or after restoration), a new abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially operate in the mode described with reference to FIG. 219 (f). Then, after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have sequentially operated in a mode (movable decorative bodies A and C are in a normal state and movable decorative body B is in a special mode) according to each determination result. When the timing Rt5b arrives, the “behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation” at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is ended, and the symbol-variation-side restoration process is inhibited (the inhibition state over the timings Rt1 to Rt5b). ) Will be released. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B also in the first abnormality determination, the restoration processing (reconstruction operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination are performed. The operations in the special mode are respectively executed.

  According to such a configuration, even if a movable abnormality occurs during the movable body operation immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movable body operations (here, three (The sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be appropriately maintained.

  In the example shown in FIG. 220, when there is an abnormality in the plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration processing is sequentially performed on the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state, and then the RTC state is restored. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body operations (here, sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored increases, a series of movable body operations (here, sequential operations by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state are performed. ) Is delayed for a longer period of time, but a series of movable body operations when the RTC state occurs can be executed in a normal mode. Restoration operations for a plurality of movable decorations may be performed in parallel, and in this case, a delay time until a series of movements of the movable body when the RTC state occurs is started can be suppressed. become.

  However, even in the example shown in FIG. 220, if the player side feels that a predetermined restoring operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state, it may be awkward, and Is likely to decrease. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 220 (f) and 220 (g), when the “restoration operation” is completed, “sequential operation by three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C” is executed (sequential execution). ) So that a series of movable body operations up to timings Rt5a and Rt5b including a restoring operation appearing at timing Rt2 can be seen as “a series of movable body operations when an RTC state occurs”. This makes it difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is being performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state.

  Therefore, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormal situations, a display (such as an error code) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed. In the example shown in FIGS. 220 (f) and 220 (g) as well as in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), a period during which the restoration operation (restoration processing) is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. In the middle (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality determination) or during the period when the movable decorative body B is operated in the special mode (during the operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality determination), the movable decorative body has an abnormality. No indication (such as an error code) indicating that the error has occurred will appear. The timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is completed, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is completed, and the timing shown in FIG. At the timing when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C sequentially start operation after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is completed, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 are triggered by the occurrence of these timings. There is no such thing as changing. These facts also make it seem that the “series of movable body operations at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state” is merely performed, and that the predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. This is important in making recognition difficult.

  Note that, in FIG. 219 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 220 and the other example, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performed. Not limited to the above, the movable decorative body (one, two, three or more or the like) used in the movable effect on the symbol variation side is determined based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (start condition). What is necessary is just to operate in a specific mode at the movable body operation timing in the specific state that occurs.

  Further, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the movable body operation timing in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, operably provided. An operation button 410, a sword decoration body 5001, etc., and a board-side movable decoration body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back middle movement effecting unit 3200, a specific decoration member SDY (a mattress) )) May be used.

  However, for example, in FIG. 219 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 220 and another example thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state), the operating means is used. When a frame-side movable decorative body (such as the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001) that is also used is used, even after the timing Rt2a arrives, the frame-side movable decorative body that is also used as such an operation means is used. A situation where “operation not conforming to symbol fluctuation” is being performed may occur.

  That is, as described above, at the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the display that has been displayed up to that time “display without any expected degree (from timing Rt1) Display) is not displayed at this point, and a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. Then, after this, when a new symbol change (in the diagram, a C change (loss)) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the change in the symbol change is performed. As described above, the display indicating the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern or the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, during the period in which such a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is performed, the frame-side movable decorative body (the operation button 410, the sword decorative body 5001, etc.) which is also used as the operation means is not provided. Despite being in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, depending on the effect pattern, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame-side movable decorative body which is also used as an operation means, A situation that may cause confusion in the production can occur. In the period between the timings Rt2 and Rt2a (and the period between the timings Rt1 and Rt2 before that), only a display that does not conform to the symbol fluctuation (a display that does not show any degree of expectation) appears. Even if a symbol change (in the figure, a C change (losing)) is performed, no operation opportunity is given within the period.

  In spite of the fact that the specific operation means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in the state of being subjected to the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the specific operation means is determined according to the result of the big hit determination. In the case where the presentation time for the given operation opportunity has come, the presentation display device 1600 performs a specific display (operation instruction image) that prompts the user to perform an operation on the specific operation unit. Even if a specific operation means in a state where a specific operation is being performed is operated, it is desirable not to accept the effect. According to such a configuration, when the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is being performed, it is determined that the specific operating means is originally provided with an operation opportunity. It is possible to suggest to the person appropriately. In addition, by not accepting the effect of the operation on the specific operation unit, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of a failure or an abnormality due to the operation performed on the specific operation unit in the operation state. Will be as expected.

  However, during the execution period of the specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the effect on the specific operation unit is not accepted even though the specific display for prompting the operation of the specific operation unit is performed. If such a thing occurs frequently, the entertainment of the game may be reduced due to the fact that the staging is not progressed. Therefore, of the frame-side movable decorative bodies (for example, the operable operation buttons 410 and the sword decorative bodies 5001) provided on the door frame 3 side, the operation effect in the symbol variation according to the big hit determination is provided. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high occurrence rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, during the operation period of the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in which the ratio of occurrence of the operation effect in the symbol variation is relatively high. When given, it is desirable that the display relating to the operation instruction image and the effect reception when the operation is performed (a predetermined effect corresponding to the effect reception) be executed as usual.

  That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation buttons 410 provided so as to be able to operate (for example, vibrate) or the sword decorative bodies 5001), the symbol variation corresponding to the big hit determination A specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) having a relatively low ratio of operation effects in the interior of the movable decoration body that can be operated at the movable body operation timing in the RTC state (specific state). By using the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) in a state in which the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is being used for a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the movable decorative body ( For example, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which an effect timing for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the jackpot determination to the sword decoration 5001) comes.

  In addition, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operation means having a relatively low operation effect occurrence rate within the symbol variation) provided on the door frame 3 side is moved to the movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When used as one of the movable decorative bodies operable at the operation time, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is performed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C described above. It is desirable to perform the operation using the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 219) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 220) is performed on any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Also, it is possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the pattern fluctuation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected (delayed or the like) by performing these operations. In this case, it is desirable that all of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C be used as a board-side movable decorative body. Accordingly, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performing a restoration operation, the movable decorative bodies are provided on the door frame 3 side while eliminating the possibility of interference with the movable decorative bodies. The operation by the frame-side movable decorative body can be executed in parallel.

  Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, a specific operating means (for example, a sword decorative body) in which the rate of occurrence of the operation effect in the symbol variation is relatively low When the time required to complete the operation (operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state) that does not conform to the symbol fluctuation according to 5001)) is set to “specific time”, any of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination has been executed. Even in this case, as long as at least “specific time” has not elapsed since the start of the symbol fluctuation (start of the effect pattern), a predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration). It is desirable to make settings related to each effect pattern (internal operation opportunity giving timing) so that a body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001) does not arrive. .

  According to such a configuration, even if a symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a in FIG. By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state) Operation) has already been completed and the effect can be accepted, so that the effect of the RTC state can be enhanced without sacrificing the effect on the symbol variation side.

  In addition, as described above, in consideration of the fact that normal effect control is allowed only in a symbol variation after a symbol variation that has been first digested after the RTC state occurs, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, The operation (operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state) of the sword decoration body 5001) that does not conform to the symbol variation (operation in response to the occurrence of the RTC state) can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the design variation that is digested first afterwards must be started later than this, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is delayed by the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ) Can be given a margin for completing the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

  Also, when the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, At the time of execution, it is determined whether an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body. When it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoring operation is performed instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to perform the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the operation, or to perform the normal operation in the form following the restoration operation and the subsequent operation. The “special mode including the restoring operation” in this case also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) by an operation mode different from the “normal operation mode”. For example, the minimum operation mode required to return to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) may be used.

  The operation performed when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) includes “normal state”, “special mode including a restoring operation”, and “restoring operation”. Unless the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is applied to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). It is more desirable to make settings for each effect pattern so that the timing at which an operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, even when any of the effect patterns according to the big hit determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). Regardless of whether the operation is performed in a normal mode or a mode when an abnormality is determined, only after the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) An operation opportunity can be provided to the user.

  Further, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is received, at least one of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. A specific movable effect may be made executable. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (RTC) Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state) has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is still in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is reduced. It is no longer possible to accept effects, and there is a concern that gaming entertainment may decline. Therefore, when the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is performed in the normal state and the time from the timing Rt2 required until the completion is set as the “special time”, the big hit determination is performed. Even if any of the effect patterns according to the above are executed, as long as neither of the “specific time” nor the “special time” has elapsed since the symbol change started (the effect pattern started), In order to prevent a predetermined operation opportunity giving timing in the effect pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation opportunity for the sword decorative body 5001)), each of the effect patterns (operating opportunity giving timing). It is desirable to perform the setting according to.

  When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in an abnormal state within the period of the timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration processing for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is performed. Is prohibited, and the timing Rt2 arrives while the abnormal state is intentionally maintained.

  On the other hand, among the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body A in which the operation sequence is early, or the movable decorative body that requires a long time for the restoring operation) is not changed. When an abnormal state occurs during the period between the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body is prohibited, but the movable decorative body is different from a specific movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body is late in operation order). When the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) or the movable decorative body requiring a short restoring operation is in an abnormal state within the period between the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored. The processing (restoring operation) may be performed without prohibition. This is because, for example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decorative body A performs the movement when the RTC occurs. This is because it is possible to execute the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in a normal state if the operation can be completed during the operation.

  The timing at which a series of operations of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started after the occurrence of the RTC state, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. The timing may be different.

[Restoration processing for movable abnormalities with less influence on movable performance]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more precisely, in a state where the specific state does not occur), the symbol changes. When the corresponding restoration operation timing (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol change) arrives, it is possible to execute a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body. However, if such a restoration process is performed irrespective of the state of the effect, it is annoying, and there is a concern that the gaming interest may decrease.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned “start time of symbol fluctuation” is set as “restoration operation time corresponding to symbol fluctuation”. Then, as shown in FIG. 221, when the timing tm1 at which a new symbol change is started arrives in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 4150a performs at least the following processes. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 4100a when the symbol change is started, the effect pattern corresponding to the symbol change is set, and the set effect pattern is changed. Among them, based on the fact that the command sent from the main control MPU 4100a is acquired when the process of making the effect progress and the design change is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the design change), For performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body

  Here, in the example illustrated in FIG. 221, it is assumed that a “specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the design variation” is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect development concerning the “specific effect pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative body to be operated at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation” and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed. A situation appears in which the processes to be performed are performed in parallel.

  In general, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern can be executed, the effect pattern (relatively expected degree) which has a direct pair relationship with the specific effect pattern Effect pattern). Then, in an effect pattern having a paired relationship (an effect pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, but toward the specific timing tm2. An effect in the same manner as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (an effect pattern having a relatively high degree of expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation" is performed. You. In this way, by providing two effect patterns that are in a stage relationship with each other in effect (an effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body, and an effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body), at the specific timing tm2 (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect having an effect of whether or not a specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not to operate). Can be executed, and the entertainment properties can be appropriately maintained by such directivity.

  However, if the process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation may still be in an execution state at the time when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the symbol change is started, the specific timing It becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a state where it cannot perform the staging operation even though tm2 has arrived. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol fluctuation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. However, there is a concern that the entertainment interest of the game will decrease.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 221, of the effect patterns, the effect of the effect on the “specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable decorative object at the specific timing tm2” and a predetermined effect on the specific movable decorative object are determined. When a situation appears in which the processing for performing the restoration operation (restoration processing based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol change) appears in parallel, until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation, The process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body "is terminated. In addition, various methods can be adopted as “the process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body”. The processing in which the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body is repeatedly performed until the predetermined upper limit number is reached is executed. "

  More specifically, with respect to the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body”, the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree of the abnormality of the specific movable decorative body. The time it takes to complete is different. For example, when only the first restoration operation is performed on a specific movable decorative body and the abnormal state is resolved and the original movable position is restored (restored), the “predetermined restoration of the specific movable decorative body is performed. Although the timing tx at which the “process for performing the operation” is completed arrives at a relatively early stage, the number of times that this operation is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body fails and is restored (restored) is increased. As the number increases, the timing tx at which the “process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed is postponed so as to shift to a later time. At the latest, when the restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body has failed and has not been restored (restored) yet, but the restoration operation is performed once more, the timing tx is exceeded, and the specific movable decoration body is restored. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration state is terminated. Become like

  In addition, when it is assumed that performing the restoring operation for a specific movable decorative body once requires x time, one symbol is set so that a relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. An upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and when the upper limit number n is reached, even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is completed. By doing so, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation may be completed before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration state.

  According to such a configuration, the effect development relating to the specific effect pattern that can cause the specific movable decorative object to operate at the specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative object are respectively performed in parallel. When such a situation appears, the process for performing a predetermined restoration operation is completed until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration state. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, at the specific timing tm2, the specific movable decorative body is restored. Since the movable decorative body is brought into a stopped state, it is possible to suitably maintain the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if the specific movable decorative body is in a stop state at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, this may cause some behavior, or the movable decorative body does not operate. However, it is possible to give a hope that the lamp of the movable decorative body may emit light (when the lamp of the movable decorative body emits light when an effect operation is performed by the movable decorative body). .

  However, in actuality, in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the predetermined effect is being performed, the specific movable decorative body has an effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the state of the restoration. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the gaming interest.

  As the predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result in which an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When not provided, it is possible to exemplify a "display effect that appears in advance in such a manner as to inspire whether or not a specific display result appears", and the specific movable decorative body is " That operates based on the effect received by the operation by the player (or that the effect is received but does not operate) "," the effect that causes a specific display to prompt the operation by the player " Can be exemplified.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 221, the specific movable decorative body returns from the abnormal state (restoration) at the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed. It is assumed that the status is changed to normal. As described above, at the start of the change (or at the “restoring operation timing” such as the last stop of the symbol), the specific timing tm2 in the symbol change arrives under the condition of being restored to the normal state even if the state is abnormal. Then, at the specific timing tm2, a specific movable decorative body can be made to perform a staging operation.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot return (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation arrives, the stop state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, the timing tx) until the symbol fluctuation is ended and the next restoration operation timing arrives. Becomes That is, in this case, although the specific movable decorative body cannot be staged at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates, When the specific effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to do it.

  However, in recent years, pachinko gaming machines have come to have a movable decorative body that performs a multi-step movement with a more complicated structure, and such a movable decorative body is more likely to have its restoration process completed until it is completed. It often takes a long time. However, on the other hand, in the case of a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 in the symbol variation, or an effect pattern having a pair relationship with the specific effect pattern, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the symbol change to the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body. That is, in this case, each time a specific movable decorative body becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a first-aid and simple manner, and this may accelerate the deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. It could be.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to the present embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and when the symbol change is started, the main control MPU 4100a side. If the special effect pattern is selected based on the command sent from the special effect pattern, while the special effect pattern is being developed (while the symbol change corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), the specific effect pattern is selected. Control is performed so that the movable decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not to operate) is not caused to appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 222 (a) and (d), as a result of the timing tm11 at which the symbol change is started in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the production progress according to the special production pattern And a process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body appears in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (a period until the symbol is stopped). Does not end the restoration process and continues this.

  More specifically, in the restoration processing started from timing tm11, the abnormal state is eliminated and the original movable position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoring process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoring process for the specific movable decorative body is executed over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-scale mode (for example, the normal diagnosis is performed even after the restoration, aiming at the time when the special effect pattern is performed). Since the special effect pattern can be performed, the special effect pattern functions as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and the player is also carefully restored as described above. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent productions with confidence. In this regard, in this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the player loses in the big hit determination. In addition, it is desirable that a unique display mode such as “the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait” is displayed as the display content on the effect display device 1600.

  Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 (a) and (d), the timing tm11 comes when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Then, when the special effect pattern is performed, the restoring process started at the timing tm11 is not terminated and continued after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, a restriction such as "the restoration process has to be performed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed even though an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body" is eliminated. This makes it possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

  However, at timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended, if there is a case where the effect of holding the game is not interrupted and an effect pattern corresponding to a new symbol change is performed, the next restoration operation timing (here, the next restoration operation time) The symbol change start time) comes. At this time, if it is assumed that the restoration process started at timing tm11 is still continuing, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not being located at the original position). Will be done. Then, based on the determination, when the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body may be newly started, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol change is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the processing content naturally has a limit, and failure to adequately cope with abnormalities may accelerate deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. .

  In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 (b) and (d), a situation in which a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. When the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol change start time) arrives at a certain time, the restoration process in the execution state is not terminated but is continued so as to straddle the next restoration operation timing. I have. According to such a configuration, even if the suspension during the execution of the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is in any state, the message "Even though the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body, The constraint that the restoration process must be performed for each unit in which the symbol change is performed "is removed, so that the restoration process in a more full-scale mode can be performed.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 222 (c) and (d), when a new symbol change is started while the restoration process is being performed on a specific movable decorative body, the new symbol change is started. In some cases, a “specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within a symbol variation” may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 222 (a) to (c), the processing is started from timing tm11 irrespective of the state of the game or the effect after the end of the special effect pattern (further, the state of the restoration, etc.). As for the timing tx at which the “processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably, It is desirable to end the processing within a time shorter than the time required for performing the predetermined effect). Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of the timings tm11 to tm12 (the time required for digesting the special effect pattern), the specific movable state can be performed for a relatively long time until the time of the timings tm12 to tx ends. The restoration process for the decorative body can be performed continuously.

  After the special effect pattern (reconstruction / diagnosis effect pattern) is finished, if a situation appears in which a special effect pattern (reconstruction / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed, After the restoring process is not completed within a new special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoring / diagnosis) and straddling three or more symbol variations (effect patterns) (after one restoring process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process extends over two or more restoration operation timings).

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 222, at the timing tx at which the “process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body” is completed, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that the state is reached. As described above, by performing one restoration process over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol change start timing), a serious abnormal state that could not be restored conventionally can be obtained. However, this can be restored, and the specific movable decorative body can be produced at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx, the specific movable decorative body is abnormal at the timing tx, despite the fact that one restoration process is continued over the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol variation start timing). When the state cannot be restored (restored), the symbol change is terminated from the timing tx, and the stopped state is maintained until the next restoring operation timing further arrives. That is, in this case, although the specific movable decorative body cannot be staged at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to suitably maintain the directability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates, When the specific effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit symbol is stopped at the specific timing tm2 even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to do it.

  In a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body has not been executed, each time the restoration operation timing (in this case, the symbol change start timing) arrives, the identification is performed. In some cases, the restoration process for the movable decorative body is started many times. If the specific movable decorative body is broken to such an extent that it cannot be restored, the particular movable decorative body cannot be restored. There is a concern that the entertainment of the game may be reduced by simply repeating the restoration process for the body. Therefore, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number even though the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number. (Despite this, it is desirable that when the restoration is not made from the abnormal state, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time comes.

  However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is brought into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the above-described predetermined upper limit number. If a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears, the special effect patterns for a predetermined upper limit number and the special effect patterns are displayed. One restoration process may be continued so as to straddle the next effect pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, it is not restored from the abnormal state even though the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number. Even when the “+1” -th restoration operation time has arrived, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued without ending. As described above, regarding the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation timings, the predetermined upper limit number is set regardless of how many times the restoration operation timing arrives while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable to treat the count as a single restoration process so as not to end it, so that the restoration process in a more full-scale manner is not hindered.

  By the way, regarding such a restoration process (a restoration process performed based on a restoration operation timing corresponding to a symbol change), a board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back front decoration unit, In addition to the middle movable effect unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (for example, a curtain) and the like, the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner described above. You. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the operation button 410 operably provided, the sword decorative body 5001, and the like) which is also used as an operation means is provided. However, there is a case where restoration (return) is performed in a mode different from that of the specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) described above.

  For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to the present embodiment, as described above, the operation opportunity giving effect of giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 is performed during the period in which the symbol change is performed. An operation pattern for the operation system (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 209) is prepared. Then, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, "the process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 209 (f))" “Process for generating an effect reception period for sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 209 (f))”, and further “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ pushing ”, bar display indicating remaining time of effect reception period) ) (See FIG. 209 (f)) "). Then, as a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 in the state of being moved to the operation position is operated (in this case, pushed in operation) and the effect is received, based on the effect reception, the “special decorative member SDY (draft material) ) To perform a staging operation of the board-side movable decorative body (see FIG. 209 (g)) and a “process of causing a change in display content (see FIG. 209 (g))”. Become. Note that the board-side movable decorative body that is effected in this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 221 and 222.

  However, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, “the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force” is not executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, and is not performed normally. While being executable when in the state, the “process for generating an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001” and the “process for performing a display for prompting the operation” are performed when the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state. It can be executed both when there is an error and when it is in an abnormal state. Accordingly, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player who has viewed the “display prompting the operation” and the effect is received, “Processing for effecting the operation of the board-side movable decorative body such as the specific decorative member SDY (robin)” and “Processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” are performed. In addition, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 is subjected to an external force by such an operation by the player and the operation part is operated, thereby causing the abnormal state. May be naturally resolved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 operably provided, a sword decorative body 5001, and the like) also used as an operating means. Is abnormal, the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) is provided with a driving force for returning to the original position (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 221 and 222). Restoration process) at each of the above-mentioned "restoration operation timing (here, the start time of symbol change)" and "after the effect is received by the operation by the player in the effect pattern of the movable operation system". Each is executable.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable decorative body is aimed at timing such as when the symbol change starts or stops (more precisely, after the start or after the stop). While the process of restoring the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the timing at the time of starting or stopping the symbol change, as well as another unique timing (during the change period) Of these, the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) is aimed at a timing at which an external force (operation by a player) is applied to the frame-side movable decorative body (operation by the player) to eliminate the abnormal state. ) Is performed, it is expected that the original position of the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) in the abnormal state can be quickly restored. .

  FIG. 223 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration (operation means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 223, an effect pattern of the movable operation system (an effect pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect for giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 during the period in which the symbol change is performed) is executed. It is assumed that “the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration 5001 is located at the operation position, “processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001”, “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”, or effect reception period) When the player operates the sword decoration 5001 and the effect is received (timing tm22) during execution of the bar display indicating the remaining time of the game (timing tm22), it is determined that the “special decoration member SDY (draft)” or the like is displayed. The process of effecting the operation of the board-side movable decorative body and the process of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 are performed. In the example shown in FIG. 223, based on the reception of the effect, the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 221 and 222 is rendered as a board-side movable decorative body.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 223, at the timing tm22 when the effect is received, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration 5001 does not return to the original position, and the specific movable decoration that has performed the effect operation based on the effect reception. It is assumed that another abnormality has occurred in the body (the board-side movable decorative body) and cannot be returned to the original position. At this time, the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body are respectively performed, and the abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body. Neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying the determination is performed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 is performed along with the specific notification sound and display. It is desirable that at least one of the notification is performed. This means that the decorative sword body 5001 is "placed within the reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if an abnormal state is notified, repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decorative body is “placed out of reach of the player (gaming board 5)”, and this is an abnormal state. This is because, as a result, the player cannot help anything, and merely emphasizes that the mobile effect is not executed, which may promote a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game. However, such notification is desirably terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the example illustrated in FIG. 223, while performing the “process of performing a specific movable decorative body to perform the production operation” based on the reception of the performance at the timing tm22, an abnormality is detected in the specific movable decorative body. Although it will occur, it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body by performing the “process for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600” to be performed as usual. It is desirable to make it difficult. Then, after this, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while both the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body remain in the abnormal state, and the pattern change is stopped at the timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 223, at timing tm23, the already-suspended symbol change is immediately digested (started, for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is used. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 221 is executed as the effect pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is effected at the timing tm2 when the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the symbol change. ), The timing tx at which the “process for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the state of restoration). As described above, the process is ended before the predetermined effect is started.

  In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (here, at the time of starting the symbol change) for the sword decoration 5001, the "specific movable A process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on the decorative body "and a process of applying (driving force) such that at least a part of the operation is returned to the original position in parallel with the operation are performed. In addition, the timing at which the “processing for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed within a time shorter than the timing tm2 regardless of the restoration state (more preferably, the predetermined effect). Until it starts).

  According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is resolved and the movable effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body at timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since the continuation does not occur, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of annoying when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223, the timing at which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is started / terminated and the timing at which the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 is started / terminated are the same. However, only one of the timings may be the same, or any of the timings may be different.

  As for “the process of performing a predetermined restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body”, as described with reference to FIG. 222, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. In addition to being able to continue even after the end of the special effect pattern, the design fluctuation in the suspended state after the end of the special effect pattern is immediately digested (started, for example, after 0.6 seconds). In this situation, when the next restoring operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled, the process (one restoring process) can be executed without ending the process. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform the predetermined restoration operation ”can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 222). That is, in this case, the “processing for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform the predetermined restoration operation” also crosses the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) when a special effect pattern appears. It is executed in the form of the following: from the start of the next symbol change to the end of the time required until the timing tm2 arrives, regardless of the state of restoration. Become.

  After the sword decoration body 5001 is brought into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then the special effect pattern ( If a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed, a special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. One restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 may be continued.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 223, it is assumed that at the timing tx, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body and the restoration processing for the sword decoration body 5001 are respectively ended, but the restoration has failed. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is advanced while the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the abnormal state. The symbol change is stopped at the timing tm24.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to the present embodiment, a specific movable decorative body is not subjected to an external force (a driving force by a motor or the like is not applied within a period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern). ), The effect of the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, the application of an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body during the period from timing tx to tm2 can be said to be an abnormal situation. In such a low reliability situation, even if a specific movable decoration is performed, it is highly likely that it will fail. It can be said that it is desirable in doing.

  Further, when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and the state returns to the abnormal state, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed. In other words, when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and the notification is performed each time the abnormal state is returned again, a misunderstanding is given as if the player is liable that the abnormal state is not resolved. Since it may be impossible, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of the specific notification sound and the display notification) is performed only at the time of the first abnormality occurrence from the normal state to the abnormal state, so that the repair work by the player is encouraged. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 223, the restoration of the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament is performed by any restoration operation timing (here, the symbol variation start timing) arriving after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body returns from the abnormal state. And now, while only the sword decoration body 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 223, the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is removed. Assuming that the effect has been accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect the possibility that the abnormality that has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to the present embodiment, when the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 is directed by the operation of the player, the sword decoration 5001 is thereafter replaced. A driving force can be applied so as to return to the original position (to stay at the original position). At this time, in consideration of the fact that the movable effect is performed by the specific movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect, a period in which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword decorative body 5001 to the original position is performed (one time) Is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body ends (the specific movable decorative body returns to the original position). It is desirable to end the processing before the return is performed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return processing is being performed. However, in view of the fact that there is a few chances that the return possibility of the sword decoration body 5001 that has not been able to be returned by such an external force (operation by the player) has increased, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the original position. When the process of applying the driving force to return to the normal state (return operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is restored to the original state until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is finished. The process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position is continuously performed (the return operation to the sword decoration 5001 is performed again) so that the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation, so that the player can recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if the return process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 223, it is assumed that the return processing (return to the original position) to the sword decoration body 5001 using such external force (operation by the player) is successful, and thereafter, The effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while both the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are in the normal state, and the pattern change is stopped at the timing tm26.

  As described above, according to the example illustrated in FIG. 223, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operation unit is set for the board-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol change), a restoration operation timing (timing after the effect is received) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operation means, is likely to be in an abnormal state due to direct contact by the player, but even in the abnormal state, the original state is maintained. Since an opportunity to return to the position is given more, and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, a mode of returning using at least an external force) are used as a method of returning, an abnormal state is eliminated. The likelihood of the game becoming more entertained can be suppressed, and a decline in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the process of giving the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state has been rendered by the operation of the player has been started. A driving force may be applied to the sword decoration 5001 with a different content (different operation mode) from the restoration process performed when the timing (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the sword decoration 5001 is returned using the external force (operation by the player) in this process, it is necessary to perform the process differently from the process when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, this process is performed in a simple manner such that the return process is completed within the symbol fluctuation regardless of the return status, and if the return fails, a more full-fledged operation will be performed at the next restore operation timing. It is desirable that a proper return process be performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 223, the restoration operation timing (in this case, the symbol change start timing) has reached the predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed by that number of times. Nevertheless, if the restoration is not started from the abnormal state and the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 is not newly started even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) arrives, Even if the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the sword decoration 5001 in an abnormal state is received at the timing tm25 by the operation of the player, the sword decoration 5001 is received after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (to stay at the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the effect is received is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decoration 5001 that has not been able to be restored by the external force (operation by the player) is increased. It can be said that it is desirable to execute the process without giving up, even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is abandoned. Therefore, “processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 209 (f))”, “display for prompting operation (character display such as“ push-in ”), and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period (See FIG. 209 (f))), it is important that the process is performed as usual even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is abandoned.

  Also, the first operation opportunity is provided so that the sword decoration 5001 is pushed in the state where it is located at the operation position (operates to a specific detection position), and the sword decoration body 5001 is pushed in when it is at the original position (to the specific detection position). If the operation means is provided so that the second operation opportunity may be given to the sword decoration 5001 in an abnormal state, the effect may be received even if the effect is received at the second operation opportunity. The driving force for returning to the original position is not applied, and the driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when an effect is received at the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the operation amount of the operation part is relatively small, and it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state has been solved is naturally low.

  In addition, after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state has been rendered by the operation of the player, the process of giving the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position is not necessarily performed. It may not be executed on the condition that it has been performed, for example, may be executed after the end of the effect reception period.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 219 to 223, the symbol change start time (and the timing after accepting the effect) is exemplified as the restore operation timing corresponding to the symbol change. The timing may be a predetermined timing that comes at least on condition that the symbol change is executed, and may be used as at least one of the symbol change start time and the symbol change stop time, for example. If the symbol change stop time is used as the restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol change, the restoring process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 4100a when the symbol change is stopped. The restored process is terminated before the timing tm2 in the held specific effect pattern arrives, or is executed so as to straddle until after the end of the special effect pattern which has been stored and consumed. Will be performed.

  In addition, the appearance frequency of a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special production state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur as much as the operation frequency is increased. It is desirable that the game can be played such that the frequency of appearance of a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than in the case of (1).

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4150a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) or a specific movable decorative body which is also used as an operation means is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed at a certain time, as shown in FIG. 222, the abnormal pattern is displayed for a period after the start of the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol change. One restoration process for the movable decorative body in the state can be continuously executed. However, in this case, even if a new restoring operation timing (for example, a symbol change start timing) arrives while one restoring process is continuously executed, the restoring process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is newly performed. Since it is not started, and it is continued without ending one restoration process that is already in the execution state, a movable object different from the movable decorative object that is the object of the restoration process is When the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state, there is a problem as to when to start the restoration process for the other movable decorative body.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 222, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is performed at a new restoration operation timing (next (The start time of the symbol change). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body different from a specific movable decorative body during a period from the timing tm11 elapse to a new restoring operation timing (a start timing of the next symbol change). In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or “both methods 1 and 2”, or “both methods 1 and 3” is employed to perform the restoration processing on the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to execute.

  Method 1: At least when there is a relationship such as “a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, while the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body”, When a new restoring operation timing (start timing of the next symbol change) arrives while one restoring process for the movable decorative body is continuously executed, the new restoring operation timing (start timing of the next symbol change) ), The restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed is treated as valid, and the other movable decorative body is triggered by the timing (new restoration operation timing). The restoration process for the body (frame-side movable decorative body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, a situation appears in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (panel-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are simultaneously executed. There is no concern that interference occurs between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of the movable decorative bodies is expected.

  Method 2: At least in a case where “a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are both provided as board-side movable decorative bodies”, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoring operation timing (start timing of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is not started at that time, and a specific restoration operation is started. After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decorative body to be completed, another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decoration) is determined based on the arrival of the new restoring operation time (start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for the body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 2, the new restoring operation timing (start timing of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoring process for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state. Another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) for which the restoration process is not yet executed is treated as being effective. In this regard, when starting the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body), the process waits for one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body to be completed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorative bodies, and early return of these movable decorative bodies will be expected.

  Method 3: At least in a case where both the specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as a board-side movable decorative body, one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoring operation time (a start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoring operation time (a next symbol change start time). Is not executed, and after waiting for one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body to be completed, another movable decorative body (frame side movable The restoration process for the decorative body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol change) is a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration body that is not in the execution state yet. Will be treated as invalid with respect to any of the restoration processing for a particular movable decorative body, and unless a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body, unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is completed. No processing is performed for the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even if another movable decorative body is in an abnormal state when one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is in an execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take a sufficient measure against the abnormality, so that it is expected that the speed at which these movable decorative bodies deteriorate is reduced.

(Operation check period of operation button)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) can be driven by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) as an effect corresponding to the symbol game by the main control MPU 4100a. As described above, it is possible to execute an operation-time effect using a simple drive-type operation means (such as an effect indicating a degree of expectation for giving a privilege by driving as well as an operation). However, even though such an operation effect can be performed, if an abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the operation effect can be experienced by the player in a manner intended by the designer. There is a concern that this may make it difficult to play games, which may lead to a decrease in gaming interest. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a part of maintenance regarding whether or not execution of the at-operation effect is performed, an operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period) to be described later is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, it is confirmed that the player can experience the operation effect in the mode intended by the designer, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

  Specifically, an operation check period during which the operation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be checked will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the operation check of the operation buttons 410 in the rendering operation unit 400 will be described for convenience, but a similar operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword decoration 5001 in the sword rendering operation unit 5000. The operation check period for the operation button 410 and the operation check period for the sword decoration 5001 may be generated in parallel or may be generated sequentially. In addition, in order to realize a more reliable checking operation for each member, an overlapping period is not provided between the operation checking period for the operation button 410 and the operation checking period for the sword decoration 5001 (a period overlap is avoided). ), It is preferable to generate them sequentially. FIG. 224 is a time chart illustrating an operation state of the operation button 410 during a series of operation check periods (arbitrary operation check period and automatic operation check period).

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In a state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player performs an operation to push the operation button 410 until the operation button 410 returns to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to a normal state. When the operation button 410 is not operated to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until a predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 operates the normal operation button 410 by the driving mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor determines that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is at the normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a protruding state, and in such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is in a protruded state by the protrusion position sensor. By detecting, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is at the normal position.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a pressure detection sensor 440 that can detect that the operation button 410 has been pressed. By the detection of the press detection sensor 440, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state. .

  Further, as an effect set in the fluctuation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state are provided. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed or repeatedly hit in accordance with an instruction, so that the pressing ( Operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, for example, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state during the execution of the effect on the effect display device 1600, and the protruding state is changed. Is pressed down to a normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. The effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is an effect having a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in the protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with more expectation than in the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 224, in an arbitrary operation check period of the operation check period, the operation check is performed to determine whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in a state where the operation button 410 protrudes from a normal state (a player or a hall). It can be realized by the administrator). Specifically, when a condition for generating an operation check period described later is satisfied, an arbitrary operation check period is started, and the operation button 410 in a normal state is maintained for a predetermined time (10 seconds in this embodiment) as the occurrence period. The press detection status (operation detection status) is monitored, and if the press (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the operation button 410 is projected based on the press detection (operation detection). To change. On the other hand, even after the condition for generating the arbitrary operation check period is satisfied (while the arbitrary operation check period is generated), the press (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is not detected for a predetermined time. In this case, the arbitrary operation check period is ended after a predetermined time has elapsed. According to this, for a player or a hall manager who wants to confirm whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, the operation button 410 may be pressed during the occurrence of the arbitrary operation check period. It is possible to provide a confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, and to execute and provide an operation effect using the operation button 410 with confidence.

  Then, when it is detected that the operation button 410 in the protruded state is pressed down to a normal state before the predetermined time has elapsed after the operation button 410 is pressed down to be in a protruded state. Then, the normal state is returned again, and the arbitrary operation check period is ended after a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, if the pressing of the protruding operation button 410 is not detected before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forcibly driven to the normal state by the drive after the predetermined time elapses. Will be returned. After the arbitrary operation check period is generated, the operation button 410 is depressed so as to protrude, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation check period is ended. In such a case, unnecessary time until a predetermined time elapses after confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated can be prevented.

  The above-described operation check period (arbitrary operation check period) is generated when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In this example, the generation condition of the operation confirmation period is configured such that the generation condition is satisfied at the time of execution of the demonstration effect in order to avoid the occurrence of the operation effect at the same time. Specifically, in the demonstration effect, after the effect set in the fluctuation pattern is completed, for a certain period of time, there is no ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the effect set in the fluctuation pattern is not performed. This is an effect of waiting for the customer when it is not started (information on the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU 4100a is not received by the peripheral control MPU 4150a for a certain period of time), and is suitable for avoiding overlap with the operation effect. As described above, by using the execution time of the demonstration effect and generating an arbitrary operation check period of the check operation period, the boring time that the effect set in the fluctuation pattern is not started can be reduced by the operation button 410. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time of whether or not the device normally detects and operates.

  It should be noted that the demonstration effect is started by an instruction from the main control MPU 4100a (for example, demonstration effect) when there is no ball entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 for a certain period of time while the symbol game is not progressing. A start command) may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and by receiving the command, a confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) may be generated on the peripheral control MPU 4150a side. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, an instruction (for example, a demonstration effect start command) by the main control MPU 4100a is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the instruction, whereby a confirmation operation period (optional operation confirmation) is performed. Period) may be generated, thereby avoiding overlap with the operation-time effect, and confirming whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts the game. The effect at the time of operation using the operation button 410 can be executed and provided with more security.

  An LED (each LED of the decoration member 432 in the operation button) is mounted on the operation button 410 to determine whether or not an arbitrary operation check period has occurred, and to determine the progress of the arbitrary operation check period (optional operation check period). (The state of the operation button 410 in FIG. 3), the light emission mode is changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, when the optional operation check period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. Then, when the optional operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is set to a specific color (for example, red) and a predetermined light amount (a confirmation period light emission mode A indicating that the optional operation is possible). ) To emit light. Thus, it is possible to notify the outside that the arbitrary operation check period has occurred and that the pressing of the operation button 410 has been requested. Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed and protruded after the arbitrary operation check period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 has the same color as the case where the operation button 410 has not been pressed once. However, the light is emitted in a mode in which the light amount is increased by one step (a light emission mode B for a confirmation period indicating that any operation is being performed). Thus, even after the operation button 410 is pressed to be in a protruding state, it can be notified to the outside that the operation button 410 is required to be further pressed. Thereafter, when the operation button 410 is brought into a normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned on at least once until at least the remaining arbitrary operation check period (predetermined time) elapses. Although the color is the same as that when the button is not pressed, the light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is weaker than the above-described light emission modes A and B for the confirmation period (a light emission mode C for the confirmation period indicating completion of the arbitrary operation). Thus, it is possible to notify the outside that the checking operation in the arbitrary operation checking period has been normally performed. The operation button 410 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner even when the optional operation confirmation period has not occurred. For example, the operation button 410 may emit light in a manner different from any of the operation confirmation period light emission modes A to C. And the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 224, after a predetermined standby period has elapsed after the end of the arbitrary operation check period, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's pressing, and the operation button 410 is moved to a normal position. There is provided an automatic operation check period for checking the origin so as to be located at. In the automatic operation check period, first, the operation button 410 is operated to move up and down several times near the normal state, and the normal position sensor is used to detect that the operation button 410 in the normal state is at the normal position. Checking the origin. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set in a protruding state, and the operation is performed so that the protruding state returns to a normal state. At this time, by detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state by the normal position sensor, it is possible to know that the operation button 410 is operating at a normal position. According to this, it is ensured that the operation button 410 operates at a normal position, and it is possible to prevent the operation of the operation button 410 from being shifted when an effect using the operation button 410 is executed.

  The arbitrary operation check period is set to be longer than the automatic operation check period. Specifically, as described above, the predetermined time of “10 seconds” is set as the arbitrary operation check period, whereas the automatic operation check period is a short time of “5 seconds” as the time required for a series of operations. Is set. During the automatic operation check period, the operation button 410 operates to check the origin without being pressed by the player. In other words, the operation check of the drive system automatically proceeds. On the other hand, during the optional operation check period, if the player does not press down, the operation button 410 in the normal state does not change to the protruding state, and unless the player presses down in the protruding state, The protruding state is maintained until the arbitrary operation check period elapses. Therefore, by setting the arbitrary operation check period longer than the automatic operation period, the pressing of the operation button 410 is not missed, and the appearance state of the operation button 410 in the protruding state is changed by driving. It is possible to allow the player and the hall manager to check carefully over a long period of time in a situation where there is no such situation, but to quickly end the drive system operation check (automatic operation period) that does not require such a long-term check It is possible, and the efficiency of a series of checking operations of the drive-type operation means can be increased.

  In the standby period between the arbitrary operation check period and the automatic operation check period, the operation of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 causes the frame side lens 417 and the second A peripheral confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the button decoration portion 411b (the respective LEDs of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423) is turned on. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and can accept a player's operation when presenting an effect. Further, in the peripheral confirmation period, when one of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are turned on, and whichever is pressed. The manner in which the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b are lit (for example, the manner of light emission such as brightness and color) differs depending on the situation. For this reason, in the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, it is possible to confirm whether or not the press is normally recognized, and to check whether the pressing is correctly performed. It is possible to confirm whether the two-button decoration unit 411b is normally lit or not, and to confirm the drive-type operation means itself by a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period). Not only that, it is also possible to execute the confirmation of the related members around it.

  If the operation button 410 is not pressed during the arbitrary operation check period and the operation button 410 is not in the protruding state, the peripheral check period may not be provided thereafter. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b do not light up, and a series of operation check periods is shortened. Becomes

  Further, before a series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the staging operation unit 400 operates by operating the operation button 410. I have. In the vibration check period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates. Therefore, in the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to confirm whether or not the effect motor unit 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 normally vibrates by pressing the operation button 410. In addition, by generating a series of operation check periods at a time that does not overlap with the vibration check period, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration check period from hindering the check of the series of operation check periods, and to efficiently perform various check operations. realizable.

  In addition, when the predetermined projection start condition that is satisfied in the progress of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be located in a normal state. There is a case where the normal state is not detected and the operation button 410 is not in the normal position. As a cause, for example, when returning the operation button 410 to the normal state when the predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, if a problem occurs, or the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state. And so on. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and control is performed to return the operation button 410 to a normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 225 (A), during a period other than a series of operation check periods, a special symbol corresponding to the start of a symbol game (at the start of an effect based on the variation pattern) and a special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game are started. Whether the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the time of the end of the fluctuation of the symbol (at the end of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above (the timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods). It is determined whether the operation button 410 is in the abnormal position (not the normal position) or not (not the normal position). Is According to this, even when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing irrespective of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern Is prevented from being mistaken as to whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated as part of the effect based on. Further, even after the operation using the operation button 410 is performed after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, it is ensured that the operation button 410 operates normally, and the interest in the effect decreases. To prevent them from doing so.

  In addition, if it is set to generate an arbitrary operation check period of the check operation period using the execution of the demonstration effect as described above, the operation button 410 may be abnormal when starting the demonstration effect. When the operation button 410 is in a protruding state and control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state (control for returning to the normal position) is performed, the start of a series of operation check periods may be delayed. For example, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the start of the demonstration effect (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods), the operation check period is started even at the start timing of the series of operation check periods. Is performed, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state (control for returning to the normal position) is given priority, and the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (returns to the normal position). Alternatively, the entire series of operation check periods may be started in a delayed manner based on the above.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), in a series of operation check periods, the special game corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts changing (at the start of an effect based on the changing pattern) and the symbol game ends. At the time of the end of the change of the special symbol (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), it is not determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in a normal position). Even in a protruding state (not a normal position), at that time, control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state is not performed. This is to give priority to the operation check of whether or not the operation button 410 is pressed and protruded during the arbitrary operation check period described above, and the operation button arbitrarily generated during the arbitrary operation check period This is for maintaining the protruding state of 410 so as not to be terminated by the progress of the symbol game. As described above, when the operation button 410 is abnormally protruding during the operation check period, the operation button 410 is operated at the end of the operation check period, as in the case where the player presses and protrudes. Control for returning the button 410 will be performed. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to a normal state before the predetermined period as the operation check period has elapsed, the abnormal state can be maintained without waiting for the predetermined period to elapse. The protruding operation button 410 is returned to a normal state.

(Abnormal detection of decorative swords)
Next, although the blade section 5011 (see FIGS. 146 to 149) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword rendering operation unit 5000 described above is in a state where it should be in a sword-pulling state, an abnormality when the blade is not in a sword-pulling state. The detection will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 226 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between the operation state of the sword decoration 5001 and the abnormality detection.

  The sword decoration body 5001 can be changed between a sword delivery state in which the blade part 5011 is stored, and a drawn state in which the blade part 5011 is exposed (second sword drawn state). In the above-described effect example, the state between the sword-pulling state and the sword-pulling state (first sword-pulling state) is used as the effect using the sword decoration 5001. In this example, such a state is used. Not used. It should be noted that the sword decoration 5001 is provided with a sword position sensor capable of detecting that the blade portion 5011 is in the sword state, and a sword position sensor capable of detecting that the blade portion 5011 is in the sword state. ing. Further, the sword decoration 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the blade portion 5011 from the sword-drawing state to the sword-pulling state. In this example, the sword-pulling state corresponds to an operable state in which the player can pull out the blade section 5011, and the sword-pulling state corresponds to an inoperable state in which the player cannot pull out the blade section 5011. .

  Further, as an effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the sword decoration 5011 is set. As shown in FIG. 226 (A), in the effect using the sword decoration 5001, an operation reception period in which the sword decoration 5001 in the sword-put state can be removed is generated within the effect time. During the operation reception period, the blade unit 5011 in the sword-pulled state is set to the sword-drawing state in accordance with an instruction in the display area or the like of the effect display device 1600 (for example, a display of “draw a sword”), so that a predetermined effect is obtained. Obtainable. When the player removes the sword decoration 5001 and puts the blade 5011 in the sword-drawing state during the operation reception period, the control for returning the blade 5011 to the sword-pulling state at the end of the production time is performed. Done. If the player does not remove the sword decoration 5001 during the operation reception period and the blade section 5011 remains in the sword-put state, the sword-drawing state of the blade section 5011 is terminated at the end of the operation reception period. Hold. The effect using the sword decoration 5001 is an effect having a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than at least the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation buttons 410 described above. I have. That is, when the effect using the sword decoration 5001 is performed, the sword decoration 5001 can be removed with higher expectation than when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed.

  As shown in FIG. 226 (B), the blade section 5011 should be in the sword-putting state except for the operation receiving period, but a period other than the operation receiving period and not in the sword-putting state is a predetermined period (in this example, (2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001, and sword restoration control for returning the sword body 5011 to the sword state is performed. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 during the period other than the operation reception period, when the blade section 5011 is in the drawn state or between the drawn state and the put-in state. It has become. In this example, the detection state of the above-mentioned katana position sensor is set to the OFF state (a state in which the blade section 5011 is not in the katana state) from the detection state to the above-mentioned predetermined period (the katana state in a period other than the operation reception period). (Period, not period).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 226 (C), in the operation reception period, the blade section 5011 should be in the sword-inserted state unless the player removes the sword-decorated body 5001, but the sword is not in the sword-inserted state. If it is determined that a predetermined period (in this example, 2 seconds) has been reached, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the sword body portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. Done. That is, during the operation reception period, when the player removes the sword decoration 5001, the blade section 5011 is positioned in the sword removal state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001, and in this case, the sword decoration 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sword placement position sensor is in an ON state (a state in which the blade part 5011 is in the sword-slung state). . In this example, the processing time of one cycle for returning the blade 5011 to the sword-storing state in the sword-storing restoration control is set to “0.5 seconds”.

  In addition, the operation acceptance period is set to a period (4 seconds in this example) longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001. In the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, the sword restoration control for returning the blade part 5011 to the sword state is performed. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and in the remaining period, the player can pull out the sword decoration 5001. Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 during the operation reception period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of drawing the sword decoration 5001 from being hindered.

  As described above, whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is not at a normal position) is determined at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the change pattern). At the start of the demonstration game), at the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), only at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above. That is, during the operation reception period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal position). Not. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 is also performed during an operation reception period during which the sword decoration 5001 can be removed. For this reason, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration 5001 during the operation reception period, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player cannot remove the sword decoration 5001 as much as possible. In addition, in the effect using the sword decoration 5001, among the effects using the operation buttons 410, at least the effect (big hit expectation) is higher than the effect using the operation buttons 410 in a normal state. In this way, it is possible to prevent the user from overlooking the effect of the effect with such a high expectation.

  In this example, a period in which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword-arriving state has reached a predetermined period (in this example, 2 seconds), except for a case where the player has removed the sword decoration 5001 during the operation reception period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001, but only when the blade section 5011 is not in the sword-arranged state at the start of the operation reception period, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001. You may make it determine. For example, at the start of the operation reception period, the blade unit 5011 is in a sword-put state, and after the start of the operation reception period, it is not known whether the player should completely remove the sword decoration 5001 and the blade unit 5011 is removed. There is a possibility that the state will be left for a predetermined period in the state between the state and the katana state. In such a case, it can be prevented that it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001. .

  Further, in performing an instruction on the sword decoration of the sword decoration 5001 in the display area of the effect display device 1600 or the like, the instruction is continuously executed regardless of occurrence or elimination of the abnormality of the sword decoration 5001 during the operation reception period. You may do so. For example, in the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword state is performed. In this case, the instruction in the display area or the like of the effect display device 1600 is continued even during “until the operation” and “the remaining period of the operation reception period after returning the blade unit 5011 to the sword-arranged state”. Further, if the player removes the sword decoration 5001 in accordance with the instruction before the sword restoration control is completed, the sword body 5011 is in the sword-drawing state, and the sword restoration is performed. The control is forcibly terminated, and the instruction is terminated. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the abnormality in the sword decoration body 5001 from hindering the timing of participating in the effect of drawing the sword decoration body 5001.

  In addition, although the sword restoration control for returning the blade section 5011 to the sword state is performed in this example, it is possible that the blade section 5011 cannot return to the sword state due to a foreign substance being caught or the like. In this case, one cycle of sword restoration control which should be completed in "0.5 seconds" may be repeated a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the sword restoration control for returning the blade section 5011 to the sword-storing state will continue beyond the operation reception period. In such a case, the operation is performed while the sword-snap restoration control is being performed. The result effect may be derived at the end of the reception period, and the sword restoration control may be continued after the result effect is derived. Thus, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decoration 5001 cannot be eliminated, it is possible to suppress a possibility that the entertainment interest of the game is reduced without hindering the progress of the effect.

(Operation button abnormality judgment timing)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorations provided on the operation buttons 410 and the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body that cannot be operated by the player.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400. ) And can be changed. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In a state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player performs an operation to push the operation button 410 until the operation button 410 returns to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The effect operation unit 400 includes a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (A), at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), at the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (the change pattern) At the time of the start of the demonstration effect described above, the predetermined projection start condition should not be satisfied and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state, but at those timings, It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is not in a normal position). If it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (not in a normal position), the operation button 410 is determined. Is returned to the normal state. As described above, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, since the normal state is returned at least at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as the effect based on the change pattern. In this case, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 from being hindered.

  On the game board 5, around the effect display device 1600, the back lower movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the lower lower front movable effect. A movable decorative body such as a unit 3500 (see FIG. 60) is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) around the effect display device 1600 and a display area of the effect display device 1600. And the operating state (exposed position) exposed on the front side of the display. In addition, these movable decorative bodies change from a non-operation state to an operation state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  It should be noted that each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rearward-movable effecting unit 3100, the back-upper left-movable effecting unit 3200, the back-left movable effecting unit 3300, the back-upper middle-moving effecting unit 3400, and the back-under-front movable effecting unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting an operation state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the rear-facing rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the rear left movable production unit 3300, the rear upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the lower back front movable production unit 3500. A driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) for operating between the operating state and the operating state is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 227 (B), at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), and at the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (the change pattern). At the time of the start of the demonstration effect described above, at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above, the predetermined operation start condition should not be satisfied and the movable decorative body should be located in the non-operation state. It is determined whether or not the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position). If it is determined that the movable decorative body is not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position), an abnormality has occurred. Judgment is performed, and control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operation state is performed. As described above, when the movable decorative body is not in the inactive state due to the occurrence of the abnormality, since the movable decorative body is returned to the inactive state at least at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect using the movable decorative body as the effect based on the fluctuation pattern. Is performed, the movable decorative body does not operate, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the effect from being lost. In addition, during the performance based on the fluctuation pattern, if the movable decorative body remains positioned in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the visual recognition of the display area is hindered. By returning to the non-operation state at least at the start of the change of the special symbol, such a situation can be prevented.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be touched by the player, and at the timing of controlling the normal state or the protruding state, the player can hinder the change to that state. It is a member that cannot be touched by the player, and cannot be changed by the player at the timing of controlling to the non-operation state or the operation state. For this reason, the operation button 410 is more likely to cause an abnormality than the movable decorative body. In this regard, the operation button 410 increases the chance of abnormality determination for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred, compared to the movable decorative body, so that even if the operation button 410 has an abnormality, It is possible to return to a normal position. For this reason, although there is a high possibility that an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 is not performed. It can be prevented from being hindered.

  In addition, as an effect set in the fluctuation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state, an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, and an effect using a movable decorative body are performed. However, the effect using the operation button 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decorative body. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. For example, when the operation button 410 is controlled to a normal state or a protruding state, a problem occurs when the operation button 410 is used. The possibility of occurrence of abnormalities increases. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more chances of abnormality determination for determining whether an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body. For this reason, even when the operation button 410 is frequently used, when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the abnormality from hindering participation in the effect. Can be prevented.

(Abnormal operation of operation buttons during the operation effect)
Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIG. 228 and FIG. 229, of an operation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400. FIG. 228 is a time chart illustrating an operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. FIG. 229 is an operation effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. 5 is a time chart showing an operation state of the operation button 410 in FIG.

  As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In a state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player performs an operation to push the operation button 410 until the operation button 410 returns to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to a normal state. When the operation button 410 is not operated to return to the normal state until the end condition is satisfied (until a predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 operates the normal operation button 410 by the driving mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor determines that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is at the normal position. On the other hand, when the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a protruding state, and in such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is in a protruded state by the protrusion position sensor. By detecting, it is possible to determine that the operation button 410 is at the normal position.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a pressure detection sensor 440 that can detect that the operation button 410 has been pressed. By the detection of the press detection sensor 440, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is pressed in a normal state or that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed down to the normal state. .

  Further, as an effect set in the fluctuation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in a normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state are provided. The effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is an effect having a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in the protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with more expectation than in the normal state.

  First, at the time of performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (A), when the operation button 410 is determined to be in a normal state (a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button in the normal state is determined. 410 is changed to a protruding state. In the operation reception period, an instruction by a display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as an instruction effect A at the time of a projecting operation for instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the projecting state (for example, in the projecting state). A combination of a display that replicates a certain operation button 410, a message display of "press the protruding operation button!", And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, a voice of "press the protruding operation button!") Are combined. It has been done.

  In the operation reception period described above, by pressing the protruding operation button 410 to a normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. As described above, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is performed. Done. Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect A at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 228 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in a normal state (not in a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 has been operated, and the state in which the operation button 410 is abnormally projected is maintained. Also, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when no abnormality occurs. The instruction effect B at the time of the projecting operation is to inform the player that the position is the same as the regular projecting, although the process is abnormal projecting. , The display of the operation button 410 in a protruding state, a message display of “This is a protrusion of the real device! Press the operation button without worrying!”, And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, “ This is a protruding sound! Press the operation button without worrying! " As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation in which the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state is not performed. It is not possible to recognize whether an effect using the certain operation button 410 is being performed or an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and furthermore, the operation in the protruding state. There is a possibility that the player may hesitate to operate the button 410. However, when the instruction effect B at the time of the projecting operation is performed by the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 or the sound from the speaker, the operation button 410 at least protruding from the display or the sound is used. It is possible to recognize that the effect is being performed. That is, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the degree of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. In addition, the instruction effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those having different effect contents as described above, and the player is informed that the position is the same as the regular protrusion although the protrusion is abnormal. , The directed effects A and B may be configured with the same effect contents.

  Also, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 is abnormal, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. When the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is not pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state is set to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period. Control for returning to the state is performed. Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation may be ended.

  Next, when an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed, an operation reception period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 is valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start of the operation, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal state, that is, whether or not the operation button 410 is in a normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (the normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. To maintain. In the operation accepting period, an instruction by a display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as an instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation for instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the normal state (for example, in the normal state). The display is performed in combination with a display that replicates a certain operation button 410, a message display of “press the operation button!”, And a voice instruction from the speaker (eg, a voice of “press the operation button!”). Further, in the operation reception period, by pressing the operation button 410 in a normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the above-described instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation may be ended.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in a normal state (not in a normal position) at the start of the operation reception period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 has been operated, and the state in which the operation button 410 is abnormally projected is maintained. In addition, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation is performed in the operation reception period at the same timing as when the abnormality does not occur. The instruction effect D for the normal operation informs the player that the current protrusion is not equivalent to the regular protrusion, and is, for example, an instruction by display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, A display that replicates the operation button 410 in a normal state, a message display such as “This operation is not related but the operation button is pressed!”, And a voice instruction from a speaker (for example, “This operation is not related Press the button! "). As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an unnatural situation occurs in which the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state. However, display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, By performing the instruction effect at the time of the normal operation using the sound from the speaker, it is possible to recognize from the display and the sound that at least the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is being performed. Further, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation described above may be ended. In addition, the instruction effects C and D at the time of the normal operation are not limited to those having different effect contents as described above, and the player can be notified that the current projection is not positioned equivalently to the regular projection. In this case, the instruction effects C and D during normal operation may be configured with the same effect contents.

  Also, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if the operation button 410 has an abnormality, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected, and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike when performing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation is not performed. The button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally projected state is maintained. Further, even at the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed.

  As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, when performing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is set within the operation reception period. When the button is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism, and is returned to the normal state. On the other hand, when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked. Without being locked by the mechanism, the abnormally protruding state is maintained. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is determined whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state. Although it is not possible to recognize whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruded state is being performed, depending on whether the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruded state returns to the normal state when the operation button 410 is pressed, Can be recognized whether or not the effect is being performed.

  When an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 that is in an abnormally protruding state during periods other than the operation reception period is similar to the operation reception period when an effect is performed using the operation button 410 in the normal state. Even if the button is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in the abnormally protruding state, as described later, at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the variation pattern), At the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above.

  Further, in the present example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the instruction effect at the time of the normal operation is performed during the operation reception period during the execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. However, such an instruction effect at the time of the normal operation may not be performed. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state has a lower degree of expectation than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. This is because even if the player is not able to confirm the degree of expectation for the effect due to the absence, the player hardly suffers a disadvantage.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is set to the normal state during the operation reception period during the execution of the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state. When the operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. May be prevented from being locked, and the abnormally protruding state may be maintained. That is, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the abnormal projection occurs regardless of whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state or the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is performed. When the pressed operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not be returned to the normal state. This is because the operation button 410 is abnormally generated, for example, when the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state when returning the operation button 410 to the normal state. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state arrives, the operation button 410 is left with a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred. Can alert you.

(Notification when an operation button error occurs)
Next, a description will be given of a notification mode performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 with reference to FIG. FIG. 230 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs in operation button 410.

  The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400. ) And can be changed. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In a state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player performs an operation to push the operation button 410 until the operation button 410 returns to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The effect operation unit 400 includes a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 230 (A), at the time of performing an effect using the operation button 410 in a protruding state, an operation reception period in which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes valid when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. However, at the start of the operation reception period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. Then, when the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  However, even if the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, if the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality, the operation returns to the normal state. Dont return. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state. At the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state is performed. Note that even when the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period is not performed. Done.

  Also, at the end of the operation acceptance period, even if the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality despite the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state, Does not return to the state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state after the end of the operation accepting period, as described later, at the time of the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the change pattern). At the start of the production), at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), at the start of the demonstration production described above (the timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods). Then, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation reception period. Done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, an effect for notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 as described later is not performed. That is, during the operation reception period, it is highly probable that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and it is highly likely that the operation button 410 is not intentional. An attempt is made to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making the occurrence noticeable.

  On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during a period other than the operation reception period, the response is made different from when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. For example, when the above-mentioned demonstration effect is performed, the automatic operation confirmation period described above is provided in addition to the operation reception period. During the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated without being pressed by the player. The origin is checked so that the operation button 410 is located at a normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 230B, in the automatic operation check period, first, the operation button 410 is operated to move up and down several times near the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is The origin is checked by a normal position sensor so that it can be detected that it is at a normal position. After confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set in a protruding state, and the operation button 410 is operated to return from the protruded state to a normal state, whereby the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism.

  However, even if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state during the automatic operation check period, but the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality, Does not return to normal state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and unless the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state returns to the normal state, the operation button 410 that has abnormally protruded is returned to the normal state. Is repeatedly performed. If the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state at the time when the control for returning the abnormally protruded operation button 410 to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (five times in this example), The automatic operation check period is ended, and after the automatic operation check period is ended, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to a normal state is not performed. In other words, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation check period and the abnormality continues after the automatic operation check period ends, the symbol as in the case after the above-described operation reception period ends. At the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), at the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the design game (at the end of the effect based on the change pattern), At the start timing (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods), control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed.

  Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation check period, an effect for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is performed. Specifically, a notification by a display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, a display such as “An error has occurred in the operation button”) or a flashing of a lamp or LED provided on the main body frame 4 (For example, by flashing the lamp / LED more vigorously than in the normal effect), the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is appealed to the outside.

  As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation check period, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to a normal state is performed after the end of the automatic operation check period. Not done. In addition, during the automatic operation check period, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is performed. That is, during the period other than the operation confirmation period, even though the operation of the operation button 410 is not requested as in the automatic operation confirmation period, it is highly likely that an abnormality has occurred by the player operating the operation button 410, Since there is a high possibility that the player has intentional intention, a mark indicating that an abnormally protruding state has occurred in the operation button 410 is left to warn such an actor.

  In this example, if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation reception period, the effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not performed, but such an effect is performed. It may be. However, in such a case, during the automatic operation checking period, it is preferable to perform in a mode in which the degree of appeal to the outside is suppressed, rather than the effect to be notified when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. Thereby, even after the end of the operation accepting period, the effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not disturbed by the effect related to the progress of the game (the effect based on the fluctuation pattern). it can.

(Confirmation effect when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body)
Next, a confirmation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 231 is a time chart illustrating a flow of the effect when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

  On the game board 5, around the effect display device 1600, the back lower movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the lower lower front movable effect. A movable decorative body such as a unit 3500 (see FIG. 60) is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) around the effect display device 1600 and a display area of the effect display device 1600. And the operating state (exposed position) exposed on the front side of the display. In addition, these movable decorative bodies change from a non-operation state to an operation state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

  It should be noted that each of the movable decorative bodies is non-movable in the rearward-movable effecting unit 3100, the back-upper left-movable effecting unit 3200, the back-left movable effecting unit 3300, the back-upper middle-moving effecting unit 3400, and the back-under-front movable effecting unit 3500. A standby position sensor capable of detecting an operation state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is in a non-operating state in the rear-facing rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the rear left movable production unit 3300, the rear upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the lower back front movable production unit 3500. A driving mechanism (for example, a driving motor) for operating between the operating state and the operating state is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 231, at the start of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the change pattern), at the end of the change of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the time of the change At the time of the end of the effect), at the timing of the start of the demonstration effect described above (timing prior to the start of a series of operation check periods), a predetermined operation start condition is not satisfied, and the movable decorative body should be in the non-operation state. However, at these timings, it was determined whether the movable decorative body was in a non-operating state (whether or not it is in a normal position), and it was determined that the movable decorative body was not in a non-operating state (not in a normal position). In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control is performed to return the movable decorative body to a non-operating state.

  However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, if the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state despite the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body may be moved. An effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the decorative body is performed. Specifically, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the display contents such as the displayed decorative symbols and the background image are changed to non-display. Further, the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 is made to blink violently. As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the fact that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is appealed to the outside.

  When the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operation state, in addition to the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, it is confirmed whether or not to proceed with the game in a state where the abnormal state has occurred. A confirmation effect is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a display such as "Press the operation button to end the abnormality notification and continue the game" is displayed. As long as the operation button 410 is not pressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable decorative body does not operate, but also the display contents such as the decorative design and the background image remain hidden in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Effects such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided in the frame 4 and sound from a speaker are not performed according to display contents.

  On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, or a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred. To end. Then, after the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but the display contents such as the decorative design and the background image are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. And effects such as lighting of lamps / LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and sound from a speaker are performed according to the displayed contents. For example, when an effect of operating the movable decorative body is performed after the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, the display of the display area, the lamp / Although the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker do not change, the movable decorative body does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decorative body. In this way, when an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body, a confirmation effect is performed, and the game proceeds after recognizing that the movable decorative body does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative body is performed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the inability of the movable decorative body to operate. The same confirmation effect is performed not only when the movable decorative body in the operation state does not return to the non-operation state but also when an abnormality such as the movable decoration body stops operating from the non-operation state. Have been done.

  In the present example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect in which the movable decorative body can operate by pressing the operation button 410 is performed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, during the operation acceptance period in the effect using the operation button 410 (the period during which the detection of the press detection sensor 440 becomes valid when the operation button 410 is pressed), the operation is performed. Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decorative body does not operate from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 is notified by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body or a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in a state where the abnormality has occurred. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect used is performed, it can be recognized that the movable decorative body does not operate.

  In the present example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that can derive a predetermined effect result without depressing the operation button 410 to operate the movable decorative body is also performed. Even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body as described above, the display of the display area, the lighting of the lamp / LED, and the sound from the speaker are not affected. If there is no effect, the same effect as when no abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed.

  Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, and when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body is controlled. An effect that notifies that an abnormality has occurred and a confirmation effect that checks whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred are performed. May be performed. In such a case, after the start of the confirmation effect, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operation state.For example, when the movable decoration body returns to the non-operation state during execution of the confirmation effect, The confirmation effect may be terminated even before the operation button 410 is pressed.

(Operation to avoid interference of multiple movable bodies)
Next, an interference avoiding operation when an abnormality occurs in one of the plurality of movable bodies that can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 is a time chart illustrating a relationship between the operation state of the operation button cover 419 and the operation state of the operation button 410 during the operation reception period. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 as an opening / closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated is provided. Will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the operation button 410 in a normal state. The operation button cover 419 operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. The operation button 410 can be changed to an open state in which the operation button 410 is exposed. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state, and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state to the closed state.

  The operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400, similarly to the operation buttons 410 other than this example. Has become. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. Then, the lock of the lock mechanism is released, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. In a state where the operation button 410 is protruded, when the player performs an operation to push the operation button 410 until the operation button 410 returns to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

  The effect operation unit 400 includes a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

  In addition, an effect using the operation button 410 is set as the effect set in the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 232 (A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation reception period occurs, The operation button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state. Then, when it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to a protruding state. In the operation reception period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to a normal state in accordance with an instruction.

  When the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state during the operation reception period, the operation returns to the normal state, but the protruding operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. If the operation button 410 is not pressed, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state at the end of the operation reception period. At the end of the operation reception period, if it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

  In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is made to protrude, and the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is set in the open state, there may be a problem that the operation button cover 419 stops between the closed state and the open state. That is, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 have a relationship of interfering with each other when operated at the same time. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to protrude without opening the operation button cover 419, the operation button 410 to be protruded interferes with the operation button cover 419, and the operation button Further malfunctions may occur between the 410 and the operation button cover 419. Therefore, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened, control is performed to avoid the interference so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 232 (B), control is performed to open the operation button cover 419 in the closed state at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, but when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. If it is determined that there is no operation, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and the control for making the operation button 410 in the normal state protrude is not performed (the control for making the operation button 410 protrude). Is banned). Thus, it is possible to prevent the operation buttons 410 and the operation button cover 419 from interfering with each other when the operation button cover 419 is not opened. Even when the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation reception period occurs, as long as the operation button cover 419 does not become the open state when the operation reception period occurs. Does not perform control to make the operation button 410 in a normal state protrude (prohibit control to make the operation button 410 protrude).

  Further, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, but after that, the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the touch of the player himself. Then, it is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been resolved, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is controlled to be in the protruded state while allowing the operation button 410 to be in the protruded state. As described above, when the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a state of interfering with each other, but the interfering state is resolved by the contact, the operation button 410 is set in a protruding state. Thus, the protruding operation button 410 can be pressed in the remaining period of the operation reception period. For this reason, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, the effect of pressing down the protruding operation button 410 by the player's self-help efforts is provided. Participation can be prevented from being hindered. After the protruding operation button 410 is pressed, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state is performed, and the operation button cover 419 is returned to a normal state. The situation in which the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other is prevented from occurring again.

  Note that when the operation button cover 419 is not in the open state at the time of the operation reception period, but the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the touch of the player himself, it is usually The operation button 410 in the state of is protruded, but if the operation button 410 in the protruded state is not pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are sequentially turned on at the end of the operation reception period. The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, at the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Thereafter, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, the operation button Control for returning the cover 419 to the closed state is performed. This prevents the situation in which the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other again later.

  On the other hand, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of occurrence of the operation reception period, and the player is left in that state thereafter, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not made to protrude. In such a case, the user cannot participate in the effect of pressing the protruding operation button 410. At the end of the operation reception period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state, so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is eliminated. And the operation button cover 419 are prevented from interfering with each other.

(Operation when an error occurs in the operation button according to the game state)
Next, an operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 233 is a time chart illustrating an operation state of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation buttons 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 as an opening / closing member for determining whether or not the operation buttons 410 can be operated is provided. Will be described.

  The operation button cover 419 is provided on the operation button 410 in a normal state. The operation button cover 419 operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is closed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. The operation button 410 can be changed to an open state in which the operation button 410 is exposed. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state, and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the open state to the closed state.

  The operation button 410 can be changed between a normal state (initial position) not protruding from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) protruding from the effect operation unit 400, similarly to the operation buttons 410 other than this example. Has become. The production operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, and is positioned in the normal state. The operation button 410 is in a state where the operation button 410 is protruded by the spring mechanism. The effect operation unit 400 includes a normal position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a normal state, and a protruding position sensor that can detect that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the projected state to the normal state.

  In this example, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state can be performed in the non-time saving state (normal state). In the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation in the closed state is performed when the operation reception period occurs. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state can be pressed. Then, in the operation reception period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction, a predetermined effect result can be obtained. At the end of the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed.

  In the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation reception period. However, as shown in FIG. 233 (A), when the operation button cover 419 is in an open state and the operation button 410 is in a protruding state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After the operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state, control for returning the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at the predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, only the control for returning the open operation button cover 419 to the closed state is performed. Is performed. In addition, the predetermined abnormality determination timing is, as in the case other than the present example, when the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts changing (at the start of the effect based on the variable pattern), and when the symbol game ends. This is the timing when the fluctuation ends (when the effect based on the fluctuation pattern ends) and when the above-described demonstration effect starts.

  On the other hand, in the time saving state, an effect using the protruding operation button 410 can be performed. In the effect using the protruding operation button 410, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation reception period occurs, the operation button 410 is in the protruding state. By pressing the operation button 410 to a normal state according to the instruction, a predetermined effect result can be obtained. In addition, as long as the time saving state is set, even if the protruding operation button 410 is pressed down to the normal state, the operation button 410 is returned to the protruding state without being locked by the lock mechanism. Become.

  In the time reduction state, the operation button cover 419 should be in the open state and the operation button 410 should be in the protruding state. However, as shown in FIG. 233 (B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is returned to the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruded state is performed. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control for returning the normal operation button 410 to the protruding state is performed. Only done.

  As described above, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state, whereas in the time reduction state, the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. And the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 stand by at different positions in the non-time reduction state and the time reduction state, but one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 is determined. When an abnormality occurs as described above, by changing the position of the return destination of the member in which the abnormality has occurred, an operation using the operation button 410 at a position corresponding to the game state is performed. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of operating the 410 from being hindered.

(Mission production erasure timing)
Next, in addition to performing a fluctuating effect such as a fluctuating display of a decorative pattern as the effect set in the fluctuating pattern, a case in which a mission effect is performed to determine whether or not the mission presented to the player is achieved. This will be described below.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decoration symbol is started based on the variation pattern, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, if the lottery result is a hit (if the variation pattern is a hit pattern), the decorative symbol is displayed. And a stop effect is displayed in a symbol, and when the lottery result is out of order (in the case of a change pattern at the time of out of place), a fluctuating effect is performed in which the decorative symbol is deviated and stopped and displayed in a design. In addition, when the execution of the mission effect is determined, the mission effect (presentation effect, result suggestion effect described later) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 within the period in which the above-described variable effect is performed. Control for execution is performed.

  The mission effect of this example includes a presentation effect (preceding effect) for presenting a mission to a player, and a result suggesting effect (subsequent effect) for notifying whether or not the mission is achieved. Specifically, first, a presentation effect (preceding effect) for presenting a mission to the player using the effect display device 1600 is performed. When the player presses the operation button 410, the presented mission is erased. Then, the presentation effect is ended, and a result suggestive effect (subsequent effect) for notifying whether the mission is achieved is started. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, a display indicating that the mission is achieved as a result of the mission effect is derived after the start of the result effect effect and before the decorative symbol is hit and stopped and displayed. If the result suggestion finishes and the lottery result is out of order, after the start of the result suggestion effect, the mission is released as a result of the mission effect before the decorative design is released and stopped with the design. The display indicating the failure is derived, and the result suggestion effect ends. In other words, when the lottery result is a hit, in the result suggestion effect (sequence effect) in a series of mission effects, the result of the same content as the presentation effect (preceding effect) that presented the mission earlier is derived. If the lottery result is out of order, the result suggestion effect (sequence effect) in the series of mission effects is to derive a result different in content from the presentation effect (preceding effect) in which the mission was presented earlier. Before the symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to determine or suggest the lottery result regarding the winning.

  In this example, after the presentation effect (preceding effect) for presenting the mission to the player is performed, the player presses the operation button 410 at an arbitrary timing, thereby terminating the presentation effect and suggesting the result. The effect can be started, and until the operation button 410 is pressed, the mission presented in the presented effect is not erased, and the result suggestive effect (subsequent effect) is not started. . As described above, unless the operation button 410 is pressed, the display of the presented mission is continued, and the mission effect does not progress. Therefore, the motivation to press the operation button 410 can be increased, and the mission can be performed. It is possible to suppress as much as possible the progress of the mission effect without the player noticing the presentation. In the case where the operation button 410 is not pressed before the presentation limit time (in this example, the timing of 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol) set immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol is reached. In this case, when the presentation limit time has come, the presented mission is erased to end the presentation production, and a result suggestion production is started to force the mission production to proceed.

  In this example, “4 seconds” is set as the execution time of the result suggestion effect, and the result suggestion effect is forcibly activated by the arrival of the presentation limit time set at 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol. , The mission effect is advanced by executing the same result suggestive effect as when the player starts the result suggestive effect at an arbitrary timing. In addition, the presentation limit time may be common when a mission effect is executed corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns having different variation times, but the presentation limit time may be set in accordance with the plurality of types of variation patterns having different variation times. May be set differently, for example, when performing a mission effect corresponding to a fluctuation pattern of “20 seconds”, set “timing 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol” as the presentation limit time. On the other hand, in the case of performing a mission effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of “20.5 seconds”, setting “the timing 5.5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol” as the presentation limit time, etc. Can be exemplified. As a result, when the suggestion effect is forcibly started due to the arrival of the presentation limit time, the start of the result suggestion effect allows the player to recognize the length of the fluctuation pattern being executed and the stop display time of the decorative symbol. It can be prevented from being done, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in this example, as described above, the execution time of the result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) is set to 4 seconds, and the result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) is started by pressing the operation button 410, and the predetermined time period is set. (4 seconds), the effect suggestion effect proceeds. For this reason, if the operation button 410 is pressed at an early timing after the presentation effect (preceding effect) for presenting the mission to the player, the start of the result suggestion effect is accelerated, and the timing at which the result is derived is also increased. If the operation button 410 is pressed earlier and later, the result suggestion effect is started later, and the timing at which the result is derived is also later. Thus, a player who wants to quickly determine whether or not the lottery result is a hit can be directed to press the operation button 410 at an early timing after the mission is presented.

  Next, a specific effect example of the mission effect will be described with reference to FIG. In the present effect example, a case will be described in which the main control MPU 4100a determines a fluctuation pattern in which a mission effect is performed in parallel with the fluctuation effect among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

  First, when a command relating to a fluctuation pattern in which a mission effect is performed in parallel with the fluctuation effect is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (FIG. 234 (A)). Then, after starting the variation display of the decorative symbol, the display region of the effect display device 1600 in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed using the upper right display region and the lower left display region are used. And a mission display area in which a series of mission effects are performed (FIG. 234 (B)). In other words, at the start of the presentation effect (preceding effect) in the mission effect, the decorative design is displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display area in which the area is smaller than at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The player who seeks the progress of the game progresses while watching the mission display area, and the player who does not demand the progress of the mission effect progresses the game while watching the symbol display area.

  First, in the mission display area of the display area of the effect display device 1600, if "7 appears in a rattle, a big hit!" By performing a presentation effect (preceding effect) that displays a mission message image of "", it is possible for the player to grasp the achievement condition imposed as the mission. In addition, in the presentation effect, by displaying an operation message image different from the mission message image “Press a button to start!” In the mission display area, the mission effect proceeds when the operation button 410 is pressed ( That a rattle as a result suggestion effect is started) can be grasped by the player.

  When the operation button 410 is pressed while the presentation effect is being performed in the mission display area, the mission message image and the operation message image are deleted. In addition, a display consisting of a character image of "rattle" is newly appeared, and a rotational display is performed so that the rattle starts rotating, and a result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) is started as to whether or not the mission is achieved. (FIG. 234 (C)).

  Next, when the lottery result is a big hit, when a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) is started by pressing the operation button 410, the result of the mission achievement is determined. As a result, a result image in which the ball “7” appears from the rattle is displayed (FIG. 234 (D)). This indicates that the result is the same as the previously presented mission (raising “7” in a rattle), and allows the player to grasp that the mission this time was successful (achieved), and to decorate the game. Before the symbols are stopped and displayed, the player can be made to recognize that the lottery result is a big hit. Then, after that, when the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern has elapsed, the division of the mission display area and the symbol display area is released, and the decorative pattern is returned to be displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the big hit symbol (“777” in this example) (FIG. 234 (E)).

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is out of order, when a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) is started by pressing the operation button 410, the result of the mission achievement is determined. As a result, a result image in which balls other than “7” appear from the rattle is displayed (FIG. 234 (F)). This indicates that the result was different from the previously presented mission (raising “7” with rattling), and let the player know that this mission failed (not completed), and decorate the game. Before the symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can be made aware that the lottery result is out of order. Then, after that, when the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern has elapsed, the division of the mission display area and the symbol display area is released, and the decorative pattern is returned to be displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a removed symbol (“513” in this example) (FIG. 234 (G)).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the operating means operable by the player, there is the sword decoration body 5001 in the above-described sword rendering operation unit 5000 in addition to the operation button 410. Is set so that the presentation effect in the mission effect is not ended and the result suggestion effect is not started even if the player operates. This sword decoration body 5001 performs an effect (for example, a change in an effect such as a dialogue effect) different from a mission effect as an effect corresponding to (attached to) a variable effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern performed in a symbol variable region. It is sometimes used. For this reason, for example, after being divided into a symbol variation area and a mission display area by executing the mission effect, a presentation effect in the mission effect is performed in the mission display area, and a state of waiting for operation of the operation button 410 continues. Even if it is in the middle, at the same time, an effect using a sword decoration body 5001 different from the mission effect in the symbol display area can be executed, and an effect using the operation button 410 in the mission display area (mission effect) ) And another effect (such as a line effect effect) using the sword effect operation unit 5000 in the symbol display area, without affecting the progress of each effect.

  In this example, as a presentation effect (preceding effect) in the mission effect, "If a" 7 "appears in the rattle, a big hit! After displaying the mission message image "", if the lottery result is a big hit, a result image in which a ball of "7" appears from the rattle is displayed as a result suggestive effect (subsequent effect). Also, in the result suggestion effect, the same effect image composed of the ball of “7” appears. As a result, it is possible to easily determine that the result is the same as the presented mission, and it is possible for the player to easily understand that the mission has succeeded (the player can easily understand that the mission has been achieved. Is not limited to the appearance of the same effect image in the presentation effect and the result suggestion effect. For example, the effect image substantially identical to the effect image appearing in the presentation effect (even if the shape, size, etc. are different). Anything that has the commonality that can be recognized as “the same” from the appearance and color) may be made to appear in the result suggestion effect.

  Also, in this example, as a mission effect, "If a" 7 "appears in a rattle, a big hit! ", A mission effect consisting of a presentation effect (preceding effect) displaying a mission message image and a result suggesting effect (subsequent effect) using a rotational display of a rattle character image is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be other modes. For example, "If this character appears in a rattle, a big hit! "And a presentation effect (preceding effect) displaying an image of the target character (mission target pre-display image) together with a mission message image of" ", and an image of the same character as the presented character (the orientation, posture, size, etc. are different. Mission productions that have commonality that can be recognized as “the same” from the appearance and color, etc.) and a result suggestion production (a subsequent production) in which an image of a character different from the presented character appears. And so on. In addition, as the mission production, there is a mission production such as "a mission production showing a big hit when" 7 "appears once in a rattle" or a "mission production showing a big hit when" 7 "appears twice in a rattle". Alternatively, the number of achievements of the mission may be different. Further, in the mission effect, it is preferable that the achievement of the mission ensures a big hit.

  Further, in the above example, the operation button 410 is pressed until the presentation limit time (in this example, 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol) set immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. If not, when the presentation limit time comes, the presented mission is deleted, the presentation production is ended, and the result production is started to force the mission production to proceed. However, other embodiments may be adopted. For example, as another example, the operation button 410 is pressed until the presentation limit time (in this example, the timing of 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol) set immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol arrives. If not, when the presentation limit time has come, the presented mission may be deleted, the presentation effect may be ended, and the mission effect may be ended without starting the result suggestion effect. In this case, when the presentation limit time has come, the division of the mission display area and the symbol display area is released, and the player who does not request the progress of the mission effect is provided with a game progress in the large area symbol display area. Can be actively executed. Further, the manner of progress of the mission effect at the time when the presentation limit time has arrived may be changed depending on the type of the mission effect. For example, in the case of performing the first mission effect of displaying the above-mentioned rattle as a mission effect, when the presentation limit time has come, the presented mission is deleted, the presentation effect is ended, and the result suggestion effect is started. The second mission effect (for example, a higher hit expectation degree than the first mission effect) is different from the first mission effect (for example, higher than the first mission effect). In the case of performing a mission effect that displays another character such as "Omikuji" instead of rattling), when the presentation limit time has come, the presented mission is deleted and the presentation effect is terminated and the result suggestion effect is made. May be started and the mission effect is forcibly advanced.

  Further, in this example, the effect display device 1600 is used for both a variable effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern, a presentation effect (preceding effect) for presenting a mission, and a result suggesting effect (successive effect). A plurality of display devices may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effects thereof may be performed using another display device. Thereby, for example, the effect using the operation button 410 and the effect using the above-described sword decoration 5001 (the effect corresponding to (attaching to) the variable effect such as the variable display of the decorative pattern) are clearly recognized. be able to.

(Count of the number of specific notices in roulette production)
Next, in addition to performing a fluctuating effect such as a fluctuating display of a decorative pattern as the effect set in the fluctuating pattern, as an effect using the operation button 410, among a plurality of types of advance notices each having an expected degree set, A case in which a roulette effect indicating which of the notices is determined will be described below.

  In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decoration symbol is started based on the variation pattern, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, if the lottery result is a hit (if the variation pattern is a hit pattern), the decorative symbol is displayed. And a stop effect is displayed in a symbol, and when the lottery result is out of order (in the case of a change pattern at the time of out of place), a fluctuating effect is performed in which the decorative symbol is deviated and stopped and displayed in a design. When the execution of the roulette effect is determined, control for executing the roulette effect is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period in which the above-described variable effect is performed.

  The roulette effect of this example includes a first roulette effect that does not require operation of the operation button 410 (first roulette effect) and a second roulette effect that requires operation of the operation button 410 (second roulette effect). The first roulette effect and the second roulette effect proceed sequentially in this order. Specifically, first, as the first roulette effect, an effect of determining the mode of the button image imitating the operation button 410 from a plurality of types of modes is performed. As the mode of the button image, “notice A (normal)” which is not decorated at all and “notice B (ladybug)” decorated with a ladybug pattern are set. The degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the button image mode is set so as to increase in the order of “notice A (normal)” and “notice B (ladybug)”. That is, when the lottery result is a hit, the probability of determining “notice B (ladybug)” in the first roulette effect is high. Note that in the first roulette effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is not requested, and the button image mode of any one of the plurality of types is notified as a result without pressing the operation button 410. I have.

  Next, after displaying the button image in the mode determined in the first roulette effect, as a second roulette effect, an effect of determining the mode of the display image on which a predetermined pattern is drawn from a plurality of types is performed. Is As a mode of the display image, “notice 1 (x)” in which a symbol “x” is drawn, “notice 2 (○)” in which a symbol ○ is drawn, and “notice 3 ( ☆) "and" Trailer 4 (Ladybug) "with a ladybug drawn. It should be noted that the mode of the display image includes “notice 4 (ladybug)” which is the same pattern as “notice B (ladybug)” in at least the first roulette effect. In addition, as the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the mode of the display image, “notice 1 (×)”, “notice 2 (２)”, “notice 3 (☆)”, and “notice 4 (ladybug)” It is set to increase in order. That is, when the lottery result is a hit, the probability of determining “notice 4 (ladybug)” is high in the second roulette effect. In the second roulette effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is requested by using the display of the button image in the mode determined in the first roulette effect. As an opportunity, one of the plurality of types of the display image is notified as a result.

  In the above description, only when the lottery result is a hit, "notice B (ladybug)" is notified as the result of the first roulette effect, and "notice 4 (ladybug)" is obtained as the result of the second roulette effect. "Can be notified. In other words, when the lottery result is out of order, "notice B (ladybug)" is notified as the result of the first roulette effect, and "notice 4 (ladybug)" is obtained as the result of the second roulette effect. And that it is not determined at the same time. As described above, when "notice B (ladybug)" is notified as a result of the first roulette effect, and "notice 4 (ladybug)" is notified as a result of the second roulette effect, a ladybug Since it is determined that the lottery result is a hit if the design pattern appears twice, it is possible to draw attention to those roulette effects with expectation. On the other hand, regardless of whether the lottery result is a hit or a miss or whether the result of the roulette effect is a pattern of a ladybug pattern, the content before the result notification in the first roulette effect (the "Preliminary notice B (Ladybug)" appears as a plurality of modes displayed, and "Preliminary 4 (multiple modes displayed on roulette display)" represents the content before the result notification in the second roulette effect. Ladybugs) ”are not restricted. That is, as the contents (a plurality of modes displayed on the roulette display) before the result notification in the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, a pattern of a ladybug pattern may appear any number of times. Even if the insect pattern appears a plurality of times, the lottery result is not determined to be a hit. Also, at the stage before the result notification in the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect (stage at which a plurality of modes are displayed on the roulette display), the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) is not determined. Even if the ladybug pattern appears multiple times at the stage, the expectation (big hit expectation) does not increase.

  In this example, the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect are performed, the content of each roulette effect (a plurality of modes displayed on the roulette display), and the result of each roulette effect. The mode is determined by a variation pattern determined on the main control MPU 4100a side. Specifically, since two types of modes are set as a result of the first roulette effect, and four types of modes are set as a result of the second roulette effect, a combination of each mode is set. At least eight types of variation patterns are set. Then, only when the lottery result is a hit, "notice B (ladybug)" is notified as a result of the first roulette effect, and "notice 4 (ladybug)" is notified as a result of the second roulette effect. However, when the lottery result is out of order, the variation pattern is limited so as not to be determined.

  Note that, unlike the present example, the content in each roulette effect (a plurality of modes displayed on the roulette display) and the mode notified as a result of each roulette effect are transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the variation pattern is transmitted to the side, that is, when the variation of the decorative symbol is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a may determine the variation pattern based on the variation pattern. More specifically, “first roulette content determination lottery” in which the contents (a plurality of modes displayed on the roulette display) in the first roulette effect are determined as a plurality of effect lotteries performed at the start of the change of the decorative symbol. The “first roulette result determination lottery” that determines the mode notified as a result of the first roulette effect, and the “first roulette effect determining content (a plurality of modes displayed on the roulette display)” "2 roulette content determination lottery" and "2nd roulette result determination lottery" for determining a mode notified as a result of the second roulette effect. After the plurality of production lotteries, the result of the first roulette production is "notice B (Ladybug)" and the result of the second roulette production is "notice 4 ( If the “ladybug” is determined, the result of any of the roulette effects is replaced with a mode other than “ladybug” and executed. That is, after a plurality of production lotteries, it is determined whether or not the lottery result related to the winning and the production lottery result satisfy a prohibition condition that is determined to be inconsistent, and if it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied, The result of any of the roulette effects is replaced with a mode other than “ladybug” and executed. Note that among the plurality of production lotteries, the “first roulette result determination lottery” and the “second roulette result determination lottery” are prohibited, but the “first roulette content determination lottery” and the “second roulette content determination lottery” The “content determination lottery” is not a prohibited object, and the “ladybug” mode may be displayed any number of times on the roulette display before the result notification in the roulette effect.

  In addition to the above, the mode notified as a result of the second roulette effect may be determined by the peripheral control MPU 4150a when the operation button 410 is pressed. In such a case, when the operation button 410 is pressed, a “second roulette result determination lottery” that determines a mode notified as a result of the second roulette effect is performed. Then, even though the lottery result is off, "notice B (Ladybug)" has already been determined and displayed as the result of the first roulette effect, and "notice 4" has been obtained as the result of the second roulette effect. (Ladybug) "is determined and the result of the second roulette effect is replaced with a mode other than" Ladybug "and executed. That is, after determining the result of the second roulette effect, it is determined whether or not the above-described prohibition condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied, the result of the second roulette effect is referred to as “ladybug” The execution is performed in a manner other than the above.

  Next, a specific effect example of the roulette effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236. In the present effect example, a case will be described in which the main control MPU 4100a determines a fluctuation pattern in which a roulette effect is performed among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

  First, when a command related to a fluctuation pattern in which a roulette effect is performed is transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the display of the effect display device 1600 starts to display the fluctuation of the decorative symbol (FIG. 235 (A)). )). Then, after starting the variable display of the decorative symbols, the first roulette effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, in the roulette display divided into four parts, two button images indicating “notice A (normal)” and two button images indicating “notice B (ladybug)” are alternately arranged. Then, a roulette effect is performed so as to sequentially select in a clockwise direction (FIG. 235 (B)).

  Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the first roulette effect, one of a button image indicating “notice A (normal)” and a button image indicating “notice B (ladybug)” Stops in the display area of. That is, when "notice B (ladybug)" is determined as a result of the first roulette effect, the selection is stopped in the display area of the button image indicating "notice B (ladybug)" (FIG. 235). (C)), on the other hand, when “notice A (normal)” is determined, the selection stops in the display area of the button image indicating “notice A (normal)” (FIG. 235 (D)). .

  Next, a second roulette effect is performed, and at the start of the second roulette effect, a selection start image of "Start roulette effect!" Is displayed to notify the effect. In addition, at the start of the second roulette effect, a button image as a result of the first roulette effect is displayed, and a start operation instruction image such as "press the button to stop!" When the operation button 410 is pressed in the roulette display displayed after the start of the roulette effect, it is possible to grasp that the display image in the roulette display can be selected by the player himself. In addition, as the display of the button image, when the button image indicating “notice A (normal)” is selected as a result of the first roulette effect, the button image indicating “notice A (normal)” is displayed (FIG. 235 ( E)), on the other hand, when a button image indicating "notice B (ladybug)" is selected, a button image indicating "notice B (ladybug)" is displayed (FIG. 235 (F)).

  In this example, in the first roulette effect, a ladybug pattern button image can be displayed both during the roulette display and after the roulette display, but after the roulette display, the ladybug pattern is displayed more than during the roulette display. The button image is displayed enlarged. Further, in the first roulette effect, the time during which the ladybug pattern button image is displayed after the roulette display is longer than the time during which the ladybug pattern button image is displayed during the roulette display. For this reason, the ladybug pattern button image is difficult to recognize during roulette display, whereas the ladybug pattern button image is easy to recognize after roulette display. In this example, when a ladybug pattern appears twice through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, the lottery result is determined to be a big hit, but the ladybug pattern displayed after the roulette display is displayed. Only the button image is counted as the number of times a ladybug pattern appears. That is, even if the ladybug pattern button image is displayed during the roulette display, it is not counted as the number of times the ladybug pattern picture has appeared. In this respect, the ladybug pattern image appears when the ladybug pattern button image is displayed by making the recognition of the ladybug pattern button image different between during roulette display and after roulette display It is easy to determine whether or not the count is performed as the number of times the user has performed.

  In the second roulette effect described above, in the roulette display divided into four parts, a display image of “notice 4 (ladybug)”, a display image of “notice 1 (×)”, and a display image of “notice 3 (☆)” The display image and the display image of “notice 2 (O)” are arranged clockwise, and roulette display (rotation selection display) is performed so that the display image is selected in order clockwise (FIG. 235 (G)). .

  Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed after starting the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, the rotation display speed of the roulette display (rotation selection display) is reduced by the pressing, and the operation button 410 is pressed. After a predetermined time (in this example, three seconds) after the button is pressed, the display image of “notice 1 (×)”, the display image of “notice 2 (○)”, and the display image of “notice 3 (☆)” , The display image indicating “notice 4 (ladybug)”, the selection is stopped. That is, when “notice 4 (ladybug)” is determined as a result of the second roulette effect, the selection is stopped in the display area of the display image indicating “notice 4 (ladybug)” (FIG. 236). (H)), on the other hand, when “notice 1 (×)” is determined, selection stops at the display area of the display image indicating “notice 1 (×)” (FIG. 236 (I)). . Then, when the selection is stopped in the display area of the display image indicating “notice 4 (ladybug)”, the display image indicating “notice 4 (ladybug)” is enlarged and displayed (FIG. 236 (J )). Note that, even if the operation button 410 is not pressed until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the second roulette effect, the selection is stopped in any of the display areas at that time as well. Like that.

  As described above, in the second roulette effect as well as the first roulette effect, the display image of the ladybug can be displayed both during the roulette display and after the roulette display. Later, the display image of the ladybug is enlarged and displayed. Further, in the second roulette effect, the time during which the display image of the ladybug is displayed after the roulette display is longer than the time during which the display image of the ladybug is displayed during the roulette display. For this reason, the display image of the ladybug is difficult to recognize during the roulette display, whereas the display image of the ladybug is easy to recognize after the roulette display. In this example, if the pattern of the ladybug pattern appears twice through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, the lottery result is determined to be a big hit, but the display of the ladybug displayed after the roulette display Only the image is counted as the number of appearances of the ladybug pattern. In other words, even if a display image of a ladybug is displayed during roulette display, it is not counted as the number of times a ladybug pattern appears. In this regard, the number of times a ladybug pattern appears when a ladybug display image is displayed by making the recognizability of a ladybug display image different between during roulette display and after roulette display It is easy to determine whether or not the count is performed.

  When the ladybug pattern appears twice through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, the decorative symbol is changed to the big hit symbol (book) when the variation time set in the variation pattern has elapsed. In the example, the display is stopped at “777” (FIG. 236 (K)). On the other hand, when the ladybug pattern appeared only once through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, and when the ladybug pattern did not appear at all, the variation pattern When the set fluctuation time has elapsed, the decorative symbol comes off and is stopped and displayed with the symbol (“513” in this example) (FIG. 236 (L)).

  In this example, when the ladybug pattern appears twice through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit. Until is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, a special effect different from the normal effect (effect set in the fluctuation pattern) is performed. Thereby, after the pattern of the ladybug pattern appears twice, it is possible to prevent a boring time just waiting for the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol.

  Further, in this example, during the execution of the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, the decorative symbol is fluctuated in the reduced display area on the upper right of the effect display device 1600. Thus, when it is desired to pay attention to the variable display of the decorative symbol, the user can pay attention to the variable display of the decorative symbol without being hindered by the roulette effect. In the present example, the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect are performed at a timing (so-called normal fluctuation) before whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol forms a reach. This makes it possible to execute a roulette effect even when the decorative symbols do not form a reach, thereby preventing the boring time during the normal fluctuation.

  Further, in this example, in each of the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, only the image of the ladybug pattern displayed after the roulette display is counted as the number of times that the pattern of the ladybug pattern appears. Only the case where the predetermined appearance condition is satisfied may be counted as the number of appearances of the ladybug pattern. As in this example, when the predetermined appearance condition is satisfied, in addition to the case where the image of the ladybug pattern is enlarged or the case where the image of the ladybug pattern is displayed for a long time, for example, the effect display Only when an image of a ladybug pattern is displayed at a specific position in the display area of the device 1600, the number of appearances of the ladybug pattern may be counted. On the other hand, as a case where the predetermined appearance condition is not satisfied, for example, the image of the ladybug pattern appears in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but does not stay at the predetermined position but leaves the display area in a short time. In such a case, it may not be counted as the number of appearances of the ladybug pattern.

(Concealment display in roulette production)
In the second roulette effect described above, as another example, the roulette display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be arbitrarily difficult or unrecognizable by the player. The case will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, in addition to the above-described selection start image and start operation instruction image, a confidential instruction image of “press and hold the button if you do not want to see” is displayed. Display is performed (FIG. 237 (A)). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment determines that the operation button 410 is “long press” when the operation is continuously performed without interruption for a predetermined long press time or more (in this example, 2 seconds or more). When the operation detection signal for the operation button 410 is continuously input for a long press time or more (in this example, 2 seconds or more), the operation of “long press” can be detected. I can do it. By displaying the concealment instruction image, if the operation button 410 is held down, the player can know that the progress process and the result of the subsequent roulette display cannot be recognized.

  At the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, if the operation button 410 is long-pressed according to the instruction from the confidential instruction image, the initial “press” corresponding to the “long press” is detected, Similarly to the above-described embodiment, the rotation display speed of the roulette display (rotation selection display) is slowed down, and a display image of "notice 1 (x)" is given a predetermined time after the operation button 410 is pressed (3 seconds in this example). Selection stops at any of the display areas of the display image of “Trailer 2 (O)”, the display image of “Trailer 3 (☆)”, and the display image of “Trailer 4 (Ladybug)” I do. However, in this alternative example, when the pressing on the operation button 410 reaches the long pressing time (2 seconds in this example), it is determined that the pressing is long, and the concealment image different from the roulette display is displayed on the front layer of the roulette display. (In this example, a special still image in which the back is invisible by being painted in white) is displayed, and at least each display image arranged in the roulette display is hidden by a concealment image so that the player cannot recognize it. (FIG. 237 (B)).

  That is, in this alternative example, if the operation button 410 is long-pressed in accordance with the instruction by the concealment instruction image at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, the concealment is performed before the selection of the roulette display is stopped. A display image is displayed so that the player cannot recognize the result of the roulette display at the rear end. Further, the confidential image ends when the long press is released, but is kept displayed as long as the operation button 410 is kept pressed, and while the operation button 410 is kept pressed, If the operation button 410 is held down even when the selection of the roulette display is stopped, it is possible to recognize whether any display image is selected in the roulette display. (FIG. 237 (C)). Thus, if the user does not want to know the expected degree of roulette effect (big hit expectation) before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the operation button 410 is held down to display the result of roulette effect. Can be avoided, and it is possible to concentrate on whether or not the big hit symbol is derived when the decorative symbol is subsequently stopped and displayed.

  Further, in this alternative example, even during the period in which the operation button 410 is held down for a long time, that is, the period in which the roulette display cannot be recognized, the decorative pattern is displayed in the reduced display area at the upper right of the effect display device 1600. The variable display is performed so that it can be visually recognized. Accordingly, even when the operation button 410 is long-pressed, the concealment image does not hinder the visual recognition of the decorative symbol in the variable display, and avoids the visual recognition of the roulette display, and only displays the decorative symbol in the variable display. Can be selectively noted.

  In this alternative example, when the operation button 410 is long-pressed in accordance with the instruction by the confidential instruction image at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, the respective display images arranged in the roulette display Is hidden by the concealment image so that the player cannot recognize it. However, only a part of the display images, but not all of them, may be hidden by the concealment image so that the player may have difficulty in recognizing the display image. Also, as a display image to be arranged on the roulette display, for example, a pattern similar to the pattern of "ladybug" is provided, and a pattern of "ladybug" and a part of the pattern similar thereto are hidden by the concealment image. Alternatively, it may be difficult for the player to determine whether or not the pattern is “ladybug”.

  Further, in this alternative example, at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, not only when the operation button 410 is long-pressed according to the instruction from the confidential instruction image, but also according to the instruction from the operation instruction image. Even if the normal pressing of the operation button 410 is not performed and then the operation button 410 is pressed again, the confidential image is displayed. In this case, the roulette display is started by the first press, and the roulette display is temporarily made visible, but the roulette display is hidden by the concealment image by the subsequent long press, similar to the above-described embodiment. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the result of the roulette effect, and to suppress the result of the roulette effect from being displayed for a long time for a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) by the roulette effect.

  In the above-described another example, “long press of the operation button 410” is exemplified as the display condition of the confidential image. However, if it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily recognize the roulette display, the operation button The confidential image may be displayed in response to another operation instead of pressing and holding 410. As other operations, for example, operations on other operation units such as the sword decoration body 5001 and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 provided on the door frame 3 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 described above (by long-pressing). Or a normal press) may be exemplified, and the confidential image is displayed on condition of these other operations at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect. You may.

  Further, in the above-described another example, the display of the confidential image is ended by releasing the long press of the operation button 410. However, as another mode, when the long press of the operation button 410 is performed, Even if the long press is released, the concealment image may be continuously displayed for a specific long time (preferably longer than the time when the selection of the roulette display is stopped). In this case, the player It is possible to reduce fatigue and burden caused by continuing to press and hold.

  Further, in the above-described another example, a “special still image in which the back is invisible by painting in white” is displayed as the confidential image. However, the display time of the confidential image is not limited to the still image. If the confidential image continues to be displayed while the operation button 410 is long-pressed, the dynamic image may be changed depending on the elapse of the long-pressing time. As an example of the confidential image composed of a dynamic image, a “game information image that is switched and developed at regular intervals within a special balloon image that is painted white and makes the rear invisible” can be exemplified. As the game information image, specifically, an explanation image related to a game technique, various game effect explanation images mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, an explanation image of a current game mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. Displaying a special dynamic image that informs a game machine explanation or a game situation while switching at regular time intervals. In this way, by displaying information useful to the player even in a period in which the effect is not interesting in the concealment image, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

[24. Setting mode interrupt processing]
Next, the setting mode interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU 4150a completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). And a special symbol display (upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186) for a fixed period (in this example, when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol)) After receiving the fluctuation pattern command at the peripheral control MPU 4150a, until 0.5 seconds elapse after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern, or at the peripheral control MPU 4150a, issue a special figure 1 tuning effect end command or a special figure 2 tuning effect end command. Dial operation unit 40 of the operation unit 400 except for 0.5 seconds after the display of the decorative design after the reception). And to be able to adjust the like plurality of LED brightness provided in each decorative board sub volume value and the door frame 5 and the game board 4 of the effect sound (light amount) by operating the or pushing operation section 405. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated except for a predetermined period after the power is turned on and a period before and after the start or stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol (prohibition period: about 1 second). When the operation signal of the pressing operation unit 405 is input to the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on the setting mode, the setting mode interrupt processing is executed. The operation unit 400 for adjusting the sub-volume value of the effect sound and the brightness (light amount) of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is the operation unit 400 used in the effect. In addition to the pressing operation unit 405, a dedicated operation unit for adjustment (for example, a cross key type operation that adjusts the volume level by operating in the vertical direction and adjusts the brightness of the light amount (luminance) by operating in the horizontal direction) Section).

  In the setting mode interruption processing, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) as shown in FIG. 239. For example, when the setting mode interrupt processing is performed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the change display of the decorative symbol, a selection screen for adjusting the volume or adjusting the brightness is displayed. It is displayed (FIG. 239 (B)). Then, by operating the dial operating unit 401 and operating the pressing operation unit 405 in a state where one of the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment is selected, a volume adjustment process (step 1122) and a brightness adjustment process (step S1123). Is executed to display an adjustment screen (see FIG. 239 (C)), to adjust the volume of the effect sound, or to set the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 to a desired brightness. (100% to 70%). In addition, as the LED whose brightness can be adjusted, only the LED of the game board 4 may be adjustable, only the LED of the door frame 5 may be adjustable, or any of the LED of the game board 4 and the LED of the door frame 5 may be used. May also be adjustable. In addition, the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight may be adjustable in addition to or separately from these.

  As shown in FIG. 239, in this example, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed at a position below the effect display device 1600 (gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900), and the decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner. Area (symbol display area) and a hold display area (first hold display areas 1600a to 1600d indicating the number of hold of the first special symbol, and second hold display areas 1600e to 1600h indicating the number of hold of the second special symbol) Is reduced as much as possible. In other words, the screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode avoids the area (symbol display area) where the decorative symbols are variably displayed and the reserved display area (so that the decorative pattern does not overlap with the symbol display area and the reserved display area). ) Is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 without obstructing the visual display of the change display of the decorative symbol. The display is not limited to the above as long as it does not hinder the visual recognition of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol. For example, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed so as not to overlap the reserved display area. On the other hand, a display (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed translucently on the front layer rather than the decorative pattern, so that it is displayed so as to overlap with the area where the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (design display area). The setting display may be configured so as not to hinder the visual display of the change display of the decorative pattern performed on the back of the screen for performing the setting mode.

  When the volume control is selected on the selection screen (FIG. 239 (B)), the volume control process (step S1122) is executed. In the volume adjustment process, seven scales 0 to 6 are displayed so as to correspond to the seven levels of the board volume. The board volume is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the display of the scales colored according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to grasp the substrate volume after the change as well as possible (FIG. 239 (C)). When the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated after the adjustment of the substrate volume, or when the non-operation period of the operation unit 400 reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the setting mode interrupt processing ends and the setting mode is performed. Hide the screen of. However, the board volume is usually adjusted immediately when the dial operation unit 401 is operated in the volume adjustment processing, and is reflected in the volume of music and sound effects. Thus, the volume of the board volume is confirmed not only by the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900), but also by listening to music and sound effects according to the changed volume. You can adjust while.

  When the brightness adjustment is selected on the selection screen, a brightness adjustment process (step S1123) is thereby performed. In the brightness adjustment process, the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is adjusted from 70% to 100% in 5% steps in seven steps so as to correspond to seven levels of brightness. A scale is displayed, and the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the display of the scale which is colored according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and after the change. Can be grasped. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 is operated in the brightness adjustment processing, the setting information of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is immediately rewritten, and the setting information of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed. This is reflected in the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate. Then, after adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated or the non-operation period of the operation unit 400 is set to a predetermined period (for example, 2). Seconds), the setting mode interrupt processing ends and the screen for performing the setting mode is hidden. In the brightness adjustment process, similarly to the volume adjustment process, usually, when the dial operation unit 401 is operated, the setting information of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is immediately rewritten. The brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is reflected in the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. While checking not only the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) but also the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and each decorative board of the game board 4 while actually confirming. Can be adjusted.

  During a period in which the demonstration display device 1600 (game-panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900) is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the pressing operation based on the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is performed. When the operation signal of the unit 405 is input to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in addition to adjusting the sub-volume value of the effect sound and the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, calendar information and A selection screen to which time information (other setting processing) and the like are added is displayed, and by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, calendar information, time information (other setting processing), and the like are re-created. It can be set (step 1124).

  As shown in FIG. 240, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, a pressing operation of the operation unit 400 is performed during a period in which the demonstration display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed. When the unit 405 is operated (FIG. 240 (A)), a setting mode interruption process is executed, and a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). As shown in FIG. 240 (B), a selection screen for selecting one of volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, calendar information, and time information is displayed. Then, by operating the dial operation unit 401 to operate the pressing operation unit 405 in a state where any one of the volume adjustment, the brightness adjustment, the calendar information, and the time information is selected, the volume adjustment processing ( Step 1122), brightness adjustment processing (step S1123), or other setting processing for resetting calendar information or time information (step S1124) is executed to adjust the volume of the effect sound (FIG. 240 (C)). ), Adjusting a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 to a desired luminance (100% to 70%), and re-reading calendar information, time information (other setting processing), and the like. It can be set.

  In addition, the display is performed based on the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 being operated during a period in which the demonstration display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed. The screen for performing the setting mode is different from the screen for performing the setting mode (position, size, etc.) which is displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the variable display of the decorative symbol. , Shape, color, transparency, etc.). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, during the standby state, the decorative symbols are not displayed, and a demonstration is performed by displaying a predetermined image so as to overlap the area in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed (symbol display area). Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the demonstration, the setting modes of the four selection screens of the volume adjustment, the brightness adjustment, the calendar information, and the time information, and the adjustment screen are changed. The screen for performing the display is enlarged in comparison with the display of the decorative pattern in a variable manner, and the center of the effect display device 1600 is overlapped with the area in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (design display area) or the area where the demonstration is performed. It is opaque so that it becomes a layer. Therefore, various adjustments and settings are performed in a state that is easier to see than during the variation display of the decorative symbols during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) in the customer waiting state. be able to. In this example, while the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed, a part of the demonstration is hidden by the screen for performing the setting mode. Demonstrations will be held behind. A screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 at least during the period in which the demonstration is being performed, and the operation unit 400 during the variation display of the decorative pattern. And a screen for performing a setting mode, which is displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, may be displayed in different modes (position, size, shape, color, transparency, and the like). While the decorative symbol is being changed or the big hit or the small hit is not being performed, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 stops the display of the change of the decorative symbol but has a hold memory (a change start waiting state). A screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation, and a state in which a large hit, a small hit, or a fluctuating display of a decorative pattern is stopped and no hold is stored. In a screen for setting the mode in which the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is displayed based on it is operated, it may be made different. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the demonstration, a screen for performing the setting mode may be displayed instead of the demonstration (after the demonstration is ended). While the screen for performing the mode is displayed, the demonstration cannot be visually recognized. This makes it easier to see the screen for performing the setting mode, and the setting mode can be operated without being distracted by the demonstration being performed behind. In addition, the display is performed based on the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 being operated during a period in which the demonstration display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed. The screen for performing the setting mode and the screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the variable display of the decorative pattern are displayed in different modes (position, size). , Shape, color, transparency, etc.). For example, during the variation display of the decorative pattern, the screen for performing the setting mode overlaps with the area where the decorative pattern is variable displayed (the pattern display area). A semi-transparent display is provided at a position (for example, the central portion of the effect display device 1600), and the effect display device 1600 (gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900) is in a customer waiting state. It may be in the period in which the demonstration by is being performed opaque displayed without varying the display position such a screen for setting mode.

  In addition, it is displayed based on the fact that the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period in which the demonstration display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed. The screen for performing the setting mode and the screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the variable display of the decorative pattern are displayed in different modes (position, size). , Shape, color, transparency, etc.) before and after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, until about 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the variable pattern command) Or just before the stop (several seconds before and after the decorative pattern confirmation display performed based on the reception of the special figure 1 tuning effect end command or the special figure 2 tuning effect end command) For example placing approximately 0.5 seconds before and after the display), etc.), also pushing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated may not display the screen for setting mode. Thereby, the screen for performing the setting mode before and after the start or stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol (decision display of the decorative symbol (stop of the variable symbol display of the special symbol)) is displayed in different modes, thereby preventing the player from being confused. can do.

  That is, basically (normally), based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the setting mode interrupt processing is executed to set the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). A screen for performing the mode is displayed. For example, a predetermined period (for example, a variation pattern command) including a start timing and a stop timing of the variation display of the decoration symbol (fixed display of the decoration symbol (stop of the variation display of the special symbol)). From the reception of the decorative pattern fluctuation display until about 0.5 second elapses, or the special figure 1 tuning effect end command or the special figure 2 tuning effect end command after receiving the decorative pattern When the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of about 1 second until 0.5 seconds elapse after the confirmation display of the setting mode, the setting mode interrupt processing is not executed. The display for performing the setting mode is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900), or the setting mode interruption processing is performed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. Even if executed, a screen for performing the setting mode may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900).

[25. Sound data creation processing]
The sound data creation processing will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and sets the pointer in the time-ordered sound command data constituting the sound generation schedule data. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads the sound generation schedule data (step S1131), and among the read schedule data, stores the sound command data indicated by the pointer in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150. It is extracted from the 4150ce and set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a (step S1132).

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a activates the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 13, and converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 4140a into the substrate volume 0-6. And the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value to or from the converted value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the value of the board volume is increased or decreased. Set. In the above-described sound data output process (step S1018), the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 so as to have the volume set to the board volume. By amplifying the amplified production sound to a serial volume and outputting it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 are amplified. Music and sound effects are played from the speakers provided.

  That is, when the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is turned or when the volume adjustment process (step 1122) is executed in the setting mode interruption process, the board volume is changed, and the board volume after the change is changed to the sub-volume. Set as a volume value. As a result, music and sound effects corresponding to the changed sub-volume value flow from the speakers contained in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided on the door frame 5.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU 4150a completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). Except for the above, the setting mode interrupting process is executed by operating the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operating unit 400, and when the volume is adjusted by the setting mode interrupting process, the sound data creating process is performed. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is converted into seven levels of the board volume 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the compressed voltage from an analog value to a digital value. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value to or from this converted value in accordance with the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the value of the board volume is increased or decreased. By setting the board volume, the sub-volume value of the production sound can be adjusted.

[26. Volume control suitable realization effect]
Next, a description will be given of an effect that provides a player with a specific period in which the sound volume can be appropriately adjusted. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example has a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU 4150a ends the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). ) Or a special symbol display (upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186) for a fixed period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) In the peripheral control MPU 4150a, from the reception of the fluctuation pattern command until the elapse of 0.5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command or the special figure 2 tuning effect end command. Is received until 0.5 seconds elapse after the decorative pattern is confirmed), the volume of the effect sound can be adjusted. . However, when a variable effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is continuously executed, the volume of the effect sound cannot be adjusted by paying attention to the variable effect, and the volume of the effect sound is adjusted. I had lost the timing to do it. Therefore, the player feels uncomfortable that the volume is too high, or feels stress such as lack of excitement because the volume is too low, and plays the game for a long time due to excessive fatigue. Since it is difficult to play the game, there is a possibility that the game may be stopped or the player may be repelled from tired memory, and the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, the above-described problem is solved by providing a timing for adjusting the volume of the effect sound to the player. Specifically, after the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600 (the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900), the effect sound is suppressed (the sound is changed to a predetermined level or less (for example, volume 2 or less). After that, a specific period for displaying a message notifying the player that the volume can be suitably adjusted can be provided, and then a fluctuating effect is performed to decorate the display. The display result of the symbol variation display is derived and displayed. An example of an effect for providing a specific period will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 244. Note that the specific period may be provided during the change every time a predetermined number of changes are performed, or may be provided during the change at an appropriate probability by lottery. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, the specific period is provided by lottery (a fluctuation pattern for performing an effect of providing a player with a specific period in which the volume can be suitably adjusted in the fluctuation pattern selection determination process is selected). The probability that the specific period is provided (the probability that the fluctuation pattern for performing the effect of providing the player with the specific period in which the adjustment of the sound volume can be suitably realized in the fluctuation pattern selection determination process is selected) is It is set to be higher than the reach probability (probability of executing the reach effect in the decorative display of the variable design: about 10%) (about 20% in this example). Therefore, a specific period is provided at a high rate before the important reach production is performed as the expectation production, and the volume is adjusted, and then the reach production is performed at the volume desired by the player, so that the entertainment Reduction can be suppressed. Further, in this example, a period of about 5 seconds is provided as the specific period, and is longer than the period until the screen for performing the setting mode is not displayed (2 seconds as the non-operation period of the operation unit 400). Therefore, the volume and brightness can be adjusted with a margin.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a starts a fluctuating display of a decorative symbol based on the fluctuating pattern when a fluctuating pattern for performing an effect of providing a player with a specific period in which the sound volume can be appropriately adjusted is selected. A preview effect is executed based on the result of the preview lottery (FIG. 242 (A)), and when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern, the volume of the production sound is suppressed (for example, the volume of the production sound is reduced). The control for suppressing the sound volume from 6 to 2 or less, silencing the volume of the effect sound, and the like, and causing the effect display device 1600 to display "a period suitable for adjusting the volume" is executed over a specific period (FIG. 242). (B)). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, by displaying “Now it is a period suitable for volume control” on the effect display device 1600 during a specific period, the player is notified that the timing of volume control has been given. Although configured as described above, such display may not be performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the effects to be executed during the specific period are also limited, so that the notice effect and the reach effect are not performed, and only the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed. (FIG. 242 (B)). In this way, not only the sound volume of the production sound is suppressed, but also the appearance of the production is restricted (suppressed), so that a suitable opportunity is provided as a timing of the volume adjustment, and the player can control the volume without being distracted by the production. Can be adjusted. Also, in this example, the screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed on the layer in front of the character displayed as the notice effect, overlapping the area where the characters and the like are displayed as the notice effect. By not performing the notice effect during the specific period, the visual notice of the notice effect is not hindered. It should be noted that the screen for performing the setting mode (selection screen, adjustment screen) may not be overlapped with the area where characters and the like are displayed as a notice effect, or the screen for performing the translucent setting mode (selection screen). , Adjustment screen) may be displayed as a notice effect so as to overlap the front layer of the area where characters and the like are displayed. In this case, the operation unit 400 is operated during a period other than the specific period to set the setting mode. It is possible not to disturb the visual recognition of the notice effect even when a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the display is displayed. Also, during the specific period, the number of effects performed and the number of displayed characters are suppressed (limited) compared to periods other than the specific period in the fluctuation, so that a plurality of effects are executed or a plurality of characters are displayed. It may be changed from a lively state such as being displayed to a lonely state where little effect is performed or only the background image is displayed without displaying any characters, and in this case, the display is changed and displayed It is possible not to display the decorative design, the image related to the variable display of the decorative design, and the like. As a result, it is possible to provide a more suitable opportunity as the timing of volume adjustment. In addition, even during the specific period, a specific expectation effect among the expectation effects that enhances the expectation of the jackpot (for example, a mode (color, shape, and the like) different from a normal low expectation effect in a speech notice displaying a serif In the case of executing a high expectation effect in which a line is displayed, or in the case of executing a high expectation effect in which a hold display is performed in a mode (color, shape) different from a normal low expectation effect in a hold notice), etc. It may not be suppressed. Thereby, while giving the player the timing of the sound volume adjustment, the required effect among the expected degree effects is executed without being suppressed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment. Note that a specific background image (for example, an image of the same color or the like) may be displayed instead of the background image during the specific period. Is almost not performed, it is possible to provide a suitable opportunity as a timing of volume adjustment.

  Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the specific period in which the volume of the production sound is suppressed (silenced) (FIG. 242 (B)), the production display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device) 1900), a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed (FIG. 242 (C)). By selecting the volume adjustment on this selection screen, the volume of the effect sound can be adjusted (FIG. 243 (D)). Then, when the specific period ends, the peripheral control MPU 4150a continuously executes the variable effect and derives and displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (FIG. 243 (E)).

  As shown in FIG. 244 (A), even when the volume of the effect sound is changed by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the specific period, the volume after the change is changed. Is not immediately reflected on the volume of the effect sound A output in connection with the currently displayed decorative symbol fluctuation display, but is not immediately reflected in the effect sound A when the specific period ends and the sound volume of the effect sound is restored from the suppressed state. And the effect sound A corresponding to the volume after the change flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. That is, even if the volume of the effect sound is changed during the specific period, the effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume is provided in the main body frame 3 while the volume of the effect sound A is suppressed during the specific period. When returning from the state where the sound of the effect sound A is suppressed after the specific period ends without outputting from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, a change in the volume during the specific period And the effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume is output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Thus, the effect sound output during the specific period does not distract, and the user can concentrate on the operation in the setting mode.

  On the other hand, although the sound is not output in connection with the change display of the decorative pattern being executed, it is not related to a specific effect (a pre-reading notice effect such as a reservation notice) or a specific operation (operation of the operation unit 400). A specific sound to be output (for example, a “picone” that is output when the hold display is performed in a shape other than the normal round shape in the look-ahead notice effect, or a “pic” that is output when the operation unit 400 is operated For example, when the volume of the effect sound is changed by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the specific period, the changed volume is immediately reflected in the output of the specific sound. Thus, regardless of whether or not during the specific period, that is, even during the specific period, the specific sound corresponding to the changed volume is stored in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. To It is output from only the speaker. In addition, the hold display may be performed on the effect display device 1600 during the specific period. In this case, when the hold display different from the normal display is performed according to the result of the prefetch lottery, the display is changed during the specific period. The specific sound corresponding to the volume may be output from a speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 and a speaker provided on the door frame 5. In this manner, even for a specific sound that is output in connection with a specific effect or a specific operation necessary for executing the expectation notification or the like even during the specific period, even if the volume of the effect sound is suppressed. Since the specific sound can be output immediately after the change in volume by reflecting the change in volume, it is necessary to suppress the volume etc. for specific effects and specific operations while giving the volume adjustment timing to the player It is possible to notify the player by executing without executing, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, even if the volume of the effect sound is changed during the specific period, the effect sound A is suppressed until the end of the specific period, and the effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume is stored in the main unit. Since the sound is not output from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided on the frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5, when the volume of the effect sound is changed during the specific period, the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display) is used. The volume is determined from the scale displayed on the device 1900). Note that the auxiliary sound may be generated by operating the operation unit 400 even during the specific period in which the volume of the effect sound is suppressed. For example, when adjusting the volume of the production sound during a specific period, if the volume of the production sound is changed by rotating the dial operation unit 401 (when the volume scale (barometer) increases or decreases), the changed volume is used. (For example, “beep”) may be output from a speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and a speaker provided in the door frame 5. Thus, even during the period in which the volume of the effect sound is suppressed, the effect display device 1600 outputs the auxiliary sound that assists the volume adjustment when rotating the dial operation unit 401 to change the volume of the effect sound. The adjustment can be made while actually listening to and confirming the auxiliary sound corresponding to the changed volume as well as the scale displayed on the (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode by operating the operation unit 400 at an arbitrary timing during the specific period in which the volume of the production sound is suppressed is produced. By displaying on the display device 1600 and further rotating the dial operation unit 401, the scale display of the adjustment screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be changed to adjust the volume of the effect sound.

  In addition, during the specific period, in addition to suppressing the volume of the production sound, a light emitting unit (a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 in this example) provided on the door frame 5 and a function display Excludes the plurality of LEDs of the unit 1180, and restricts (suppresses) the effect of the light emitting means provided on the game board 4 (in this example, the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4). Is also good. That is, during the specific period, the light emission, the light emission color, the number of blinks, the lighting pattern, the luminance, and the like by the light emitting means provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are limited (suppressed) as compared with the period other than the specific period in the fluctuation. By changing from a dazzling and lively state in which the light emitting means frequently flashes with high brightness to a dim and calm state in which the lighting state with low brightness (it may be turned off) is maintained. Is also good. In this way, not only the effect sound is suppressed but also the effect by the light emitting means is restricted (suppressed), so that a more suitable timing is provided as a timing of volume control, and the player can adjust the volume without being confused by the effect. Can be performed.

  Further, in the above example, the probability that the specific period is provided (the probability that the variation pattern for performing the effect of providing the player with the specific period in which the adjustment of the volume can be appropriately realized in the variation pattern selection determination process is selected) is determined. Although it is set to be higher than the reach probability, the probability that a specific period is provided may be set to be lower than the reach probability, so that the specific period is provided with rarity and the specific period is provided In this case, if the volume is not adjusted within this specific period, the emotion that the reach effect will be executed before adjusting to the desired volume can be given, so that the volume adjustment operation can be promoted.

  Further, the variation pattern for performing the effect of providing the player with the specific period may be selected not only when the result of the special lottery is unsuccessful, but also when a large hit or a small hit occurs. That is, when the result of the special lottery is out of order in the special symbol big hit determination process, the specific period is provided to the player in the outlier variation selection information state table set when the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern selection determination process. Set the fluctuation pattern to execute the effect to perform, and if the special lottery result is a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol big hit judgment processing, the big hit set when the fluctuation pattern is determined by the fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing You may make it set the fluctuation pattern which performs the effect which provides a specific period to a player in the fluctuation selection information type table. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to the provision of the specific period for the player who has already completed the volume adjustment. In addition, when the variation pattern for performing the effect of providing the player with the specific period is executed, the bigger hit rate is higher than when the variation pattern is not executed. The expectation of the jackpot of the fluctuation pattern for executing the effect provided to the user may be set high. In this case, in addition to giving an opportunity to adjust the volume when a specific period is provided, the expectation of the jackpot may be increased. Therefore, even if a specific period is provided to not only a player who has not yet adjusted the volume but also a player who has already adjusted the volume, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest. The main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not to provide a specific period (selects a variation pattern for performing an effect of providing a player with a specific period in which the volume can be suitably adjusted in the variation pattern selection determination process). The lottery is performed based on the variation pattern command received by the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform an effect that provides a specific period. An effect of providing a specific period may be executed during the variable display based on the display. In this case, similarly to the example described above, the specific period is set so that the probability of a big hit becomes higher when the effect providing the specific period is executed than when the effect providing the specific period is not executed. The appearance probability of the effect to be provided may be set, and the execution probability (appearance probability) of the effect to provide the specific period is the reach probability (the probability of executing the reach effect with the variable display of the decorative pattern: about 10%). It may be set to be higher than this (about 20% in this example).

[27. Brightness adjustment suitable realization effect]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example can adjust not only the volume of the effect sound during the variation display of the decorative pattern but also the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. It has been. In the above example, the specific period is provided to provide the player with a period in which the effect sound can be suitably adjusted. However, in addition to the above or separately from the above, the door frame 5 or the game board 4 may be provided as a specific period. A period in which the adjustment of the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration substrate can be suitably realized may be provided to the player. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 246.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a performs an effect of providing an effect to provide a player with a specific period in which the adjustment of the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the decorative boards of the game board 4 can be suitably realized. When the pattern is selected, when the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is started based on the variation pattern, a preview effect is executed based on the result of the preliminary lottery (FIG. 245 (A)), and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. When a predetermined period has elapsed since then, the sound volume of the effect sound is suppressed (for example, the sound volume of the effect sound is suppressed from 6 to 1, or the effect sound is silenced, etc.), and the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are also provided. (For example, the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is suppressed to 50% or less, or the brightness of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 A plurality of decorative substrates Etc. to turn off the ED), run over a specified period control to display the "I'm home of sound and duration suitable brightness adjustment" to the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 245 (B)). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, during the specific period, the effect display device 1600 displays “Now it is a period suitable for adjusting the volume and brightness” to provide the player with the volume adjustment of the effect sound and the door frame 5 or the like. Although it is configured to notify that the timing of adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 has been provided, such display may not be performed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, the effect performed during the specific period is restricted (FIG. 245 (B)). As described above, during the specific period, the number of effects performed and the number of characters to be displayed are suppressed (restricted) during the period other than the period other than the specific period. In addition to changing from a lively state in which a character is displayed or the like to a lonely state in which an effect is hardly performed or a character is hardly displayed, in addition to being provided on a door frame 5 or on each decorative board of the game board 4, By suppressing the brightness of the plurality of LEDs, it is possible to provide a suitable opportunity as the timing of adjusting the volume of the effect sound and adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. . In the same manner as in the example described above, a specific expectation effect among the expectation effects that enhances the expectation of the jackpot even during the specific period (for example, a mode different from a normal low expectation effect in a speech notice displaying a serif) When performing a high expectation effect in which words are displayed in (color, shape, etc.), or executing a high expectation effect in which a hold display is performed in a different form (color, shape) from a normal low expectation effect in a suspension notice For example) may not be suppressed. Thus, while giving the volume of the production sound and the timing of adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 to the player, the necessary production out of the expectation production is suppressed. Since the game is executed without performing the game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a specific period in which the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is suppressed (FIG. 245 (B)). Then, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) (FIG. 245 (C)). By selecting the brightness adjustment of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 on this selection screen, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is adjusted. (FIG. 246 (D)). When the specific period ends, the peripheral control MPU 4150a continuously executes the variable effect and derives and displays the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (FIG. 246 (E)).

  As shown in FIG. 244 (B), a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during a specific period. Even if the brightness of the door frame is changed, the brightness after the change is not immediately reflected on the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 or the decorative boards of the game board 4 and the specific period ends and the door frame is closed. 5 is provided on the door frame 5 or on each decorative board of the game board 4 in accordance with the changed brightness, when reflected from a state in which the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 is suppressed. A plurality of LEDs emit light. That is, even if the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is changed during the specific period, the state in which the brightness is suppressed continues during the specific period according to the changed brightness. Therefore, a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are not caused to emit light. Then, when the specific period is completed and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is restored from the suppressed state, the changed brightness is reflected on the changed brightness. Accordingly, a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 emit light.

  In addition, even during the specific period, the specific degree of expectation to increase the degree of expectation of the jackpot is a specific degree of expectation effect (for example, the specific light emitting means is determined to be normal based on the decision to perform a hold notice in a prefetch lottery). Is used to emit light with a different emission color, or when performing a high expectation effect in which words are displayed in a mode (color, shape, etc.) different from a normal low expectation effect in a speech notice that displays words, etc.) It may not be suppressed. Thus, while giving the player the timing of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment, the light emission effect related to the required effect among the light emission effects performed in connection with the expectation effect is executed without being suppressed. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in entertainment interest.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, even if the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed during the specific period, the plurality of LEDs remain until the specific period ends. Since the brightness is suppressed and the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the respective decorative boards of the game board 4 are not illuminated with the changed brightness, the plurality of LEDs are provided on the respective decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 during a specific period. When changing the brightness of the plurality of LEDs, the volume is determined from the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). In addition, even during a specific period in which the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is suppressed, the operation of the operation unit 400 allows the specific LED among the plurality of LEDs to be controlled. The auxiliary LEDs other than the plurality of LEDs may emit light for a predetermined period (for example, about 2 seconds) according to the changed luminance. For example, when adjusting the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 during the specific period, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to operate each decoration of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. When the luminance of a plurality of LEDs provided on the substrate is changed (when the luminance scale (barometer) increases or decreases), a specific LED or an auxiliary LED may emit light for a predetermined period according to the changed luminance. Good. Thereby, even during the period in which the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is suppressed, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to operate each decoration of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. When changing the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the substrate, the LEDs for assisting the brightness adjustment are made to emit light, so that not only the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) but also the changed brightness is displayed. Can be adjusted while visually confirming the light emission corresponding to.

  In the above example, when the volume of the effect sound or the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is changed during the specific period, the changed volume is maintained until the specific period ends. Of the effect sound A according to the above, is not output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, and each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed in luminance. Although a plurality of LEDs provided in the above are not turned on, a sound effect according to the volume already set without changing the changed volume or volume before the specific period elapses according to the specific operation. A can be output from a speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 and a speaker provided on the door frame 5, and a plurality of A can be provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with the changed luminance. LE It may be made possible emit.

  For example, separately from the operation unit 400 (button for effect) used in the effect, the sub-volume value of the effect sound and the brightness (light amount) of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are determined. A cross for adjusting the volume level by operating a dedicated operation unit (for example, operating the vertical direction (volume adjustment button)) and adjusting the light intensity (luminance) by operating the horizontal direction (light intensity (luminance) adjustment button) Key-type operation unit, etc.), and when the volume is changed during the specific period as shown in FIG. 247 (A), unless the operation unit 400 as the effect button is operated, the effect corresponding to the changed volume While the sound A can be output from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 after the specific period, the volume of the sound A is reduced during the specific period as shown in FIG. When the operation unit 400 as a production button is operated in this case, the effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume is produced at the time when the operation unit 400 is operated (operation timing of the operation unit 400). The output may be made possible from the speaker housed in the 920 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5 (so long as the output is possible, the output may not actually be output until after a specific period). Thereby, while performing the effect of providing the player with a specific period in which the adjustment of the sound volume of the effect sound can be suitably realized, the player after adjusting the volume or who does not need to adjust the volume can operate the operation unit as an effect button. A state in which the operation sound 400 can be output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 in accordance with the sound volume after the change or the already set volume. Can be restored. In addition, the specific period is executed as a period of the effect using the operation unit 400 as the effect button (more specifically, by operating the operation unit 400 as the effect using the operation unit 400, the expected hit during the change is expected. During the performance by the operation unit 400 (during a specific period), the player operates the brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button) different from the operation unit 400 during the performance (during the specific period). ), When the volume is adjusted, by operating the operation unit 400 after the adjustment, the effect of notifying the expected degree effect or the hit result executed by the operation of the operation unit 400 is performed during the specific period in which the volume is suppressed. Also, since the volume after the adjustment is immediately reflected, the game desired by the player is realized. Also, when the volume control operation section (cross key; volume control button) is operated, seven scales 0 to 6 corresponding to the seven levels of board volume are displayed and set in the same manner as in the above example. The displayed volume is displayed in a color-coded manner so that it can be determined. When the non-operation period of the volume control operation section (cross key; volume control button) reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the setting mode interrupt processing ends and the display of the volume scale and the like is not displayed. Become. Then, as the specific period, a period (for example, 5 seconds) longer than a period until the volume scale or the like is not displayed (2 seconds as a non-operation period of the volume control operation unit (cross key; volume control button)). When the effect using the operation unit 400 is executed over the period of time), the volume of the volume is changed by operating the volume control operation unit (cross key; volume control button) during the specific period, and then the volume scale is not displayed. By operating the operation unit 400 after waiting for the display, the effect sound corresponding to the changed volume can be output from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided on the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided on the door frame 5. Can be returned to the normal state, so that the effect performed after the operation of the operation unit 400 in the effect using the operation unit 400 can be executed without being disturbed by the display of the volume scale or the like. It can, can suppress the lowering of the game interest.

  Similarly, when the luminance of a plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative frames of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed during the specific period, the operation unit 400 as the effect button is not operated unless the change is performed after the specific period. A plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can emit light with the brightness, and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 during a specific period can be reduced. When the operation unit 400 as a production button is operated in a case where the operation unit 400 is changed, a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 emit light when the operation unit 400 is operated (operation timing of the operation unit 400). The light emission may be enabled (the light emission may be performed as long as the light emission is enabled, and the light emission may not actually be performed until after a specific period). Thereby, while performing an effect of providing a player with a specific period in which the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be suitably adjusted, the door frame 5 and the game After adjusting the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the board 4 or a player who does not need to adjust the brightness, the player operates the operation unit 400 as a production button to change the brightness or the already set brightness. A plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be returned to a state in which light can be emitted. In addition, the specific period is executed as a period of the effect using the operation unit 400 as the effect button (more specifically, by operating the operation unit 400 as the effect using the operation unit 400, the expected hit during the change is expected. During the performance by the operation unit 400 (during a specific period), the player operates the brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button) different from the operation unit 400 during the performance (during the specific period). In the case where the luminance is adjusted in the step (1), by operating the operation unit 400 after the adjustment, the expectation effect performed by the operation of the operation unit 400 and the effect of notifying the result of the hit are performed during the specific period in which the luminance is suppressed. Also, since the adjusted brightness is immediately reflected, the game desired by the player is realized. In addition, when the operation unit for brightness adjustment (cross key; brightness adjustment button) is operated, seven scales and the like are displayed and set so as to correspond to seven levels of brightness similarly to the above-described example. The display is color-coded so that the luminance can be determined. When the non-operation period of the luminance adjustment operation unit (cross key; luminance adjustment button) reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the setting mode interrupt processing ends and the luminance scale is displayed. Become. As the specific period, a period (for example, 5 seconds) longer than a period until the luminance scale or the like is not displayed (2 seconds as a non-operation period of the luminance adjustment operation unit (cross key; luminance adjustment button)). In the case where an effect using the operation unit 400 is performed over the period, the luminance is changed by operating the luminance adjustment operation unit (cross key; luminance adjustment button) during the specific period, and then the luminance scale is not displayed. After waiting for the display, the operation operation unit 400 can be operated to return to the state in which the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can emit light with the changed luminance. In addition, in the effect using the operation unit 400, an effect that is performed after the operation of the operation unit 400 can be executed without being disturbed by the display of the luminance scale or the like, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

[28. Volume / brightness adjustment at the time of high importance notification such as high expectation effect]
In the above-described example, the one that provides the player with the specific period in which the adjustment of the volume and the luminance can be preferably realized is described. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example does not provide the volume and the brightness even when such a specific period is not provided. The brightness can be adjusted. Therefore, a non-preferred period in which it is difficult to appropriately adjust the volume and the luminance by performing a high-priority notification such as a high expectation effect (such as a high-reliability effect where a reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, etc. In some cases, the volume and brightness may be adjusted even during the period in which the effect sound is output at a high volume, or during the period when a plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are blinking at high brightness. . In this example, even when the volume and brightness are adjusted during the non-preferred period, the notification with high importance performed during the non-preferred period is not disturbed.

  Specifically, in the case where the peripheral control MPU 4150a variably displays a decorative pattern to execute a reach effect based on a change pattern for executing a reach effect with a high degree of expectation, the effect sound is adjusted by the player to the volume. (In this example, the volume 6 is the maximum volume. However, the volume is not limited to the maximum volume, but may be any volume that can be louder than other reach effects. May be the maximum value of the volume of the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a, or the maximum value of the range of the sound volume of the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP used in the gaming machine.) Or some (all predetermined LEDs among a plurality of LEDs) or all of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 or the game board 4. The LED is set to a high luminance (100% of the maximum luminance in this example, which is not dependent on the luminance adjusted by the player. However, the luminance is not limited to the maximum luminance, but may be higher than other reach effects or the like). Note that the maximum luminance may be the maximum value of the luminance of the LED, or may be the maximum value of the luminance range of the LED used in the gaming machine. By performing one or both of the light emission and the light emission, a non-preferred period in which it is difficult to suitably adjust the volume and the luminance is achieved. However, even during this non-preferred period, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode on the effect display device 1600 (gaming board side liquid crystal display device 1900). ) Is displayed, and it becomes possible to adjust the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4.

  For example, when the volume of the effect sound is changed from volume 3 to volume 2 during the above-mentioned non-preferred period, the changed volume is related to the change display of the decorative pattern being executed as shown in FIG. Is not immediately reflected in the volume of the production sound A, and is reflected in the output of the production sound A when the non-preferred period ends and the volume of the production sound is returned from the maximum volume (volume 6). The effect sound A corresponding to the volume 2 which is the volume of the sound from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 come to flow. That is, even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the non-preferred period to change the volume of the produced sound, the output of the produced sound A at the maximum volume is continued during the non-preferred period, and the produced sound is ended after the non-preferred period is over. When returning the volume of A from the maximum volume (volume 6), the effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume (volume 2 in this example) is provided in the main body frame 3 by reflecting the volume change during the non-preferred period. The speaker housed in the speaker box 920 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 output the sound.

  In addition, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 is changed from 80% to 70% during the non-preferred period, the brightness is changed as shown in FIG. 248 (A). The subsequent brightness is not immediately reflected, but is reflected and changed when the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is returned from the maximum brightness (100%) after the non-preferred period ends. A plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 emit light according to the later luminance of 70%. That is, even when the operation unit 400 is operated during the non-preferred period to change the luminance of the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the decorative boards of the game board 4, the door frame 5 at the maximum luminance during the non-preferred period. And a part of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 (a predetermined LED among the plurality of LEDs) or all the LEDs continue to emit light, and the non-preferred period ends. When the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is returned from the maximum brightness (100%), the brightness after the change (this (In the example, 70%), a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 emit light.

  As described above, when the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are changed during the non-preferred period, the volume and the brightness are changed after the end of the non-preferred period. In order to reflect the change of the sound, the adjustment of the volume of the production sound by the player and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the respective decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are received (while the adjustment is enabled). The effects performed during the suitable period, important information, and the like (in this example, the reach effect with a high degree of expectation) can be executed without being suppressed, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  For the specific sound, when the volume of the effect sound is changed by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the non-preferred period, the changed volume is immediately reflected in the output of the specific sound. The speaker and the door, which are stored in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 regardless of whether or not during the non-preferred period, that is, even during the non-preferred period, the specific sound corresponding to the changed volume. Although it is configured to be output from the speaker provided in the frame 5, it is not suitable to change to the maximum volume during the non-preferred period and to change the volume of the produced sound during the non-preferred period similarly to the effect sound A. If the specific sound is output at the maximum volume during the period and the non-preferred period ends and the volume of the specific sound is returned from the maximum volume, the volume is changed to reflect the change in volume during the non-preferred period Specific sound according to the volume after May be changed to a state which is output from the speaker provided to the speaker and the door frame 5 is housed in a speaker box 920 provided in the.

  In the example described above, a reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed as a non-preferred period, and a sound effect is output at a large volume, or a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with high brightness. Although the blinking period is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a period in which a special sound such as a theme song is output at a high volume after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, or a theme song or the like in a big hit game state. The period in which the special sound is output at a large volume may be obtained. If the volume of the production sound or the brightness of a plurality of LEDs is adjusted during the period in which the special sound is output at a high volume, the reach production with the high expectation described above is performed. May be executed in the same manner as in the case where the adjustment is performed during the period in which is executed. That is, when the volume of the production sound or the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is adjusted within a predetermined period after the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or during a predetermined period during which a special sound such as a theme song during a jackpot game state is output at a large volume. The speaker and the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 with the effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume after a lapse of a predetermined period without immediately reflecting the changed volume and the changed brightness. The output is made from a speaker provided on the door frame 5 and a plurality of LEDs provided on each of the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 emit light according to the changed luminance. In this case as well, while accepting the adjustment of the volume of the effect sound by the player and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 (while allowing the adjustment), during the non-preferred period (For example, reach production with a high degree of expectation in this example) can be executed without suppression, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Also, similarly to the above-described volume control suitable realization effect and brightness control preferable realization effect, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the non-preferred period, the effect display device 1600 (the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). ), A screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed. By selecting the brightness adjustment of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 on this selection screen, the door is opened. The brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted. Also in this case, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the highly important notification content performed by the effect display device 1600. . Specifically, a screen (selection screen, a selection screen, or the like) for performing a setting mode at a position (for example, near the end of the display area, etc.) that is not affected by an important display related to the effect or game performed on the effect display device 1600. Adjustment screen) and screens for setting mode (selection screen, adjustment screen) are displayed semi-transparently at the position where important displays related to productions and games are placed. It does not hinder the visual recognition of various displays. Thereby, while receiving the adjustment of the volume of the production sound by the player and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 (while enabling the adjustment), during the non-preferred period, The effect to be executed, important information, and the like (in this example, a reach effect with a high degree of expectation) can be displayed in a manner that the player can recognize. In addition, the volume and brightness are displayed in a scale on the adjustment screen, and when the volume and brightness are adjusted by operating the operation unit 400, the scale display is changed to correspond to the adjusted volume and brightness. The volume and brightness can be adjusted with reference to the scale display even in an unsuitable period in which the LED is output and the LED emits light with high brightness.

[29. Pseudo-run determination effect]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, after the display of the decoration symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped), the pseudo-continuous variation (pseudo-series; temporary stop and re-variation of the display of the variation of the decoration symbol) is performed again. Is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, and then stopped (variable display). In addition, since the pseudo-ren is set to have a higher degree of expectation of the big hit than the normal fluctuation display, the player executes the game while expecting the occurrence of the pseudo-ren. However, since the pseudo-ren performs an effect similar to the case where the normal fluctuation display is continuous, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the pseudo-ren is being executed or the normal fluctuation display is being executed. There is. In this example, the above problem is solved. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (A), when the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed twice consecutively, a prohibition period is provided at each of the start and the stop of the variable display performed twice. . Therefore, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed twice consecutively, the prohibition period is provided four times in total.

  On the other hand, the display of the change of the decorative symbol is executed only once, and when the display of the change is a pseudo-run in which the temporary stop and the re-change are performed once each, the process is shown in FIG. As described above, the prohibition period is provided at each of the start and the stop of the change display of the decorative symbol, and the prohibition period is not provided at the time of the temporary stop and the re-change. For this reason, in the case where the pseudo-run is executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol, no matter how many times the temporary stop and the re-variation are performed, the prohibition period is provided only twice.

  In this example, when the operation unit 400 is operated, specific image information (for example, character information or a character) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period (for example, 5 seconds). However, before and after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern (for example, about 1 second from when the fluctuation pattern command is received until about 0.5 seconds elapse after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern) and stop (fixed stop (fixed display) ), End of the fluctuation effect) Immediately (from the reception of the special figure 1 tuning effect ending command or the special figure 2 tuning effect ending command to the lapse of several seconds (for example, about 0.5 seconds) after confirmation display of the decorative pattern) Second or the like) is a prohibition period during which the reception of the operation of the operation unit 400 is prohibited. During this prohibition period, the specific image information being displayed is not displayed and the operation unit 400 is operated. Also, the effect display device 1600 is prevented from displaying specific image information.

  Thereby, the operation unit 400 is operated before and after the stop (fixed stop or temporary stop) of the decorative symbol or before or after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol or the re-change in the decorative symbol variable display executed by the effect display device 1600. This allows the player to determine whether the pseudo-run is being performed (whether the pseudo-run is continuing) or whether the normal fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is to be continuously performed. That is, when the normal change display of the decorative symbol is executed twice consecutively, the operation of the operation unit 400 is prohibited before and after the stop display (fixed display) of the decorative symbol and before and after the start of the second variable display. Since a period is provided, the specific image information is not displayed when the specific image information is already displayed, and the specific image information is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the prohibition period. On the other hand, when the pseudo-run is being executed (when the pseudo-run is continuing), the prohibition period is set before and after the stop display of the decorative symbol (before and after the temporary stop) and before and after the start of the change display of the decorative symbol (before and after the re-change). When the operation unit 400 is operated before and after the temporary stop or before and after the temporary stop or before the change, the specific image information is not displayed. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that it can be easily determined that the pseudo-run is being executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prohibition period in which the operation of the operation unit 400 is prohibited before and after the start and the stop (fixed display) of the variable display is provided, and the operation of the operation unit 400 other than the prohibition period is received. When the operation unit 400 is operated during the allowable period for allowing the display, the specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the decorative symbol fluctuated and displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops, the pseudo image is displayed. It is possible to easily determine whether the temporary stop is continuously performed or the normal change display is stopped (fixed display). With this, when it is determined that the pseudo-run is being performed, the expectation of the big hit is increased and attention is paid to the fluctuation display, so that a decrease in the gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the specific image information displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the operation unit 400 is displayed so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the decorative symbol change display executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, specific image information is displayed at a position that is not affected by the decorative design change display (for example, near the end of the display area, etc.), or a position where the specific image information is subjected to the decorative design change display (this In the example, semi-transparent display is performed in the vicinity of the center of the display area or the like, so that the visual display of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not hindered. Thereby, while enabling determination of whether or not a pseudo-sequence according to whether or not specific image information is displayed, it is possible to variably display the decorative pattern without hindering the visual recognition by the specific image information, A decline in entertainment interest can be suppressed. In addition, it may be displayed so as to obstruct the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative symbol at a position where the variable symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed. In this case, the pseudo ream is executed because the visual recognition of the specific image information becomes easy. It is easy to determine whether or not the user is present.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, when the operation unit 400 is operated, specific image information is displayed for about 5 seconds as a fixed period. In addition, since the above-described prohibition period is about one second, if the specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the operation unit 400 during the permissible period immediately before the prohibition period, a specific Although the image information is not displayed, the specific image information is displayed again after the prohibition period even if the operation unit 400 is not operated. Therefore, the operation unit 400 can be operated with a margin with respect to the end timing of the fluctuation effect, and it is easy to determine whether or not the pseudo-run is performed. Further, in the variable effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after being displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period, and thereafter, the final display is performed based on the reception of the special figure 1 tuning effect end command or the special figure 2 tuning effect end command. Therefore, when the operation unit 400 is operated during a period from the temporary stop of the decorative pattern to the reception of the special figure 1 tuning effect end command or the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the decorative pattern is displayed and confirmed and displayed based on the reception of the special figure 1 tuning effect end command or the special figure 2 tuning effect end command, the specific image information displayed on the effect display device 1600 is hidden. . That is, when determining whether or not a pseudo-run is performed, the operation unit 400 may be operated in accordance with the temporary stop of the decorative symbol or when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the user from continuously operating the operation unit 400 unnecessarily during the change display of the decorative symbol without grasping the operation timing of the operation 400. In addition, since the specific image information is displayed for about 5 seconds, the variable display of the decorative symbol according to two or more starting winnings is continuously performed (normal (non-pseudo consecutive)). In the case where the variable display is continuously performed), the specific image information displayed immediately before the fixed display of the decorative symbol is temporarily hidden, and then the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the next start winning is performed. After the start, it is displayed again without operating the operation unit 400. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display other than the last variable display of the pseudo series, the specific image information displayed immediately before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is used to start the next variable display in the pseudo series. Displayed continuously until later. As described above, in the variable display other than the last variable display of the pseudo series, the specific image information is continuously displayed until after the start of the next variable display in the pseudo series, and the normal (non-pseudo series) variable display is continuously performed. In this case, the specific image information is temporarily hidden and then displayed again without operating the operation unit 400 after the start of the next variable display. Can be reliably determined. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example displays specific image information in different modes (position, size, shape, color, transparency, etc.) during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 and other times. Therefore, the specific image information displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the operation unit 400 during the demonstration is displayed in a mode different from that before the prohibition period after the prohibition period in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Become like In this way, by hiding specific image information displayed during the demonstration or by switching to a different mode, the player recognizes that the variable display of the decorative symbol has started or has started. I can do it. In addition, a predetermined period including the start timing and the stop timing of the variation display of the decorative pattern (for example, a period of about 1 second from the reception of the variation pattern command to the elapse of 0.5 seconds after the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern, When the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of about one second from when the special figure 1 synchronizing effect ending command or the special figure 2 synchronizing effect ending command is received to when 0.5 seconds elapse after the display of the decorative symbol is confirmed). May not display the screen for performing the setting mode, or if the screen for performing the setting mode is already displayed, do not display the screen for performing the setting mode during the period. (The display may be turned off). Accordingly, when the specific image information displayed during the demonstration switches to a different mode, the specific image information is temporarily hidden, so that the specific image information can be switched to another mode without a sense of incongruity. In the case where the specific image information is not displayed during the prohibition period, the specific image information may not be displayed again after the prohibition period. In this case, the specific image information displayed immediately before the prohibition period is not displayed again after the prohibition period even though a certain period (5 seconds in this example) has not elapsed, so that the decorative symbol is definitely displayed. It can be easily recognized.

  Further, in addition to displaying the specific image information in response to the operation of the operation unit 400, a specific sound (for example, “beep” output when the operation unit 400 is operated) is associated with the display of the specific image information. Also, an electronic sound such as an electronic sound or a sound corresponding to the motion of the character (for example, a sound such as “shooting” in response to an operation of the character 1601a injecting air into the balloon 1601b in FIGS. 250 to 251 described later) may be output. In this case as well, it is sufficient that the specific sound is not output during the prohibition period, and it is possible to determine whether or not the pseudo run is being performed (whether or not the pseudo run is continuing) based on whether or not the specific sound is output. Become.

  The prohibition period is provided in connection with the variable display of the decorative symbol. In other words, a prohibition period is always provided when a special lottery is performed after a start winning is generated. In addition, since different fluctuating times are set for each fluctuating pattern, the timing at which the fancy design is stopped and displayed after the fancy display of the fancy design is started, that is, the prohibition period occurs after the fluctuating display of the fancy design starts. The timing of the change is determined according to the content of the determination in the variation pattern selection determination processing. That is, the main control program executes the variation information number search process (step S394) based on the variation pattern selection value data table acquired in the process of step S390 of the variation pattern selection determination process, and obtains the result of the variation information number search process. A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern. A fluctuation time (a time from the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to the stop display) is set for each fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time is different for each fluctuation pattern. For example, a variation pattern in which a variation of 10 seconds is performed is a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed 10 seconds after the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern. Therefore, the prohibition period occurs at a timing of about 10 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the variation pattern in which the variation is accompanied by a reach of 30 seconds is a variation pattern in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed with the removal pattern 30 seconds after the variation display of the decoration pattern is started. A prohibition period will be generated at a timing about 30 seconds after that. As described above, the generation timing of the prohibition period after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol differs depending on the type of the variation pattern, that is, the content of the determination in the variation pattern selection determination processing.

  In the above-described example, the specific image information is displayed when the operation unit 400 is operated during the allowable period. However, after the specific image information is displayed, it is determined based on that the operation unit 400 is further operated. Specific image information may be changed. For example, a character 1601a having a balloon 1601b is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as specific image information based on the operation of the operation unit 400 during the allowable period (FIG. 250 (A)). Thereafter, when the operation unit 400 is further operated, the specific image information is changed to a state in which the character 1601 inflates the balloon 1601b by injecting air into the balloon 1601b (FIG. 250 (B)). The size of the balloon 1601b may be gradually changed according to the operation (by changing from FIG. 250 (A) to FIG. 250 (C) so that the balloon 1601b expands). As described above, not only whether or not specific image information is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit 400, but also the specific image information may be changed stepwise according to the operation of the operation unit 400. . As described above, the specific image information is displayed for a certain period of time. Therefore, when the operation timing of the operation unit 400 is early, for example, whether the specific image information is hidden due to the prohibition period is determined. It is difficult to determine whether the display has been hidden due to the lapse of the period, but when the operation timing of the operation unit 400 is advanced by changing the specific image information stepwise according to the operation of the operation unit 400 However, it becomes easy to determine whether the prohibition period or the prohibition period has been reached due to a change in specific image information, in other words, whether or not the pseudo-run is being performed (the pseudo-run is being continued).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), when the operation unit 400 is operated during the allowable period after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, the specific image information A (for example, the character 1601a and the balloon 1601b in FIG. ) Is displayed. Further, when the operation unit 400 is further operated in this state, the specific image information A is converted into the specific image information B (for example, the character 2601a and the balloon 2601b in FIG. Is gradually changed to specific image information C (for example, a character 2601a and a balloon 2601b in FIG. 250 (C)). On the other hand, after displaying the specific image information A (for example, the character 1601a and the balloon 1601b in FIG. 250A) based on the operation of the operation unit 400 during the allowable period, in the prohibition period immediately before the stop of the variable display, Even if the specific image information A is hidden and the operation unit 400 is operated, the specific image information A does not change stepwise. Note that the specific image information that is hidden due to the prohibition period may be displayed again after the prohibition period without operating the operation unit 400, or the operation unit 400 may be operated after the prohibition period. You may make it display based on that.

  As described above, since the specific image information is changed in accordance with the operation of the operation unit 400 during the allowable period, the change of the specific image information can be enjoyed in addition to the determination of the pseudo-run, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

[31. Jackpot expectation discrimination production]
Even when the operation unit 400 is operated during the permissible period, if a high expectation effect such as super reach is being executed, the high expectation effect ends without changing specific image information. After that, the specific image information may be changed to the specific image information according to the operation of the operation unit 400. In this case, it is determined whether the high expectation effect is being performed according to the specific image information change. It is possible.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 251 (B), specific image information A (for example, characters 2601a and FIG. 250 (A) in FIG. When the high expectation effect is started after the balloon 2601b) is displayed, even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the high expectation effect, the specific image information A is not changed without changing the specific image information A. The display is continued (not limited to displaying the specific image information A as a still image, but the character 1601a may be operated to inject air into the balloon 1601b in accordance with the operation of the operation unit 400. In this case, Is operated so that the character 1601a puts air into the balloon 1601b, but it may be displayed that the balloon 1601b is not inflated.) After the high expectation effect is completed, the specific effect image A may be changed to a display mode (in this example, the specific effect image C) corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 during the execution of the high expectation effect. . As described above, except for a part of the period (prohibition period) during which the decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, the specific image information is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit 400 by the player, and the specific image information is displayed according to the further operation. Can be executed without hindering the production of the high degree of expectation, so that a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game can be suppressed.

  That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays specific image information or changes the specific image information immediately when the operation unit 400 is operated within the allowable period after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol ( A specific pattern information is displayed immediately when the operation unit 400 is operated within the permissible period after the start of the fluctuation display of the decoration pattern and the variation pattern of the low expectation (which can immediately reflect the operation of the operation unit 400). Although the specific image information can be changed or the specific image information can be changed (although the operation of the operation unit 400 can be immediately reflected), if the operation of the operation unit 400 is performed within the execution period of the high expectation effect, The display of the specific image information or the change of the specific image information is prohibited, and the display of the specific image information or the change of the specific image information is performed after the execution period of the high expectation effect (operation Is reflected after the end of the high expectations effect without immediately reflect the operation of knitted 400) comprises a high degree of expectation variation pattern. Therefore, the player who is operating the operation unit 400 can determine whether or not the high expectation effect is produced depending on whether or not the operation of the operation unit 400 is immediately reflected. Can be suppressed.

  Further, a specific sound may be output in association with the display of the specific image information. A sound may be output. When the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the high expectation effect, the character 1601a operates so as to put air into the balloon 1601b, but does not output the specific sound by displaying that the balloon 1601b does not expand. After the high expectation effect is completed, the operation of the operation unit 400 during the execution of the high expectation effect may be reflected to display the balloon 1601b swelled to a size corresponding to the operation and display the balloon 1601b. At the time of inflation, a specific sound such as “shush” may be output. In the above-described example, the specific sound is output in connection with the display of the specific image information.However, without displaying the specific image information or separately from the specific image information, within the allowable period. The specific sound may be output based on the operation of the operation unit 400. For example, a specific sound (for example, “beep”) is output each time the operation unit 400 is operated within the allowable period, and a specific sound is output when the operation unit 400 is operated during execution of the high expectation effect. Instead, the specific sound may be output by reflecting the operation of the operation unit 400 after the end of the high expectation effect. In this case as well, the player operating the operation unit 400 can determine whether or not the high expectation effect is being executed according to the timing at which the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, the prohibition periods are provided at each of the start and the stop of the change display of the decorative symbol, so that even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the prohibition period. If the specific image information is not displayed or the specific sound is not output, or if the specific image information already displayed is hidden, it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is to be ended. become able to. Therefore, even if an effect advantageous to the player or an effect with a high degree of expectation is being performed, or even if the operation unit 400 is operated in a state in which a result (stop symbol) advantageous to the player is displayed, specific image information is not displayed. When no display is made or no specific sound is output, it is predicted that the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern will be a result that is advantageous to the player, and the interest in the game will be improved.

  In the above example, the character 1610a is displayed based on the operation of the operation unit 400, and the display mode of the character 1610a is changed according to the operation of the operation unit 400. It is determined whether or not the effect is a high expectation effect by changing the execution mode (display mode, background color, type of effect sound, volume of sound, LED light emission color, LED light emission color, etc.) of the variable effect being executed according to May be enabled. That is, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the low-expectation effect (including not only the low-expectation reach effect but also the variable effect in which the decorative design is displayed without performing the reach effect). Immediately changing the execution mode of the fluctuation effect, while operating the operation unit 400 during the execution of the high expectation effect, changing the execution mode of the fluctuation effect being executed after the end of the high expectation effect, It may be possible to determine whether the medium fluctuation effect is a high expectation effect effect or a low expectation effect effect.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to determining the degree of expectation of a big hit according to a change in the specific image information. The big hit expectation may be determined according to a change in the brightness (light amount) of the plurality of LEDs provided. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 252 (A) shows a fluctuation pattern in which the decorative pattern is normally changed, and FIG. 252 (B) shows a normal reach effect (a decorative pattern which is displayed in a variably displayed manner in three rows of the left, middle, and right) after the decorative pattern is normally changed. This is a variation pattern for performing the simplest reach effect in which the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol and reach occurs, and then the middle symbol is changed over a predetermined period and then stopped. The variation pattern in which the normal variation is performed as shown in FIG. 252 (A) is a pattern in which the decoration patterns displayed in three rows of left, middle, and right are stopped in the order of left → right → middle, and the reach in which the left and right decoration symbols stop at the same pattern. The variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal variation shown in FIG. 252 (B) is performed does not occur, and the decorative pattern which is variably displayed in the left, middle, and right three columns is varied to change the left and right decoration patterns. After stopping the decorative symbol with the same symbol (after performing the normal fluctuation), a normal reach effect in which the internal decorative symbol is varied over a predetermined period of time is performed, and the decorative symbol in the middle is the same symbol as the left and right decorative symbols. It is a big hit when stopped, or a decorative pattern in the middle is stopped at a pattern different from the left and right decorative symbols, and it becomes a loss. That is, the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after performing the normal fluctuation in FIG. 252 (B) is set to have a higher jackpot expectation degree than the fluctuation pattern in which the normal fluctuation in FIG. 252 (A) is performed. The fluctuation pattern of performing the normal fluctuation in FIG. 252 (A) and the fluctuation pattern of performing the normal reach production after performing the normal fluctuation in FIG. 252 (B) are performed in the same manner until the normal reach production is performed. It is difficult to determine from the display content of the display device 1600.

  Then, in the variation pattern of performing the normal variation shown in FIG. 252 (A), a plurality of effect sounds and a plurality of door frames 5 and a plurality of decoration boards provided on the game board 4 are provided according to the operation of the operation unit 400 during the normal variation of the decoration pattern. When the brightness (light amount) of the LED is adjusted, the result of the volume adjustment and the result of the brightness adjustment are immediately reflected, and the speaker and door frame 5 accommodated in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 at the adjusted volume. And a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 emit light with the adjusted brightness. On the other hand, in the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal variation of FIG. 252 (B) is performed, in other words, during the normal variation of the decorative symbol, in other words, before the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same symbol and reach occurs. Even if the production sound and the brightness (light amount) of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are adjusted in accordance with the operation of the operation unit 400, the result of the volume adjustment and the result of the brightness adjustment are immediately made. Without the reflection, after the occurrence of the reach, that is, when the normal reach production is started, the sound produced by the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 at the adjusted volume is reflected. Is output, and a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 emit light at the adjusted luminance.

  That is, in the fluctuation pattern in which the normal fluctuation of FIG. 252 (A) is performed, the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation of the decoration symbol, and the effect sound and the plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are provided. When the brightness (light amount) is adjusted, the output of the production sound at the adjusted volume, and the emission control of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 at the adjusted brightness are performed. On the other hand, in the variation pattern in which the normal reach is performed after the normal variation shown in FIG. 252 (B) is performed, the decoration pattern is normally changed (the left and right decoration symbols are the same pattern). Even if the operation unit 400 is operated before the stop display and the reach occurs), the volume of the production sound and the brightness (light amount) of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are adjusted. , Volume after adjustment And the emission control of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with the adjusted brightness is not enabled by the operation timing of the operation unit 400. It becomes possible at a later timing (when normal fluctuation ends and normal reach production starts). As described above, by changing the timing of reflecting the result (the result of the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment) according to the operation of the operation unit 400, the fluctuation pattern of performing the normal fluctuation of FIG. 252, or a fluctuation pattern for performing a normal reach effect after performing the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 252 (B) having a higher jackpot expectation than the fluctuation pattern, and further operates during the normal fluctuation. When the volume of the production sound and the brightness (light amount) of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are adjusted by operating the unit 400, the adjusted volume is delayed at a timing later than the operation timing. This is for controlling the output of the production sound and the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with the adjusted brightness. When a certain normal reach effect is started, the effect sound is output at the adjusted volume by reflecting the result according to the operation of the operation unit 400, and each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 at the adjusted brightness. , The normal reach effect can be executed at the volume and brightness desired by the player.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern for performing the normal fluctuation in FIG. It is difficult to determine whether or not a fluctuation pattern for performing a normal reach effect after performing the normal fluctuation of (B) is executed. For this reason, only the player who operated the operation unit 400 during the normal fluctuation performs the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 252 (B) at an early stage (before the reach occurs) and then performs the fluctuation pattern of performing the normal reach effect. Can be determined. Whether the fluctuation pattern for performing the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 252 (A) is executed or the fluctuation pattern for performing the normal reach effect after performing the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 252 (B) is also determined during the normal fluctuation. The display content of the effect display device 1600 may be made different so that it can be determined. In this case, as a fluctuation pattern for performing a normal reach effect after performing the normal fluctuation, a result according to the operation of the operation unit 400 when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation (result of volume adjustment or luminance adjustment). Is reflected at the operation timing of the operation unit 400 (sound output is possible at the adjusted volume or light emission is controlled at the adjusted brightness), and when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation. The result (the result of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment) according to the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected later (when the normal fluctuation ends and the normal reach effect is started) later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400 (after adjustment). (A sound output can be performed at a sound volume or light emission control is performed at the adjusted brightness).

  In addition, as a fluctuation pattern for performing a normal fluctuation with a low expectation, a result (a result of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment) according to the operation of the operation unit 400 when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation is used as the fluctuation pattern. A first normal variation pattern to be reflected at the operation timing (to enable sound output at the adjusted volume or to perform light emission control at the adjusted brightness) and an operation unit 400 when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal variation. (Result of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment) is reflected later (when or after the end of the normal fluctuation) than the operation timing of the operation unit 400 (the sound can be output at the adjusted volume or the like). , The light emission is controlled by the adjusted brightness). Further, the display contents of the effect display device 1600 may be made different so that it is possible to determine which of the first normal fluctuation pattern and the second normal fluctuation pattern is being executed. In this case, 252 (B), the normal fluctuation pattern in which the normal fluctuation is performed after the normal fluctuation pattern is performed and the display contents of the normal fluctuation are similar to each other. After performing the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 252 (B), it may be difficult to determine whether the pattern is a fluctuation pattern for performing a normal reach effect. That is, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation and the result corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400, a fluctuation occurs in which a reach occurs and a normal reach effect is performed. Even if the result according to the operation of the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation and is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400, the reach does not occur and the normal reach effect is not performed. A variation pattern that becomes a deviation may be provided. In this case, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation and the result corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400, the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation. Then, the rate of occurrence of reach may be higher than the case where the result according to the operation of the operation unit 400 is counter-reflected at the operation timing of the operation unit 400.

  In addition, before and after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern (for example, about 1 second from the reception of the fluctuation pattern command until about 0.5 seconds elapse after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern), and stop (fixed stop (fixed display) ), End of the fluctuation effect) Immediately (from the reception of the special figure 1 tuning effect ending command or the special figure 2 tuning effect ending command to the lapse of several seconds (for example, about 0.5 seconds) after confirmation display of the decorative pattern) Seconds or the like) may be a prohibition period during which reception of an operation of the operation unit 400 is prohibited. By providing such a prohibition period, it is possible to recognize that the variable display of the decorative symbol is started or started, or that the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped or stopped.

  In the above example, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the normal fluctuation is being performed to adjust the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs, the operation unit 400 operates after the adjustment at the operation timing. Either control the light emission of a plurality of LEDs with the output of the production sound at the volume or the adjusted brightness, or output the production sound at the adjusted volume by delaying the operation timing of the operation unit 400 and adjust the brightness at the adjusted brightness. The variation pattern (FIG. 252 (A)) in which the normal variation with a low degree of expectation is performed, or the variation pattern in which the normal variation with a high degree of expectation is higher than the variation pattern (FIG. 252 (B)), but the operation unit 400 is operated during a specific period of the period during which the normal fluctuation is performed, and the volume of the production sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs are adjusted. A variation pattern (FIG. 252 (A)) in which the output of the effect sound at the adjusted volume or the timing of performing the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs with the adjusted brightness is changed only when the normal variation with low expectation is performed. )) Or a fluctuation pattern (FIG. 252 (B)) in which a normal fluctuation having a higher degree of expectation than the fluctuation pattern is performed. Thus, it is possible to cause the operation unit 400 to be operated during a specific period. In this case, the specific period may be identified by changing the display content of the effect display device 1600 or the like. In this case, the operation unit 400 is provided to the player during the specific period. The operation unit 400 can be operated and useless operation of the operation unit 400 can be suppressed.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machines (game machines)
2 outer frame 3 main body frame 4 game board 5 door frame 192 handle relay terminal plate 400 operation unit (operation unit)
470 Upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device 650 Hitting and launching device 740 Award ball device 784 External terminal board 851 Power supply board 860a Operation switch (error clearing section)
860b Error LED display 1100 Game area 1900 Game board side liquid crystal display 4100 Main control board (game control board, game control unit, special game state generating means)
4100a Main control MPU
4110 Payout control board (payout control board, payout control unit)
4120 payout control unit 4120a payout control MPU
4140 peripheral control board (effect control unit, effect execution means, effect determination means, effect storage means, effect generation information selecting means, effect content selecting means, effect selection information changing means, effect execution timing determining means, effect reference information selecting means, Direction selection means)
4150 Peripheral control unit 4160 Liquid crystal and sound control unit 4165 RTC control unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and when the result of the lottery is a hit, is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a specific gaming state more advantageous to a player than a normal gaming state,
Effect display means capable of displaying effect information,
Display control means for performing a variable effect by controlling the display of the effect display means,
Light emission control means for controlling the light emission means in relation to the fluctuation effect,
Brightness adjusting means capable of adjusting the brightness of the light emitting means based on the operation of the operating means,
When the operating means is operated during the fluctuation effect, the light whose emission is controlled by the brightness adjusted by the brightness adjusting means according to the operation is made visible at the operation timing of the operating means. ,
When the operating means is operated during the fluctuation effect, the light whose emission is controlled by the brightness adjusted by the brightness adjusting means according to the operation is not made visible at the operation timing of the operating means. A gaming machine, characterized in that it includes: timing during a fluctuation effect in which the operation of the operation means is performed, and making the visual recognition possible at a timing later than the operation timing.